munotes®

Political Science II Notes | B.A. LL.B. (Five Year Course) Semester 3 | Mumbai University | munotes

Official Notes by munotes.in

Political Science II

B.A. LL.B. (FIVE YEAR COURSE) · SEMESTER 3

Strictly as per the revised CBCS syllabus of the University of Mumbai

For students of the University of Mumbai and all its affiliated law colleges

Open the book ↓

Political Science II

Copyright © 2026 munotes.in. All rights reserved.

Written and first published by munotes.in, 2026.

This book is free for individual students to read at munotes.in. No part of it may be reproduced, distributed, stored, translated or used for institutional or classroom purposes in any form without a prior written licence from munotes.in.

Licensing and permissions: contact@munotes.in

The text of statutes and of judgments reproduced in this book is in the public domain under section 52(1)(q) of the Copyright Act 1957. The commentary, arrangement, examples and questions are the original work of munotes.in.

munotes is an independent, student-run platform. It is not affiliated with, endorsed by, or officially connected to the University of Mumbai. Course names and university references describe the students and syllabus the material relates to.

munotes.in

Contents

Module I Power, Authority and Legitimacy

  1. What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It 1
  2. The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It 6
  3. Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused 11
  4. How Political Power Is Actually Exercised 15
  5. The Role of the Government in Decision Making 19
  6. External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power 23
  7. Interest Groups and Pressure Groups 27
  8. Lobbying as a Technique 32
  9. Lobbying in India and in the United States 37
  10. The Elite Theory of Power 43
  11. The Marxist Theory of Power 49
  12. The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared 55
  13. What Authority Is 60
  14. The Features of Authority 65
  15. De Jure and De Facto Authority 69
  16. Max Weber's Classification of Authority 74
  17. Traditional Authority 78
  18. Charismatic Authority 83
  19. Legal Rational Authority 88
  20. The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised 93
  21. Power and Authority Compared 98
  22. Legitimacy: The Concept 102
  23. The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power 107

Module II Political Obligation - State Authority and Citizen

  1. What Political Obligation Is 112
  2. The Command and Obedience Relationship 117
  3. Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation 122
  4. D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation 127
  5. The Theories of Political Obligation: A Map 132
  6. The Divine Right Theory of Kings 136
  7. The Social Contract and Consent Theory 141
  8. Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty 146
  9. Locke: The Contract as a Trust 152
  10. Rousseau: The General Will 157
  11. Consent Theory and Its Critics 162
  12. The Theory of Force 167
  13. The Theory of Prescriptive Possession 172
  14. Karl Marx on Political Obligation 177
  15. What an Unjust Law Is 183
  16. The Right to Resistance and Dissent 189
  17. T. H. Green on Resistance 195
  18. Harold Laski on Resistance 200
  19. M. K. Gandhi on Resistance 206
  20. Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance 211
  21. Nelson Mandela on Resistance 217
  22. Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance 223
  23. Punishment: Why the State Does It at All 229
  24. Kant's Retributivism 234
  25. Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment 240
  26. The Justification of Punishment 246
  27. The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches 252
  28. Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment 258
  29. Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System 265
  30. Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment 270
  31. Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States 275
  32. Black Lives Matter: A Case Study 281

Module III Political Ideologies

  1. What a Political Ideology Is 287
  2. Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles 292
  3. Classical and Modern Liberalism 297
  4. The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty 302
  5. Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against 308
  6. J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle 314
  7. Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution 320
  8. Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles 325
  9. Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus 330
  10. J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism 336
  11. Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against 342
  12. Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism 348
  13. Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles 354
  14. The Kinds of Socialism 359
  15. Socialism: The Arguments For and Against 364
  16. Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution 369
  17. Communism: The Basic Principles 375
  18. An Evaluation of Communism 381
  19. Socialism and Communism Compared 386
  20. Gandhism and Communism Compared 391

Module IV Indian Democracy at Work

  1. What a Political Party Is 397
  2. Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished 402
  3. The Significance of Political Parties in India 407
  4. The Features of Political Parties in India 412
  5. Coalition Politics in India 417
  6. The Future of the Multi-Party System in India 422
  7. Democracy and the Consent of the Governed 427
  8. The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy 432
  9. The Ethical Decay of Democracy 437
  10. The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy 442
  11. The New Challenges to Indian Democracy 448
  12. Gandhian Gram Swaraj 454
  13. Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation 459
  14. Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments 464
  15. The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats 470
  16. The 74th Amendment: Municipalities 477
  17. The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy 484
  18. Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits 491
  19. Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits 499
munotes.in

Module I

Power, Authority and Legitimacy

munotes.in

Chapter One

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

Syllabus topic 1.1, "Power as a concept in Political Science"; 1.1.1, "Meaning and definitions of Power"

In one line

Power is the ability to make somebody do what you want, even when they would rather not.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: power is the capacity of a person or a group to affect the behaviour of another person or group in a way the second would not have chosen, whether by force, by the threat of force, by reward, by persuasion or by control of the situation in which the second has to act.

Why political science begins here

Every other idea in this subject is built out of this one. Authority is power that people accept as rightful. Legitimacy is the belief that makes them accept it. Political obligation is the duty that belief is supposed to produce. Resistance is what happens when the belief fails. An ideology is an argument about who should have power and for what. Democracy is one answer to the question of who should hold it. Take power out and the syllabus has nothing left standing.

It also explains why a law student is taught this at all. Law is the most organised form of power a society possesses. A statute is a command that changes what millions of people may lawfully do. A decree is an order backed by the machinery of the state. A lawyer who does not understand power understands only the words on the face of the instrument, and not what the instrument is.

The words you need before we start

These six words are used on every page that follows, and they are not interchangeable. Fix them now.

The state. A community of people occupying a definite territory, having a government that is obeyed by the bulk of that community, and independent of the control of any other state. Four elements, and all four are required: population, territory, government and sovereignty. India is a state. The Republic of India came into existence on 26 January 1950; the territory, the people and something recognisable as government existed long before.

Government. The machinery through which the state acts: the legislature that makes law, the executive that carries it out, and the judiciary that applies it to disputes. The state is permanent and abstract; a government is temporary and concrete. Governments in India change every few years and the state does not change with them. Confusing the two is the commonest first-year error in this subject.

Sovereignty. The supreme law-making power within a territory, subject to no higher legal authority. Internal sovereignty is supremacy over everybody inside; external sovereignty is independence of everybody outside.

Political system. Everything that takes part in the making of binding decisions for a society, which is wider than the government: parties, interest groups, the press, the courts, the electorate, and the rules by which they all operate.

munotes.in1

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

Authority. Power that those subject to it accept as rightful. This gets its own chapter, and the difference between power and authority is examined directly.

Legitimacy. The quality that makes people believe an authority is entitled to be obeyed.

What power actually is

The meaning of power, once the ordinary uses of the word are cleared away, is narrower and stranger than a beginner expects. Four things are true of it, and each one contradicts something the word suggests in daily speech.

It is a relationship, not a possession

The ordinary way of speaking hides this. We say a person "has power", as though power were a thing kept in a cupboard. It is not. Power exists only between people. A Collector has power over the residents of the district and none at all over a Collector in another state. A teacher has power in the classroom and none in the market. The correct question is never "does he have power?" but "power over whom, in what, and how much?".

Four things follow, and each one is worth marks in an answer.

  1. Power is relational. It requires at least two parties, one who exercises and one over whom it is exercised.
  2. Power is situational. It changes with the setting. A man who commands a battalion may be ignored at home.
  3. Power is a matter of degree. It is not held or not held; it is held over some matters and not others, and more over some people than others.
  4. Power is dynamic. It shifts. Yesterday's ruling party is today's opposition.

It works even when nobody does anything

This is the point students miss, and examiners like it. Power is a capacity, not an event. A police officer standing on a street corner is exercising power over every driver who slows down on seeing them, and the officer has done nothing at all. The Income Tax Department exercises power over crores of people who file returns and are never audited. If power had to be used to exist, the most powerful person in a society would be the one who gave the most orders, which is plainly false: the powerful rarely need to.

Its forms, from the crudest to the subtlest

Force. Physically making someone do something, or preventing them. A prisoner carried into a cell is not obeying; they are being moved.

Coercion. The threat of harm. "Pay the tax or you will be prosecuted." The person still chooses, but the alternatives have been arranged so that only one is bearable.

Inducement. The offer of reward. A subsidy, a licence, a contract.

munotes.in2

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

Persuasion. Getting somebody to want what you want, by argument or appeal.

Manipulation. Getting somebody to want what you want without their knowing that you did it, and often without their knowing there was anything to decide.

Control of the agenda. Deciding what will be discussed at all, which is the subject of the next chapter.

A worked example

Ramesh runs a small printing press in a municipal ward. The municipality is about to widen the road and the widening will take four feet of his frontage.

Force is the bulldozer arriving with a police escort. It ends the matter, and it is the form of power the municipality least wants to use, because it is expensive, slow and unpopular.

Coercion is the notice under the municipal Act telling him that if he does not remove the structure within fifteen days it will be removed at his cost. Ramesh still decides. He decides under a threat.

Inducement is the offer of an alternative plot at a concessional rate. His behaviour is being changed by an offer rather than a threat.

Persuasion is the ward officer explaining that the widening will bring customers past his shop. If it works, Ramesh removes the structure himself and thinks it was his idea.

Manipulation is the officer telling him, untruthfully, that every other shopkeeper has already agreed. He acts freely on a false picture of the world.

Control of the agenda is the most powerful move of all, and it is invisible. The municipality decided, two years earlier and in a meeting Ramesh never heard of, that this road would be widened and the parallel road would not. By the time Ramesh is consulted, the only question left is how, not whether. Nobody coerced him. The decision that mattered was taken where he was not present.

Notice which form did the most work and attracted the least attention. That is the whole reason political scientists insist that power is more than force.

Distinctions that carry marks

PowerForceInfluenceAuthority
What it isCapacity to affect another's behaviourPhysical application of harm or restraintAbility to affect another's behaviour without any sanctionPower accepted as rightful
Does the other party choose?Usually yes, under pressureNo, the body is simply movedYes, freelyYes, and willingly
Rests onAny basis at allPhysical superiorityReputation, expertise, affection, argumentBelief in the right to command
ExampleA tax noticeAn arrestAn editorial that changes a minister's mindA judge's order
If it failsThe holder may escalateNothing is left to escalate toNothing follows; there was no sanctionThe system is in a legitimacy crisis
munotes.in3

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

What power is NOT

Power is not the same as force. Force is one way of exercising power, and the least efficient. A state that has to use force on its citizens every day is a weak state, not a strong one. The strong state is the one whose citizens comply without anyone being touched.

Power is not the same as authority. A dacoit who takes your money at gunpoint has power over you. A tax officer who takes it under a statute has authority. Both take the money; only one of them can expect you to think they were entitled to. This is the distinction the whole of Module I is built on.

Power is not always bad. A hospital superintendent who orders an operating theatre cleared has power, and the exercise of it saves a life. Political science studies power as a fact, not as an accusation.

Power is not the same as its holder's intentions. A rule made for one purpose may reshape behaviour in another. The effect of power is measured in what changes, not in what was meant.

Quick revision

  1. Power is the capacity to affect another's behaviour in a way that other would not have chosen. Weber's own definition, in the next chapter, is the one to quote.
  2. It is a relationship, not a possession: relational, situational, a matter of degree, and dynamic.
  3. It is a capacity, so it operates without being used. The most powerful rarely give orders.
  4. Six forms, crudest to subtlest: force, coercion, inducement, persuasion, manipulation, control of the agenda.
  5. State has four elements: population, territory, government, sovereignty. Government is the machinery; the state is permanent, a government is not.
  6. Power against authority: the dacoit and the tax officer both take the money. Only one is entitled to.

Test yourself

1. Define power and give its four characteristics. Power is the capacity of a person or group to affect the behaviour of another in a way the second would not have chosen, whatever the basis of that capacity. It is relational, since it exists only between parties; situational, since it varies with the setting; a matter of degree, since it is held over some matters and not others; and dynamic, since it shifts over time.

2. "The most powerful people give the fewest orders." Explain. Power is a capacity, not an event. It works through anticipated reactions: people adjust their behaviour to what they expect the powerful to want, so the order never has to be given. A ruler who must issue and enforce commands constantly is meeting resistance, which is evidence of weakness. Anticipated compliance is the ordinary condition of stable power.

3. Distinguish power from force with an example. Force is the physical application of harm or restraint, and it removes choice altogether. Power is wider: it includes the threat of force, reward, persuasion, manipulation and control of the agenda, all of which leave the subject choosing under pressure. A prisoner carried bodily into a cell is subject to force; a shopkeeper who removes an encroachment on receiving a notice is subject to power.

munotes.in4

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

4. Why must a law student study power? Law is the most organised form of power a society possesses. A statute changes what millions may lawfully do and a decree is an order backed by the state's machinery. A lawyer who reads only the words of an instrument, and does not ask who is being made to do what and by what means, has understood the text and not the thing.

5. Distinguish the state from the government. The state is a community occupying a definite territory, with a government obeyed by the bulk of it and independent of external control; its four elements are population, territory, government and sovereignty. The government is only the machinery through which the state acts. The state is permanent and abstract, a government is temporary and concrete, and a change of government leaves the state untouched.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in5

Chapter Two

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

Syllabus topic 1.1.1, "Meaning and definitions of Power"

In one line

There is no single agreed definition of power, and the disagreements between the definitions are not verbal: each one puts the searchlight on a different part of political life, and a student who knows three definitions can answer a question three ways.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: political scientists have defined power variously as the probability of carrying out one's own will against resistance (Weber), as the production of intended effects (Russell), as participation in the making of decisions (Lasswell and Kaplan), and as the ability to make another do something they would not otherwise do (Dahl). Bachrach and Baratz added that power also operates by keeping issues off the agenda altogether, which they called the second face of power.

Why the definitions differ

An answer that simply lists definitions gets few marks. What gets marks is knowing why the list is a list. Each definition is built around the case its author found most important.

Weber was writing a general sociology and wanted a definition wide enough to cover a landlord, a bishop and an army. Russell was writing after the First World War and was interested in the deliberate exercise of will. Lasswell and Kaplan, and later Dahl, were American political scientists who wanted a definition they could measure: something you could go and observe in a city council. Bachrach and Baratz were answering Dahl, and their objection was that a definition you can measure will only find the power that shows.

The definitions, one at a time

Max Weber

Weber's is the definition to quote if you quote only one, because everything else in this module descends from it. In section 16 of the first part of Wirtschaft und Gesellschaft he writes that Macht means every chance, within a social relationship, of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, no matter what that chance rests on. The words are his; the English is our rendering.

Three things in that sentence do the work.

"Every chance." Weber says jede Chance, a probability, not an act. Power is the likelihood of prevailing, which is why it exists without being used.

"Even against resistance." The test case of power is opposition. Where there is no resistance there is nothing to measure, which is why this definition is easy to state and hard to apply.

"No matter what that chance rests on." Weber immediately adds that the concept of power is, in sociological terms, amorphous: any quality of a person and any configuration of circumstances may put someone in a position to prevail. Money, office, beauty, knowledge, a gun, a caste, a majority in a legislature. This is not vagueness; it is the point. Power has no single source.

munotes.in6

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

In the same passage Weber defines two narrower terms that examiners like, because students confuse all three. Herrschaft, which we render as domination or authority, is the chance of finding obedience for a command of a given content among specifiable persons. Disziplin, discipline, is the chance of finding prompt, automatic and unthinking obedience among a specifiable number of people, by force of habit. Power is the widest, authority is narrower, discipline is narrowest.

Bertrand Russell

Russell defined power as the production of intended effects. It is the shortest definition in the field and its virtue is that it links power to purpose: an earthquake produces enormous effects and has no power, because it intends nothing.

Its weakness is the mirror image. A great deal of power produces effects nobody intended. A change in the rate of customs duty may destroy an industry the minister never thought about. On Russell's definition that is not an exercise of power at all, which most political scientists find too narrow.

Harold Lasswell and Abraham Kaplan

They defined power as participation in the making of decisions, adding that the exercise of power involves severe sanctions for non-compliance. This is the definition that made power researchable: to find out who has power in a town, find out who takes part in decisions.

Its weakness is what Bachrach and Baratz built a career on. It can only find power in the decisions that were actually taken.

Robert Dahl

Dahl's formulation is the most quoted in the English-speaking world: A has power over B to the extent that A can get B to do something that B would not otherwise do. It is precise, it is comparative, and it can be tested. You watch a decision, you see who wanted what, you see who prevailed.

Its weakness is that it assumes the conflict is visible and that the issue got as far as being decided.

R. H. Tawney

Tawney defined power as the capacity of an individual or group to modify the conduct of other individuals or groups in the manner which he desires, and added that it may be limited by the resistance he encounters. His contribution to an answer is the emphasis on power as a capacity that is always relative to a countervailing capacity.

The three faces of power

This is the framework that makes a good answer, and MU's own reading list points at the middle one.

The first face: who wins the argument

The first face is Dahl's. Power is the ability to prevail in a decision when there is an open conflict of preferences. To study it, take a decision that was made, find the participants, find what each wanted, and see whose preference carried.

munotes.in7

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

Its blind spot. It sees only decisions that were made.

The second face: who decides what gets discussed

Peter Bachrach and Morton Baratz argued in 1962 that power has a second face: the ability to keep an issue from ever reaching the agenda. They called this non-decision making. A grievance that is never articulated, or is articulated and never put on the list, has been defeated as thoroughly as one that is put to the vote and lost, and more cheaply, because the losers may never know a contest occurred.

The apparatus that does this is the mobilisation of bias: the settled procedures, rules, rituals and expectations of an institution, which make some kinds of demand easy to raise and others almost impossible. A rule that a matter can be tabled only by a member, in a body that has no member from the affected group, is a mobilisation of bias.

Its blind spot. It still assumes there is a grievance somewhere, felt by somebody.

The third face: who shapes what people want

Steven Lukes argued in 1974 that the most effective and insidious use of power is to prevent the grievance from arising at all, by shaping perceptions and preferences so that people accept their situation as natural, unchangeable or divinely ordained. On this view there may be power at work even where there is no conflict and no complaint, and the absence of complaint proves nothing.

Its blind spot. If power can operate with no observable conflict, it is very hard to prove that it did, and critics say the third face makes power unfalsifiable.

A worked example

A textile mill on the edge of a city discharges effluent into a creek. Three hundred families live along it.

First face. The municipal corporation debates a resolution requiring a treatment plant. The mill's supporters vote it down eighteen to twelve. The mill has exercised power in the first face: an open conflict, a visible defeat.

Second face. The following year the residents' association drafts a fresh resolution. The standing committee rules that effluent is a state pollution board subject and outside the corporation's competence, so the resolution is never tabled. No vote is taken and no defeat is recorded. The mill's power has been exercised more efficiently than before, and the minutes of the corporation show nothing at all.

Third face. Ten years pass. The families along the creek have always lived beside a dirty creek, as their parents did. Nobody drafts a resolution because nobody regards the state of the creek as a thing that could be otherwise. There is no conflict, no non-decision and no record. If you asked the residents whether anybody had power over them they would say no.

munotes.in8

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

An examiner asking "discuss the definitions of power" is asking whether you can see all three of those and say which definition catches which.

Distinctions that carry marks

First faceSecond faceThird face
Associated withDahlBachrach and BaratzLukes
Power isPrevailing in a decisionKeeping issues off the agendaShaping what people want
Conflict isOpen and observableSuppressed but realLatent, and may be invisible
Method of studyWatch decisionsWatch what never gets decidedAsk what interests are being frustrated
Main criticismSees only visible conflictStill needs a felt grievanceHard or impossible to prove

What these definitions are NOT

They are not rival descriptions of the same fact. They are searchlights pointed at different parts of the field. An answer that says "Dahl was wrong and Lukes was right" has misunderstood the argument. Dahl's definition is correct about the thing it measures.

"Definitions of power" is not an invitation to list names. Every definition in an answer should be followed by what it lets you see and what it hides.

Weber's definition is not a definition of authority. Weber gives three definitions in one passage and they are not the same. Using Macht where you mean Herrschaft is the error the next chapters exist to prevent.

Quick revision

  1. Weber: power is every chance of carrying through one's own will within a social relationship even against resistance, whatever that chance rests on. In the same passage: Herrschaft is the chance of obedience to a command, Disziplin is the chance of automatic obedience.
  2. Russell: the production of intended effects. Lasswell and Kaplan: participation in the making of decisions. Dahl: A gets B to do what B would not otherwise do. Tawney: capacity to modify others' conduct in the manner desired.
  3. First face, Dahl: winning open conflicts.
  4. Second face, Bachrach and Baratz 1962: non-decision making, and the mobilisation of bias.
  5. Third face, Lukes 1974: shaping preferences so that no grievance arises.
  6. Each definition's weakness is the next definition's reason for existing. That sentence is what turns a list into an answer.

Test yourself

1. State Weber's definition of power and explain its three key elements. Power means every chance, within a social relationship, of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, whatever that chance may rest on. "Every chance" makes power a probability rather than an act, so it exists without being exercised. "Even against resistance" makes opposition the test case. "Whatever it rests on" makes the concept deliberately amorphous: Weber says any human quality and any configuration of circumstances may confer it, so power has no single source.

munotes.in9

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

2. What did Bachrach and Baratz add to Dahl's account? They argued that power has a second face. Besides prevailing in decisions that are actually taken, power operates by preventing issues from reaching the agenda at all, which they called non-decision making. The instrument is the mobilisation of bias, the settled rules and procedures of an institution that make some demands easy to raise and others practically impossible. A grievance suppressed before it is tabled has been defeated more cheaply than one that is voted down.

3. Why is Russell's definition thought too narrow? Russell defines power as the production of intended effects, which usefully separates power from a natural force such as an earthquake. But much power produces effects nobody intended: a change in a duty may ruin an industry the minister never considered. On Russell's definition that is not an exercise of power at all, and most political scientists think a definition should capture it.

4. Give a worked illustration of the three faces of power. A mill pollutes a creek. In the first face, a resolution requiring treatment is tabled and voted down: open conflict, visible defeat. In the second face, the next resolution is ruled out of order as beyond the body's competence and is never tabled: no vote, no record, the same result more cheaply. In the third face, years later nobody drafts a resolution because a dirty creek has come to seem the natural state of things: no conflict, no grievance, and nothing at all in the minutes.

5. What is the main criticism of the third face of power? That it cannot be proved. If power can operate where there is no observable conflict and no complaint, then any state of contentment can be attributed to power, and the claim cannot be tested against evidence. Defenders answer that the difficulty of proof is not a reason to deny that the thing exists, and that latent conflict can be argued for by showing what people would want under conditions of relative autonomy.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in10

Chapter Three

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

Syllabus topic 1.1.1, "Meaning and definitions of Power"

In one line

Power, force, coercion, influence, authority, manipulation and control are seven different things, and the examiner's favourite question is whether you can tell them apart.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: power is the general capacity to affect the behaviour of others; force is the physical application of harm or restraint; coercion is the threat of it; influence is the ability to affect behaviour without any sanction at all; authority is power accepted as rightful; manipulation is influence exercised without the subject's knowledge; and control is power so complete that the subject's compliance is habitual.

Why the words have to be kept apart

Ordinary speech treats them as synonyms. A newspaper will say a minister is "powerful", "influential" and "an authority on the subject" in one paragraph and mean roughly the same thing three times. Political science cannot afford that, for a reason that becomes obvious in Module II.

The whole question of political obligation is: why should anybody obey? If power and authority were the same word, the question would answer itself, because obedience would be nothing but the effect of superior strength, and there would be no such thing as an unjust law to disobey. Every argument in this book about resistance, dissent and satyagraha depends on the distinction between the officer who is entitled to give you an order and the man who is merely able to enforce one.

The seven, one at a time

Power

The genus. Everything else on this list is a species of it, an ingredient of it, or its limiting case. Power is the capacity to affect another's behaviour in a way that other would not have chosen, whatever the capacity rests on.

Force

The physical application of harm or restraint to a person or a thing. Its distinguishing feature is that the subject does not choose. When four constables carry a protester off a road, the protester is not obeying, complying or submitting; the protester is being moved. That is why force is the crudest form of power and, oddly, the weakest evidence of it.

Force is also self-limiting. It has to be applied to each person separately, it costs money and manpower, and it produces resentment that raises the cost of the next application. A government that must use force routinely is not demonstrating strength; it is demonstrating that everything cheaper has failed.

Coercion

The threat of force or of some other serious harm. The subject still chooses, but the alternatives have been arranged so that only one is bearable. "Vacate the premises or be evicted" is coercion. "Pay the penalty or be prosecuted" is coercion.

The distinction from force matters in law as well as in political theory. A confession obtained by beating is obtained by force; a confession obtained by telling a suspect his brother will be arrested is obtained by coercion. Indian criminal law treats both as vitiating consent, but they are not the same fact and are not proved by the same evidence.

munotes.in11

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

Inducement

The offer of a benefit. It is the mirror image of coercion, and the two are often confused because both change behaviour by rearranging the alternatives. The test is the baseline: coercion threatens to make you worse off than you would have been; inducement offers to make you better off. A subsidy for installing effluent treatment is inducement. A penalty for not installing it is coercion. The two may produce identical behaviour and are morally very different, which is why governments prefer the first when they can afford it.

Influence

The ability to affect another's behaviour without any sanction at all, positive or negative. A retired judge whose opinion changes a minister's mind has influence. An editorial that changes a policy has influence. A teacher whose student takes up a subject has influence.

Two features distinguish it. First, there is nothing to fall back on: if the influence fails, nothing follows, because there was never a threat or an offer. Second, influence usually operates through the subject's own reasoning: the person is persuaded, and then does the thing because they now want to.

Influence and power overlap and are not the same. Every exercise of influence is an exercise of power in the wide Weberian sense, because the subject's behaviour was affected. Not every exercise of power is influence, because most power carries a sanction.

Manipulation

Influence exercised without the subject knowing that it is being exercised, or on a false picture of the facts. A minister who leaks a selective statistic to a newspaper so that a policy looks inevitable is manipulating. The subject acts freely, and would have acted differently had they known.

Manipulation is the hardest of these to detect and the easiest to deny, which is why it is central to the second and third faces of power.

Authority

Power that those subject to it accept as rightful. The authority relationship has a feature none of the others has: the subject obeys because of who gave the order, and not because of what the order says or what will happen if it is disobeyed. A litigant who obeys a decree they think mistaken is obeying an authority.

Control

Power so complete and so settled that compliance no longer requires anything at all: no force, no threat, no argument. Weber's Disziplin, the chance of prompt and automatic obedience by force of habit, is the sociologist's name for it. A well-run army in peacetime is the standard example.

munotes.in12

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

The distinctions table

Rests onDoes the subject choose?Does the subject know?If it fails
ForcePhysical superiorityNoYesNothing is left; force is the last resort
CoercionA credible threatYes, under duressYesThe threat must be carried out or abandoned
InducementA resource to offerYesYesThe offer is raised or withdrawn
InfluenceReputation, argument, affectionYes, freelyYesNothing follows; there was no sanction
ManipulationControl of informationYes, but on false premisesNoIt is exposed, and the influence is destroyed
AuthorityBelief that the holder is entitledYes, willinglyYesThe system faces a legitimacy crisis
ControlSettled habitCompliance is not deliberatedBarelyIt reverts to authority or coercion

A worked example

An Assistant Commissioner of Police must clear a road blocked by a protest of two hundred people.

She begins with authority: she reads out the order under which the assembly has been prohibited and asks the crowd to disperse. Fifty leave. They obey because a police officer, acting under an order, told them to, and they think she is entitled to.

She uses influence on the organisers: she points out that the person whose grievance they are pressing has an appointment with the Collector that afternoon, and that the road blockade will make that meeting harder. Another eighty leave. Nothing was threatened; they were persuaded.

She uses coercion on the remainder: she announces that anybody still on the road in ten minutes will be arrested and charged. Sixty leave. They still chose; they chose under a threat.

The last ten sit down and lock arms. She uses force: they are lifted into a van. Nobody is obeying anything now; they are being carried.

Read the sequence backwards and you have the whole of Module I. The cheapest, fastest and most complete compliance came from authority, and it worked on the largest group. Force worked on the smallest group and cost the most. And if you asked which of the four was the greatest exercise of power, the answer is the first, which looked like nothing at all.

What these are NOT

Force is not the paradigm of power. Students reach for the gun because it is vivid. It is the least common and least effective form.

Influence is not weak power. It is a different relation, not a smaller quantity of the same one. A newspaper columnist may change more behaviour than an inspector.

Authority is not merely legal authority. A parent, a guru and a senior counsel all exercise authority, and none of them holds an office under a statute. Legal authority is one species.

munotes.in13

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

Manipulation is not the same as persuasion. Persuasion gives the subject reasons they can examine; manipulation withholds or falsifies them. The moral difference between the two is the whole basis of the law on misrepresentation.

Quick revision

  1. Power is the genus; the rest are species, ingredients or limiting cases.
  2. Force: the subject does not choose. Crudest, costliest, self-limiting.
  3. Coercion: a threat. The subject chooses under duress.
  4. Inducement: an offer. The test against coercion is the baseline, worse off or better off.
  5. Influence: no sanction at all. If it fails, nothing follows.
  6. Manipulation: influence the subject does not know about, or acts on falsely.
  7. Authority: power accepted as rightful; the subject obeys because of who ordered.
  8. Control: obedience become habit; Weber's Disziplin.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish force from coercion. Force is the physical application of harm or restraint, and it removes choice: a protester carried into a van is not obeying but being moved. Coercion is the threat of such harm, and it leaves the subject choosing, though under duress, because the alternatives have been arranged so that only one is bearable. Force ends the matter; coercion depends on the threat remaining credible.

2. Distinguish coercion from inducement. Both change behaviour by rearranging the subject's alternatives, and both may produce identical conduct. The test is the baseline. Coercion threatens to make the subject worse off than they would otherwise have been; inducement offers to make them better off. A penalty for untreated effluent is coercion; a subsidy for a treatment plant is inducement.

3. Is influence a kind of power? Give reasons. In the wide Weberian sense it is, because the subject's behaviour is affected within a social relationship. But it differs from most power in two ways: it carries no sanction, so nothing follows if it fails, and it works through the subject's own reasoning, so the subject ends up wanting the outcome. It is a different relation rather than a smaller quantity of the same one.

4. Why is the distinction between power and authority the foundation of Module II? Because political obligation asks why anybody should obey. If power and authority were the same, obedience would be nothing but the effect of superior strength and the question would not arise, nor would there be any such thing as an unjust law. The distinction between the officer entitled to give an order and the man merely able to enforce one is what makes obligation, resistance and civil disobedience intelligible.

5. Distinguish manipulation from persuasion. Both change behaviour without any sanction, and in both the subject acts freely. Persuasion supplies reasons the subject can examine and accept or reject. Manipulation withholds material facts, supplies false ones, or conceals that any influence is being exercised, so that the subject's free choice is made on a picture of the world that the manipulator has arranged. The difference is the basis on which the law distinguishes fair dealing from misrepresentation.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in14

Chapter Four

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

Syllabus topic 1.1.2, "Exercise of political power and role of the Government in decision making"

In one line

Political power is exercised through institutions: it is distributed among them by a constitution, it moves between them in practice, and it is limited by other institutions rather than by good intentions.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the exercise of political power in a modern state is the process by which binding decisions are made and enforced for the whole society, through the legislature, the executive and the judiciary, distributed between levels of government by a constitution, conditioned by parties, bureaucracies, courts and public opinion, and limited by the requirement that every exercise of power be traceable to a legal authority.

What makes power political

Not every exercise of power is political. A parent, an employer and a moneylender all exercise power. Political power has three features that mark it off.

It is exercised for the whole society. A political decision binds everyone within the territory, including those who opposed it and those who never heard of it. A company's decision binds its shareholders; a legislature's binds the shareholders, the customers, the competitors and the passers-by.

It is backed by the state's monopoly of legitimate force. Weber's definition of the state is the human community that successfully claims the monopoly of the legitimate use of physical force within a given territory. Every other body that uses force does so either unlawfully or on the state's permission.

It claims to be authoritative. A political decision is not put forward as one opinion among many. It is put forward as binding.

Where the power sits

The three organs

The legislature makes law. In India that is Parliament for the Union and the Legislature of each State, and law made by them is enforceable by every court and every officer in the territory to which it extends.

The executive carries law into effect. Formally this is the President or the Governor; in reality it is the Council of Ministers headed by the Prime Minister or the Chief Minister, advised and implemented by the permanent civil services.

The judiciary applies law to disputes and, in India, decides whether the other two have kept within their powers.

Separation of powers is the doctrine that these three should be kept in different hands, so that no one body both makes the rule and judges the breach. India does not follow it rigidly: ministers sit in the legislature, and the executive makes delegated legislation by the crore. What India does have is checks and balances: each organ can stop the others at defined points.

The vertical division

Power is divided not only between organs but between levels: the Union, the States and, since 1993, a constitutionally guaranteed tier of local government. The subjects on which each may legislate are listed, and disputes about the boundary are decided by the courts.

munotes.in15

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

The point a law student should notice. A federal division is itself a limit on power. It means that no single body in the country can lawfully do everything, and that a person aggrieved can ask a court to say that the body which acted was not the body entitled to act.

The bodies that are none of the three

Modern states run on institutions that fit no classical box: election commissions, central banks, auditors, human rights commissions, information commissions and regulators. They exercise real power and are deliberately insulated from the government of the day. Whether that insulation is democratic is one of the standing arguments of Module IV.

How power moves between them

A constitution allocates power on paper. Practice redistributes it, and four of the movements are worth knowing by name.

From the legislature to the executive. Modern legislation is framed in skeleton and filled in by rules, regulations, orders and notifications made by departments. This is delegated legislation, and by volume it is now most of the law in force.

From elected bodies to permanent officials. Ministers change; secretaries and directors do not. The permanent service holds the files, the expertise and the drafting pen. This is the phenomenon Weber predicted when he said that the modern state runs on bureaucracy and that the trained official becomes very hard to displace.

From the state to the courts. Where a legislature is deadlocked or unwilling, litigants turn to constitutional courts, and courts that accept the invitation end up making policy.

From the state to bodies outside it. Regulators, international obligations, credit rating agencies, large firms and the market itself constrain what a government may practically do.

The limits on the exercise of power

This is where political science and law meet, and it is the part a law student should be able to write best.

Constitutional limits. Every organ has only the power the Constitution gives it, and an act beyond that power is void. The Fundamental Rights operate as a boundary on what may be enacted at all.

Judicial review. A court may examine an executive action or a statute and set it aside for want of power. In India this is the single most important practical limit.

The basic structure. Even the power to amend the Constitution is limited: the Supreme Court has held that an amendment may not damage the Constitution's basic structure. This is the outer wall of the whole system and is taught properly in Module III.

Federal limits. A Union law on a State subject, or the reverse, is open to challenge.

munotes.in16

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

Time limits. Every legislature and every government holds office for a fixed term and must go back to the electorate.

Political limits. Opposition parties, a free press, organised opinion, and the plain fact that a government which loses the confidence of the lower house falls.

A worked example

A State government decides that all commercial vehicles more than fifteen years old must be taken off the road.

The decision is taken in a meeting of the Council of Ministers on a note prepared by the Transport Department. Nobody outside government is present.

The power to act is looked for in the parent statute. If the statute permits the State to prescribe conditions of fitness, the decision can be implemented by a notification. If it does not, an amendment must go to the legislature, which is slower and public.

The instrument is drafted by officials, vetted by the Law Department, and issued as a notification. It becomes binding on lakhs of people who never saw it debated.

The resistance begins. A transporters' association meets the Minister. A newspaper runs a piece on drivers who will lose their livelihood. A political party in opposition takes it up. This is the exercise of power on the government, which is the subject of the next chapters.

A challenge is filed in the High Court, saying the notification is beyond the parent Act and violates the right to carry on a trade. The court now decides whether the government had the power at all.

The election two years later is fought partly on it. If the government loses, the notification may be withdrawn by the next one.

Six different exercises of power, in six different places, on one decision. An answer that describes only the first has described almost nothing.

Distinctions that carry marks

Separation of powersChecks and balances
The ideaEach organ keeps to its own functionEach organ can restrain the others
AimPrevent concentration by divisionPrevent abuse by mutual control
Strict exampleThe United States, where the executive sits outside the legislature
Indian positionNot strict: ministers sit in the legislature, and the executive legislates by delegationStrongly present: judicial review, legislative control of finance, executive appointments subject to law

What this is NOT

The exercise of political power is not the same as the government's activity. Parties, courts, the press, interest groups and voters all exercise political power, and none of them is the government.

It is not exhausted by law making. Most exercises of power in a modern state are administrative: a licence granted, a file cleared, a tender awarded, a prosecution launched or not launched.

A written constitution does not by itself limit power. Limits work only where an institution exists that is willing and able to enforce them, which is why the independence of courts and election commissions is a political question and not a technical one.

munotes.in17

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

Quick revision

  1. Power is political when it is exercised for the whole society, backed by the state's monopoly of legitimate force, and claimed as binding.
  2. Three organs: legislature makes, executive enforces, judiciary applies and reviews.
  3. India has checks and balances rather than strict separation of powers.
  4. Power is also divided vertically: Union, State and, since 1993, local government.
  5. Four movements in practice: to the executive by delegated legislation, to permanent officials, to the courts, and to bodies outside the state.
  6. Limits: constitutional, judicial review, the basic structure, federal, temporal and political.

Test yourself

1. What makes an exercise of power political rather than merely private? Three things. It is exercised for the whole society, so that it binds everyone in the territory including those who opposed it. It is backed by the state's monopoly of the legitimate use of physical force within that territory. And it is claimed as authoritative rather than offered as one view among many. An employer's power over an employee has none of the three.

2. Does India follow the separation of powers? Explain. Not strictly. Ministers are members of the legislature and are answerable to it, and the executive makes an enormous volume of delegated legislation, so the functions are not kept in separate hands. What India has instead is a system of checks and balances: the courts may review both legislative and executive action, the legislature controls finance and may remove the government, and the executive's appointments and powers are subject to law.

3. Explain delegated legislation as a movement of power. Modern statutes are enacted in skeleton form and completed by rules, regulations, notifications and orders made by departments under an enabling section. The legislature therefore settles the principle and the executive settles the content, which by volume is now most of the law in force. The power to make binding rules has in practice moved from the elected chamber to the permanent administration.

4. Name and explain three limits on the exercise of political power in India. Constitutional limits: an organ has only the power the Constitution confers, and an act beyond it is void. Judicial review: a court may examine a statute or an executive act and set it aside for want of power, which is the most important practical limit. Temporal limits: every legislature and government holds office for a fixed term and must return to the electorate, so that no exercise of power is permanent.

5. Why is a written constitution not by itself a limit on power? Because a limit works only if some institution is willing and able to enforce it. A guarantee that no court will apply, or that an executive can ignore without consequence, is a sentence and not a limit. This is why the independence of the judiciary, the election commission and the audit institutions is treated as a political question about the reality of limits, and not as a matter of administrative arrangement.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in18

Chapter Five

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

Syllabus topic 1.1.2, "Exercise of political power and role of the Government in decision making"

In one line

A government decision is not a moment when somebody chooses; it is a process with stages, and the models of decision making are competing accounts of what actually happens in that process.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the government's role in decision making is to convert demands arising in society into binding public decisions, through a policy cycle of agenda setting, formulation, adoption, implementation and evaluation; and how far that process is genuinely rational is contested between the rational, incremental, bureaucratic, garbage-can and mixed-scanning models.

The policy cycle

The stages are worth learning in order, because a question about the government's role can be answered by walking down them.

1. Agenda setting. Out of the thousands of problems in a society, a few become things the government is going to do something about. This is the stage the second face of power operates on, and it is decided as much by what is kept off the list as by what goes on it.

2. Formulation. Options are worked out, usually by officials, sometimes by an expert committee, a commission or a law commission, and increasingly by consultants.

3. Adoption. The choice is made and given legal form: a statute, an ordinance, a notification, a scheme, a budget line.

4. Implementation. The decision is carried out by an administrative machine that has its own interests, capacities and shortages. Most policy failures are failures here.

5. Evaluation. What happened is measured against what was intended, by the audit institution, by parliamentary committees, by courts, by the press and by researchers.

6. Feedback. Evaluation changes the agenda, and the cycle starts again.

The models, and what each one claims

The rational model

Also called the synoptic or comprehensive model. The decision maker defines the goal, lists all the alternatives, works out the consequences of each, and picks the one that best achieves the goal at least cost.

Its virtue. It is the standard against which everything else is measured, and it is the model a court applies when it asks whether a decision was reasonable and whether relevant considerations were taken into account.

Its problem. No government can do this. Nobody knows all the alternatives, the consequences cannot be fully calculated, goals conflict with each other, and time and money run out. Herbert Simon called the result bounded rationality: decision makers work within limits of information, capacity and time, and therefore do not maximise but satisfice, taking the first option that is good enough rather than searching for the best.

The incremental model

Charles Lindblom's answer, and its nickname is the whole argument: the science of muddling through. Governments do not start from first principles. They start from what is already being done and change it a little. Last year's budget plus five per cent. The existing scheme with an extra category added.

munotes.in19

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

Why it happens. It is cheap, it is politically safe, mistakes are small and reversible, and it does not require agreement on ultimate goals, only on the next step.

Its criticisms. It is conservative, it entrenches whoever benefits from the status quo, and it cannot produce the large change a real crisis needs. A country that had reformed its economy incrementally would not have had 1991.

The bureaucratic and organisational model

Graham Allison's contribution. On this account a government decision is not the choice of a single mind at all. It is the output of organisations following their standing procedures, and the resultant of bargaining between departments each of which has its own view, its own budget and its own turf. Ask what a government decided and you often find that no one person decided it.

Its Indian application is obvious. A decision that needs Finance, Home, Law and a State government to agree will look nothing like what any of them would have done alone.

The garbage-can model

Cohen, March and Olsen described organisations in which problems, solutions, participants and choice opportunities are thrown together and connected more or less by chance: a solution that has been sitting in a drawer meets a problem it was not designed for, and gets adopted because both happened to be present when a decision had to be made. Governments produce more decisions of this kind than they admit.

Mixed scanning

Amitai Etzioni's compromise, and the one to quote when a question asks you to choose. Big decisions are taken with a broad, rational scan of the whole field, and the many small decisions that follow are taken incrementally within the frame the big one set. This describes real government better than either pure model.

Who actually decides in India

The Council of Ministers is where a major decision is formally taken, on a note prepared by a department, and its decisions are collective.

The department frames the note, and framing is power: the options that reach the meeting are the options the department wrote down.

The Cabinet Secretariat and the Finance Ministry are the two gatekeepers almost nothing gets past.

Expert bodies produce the material that shapes the option set: commissions, law commissions, and the policy think tank that replaced the Planning Commission.

Parliament adopts what needs a statute, scrutinises through committees, and controls money.

The courts review, and in India also sometimes direct.

The States implement most of what touches an ordinary person's life, because health, police, land, agriculture and local government are State subjects.

munotes.in20

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

A worked example

A State decides to give a monthly cash transfer to women heads of poor households.

Agenda setting. The demand exists for years and goes nowhere. It reaches the agenda when an election is a year away and a neighbouring State's scheme is reported to have worked. Notice that the merits did not change; the political opportunity did.

Formulation. The Women and Child Development Department prepares a note with three options: a universal transfer, a transfer to households below the poverty line, and a transfer with an income cut-off and an exclusion list. Finance costs each. The department's preference is visible in the order the options are listed.

Adoption. The Council of Ministers approves the third option. This is the moment the model matters: it looks like a rational choice among three, but the three were chosen by officials, and a fourth option, spending the same money on childcare, was never written down.

Implementation. The transfer requires bank accounts, an eligibility list, a grievance mechanism and a helpline. The list is built from an old database, so a large number of eligible women are missing and a smaller number of ineligible ones are included. This is where the scheme is actually decided, by clerks applying a proforma.

Evaluation. The audit institution reports on exclusion errors. A newspaper finds women who were left out. A petition is filed. A committee recommends changes.

Feedback. Next year's version raises the cut-off and adds an appeal. That is incrementalism, and it will now continue for a decade.

Distinctions that carry marks

Rational modelIncremental model
Starting pointThe goal, defined afreshWhat is already being done
Range of optionsAll of themThose marginally different from the present
Test appliedWhich best achieves the goalWhich can be agreed on now
AssumesFull information and settled goalsNeither
StrengthA standard of good decision makingDescribes what governments really do
WeaknessImpossible in practiceConservative, and helpless in a crisis
Associated withThe classical account; Simon's critiqueLindblom, "the science of muddling through"

What this is NOT

Decision making is not the same as policy. A policy is a settled line of action; a decision is one act within it. Governments take thousands of decisions inside a single policy.

A decision is not made where it is announced. It is usually made in the drafting of the note that limited the options.

Not deciding is a decision. A government that lets a file sit has decided, and the decision binds exactly as much as an order would.

Implementation is not a technical afterthought. Most schemes that fail are well designed and badly delivered, which is why evaluation studies concentrate on delivery.

munotes.in21

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

Quick revision

  1. The policy cycle: agenda setting, formulation, adoption, implementation, evaluation, feedback.
  2. Rational model: define the goal, list all options, compute consequences, maximise. Impossible; Simon's bounded rationality and satisficing.
  3. Incremental model, Lindblom: start from the present and change it a little. "Muddling through." Safe and conservative.
  4. Bureaucratic and organisational model, Allison: the output of standard procedures and inter-departmental bargaining, not the choice of one mind.
  5. Garbage-can model: problems and ready-made solutions meet by chance.
  6. Mixed scanning, Etzioni: broad scanning for the big decision, incrementalism for the rest. The best single answer.
  7. In India: the department frames, the Council of Ministers adopts, Finance and the Cabinet Secretariat gatekeep, Parliament legislates and scrutinises, the courts review, and the States implement.

Test yourself

1. Set out the stages of the policy cycle. Agenda setting, in which a problem becomes one the government will act on; formulation, in which options are worked out, usually by officials or an expert body; adoption, in which the choice is made and given legal form; implementation, in which the administration carries it out; evaluation, in which outcomes are measured against intentions; and feedback, in which the evaluation reshapes the agenda and the cycle begins again.

2. What is bounded rationality, and whose idea is it? Herbert Simon's. Decision makers cannot achieve the comprehensive rationality the classical model demands, because information is incomplete, consequences cannot be fully computed, goals conflict, and time and money are limited. They therefore work within those bounds and satisfice, adopting the first alternative that is good enough rather than searching for the best available one.

3. Explain the incremental model and state two criticisms of it. Lindblom's model holds that governments begin from what is already being done and change it marginally, because that is cheap, politically safe, and needs agreement only on the next step rather than on ultimate goals. It is criticised as conservative, since it entrenches whoever benefits from the present arrangement, and as inadequate to a crisis, since a situation that requires large and rapid change cannot be met by successive small ones.

4. How does Allison's bureaucratic model change the question "what did the government decide?" It denies that there was a single deciding mind. On this account a government decision is the output of organisations executing their standard operating procedures, and the resultant of bargaining among departments with different interests, budgets and jurisdictions. The right question becomes which organisations were involved, what their routines produced, and how the bargain between them was struck.

5. What is mixed scanning, and why is it the most realistic model? Etzioni's proposal that decision making operates at two levels: fundamental decisions are taken after a broad but not exhaustive scan of the whole field, and the many small decisions that follow are taken incrementally within the frame those fundamental ones set. It is realistic because it accounts for both the rare large reform and the ordinary daily adjustment, which neither the rational nor the incremental model can do alone.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in22

Chapter Six

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (Role of Interests groups, Lobbying as a technique, Examples from India and the USA)"

In one line

A government never decides in a vacuum: outside the formal machinery of the state, organised groups, the press, business, courts, foreign governments and public opinion all press on the decision, and the pressing is itself an exercise of power.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: external influences on the exercise of political power are the forces outside the constitutional organs of government which shape what those organs decide, principally interest and pressure groups, the media, business and finance, trade unions, religious and caste organisations, civil society and social movements, foreign states and international organisations, and public opinion itself.

Why the topic exists

The last two chapters described power flowing down: the state deciding, the administration implementing. That picture is only half true, and a student who leaves it there cannot explain why governments so often do things their own analysis says are unwise, or fail to do things everybody agrees are necessary.

Power also flows upward and sideways, from society into the state. The decision the Council of Ministers takes has already been shaped, before it reaches the meeting, by who was consulted, whose data was used, which newspaper ran which story, which association met which minister, and what the government believes the electorate will tolerate. That shaping is the subject of this chapter.

A word to fix: "external" here means outside the formal organs of government, not outside the country. A domestic trade association is an external influence; so is a foreign government. Students routinely read "external" as "foreign" and answer the wrong question.

The influences, by kind

Interest groups and pressure groups

Organised bodies that seek to influence public policy without seeking office themselves. They are the most important of the external influences and get the next chapter.

The media

Newspapers, television and now digital platforms shape the exercise of power in three distinct ways, and an answer that separates them reads better than one that says "the media is powerful".

Agenda setting. The press cannot tell people what to think, but it is very effective at telling them what to think about. A story run for a week makes a subject unavoidable for a government.

Framing. How an issue is described settles what counts as a solution. The same fact is a law and order problem, an economic problem or a human rights problem depending on the frame, and each frame has a different set of remedies attached.

Scrutiny. Investigation exposes what the government would not have disclosed, which is why press freedom is treated as a structural feature of a democracy rather than a private right of journalists.

Business and finance

Business influences policy through three channels that should be distinguished. Representation, through chambers of commerce and industry associations. Structural power, which requires no lobbying at all: a government that needs investment, employment and tax revenue adjusts its policy in anticipation of what capital will accept. And finance, through political contributions, which is where the influence becomes a legal question.

munotes.in23

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

Trade unions and professional bodies

Unions influence labour and welfare policy; bar associations, medical councils and similar bodies exercise a distinct kind of influence, because the state has often delegated regulation of the profession to them, so they are simultaneously an outside group and a part of the machinery.

Religious, caste and community organisations

In India these are among the most effective external influences, because they can deliver both opinion and votes, and because personal law, education, temple administration, reservations and public order all touch them directly.

Civil society and social movements

Non-governmental organisations, campaigns and movements. The Indian pattern is distinctive: several major statutes of the last twenty-five years began as movements outside the state, and the right to information is the clearest example, having been demanded by a rural movement in Rajasthan long before it became a central Act.

Foreign states and international organisations

Treaties, trade agreements, conditions attached to loans, and plain diplomatic pressure. A state that ratifies a convention has limited its own future choices, which is an external influence its own citizens did not vote for.

Public opinion

The most diffuse and the most powerful. A government's estimate of what the electorate will accept operates on every decision, and it operates in advance, which makes it a textbook instance of the second face of power.

How the influence is exercised

The channels are worth listing separately from the actors, because the same actor uses several.

  1. Representation and consultation. Meetings, memoranda, submissions to committees and pre-legislative consultation.
  2. Expertise. Supplying the data and the draft. Whoever writes the first draft has more power than whoever approves the last.
  3. Publicity. Campaigns, advertising and now social media.
  4. Electoral pressure. The promise or threat of votes.
  5. Money. Contributions to parties, which is why the law on political funding is a Module IV question.
  6. Direct action. Strikes, bandhs, road blockades, hunger strikes, and the rasta roko, which is Marathi and Hindi for a road blockade.
  7. Litigation. In India, public interest litigation has made the courts a standing channel for groups that lose in the legislature.

A worked example

A State proposes to convert two hundred hectares of farmland into an industrial park.

The farmers' association organises a rasta roko and a march to the district headquarters: direct action and publicity.

The industry chamber meets the Chief Minister with a paper on the jobs the park will create: representation and expertise.

munotes.in24

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

A national newspaper runs a series on the families who will lose land, and a business daily runs one on the investment that will go to another State if the park is delayed. The two frames make different remedies obvious: compensation in the first, speed in the second.

A caste association whose members are most of the affected farmers signals that it will campaign against the government in the next election: electoral pressure.

An NGO files a public interest petition on the environmental clearance: litigation.

The investor says nothing publicly at all, and simply lets it be known that its board will decide next quarter between this State and another. That is structural power, and it is the most effective move on the board.

The outcome. The government raises compensation, shrinks the park by forty hectares and expedites the clearance. Every one of those three concessions is traceable to a different external influence, and none of them was decided by the legislature.

Distinctions that carry marks

Interest groupPolitical partySocial movement
AimInfluence policyCapture governmental officeChange society or policy
Contests elections?NoYesNo
MembershipNarrow and defined by interestBroad and openLoose and fluid
OrganisationFormalFormal and permanentOften informal, may be temporary
AccountabilityTo its members onlyTo the electorateTo no one formally

What this is NOT

External influence is not the same as corruption. Representation, consultation and campaigning are lawful, necessary and, in a democracy, desirable. What separates influence from corruption is whether the transaction is a reason or a payment, and whether it is disclosed.

"External" does not mean foreign.

Influence is not always visible. The most effective external influence, structural power, involves nobody meeting anybody.

A government that yields to pressure is not automatically weak. Responsiveness to organised opinion is one of the things a democracy is for. The question is always which interests can organise and which cannot, which is the standing criticism of pluralism.

Quick revision

  1. External here means outside the formal organs of government, not foreign.
  2. The influences: interest and pressure groups, the media, business and finance, trade unions and professional bodies, religious and caste organisations, civil society and movements, foreign states and international bodies, and public opinion.
  3. The media works by agenda setting, framing and scrutiny.
  4. Business works by representation, structural power and finance. Structural power requires no lobbying at all.
  5. Seven channels: representation, expertise, publicity, electoral pressure, money, direct action, litigation.
  6. The standing criticism: influence is available to those who can organise, and the poorest are the hardest to organise.

Test yourself

1. What does "external" mean in this topic, and what is the common error? It means outside the formal constitutional organs of government, the legislature, the executive and the judiciary. The common error is to read it as "foreign" and to answer with treaties and international organisations alone. Those are one item on a list that is mostly domestic: interest groups, media, business, unions, community organisations, movements and public opinion.

munotes.in25

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

2. Explain the three ways the media influences the exercise of power. By agenda setting, since sustained coverage decides which problems a government cannot ignore, whatever it thinks of their merits. By framing, since the description of an issue settles what will count as a solution to it. And by scrutiny, since investigation discloses what government would have preferred to keep undisclosed, which is why press freedom is treated as structural to democracy rather than as a private privilege.

3. What is the structural power of business, and why is it the most effective form? It is the influence business exercises without any approach to government at all. Because a government depends on investment, employment and tax revenue, it anticipates what capital will accept and adjusts its policy in advance. It is the most effective form because it costs nothing, leaves no record, and operates on decisions before they are taken, which makes it an instance of the second face of power.

4. Distinguish an interest group from a political party. An interest group seeks to influence policy but does not seek office; a party seeks to capture governmental office and therefore contests elections. A group's membership is narrow and defined by the interest it represents, while a party's is broad and open. A group is accountable only to its members, a party to the whole electorate. The line blurs when a group converts itself into a party, which has happened in India.

5. Is influence the same as corruption? Give reasons. No. Representation, consultation, expert submission and public campaigning are lawful and, in a democracy, necessary, because a government that hears nobody decides badly. The distinction lies in what is offered and whether it is disclosed: a reason, an argument or evidence is influence, while a payment or a personal benefit for an official act is corruption. Undisclosed influence occupies the ground between the two, which is why disclosure is what lobbying regulation everywhere tries to compel.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in26

Chapter Seven

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (Role of Interests groups, ...)"

In one line

An interest group is an organised body of people who share a concern and try to get the government to act on it, without ever trying to run the government themselves.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: an interest group, also called a pressure group, is an organised association of persons who hold a common interest or opinion and who seek to influence the formation and administration of public policy in its favour, without seeking to capture governmental office or to accept the responsibility of governing.

The two names, and whether there is a difference

The syllabus says "interest groups"; most Indian textbooks say "pressure groups"; the terms are used interchangeably and a student may use either. Where writers do distinguish them, the distinction is this. Interest group describes what the body is, a group united by an interest. Pressure group describes what it does, apply pressure. Every pressure group is an interest group; an interest group that has never tried to influence anybody is not yet a pressure group. If a question uses one term, use that one.

What makes a body an interest group

Four features, and all four are needed. A body with three of them is something else.

  1. A shared interest or concern. It may be material, like the price of sugarcane, or it may be a cause with no material stake at all, like the abolition of the death penalty.
  2. Organisation. Some structure, however loose: a name, officers, a way of deciding what to demand.
  3. An attempt to influence public policy. A group that only serves its own members, and never asks government for anything, is an association, not an interest group.
  4. It does not seek office. This is the decisive one. The moment a group contests elections in order to govern, it has become a party.

The kinds of interest group

Every classification in the textbooks is one of these three cuts, and the safest answer uses all three.

By what they represent: sectional and promotional

Sectional groups, also called protective or interest groups in the narrow sense, represent a section of society and pursue its material interests. A trade union, an industry chamber, a farmers' association, a bar association. Membership is limited to the section, benefits go to the section, and the group's authority rests on how much of the section it can speak for.

Promotional groups, also called cause or attitude groups, promote a cause that need not benefit the members at all. An environmental campaign, a civil liberties organisation, a group working against child marriage. Membership is open to anybody who agrees, and the group's authority rests on the strength of its argument and its public support.

munotes.in27

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

The test that separates them is not what the group asks for; it is who benefits if it succeeds. If success benefits the members as members, it is sectional. If success benefits people who are not members, it is promotional.

By organisation: Almond and Powell's four types

Gabriel Almond and G. Bingham Powell's classification is standard in Indian syllabuses and is worth knowing by name, because it fits Indian conditions better than the two-way cut.

Anomic groups. Spontaneous, unorganised and usually short-lived eruptions: a riot, a spontaneous demonstration, a crowd that gathers after an incident and disperses in a week. They have no continuing structure and no office bearers, and they influence policy by disorder rather than by argument.

Non-associational groups. Groups that exist by identity rather than by organisation: caste, kinship, region, language, religion. Nobody joins them and nobody leaves. They act intermittently, often through informal leaders, and in India they are among the most consequential influences on policy.

Institutional groups. Groups that are formally part of the state or of another organisation and use that position to press their own interest: the armed forces, the civil services, the police associations, and the employees' bodies within a public undertaking. They are powerful because they are inside the machine and because government cannot function without their cooperation.

Associational groups. Formally organised bodies with a specific purpose, a membership roll, a constitution and professional staff. Trade unions, industry chambers, professional associations. This is the type most people mean by "interest group", and in a developed system it does most of the work.

By duration and level

Some groups are permanent and some are formed for a single issue and dissolve when it is settled. Some operate at the level of a village or a ward, some in a State capital, some in Delhi, some internationally.

What interest groups actually do

They articulate interests. Almond's term. Somebody has to turn a scattered discontent into a stated demand, and groups are the machinery for doing it. Without them a government hears noise.

They supply information. A department drafting a rule on drug pricing does not know the industry as well as the industry does. That is the honest core of lobbying, and it is why governments consult groups even when they distrust them.

They represent between elections. A voter votes once in five years on everything at once. A group presses on one thing continuously.

They train and recruit. Group leaders become political leaders, which is one route into Indian politics.

They implement. Governments increasingly deliver services through organisations that began as interest groups.

Interest groups in India

The Indian pattern is different enough from the Western textbook picture that a good answer says so.

munotes.in28

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

Non-associational groups are unusually strong. Caste associations, community organisations and language groups influence recruitment, reservation, education, personal law and public order, and they can deliver both opinion and votes. No Western classification has anything quite like the caste association.

Many associational groups are attached to parties. The large trade union federations and several student and farmer organisations are affiliated to political parties, which makes them powerful and simultaneously limits their independence, because they cannot press a demand that embarrasses their party. This is the single most distinctive feature of Indian interest group politics.

Business is organised and effective, through chambers of commerce and industry associations that are consulted formally on legislation.

Direct action is a normal method, not an exceptional one. The bandh, the road blockade, the rail roko and the mass rally are ordinary instruments, and the courts have had to draw lines around them.

Litigation is a standing channel. Public interest litigation has given Indian groups a route into policy that groups in most systems do not have.

And the weakest interests are the least organised. Agricultural labourers, domestic workers, migrant workers and the urban poor are numerous and hard to organise, which is the standing criticism of pluralist theory: the system responds to organised interests, and organisation is not equally available.

A worked example

A State proposes to raise the age of sale of tobacco products from eighteen to twenty-one.

The tobacco traders' federation is a sectional associational group. It writes to the Minister, commissions a study on the effect on small retailers, and points out how many voters run paan shops.

A public health foundation is a promotional associational group. Its members gain nothing personally. It publishes data on age of initiation and gets its case into the newspapers.

The State's own excise officers' association is an institutional group. It quietly points out that enforcement will need staff the department does not have, and that objection may kill the proposal more effectively than the traders' campaign.

A students' organisation affiliated to a party demonstrates in favour. Its position is genuine, and it is also convenient for its party.

A crowd that gathers outside a shop after a child is hospitalised is an anomic group. It has no structure, it is gone in a fortnight, and while it lasts it makes the front page.

Five groups, four of Almond's types, and each one exercises a different kind of pressure on the same file.

Distinctions that carry marks

Sectional groupPromotional group
RepresentsA section of societyA cause
Who benefits from successThe members, as membersPeople who need not be members
MembershipLimited to the sectionOpen to anybody who agrees
Authority rests onHow much of the section it speaks forThe strength of its argument and its public support
ExampleA trade union, an industry chamberAn environmental campaign, a civil liberties body
munotes.in29

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

Almond and Powell's typeOrganised?Continuing?Indian example of the type
AnomicNoNoA spontaneous demonstration after an incident
Non-associationalNoYes, by identityA caste or community association
InstitutionalYes, inside the stateYesA service association within the administration
AssociationalYesYesA trade union or an industry chamber

What interest groups are NOT

They are not political parties. A party seeks office and accepts responsibility for governing the whole; a group presses one interest and is accountable only to its members. The line is crossed when a group contests elections to govern, and Indian politics has several examples of groups that did exactly that.

They are not necessarily undemocratic. The pluralist argument is that competition between many groups is itself a form of democracy, because it keeps government continuously in touch with organised opinion. The criticism is not that groups exist but that the competition is unequal.

They are not the same as social movements. A movement is looser, larger, often without formal membership, and aims at changing society rather than at winning a specific policy. Movements often produce groups; the two are not the same thing.

They are not always outside the state. Institutional groups are inside it, which is what makes them formidable.

Quick revision

  1. Definition: an organised body sharing an interest, seeking to influence public policy, and NOT seeking office. Four features, and the fourth is decisive.
  2. Interest group describes what it is; pressure group describes what it does. Interchangeable in an answer.
  3. Sectional against promotional: the test is who benefits if the group succeeds.
  4. Almond and Powell: anomic, non-associational, institutional, associational.
  5. Functions: interest articulation, information, continuous representation, recruitment, implementation.
  6. In India: non-associational groups are unusually strong; many associational groups are party-affiliated; direct action and litigation are normal channels; the poorest interests are the least organised.

Test yourself

1. Define an interest group and give its essential features. An organised association of persons holding a common interest or opinion who seek to influence the formation and administration of public policy in its favour without seeking to capture office. Its features are a shared interest, some organisation, an attempt to influence policy, and the absence of any attempt to govern. The last is decisive: a body that contests elections in order to hold office has become a political party.

2. Distinguish sectional from promotional groups. A sectional group represents a section of society and pursues its material interests, so its membership is limited to that section and success benefits the members as members. A promotional group promotes a cause from which the members may gain nothing, so its membership is open to anybody who agrees and success benefits people outside it. The test is not what is demanded but who gains if the demand succeeds.

munotes.in30

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

3. Set out Almond and Powell's classification with an Indian example of each. Anomic groups are spontaneous and unorganised, such as a crowd that gathers after an incident and disperses within a fortnight. Non-associational groups exist by identity rather than by enrolment, such as caste and community associations. Institutional groups are formally part of the state and press their own interest from inside it, such as a service association within the administration. Associational groups are formally organised for a stated purpose, such as a trade union or an industry chamber.

4. What is distinctive about interest groups in India? Non-associational groups founded on caste, community, language and region are unusually influential, and no Western classification has an exact counterpart to the caste association. Many associational groups, particularly trade unions and student bodies, are affiliated to political parties, which makes them strong and simultaneously prevents them from pressing demands that embarrass their party. Direct action and public interest litigation are ordinary channels rather than exceptional ones.

5. "Interest groups make democracy more democratic." Discuss. The pluralist case is that they do: they turn scattered discontent into stated demands, they represent people continuously between elections when a vote settles everything at once, and competition among many groups keeps government in touch with organised opinion. The objection is that the competition is unequal. Organisation costs money, time and literacy, so business, professions and organised labour are heard while agricultural labourers, domestic workers and the urban poor are not, and a system responsive to organised interests is responsive to the already advantaged.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in31

Chapter Eight

Lobbying as a Technique

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (... Lobbying as a technique ...)"

In one line

Lobbying is the technique of persuading people who hold public power to use it your way, by going to them directly and giving them reasons, information and, where it is lawful, support.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: lobbying is the practice of communicating directly with legislators, ministers or officials, on behalf of an identified interest, with the object of influencing the framing, passage, administration or repeal of a law, rule, policy or decision.

Where the word comes from, and why it matters

The word comes from the lobby, the ante-room of a legislature where members can be met on their way to the chamber. The etymology carries the essential idea: lobbying happens outside the formal proceeding, in the space around the decision rather than at the moment of it. A speech in a debate is not lobbying. A memorandum handed to a member before the debate is.

This is why lobbying is difficult to regulate and easy to misunderstand. It is not a stage in the constitutional process, so no constitution provides for it; and it is not an offence, so no penal code prohibits it. It occupies the ground between the two, which is exactly where regulation everywhere tries to reach.

Lobbying is a technique, not a kind of body

An interest group is a body. Lobbying is a method, and it is used by bodies of many kinds, which is worth saying explicitly because students often treat the two words as synonyms.

Who lobbies: interest groups and industry associations; individual companies; professional lobbying firms retained for a fee; law firms and public affairs consultancies; non-governmental organisations and campaigns; trade unions; State governments lobbying the Union; foreign governments; and public sector undertakings lobbying the ministries that own them.

The methods

Direct lobbying

Contact with the decision maker.

Meetings and representations. The core of the activity. A delegation meets a minister, a secretary or a member.

Written submissions. Memoranda, position papers and responses to consultation.

Supplying draft language. The most effective and least visible technique of all. A group that supplies the actual words of a clause, a rule or an exception has done more than a hundred meetings could, because everything afterwards is an argument about amending its text rather than about whether to adopt its idea.

Evidence to committees. In India, appearing before a Parliamentary Standing Committee, a Select Committee or a commission.

Technical assistance. Providing data, models and impact assessments that a department does not have the capacity to produce.

Indirect or grassroots lobbying

Contact with the public, in order to reach the decision maker through them.

Public campaigns and advertising, media briefing, opinion pieces, and now coordinated activity on social platforms.

munotes.in32

Lobbying as a Technique

Mobilising members to write to their representatives.

Sponsoring research at universities and think tanks, which produces a body of apparently independent material that supports the position.

Coalition building, which makes a narrow interest look like a broad one. An industry that wants a duty reduced does better when consumer bodies say the same thing.

The techniques that shade into something else

Political contributions, which are lawful in most systems subject to disclosure and limits.

Employment, whether of retired officials by the industry they regulated, or of serving officials afterwards. This is the revolving door, and it is the single most criticised feature of professional lobbying, because it can make a present decision an investment in a future job.

Hospitality, travel and gifts, which most systems now cap or prohibit.

Payment for an official act, which is not lobbying at all. It is bribery, and the line is drawn there in every legal system.

What separates lobbying from corruption

This is the analytical heart of the topic and the question most likely to be set.

The thing supplied. Lobbying supplies reasons, arguments, information and political support. Corruption supplies a personal benefit to the decision maker.

The quality of the decision. After lobbying, the decision remains the decision maker's own, taken on considerations they are entitled to weigh. After a bribe, the decision has been bought, and the official's own judgment has been displaced.

Disclosure. Lobbying can survive being disclosed. Corruption cannot, which is why disclosure regimes are the standard regulatory response: they do not prohibit influence, they compel it into the open, on the theory that influence which cannot bear publication will not be attempted.

The public interest test. A lobbyist argues that what benefits their client also benefits the public. That argument may be weak, but it is the kind of argument a decision maker may lawfully act on. A bribe makes no such argument.

The case for lobbying, and the case against

An answer that only condemns lobbying is a weak answer, because it cannot explain why every democracy permits it.

For. Government cannot know everything, and those affected by a rule know most about it; lobbying is how that knowledge reaches the file. It is an exercise of the right to petition government and, in India, of the freedoms of speech and of association. It supplies representation between elections. And regulated lobbying is better than unregulated influence, because the alternative to a lobbyist with a registration number is the same person without one.

Against. Access is bought, and money buys more of it, so the loudest voice is not the largest interest but the richest. It is opaque, and the public rarely learns which arguments reached which official. The revolving door corrodes the independence of regulators. It privileges concentrated interests over diffuse ones: a duty that costs every household ten rupees and earns one industry a hundred crore will be lobbied for hard by the industry and by nobody at all against. And it shifts effective decision making out of the legislature, which is public and recorded, into meetings that are neither.

munotes.in33

Lobbying as a Technique

A worked example

A pharmaceutical association wants a proposed price control on a class of medicines dropped.

Direct. It seeks a meeting with the Department, and takes a costing study showing that the proposed ceiling is below the cost of production for smaller manufacturers.

Draft language. It suggests a proviso exempting formulations below a stated turnover. If that proviso enters the draft, the argument for the rest of the year is about the size of the exemption, not about whether there should be one.

Committee. It gives evidence before the Standing Committee examining the parent Bill, and the evidence is published.

Grassroots. It funds a patient organisation's campaign warning that price control will cause shortages, and it commissions a study at a management institute on the effect of price control on innovation.

Coalition. It persuades a small manufacturers' body to make the same demand, so the case now looks like protection of small enterprise rather than protection of margins.

The line. If a director offers the joint secretary a consultancy for his son, the activity has stopped being lobbying and has become an offence, and every one of the five techniques above was lawful up to that point.

Distinctions that carry marks

LobbyingBribery
What is suppliedReasons, information, political supportA personal benefit to the decision maker
Whose judgment decidesThe decision maker'sThe payer's; the official's judgment is displaced
Can it survive disclosure?YesNo
Legal statusLawful, and regulated in many systemsAn offence everywhere
Regulatory responseRegistration and disclosureProsecution
Direct lobbyingIndirect or grassroots lobbying
TargetThe decision makerThe public, and through them the decision maker
MethodsMeetings, memoranda, draft language, committee evidenceCampaigns, advertising, member mobilisation, sponsored research
VisibilityLow; often nothing is publishedHigh, and designed to be
CostModestLarge

What lobbying is NOT

Lobbying is not inherently corrupt. It is the ordinary way organised interests communicate with government, and a system that banned it would not abolish influence but would drive it underground.

Lobbying is not a synonym for pressure group activity. A group may lobby, litigate, demonstrate, publish or strike. Lobbying is one instrument in the kit.

Lobbying is not confined to legislatures. Most of it is now aimed at the executive, because most binding rules are made there.

munotes.in34

Lobbying as a Technique

Regulating lobbying is not the same as limiting it. Disclosure regimes do not cap how much lobbying may be done. They compel it to be recorded, on the theory that publicity is a better discipline than prohibition.

Quick revision

  1. Definition: direct communication with holders of public power, on behalf of an identified interest, to influence a law, rule, policy or decision.
  2. The word comes from the lobby of a legislature: the activity happens around the decision, not in the formal proceeding.
  3. It is a technique, not a kind of body. Groups, firms, consultancies, NGOs, unions, State governments and foreign governments all use it.
  4. Direct: meetings, memoranda, supplying draft language, committee evidence, technical assistance. Indirect: campaigns, advertising, member mobilisation, sponsored research, coalition building.
  5. Lobbying against bribery: what is supplied, whose judgment decides, and whether it can survive disclosure.
  6. The revolving door is the most criticised practice, because it can turn a present decision into a future job.
  7. The regulatory answer everywhere is disclosure, not prohibition.

Test yourself

1. Define lobbying and explain what the word's origin tells you about the activity. Lobbying is direct communication with legislators, ministers or officials, on behalf of an identified interest, intended to influence the framing, passage, administration or repeal of a law, rule, policy or decision. The word comes from the lobby of a legislature, the ante-room where members were met on their way to the chamber, and that origin captures the essential feature: lobbying occurs outside the formal proceeding, in the space around the decision rather than at the moment of it.

2. Distinguish lobbying from bribery. Lobbying supplies reasons, information and political support, and the decision remains the decision maker's own, taken on considerations they may lawfully weigh; bribery supplies a personal benefit and displaces the official's judgment with the payer's. Lobbying can survive disclosure and bribery cannot, which is why the standard regulatory response to lobbying is registration and publication, and the response to bribery is prosecution.

3. What is the revolving door, and why is it criticised? The movement of people between regulatory office and the industries they regulate, whether by an industry hiring retired officials for their contacts and knowledge, or by officials taking employment afterwards with those they dealt with. It is criticised because it can convert a present official decision into an investment in a future job, so the official's independence is compromised without any payment being made or any rule being broken at the time.

4. State the case for permitting lobbying. Government cannot know everything and those affected by a rule usually know most about it, so lobbying is how that knowledge reaches the file. It is an exercise of the right to petition and of the freedoms of speech and association. It supplies continuous representation between elections, when a vote settles everything at once. And regulated lobbying is preferable to unregulated influence, since prohibiting it would not abolish influence but would remove any record of it.

munotes.in35

Lobbying as a Technique

5. Why is "supplying draft language" the most effective technique? Because it settles the terms on which everything afterwards is argued. Once a group's clause, proviso or exception is in the draft, the discussion is about whether to amend its words rather than about whether to adopt its idea, and the burden has shifted onto whoever wants it removed. It is also the least visible technique, since the published draft carries no indication of who wrote which part of it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in36

Chapter Nine

Lobbying in India and in the United States

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (... Examples from India and the USA)"

In one line

The United States regulates lobbying by making lobbyists register and file public reports four times a year; India regulates it not at all, and reaches only the far end of the spectrum, where influence has become an offence.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: in the United States lobbying is a lawful, registered and disclosed profession, governed principally by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 as strengthened in 2007 and, for agents of foreign principals, by the Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938; in India there is no statute that registers lobbyists or requires any disclosure of lobbying, so the same activity is carried on informally and is reached by the law only when it crosses into bribery or breach of parliamentary privilege.

The United States

Why the American system looks the way it does

Two features of the American constitution shape everything else. The First Amendment protects the right of the people to petition the government for a redress of grievances, so lobbying cannot simply be prohibited. And the American legislature is genuinely independent of the executive: a member of Congress votes as they choose, and there is no whip that can compel a vote in the Indian sense. That makes each individual legislator worth persuading, which is why professional lobbying grew there first and grew largest.

The Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995

The Act does not limit lobbying. It compels it into the open, by four mechanisms.

A definition. Section 1602 defines a lobbyist as an individual employed or retained by a client for financial or other compensation, for services that include more than one lobbying contact, excluding an individual whose lobbying activities are less than twenty per cent of the time they spend on services for that client over a three-month period. Two things follow. The occasional approach is not caught, and a professional whose lobbying is a small part of a wider practice is not caught either, which is the gap most criticised.

Registration. Section 1603 requires registration, subject to money thresholds in subsection (a)(3): a lobbying firm whose total income from a particular client does not and is not expected to exceed two thousand five hundred dollars, and an organisation whose total lobbying expenses do not and are not expected to exceed ten thousand dollars, in the quarterly period, are exempt. Small activity is left alone; sustained activity must be registered.

Reports. Section 1604 requires registered lobbyists to file reports quarterly, naming the client, the issues, the chambers and agencies contacted, and the money.

Publication and enforcement. Section 1605 puts the filings on the public record and provides the machinery for enforcing them.

munotes.in37

Lobbying in India and in the United States

The 2007 tightening

The Honest Leadership and Open Government Act of 2007 amended the scheme after a series of scandals. It is the reason reporting became quarterly rather than half-yearly, and it added restrictions around gifts, travel and the movement of former members and staff into lobbying.

The separate regime for foreign interests

An agent acting for a foreign government, party or principal registers under a different statute altogether, the Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938, and files under the supervision of the Attorney General. The point for an Indian student is that a foreign company or government seeking to influence American policy is on a public register, which is why Indian newspapers have from time to time been able to report exactly how much a foreign firm spent lobbying on an Indian policy question, and on what. That reporting is possible because the American filings are public; the Indian side of the same transaction is not recorded anywhere.

What the American system achieves, and what it does not

It achieves disclosure. Anybody can find out who is registered, for whom, on what.

It does not achieve equality. Disclosure tells you that one side spent a hundred times what the other did; it does not change the fact.

It has known gaps. The twenty per cent rule and the thresholds let a good deal of activity go unregistered, and "strategic advice" that stops short of contact is outside the definition altogether.

India

There is no lobbying law

India has no statute that registers lobbyists, defines lobbying, or requires anybody to disclose that they lobbied. A full-text search of India Code, which carries central and State legislation, returns no enactment on the subject; the word appears only in unrelated contexts such as hotel lobbies. Private members' proposals to create a disclosure regime have been introduced from time to time and none has become law.

What India has instead

The criminal law of bribery. The Prevention of Corruption Act 1988 punishes a public servant who takes an undue advantage and, since the 2018 amendment, also punishes the giver. That reaches the far end of the spectrum and nothing before it: a meeting, a memorandum or a drafted clause is not an offence, and neither is it recorded.

Parliamentary privilege and discipline. Each House may discipline its own members, and in an extreme case expel them. This is where the leading Indian authority sits.

Facts. Raja Ram Pal v. Hon'ble Speaker, Lok Sabha, (2007) 3 SCC 184, arose from a broadcast on 12 December 2005 by the television channel Aaj Tak. In an operation it called Operation Duryodhana, the channel recorded persons said to be members of Parliament accepting money for tabling questions and raising issues in the House. The episode was reported as "cash for questions". Both Houses appointed inquiry committees, and on their reports ten members of the Lok Sabha and one member of the Rajya Sabha were expelled by resolutions of their respective Houses. The expelled members petitioned the Supreme Court under article 32, arguing that no House had any power to expel a member at all, that expulsion deprived their constituencies of representation, and that the inquiry had been unfair.

munotes.in38

Lobbying in India and in the United States

Held. A Constitution Bench of five judges dismissed every petition. It held that each House possesses the power to expel a member under article 105(3), that this power conflicts with no other constitutional provision, and that it does not injure the constituency, since an expelled member may stand again and the constituency may return him. It held that proceedings of a House are open to judicial review where they are vitiated by illegality or unconstitutionality, though not for mere irregularity of procedure, which article 122 protects. On the facts it found relevant material in the video recordings, no violation of articles 14, 20 or 21, and a fair opportunity given to each member, and it declined to review the quantum of punishment, which it said must be left to the House.

Why it matters here. It fixes the outer edge of the influence spectrum in Indian law and shows what India has in place of a disclosure statute. Paying a member to ask a question is not lobbying; it is corruption, and it was dealt with. But it was dealt with by the House's own disciplinary power, after a television channel exposed it, with no register, no filing and no requirement that anything be published in advance. Everything short of a payment leaves no trace at all.

Codes of conduct. Both Houses have ethics machinery and codes of conduct for members, and members must declare their interests. These bind the member, not the person who approaches them.

Disclosure by companies. Companies must disclose political contributions in their accounts, which catches money to parties and not money spent on influencing a rule.

How lobbying is actually done in India

It happens, on a large scale, and under other names: industry associations, public affairs consultancies, law firms with a policy practice, retired officials retained as advisers, and personal access. Because none of it is registered, an ordinary citizen cannot find out who met a minister about a rule that affects them, which is the practical difference from the American position.

Three episodes are usually cited in discussion of the subject, and they should be described for what they are. The publication in 2010 of intercepted telephone conversations of a corporate public relations professional showed how access was arranged and how far it extended, and it produced a national debate about lobbying but no statute. The cash for questions expulsions in 2005, above, showed the disciplinary route. And the public filings made in the United States by foreign companies about their lobbying on Indian policy questions showed that the same activity is documented in one country and invisible in the other.

munotes.in39

Lobbying in India and in the United States

A worked example

A foreign technology company wants an Indian data localisation rule relaxed, and the same company wants an American export restriction eased.

On the American side, its conduct is on a public record. It retains a firm, and the firm registers under the Lobbying Disclosure Act because its income from the client will exceed the threshold in section 1603(a)(3). Every quarter it files under section 1604, naming the client, the issues, the chambers and agencies contacted and the money spent. If it acts for a foreign government rather than a company, it registers under the Foreign Agents Registration Act instead. A student in Mumbai, with a browser, can read all of it.

On the Indian side, it approaches an industry association, which makes a submission to the ministry; it retains a public affairs consultancy, which arranges meetings; and it commissions a study at a policy institute. Every one of these is lawful and none of it is registered, filed or published. If the rule is relaxed, nobody outside the ministry can say who asked for it, how often, or what was argued.

The measurable difference. Two identical campaigns, one of which leaves a public paper trail and one of which leaves none. Notice that the American filings do not stop the company from being heard, and do not equalise its voice against a citizens' group's. What they produce is a record, and it is the record, not any restriction, that is the whole content of American regulation.

Distinctions that carry marks

United StatesIndia
Is lobbying defined by law?Yes, 2 U.S.C. s.1602No
RegistrationCompulsory above the thresholds in s.1603None
ReportingQuarterly, s.1604None
Public access to filingsYes, s.1605Nothing to access
Foreign interestsSeparate registration under FARA 1938No separate regime
What the law reachesThe activity itself, by disclosureOnly bribery, and breach of privilege
Leading authority a student should citeThe statute itselfRaja Ram Pal, (2007) 3 SCC 184
Practical resultInfluence is recorded and unequalInfluence is unequal and unrecorded

What this is NOT

"India has no lobbying" is false. India has no lobbying law. The activity is at least as extensive as anywhere else; it is simply not on a register.

American regulation does not make lobbying fair. Disclosure changes what is known, not who is heard.

munotes.in40

Lobbying in India and in the United States

Registration is not licensing. The American statute does not decide who may lobby or how much. It requires that those who do say so.

The absence of an Indian statute is not an absence of any law. Bribery is an offence, parliamentary privilege is enforceable, and codes of conduct bind members. What is missing is regulation of the lawful part of the activity, which is most of it.

Quick revision

  1. United States: Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, 2 U.S.C. ss.1601 to 1614. s.1602 defines a lobbyist, more than one contact and the twenty per cent exclusion; s.1603 registration with thresholds of $2,500 income per client or $10,000 of expenses in a quarter; s.1604 quarterly reports; s.1605 disclosure and enforcement.
  2. Strengthened by the Honest Leadership and Open Government Act of 2007, which brought quarterly reporting and gift, travel and revolving-door restrictions.
  3. Agents of foreign principals register separately under the Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938, 22 U.S.C. s.611 and following.
  4. India: no statute at all. India Code carries no enactment on lobbying.
  5. India reaches only the far end: the Prevention of Corruption Act 1988, parliamentary privilege and expulsion, and codes of conduct.
  6. Raja Ram Pal v. Hon'ble Speaker, Lok Sabha, (2007) 3 SCC 184: cash for questions, eleven members expelled, power to expel upheld under article 105(3), judicial review available for illegality but not for irregularity of procedure under article 122.
  7. The one-line comparison: in America influence is recorded and unequal; in India it is unequal and unrecorded.

Test yourself

1. How does the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 regulate lobbying? Not by prohibition but by disclosure. Section 1602 defines a lobbyist as one retained for compensation whose services include more than one lobbying contact, excluding anyone whose lobbying is less than twenty per cent of the time spent for that client in three months. Section 1603 requires registration above money thresholds of $2,500 of income per client or $10,000 of expenses in the quarter. Section 1604 requires quarterly reports naming clients, issues, contacts and amounts, and section 1605 makes them public and enforceable.

2. What is FARA, and why does it matter to an Indian student? The Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938, 22 U.S.C. section 611 and following, which requires agents acting for foreign governments, parties and principals to register and file separately, under the supervision of the Attorney General. It matters because it is why the sums a foreign company spends lobbying on an Indian policy question can be read off an American public record, while the Indian half of the same activity appears nowhere at all.

3. What law governs lobbying in India? None. There is no Indian statute that defines lobbying, registers lobbyists or requires disclosure of it, and a full-text search of India Code returns no enactment on the subject. Indian law reaches only the extremes: the Prevention of Corruption Act 1988 where influence becomes a payment for an official act, and the disciplinary and privilege jurisdiction of each House of Parliament where a member is involved. Everything lawful in between is unrecorded.

munotes.in41

Lobbying in India and in the United States

4. State the facts and the holding in Raja Ram Pal. In December 2005 a television channel broadcast recordings of persons said to be members of Parliament accepting money for tabling questions. After inquiries, ten Lok Sabha members and one Rajya Sabha member were expelled by resolutions of their Houses, and they petitioned under article 32. A Constitution Bench dismissed the petitions, holding that each House has the power to expel under article 105(3), that the power does not violate any constitutional provision or the constituency's rights since the member may stand again, and that proceedings of a House may be judicially reviewed for illegality or unconstitutionality but not for mere irregularity of procedure, which article 122 protects.

5. Compare the Indian and American positions and say which you would adopt, with reasons. The American system defines lobbying, registers those who do it above modest thresholds, and publishes quarterly what was spent on whom and about what; the Indian system does none of this and reaches only bribery and breach of privilege. The American approach does not equalise access, and it has real gaps in the twenty per cent rule and in advice that stops short of contact. It nonetheless produces a record, and a record is what makes the second face of power visible: a citizen in India cannot presently discover who was consulted about a rule that governs them, which is an argument for a disclosure statute rather than for a prohibition.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in42

Chapter Ten

The Elite Theory of Power

Syllabus topic 1.1.4, "Theories of Power- Elite theory and Marxist theory of Power (Specified)"

In one line

Elite theory says that in every society, however it describes itself, a small organised minority rules and the large disorganised majority is ruled, and that this is not an accident of any particular system but a permanent feature of organised human life.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the elite theory of power holds that political power in every society is concentrated in the hands of a small minority, the elite, who owe their position to superior organisation, capacity or resources; that the majority, however numerous, cannot rule because it cannot organise; and that democracy therefore does not abolish minority rule but changes the way the ruling minority is recruited.

The claim, and what it is aimed at

Elite theory was built as an answer to two other accounts of power that were dominant at the end of the nineteenth century.

Against democratic theory, it says that popular rule is impossible, not merely difficult. A mass cannot deliberate, cannot decide and cannot act, so it must delegate; and delegation creates leaders; and leaders acquire interests of their own.

Against Marxism, it says that the division between rulers and ruled is more fundamental than the division between classes. Abolish private property and you do not abolish the elite; you change its composition. This is the sharpest disagreement in the whole of topic 1.1.4 and is the point on which the next chapter turns.

Gaetano Mosca and the ruling class

Mosca's Elementi di scienza politica (Turin, 1896) is the founding statement. His proposition is that in all societies two classes of people appear: a class that rules and a class that is ruled. The first is always the less numerous, performs all political functions, monopolises power and enjoys its advantages. The second is directed and controlled by the first.

Three parts of Mosca's account are worth carrying into an answer.

The minority rules because it is organised. Mosca's explanation is not that the rulers are better people. It is that a hundred people who act together will always defeat a thousand who act separately, and that the hundred can act together because they are few.

The political formula. Every ruling class justifies itself by a formula that the ruled accept: divine right, the will of the people, the mandate of history, scientific expertise. The formula is not a lie exactly; it is the story a society tells itself about why these people are in charge, and it is what turns power into authority. A student who has read the legitimacy chapters will recognise the idea.

Circulation, not abolition. Ruling classes change, decay and are replaced. There is never a moment when nobody rules.

munotes.in43

The Elite Theory of Power

Michels cites Mosca on a small point that shows how the theory works: the drive to keep a position in the family is so strong that where members of a dominant class could have no sons of their own, as with the prelates of the Roman Church, nepotism arose spontaneously to serve the same purpose.

Vilfredo Pareto and the circulation of elites

Pareto approached the same fact through psychology rather than organisation. Societies contain people of superior capacity in every field, and those with capacity in the arts of government form the governing elite.

His contribution to an answer is the theory of the circulation of elites. Elites are not permanent. They decay, because the qualities that win power are not the qualities that keep it, and because an elite that closes its ranks stops recruiting the ablest from below. When it decays, a counter-elite forms and replaces it, and the cycle begins again. Pareto's famous names for the two temperaments, the cunning foxes who rule by manipulation and the forceful lions who rule by strength, describe the alternation: a governing class of foxes eventually loses the will to use force and is displaced by lions, who in time become foxes.

The political conclusion is bleak and is the one examiners want stated: history is a graveyard of aristocracies. Revolutions do not end elite rule. They replace one elite with another.

Robert Michels and the iron law of oligarchy

Michels is the member of the trio whose evidence is best, because he did not argue from history in general. He studied the organisation most committed to internal democracy in the Europe of his day, the German Social Democratic Party and the trade unions attached to it, and asked whether an organisation that believed in democracy could practise it.

His answer is the sentence MU's own paper has asked about. Michels writes, in Political Parties (1915), that it is organisation which gives birth to the dominion of the elected over the electors, of the mandataries over the mandators, of the delegates over the delegators, and concludes: "Who says organization, says oligarchy." He adds immediately that every party organisation represents an oligarchical power grounded upon a democratic basis, that everywhere there are electors and elected, and that the power of the elected leaders over the electing masses is almost unlimited.

Why organisation produces oligarchy

Michels's causes fall into three groups, and an answer that gives all three is complete.

Technical and administrative causes. A large body cannot decide anything by meeting. It must delegate, and delegation means a permanent staff, which means specialisation, which means that after a few years only the officials know how the organisation works.

Psychological causes in the leaders. Office confers status, income and a way of life. Leaders come to identify the organisation's interest with their own continuance, and, in a phrase Michels quotes from French working-class circles, homme elu, homme foutu: the man elected is the man finished. Even the purest idealist who holds power for a few years, he writes, cannot escape the corruption that the exercise of power brings with it.

munotes.in44

The Elite Theory of Power

Psychological causes in the masses. Most members are not interested in administration, are grateful to those who do it, and feel a genuine need for guidance and even for veneration of their leaders. Apathy is not imposed on them; it is a fact about how people spend their attention.

The conclusion Michels draws

If the most democratic organisation in the most democratic movement in Europe was in practice run by its officials, then oligarchy is not a defect of a particular party but a law of organisation as such, and any organisation, of any ideology, will produce it. From this he draws the conclusion that a socialist student should find hardest: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism, which would perish at the moment of its adherents' triumph, because a victorious movement is an organisation and an organisation is an oligarchy.

C. Wright Mills and the power elite

Mills wrote about the United States in the middle of the twentieth century and gave the theory its modern form. His argument is that power in a large industrial society is concentrated at the top of three institutional hierarchies, the political directorate, the corporate chiefs and the military commanders, and that the men who occupy those positions are interchangeable, share a social background, education and outlook, and take the decisions that matter among themselves.

Mills is useful in an answer because his elite is institutional rather than personal: it is not that certain people are superior, but that certain positions carry power, and whoever occupies them will exercise it. He also insists the power elite is not a conspiracy; it does not need to meet in secret, because a common background and common interests produce coordinated behaviour without coordination.

The Indian application

The theory is easy to illustrate in India and a good answer does so rather than staying with European examples.

The composition of legislatures, the senior civil services, the higher judiciary and the boards of large companies has been studied repeatedly, and every study finds concentration by education, by language, by urban origin and by social group. Political families supply a substantial share of candidates in most parties. Party organisations, in the strongest possible confirmation of Michels, are run by small groups at the top, and elections to internal party posts are rare.

munotes.in45

The Elite Theory of Power

Where India departs from the classical theory is worth saying too, because it makes the answer balanced. Since the 1990s, elite composition has changed substantially: groups previously excluded from power have captured State governments, reservation has altered the recruitment of the administrative services, and local government has brought several million people from those groups into elected office. That is not the abolition of the elite, which the theory would say is impossible, but it is exactly what Pareto called circulation, and it happened without a revolution.

A worked example

A State decides how to spend two thousand crore rupees allotted for urban infrastructure.

What a pluralist expects to see. Residents' associations, transport unions, contractors, environmental groups and ward councillors each press their case, and the allocation reflects the balance of their strength.

What an elite theorist predicts. The choice between a metro line, a flyover network and a piped water programme was effectively settled before any of those groups was consulted, in meetings between a handful of people: two ministers, three secretaries, the head of the development authority and the consultants who prepared the feasibility report. Mosca's explanation is that those eight can act together and the several lakh residents cannot. Michels adds that the residents' associations, which exist to represent them, are themselves run by a few office bearers who have held their posts for years and who deal with the same eight people.

What would falsify the prediction. If the allocation were changed materially by a public consultation, if the associations' office bearers turned over regularly, or if the eight came from visibly different backgrounds and disagreed along those lines. Those are testable, which is the merit of the theory.

Where the theory is silent. It cannot say whether the metro was the right choice. Elite theory explains who decided and why it was few; it has nothing at all to say about whether the decision was good, and an answer that treats it as a criticism of the outcome has misunderstood it.

Criticism of elite theory

It proves too much. If every arrangement is oligarchy, the word stops distinguishing anything. There is a real difference between a party whose leaders can be voted out and one whose leaders cannot, and elite theory has trouble expressing it.

Michels's evidence is narrow. One party, in one country, before the First World War, in conditions of persecution that themselves encouraged centralised control.

Elites compete. The pluralist reply is that there is no single elite but many, in business, labour, agriculture, the professions and the regions, and that they check each other, which is a different system from rule by one group.

It ignores the effect of accountability. Even if a minority always decides, it matters greatly whether that minority must face an electorate, a free press and a court.

munotes.in46

The Elite Theory of Power

It is politically dangerous. If popular rule is impossible, the argument for resisting authoritarian rule is weakened, and elite theory has historically been used for exactly that purpose.

Distinctions that carry marks

MoscaParetoMichelsMills
Central termThe ruling classThe governing eliteOligarchyThe power elite
Why the few ruleThey are organisedThey have superior capacityOrganisation compels itThey occupy the commanding positions
Key deviceThe political formulaCirculation of elites; foxes and lionsThe iron law of oligarchyThree interlocking hierarchies
EvidenceComparative historyComparative history and psychologyA study of one socialist partyA study of one country
On revolutionReplaces one ruling class with anotherHistory is a graveyard of aristocraciesThe socialists may win but socialism cannotNot the main question

What elite theory is NOT

It is not a conspiracy theory. Mills is explicit that the power elite need not meet or plot; shared position and background produce shared behaviour.

It is not the same as the Marxist theory of power. Both say a minority rules. They disagree about why, about whether it can ever end, and about what the minority is: for Marx it is the class that owns the means of production, for the elite theorists it is whoever is organised, and that difference is the subject of the comparison chapter.

It is not an argument against democracy in every sense. Several elite theorists accepted that competition between elites for popular votes is a real and valuable thing, and Joseph Schumpeter built a whole theory of democracy on it, defining democracy as an institutional arrangement in which individuals acquire the power to decide by means of a competitive struggle for the people's vote.

"Iron law" is Michels's phrase, not a description of a proven regularity. He called it a law; whether it is one is the argument.

Quick revision

  1. Core claim: in every society an organised minority rules and a disorganised majority is ruled.
  2. Mosca, Elementi di scienza politica (1896): two classes always appear; the minority rules because it is organised; every ruling class has a political formula that justifies it.
  3. Pareto: the circulation of elites; foxes and lions; history is a graveyard of aristocracies.
  4. Michels, Political Parties (1915): "Who says organization, says oligarchy." Causes are technical, psychological in the leaders, and psychological in the masses. Studied the German Social Democratic Party, the hardest case for his thesis.
  5. Mills: the power elite of political, corporate and military hierarchies; institutional, not conspiratorial.
  6. Criticism: proves too much; narrow evidence; elites compete; accountability matters; and it can be used to argue against democracy itself.
munotes.in47

The Elite Theory of Power

Test yourself

1. "Who says organization, says oligarchy." Who said it, and why? Robert Michels, in Political Parties (1915). He argued that organisation itself gives birth to the dominion of the elected over the electors and of the delegates over the delegators. A large body cannot decide by meeting, so it delegates; delegation creates a permanent and specialised staff; the staff alone comes to understand the organisation; leaders acquire an interest in their own continuance; and the members, being uninterested in administration and grateful to those who do it, accept the arrangement. He drew this from the German Social Democratic Party, the organisation of his day most committed to internal democracy, which is what made the conclusion an iron law rather than a complaint about one party.

2. State Mosca's theory of the ruling class. That in every society two classes appear, one that rules and one that is ruled. The ruling class is always the less numerous, performs all political functions, monopolises power and enjoys its advantages, while the second is directed by the first. The minority prevails not because it is better but because it is organised, and a small number acting together defeats a large number acting separately. Every ruling class also maintains a political formula, a justification the ruled accept, which converts power into authority.

3. Explain the circulation of elites. Pareto's proposition that elites are not permanent. An elite decays because the qualities that win power are not those that retain it, and because an elite that closes its ranks stops recruiting ability from below. A counter-elite then forms and displaces it. He described the alternation through two temperaments, the cunning foxes who rule by manipulation and the forceful lions who rule by strength, each in time giving way to the other. The conclusion is that revolutions replace one elite with another rather than ending elite rule.

4. What is the power elite, and how does Mills's version differ from Michels's? Mills's power elite is the small group at the top of three interlocking hierarchies in a modern industrial society, the political directorate, the corporate chiefs and the military commanders, whose members share background and outlook and decide the important questions among themselves. It differs from Michels in its source: Michels derives oligarchy from the internal logic of any organisation, so it appears even in a small union branch, while Mills derives it from the concentration of decisions in a few institutional positions in a particular kind of society at a particular stage.

5. Give three criticisms of elite theory. First, it proves too much: if every arrangement is oligarchy, the term cannot distinguish a party whose leaders can be voted out from one whose leaders cannot, though the difference is real. Second, the pluralist reply is that there is no single elite but many competing ones in business, labour, the professions and the regions, which check each other. Third, it undervalues accountability: even if a minority always decides, it matters greatly whether that minority must face an electorate, a free press and a court.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in48

Chapter Eleven

The Marxist Theory of Power

Syllabus topic 1.1.4, "Theories of Power- Elite theory and Marxist theory of Power (Specified)"

In one line

The Marxist theory of power says that political power is not a thing in itself but a reflection of economic power: whoever owns the means by which a society produces its living will control its state, its law and even its ideas.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the Marxist theory holds that every society beyond the most primitive is divided into classes defined by their relation to the means of production; that the class which owns those means is the ruling class; that the state is not a neutral arbiter but an instrument by which that class maintains its dominance; and that political power will therefore change hands only when the ownership of the means of production changes hands.

The vocabulary, defined before it is used

Means of production. Everything used to produce goods other than labour itself: land, factories, machinery, raw materials, capital.

Mode of production. The means of production together with the social relations of ownership that go with them. Marx's historical sequence runs primitive communism, slavery, feudalism, capitalism, socialism, communism.

Class. A group defined by its relation to the means of production, not by income or status. Under capitalism the two principal classes are the bourgeoisie, who own the means of production, and the proletariat, who own nothing but their labour power and must sell it.

Base and superstructure. The economic structure of a society is the base; law, politics, religion, morality and art are the superstructure that rises on it and, in the main, reflects it.

Class struggle. The conflict between classes over the surplus, which for Marx and Engels is the motor of historical change.

The four propositions

1. Economic power is the source of political power

This is the foundation and everything else follows from it. Political power is not held because someone won an election or wears a crown; it is held because someone owns. Whoever controls the means of production controls the livelihoods of everyone else, and control of livelihood is control of behaviour. Elections, constitutions and offices distribute the appearance of power; ownership distributes the substance.

2. The state is an instrument of class rule

This is the sentence to quote. In the Manifesto of the Communist Party Marx and Engels write that the bourgeoisie has conquered for itself exclusive political sway in the modern representative State, and that "the executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie."

Read the sentence carefully, because two things in it are usually missed.

"A committee for managing the common affairs." Not a puppet taking orders from individual capitalists. It manages the common affairs, which means it may act against a particular capitalist, or a particular industry, to preserve the system as a whole. A Marxist can therefore explain factory legislation, a minimum wage or a bank rescue without embarrassment: each protects capitalism from capitalists.

munotes.in49

The Marxist Theory of Power

"Of the whole bourgeoisie." The state has a degree of independence from any individual owner, and later Marxists made a great deal of that independence, calling it the relative autonomy of the state.

Later in the same text they state the general proposition: "Political power, properly so called, is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another."

3. Law and ideas serve the same interest

The superstructure follows the base. Law defines and protects property, enforces contracts made between very unequal parties, and calls the arrangement freedom. The Manifesto puts the point about ideas in one line: "The ruling ideas of each age have ever been the ideas of its ruling class." What a society regards as obvious, natural, fair and unthinkable is, on this account, shaped by the interest of those who rule it.

This is the proposition a law student should sit with longest, because it is a claim about the subject they are studying. It is not the claim that judges are dishonest. It is the claim that a body of law which treats parties as formally equal will systematically favour the party who is substantively stronger, and that this happens through the ordinary and honest application of the rules.

4. The state will eventually disappear

If the state exists to hold one class down, then when classes end the state has nothing left to do. Engels puts this precisely in Socialism: Utopian and Scientific: once there is no social class to be held in subjection, nothing remains to be repressed and a special repressive force is no longer necessary; state interference becomes superfluous in one domain after another and then "dies out of itself"; the government of persons is replaced by the administration of things. And he insists on the word: "The State is not 'abolished'. It dies out."

That distinction is worth marks, because it separates Marxism from anarchism. The anarchist wants the state abolished now; Engels says it cannot be abolished and will become unnecessary.

Between capitalism and that condition, the Manifesto contemplates a transitional stage in which the proletariat makes itself the ruling class and uses state power to sweep away the old conditions of production. This is the dictatorship of the proletariat, and it is taught properly at topic 3.4.

The modern developments a good answer mentions

Gramsci and hegemony. Antonio Gramsci asked why the workers of Western Europe did not revolt when the theory said they should, and answered that the ruling class holds power not only through coercion by the state but through hegemony: leadership of the whole culture, through schools, churches, newspapers and common sense, so that its view of the world is accepted by those it rules as simply the way things are. This is the Marxist version of the third face of power.

munotes.in50

The Marxist Theory of Power

Instrumentalism and structuralism. Ralph Miliband argued that the state serves capital because the people who staff it are drawn from the same class; Nicos Poulantzas argued that it serves capital because of its structural position in a capitalist economy, whoever staffs it. The second is the stronger claim, since it survives the appointment of a socialist government.

The Indian debate. Indian Marxists have had to explain a state that is neither straightforwardly bourgeois nor feudal, and the standard account describes a ruling coalition of the industrial bourgeoisie, the rich farmers and the bureaucratic elite. Whether that is Marxism or elite theory in Marxist vocabulary is a fair question to raise in an answer.

A worked example

A State proposes a law raising the minimum wage for construction workers.

A pluralist sees competing groups: builders against unions, with government holding the ring, and the outcome reflecting their relative strength.

An elite theorist sees a decision taken by a small number of ministers, officials and industry leaders who know each other, whatever the unions say publicly.

A Marxist asks a different question altogether: who owns the sites, who owns the workers' time, and what happens to the surplus? On this reading the law will pass in a form the industry can live with, because the state manages the common affairs of the owners rather than the interests of any one builder. It may genuinely improve wages, because a workforce that cannot eat cannot build, and because a concession now prevents a confrontation later. And it will not touch the relation that produced the low wage, which is that the worker owns nothing and must sell their labour on whatever terms are offered. A Marxist would add that the law will be enforced weakly, not because inspectors are corrupt but because the machinery of enforcement is thin in exactly the places where the owners' interest lies in its being thin.

Notice that the Marxist prediction is testable, which is the merit of the theory. It predicts the shape of the concession as well as the fact of it.

Criticism of the Marxist theory of power

Economic determinism. The theory has trouble with power that is plainly not economic in origin: caste in India, religion, language, nationalism, gender. Engels himself said in later letters that the economic factor is determining only in the last instance, which is an admission that it is not determining in the first.

munotes.in51

The Marxist Theory of Power

The state has been more independent than the theory allows. Modern states regulate, tax and expropriate owners, and welfare states have redistributed on a scale the theory did not anticipate.

Where it was tried, the state did not die out. In the states that called themselves socialist, the abolition of private ownership produced not the withering away of power but its concentration, which is precisely what Michels predicted and what Pareto called circulation.

Class is not the only cleavage, and may not be the deepest. Indian voting behaviour has for decades been organised around caste and community at least as much as around class.

It underestimates democratic institutions. Universal suffrage, an independent judiciary and a free press have delivered real gains to the propertyless without the ownership of production changing hands.

Distinctions that carry marks

Pluralist viewElite theoryMarxist theory
Who holds powerMany competing groupsAn organised minorityThe class that owns the means of production
WhyThey organise and bargainOrganisation and capacityOwnership
The state isA neutral arena and refereeThe prize the elite occupiesAn instrument of class rule
Can it be changed?It changes constantlyOnly the personnel changeYes, by changing ownership
End pointContinuous bargainingCirculation of elitesClassless society; the state dies out

What this theory is NOT

It is not the claim that politicians take money from industrialists. That is corruption, and it is a much smaller claim. The Marxist claim is structural: the state serves the owning class through its ordinary, honest, lawful operation.

It is not the claim that the state never acts against business. The Manifesto's own words are "the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie", which allows the state to act against a particular owner to preserve the system.

It is not the same as the elite theory. Both say a minority rules; they disagree on what defines the minority and on whether minority rule can end. The next chapter is entirely about that disagreement.

"Withering away" is not abolition. Engels insists on the difference, and the difference is what separates Marxism from anarchism.

Quick revision

  1. Base and superstructure: economic structure is the base; law, politics, religion and ideas are the superstructure raised on it.
  2. Class is defined by relation to the means of production: bourgeoisie own, proletariat sell labour power.
  3. The quotation: "The executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie." Note common and whole.
  4. The general proposition: "Political power, properly so called, is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another."
  5. On ideas: "The ruling ideas of each age have ever been the ideas of its ruling class."
  6. Engels on the state: it "dies out of itself"; the government of persons is replaced by the administration of things; "The State is not 'abolished'. It dies out."
  7. Developments: Gramsci's hegemony; Miliband's instrumentalism against Poulantzas's structuralism.
  8. Criticism: economic determinism; the state's real independence; where tried, power concentrated instead of withering; caste and religion; the gains democracy has actually delivered.
munotes.in52

The Marxist Theory of Power

Test yourself

1. State the Marxist theory of power in four propositions. First, economic power is the source of political power: whoever owns the means of production controls the livelihood, and therefore the behaviour, of everyone else. Second, the state is not a neutral arbiter but an instrument by which the owning class maintains its dominance. Third, law, morality and the prevailing ideas form a superstructure that reflects and protects that base. Fourth, since the state exists to hold one class down, the end of classes leaves it nothing to do and it dies out.

2. Explain the Manifesto's description of the modern state, paying attention to its exact words. Marx and Engels write that the executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie. The word "committee" denies that the state is a puppet of individual capitalists; the words "common affairs" and "whole" allow it to act against a particular owner or industry in order to preserve the system as a whole. That is why a Marxist can explain factory legislation or a bank rescue without difficulty: each protects capitalism from capitalists.

3. What did Engels mean by saying the state "dies out"? That the state cannot be abolished by decree, as the anarchists wished, but becomes unnecessary. Once there is no class to be held in subjection, nothing remains to be repressed and a special repressive force is superfluous; state interference falls away in one domain after another, and the government of persons is replaced by the administration of things. He insisted on the distinction: the state is not abolished, it dies out.

4. What is hegemony, and what problem was it introduced to solve? Gramsci's term for the ruling class's leadership of the whole culture, exercised through schools, churches, newspapers and common sense, so that its view of the world is accepted by the ruled as simply the way things are. He introduced it to explain why the workers of Western Europe did not revolt when the theory predicted they would: power there rested less on the state's coercion than on consent that had been manufactured, which makes hegemony the Marxist counterpart of the third face of power.

munotes.in53

The Marxist Theory of Power

5. Give three criticisms of the Marxist theory of power. That it is economically deterministic and cannot account for power founded on caste, religion, language or gender, a difficulty Engels half conceded by saying the economic factor determines only in the last instance. That modern states have shown far more independence of owners than the theory allows, taxing, regulating and redistributing at a scale it did not anticipate. And that where the ownership of production was in fact transferred to the state, power did not wither away but concentrated, which is what the elite theorists predicted.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in54

Chapter Twelve

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

Syllabus topic 1.1.4, "Theories of Power- Elite theory and Marxist theory of Power (Specified)"

In one line

Both theories say that a small minority rules; they disagree about what makes the minority a minority, about whether minority rule can ever be ended, and about what the state is.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the elite theory and the Marxist theory agree that political power is always concentrated in few hands and that the appearance of popular rule conceals it, but they differ fundamentally in that the elite theorists locate the source of concentration in organisation and capacity, which are permanent features of social life, while Marxists locate it in the ownership of the means of production, which is historically specific and can be changed, so that for the first minority rule is inevitable and for the second it is transitory.

What they agree about

An answer that starts with the disagreements is weaker than one that establishes the common ground first, because the disagreements are only interesting once the agreement is clear.

Power is concentrated. Both reject the pluralist picture of many groups bargaining on a level field.

Democratic forms conceal it. Both hold that elections, constitutions and formal equality do not describe where power actually lies. Michels calls a party an oligarchical power grounded on a democratic basis; Marx calls the modern representative state the instrument through which the bourgeoisie holds exclusive political sway.

The rulers justify themselves with an idea. Mosca's political formula and the Marxist claim that the ruling ideas of an age are the ideas of its ruling class are recognisably the same observation, arrived at independently.

Power is not primarily about who wins a vote. Both look past the visible decision to the structure that produced it.

The three real disagreements

1. What defines the ruling minority

Marxists: ownership of the means of production. The ruling class is the class that owns, and it rules because it owns. Change the ownership and you change the ruling class.

Elite theorists: organisation, capacity and position. Mosca's minority rules because it is organised; Pareto's because it has the psychological qualities that suit government; Michels's because organisation itself produces leaders; Mills's because certain institutional positions carry power whoever occupies them.

Why the difference bites. On the Marxist account, a state-owned economy abolishes the ruling class. On the elite account, it merely moves the elite from the boardroom to the ministry, because the new managers are as few, as organised and as indispensable as the old owners were.

2. Whether minority rule can end

Marxists: yes. Class rule is a stage of history and will end when the material conditions that produce classes end. The state then dies out.

Elite theorists: no, and this is their central claim. Pareto: history is a graveyard of aristocracies, and one elite always replaces another. Michels: any organisation whatever will produce an oligarchy, so an organised movement against oligarchy will itself be an oligarchy.

munotes.in55

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

Michels states the conclusion in the sharpest possible form, and it is aimed directly at Marxism: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism, which would perish at the moment of its adherents' triumph. That single sentence is the elite theory's whole objection to Marxism, and an answer that quotes it has done the comparison.

3. What the state is

Marxists: an instrument. It exists to hold one class down, and its personnel, its law and its ideology follow from that function.

Elite theorists: a prize and an apparatus. Whoever occupies the state's commanding positions exercises its power, and the state does not have a class function separate from the interests of those who staff it. For Mills the state is one of three hierarchies, and not always the most important.

The historical test each has had

The Marxist prediction was that transferring ownership of the means of production to society would abolish class rule and let the state die out.

The elite prediction was that it would not, because organisation and administration would still be in a few hands, and those hands would acquire interests of their own.

The twentieth century ran the experiment. In the states that abolished private ownership of production, the state did not wither; it grew, and power concentrated further, in a party apparatus that no election could displace. On this the elite theorists were, on the record, right, and an honest answer says so.

But the elite theory has also been tested, and the result is less comfortable for it than its supporters admit. Michels's thesis was that internal democracy inside a mass organisation is impossible. Where organisations have adopted term limits, contested internal elections, external audit, transparency rules and judicially enforceable member rights, the leadership's power has been reduced, not abolished but reduced. That is not the abolition of oligarchy, but it is evidence that "iron" was too strong a word.

The Indian test

India is a good case for the comparison because both theories can be applied to it and neither fits comfortably.

For the Marxist reading. Ownership of land and industry is highly concentrated, corporate influence on economic policy is substantial, and the law of property, contract and labour operates within limits owners can live with.

For the elite reading. The composition of legislatures, senior services and higher courts is drawn narrowly, political families are prominent in most parties, and party organisations are run by small groups whose internal elections are rare, which is Michels confirmed almost exactly.

munotes.in56

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

Against both. Neither theory predicts caste. India's most consequential political cleavage for several decades has not been ownership, which is Marx's variable, nor organisational capacity, which is Michels's, but a status hierarchy neither of them modelled. And the entry of previously excluded groups into State governments and into local office since the 1990s is a large change that Marxism cannot explain, because ownership did not change, and that elite theory can only call circulation, which is true but tells us nothing about why the circulation took the direction it did.

That paragraph is the mark of a good answer: it does not choose between the two theories, it shows what each cannot see.

A worked example

A large private hospital chain is exempted from a rule capping the price of certain procedures.

The elite theorist's account. The exemption was settled among a small number of people who know each other: the health secretary, two ministers, the chain's managing director and the chairman of the association that speaks for private hospitals. They went to the same institutions and move between the same posts. Nobody was bribed and nothing was concealed. The few decided because the few can act and the many cannot, and if this government fell tomorrow the successor's health secretary would be drawn from the same pool.

The Marxist's account. Ask instead who owns the hospitals, who owns the labour of those who work in them, and where the surplus goes. The exemption is what a state that manages the common affairs of the owning class does: it protects the conditions in which private capital will continue to invest in health care, and it will do so whichever individuals hold office. The Marxist adds a prediction the elite theorist cannot make, that the exemption will be shaped so as to preserve the industry rather than any one firm, and that a firm which threatened the arrangement would be sacrificed.

What separates the two accounts. Replace all eight people with eight others of entirely different social background. The elite theorist says the exemption may well go the other way, because it depended on who those particular people were. The Marxist says it will not, because the structural position of private capital has not changed. That is a real, testable difference, and it is the whole of the disagreement.

The distinctions table

Elite theoryMarxist theory
Who rulesAn organised minority: the ruling class, the governing elite, the power eliteThe class that owns the means of production
Source of powerOrganisation, capacity, institutional positionOwnership of the means of production
Basis of the theorySociology and psychology of organisationPolitical economy and history
Is minority rule inevitable?Yes. It is a law of organisationNo. It is a stage of history
The state isThe prize, and an apparatus of administrationAn instrument of class rule
Effect of revolutionCirculation: one elite replaces anotherTransition to a classless society
What ends itNothing ends itThe abolition of private ownership of production
Key namesMosca, Pareto, Michels, MillsMarx, Engels, Lenin, Gramsci
Key phrase"Who says organization, says oligarchy""A committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie"
Strongest evidenceThe socialist states did not wither awayConcentration of wealth, and law's systematic favour to the propertied
Main weaknessCannot distinguish accountable from unaccountable minoritiesCannot account for caste, religion, language or nationalism
munotes.in57

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

What this comparison is NOT

It is not a choice between two errors. Each is strong exactly where the other is weak, and the standard modern position takes something from both: power is concentrated for structural reasons, ownership is one of the most important of them, and the concentration can be reduced by institutions even though it cannot be abolished.

Elite theory is not conservative by definition. Mills used it to attack the American establishment, not to defend it.

Marxism is not a theory that ignores organisation. Lenin's entire contribution was about organisation, and Michels would say Lenin proved his point rather than answered it.

Neither theory says democracy is worthless. They say it does not do what its official description claims. What follows from that is a further argument, and it is the argument of Module IV.

Quick revision

  1. Agree: power is concentrated; democratic forms conceal it; rulers justify themselves with an idea; the visible decision is not where to look.
  2. Disagree on the definition of the minority: ownership against organisation and position.
  3. Disagree on inevitability: Marx says class rule ends, the elite theorists say it never does.
  4. Disagree on the state: an instrument against a prize.
  5. Michels's line at Marxism: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism.
  6. The historical record favours the elite theorists on the withering away of the state, and shows that "iron" overstated the case where organisations have been made accountable.
  7. In India neither predicts caste, and neither explains the change in the composition of power since the 1990s.

Test yourself

1. On what do the elite theory and the Marxist theory agree? That political power is concentrated in a small minority and that pluralism's picture of many groups bargaining on a level field is false; that democratic forms conceal rather than describe where power lies; that rulers maintain a justifying idea, which Mosca calls the political formula and Marx calls the ruling ideas of the age; and that the visible decision is not where power is to be studied.

munotes.in58

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

2. What is the fundamental disagreement between them? What defines the ruling minority, and therefore whether minority rule can end. Marxists define it by ownership of the means of production, which is historically specific, so changing ownership changes the ruling class and eventually abolishes class rule. Elite theorists define it by organisation, capacity and institutional position, which are permanent features of social life, so no change of ownership can abolish the elite; it can only change who belongs to it.

3. How does Michels's conclusion bear directly on Marxism? Michels studied the German Social Democratic Party, the organisation most committed to internal democracy, and found it run by its officials. If oligarchy appears there, it is a property of organisation as such, and any movement organised to end class rule must itself become an oligarchy. He states the consequence in the sharpest form: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism, which would perish at the moment of its adherents' triumph.

4. Which theory does the historical record support? On one decisive point, the elite theorists. Where private ownership of the means of production was abolished, the state did not wither away as Engels predicted; it grew, and power concentrated in a party apparatus no election could displace, which is exactly Michels's prediction. But the record is not one-sided: where organisations have adopted term limits, contested internal elections, audit and enforceable member rights, leadership power has measurably fallen, which shows that "iron" was too strong a word for the law.

5. Apply both theories to India and say what each fails to explain. The Marxist reading is supported by concentrated ownership of land and industry and by the limits within which labour and property law operate. The elite reading is supported by the narrow social composition of legislatures, senior services and courts, by political families, and by party organisations run without internal elections. Neither predicts caste, which has been India's most consequential cleavage for decades and is a status hierarchy rather than a relation to production or a difference of organisational capacity. And neither explains the entry of previously excluded groups into State and local office since the 1990s, since ownership did not change and calling it circulation of elites does not say why the circulation went the way it did.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in59

Chapter Thirteen

What Authority Is

Syllabus topic 1.2, "Authority as a Concept in Political Science"; 1.2.1, "Meaning and Features of Authority"

In one line

Authority is power that the people subject to it accept as rightful, so that they obey because of who gave the order and not because of what will happen if they do not.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: authority is the right to command and the corresponding duty to obey, resting not on the capacity to compel but on the acceptance by those subject to it that the person or office commanding is entitled to do so, so that obedience is given voluntarily and the exercise of force becomes unnecessary in the normal case.

Why this is the most important idea in the module

The difference between power and authority is the difference between the dacoit and the tax officer, and everything in Modules II and IV depends on it.

If there were only power, then political obligation would be an empty question: you obey the strongest, and that is all there is to say. There would be no such thing as an unjust law, because "unjust" would add nothing to "one I dislike". There would be nothing for legitimacy to explain, because nothing would need explaining. And civil disobedience would be indistinguishable from crime.

The moment you say that some commands are entitled to be obeyed, all of those questions open at once. That is the work the concept of authority does.

Weber's definition

In section 16 of the first part of Wirtschaft und Gesellschaft, Weber defines three things in a single passage, and the relations between them are what a student must hold on to.

Macht, power, is every chance within a social relationship of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, no matter what that chance rests on.

Herrschaft, which we render as authority or domination, is the chance of finding obedience, among specifiable persons, for a command of a given content.

Disziplin, discipline, is the chance of finding prompt, automatic and unthinking obedience among a specifiable number of people, by force of a practised attitude.

Three features of the middle definition matter.

"A command of a given content." Authority is exercised through commands, which are addressed to somebody and tell them to do something. This distinguishes authority from mere influence, which need not command at all.

"Among specifiable persons." Authority has a scope. A Collector's authority runs in the district; a Vice Chancellor's in the university. Nobody has authority over everybody in everything.

"The chance of finding obedience." Like power, authority is a probability. It exists in the expectation of obedience, not in the act of obeying.

A translation note worth carrying. Herrschaft is usually rendered "authority" in Indian textbooks and "domination" in the scholarly literature, and the two English words do not feel the same. The German carries both senses. If a question quotes "legitimate domination", it is quoting the same concept this chapter calls authority.

munotes.in60

What Authority Is

The meaning of authority, and its essential feature

The meaning of authority is compressed into one word in every definition of it, and the word is accepted.

The whole content of the concept is in this. Authority exists because those subject to it think it exists. It is not a physical fact like strength or a legal fact like a section number; it is a shared belief, and it evaporates when the belief does.

Two consequences follow and both are examinable.

Authority is conferred from below, even when it is exercised from above. A judge's authority is real because litigants, lawyers, officials and the police accept it. On the day they stop accepting it, the judgment is a piece of paper.

Authority is cheap, and power is expensive. A state that has authority governs a hundred crore people with a few lakh police, because almost everybody complies without being made to. This is why every regime, however brutal, tries to convert power into authority, and why legitimacy is a practical problem and not a philosophical ornament.

Where authority comes from

Weber's three types are the classical answer and get chapters of their own. Before them, it helps to see the general sources.

Office. A person has authority because they occupy a position that carries it, and they lose it when they leave the position. This is the dominant form in a modern state.

Rules. An office has authority because a rule, ultimately a constitution, confers it.

Tradition. The arrangement has always been so.

Personal qualities. A leader is followed because of who they are, which is Weber's charisma.

Expertise. A specialist is obeyed on their subject. This is often called authority "in" a field as against authority "over" persons, and it is the sense in which a surgeon or a scholar is called an authority.

The two senses of the word, which students confuse

Authority as a right to command, which is what this module is about, and which is a relation between persons: "the tribunal has authority to decide this".

Authority as expertise, which is a relation between a person and a subject: "she is an authority on Roman law".

They are connected, because expertise is one reason people accept a right to command, but they are not the same, and an answer that slides between them loses marks.

A worked example

A traffic constable raises a hand and a line of vehicles stops.

Nothing was compelled. No barrier came down. The constable could not physically stop a bus and both parties know it.

munotes.in61

What Authority Is

The order was obeyed because of who gave it. The same gesture from a passer-by would be ignored. The uniform is the visible sign of an office, and the office is what is being obeyed.

The order was within scope. If the constable had directed the driver to sell his bus, nobody would have complied, and the refusal would not have been disobedience at all, because the direction would be outside the authority.

The obedience is voluntary but not optional. The driver may believe the direction is mistaken and stops anyway. That is the signature of authority: compliance detached from agreement.

Force is in the background and is not doing the work. A prosecution is possible, and the fact that it is almost never necessary is what makes this authority and not coercion. If every driver had to be threatened individually, the arrangement would collapse in an hour.

Distinctions that carry marks

PowerAuthority
Rests onCapacity to compel or induceAcceptance that the holder is entitled
Subject obeys becauseOf what will happen otherwiseOf who gave the order
Conferred byResources, position, strengthThe belief of those subject to it
CostHigh: it must be applied case by caseLow: compliance is general and voluntary
RangeWherever the capacity reachesOnly within its defined scope
If challengedEscalate, or loseThe system faces a legitimacy crisis
ExampleA dacoit taking your moneyA tax officer collecting it

What authority is NOT

Authority is not the same as authoritarianism. The first is a normal and necessary feature of every organised society; the second is a form of rule that suppresses opposition. A word's ugly cousin is not its meaning.

Authority is not the same as legitimacy. Authority is the right to command; legitimacy is the belief in the rightness that makes that right recognised. They are so close that textbooks blur them, and the difference is that legitimacy is the ground and authority is the relation built on it. This is why 1.4 comes after 1.2 in MU's own numbering.

Authority does not mean the subject agrees. The obedience of authority is precisely obedience without agreement. A litigant who obeys a decree they think wrong is the paradigm case.

Authority is not unlimited. It always has a scope, and a command outside the scope is not an exercise of authority at all. In administrative law this is exactly the doctrine that an act beyond the power conferred is void, and the political concept and the legal doctrine are the same idea in two vocabularies.

Quick revision

  1. Authority is power accepted as rightful: the right to command and the duty to obey.
  2. Weber, in one passage: Macht is the chance of prevailing against resistance; Herrschaft, authority or domination, is the chance of finding obedience to a command of a given content among specifiable persons; Disziplin is prompt and automatic obedience by habit.
  3. The essential feature is acceptance. Authority exists because those subject to it believe it does.
  4. Therefore it is conferred from below and it is cheap, while power is expensive.
  5. Sources: office, rules, tradition, personal qualities, expertise.
  6. Two senses: authority over persons, and authority on a subject. Do not slide between them.
  7. Scope is essential: a command outside the scope is not authority at all, which is the political twin of the legal doctrine that an act beyond power is void.
munotes.in62

What Authority Is

Test yourself

1. Define authority and explain what distinguishes it from power. Authority is the right to command and the corresponding duty to obey, resting on the acceptance by those subject to it that the commander is entitled to command. Power rests on the capacity to compel or induce, so the subject complies because of what will follow otherwise; authority rests on acceptance, so the subject complies because of who gave the order. The dacoit and the tax officer both take money; only one of them can expect to be thought entitled.

2. Give Weber's three definitions from the same passage and say how they relate. Power, Macht, is every chance within a social relationship of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, whatever it rests on. Authority, Herrschaft, is the chance of finding obedience for a command of a given content among specifiable persons. Discipline, Disziplin, is the chance of prompt, automatic and unthinking obedience among a specifiable number of people by force of habit. Power is the widest, authority narrower, discipline narrowest; each is a special case of the one before.

3. Why is authority said to be conferred from below? Because it exists only in the belief of those subject to it. A judge's orders bind because litigants, counsel, officials and the police accept that they do; if that acceptance were withdrawn, the judgment would be a piece of paper and no additional legal provision could restore it. The command is issued downward, but the fact that makes it a command rather than a request is supplied upward.

4. Why is authority cheaper than power? Because compliance is general and voluntary, so the sanction almost never has to be applied. A state with authority governs an enormous population with a small police force, since nearly everybody complies without being made to. Power has to be brought to bear case by case, at a cost in money, manpower and resentment, and a government that must compel routinely is displaying weakness rather than strength.

munotes.in63

What Authority Is

5. What is the scope of authority, and what is its legal counterpart? Weber's definition confines authority to commands of a given content addressed to specifiable persons, so every authority has a defined range of subjects and subject matter. A direction outside that range is not disobeyed but disregarded, and disregarding it is not disobedience at all. Its counterpart in law is the rule that an authority may do only what its conferring provision permits, and that an act beyond that power is void; the political concept and the legal doctrine are one idea in two vocabularies.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in64

Chapter Fourteen

The Features of Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.1, "Meaning and Features of Authority - De jure and De facto Authority"

In one line

Authority is always attached to a position rather than a person, limited in what it may reach, exercised by commands, accepted rather than imposed, capable of being delegated, and dependent on a belief that can be withdrawn.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the essential features of authority are that it is relational, legitimate, impersonal in the sense of attaching to an office, limited in scope, hierarchical, exercised through commands, voluntarily obeyed, delegable, backed by sanctions that it seldom needs, and revocable.

The features

1. It is relational

Authority exists between people. There is one who commands and one who obeys, and the question is always "authority over whom".

2. It is legitimate

This is the feature that makes it authority and not power. Those subject to it accept that the holder is entitled to command. If that acceptance is absent, what remains is coercion wearing the same uniform.

3. It attaches to the office, not to the person

The most important feature for a law student, and the one students state least clearly.

A District Magistrate has authority; the individual who is District Magistrate today has authority only while they hold the post. On transfer, the authority stays with the office and the person leaves without it. This is why an order signed by a Magistrate remains valid after that Magistrate retires, and why the successor may vary it.

Weber called this the impersonal character of legal authority and treated it as the mark of a modern state. Where authority attaches to a person rather than an office, as it does under charismatic and to some extent traditional authority, succession becomes a crisis every time.

4. It is limited in scope

Every authority has boundaries of three kinds: over whom it runs, over what subject matter, and for how long. A command outside those boundaries is not an authoritative command at all. In administrative law this is the rule that an authority may act only within the power conferred and that an act beyond it is void, and a student should notice that the political concept and the legal doctrine are the same thing.

5. It is hierarchical

Authority is normally arranged in a ladder, so that each holder is subject to a higher one and there is a route by which a decision can be questioned. This is what makes appeal, revision and review possible, and it is why an authority that answers to nobody is regarded as a defect in a system rather than as its strongest point.

6. It is exercised through commands

Authority operates by directions addressed to somebody, telling them what to do or not to do. This distinguishes it from influence, which changes behaviour without commanding.

munotes.in65

The Features of Authority

7. Obedience to it is voluntary

The subject complies without being compelled, and, importantly, often without agreeing. A litigant who obeys a decree they think mistaken is exercising exactly the attitude that authority requires.

8. It can be delegated

An authority may authorise another to exercise a part of its power, and the delegate's acts then bind as the delegator's would. Two limits follow, and both are law as well as politics: the delegate cannot receive more than the delegator has, and, in the absence of permission, a delegate cannot delegate further.

9. It carries sanctions but rarely uses them

Behind an authority there is always the possibility of a consequence for disobedience. What makes it authority is that the possibility is in the background. When the sanction has to be applied to everybody, the authority has failed and only power is left.

10. It is revocable

Authority depends on a belief and beliefs change. It can be lost when the office is abolished, when the holder is removed, when a court declares the exercise unlawful, or, most fundamentally, when the people subject to it stop accepting it. That last possibility is what makes Modules II and IV possible.

A worked example

A Registrar of a university issues a circular that examinations will be held offline.

Relational: it binds the students and staff of that university and nobody else.

Legitimate: it is obeyed because the Registrar's office is accepted as entitled to issue it.

Impersonal: if the Registrar retires tomorrow, the circular stands, and the successor may amend it.

Limited: the same Registrar cannot direct where students must live or how they must vote. A circular attempting it would not be disobeyed; it would be disregarded, and rightly.

Hierarchical: the Registrar acts under the Vice Chancellor and the statutes, and a student may take the matter to the university's own authorities and then to a court.

Commanded: it is a direction, not a suggestion.

Voluntarily obeyed: students who think online examinations better still attend the hall.

Delegable: the Registrar may authorise a Deputy Registrar to issue the hall tickets, and cannot authorise them to do what the Registrar could not do.

Sanctioned: absence has consequences, and almost nobody has to be told so.

Revocable: the statutes may be amended, the office reorganised, or the circular quashed by a court as beyond power.

Distinctions that carry marks

AuthorityInfluenceCoercion
Operates byA commandArgument, reputation, exampleA threat
Attaches toAn officeA personWhoever holds the means of harm
Obeyed becauseThe holder is entitledThe subject is persuadedThe subject is afraid
Has a defined scope?Yes, alwaysNoOnly the reach of the threat
Survives the holder?YesNoNo
Can be delegated?YesNoOnly with the means of harm
munotes.in66

The Features of Authority

What these features are NOT

"Impersonal" does not mean cold or indifferent. It means that the authority belongs to the office. A very popular officer and an unpopular one hold identical authority.

"Hierarchical" does not mean authoritarian. The ladder exists so that decisions can be questioned, which is a protection and not a threat.

"Voluntary" does not mean optional. The subject is not free to disobey without consequence; they are complying without being compelled.

"Limited" is not a weakness of authority. It is part of the definition. An unlimited authority is a contradiction, because there would be nothing to distinguish its commands from anybody's demands.

Quick revision

  1. Relational: always over somebody, in something.
  2. Legitimate: accepted as rightful. This is the feature that makes it authority.
  3. Impersonal: attaches to the office, not the person; survives the holder.
  4. Limited in scope: over whom, over what, for how long. Outside the scope it is not authority at all.
  5. Hierarchical: subject to a higher authority, which is what makes appeal and review possible.
  6. Exercised by command, unlike influence.
  7. Voluntarily obeyed, often without agreement.
  8. Delegable, but a delegate takes no more than the delegator had and cannot sub-delegate without permission.
  9. Backed by sanctions it rarely needs. When it must always use them, it has failed.
  10. Revocable, ultimately by the withdrawal of acceptance.

Test yourself

1. State the features of authority. It is relational, existing between a commander and a subject; legitimate, in that those subject accept the holder is entitled; impersonal, attaching to an office rather than a person and surviving its holder; limited in scope as to persons, subject matter and time; hierarchical, so that each holder answers to a higher one; exercised through commands; voluntarily obeyed, often without agreement; delegable within limits; backed by sanctions it seldom needs to use; and revocable, ultimately by the withdrawal of acceptance.

2. Why is it important that authority attaches to the office rather than the person? Because it makes the exercise of power continuous and reviewable. An order signed by a Magistrate remains valid after that Magistrate retires, and a successor may vary it, because the authority never belonged to the individual. Weber treated this impersonal character as the mark of the modern state, and its absence is why systems built on charisma or on personal traditional rule face a crisis at every succession.

3. What follows from the fact that authority is limited in scope? That a command outside its boundaries is not an authoritative command at all, and disregarding it is not disobedience. A Registrar who directs how students must vote has not issued an order that is wrong; they have issued something that is not an order. Its legal counterpart is the rule that an authority may act only within the power conferred and that an act beyond that power is void.

munotes.in67

The Features of Authority

4. Explain delegation and its two limits. An authority may authorise another to exercise part of its power, and the delegate's acts then bind as the delegator's would, which is how any large organisation functions. The first limit is that a delegate cannot receive more than the delegator possesses. The second is that, without express permission, a delegate cannot delegate further, since the confidence was reposed in the delegate personally.

5. "An authority that must always use its sanctions has failed." Explain. Authority is compliance given because the commander is accepted as entitled, with the sanction remaining in the background as a possibility. If the sanction must be applied to everyone, then nobody is complying on the ground of entitlement and the relationship has become coercion, which has to be applied case by case at a cost in money, manpower and resentment. The rarity with which sanctions are used is therefore the measure of how much authority a system actually has.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in68

Chapter Fifteen

De Jure and De Facto Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.1, "Meaning and Features of Authority - De jure and De facto Authority"

In one line

De jure authority is authority somebody is legally entitled to; de facto authority is authority somebody actually has, whether or not the law says they should.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: de jure authority, meaning authority in law, is that which is conferred by and exercised in accordance with the legal or constitutional rules of the system; de facto authority, meaning authority in fact, is that which is actually exercised and actually obeyed, irrespective of whether the holder has a lawful title to it. The two normally coincide, and the interesting cases are those in which they come apart.

The two Latin phrases

De jure is Latin for "of law" or "by right". It describes what the legal rules say ought to be.

De facto is Latin for "of fact" or "in fact". It describes what actually is, whatever the rules say.

The pair is used all over law: a de facto director, a de facto guardian, a de facto marriage, de facto and de jure recognition of a state. In every use the same contrast is being drawn between title and reality.

The four combinations

The clearest way to hold this is to see that authority in law and authority in fact are two independent questions, so there are four possible answers.

Both de jure and de facto. The ordinary case, and the one a stable political system aims at. A Collector who is validly appointed and whose directions are obeyed.

De jure but not de facto. Somebody has the lawful title and nobody obeys. A government in exile. A court whose orders are systematically ignored. A local body that exists on paper but whose functions are performed by somebody else.

De facto but not de jure. Somebody is obeyed but has no lawful title. A regime that came to power by a coup and is running the country. A person exercising an office whose appointment is later found invalid. In some parts of India at some periods, an armed group whose writ ran in a district while the lawful administration existed on the map.

Neither. Not authority at all.

An answer that sets out those four gets the whole topic in a paragraph.

Why the distinction matters

Because obedience has to be settled somehow. If a person is obeyed but is not entitled to be, what is the position of somebody who obeys them? Every legal system has had to answer this, and the answer is usually that acts done under an apparent authority stand.

Because recognition is a political act. In international law, states recognise other states and governments either de facto, acknowledging that a body is in control, or de jure, acknowledging that it is entitled to be. The distinction lets a state deal with a regime without endorsing it.

munotes.in69

De Jure and De Facto Authority

Because legitimacy is what turns one into the other. A regime that begins de facto will try to make itself de jure, through a constitution, an election or a court that validates it. That process is exactly what topic 1.4 studies.

The Indian illustration

Facts. Gokaraju Rangaraju v. State of Andhra Pradesh, (1981) 3 SCC 132, arose out of two criminal appeals. The appellants had been convicted of offences by two District Judges. By the time the appeals were heard in the High Court, the appointments of those two judges had been declared void, because they had been made contrary to article 233 of the Constitution, which governs the appointment of district judges. The appellants therefore argued that the convictions were themselves void: a person whose appointment was a nullity could not be a judge, their liberty was being taken away otherwise than by the procedure established by law, and applying the de facto doctrine would render the Constitution (Twentieth Amendment) Act 1966 superfluous.

Held. The Supreme Court dismissed the appeals. It held that the two judges were not usurpers or intruders but persons who had discharged the functions and duties of a judge under colour of lawful authority, and that so long as the office itself is validly created, the acts of a person holding it de facto are valid even though the appointment is afterwards found invalid. The Court separated two questions that the appellants had run together: the contravention of a constitutional provision may invalidate the appointment, but the effect of that invalidation on the acts done is a different question, and the de facto doctrine saves those acts. It added that the doctrine is no stranger to the Constitution, pointing to article 71(2), which provides that acts done by the President or the Vice President in the exercise of their office are not invalidated by reason of the election of that person being afterwards declared void.

Why it matters here. The two judges had de facto authority and no de jure authority, and Indian law protected everybody who had treated them as judges. The reason the law takes that position is the political point of this whole chapter. Authority works because people accept it and act on that acceptance. If every act of an officer whose title was later faulted became a nullity, no citizen could safely obey anybody, because no citizen can audit an appointment before complying with an order.

A worked example

A municipality's ward officer transfers a shop licence. Six months later a court holds that the officer's posting was irregular because the sanction of the standing committee was never obtained.

munotes.in70

De Jure and De Facto Authority

The de jure position. The officer had no lawful title to the post, so no authority in law.

The de facto position. The officer sat in the chair, used the seal, signed the file and was obeyed by everybody in the ward. Authority in fact, complete.

The consequence for the licensee, applying the reasoning above. The office of ward officer was validly created, and the person acted under colour of lawful authority rather than as an intruder. The transfer stands.

And the limit. If a private person with no connection to the municipality had walked in and issued the transfer, they would be a usurper, the office would never have been theirs even in appearance, and nothing would be saved. The doctrine protects those who relied on an appearance of authority; it does not create authority out of nothing.

Distinctions that carry marks

De jure authorityDe facto authority
MeaningAuthority in law, by rightAuthority in fact, actually exercised
SourceThe legal or constitutional rulesActual obedience
TestIs the title valid?Is the person actually obeyed?
ExampleA validly appointed CollectorA regime installed by a coup and in control
Can exist without the other?Yes: a government in exileYes: a person whose appointment is later voided
In international lawRecognition that a body is entitled to governRecognition that a body is in control
What it needs to become the otherActual obedienceLegitimation: a constitution, an election, a court

What this distinction is NOT

De facto does not mean unlawful. It means the question of lawfulness is being left aside. A perfectly lawful authority is also de facto authority whenever it is actually obeyed.

De jure does not mean real. A body with an unimpeachable legal title and no obedience has authority in the same sense that a person has a valid ticket for a train that no longer runs.

The de facto doctrine is not a way of curing an invalid appointment. The appointment stays invalid, and the person may be removed. What is saved is the acts done in the meantime, and the beneficiary is the public who relied on them.

It does not protect a usurper. The doctrine requires that the office be validly created and that the person acted under colour of lawful authority. A pure intruder is outside it.

Quick revision

  1. De jure is authority in law; de facto is authority in fact.
  2. Four combinations: both, de jure only, de facto only, neither. Learn the examples of the middle two.
  3. De jure only: a government in exile, a court whose orders are ignored.
  4. De facto only: a regime installed by a coup, an officer whose appointment is later voided.
  5. Gokaraju Rangaraju v. State of Andhra Pradesh, (1981) 3 SCC 132: convictions by District Judges whose appointments were void under article 233 were upheld; the judges acted under colour of lawful authority and were not usurpers; the office being validly created, the acts of the de facto holder stand. Compare article 71(2), which says the same thing about the President and Vice President.
  6. In international law, de facto recognition acknowledges control, de jure recognition acknowledges entitlement.
  7. What turns de facto into de jure is legitimation, which is topic 1.4.
munotes.in71

De Jure and De Facto Authority

Test yourself

1. Distinguish de jure from de facto authority. De jure authority is conferred by the legal or constitutional rules of the system and is exercised by a person with a valid title; the test is whether the title is good. De facto authority is authority actually exercised and actually obeyed, whatever the state of the title; the test is whether the person is in fact obeyed. They normally coincide, and the important cases are those in which they separate.

2. Give an example of each of the four possible combinations. Both: a validly appointed Collector whose directions are followed. De jure without de facto: a government in exile, which has a lawful title and controls nothing. De facto without de jure: a regime installed by a coup which governs the country, or an officer whose appointment is afterwards declared void. Neither: a person with no title who is not obeyed, which is not authority at all.

3. State the facts and holding of Gokaraju Rangaraju. The appellants were convicted by two District Judges whose appointments were later declared void for contravening article 233, and they argued that the convictions were therefore nullities. The Supreme Court dismissed the appeals, holding that the judges were not usurpers but had acted under colour of lawful authority, and that where the office itself is validly created the acts of a de facto holder are valid though the appointment is afterwards invalidated. It separated the validity of the appointment from the validity of the acts done under it, and pointed to article 71(2) as a constitutional instance of the same principle.

4. Why does the law protect acts done by a de facto officer? Because authority works only if people can act on it, and no citizen can audit an appointment before obeying an order. If every act of an officer whose title was later found faulty became a nullity, every decree, licence, conviction and permission would be open to attack on a ground the person who relied on it could never have checked. The doctrine therefore protects those who relied on the appearance of authority, while leaving the invalid appointment itself to be set aside.

munotes.in72

De Jure and De Facto Authority

5. What is the relation between this distinction and legitimacy? Legitimacy is what converts one into the other. A regime that begins with de facto authority alone will seek to acquire a de jure title, by promulgating a constitution, holding an election or obtaining validation from a court, because authority resting on control alone is expensive and unstable. That process of converting fact into right is exactly what the topic on legitimacy studies, and it is why MU places legitimacy after authority in its own numbering.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in73

Chapter Sixteen

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.2, "Max Webber's Classification of Authority"

In one line

Weber said there are exactly three pure ways in which people come to accept that somebody is entitled to command them: because it has always been so, because of the extraordinary personal quality of the commander, and because a rule made the commander competent.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Weber classified legitimate authority into three pure types according to the ground on which its claim to legitimacy rests: traditional authority, resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of immemorial traditions and the legitimacy of those called to authority by them; charismatic authority, resting on devotion to the exceptional sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of a person and of the order they reveal or create; and legal or rational authority, resting on belief in the legality of enacted rules and in the right to command of those raised to authority under them.

Weber's own statement

Weber writes, in the part of Wirtschaft und Gesellschaft dealing with the types of domination, that there are three pure types of legitimate domination, and that their claim to legitimacy may rest primarily on one of three characters.

Rational in character, resting on the belief in the legality of enacted orders and in the right to give directions of those called to exercise authority under them. Weber's own bracket for this is legale Herrschaft, legal domination.

Traditional in character, resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those called to authority by them: traditionale Herrschaft.

Charismatic in character, resting on the extraordinary devotion to the sanctity, or the heroic force, or the exemplary quality of a person and of the order revealed or created by that person: charismatische Herrschaft.

He then adds a second passage that students almost never quote and that is worth more than the first, because it says in each case what is being obeyed.

Under legal domination, obedience is given to the legally established impersonal order, and to the superior determined by it, by virtue of the formal legality of the directions and within their scope.

Under traditional domination, obedience is given to the person of the master who is called by tradition and himself bound by it, out of Pietät, a word meaning reverence or dutiful respect, and only within the circle of what is customary.

Under charismatic domination, obedience is given to the charismatically qualified leader as such, out of personal trust in revelation, heroism or exemplary quality, and only so far as the belief in that charisma holds.

Read the three together and the classification stops being a list. In one the rule is obeyed, in another the person as heir of a custom, in the third the person as an extraordinary individual. That is the whole of Weber's answer to the question of why people obey.

munotes.in74

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

Two things to fix before the three chapters that follow

Weber is classifying legitimacy, not government. He is not saying there are three kinds of state. He is saying there are three grounds on which a claim to be obeyed is accepted. A single state contains all three at once.

These are ideal types. An ideal type, in Weber's method, is a deliberately purified mental construct: it exaggerates the essential features of a phenomenon so that real cases can be compared against it. No actual regime is a pure type, and pointing out that a real government is a mixture is not an objection to Weber but an application of him. "Ideal" here does not mean desirable. It means conceptual.

The classification at a glance

TraditionalCharismaticLegal rational
Legitimacy rests onThe sanctity of immemorial customDevotion to an extraordinary personBelief in the legality of enacted rules
What is obeyedThe person of the master, as heir to customThe person of the leader, as suchThe impersonal order, and the office under it
Weber's word for the ground of obediencePiety, reverence for what has always beenPersonal trust in revelation, heroism or exampleFormal legality
Limit on the commandWhat custom permitsThe follower's continued beliefThe scope the rule confers
StaffPersonal retainers, kin, favouritesDisciples, chosen for their devotionOfficials, appointed for qualification
SuccessionInheritance or customThe crisis of the type; solved by routinisationProvided for by rule in advance
StabilityHigh, but rigidVery lowHigh, and adaptable
ExampleA monarch, a hereditary head, a caste elderA prophet, a revolutionary, a founderA judge, a Collector, a returning officer

A worked example

A village faces a dispute about the use of a common pond.

The traditional claim. The head of the oldest family says that the pond has always been used in a certain order and that his family has always settled such matters. He is obeyed by those who accept that this is how it has always been. His authority stops where custom stops: if he ordered the pond filled in, the same villagers would refuse, and the refusal would not feel like disobedience.

The charismatic claim. A young man who led the drought relief two years ago and who is believed to have unusual judgment proposes a completely new arrangement. Those who follow him do so because of him, not because of any office. If the arrangement fails, his authority does not diminish; it disappears.

munotes.in75

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

The legal rational claim. The Gram Panchayat passes a resolution under the powers conferred on it by statute, and the Secretary issues a notice. It binds everybody in the village, including those who dislike it and those who never heard of the head of the oldest family. It binds because a rule says the Panchayat may decide such matters, and it lasts after every present member has gone.

Three claims to command, in one village, on one afternoon. That is why Weber's classification is still taught.

What this classification is NOT

It is not a historical sequence. Weber is not saying that societies pass from traditional to charismatic to legal rational. All three appear in ancient societies and all three appear now.

It is not a ranking. Legal rational authority is not "better"; Weber was, if anything, gloomy about it, because he thought bureaucratic rationality would trap people in what he called an iron cage.

It is not a classification of governments. It classifies grounds of legitimacy, and any government rests on more than one.

It is not a classification of power. Weber is explicit that this is Herrschaft, authority, the chance of finding obedience to a command, which is the narrower concept. Power in his wider sense need not be legitimate at all.

Quick revision

  1. Three pure types of legitimate domination: traditional, charismatic, legal rational.
  2. Traditional: the sanctity of immemorial custom; the person of the master is obeyed, out of piety, within the circle of the customary.
  3. Charismatic: devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary quality of a person; the leader as such is obeyed, out of personal trust, so long as the belief lasts.
  4. Legal rational: belief in the legality of enacted rules; the impersonal order and the office are obeyed, by virtue of formal legality, within the scope conferred.
  5. They are ideal types: purified constructs for comparison, not descriptions of real regimes, and "ideal" does not mean desirable.
  6. Every real state contains all three at once.

Test yourself

1. State Weber's three types of legitimate authority. Traditional authority, resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those whom those traditions call to authority. Charismatic authority, resting on extraordinary devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of a person and of the order that person reveals or creates. And legal or rational authority, resting on belief in the legality of enacted rules and in the right to command of those raised to office under them.

2. In each type, what exactly is being obeyed? Under legal authority, the legally established impersonal order and the superior determined by it, by virtue of the formal legality of the direction and only within its scope. Under traditional authority, the person of the master who is called by tradition and is himself bound by it, out of reverence, and only within the circle of what is customary. Under charismatic authority, the charismatically qualified leader as such, out of personal trust in revelation, heroism or exemplary quality, and only so long as the belief in that charisma holds.

munotes.in76

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

3. What is an ideal type, and why does it matter here? A deliberately purified mental construct that exaggerates the essential features of a phenomenon so that real cases can be measured against it. It matters because Weber's three types are ideal types, so no actual regime is any of them in pure form, and observing that a real government mixes all three is not a criticism of the classification but the intended use of it. "Ideal" here means conceptual, not desirable.

4. Is Weber's classification a historical sequence? Give reasons. No. All three types are found in ancient and in modern societies, and a modern legal rational state contains traditional elements, such as ceremonial monarchy or customary practices, and charismatic ones, such as a leader followed for personal qualities rather than for the office held. Weber is classifying the grounds on which claims to obedience are accepted, and those grounds coexist rather than succeed one another.

5. Distinguish what Weber classifies here from power in his wider sense. Here he classifies Herrschaft, authority or domination, which he defines as the chance of finding obedience to a command of a given content among specifiable persons, and the classification is of the grounds on which such obedience is thought legitimate. Power, Macht, is the wider concept: every chance of carrying through one's own will within a social relationship even against resistance, whatever it rests on. Power need not be legitimate at all, and this classification has nothing to say about it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in77

Chapter Seventeen

Traditional Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.2, "Max Webber's Classification of Authority"

In one line

Traditional authority is obeyed because it has always been obeyed: the ruler holds power by inheriting a position that custom created, and the customs that put him there also limit what he may do.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: traditional authority is the type of legitimate domination which rests on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those called to authority by them; obedience is owed to the person of the master, out of reverence, and only within the circle of what custom sanctions.

The ground of obedience

Weber's own account is precise on a point that summaries lose. Under traditional domination, obedience is given to the person of the master, and the master is both called by tradition and bound by tradition. Obedience is given out of Pietät, a word best rendered as reverence or dutiful respect, and it is owed only within the circle of what is customary.

Four consequences follow, and they are the chapter.

The person, not the office. A subject obeys the king, not the crown as an abstraction. The relationship is personal, which is why traditional systems are held together by loyalty and why disloyalty is treated as a moral betrayal rather than as a breach of a rule.

The master is bound too. This is the feature students forget. Custom is not a licence; it is a boundary in both directions. A traditional ruler who violates custom is not exercising authority at all, and this is one of the classical grounds of resistance.

The scope is what custom covers. Where custom is silent, the ruler acts on personal discretion, and Weber notes that this is where arbitrariness enters a traditional system: not in defiance of custom but in the space custom does not reach.

Change is illegitimate by definition. A traditional system cannot say "we shall now do it differently" without undermining the reason it is obeyed. Reforms are therefore presented as restorations of an older and purer practice.

Weber's forms of traditional domination

Gerontocracy. Rule by the elders of a group, exercised because age is believed to carry the tradition. There is no separate administrative staff.

Patriarchalism. Rule by the head of a household or clan, inherited by a fixed rule of succession, again without a separate staff. The household is the model on which the whole political relationship is built.

Patrimonialism. The stage at which the master acquires a personal administrative and military staff. The staff are personal retainers, recruited from kin, favourites, slaves or clients, and they hold their positions at the master's pleasure. The realm is treated as an extension of the household, which is why the ruler's revenue and the state's revenue are not distinguished.

munotes.in78

Traditional Authority

Estate type patrimonialism, or feudalism in the wide sense. The staff have appropriated their positions and the powers attached to them: an office is now a property held by right, and the ruler must bargain with those who hold it. This is where a traditional system starts to develop enforceable limits on the ruler.

What holds it together, and what it cannot do

Its strengths. Enormous stability. Nothing has to be justified. Succession is settled in advance by custom. Legitimacy is not periodically tested and therefore does not periodically fail.

Its weaknesses, and each one is examinable.

It cannot innovate. Any deliberate change is an attack on the ground of its own authority.

Administration is unspecialised. Officials are chosen for loyalty and personal relationship rather than for competence, so a traditional system cannot run a modern economy.

Public and private are not separated. The ruler's household and the public treasury are the same thing, which is the structural reason that patrimonial systems appear corrupt when judged by legal rational standards. It is worth stating carefully: it is not that patrimonial rulers are dishonest, but that the very distinction between public funds and private funds does not exist in the system.

Its arbitrariness lies in the gaps. Custom governs the customary; beyond it the ruler is unconstrained.

It is unequal by design. Custom encodes an existing hierarchy of birth, and traditional authority reproduces it.

Traditional authority in India

A good answer moves from Weber's Europe to India, because the Indian material is unusually rich.

Before 1947, the princely states, the zamindari system and hereditary village office were traditional authority in Weber's sense, and several fit patrimonialism exactly.

Caste authority is the largest Indian instance. The authority of a caste council over its members rests on nothing but the belief that this is how it has always been. It is worth noticing that this authority is often exercised today in flat defiance of legal rational authority, and that where it purports to punish, the courts have treated its orders as having no legal existence at all.

Family and community elders exercise real authority over marriage, property arrangements and disputes, often more effectively than any court.

Religious offices, whether hereditary or successional, carry authority of the same kind.

The important Indian observation is that the Constitution of 1950 was a deliberate attempt to replace traditional authority with legal rational authority in one step: it abolished titles, ended untouchability, made every office answerable to law, and put the source of all authority in a document that begins "We, the people". Seventy-five years later, traditional authority has not disappeared; it has retreated into the private and the local, where it remains strong. That tension is much of Indian politics.

munotes.in79

Traditional Authority

A worked example

A Deputy Collector visits a village to hear objections to a land record entry.

The traditional claim in the room. The head of the dominant family says the boundary has been where it is since his grandfather's time, that his family has settled such disputes for as long as anyone can remember, and that the neighbours accept it. Several of them do accept it, and would accept it if the officer were not there.

Why it is traditional authority and not something else. Nobody appointed him. No rule confers anything. What is being obeyed is the person, as the holder of a place that custom created, and only within the range of matters custom covers. If he told a neighbour whom to vote for, the same men who defer to him on the boundary would not comply, and would not feel they had disobeyed anything.

Where it collides with legal rational authority. The record of rights is maintained under a statute, and the officer is bound by it. The village's custom is not irrelevant, because the statute may itself direct that possession and long usage be considered. But the custom now operates as evidence within a legal framework, not as a source of authority in its own right, and that shift is precisely the difference between the two types.

Distinctions that carry marks

TraditionalLegal rational
GroundIt has always been soA rule confers the power
Obedience owed toThe person of the masterThe impersonal order and the office
Basis of the relationshipPersonal loyalty and reverenceImpersonal rule and qualification
Staff chosen forLoyalty and personal connectionTechnical qualification
Public and privateNot distinguishedSharply separated
ScopeWhat custom covers; discretion beyond itWhat the rule confers, and nothing more
Attitude to changeChange is illegitimateChange is normal, by amendment

What traditional authority is NOT

It is not merely old power. A dictatorship that has lasted thirty years is not traditional authority, because it is not obeyed on the ground that it has always been so.

It is not unlimited. Custom binds the ruler as much as the subject, and this is the feature most often missed.

It is not extinct. In India it operates every day, in families, castes, temples, and village life.

It is not necessarily hostile to law. Legal systems have absorbed a great deal of custom, and Indian personal law is the largest instance.

Quick revision

  1. Ground: the everyday belief in the sanctity of immemorial tradition and in the legitimacy of those tradition calls to authority.
  2. What is obeyed: the person of the master, out of reverence, and only within the circle of the customary.
  3. The master is bound by custom too; violating it destroys the claim to be obeyed.
  4. Weber's forms: gerontocracy, patriarchalism, patrimonialism, and the estate type.
  5. Patrimonialism is the crucial one: a personal staff of retainers, and no separation of the ruler's purse from the public purse.
  6. Strengths: stability, settled succession, no need for justification. Weaknesses: cannot innovate, unspecialised administration, no public and private divide, arbitrary in the gaps, unequal by design.
  7. In India: princely states, zamindari, caste councils, family elders, hereditary religious office; and a Constitution designed to displace all of it.
munotes.in80

Traditional Authority

Test yourself

1. Define traditional authority and state its ground. It is the type of legitimate domination resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those called to authority by them. Obedience is owed to the person of the master, who is both called by tradition and bound by it, is given out of reverence, and extends only to the circle of matters that custom covers.

2. "Traditional authority binds the ruler as much as the subject." Explain. Because the ruler's title comes from custom, custom is also the measure of what the ruler may do. A traditional ruler who orders something custom forbids is not exercising authority at all, and subjects who refuse are not disobeying but denying that any command was made. This is why breach of custom is one of the classical grounds of resistance in traditional systems, and it is the feature most often omitted from answers.

3. Set out Weber's forms of traditional domination. Gerontocracy, rule by the elders of a group with no separate staff. Patriarchalism, rule by the head of a household or clan under a fixed rule of succession, again with no separate staff. Patrimonialism, in which the master acquires a personal administrative and military staff of kin, favourites and clients holding office at his pleasure, and treats the realm as an extension of his household. And the estate type, in which the staff have appropriated their offices as rights, so that the ruler must bargain with them.

4. Why do patrimonial systems appear corrupt from a legal rational standpoint? Because they do not separate the ruler's household from the public treasury. Revenue is the master's, offices are granted as personal favours, and retainers are maintained out of the same purse. Judged by the legal rational standard, in which public office is a trust and public money is not the officer's, all of this is misappropriation. Judged internally it is not, because the distinction that makes it wrong does not exist in the system. It is a structural difference, not a difference in the honesty of individuals.

munotes.in81

Traditional Authority

5. Give three Indian examples of traditional authority and say what the Constitution did about it. The princely states and the zamindari system before 1947; the authority of caste councils over their members; and the authority of family, community and hereditary religious office. The Constitution attempted to displace all of it at once by abolishing titles, ending untouchability, subjecting every office to law and locating the source of all authority in a document adopted by the people. Traditional authority did not disappear but retreated into the private and the local, where it remains strong, and the friction between the two is much of Indian politics.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in82

Chapter Eighteen

Charismatic Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.2, "Max Webber's Classification of Authority"

In one line

Charismatic authority is obeyed because of who the leader is: an extraordinary person is believed to have qualities nobody else has, and the belief itself is the only thing holding the authority up.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: charismatic authority is the type of legitimate domination which rests on the extraordinary devotion of followers to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of an individual person and of the order revealed or created by that person; obedience is owed to the leader as such, out of personal trust, and lasts only so long as the belief in the leader's charisma lasts.

What the word means

Charisma comes from the Greek for a gift of grace, and Weber says so expressly: it is an early Christian term, used for the gifts believed to be conferred by the spirit. Weber takes it out of theology and uses it for any quality of an individual by which they are set apart from ordinary people and treated as endowed with exceptional powers or qualities.

Two cautions follow, and both are commonly failed.

Charisma is not charm, popularity or good speaking. A leader may be a poor speaker and still hold charismatic authority; a very attractive celebrity may hold none.

Charisma is in the eyes of the followers, not in the person. Weber's test is not whether the leader really has extraordinary powers. It is whether the followers believe it and act on the belief. This is why the same person can be charismatic to one group and nobody at all to another, and why charisma can be lost overnight without the person changing.

The ground of obedience

Weber's second passage on the three types says that under charismatic domination obedience is given to the charismatically qualified leader as such, by virtue of personal trust in revelation, heroic quality or exemplary character, and only within the sphere in which the belief in that charisma holds.

Every feature of the type comes out of that sentence.

It attaches to the person, not to an office or a custom. There is no post to inherit and no rule to invoke.

It is proved by results. A charismatic leader must keep demonstrating the quality. Weber is explicit that if the leader's mission fails, if the followers cease to prosper, if the promised deliverance does not come, the charisma is regarded as having departed and the authority collapses. Nothing else in Weber's scheme has this property: a Collector who makes a bad decision is still a Collector.

It is revolutionary. Traditional authority says "it has always been so"; legal authority says "the rule says so"; charismatic authority says, in effect, "you have heard it said, but I say to you". It is the only one of the three types capable of overturning an established order from the inside, which is why every great social upheaval has a charismatic figure at the front of it.

munotes.in83

Charismatic Authority

Its administration is improvised. The staff are disciples chosen for devotion and personal calling, not for qualification or for birth. There is no career, no fixed salary, no jurisdiction and no promotion; there is a mission.

It is economically unstable. Weber points out that charismatic movements are hostile to routine economic life and live on gifts, booty or endowments, which cannot be sustained.

The problem of succession, and routinisation

The characteristic crisis of charismatic authority is that the leader dies. There is no rule of succession, because rules are exactly what this type does without, and the followers face a choice between dispersing and finding some way of transferring the authority.

Weber calls the process by which they solve it Veralltäglichung, usually translated as the routinisation of charisma: literally, its becoming everyday. The devices are worth knowing by name, because a question on charisma very often ends here.

Search for a new leader with the same qualities, by signs or by revelation.

Designation by the leader, or by the leader's staff, of a successor.

Hereditary charisma, in which the quality is believed to run in the blood, and the leader's family inherits. This turns charismatic authority into traditional authority.

Charisma of office, in which the quality is believed to attach to a position and to be transferred by ritual, such as ordination or coronation. This turns it into traditional or legal authority depending on how the office is then governed.

The conclusion is the point. Charismatic authority is inherently temporary. It either dies with the leader or turns into one of the other two types. Weber's own word for it is that it must become everyday in order to survive, and in becoming everyday it stops being charismatic.

Examples

Religious founders and prophets, which is where the term came from.

Revolutionary leaders, who claim a mandate that no existing law confers.

Military figures who acquire a following personally rather than by rank.

Founders of movements and of states. In India the obvious instance is Gandhi, whose authority rested on no office of any kind: he held no post in government, and for long stretches no post in the Congress either, and was obeyed nonetheless by millions. He is also a good illustration of the limits of the type, because his authority did not transfer, and the movement he led continued after him as an organisation with rules, offices and elections, which is routinisation exactly.

munotes.in84

Charismatic Authority

A caution about modern politics. Contemporary leaders with large personal followings are often described as charismatic, and there is something in it. But almost all of them also hold constitutional office, which means their authority is a compound: the office supplies legal rational authority and the following supplies charisma. Weber's ideal types are for analysing such compounds, not for labelling people.

A worked example

A cyclone destroys a coastal town. The administration is overwhelmed for four days.

A young volunteer organises the first relief camp, walks into flooded lanes nobody else will enter, and by the third day is being obeyed by several hundred people, including some officials, none of whom appointed her.

This is charismatic authority in its pure form. No office, no rule, no custom. She is obeyed because of what she is believed to be, and the belief was formed by what she did.

Its instability. On the fifth day a rumour spreads that supplies were misdirected. The rumour is false, but the number of people obeying her drops sharply within hours. Nothing about her changed; the belief did, and that is all this type ever consisted of.

Routinisation. Three weeks later the relief work has become a registered trust with a bank account, a committee and a set of rules, and she is its secretary. Her authority is now partly legal rational, and it will survive her departure.

Distinctions that carry marks

CharismaticTraditionalLegal rational
GroundExtraordinary personal quality, believed inIt has always been soA rule confers it
Attaches toThe person, uniquelyThe person, as heir to customThe office
StaffDisciples, chosen for devotionRetainers, chosen for loyaltyOfficials, chosen for qualification
RulesNone; the leader creates themCustomEnacted, and binding on the holder too
SuccessionThe crisis of the typeSettled by customSettled in advance by rule
DurationShort; it must be renewed constantlyVery longLong, and adaptable
Attitude to the existing orderRevolutionaryConservativeReformist within the rules
How it endsThe belief fails, or it is routinisedCustom is displacedThe rules are changed

What charismatic authority is NOT

It is not popularity. A leader may be widely liked and hold no authority whatever, and a charismatic leader may be feared and disliked by everybody outside the following.

It is not necessarily good. Weber's category is value neutral: it covers saints and demagogues equally, and he says so.

It is not a quality of the leader alone. It exists in the relationship, and specifically in the followers' belief.

It cannot be inherited without changing type. The moment the quality is said to run in a family, the authority has become traditional, whatever it is still called.

munotes.in85

Charismatic Authority

It is not the same as authoritarian rule. Many authoritarian rulers hold no charisma at all and rest on coercion, which is not authority in Weber's sense at all.

Quick revision

  1. Charisma is Greek for a gift of grace; Weber notes it is an early Christian term.
  2. Ground: devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary quality of a person and of the order that person reveals or creates.
  3. What is obeyed: the leader as such, out of personal trust, and only while the belief holds.
  4. It is proved by results: if the mission fails, the charisma is regarded as departed.
  5. It is revolutionary, its staff are disciples, and it is economically unstable.
  6. Its crisis is succession, solved by routinisation: search, designation, hereditary charisma, or charisma of office.
  7. Therefore it is inherently temporary: it either fails or turns into traditional or legal authority.

Test yourself

1. Define charismatic authority. The type of legitimate domination resting on extraordinary devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of an individual and of the order that individual reveals or creates. Obedience is owed to the leader personally rather than to any office or custom, is given out of personal trust in revelation, heroism or example, and lasts only within the sphere in which belief in the leader's charisma holds.

2. "Charisma is in the followers, not in the leader." Explain. Weber's test is not whether the leader actually possesses extraordinary powers but whether the followers believe it and act on the belief. It follows that the same person may hold charismatic authority over one group and none at all over another, that the authority can be destroyed by a rumour without anything about the leader changing, and that the relationship, not the individual, is the unit of analysis.

3. Why is charismatic authority unstable? Because it must be constantly proved. Weber notes that if the mission fails or the promised benefit does not come, the charisma is regarded as having departed and the authority collapses, which is true of neither of the other types. Its administration is improvised and its finances rest on gifts or booty rather than on regular revenue. And it has no rule of succession, because rules are exactly what it does without, so the leader's death is a crisis by construction.

4. What is routinisation, and what forms does it take? The process, which Weber calls Veralltäglichung or becoming everyday, by which a charismatic movement converts itself into a durable structure after the leader is gone. Its forms are the search for a new leader displaying the same qualities; designation of a successor by the leader or the staff; hereditary charisma, in which the quality is believed to run in the family, which converts the authority into traditional authority; and charisma of office, in which the quality is believed to attach to a position and to be transmitted by ritual.

munotes.in86

Charismatic Authority

5. Why do modern political leaders rarely exemplify the pure type? Because almost all of them also hold constitutional office, so their authority is a compound: the office supplies legal rational authority that survives any loss of popularity, and the personal following supplies charisma that a mere office holder would not have. Weber's ideal types are constructed precisely to analyse such compounds by comparison, and treating them as labels to be pinned on individuals misuses the method.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in87

Chapter Twenty

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

Syllabus topic 1.2.3, "Sources - How is Power legalised?"

In one line

Power becomes authority when it can be traced back, step by step, to something the society accepts as the ultimate source of the right to command; in India that something is the Constitution, and every lawful order in the country is the bottom of a chain that ends there.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the sources of authority are those grounds from which a right to command is derived and by reference to which it is accepted, principally the constitution and law, tradition and custom, popular consent expressed through elections, personal qualities, expertise, office, and religion; and power is legalised when it is conferred by, exercised in accordance with, and confined within a rule which is itself valid under a higher rule, up to the constitution, which rests on acceptance rather than on any further rule.

The general sources

Constitution and law. The dominant source in a modern state. The right to command is created by a written instrument and by the statutes made under it.

Tradition and custom. Authority derived from what has always been done, which Weber's traditional type describes.

Consent, expressed through election. The claim that the holder was chosen by those they command. This is the distinctively democratic source and the one Module IV is about.

Personal qualities. Weber's charisma.

Expertise. The specialist's authority within their field, which modern administration relies on heavily.

Office. The position itself, whoever holds it. This is derivative, because an office is created by a rule or a custom, but it is worth naming separately because it is what a citizen actually encounters.

Religion. Authority claimed as conferred by, or exercised on behalf of, a divine source. Historically the most widespread of all and still operative in personal law, in religious institutions and in community life.

Force, which is the honest addition to the list. Conquest, coup and occupation produce power that is obeyed. It is not yet authority; it becomes authority only if it is legalised, and the process by which regimes born of force acquire a constitution, an election and a court to validate them is exactly the subject of the second half of this chapter.

How power is legalised: the chain

A written constitution answers MU's question with a chain, and the value of the chain is that any exercise of power in the country can be tested against it.

Step 1: the ultimate source

Every legal system rests, in the end, on something not itself derived from a higher rule. Jurists have two well-known names for this and a student meets both in jurisprudence.

Kelsen's Grundnorm, or basic norm: the presupposed norm that gives the first constitution its validity. It is not itself enacted by anybody; it is presupposed, because otherwise the chain of validity has no beginning.

munotes.in93

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

Hart's rule of recognition: the rule, accepted and practised by the officials of a system, which settles what counts as law in that system. Hart's version is a fact about behaviour rather than a presupposition: it exists because judges, officials and lawyers actually use it.

Both make the same political point, and it is the point of this whole module. At the bottom of the most rule bound legal order there is not another rule but an acceptance. Legal rational authority does not escape the need for legitimacy; it postpones it to the top of the pyramid.

In India that acceptance is expressed in the Preamble, which says that the people of India adopt, enact and give the Constitution to themselves. It is a claim about the source of authority, made in the instrument itself.

Step 2: the Constitution confers power on organs

The executive power of the Union is vested in the President by article 53 and extends, under article 73, to the matters on which Parliament may legislate; the executive power of a State is vested in the Governor by article 154 and extends, under article 162, to matters on which the State legislature may legislate. Legislative power is conferred and distributed by articles 245 and 246, read with the three Lists.

Step 3: the organ makes law within its competence

A statute is valid if the legislature had competence and the statute does not contravene the Constitution. Article 13 makes any law inconsistent with the Fundamental Rights void to the extent of the inconsistency.

Step 4: the statute confers power on an authority

Almost every statute names an officer or a body and states what it may do, on what grounds and by what procedure.

Step 5: delegated legislation fills in the detail

Rules, regulations, notifications and orders are made under the enabling section, and they are valid only so far as the section permits.

Step 6: the individual order

The permit, the licence, the notice, the assessment, the decree. This is where a citizen meets authority, and it is valid only if every step above it was valid.

And the loop back to the top

Article 368 provides how the Constitution itself may be amended, so even the top of the chain can be changed by a procedure the chain prescribes. And the Supreme Court has held that this power of amendment does not extend to damaging the Constitution's basic structure, which places a limit above the highest rule the text confers, on the reasoning that a power to amend cannot include a power to destroy.

munotes.in94

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

What legalisation actually adds

An answer that lists the chain has described the mechanics. What earns marks is saying what the mechanics achieve.

A test of validity. Any order can be measured against the step above it, so a citizen can ask a court whether the power existed.

Limits. Each step confers something narrower than the step above.

Impersonality. The power belongs to the office, so it survives the holder and can be exercised by a successor.

Predictability. Because the rules are general and published, a person can know in advance what may be done to them.

Accountability. Because each step is traceable, somebody can always be identified as responsible.

Legitimacy. A power that can be traced to the Constitution can be defended in public as rightful, which is what converts power into authority.

A worked example: a regime legalising itself

A general seizes power in a state and suspends its constitution. He has power. He has no authority.

What he does next is the same everywhere, and it is a case study in legalising power.

He issues a proclamation that all existing laws continue in force, so that daily life goes on and the courts keep sitting. He obtains, from those courts, some acknowledgment that his orders are being given effect. He appoints a commission to draft a new constitution. He holds a referendum or an election, and the result is announced as the will of the people. The new constitution then declares that everything done since the seizure was lawfully done, which is a validation clause, and every subsequent order is traceable to that constitution.

What has happened. Nothing changed the fact that the origin was force. What changed is that the origin has been covered by a chain of rules that people accept, so the general's successors will command as officers rather than as conquerors. That is precisely what "legalising power" means, and it is why the question MU asks is a real one and not a formality.

And the limit of the technique. Legalisation is not the same as legitimation. A validation clause makes acts lawful; it does not make them accepted. Which is why the next two chapters, on legitimacy, are the necessary completion of this one.

Distinctions that carry marks

LegalisationLegitimation
What it doesMakes power traceable to a valid ruleMakes power accepted as rightful
TestIs there a rule conferring it?Do those subject to it believe it is entitled?
Proved byA document, and a court's rulingCompliance without compulsion
Can exist without the otherYes: a validly enacted law nobody acceptsYes: a leader obeyed with no legal office
Who supplies itThe legal systemThe people subject to it
munotes.in95

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

What this topic is NOT

Legalising power is not the same as making it just. The chain tests validity, not content.

The chain is not a formality. It is what a writ petition is made of. Every ground of judicial review is an allegation that one step in the chain is missing.

The Grundnorm is not a rule of Indian law. It is a jurisprudential device for explaining why the chain has an end. Hart's rule of recognition is a different device for the same problem.

Authority does not require legalisation. Traditional and charismatic authority are unlegalised and perfectly real. Legalisation is what the legal rational type does.

Quick revision

  1. Sources of authority: constitution and law, tradition and custom, consent through election, personal qualities, expertise, office, religion, and force, which is a source of power that must be legalised before it becomes authority.
  2. The chain in India: acceptance expressed in the Preamble; the Constitution confers power on organs (articles 53, 73, 154, 162, 245, 246); law is valid if competent and not void under article 13; the statute confers power on an authority; delegated legislation fills in detail; the individual order is issued. Article 368 governs change, and the basic structure limits even that.
  3. At the bottom of every legal order is an acceptance, not a rule. Kelsen's Grundnorm and Hart's rule of recognition are the two classical accounts.
  4. What legalisation adds: a test of validity, limits, impersonality, predictability, accountability and a public justification.
  5. Legalisation is not legitimation. A validation clause makes acts lawful; only acceptance makes them authoritative.

Test yourself

1. What are the sources of authority? Constitution and law, which dominate in a modern state; tradition and custom; consent expressed through election, which is the democratic source; personal qualities, which is Weber's charisma; expertise, which modern administration relies on; office, which is derivative but is what a citizen actually encounters; and religion. Force must be added honestly: it produces power that is obeyed, and it becomes authority only when it is legalised.

2. Trace how power is legalised in India. The Preamble locates the source in the people, who adopt and give themselves the Constitution. The Constitution then confers executive power by articles 53 and 154 and legislative power by articles 245 and 246 with the Lists. A statute made within that competence and not void under article 13 confers a specific power on a named authority. Delegated legislation made under the enabling section supplies the detail. The individual order follows, and it is valid only if every step above it is valid. Article 368 governs amendment, and the basic structure doctrine limits even that.

munotes.in96

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

3. What is the Grundnorm, and how does Hart's account differ? Kelsen's Grundnorm is the presupposed basic norm that confers validity on the first constitution, presupposed rather than enacted because the chain of validity must otherwise have no beginning. Hart's rule of recognition is not a presupposition but a social fact: the rule actually accepted and practised by the officials of a system, which settles what counts as law there. Both make the same political point, that at the foundation of a legal order lies an acceptance rather than a further rule.

4. Distinguish legalisation from legitimation. Legalisation makes an exercise of power traceable to a valid rule, and it is tested by asking whether a rule conferred it and proved by a document or a court's ruling. Legitimation makes power accepted as rightful, and it is tested by asking whether those subject to it believe the holder is entitled, and proved by compliance given without compulsion. Each can exist without the other: a validly enacted law nobody accepts, and a leader obeyed who holds no office at all.

5. Describe how a regime born of force legalises itself, and say what that process cannot achieve. It proclaims that existing laws continue, so that ordinary life and the courts carry on; it obtains judicial acknowledgment that its orders are being given effect; it appoints a body to draft a new constitution; it holds a referendum or election announced as the will of the people; and the new instrument validates everything done since the seizure, so that every later order is traceable to it. What this cannot achieve is acceptance. A validation clause makes acts lawful; it does not make the regime believed in, and that gap is what the topic on legitimacy addresses.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in97

Chapter Twenty-One

Power and Authority Compared

Syllabus topic 1.3, "Comparative Study - Power and Authority (Specified)"

In one line

Power is the ability to make somebody comply; authority is the right to require it. The dacoit and the tax officer both take your money, and only one of them can expect you to think they were entitled to.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: power is the capacity to affect the behaviour of others in a way they would not have chosen, resting on any basis whatever, whereas authority is that species of power which those subject to it accept as rightful, so that obedience is rendered voluntarily by reason of the commander's title rather than by reason of the consequences of refusal.

The relation between them

Before the differences, the relation, because students state it wrongly in two opposite ways.

Authority is a species of power, not its opposite. Every authority is power: the subject's behaviour is being affected. What distinguishes authority is the ground on which the subject complies.

But power is not a lesser form of authority. Power without authority is complete in itself. It works. It is simply expensive, unstable and resented.

The correct picture is two overlapping circles. There is power without authority, which is coercion. There is authority without much raw power, as with a court that commands nothing but a bailiff. And there is the overlap, where most stable government lives.

The differences

1. The ground of compliance

Power: the subject complies because of what will happen otherwise. Authority: the subject complies because of who gave the order.

This is the master difference and every other difference follows from it. It also gives the test to apply to any case: ask why the person complied.

2. Legitimacy

Power may be legitimate or not. It is a fact about capacity. Authority is legitimate by definition. Remove the acceptance and there is no authority left, only power.

3. The source

Power comes from resources: wealth, weapons, numbers, information, organisation, position. Authority comes from the belief of those subject to it, however that belief was produced, whether by custom, by charisma or by rule.

4. Direction

Power is exercised downward, from the one who has the resources. Authority is exercised downward and conferred upward. The judge commands the litigant; the litigant's acceptance is what makes it a command.

5. Scope

Power extends as far as the resource reaches. Authority has defined boundaries: over whom, over what, and for how long. A command outside them is not authority at all.

6. Cost

Power is expensive. Each subject must be separately compelled, and compulsion generates resentment that raises the cost of the next application. Authority is cheap. Compliance is general and voluntary, and the sanction stays in the background.

munotes.in98

Power and Authority Compared

7. Stability and duration

Power lasts as long as the resource does. Authority attaches to an office and survives its holder, so long as the belief holds.

8. Personal or impersonal

Power is usually personal to whoever holds the resources. Authority, in its legal rational form, is impersonal: it belongs to the office.

9. What happens when it is challenged

Power must escalate or lose. Authority faces a legitimacy crisis, and its usual response is to reassert its title rather than its strength: to hold an election, to obtain a court's ruling, to point to the rule.

10. Whether it can be transferred

Power can be transferred only by transferring the resource. Authority can be delegated, within limits, and passes automatically to a successor in the office.

The table

PowerAuthority
DefinitionCapacity to affect another's behaviour in a way they would not have chosenPower accepted as rightful; the right to command
Ground of complianceWhat will happen otherwiseWho gave the order
LegitimacyMay or may not be legitimateLegitimate by definition
SourceResources: wealth, force, numbers, information, positionThe belief of those subject to it
DirectionExercised downwardExercised downward, conferred upward
ScopeAs far as the resource reachesDefined: over whom, over what, for how long
CostHigh; compulsion is applied case by caseLow; compliance is general and voluntary
DurationWhile the resource lastsWhile the belief lasts; survives the holder
Personal or impersonalUsually personalImpersonal in its legal rational form
If challengedEscalate or loseLegitimacy crisis; reassert the title
TransferOnly with the resourceDelegable; passes to the successor in office
Standard exampleA dacoit taking your moneyA tax officer collecting it
Weber's wordMachtHerrschaft

A worked example

Two men take ten thousand rupees from the same shopkeeper on the same day.

The first shows a weapon. The shopkeeper hands over the money because he is afraid. Ask him afterwards whether the man was entitled to the money and he says no. Ask him whether he would pay again if the man were unarmed and he says no. That is power.

The second hands over a notice under a taxing statute. The shopkeeper pays, and complains bitterly about the rate all the way home. Ask him whether the officer was entitled to the money and he says yes, unfortunately. Ask him whether he would pay if the officer had no power to prosecute him and he says, probably, yes, most people do. That is authority.

Notice three things about the comparison.

The outcome is identical. Ten thousand rupees left the shop in both cases. If you measured only outcomes you could not tell the two apart, which is why the concept of authority is needed at all.

munotes.in99

Power and Authority Compared

The shopkeeper's disagreement is irrelevant to the second case. He thinks the rate is too high and pays anyway. Authority produces compliance without agreement, which is exactly what makes government possible.

The costs differ enormously. The first man must be present, armed, and prepared to use the weapon, once per shop. The second sends a piece of paper to a lakh of shops and most of them pay. A state can be run the second way and cannot be run the first.

What this comparison is NOT

It is not a contrast between bad and good. Power is not wicked, and authority is not automatically benign. An authority accepted as rightful can command atrocities, and it commands them more efficiently than any coercion could, precisely because it is accepted. This is the uncomfortable observation that Module II's chapters on unjust laws are built on.

Authority is not power plus law. A legally conferred power that nobody accepts is not authority: it is power with a certificate. And an authority may exist with no legal basis at all, as traditional and charismatic authority do.

The distinction is not always sharp in practice. Most real relationships contain both, and the interesting question is usually the proportion. A tax system rests mostly on authority with a fringe of coercion; an occupation rests mostly on coercion with a fringe of authority.

The distinction is not merely academic. Whether an order is authority or power decides whether disobeying it is a crime, a wrong, or an act of resistance, and that is the whole of Module II.

Quick revision

  1. Authority is a species of power, distinguished by the ground of compliance.
  2. The master difference: power is obeyed for what will follow, authority for who commanded.
  3. Source: resources against belief. Direction: downward against downward but conferred upward.
  4. Scope: as far as the resource reaches, against defined limits.
  5. Cost: high and case by case, against low and general.
  6. On challenge: escalate or lose, against a legitimacy crisis met by reasserting title.
  7. Weber's terms: Macht and Herrschaft.
  8. The example: the dacoit and the tax officer. Identical outcome, different relationship, hugely different cost.
  9. Not a contrast between bad and good. Accepted authority can command worse things than coercion can, because it is accepted.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish power from authority. Power is the capacity to affect the behaviour of others in a way they would not have chosen, resting on any basis whatever, and the subject complies because of what will happen otherwise. Authority is the species of power that those subject to it accept as rightful, and the subject complies because of who gave the order. Power comes from resources and lasts while they last; authority comes from belief, has defined limits, attaches to an office and survives its holder.

munotes.in100

Power and Authority Compared

2. "Authority is a species of power." Explain. Because in every exercise of authority a subject's behaviour is being affected in a way they would not otherwise have chosen, which satisfies the definition of power. Authority is marked off within that genus by the ground of compliance: the subject obeys because the commander is accepted as entitled, and not because of the consequences of refusal. It follows that power and authority are not opposites, and that describing something as power says nothing about whether it is also authority.

3. Why is authority cheaper than power, and why does that matter to a state? Because compliance is general and voluntary, so the sanction is rarely applied, while power has to be brought to bear on each subject separately at a cost in money, manpower and resentment that rises with each use. It matters because no state can compel a population the size of India's. A tax notice sent to a lakh of shops is paid by most of them; a demand backed by nothing but force would require a collector standing in every shop, which is why every regime, however coercive, tries to convert its power into authority.

4. Give the standard example and explain what it shows. A dacoit and a tax officer each take ten thousand rupees from the same shopkeeper. The outcome is identical, which is why outcomes alone cannot distinguish the two. The shopkeeper regards only the second as entitled, which locates the difference in the relationship rather than in the transfer. And the second could be repeated across a lakh of shops by post, while the first requires the man to be present and armed each time, which shows why states are built on authority.

5. Is authority always preferable to power? Give reasons. Not in any moral sense. Weber's category is value neutral, and an authority accepted as rightful can command grave wrongs and will command them more efficiently than coercion could, precisely because those who obey believe they ought to. What authority is preferable in is cost, stability and predictability. Whether it should be obeyed in a given case is a different question altogether, and it is the question Module II asks under the heading of obedience to unjust laws.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in101

Chapter Twenty-Two

Legitimacy: The Concept

Syllabus topic 1.4, "Legitimacy - Concept and Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power"

In one line

Legitimacy is the quality that makes people believe a ruler, a rule or an institution is entitled to be obeyed; it is what turns power into authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: legitimacy is the quality of rightfulness attributed to a political order, an institution, a rule or a command by those subject to it, in virtue of which they accept a duty to comply that is independent of the consequences of non-compliance; it is the ground on which authority rests and the resource by which power is converted into authority.

The word

Legitimacy comes from the Latin legitimus, lawful, from lex, law. The etymology is a trap, because in political science legitimacy means considerably more than lawfulness. A law may be perfectly valid and thoroughly illegitimate. What the word now names is rightfulness accepted, and the legal sense is only one of the grounds on which the acceptance may rest.

The two senses, and why the difference matters

This is the single distinction to get right, because a question on legitimacy is often really a question about which sense is being used.

The descriptive or sociological sense, associated with Weber. Legitimacy is a belief. A regime is legitimate if those subject to it believe it is entitled to rule. The question is empirical: do they believe it? The answer says nothing at all about whether they ought to.

The normative sense, associated with political philosophy. Legitimacy is a justification. A regime is legitimate if it actually satisfies the standards that entitle a government to be obeyed, whether or not anybody believes it does. The question is moral: is the belief warranted?

Why the two must be kept apart. On the descriptive test, a regime that has persuaded a population to believe in it is legitimate however it treats them, and a just government that nobody trusts is illegitimate. Most students find that intolerable, and the reason they find it intolerable is that they are using the normative sense. Weber's answer is that he is describing a fact about societies and not endorsing it, and that a sociologist who defined legitimacy by justice would be unable to study the regimes that were plainly obeyed and plainly unjust.

The mature position, and the one to write, is that both senses are needed and they ask different questions. The descriptive sense explains why a regime is stable; the normative sense tells you whether it deserves to be.

Beetham's three conditions

David Beetham's account is the most useful single framework for an answer, because it repairs the weakness of the purely descriptive approach without collapsing into pure philosophy. Power is legitimate, he argues, when three conditions are satisfied.

munotes.in102

Legitimacy: The Concept

1. It conforms to established rules. The power was acquired and is exercised in accordance with the rules of the society, whether those rules are legal, customary or conventional. This is legal validity, and it is necessary but not sufficient.

2. The rules are justifiable by reference to beliefs shared by both the dominant and the subordinate. It is not enough that a rule exists; the rule must be defensible in terms the ruled themselves accept. A rule of succession justified by a divine right that nobody now believes in fails at this level even if it is perfectly valid.

3. There is evidence of consent by the subordinate. Some positive act of recognition: voting, taking an oath, participating, publicly acknowledging.

Beetham's real contribution is what he says about failure. Each condition has its own kind of breakdown, and they are not the same thing. Breach of the rules is illegitimacy. A loss of shared belief is a legitimacy deficit. Withdrawal of consent is delegitimation. A regime may be in one of these and not the others, and the remedy for each differs.

Where legitimacy comes from

Legality, that is, acquisition and exercise according to rule.

Tradition, that is, the belief that the arrangement has always been so.

Charisma, that is, belief in an extraordinary person.

Those three are Weber's, and they are the classic answer. Modern states add three more, and an answer that names them is fuller.

Consent, expressed through elections. The dominant source in the modern world. The rulers are entitled because the ruled chose them.

Performance. The claim that a regime is entitled because it delivers: security, growth, order, welfare. This is sometimes called output legitimacy, in contrast with input legitimacy which rests on how decisions were made. It is powerful and it is fragile, because a regime that rests on performance falls when performance falls.

Ideology. A shared account of the world in which the regime's rule is the right one, whether religious, nationalist or revolutionary.

The connections a good answer draws

Legitimacy and authority. Legitimacy is the ground; authority is the relation it supports. Where legitimacy is present, power is exercised as authority; where it is absent, only coercion remains.

Legitimacy and legality. Legality is one source of legitimacy, and only one. A statute passed by a competent legislature is legal; whether it is legitimate depends on whether the people subject to it accept the legislature's title to make it and the rule's claim on them.

Legitimacy and obligation. If a regime is legitimate in the normative sense, an obligation to obey follows. If it is legitimate only in the descriptive sense, people behave as though an obligation followed, which is a different fact. Module II is entirely about the gap between the two.

munotes.in103

Legitimacy: The Concept

Legitimacy and consent. Consent is evidence of legitimacy and is not identical with it. People consent to things for many reasons, including fear and ignorance, and a regime can be legitimate in the eyes of a population that has never been asked.

A worked example

Three governments take office in three neighbouring states in the same year.

The first wins a general election conducted by an independent commission, and takes office under the constitution. Its legitimacy is at its strongest: it satisfies Beetham's first condition by rule, the second because the population accepts elections as the right way to choose a government, and the third because millions voted.

The second takes power when the army removes the elected government. It has power. Beetham's first condition fails outright, so it is illegitimate in the strict sense, and everything it does afterwards is an attempt to repair the failure: a promise of elections, a referendum, a new constitution, a court ruling.

The third was elected fairly, but four years later has stopped holding local elections, has taken control of the broadcast media, and has arranged that the electoral commission's members are its own nominees. Notice that this is the hardest case and the most common. Condition one is arguably satisfied, because each step was done by a law validly passed. Condition two is failing, because the population's shared belief is in elections that are real. And condition three is being hollowed out. This is Beetham's legitimacy deficit rather than illegitimacy, and it is why "ethical decay of democracy" is a topic in Module IV.

Distinctions that carry marks

LegalityLegitimacy
Question askedWas it done according to the rules?Is it accepted as rightful?
Decided byCourts, applying the rulesThe people subject to it
EvidenceThe instrument, the record, the judgmentCompliance without compulsion; participation
Can exist without the otherYes: a validly passed law nobody acceptsYes: a leader obeyed with no legal office
Failure looks likeAn order set aside as voidNon-compliance, protest, withdrawal
Descriptive legitimacyNormative legitimacy
Legitimate meansBelieved to be entitledActually entitled
QuestionDo people accept it?Ought they to?
MethodObservationArgument
Associated withWeberPolitical philosophy
Uncomfortable resultAn unjust regime may be legitimateA stable regime may be illegitimate

What legitimacy is NOT

It is not legality. The words share a root and not a meaning.

It is not popularity. A government can be unpopular and legitimate, and that combination is normal: most governments are disliked for most of their terms and are still accepted as entitled to govern.

munotes.in104

Legitimacy: The Concept

It is not the same as consent. Consent is evidence of it.

It is not permanent. It is continuously earned and can be lost quickly.

It is not all or nothing. A regime may be legitimate to some groups and not others, and in some functions and not others, which is the ordinary condition of a large state.

Quick revision

  1. Legitimacy is accepted rightfulness: the ground on which authority rests, and what converts power into authority.
  2. Two senses: descriptive (Weber), a belief, tested by asking whether people accept it; normative, a justification, tested by asking whether they ought to.
  3. Beetham's three conditions: conformity to established rules; justifiability by shared beliefs; evidence of consent.
  4. Three failures, and they differ: breach of rules is illegitimacy, loss of shared belief is a legitimacy deficit, withdrawal of consent is delegitimation.
  5. Sources: legality, tradition, charisma, consent through elections, performance, ideology.
  6. Input legitimacy rests on how a decision was made; output legitimacy rests on what it delivers. The second is powerful and fragile.
  7. Not legality, not popularity, not consent, not permanent, not all or nothing.

Test yourself

1. Define legitimacy and distinguish it from legality. Legitimacy is the quality of rightfulness attributed to a political order by those subject to it, in virtue of which they accept a duty to comply independent of the consequences of refusal. Legality asks only whether something was done according to the rules and is settled by a court; legitimacy asks whether the arrangement is accepted as rightful and is settled by those subject to it. A validly enacted law that nobody accepts is legal and illegitimate; a leader obeyed without any office is legitimate and has no legality at all.

2. Explain the descriptive and normative senses of legitimacy. In the descriptive or sociological sense, associated with Weber, legitimacy is a belief: a regime is legitimate if those subject to it believe it is entitled to rule, and the question is empirical. In the normative sense, associated with political philosophy, legitimacy is a justification: a regime is legitimate if it in fact satisfies the standards that entitle a government to obedience, whether or not anybody believes it does, and the question is moral. Both are needed, because the first explains stability and the second tells you whether stability is deserved.

3. State Beetham's three conditions and the three ways they fail. Power is legitimate when it conforms to established rules, when those rules are justifiable by reference to beliefs shared by both rulers and ruled, and when there is evidence of consent by the subordinate. Breach of the rules is illegitimacy; loss of the shared beliefs that justify the rules is a legitimacy deficit; and withdrawal of the expressed consent is delegitimation. The distinction matters because the remedy for each is different.

munotes.in105

Legitimacy: The Concept

4. What are input and output legitimacy? Input legitimacy rests on how decisions are made, so a government is entitled because it was chosen by proper procedures and decides by them. Output legitimacy rests on what is delivered, so a government is entitled because it produces security, order, growth or welfare. Output legitimacy is powerful, since people forgive a great deal to a government that works, and fragile, since a regime resting on performance has nothing left when performance fails.

5. "An unjust regime can be legitimate." Is this a defect in the concept? On the descriptive sense it is not a defect but the point: Weber is recording what societies actually believe, and a sociology that defined legitimacy by justice could not study the many regimes that were plainly obeyed and plainly unjust. On the normative sense the statement is false, since a regime that fails the standards entitling it to obedience is not legitimate however widely it is believed in. The two senses answer different questions, and the error is to use one sense to refute the other.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in106

Chapter Twenty-Three

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

Syllabus topic 1.4, "Legitimacy - Concept and Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power"

In one line

Legitimacy is what makes power cheap, durable and effective, so a government that has it can do things no amount of force could achieve, and a government losing it cannot govern however much force it has.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: legitimacy is relevant to the exercise of political power because it converts power into authority and so secures voluntary compliance; because it reduces the cost of governing to a level at which a modern state is possible at all; because it enables a government to impose burdens and survive unpopular decisions; because it makes the peaceful transfer of power possible; and because its loss produces a crisis that no exercise of power can resolve.

The seven things legitimacy does

1. It converts power into authority

A regime with legitimacy is obeyed because it is thought entitled. A regime without it is obeyed only when somebody is watching. This is the master function and the rest follow from it.

2. It makes government affordable

Consider the arithmetic. India has a population of well over a hundred crore and a few tens of lakhs of police and armed forces. If even five per cent of the population had to be individually compelled to comply with the ordinary law, the machinery would be overwhelmed within a week. Government at scale is possible only because almost everybody complies almost all the time, without anybody being sent to make them.

3. It lets a government impose burdens

Any government must sometimes do things people dislike: raise taxes, acquire land, restrict movement in an epidemic, conscript, ration. A legitimate government can do these and survive; an illegitimate one cannot attempt them.

4. It allows unpopular decisions to be accepted

A legitimate authority is obeyed by people who disagree with the particular decision. That gap between compliance and agreement is what makes a plural society governable, because in any large society some substantial group disagrees with every decision.

5. It makes the transfer of power peaceful

This is the achievement people notice least and would miss most. A defeated government hands over office to its opponents, and the machinery of the state, which was entirely under its control the day before, transfers with it. Nothing compels this. It happens because the office is accepted as belonging to whoever the process selects.

6. It stabilises the system across crises

Legitimacy is held by the constitutional order, not only by the government of the day. A war lost, a currency collapsed or a scandal exposed brings down governments in a legitimate system and brings down the system itself in an illegitimate one.

munotes.in107

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

7. It supplies the ground of political obligation

If a regime is legitimate, its commands generate a duty to obey. If it is not, the citizen's position changes completely, and the whole of Module II follows from that change.

What its absence looks like

Rising cost of enforcement. More police, more prosecutions, more force, for the same level of compliance.

Evasion rather than defiance. People do not resist, they avoid: taxes go unpaid, rules are ignored where nobody is watching, the informal sector grows.

Withdrawal. Turnout falls, offices go unfilled, institutions stop being used.

Reliance on other legitimating claims. A government losing its electoral legitimacy will reach for performance, for tradition, for a national emergency or for an external enemy.

Then a legitimacy crisis, in which the population no longer accepts the arrangement as rightful. Jurgen Habermas's term for the modern form of this is a legitimation crisis: a state which has taken responsibility for economic outcomes and welfare comes to be judged on them, and when it cannot deliver, the deficit is transferred from the economy to the political order itself.

The Indian case in which the two came apart

Facts. Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, 1975 Supp SCC 1, began as an election petition. The Allahabad High Court set aside the Prime Minister's election from Rae Bareli on the ground of corrupt practices. While the appeal was pending in the Supreme Court, Parliament enacted the Constitution (Thirty-ninth Amendment) Act 1975, inserting article 329A. Clause (1) provided that the election of a person holding the office of Prime Minister could not be called in question except before an authority Parliament might set up. Clause (4) declared that such an election, if a court had already declared it void, should continue to be valid in all respects, and that the court's order and the findings on which it rested should be deemed always to have been void. Clauses (5) and (6) carried the scheme into pending appeals and gave the article overriding effect.

Held. The Supreme Court struck down clause (4) of article 329A in its entirety. Democracy is a basic feature of the Constitution and free and fair elections are part of that democratic structure, so a provision that simply declared valid an election which a court had found invalid for corrupt practices damaged an essential feature and was beyond the amending power. The Court held further that the constituent power is legislative in nature and cannot exercise judicial power: validating one particular election by fiat, without laying down any law by reference to which validity could be judged, was the exercise of a judicial function by an amending body. It found the clause inseverable, so no part of it survived. The election itself was then upheld on the merits by applying the Representation of the People Act as amended.

munotes.in108

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

Why it matters here. Everything the government did was done with the votes it had, in the form the Constitution provides for amendment. It was, in that sense, an exercise of legal power. What it lacked was legitimacy: a provision that declares its own leader's election valid by deeming a court's finding never to have existed cannot be justified in terms that the people who are supposed to elect governments share, which is Beetham's second condition failing while his first appears to be satisfied. The case shows three things a student should take from it. Legality and legitimacy can be separated, and a government under pressure will separate them. A legitimacy crisis in a constitutional state is fought in institutions, here in a court. And the resolution was itself a claim to legitimacy: the Court did not assert power, it asserted that some things are beyond the reach of any majority.

A worked example

Two governments each impose a sudden restriction on movement during an epidemic.

The first has been elected recently, publishes the medical advice it acted on, has its measure debated in the legislature, allows it to be challenged in court, and sets a date on which it expires. Compliance is high, complaints are loud, and almost nobody has to be prosecuted. The cost of the measure to the state is the cost of announcing it.

The second issues the same restriction by an order nobody may see, without a legislature sitting, with the courts not functioning, and with no end date. Compliance is high in the first fortnight, because people are frightened, and then falls. Enforcement moves from persuasion to fines to force. Within a month the government is spending more on enforcing the restriction than on the epidemic.

The measure was identical. Everything that differed was legitimacy, and legitimacy turned out to be the whole of the difference between a rule that worked and a rule that had to be imposed.

Distinctions that carry marks

A regime with legitimacyA regime without it
ComplianceGeneral and voluntaryOnly where enforcement reaches
Cost of governingLowRises continuously
Unpopular decisionsPossible, and survivableAttempted only under compulsion
Transfer of powerPeaceful, by the processContested, and usually violent
Response to crisisThe government falls, the system standsThe system is at risk
Typical failureLoss of an electionEvasion, withdrawal, then collapse
What it reaches for when weakeningRenewal of consentPerformance claims, tradition, an emergency, an enemy

What this topic is NOT

Legitimacy is not a substitute for power. A legitimate government still needs police, courts and revenue. What legitimacy does is reduce how often they must be used.

munotes.in109

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

It is not the same as being liked. Governments are routinely unpopular and legitimate at the same time.

It is not conferred once. It is renewed continuously, by elections, by the courts, by the ordinary experience of citizens dealing with the administration.

Its loss is not always visible. It shows first in evasion and withdrawal, which look like apathy, long before it shows in protest.

Quick revision

  1. Legitimacy converts power into authority, which is the master function.
  2. It makes government affordable: no state can compel a population its own size.
  3. It lets a government impose burdens and survive unpopular decisions, because compliance is detached from agreement.
  4. It makes the transfer of power peaceful, which is the achievement least noticed and most missed.
  5. It stabilises the system: a legitimate order loses governments, an illegitimate one loses itself.
  6. It supplies the ground of political obligation, which is the bridge into Module II.
  7. Loss shows as rising enforcement cost, evasion, withdrawal, and a reach for other legitimating claims; then a legitimation crisis, Habermas's term for the modern form.
  8. Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, 1975 Supp SCC 1: clause (4) of article 329A struck down; free and fair elections part of the democratic basic structure; the constituent power cannot exercise judicial power.

Test yourself

1. Why is legitimacy relevant to the exercise of political power? Because it converts power into authority and so secures compliance that is voluntary and general. That makes governing affordable at a scale no coercive apparatus could reach, allows a government to impose necessary burdens and to survive decisions large groups dislike, makes the transfer of office peaceful, keeps the constitutional order standing when a particular government falls, and supplies the ground on which citizens owe any obligation to obey at all.

2. "Legitimacy makes government affordable." Explain with reference to India. India's population exceeds a hundred crore and its police and armed forces number a few tens of lakhs. If even a small fraction of the population had to be individually compelled to obey the ordinary law, the enforcement machinery would be overwhelmed within days. Government on this scale is possible only because almost everyone complies almost always without anyone being sent to make them, and that voluntary compliance is exactly what legitimacy produces.

3. What are the symptoms of a loss of legitimacy? The cost of enforcement rises for the same level of compliance. Evasion rather than open defiance spreads: taxes go unpaid and rules are ignored wherever nobody is watching. Participation withdraws, so turnout falls and institutions stop being used. And the government reaches for substitute claims, resting on performance, on tradition, on an emergency or on an external enemy. Only later does this appear as open protest.

munotes.in110

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

4. State the facts and holding of Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, and say why the case belongs in this topic. The Allahabad High Court set aside the Prime Minister's election for corrupt practices. Pending appeal, Parliament inserted article 329A, clause (4) of which declared such an election to continue valid and deemed the court's order and findings always to have been void. The Supreme Court struck clause (4) down in its entirety: democracy is a basic feature, free and fair elections are part of it, and the constituent power, being legislative, cannot exercise judicial power by validating one election without laying down any law. It belongs here because legality and legitimacy were visibly pulled apart: the amendment had the votes and the form, and lacked any justification in terms the electorate shared.

5. What is a legitimation crisis? Habermas's term for the modern form of a legitimacy crisis. A state that has taken responsibility for economic outcomes and for welfare comes to be judged on them, so an economic failure it cannot resolve is transferred upward and becomes a failure of the political order itself. The distinguishing feature is that the deficit begins outside politics and ends by attacking the acceptance on which the political order rests, which is why no exercise of power can resolve it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in111

Module II

Political Obligation - State Authority and Citizen

munotes.in

Chapter Twenty-Four

What Political Obligation Is

Syllabus topic 2.1, "Concept of Political Obligation"

In one line

Political obligation is the duty to obey the state, and the question is not whether the state can make you obey but whether you ought to.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: political obligation is the moral duty of a citizen to obey the laws and commands of the state to which they belong, and the problem of political obligation is the question whether such a duty exists at all, on what ground it rests, to whom it is owed, how far it extends, and what may be done when it conflicts with the citizen's other duties.

Why the question is worth asking

A student's first reaction is that the question answers itself: you obey because it is the law and because there are consequences if you do not. Neither answer touches the problem.

"There are consequences" is not an obligation. A robber who points a gun at you creates consequences, and nobody says you have a duty to hand over your money. If the state's claim on you were nothing more than the ability to punish, then the state would be a very large robber, and the words "ought" and "duty" would have no work to do. This is exactly why Module I spent so long separating power from authority: the distinction was made in order to make this question possible.

"Because it is the law" is circular. Asking why you should obey the law is not answered by saying that the law says you must. The question is precisely why that saying binds you.

So the problem stands, and it is a real one. A law student will meet it in the first week of jurisprudence and will meet it again every time a client asks whether a rule must be complied with while a challenge to it is pending.

Three duties that are not the same

This is where marks are lost, so it is worth being slow.

Legal duty. What the law requires, enforceable by the courts. Whether you have a legal duty is settled by reading the statute.

Moral duty. What you ought to do, all things considered. Whether you have a moral duty is settled by argument, not by a statute.

Political obligation. The moral duty to comply with legal duties because they are imposed by the state you belong to. It sits across the other two, and that is its whole difficulty.

Take a rule requiring helmets. The legal duty comes from the statute. There may be an independent moral duty not to endanger yourself and your dependants, which would exist whether or not any statute said so. Political obligation is neither of those. It is the further claim that even if you thought the rule pointless you ought to comply, because your state enacted it.

munotes.in112

What Political Obligation Is

Test the difference with a rule you think has no independent moral content at all, such as driving on the left. There is nothing morally superior about the left. If political obligation exists, you ought to drive on the left in India, and it is the existence of the Indian rule and nothing else that makes it so.

The features of the obligation

It is moral, not merely legal. Otherwise the question is circular.

It is owed to a particular state. An Indian citizen owes obedience to Indian law and not to Sri Lankan law, and the theories differ sharply about what creates that particularity.

It is content independent. This is the most important feature and the hardest. The obligation attaches because of the source of the command, not because of what the command says. If you obeyed only the rules you agreed with, you would be following your own judgment and the state would be doing no work.

It is prima facie, not absolute. Almost every theorist accepts that it can be outweighed. That concession is what makes topic 2.3 possible: if the duty were absolute there could be no problem about unjust laws.

It is general. It covers the whole body of law, not a selection.

What has to be explained

A good answer states the problem before answering it, because most theories fail on one of these four and knowing which is how you evaluate them.

Generality. Why does the duty cover the whole of the law rather than the parts you approve of?

Particularity. Why do you owe it to this state rather than to any well-run state?

Content independence. Why does the source bind you rather than the merits?

Universality within the state. Does it bind everybody, including those who were never asked and those the state treats badly?

The anarchist objection

The strongest challenge, and an answer that mentions it is stronger than one that does not.

Robert Paul Wolff argued that there is no political obligation at all, and he argued it from autonomy. A person's primary moral duty is to decide for themselves what they ought to do, taking responsibility for the decision. Authority requires them to do what they are told because they are told. The two cannot be reconciled: to accept authority is to surrender the very responsibility that makes one a moral agent. Wolff's conclusion is philosophical anarchism: the state may be useful, and it may even be entitled to use force, but no citizen has a duty to obey it.

The usual reply is that the argument proves too much. It would abolish the obligation to keep a promise, to follow a doctor's advice, or to accept a court's decision in a dispute you are party to, since all of these involve doing something because somebody else determined it. And it takes no account of the fact that in a plural society people disagree, so that either some authority decides or nothing is decided.

munotes.in113

What Political Obligation Is

A worked example

Sameer is a shopkeeper in Thane. A municipal rule requires him to keep his shop shut one day a week, and the day allotted to his street is Tuesday. He thinks the rule is silly and that Wednesday would suit the street better.

Does he have a legal duty to shut on Tuesday? Yes, and it is settled by reading the rule.

Does he have an independent moral duty? No. Nothing about Tuesday is morally superior to Wednesday.

Does he have a political obligation? That is the whole question of this module. If he does, he ought to shut on Tuesday even though the rule is arbitrary and even though he would not have chosen it, and the reason must be something about the municipality's title to decide rather than about Tuesdays.

Notice the four problems appearing in a small case. Generality: the same argument must cover the rule he likes about weights and measures. Particularity: he owes this to Thane's municipality and not to another town's. Content independence: he complies because of who made the rule, not because he is persuaded. And prima facie: if the rule required him to shut on the one day his medicines could be delivered to a dying relative, most theories would say the duty is outweighed.

Distinctions that carry marks

Legal dutyMoral dutyPolitical obligation
SourceA statute or other lawMoralityThe state's title to command
Settled byReading the lawArgumentArgument, about the state's title
Enforced byCourts and officialsConscience and opinionNot directly enforced; it explains why enforcement is rightful
Depends on content?Yes, on what the law saysYesNo, it is content independent
ExampleWearing a helmet because the Act says soNot endangering your dependantsDriving on the left because India decided on the left

What political obligation is NOT

It is not the same as obedience. People obey out of fear, habit and convenience. Obligation is about whether they ought to, and a population that obeys perfectly may have no obligation at all.

It is not the same as loyalty or patriotism. Those are attitudes; this is a duty, and one may have it without any warm feeling towards the state.

It is not absolute. Nearly every theory treats it as capable of being outweighed, which is why civil disobedience is a coherent idea rather than a contradiction.

munotes.in114

What Political Obligation Is

It is not answered by the sanction. The threat explains compliance and not obligation, which is the first thing this chapter separates.

Quick revision

  1. Political obligation is the moral duty to obey the state's law because the state imposed it.
  2. The sanction cannot answer it (that would make the state a robber) and "because it is the law" is circular.
  3. Three duties: legal, moral, and political obligation, which is the moral duty to comply with legal duties.
  4. Features: moral, owed to a particular state, content independent, prima facie and general.
  5. Four things a theory must explain: generality, particularity, content independence, and universality within the state.
  6. Wolff's philosophical anarchism: autonomy requires deciding for oneself, authority requires doing as told; therefore no obligation. Reply: it proves too much, and disagreement has to be settled somehow.

Test yourself

1. Define political obligation and explain why the question is not answered by the existence of sanctions. It is the moral duty of a citizen to obey the laws and commands of their own state because that state imposed them. Sanctions cannot answer it because they explain compliance rather than duty: a robber with a gun also creates consequences, and nobody says one has a duty to hand over the money. If the state's claim rested on nothing but its capacity to punish, it would differ from the robber only in scale, and the words "ought" and "duty" would do no work at all.

2. Distinguish political obligation from legal duty and from moral duty. Legal duty is what the law requires and is settled by reading the law. Moral duty is what one ought to do all things considered and is settled by argument. Political obligation is the moral duty to comply with legal duties because one's own state imposed them, so it lies across the other two. A helmet rule illustrates all three: the statute creates the legal duty, an independent moral duty not to endanger dependants may exist anyway, and political obligation is the further claim that one ought to comply even if one thinks the rule pointless.

3. What does it mean to say the obligation is content independent, and why does it matter? That the duty attaches because of the source of the command rather than because of what it says. It matters because an obligation to obey only the rules one approves of is not an obligation at all: one would be following one's own judgment, and the state would be adding nothing. Driving on the left is the clean test, since nothing is morally superior about the left, so if any duty exists it comes from the Indian rule and nothing else.

munotes.in115

What Political Obligation Is

4. What are the four things a theory of political obligation must explain? Generality, why the duty covers the whole body of law rather than the approved parts. Particularity, why it is owed to this state rather than to any well-governed state. Content independence, why the source binds rather than the merits. And universality within the state, whether it binds everybody, including those never asked and those the state has treated badly. Most theories fail on one of these, and identifying which is how they are evaluated.

5. State Wolff's anarchist argument and one reply to it. Wolff argued that a person's primary moral duty is autonomy, deciding for themselves what they ought to do and taking responsibility for it, while authority requires them to act because they are told to. The two cannot be reconciled, so no citizen has any duty to obey, though the state may still be useful. The standard reply is that the argument proves too much: it would equally abolish the duty to keep a promise or to accept a court's decision in one's own case, and it takes no account of the fact that in a society where people disagree, either some authority decides or nothing is decided at all.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in116

Chapter Twenty-Five

The Command and Obedience Relationship

Syllabus topic 2.1.1, "Command and Obedience Relationship"

In one line

The oldest account of law says that a law is a command issued by a sovereign to a subject, backed by a threat, and that obedience is what a subject owes; the most influential criticism of that account is that it describes a gunman and not a legal system.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the command and obedience relationship is the model of political authority in which the state, as sovereign, issues general commands to its subjects and the subjects are under a duty of habitual obedience enforced by sanctions; it was stated systematically by John Austin, and H. L. A. Hart's criticism of it is the standard starting point of modern jurisprudence.

The relationship, stated plainly

At its simplest the political relationship has two ends. At one end somebody issues a direction. At the other somebody complies. Everything in this module is about what joins the two.

Three elements make it a command relationship rather than a request or a suggestion.

A superior and an inferior. The relationship is asymmetrical: one party is in a position to require, the other to comply.

An expression of a wish, addressed to the other, that they do or not do something.

A sanction, that is, the power and the intention to inflict some evil if the wish is not complied with.

Austin's own formulation binds the three together: wherever a wish is expressed by a party who will visit an evil on you if you do not comply, the expression is a command, and you lie under a duty to obey it. Duty, command and sanction are, on this view, three names for one relationship looked at from three sides.

John Austin's command theory

Austin's account, from the early nineteenth century, is the classical statement and every later theory is a reaction to it.

Law is the command of the sovereign. A law properly so called is a general command issued by a sovereign to those subject to that sovereign.

Who is the sovereign? The person or body that receives habitual obedience from the bulk of a society and is not itself in the habit of obeying anybody else. Both halves matter: habitual obedience from below, and independence from above.

Sanction. Every law carries the threat of an evil for disobedience. Without a sanction, on this account, there is no duty and therefore no law.

Sovereignty is illimitable and indivisible. The sovereign cannot be legally limited, because a limit would require a superior to impose it, and then that superior would be the sovereign.

Consequences Austin accepted. Constitutional law, on his account, is not law properly so called but positive morality, because it purports to bind the sovereign. International law is not law either, for the same reason. And a bad law is still a law, which is Austin's famous separation of law from morals: the existence of a law is one thing, its merit or demerit another.

munotes.in117

The Command and Obedience Relationship

What is right in it

An answer that only attacks Austin is a weak answer, so state the strengths first.

It captures the criminal law very well. "Do not commit theft, or you will be imprisoned" is exactly a general command backed by a sanction.

It insists that law is a social fact. What the law is can be found out by looking at what a determinate human superior actually laid down, rather than by asking what is just. That is the beginning of legal positivism, and it is what allows a lawyer to advise on the law as it is.

It is clear. Every term is defined and the whole system follows from three ideas.

Hart's criticism

H. L. A. Hart's answer is the most important argument in modern jurisprudence and every point of it can be made in a political science answer.

The gunman writ large. The command model cannot distinguish a legal system from a gunman who says "your money or your life". The gunman issues a wish backed by a threat, and on Austin's account the victim is under a duty. But we all say the victim was obliged to hand over the money and was not under an obligation to do so. Austin's theory captures being obliged and leaves out obligation altogether, which is the very thing a theory of law had to explain.

Not all laws are commands backed by threats. Many laws confer powers rather than impose duties: the rules for making a will, a contract, a marriage or a company. If you fail to comply with the formalities for a will, nothing is inflicted on you; your will is simply void. Nullity is not a sanction, and treating it as one confuses two different things.

Laws apply to those who make them. A legislature that enacts a tax binds its own members. On the command model the sovereign is the one who commands and cannot be commanded, so this ordinary fact is inexplicable.

Custom and continuity. Habitual obedience to a person cannot explain why the successor of a sovereign has authority the moment they take office, before any habit of obeying them can exist. Only a rule about succession explains it.

The internal point of view. Austin's account describes obedience from outside, as a pattern of behaviour. But those inside a legal system treat rules as standards for criticising their own and others' conduct. When somebody says "you ought not to have done that", they are not predicting a punishment; they are appealing to a rule they accept.

munotes.in118

The Command and Obedience Relationship

Hart's own answer. A legal system is a union of primary rules, which impose duties, and secondary rules, which confer powers: rules of change, for making and repealing law; rules of adjudication, for deciding when a primary rule has been broken; and the rule of recognition, which settles what counts as law in that system, and which exists because officials actually practise it.

Why this matters for political obligation

The whole module turns on the answer.

If Austin were right, the command and obedience relationship would exhaust politics. There would be no space for the question "ought I to obey?", because duty would simply mean liability to a sanction, and the answer to "ought I?" would always be "you will be punished if you do not".

Hart's reply reopens the question. If obligation is a matter of rules that people accept as standards, then one can ask whether a particular rule ought to be accepted, and whether accepting the system as a whole is justified. Hart himself insisted that a valid law may be too iniquitous to obey, and that saying so plainly is better than pretending such a rule is not law at all.

A worked example

A municipal officer serves a notice requiring a hoarding to be removed within seven days, failing which it will be removed and the cost recovered.

On Austin's model. The sovereign, through a delegate, has expressed a wish, backed by an evil. The owner is under a duty. Nothing more needs to be said.

Where the model runs out. The officer's power to serve the notice comes from a section that confers a power rather than imposing a duty; the section itself is not a command backed by a threat to anybody. The officer is bound by the same Act, and if the notice goes beyond it a court will quash it, so the sovereign is being limited. And if the owner complies while thinking the notice wrong, they are treating the rule as a standard rather than merely calculating the cost of the alternative.

What Hart adds. The notice binds because it was made under a rule that officials of this system accept as determining what counts as law, and because that rule was applied within its terms. That explains why the owner's compliance is obedience to a rule rather than submission to a threat, and it leaves open the further question this module is about, whether the owner ought to comply.

Distinctions that carry marks

Being obligedBeing under an obligation
What it describesA fact about pressure on youA normative position
Depends onA credible threatAn accepted rule
True of the gunman's victim?YesNo
Survives the threat being removed?NoYes
Austin's theory capturesThis oneNot this one
munotes.in119

The Command and Obedience Relationship

Primary rulesSecondary rules
What they doImpose dutiesConfer powers
ExampleDo not commit theftThe formalities for a valid will
Failure producesA sanctionNullity
Hart's three kinds of secondary ruleChange, adjudication, and recognition

What this topic is NOT

Austin's theory is not simply wrong. It describes the criminal law well and it established that law can be identified as a social fact, which is the foundation of legal positivism.

Hart is not a natural lawyer. He is a positivist too. His quarrel with Austin is about what kind of social fact law is, not about whether law must be moral.

"Command" here is not an order shouted at an individual. Austin's laws are general commands addressed to classes of persons and acts.

Habitual obedience is not consent. A population may habitually obey a regime it detests, which is exactly why habit cannot ground an obligation.

Quick revision

  1. Austin: law is the command of a sovereign, backed by a sanction; duty, command and sanction are one relationship from three sides.
  2. Sovereign = receives habitual obedience from the bulk of society and obeys no one else; sovereignty is illimitable and indivisible.
  3. Consequences Austin accepted: constitutional law and international law are not law properly so called; a bad law is still law.
  4. Hart's criticisms: the gunman writ large; power conferring rules exist and nullity is not a sanction; laws bind their makers; habit cannot explain succession; and the internal point of view is left out.
  5. Being obliged is not being under an obligation. This is the single most quotable point.
  6. Hart's answer: primary rules of duty plus secondary rules of change, adjudication and recognition.
  7. Hart accepted that a valid law may be too iniquitous to obey, which is what keeps topic 2.3 open.

Test yourself

1. State Austin's command theory of law. A law properly so called is a general command issued by a sovereign to those subject to it and backed by a sanction, the sovereign being the person or body that receives habitual obedience from the bulk of a society and habitually obeys no one else. Command, duty and sanction are three aspects of one relationship. Sovereignty is illimitable and indivisible, from which Austin accepted that constitutional and international law are not law properly so called, and that a bad law remains a law.

2. Explain Hart's gunman objection. Austin's model cannot separate a legal system from a gunman demanding money at gunpoint, since both involve a wish expressed with a threat of evil for non-compliance. Yet we say the victim was obliged to hand over the money, not that they were under an obligation to do so. Austin's account therefore captures only being obliged, a fact about the pressure applied, and omits obligation, which is a normative position resting on an accepted rule. The omitted element is precisely what a theory of law had to explain.

munotes.in120

The Command and Obedience Relationship

3. Why are power conferring rules a problem for the command theory? Because a great deal of law does not tell anyone to do anything on pain of punishment. The rules for making a will, a contract, a marriage or a company confer a facility, and failing to satisfy them produces nullity rather than a sanction: the will simply is not a will, and nothing is inflicted on anybody. Treating nullity as a sanction confuses a consequence built into the definition of a legal act with an evil threatened for disobedience.

4. What is the internal point of view, and why does Austin's theory lack it? It is the attitude of those inside a legal system who treat its rules as standards for guiding and criticising conduct, their own and other people's. When a person says another ought not to have acted as they did, they are appealing to a rule they accept, not predicting that punishment will follow. Austin describes obedience only from outside, as a regular pattern of behaviour, so he can record that people conform and cannot account for the fact that they use the rules as reasons.

5. Why does the answer to this topic decide whether the rest of Module II is possible? Because if Austin were right, duty would mean nothing more than liability to a sanction, and the question "ought I to obey?" would collapse into the prediction that one will be punished otherwise. Hart's reply makes obligation a matter of rules that people accept as standards, which allows one to ask whether a particular rule deserves acceptance and whether the system as a whole is justified. Hart also accepted that a valid law may be too iniquitous to obey, which is exactly the space that the topic on unjust laws occupies.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in121

Chapter Twenty-Six

Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation

Syllabus topic 2.1.2, "Grounds of Political Obligations-Why do people obey laws?"

In one line

People obey the law for reasons that are mostly not moral at all, and the grounds that would justify obedience are a different list from the causes that produce it.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the causes of obedience are fear of sanction, habit, self-interest, ignorance of alternatives and social pressure, none of which creates a duty; the grounds of political obligation, which purport to justify obedience, are consent, gratitude, fair play, the natural duty of justice, associative membership and the common good, each of which is a distinct theory and each of which has a distinct weakness.

Why the two lists must be kept apart

A regime that is universally obeyed may have no claim on anybody, and a regime with an excellent claim may be widely disobeyed. If the reasons people actually obey were the same as the reasons they ought to, then the most feared government would be the most legitimate one, which nobody believes.

So: causes explain, and grounds justify. Answer both, label both, and never offer one as the other.

Why people DO obey: the causes

Fear of the sanction. The most obvious and the least important. Most people go their whole lives without calculating the penalty for most offences, and the penalty for the great majority of rules is never applied to anybody they know.

Habit and socialisation. People obey because they have always obeyed, because their parents did, and because obeying is what one does. Austin built his sovereign on exactly this, calling it habitual obedience.

Self-interest. Compliance often pays. Registering a document, paying a tax on time, obtaining a licence: each buys something the person wants.

Convenience and coordination. For a large class of rules the content does not matter and the coordination does. Driving on the left, standard weights, the side of the platform a train arrives at. Once a rule exists it is in nobody's interest to deviate.

Social pressure. The opinion of neighbours, colleagues and family enforces more rules than any inspectorate.

Ignorance of any alternative. A great deal of obedience is the absence of the thought that things could be otherwise. This is the third face of power in Module I, seen from below.

Belief in legitimacy. Some people obey because they think the state is entitled to be obeyed, which is where the causes and the grounds finally touch.

Studies of compliance repeatedly find that the belief that authorities are entitled and act fairly predicts obedience better than the perceived probability of punishment. That finding, which is what Module I meant by saying authority is cheap and power expensive, is worth a line in an answer.

munotes.in122

Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation

Why people OUGHT to obey: the grounds

Each of these is a theory, and each gets tested against the four problems from the previous chapter: generality, particularity, content independence and universality.

1. Consent

The dominant ground in modern thought: you ought to obey because you agreed to. Chapters 300 to 340 are about the varieties of this argument.

Strength. Consent explains particularity perfectly, and it fits the moral intuition that a person is bound by what they undertook.

Weakness. Almost nobody has actually consented. Nobody signed anything, most people were born into the state, and the tacit and hypothetical versions of consent are much weaker.

2. Gratitude

You have received enormous benefits from the state: security, roads, courts, education, the very language you argue in. Gratitude requires you to make some return, and obedience is that return.

Strength. The benefits are undeniable and the debt feels real.

Weakness. Gratitude is a duty of a vague kind. It might require you to be helpful, or to serve, or to think well of the state; why does it require obedience specifically, and to every law? And a benefit conferred without being asked for does not ordinarily create a debt.

3. Fair play, or fairness

Associated with Hart and with Rawls, and the strongest of the non-consent grounds. Where a number of people cooperate in a joint enterprise under rules, and their compliance produces a benefit that you enjoy, it is unfair for you to take the benefit and not bear the burden. You are a free rider, and it is the unfairness to your fellow citizens, not the state's authority, that binds you.

Strength. It explains generality and content independence: the benefit comes from the scheme as a whole, so you cannot pick.

Weakness. Nozick's objection: a benefit thrown at you without your acceptance does not bind you. If the neighbours start a public address system and each takes a turn broadcasting, you may enjoy the music and still owe nobody a turn. So the argument needs the benefit to have been accepted, and it is unclear that citizens accept the state's benefits in any meaningful way.

4. The natural duty of justice

Rawls's alternative. Everybody has a natural duty to support and comply with just institutions that exist and apply to them. The duty does not arise from anything you did; it arises from the justice of the institution.

Strength. It binds everybody, so universality is satisfied, and it does not depend on a fiction of consent.

Weakness. Particularity. If the duty is to support just institutions, why this state's institutions rather than any just institutions anywhere?

5. Associative or membership obligations

Associated with Ronald Dworkin. You are a member of a community, and membership itself carries obligations, as it does in a family. Nobody consents to being a brother, and the duties are real.

munotes.in123

Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation

Strength. It explains particularity and fits how people actually feel about their country.

Weakness. It has trouble with communities you would rather not belong to, and it risks saying that whatever a community demands is owed simply because it is your community.

6. The common good, or utility

You ought to obey because general obedience produces better consequences than general disobedience: order, coordination and predictability, which everybody needs.

Strength. It explains why obedience is generally right and why the presumption is strong.

Weakness. It is act by act. If breaking a particular law would produce better consequences on this occasion, the argument requires you to break it, and an obligation that dissolves whenever calculation favours it is not content independent at all.

7. Divine command, force and prescription

Three further grounds MU sets separately at 2.2, and they get chapters of their own: obedience owed because God ordained the ruler, because the ruler is strong enough to compel, and because the arrangement has stood for so long that it may not now be questioned.

A worked example

Priya files her income tax return by the due date. Why?

Causes. Her employer deducts at source, so most of it is automatic. Her accountant reminds her. She wants a loan and will need the acknowledgment. She has never seriously considered not filing. She would be embarrassed if her family found out she had not.

Grounds. Did she consent? She has never been asked. Gratitude? She uses the roads and the courts, though she was not asked whether she wanted them. Fair play? Others file, the revenue funds what she enjoys, and if she did not file while they did she would be a free rider, which is the strongest argument on these facts. Natural duty? If the tax system is broadly just, she owes support to it. Common good? General compliance is plainly better than general evasion.

What the example shows. Not one of the causes justifies anything, and not one of the grounds is what actually made her file. The two lists both exist, and they barely overlap. That sentence is worth writing in an answer.

Distinctions that carry marks

GroundCore claimExplains particularity?Main objection
ConsentYou agreedYes, completelyAlmost nobody actually consented
GratitudeYou received benefitsWeaklyWhy obedience, and why to every law?
Fair playDo not free ride on others' complianceYesUnrequested benefits do not bind (Nozick)
Natural duty of justiceSupport just institutions that apply to youNoWhy this state rather than any just one?
AssociativeMembership carries dutiesYesRisks endorsing whatever the community demands
Common goodGeneral obedience produces better resultsWeaklyCollapses whenever calculation favours breach
munotes.in124

Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation

What this topic is NOT

"Because of the punishment" is not a ground. It is a cause, and treating it as a ground turns the state into Hart's gunman.

Habitual obedience is not a ground either. A habit is a fact about behaviour, and no quantity of habit produces an ought.

No single ground is generally accepted. The honest position, and the one most modern writers take, is that political obligation rests on several overlapping grounds and that no one of them carries the whole weight.

The absence of a knock-down ground does not mean disobedience is justified. Even philosophical anarchists usually accept that the state may be useful and that gratuitous disobedience is wrong.

Quick revision

  1. Two questions in MU's own topic: causes explain why people do obey; grounds justify why they ought to. Answer both and label both.
  2. Causes: fear, habit, self-interest, coordination, social pressure, ignorance of alternatives, and belief in legitimacy. Compliance research finds the belief in fair and entitled authority predicts obedience better than fear does.
  3. Grounds: consent, gratitude, fair play, the natural duty of justice, associative membership, and the common good.
  4. Fair play is the strongest non-consent ground; its objection is Nozick's, that an unrequested benefit does not bind.
  5. Natural duty wins on universality and fails on particularity.
  6. Utility fails content independence, because it collapses whenever the calculation favours breach.
  7. No single ground carries the whole weight, and saying so is the strongest way to close an answer.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish the causes of obedience from the grounds of political obligation. Causes explain why people in fact obey: fear of sanction, habit, self-interest, the convenience of coordination, social pressure, the absence of any thought that things could be otherwise, and belief in legitimacy. Grounds justify why they ought to obey: consent, gratitude, fair play, the natural duty of justice, associative membership and the common good. The lists barely overlap, and a regime universally obeyed may have no claim on anybody, which is why offering a cause as a ground is an error.

2. State the fair play argument and Nozick's objection to it. Where people cooperate in a joint enterprise under rules and their compliance produces a benefit one enjoys, it is unfair to take the benefit while refusing the burden, so one is bound not by the state's authority but by fairness to fellow citizens. Nozick objects that a benefit thrown at somebody who never sought it creates no obligation: if neighbours set up a public address system and each takes a turn broadcasting, one may enjoy the music and owe nobody a turn. The argument therefore needs benefits to be accepted, and it is doubtful that citizens accept the state's benefits in any meaningful sense.

munotes.in125

Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation

3. Why does the natural duty of justice fail the particularity test? Because it grounds the duty in the justice of institutions rather than in any relationship between the citizen and their own state. If everyone has a natural duty to support and comply with just institutions that apply to them, the argument explains why one should support just institutions but not why one owes obedience to this state in particular rather than to any just state. Consent and associative theories handle particularity better and fail on other tests.

4. Why is the utilitarian ground said to fail content independence? Because it makes obedience depend on the consequences of each act. If breaking a particular law on a particular occasion would produce better results, the argument positively requires the breach, so the citizen ends up following their own calculation rather than the law. An obligation that dissolves whenever calculation favours it is not an obligation to obey the law at all, but an obligation to do whatever is best, which happens usually to coincide with the law.

5. "People obey because they are afraid." Discuss. As a cause it is real but much overstated: most people never calculate the penalty for most rules, and the penalty for the great majority of rules is never applied to anyone they know. Research on compliance consistently finds that the belief that authorities are entitled and act fairly predicts obedience better than the perceived likelihood of punishment does. As a ground it is worthless, since a credible threat produces being obliged and not being under an obligation, which is exactly the distinction that separates a legal system from a gunman.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in126

Chapter Twenty-Seven

D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation

Syllabus topic 2.1.3, "D.D. Raphael's views on Political Obligation."

In one line

Raphael's contribution to this subject is not a new theory of why we must obey; it is a way of putting the question that separates two things students run together, the problem of political obligation and the problem of political authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: D. D. Raphael treats political obligation as one of the central problems of political philosophy, distinguishing the question of the citizen's duty to obey from the question of the state's right to command, and examining the classical grounds of that duty, consent, general will, gratitude, utility and the common good, and finding each of them insufficient to justify obedience without qualification, so that obedience to law is a strong but defeasible duty rather than an absolute one.

Why MU names him, and how to write about him

Raphael, who taught philosophy at Glasgow and later at Imperial College London, wrote Problems of Political Philosophy, first published in 1970 and revised in 1990. It is one of the standard short introductions used in Indian syllabuses, and MU has followed his arrangement of the subject: the chapter you are reading exists because his book has a chapter on political obligation that sets the problem out in the way this module then works through it.

An examiner asking about "Raphael's views on political obligation" is testing whether you can do three things.

State the problem precisely, in the way a philosopher would rather than in the way a newspaper would.

Separate obligation from authority, which is the distinction his treatment turns on.

Run the classical grounds against the problem and say why each is insufficient by itself.

Those three are what the rest of this chapter gives you, and every one of them is taught in this book from sources that were read.

The distinction the topic turns on

The problem of political obligation is about the citizen. Why should I obey?

The problem of political authority, sometimes called political power or the right to rule, is about the state. What entitles it to command me and to enforce its commands?

These look like the same question from two ends, and they are not. They can come apart in both directions.

Authority without obligation. A state may be entitled to make and enforce law and yet no citizen have a duty to obey it. That is exactly the position of the philosophical anarchist described in chapter 240: the state may permissibly govern, and the citizen owes it nothing.

Obligation without authority. A citizen may have a duty to comply with a rule for reasons of fairness or of the common good even where the body issuing it has no title to command at all, as where an unrecognised body's traffic directions prevent accidents.

munotes.in127

D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation

The practical value of the distinction for a law student is that it separates two arguments that get muddled in every discussion of a controversial law. "The government had no business making this rule" is an argument about authority. "I need not obey it" is an argument about obligation. The second does not follow automatically from the first.

The problem stated as a philosopher states it

Set out this way, the problem has a shape a student can work with, and this is the form to reproduce in an answer.

The claim to be justified. Every citizen has a moral duty to comply with the law of their own state, whatever they think of the particular law.

Why it is not obvious. The duty is content independent, so it applies to laws you consider foolish. It is general, so it covers the whole body of law. It is particular, so it binds you to this state and not to a better one next door. And it is claimed over people who were never asked, since almost everybody acquires membership by birth.

What a successful justification must do. Explain all four of those features at once. Chapter 260 showed that each classical ground explains some of them and fails on others.

What follows if no justification succeeds completely. Not that disobedience is licensed. It follows that the duty is prima facie, a strong presumption capable of being outweighed, which is the mature position and the one Module II builds on when it reaches unjust laws.

The classical grounds, and why each is insufficient

These are taught in full elsewhere in this book, from sources that were read; the point here is the summary judgment on each, which is what an answer on this topic needs.

Consent would justify the duty completely if it had occurred. It has not: almost nobody has expressly consented, tacit consent must be inferred from conduct that has other explanations, and hypothetical consent is not consent at all but a claim that the arrangement is reasonable.

The general will relocates the problem rather than solving it, because obedience to the general will requires that one's own will be identified with it, and the citizen who disagrees is told they were mistaken about their own will.

Gratitude cannot fix on obedience in particular, and benefits conferred without being sought do not ordinarily create debts.

Utility and the common good justify a general practice of obedience and cannot bind on the particular occasion when breach would produce more good, so they lose content independence.

Fair play is the strongest, since free riding on the compliance of others is a genuine wrong, but it needs the benefits to have been accepted rather than merely received.

munotes.in128

D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation

The natural duty to support just institutions binds everybody and fails to explain why one owes it to one's own state rather than to any just state.

The conclusion the arrangement points to. No single ground carries the whole weight; several together carry a great deal of it; and the duty they support is strong, general and defeasible. A student who writes that conclusion, with the reasons for it, has answered the question MU asks.

How MU has phrased it. A December 2025 paper asked for D. D. Raphael's five main views on political obligation, which is the examiner's way of asking for the grounds and the verdict on each. Answer with five of the six above, taken in this order and with the objection stated against each: consent, the general will, gratitude, utility and the common good, fair play, and if a sixth is wanted the natural duty to support just institutions. Then close with the conclusion in the paragraph above. Do not invent a numbered list of five propositions and attribute it to him; what the question is testing is the grounds and their sufficiency, and that is what this section supplies.

A worked example

A State passes a law requiring every private hospital to reserve a quarter of its beds for patients referred by the public health service, and the reservation is unpaid.

The authority question. Was the State entitled to legislate on this at all? That is a question about competence, about fundamental rights, and about whether a legislature may impose a burden of this kind. It is answered in a court.

The obligation question. Suppose the answer to the first question is yes and the law is valid. Does the owner of a hospital who thinks the law unjust have a moral duty to comply? That is not answered in a court, and it is a different question.

Watch the two come apart. If the law is struck down, the authority question is answered against the State and the obligation question disappears with it. But if the law is upheld, the obligation question is still open: the owner may accept that the legislature was entitled to pass it and still ask whether they ought to comply with something they regard as confiscation.

And watch the grounds work. Consent: the owner never agreed. Gratitude: the hospital was built with the protection of the State's law and courts. Fair play: other hospitals will comply, and the benefit of a functioning health system is shared. Utility: general compliance is plainly better than general evasion. Natural duty: if the scheme is just, support is owed. Not one of these is decisive, and together they make a strong case for compliance while the owner pursues every lawful means of getting the law changed. That combination, duty plus remedy, is the practical shape of the answer.

munotes.in129

D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation

Distinctions that carry marks

Political obligationPolitical authority
Whose positionThe citizen'sThe state's
The questionOught I to obey?Is it entitled to command and enforce?
Answered byMoral argumentMoral and constitutional argument
Can exist without the otherYes, from fairness, where the body has no titleYes, on the anarchist view
In a real dispute"I need not obey this""They had no business making this"

What this topic is NOT

It is not a request for a biography. An examiner wants the problem and the argument, not dates.

Raphael did not invent a new ground of obligation. His contribution is analytical: setting the problem out so that the classical answers can be tested against it.

"No ground is completely sufficient" is not a licence to disobey. It supports a prima facie duty, which is a strong presumption in favour of obedience that can be outweighed in a particular case.

Obligation is not authority. A student who answers the authority question when asked the obligation question has answered a different question well.

Quick revision

  1. Raphael, Problems of Political Philosophy (1970, revised 1990), is a standard short introduction, and MU has followed his arrangement of this subject.
  2. The distinction that carries the topic: political obligation is about the citizen's duty to obey; political authority is about the state's right to command. They can exist without each other in both directions.
  3. The problem stated: justify a duty that is content independent, general, particular to one's own state, and claimed over people never asked.
  4. The verdict on the grounds: consent did not occur; the general will relocates the problem; gratitude cannot fix on obedience; utility loses content independence; fair play needs benefits to be accepted; natural duty fails particularity.
  5. The conclusion: no single ground suffices, several together support a strong but defeasible duty, which is a prima facie obligation.
  6. For an answer on this topic, give the distinction, the four features, the verdict on each ground, and the prima facie conclusion. That is the whole of what is being tested.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish the problem of political obligation from the problem of political authority. Political obligation is about the citizen and asks whether they have a moral duty to obey their state's law. Political authority is about the state and asks what entitles it to issue and enforce commands. They can come apart both ways: a philosophical anarchist holds that a state may permissibly govern while no citizen owes it obedience, and a citizen may owe compliance on grounds of fairness or the common good to directions issued by a body with no title to command at all.

munotes.in130

D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation

2. Why is the duty to obey difficult to justify? Because four features have to be justified at once. It is content independent, so it applies to laws one thinks foolish. It is general, so it covers the whole body of law rather than the acceptable parts. It is particular, so it binds one to this state rather than to a better one elsewhere. And it is claimed over people who were never asked, since membership is almost always acquired by birth. Each classical ground explains some of these and fails on others.

3. Summarise the verdict on the classical grounds. Consent would justify the duty completely if it had occurred, and it has not. The general will relocates the problem by telling the dissenter they were mistaken about their own will. Gratitude cannot explain why the return owed is obedience in particular. Utility justifies a general practice but not the particular occasion, so it loses content independence. Fair play is the strongest, since free riding is a genuine wrong, but it requires that benefits be accepted rather than merely received. The natural duty to support just institutions binds everybody and cannot explain particularity.

4. What is a prima facie obligation, and why does the argument end there? A duty that holds unless it is outweighed by a stronger competing consideration in the particular case. The argument ends there because no single ground carries the whole weight while several together carry a great deal of it, which supports a strong general presumption in favour of obedience rather than an absolute rule. That is also what makes the rest of Module II coherent, since an absolute duty would leave no room for the problem of unjust laws or for civil disobedience.

5. Show, with an example, that the authority question and the obligation question can be answered differently. Suppose a State requires private hospitals to reserve a quarter of their beds, unpaid, for publicly referred patients. Whether the legislature was entitled to enact it is the authority question, settled by competence and fundamental rights in a court. If the law is struck down, the obligation question disappears. If it is upheld, the obligation question remains open: an owner may accept that the legislature was entitled to pass the law and still ask whether they ought to comply with what they regard as confiscation, and the answer to that turns on fairness, the common good and the availability of lawful remedies, not on the court's ruling.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in131

Chapter Twenty-Eight

The Theories of Political Obligation: A Map

Syllabus topic 2.2, "Theories of Political Obligation"

In one line

Five theories, five answers to one question, and they can be arranged in a single line running from "obey because God said so" to "obey because it has always been so".

In the wording a student can write in an exam: MU sets five theories of political obligation, the divine right theory of kings, the social contract or consent theory, the theory of force, the theory of prescriptive possession, and the Marxist view; the first four are attempts to justify the duty to obey and the fifth denies that any such general duty exists.

The five, in one sentence each

Divine right of kings. The ruler holds power from God, so disobedience to the ruler is disobedience to God. Chapter 290.

Social contract and consent. People agreed, expressly or by implication, to be governed, and are bound by their own agreement. Chapters 300 to 340, which take Hobbes, Locke and Rousseau separately because they contract for different things on different terms.

Force. The state arose from conquest and rests on superior strength; obedience is owed to whoever can compel it. Chapter 350.

Prescriptive possession. The arrangement has stood so long that its origins may no longer be questioned, and long possession itself confers title. Chapter 360.

Marx. The state is an instrument of one class against another, so there is no general duty to obey it at all. Chapter 370.

The line they can be arranged on

Set them out by where the obligation comes from, and the whole module becomes one argument rather than five.

From outside the human world. Divine right. The duty exists because a source above all human beings placed the ruler there.

From the citizen's own act. Social contract and consent. The duty exists because you did something, promised or accepted or took a benefit.

From nothing at all except superior strength. Force. Strictly this is not a theory of obligation but a denial that one is needed, and saying so is worth a mark.

From time. Prescription. The duty exists because the arrangement is old, and its age is what makes questioning it improper.

Nowhere. Marx. There is no general duty; there is a class that rules and a class that is ruled, and calling the relation a duty is part of how it is maintained.

Notice that the middle three answer the four problems from chapter 240 quite differently. Contract explains particularity best, because you contracted with this state. Prescription explains generality best, because age covers the whole arrangement. Force explains none of them, which is its defect. And Marx explains why the question keeps being asked, which is a different kind of contribution.

munotes.in132

The Theories of Political Obligation: A Map

What each has to answer for

TheoryIts strongest claimIts fatal difficulty
Divine rightExplains why the duty is absolute and why the ruler cannot be judged by subjectsIt is an argument from a premise not everybody accepts, and it cannot say which claimant God chose
Social contractA person is bound by their own undertaking, which is the clearest source of duty there isThe contract never happened, and nobody alive agreed to anything
ForceIt describes how most states actually beganMight does not make right; it explains power and not obligation
PrescriptionIt fits how people actually treat settled institutionsAge cannot convert a wrong into a right, or every injustice would become lawful by lasting
MarxIt explains whose interest the question of obedience servesIf there is no duty at all, it cannot explain why revolutionaries also build states and demand obedience

The historical order, which is not the logical order

Students often assume the theories replaced one another in sequence. Roughly, divine right dominated in Europe until the seventeenth century, contract theory displaced it in the seventeenth and eighteenth, force and prescription were argued in the eighteenth and nineteenth, and Marx wrote in the nineteenth. But they overlap, they were argued against each other in the same decades, and all five are still used today in slightly different clothing.

Where each survives now. Divine right survives wherever a ruler claims a religious sanction. Contract survives as the whole theory of democratic consent, which is Module IV. Force survives in every argument that a regime should be obeyed because resistance is futile. Prescription survives in every appeal to tradition, to precedent and to settled expectations, and in the legal doctrines of limitation and adverse possession. And Marx survives in every argument that a law serves the interest of those who wrote it.

A worked example

A tenant is served with a notice to quit under a rent law they think unjust.

A divine right theorist would say the sovereign's command must be obeyed and that judging it is not the tenant's place.

A contract theorist would ask what the tenant is taken to have agreed to by living in this state and enjoying its protection, and would say the duty is the tenant's own undertaking coming back.

A force theorist would observe that the bailiff will arrive whatever the tenant thinks, and would treat that as the end of the matter.

A prescriptive theorist would point to the long settled system of tenancy law under which both parties took their positions, and would say that the tenant may not now reopen the foundation on which the whole arrangement rests.

A Marxist would ask who owns the building, note that rent law is the form in which the relation between owner and tenant is stabilised, and deny that the tenant owes any duty to a system built to protect the owner.

munotes.in133

The Theories of Political Obligation: A Map

And a court would ask only whether the notice complies with the statute. That is worth noticing: the legal question and the obligation question are different, and this module is about the second.

What this map is NOT

It is not a ranking. Each theory is strongest where the others are weakest.

It is not exhaustive. Chapter 260 set out grounds MU does not list separately, including fair play and the natural duty of justice, and a strong answer may bring them in.

The theories are not mutually exclusive. Locke uses contract and also relies on natural rights; Burke uses prescription and also appeals to an original settlement. Real writers mix them.

Force is not a theory of obligation at all, and saying so is a point in your favour rather than a quibble.

Quick revision

  1. Five theories: divine right, social contract and consent, force, prescriptive possession, and Marx.
  2. Arrange them by the source of the duty: from God, from your own act, from strength, from time, and from nowhere.
  3. Contract explains particularity best; prescription explains generality best; force explains none.
  4. Marx denies the duty, so it is not a rival justification but a rejection of the question's premise.
  5. All five survive today in other clothing: religious sanction, democratic consent, futility of resistance, appeals to tradition and precedent, and the claim that a law serves its authors.
  6. They are not mutually exclusive, and real writers mix them.

Test yourself

1. Name the five theories MU sets and give each in one sentence. Divine right of kings: the ruler holds power from God, so disobeying the ruler is disobeying God. Social contract and consent: people agreed to be governed and are bound by their own agreement. Force: the state rests on superior strength and obedience is owed to whoever can compel it. Prescriptive possession: the arrangement has stood so long that its origin may no longer be questioned. Marx: the state is an instrument of class rule, so no general duty to obey it exists.

2. Arrange the theories by the source of the obligation. Divine right locates it outside the human world altogether, in a source above all human beings. Contract locates it in the citizen's own act, a promise, an acceptance or the taking of a benefit. Force locates it in nothing but superior strength, which is why it is strictly not a theory of obligation at all. Prescription locates it in time, since the age of the arrangement is what makes questioning it improper. Marx locates it nowhere, denying that any general duty exists.

munotes.in134

The Theories of Political Obligation: A Map

3. Why is the theory of force not properly a theory of political obligation? Because it explains why people comply and not why they ought to. Superior strength produces being obliged, in Hart's phrase, and not being under an obligation, and the whole point of the concept of obligation is to mark the difference between a state and a gunman. A theory that says obedience is owed to whoever can compel it has abandoned the question rather than answered it, and it cannot distinguish an occupying army from a lawful government.

4. Which theory best explains particularity, and which generality? Contract explains particularity best: you are bound to this state because it was with this state, or with these fellow citizens, that the undertaking was made, which is why a contract theorist has no difficulty saying you owe nothing to a better governed state next door. Prescription explains generality best: what is protected by long standing is the whole settled arrangement rather than any selected part of it, so the argument covers the entire body of law without needing to justify each rule.

5. Do the theories exclude one another? Give examples. No. Locke argues from contract and simultaneously from natural rights that exist before any contract, and his right of resistance depends on both. Burke argues from prescription while also appealing to an original settlement that the prescription is said to preserve. Modern democratic argument uses consent, fair play and the common good together. Real writers combine them, and an answer that treats the five as sealed boxes misdescribes every one of the authors.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in135

Chapter Twenty-Nine

The Divine Right Theory of Kings

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Divine Right Theory of Kings, Social Contract/ Consent Theory, Theory of Force,"

In one line

The divine right theory says the king holds his crown directly from God, so resisting the king is resisting God, and no subject may judge him.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the divine right of kings is the doctrine that monarchical authority is derived immediately from God, that the king is accountable to God alone and to no earthly authority, that the crown descends by hereditary and indefeasible right, and that the subject's duty of obedience is therefore absolute and non-resistance is a religious as well as a political obligation.

The four propositions

Every version of the theory contains these four, and an answer that lists them has the doctrine.

1. Monarchy is divinely ordained. Kingship is not a human invention or a convenience but an institution appointed by God.

2. Hereditary and indefeasible right. The crown descends by birth, and no act of the king and no decision of any body can defeat the right of the lawful heir. This is what "indefeasible" means and it is the proposition that did most work politically, because it made the succession unarguable.

3. The king is accountable to God alone. No earthly body, no parliament and no court may judge him. He may be a bad king and answer for it in the next world, and nowhere else.

4. Non-resistance and passive obedience. The subject may not resist by force. The most the theory allows is what its own writers called passive obedience: where the king commands something forbidden by God, the subject may decline to perform it and must then submit to the punishment without resistance.

That fourth proposition is the answer to the University's question about the sanction. The sanction behind the obligation is divine: disobedience is sin, and the penalty is God's, not merely the king's. This is what makes the theory so powerful, because the subject cannot escape by escaping the king's officers.

Where it came from

The theory was not medieval in the form set out above. In the Middle Ages the standard European view gave the Church a role in conferring or confirming royal authority, and the Pope claimed to be able to release subjects from their allegiance. The fully developed divine right theory was an early modern doctrine, forged in exactly that quarrel: it was designed to cut out the Church as an intermediary.

James VI and I stated it for England, arguing in his own writings that kings are God's lieutenants on earth and sit upon God's throne, and that to dispute what a king may do is sedition.

Sir Robert Filmer gave it its systematic form in Patriarcha, published in 1680 after his death. His argument is patriarchal: God gave Adam authority over his family and over the earth; that authority descended to the patriarchs and from them to kings; so royal authority is fatherly authority, and every subject stands to the king as a child to a father. This is why the theory needs no contract and no consent: a child does not consent to a father.

munotes.in136

The Divine Right Theory of Kings

Bossuet made the parallel case in France for Louis XIV.

The Indian parallels, and where they differ

An answer written in India should say something about India, and the honest thing to say is that the parallels are real and imperfect.

Indian political thought contains ideas of divinely sanctioned kingship, and rulers took titles and performed rites that asserted a sacred character. The Manusmriti attributes a divine element to the king, and the doctrine of the king's protection carried a religious as well as a political duty.

But two differences matter and should be stated rather than glossed over. Indian kingship was generally bound by dharma, a law the king did not make and could not alter, and by the authority of those who expounded it, so the king was not the source of the law in the way the European doctrine required. And the Indian material contains a strong strand in which a ruler who fails in his duty of protection forfeits his claim, which the European theory of indefeasible right does not allow. The parallel is with divinely sanctioned kingship in general, not with the specific early modern doctrine of indefeasible hereditary right and non-resistance.

The criticisms

Locke's answer, which killed it in English political thought. Locke's First Treatise is a line by line demolition of Filmer, and the Second Treatise builds the alternative. The core objections are simple and devastating. Even if Adam had such authority, there is no way of establishing who now holds it, since the line cannot be traced. Fatherly authority is not political authority: a father's power is temporary, ends at majority, is shared with the mother and does not extend to life and death. And on the merits, Locke's own account puts political power in the community, holding government as a trust, so that when the trust is broken the power reverts to the people.

It cannot settle a contested succession. The theory's political purpose was to make succession unarguable, and it fails at exactly that point: when two claimants each say God chose them, the doctrine has no way to decide, and the matter is settled by force, which is the theory it was meant to displace.

It is an argument from a premise not everybody shares. In a society of several religions, an argument that rests on a particular theology cannot bind those outside it. In India this objection is fatal by itself.

munotes.in137

The Divine Right Theory of Kings

It makes tyranny unanswerable. If the king answers to God alone, the subject of a cruel king has no remedy in this world at all. The theory's own writers felt this and produced passive obedience as the escape, which is a very narrow one.

It confuses the origin of authority with its limits. Even granting that authority comes from God, it does not follow that it is unlimited, and medieval writers had said exactly that: power from God, held for the people's good, forfeited by abuse.

A worked example

A king orders his subjects to pay a tax that no assembly has approved, and orders them to worship in a manner their conscience forbids.

On the theory, the tax must be paid. The king is accountable to God alone. Whether the tax is just is not for the subject to determine, and refusing is sedition.

The worship order is the interesting one. Here the king commands what the subject believes God forbids. The theory does not say the subject must comply, because the whole basis of royal authority is God's, and a command against God's law cannot carry God's authority. What the theory says is passive obedience: the subject may refuse to perform the act, and must then submit to whatever punishment follows, without resistance and without joining any rebellion.

Notice what has just happened. The theory has admitted a limit, and once a limit is admitted somebody must decide when it is reached. The subject deciding for themselves when a royal command is contrary to God's law is the beginning of the right of resistance, which is topic 2.3.2, and it is how the doctrine dissolved from inside.

Distinctions that carry marks

Divine rightSocial contract
Source of authorityGod, directlyThe agreement of the people
Direction it flowsDownward, from God to king to subjectUpward, from individuals to government
Basis of obligationReligious duty; disobedience is sinYour own undertaking
Who may judge the rulerGod aloneThe people, on the terms of the trust
Right of resistanceNone; at most passive obedienceYes, when the trust is broken
SuccessionHereditary and indefeasibleDetermined by the constitution the people set up
Key namesJames VI and I, Filmer, BossuetHobbes, Locke, Rousseau

What this theory is NOT

It is not the same as a religious state. A state may apply religious law and derive its authority from a constitution; divine right is a claim about the personal title of a ruler.

It is not merely medieval. Its systematic form is early modern, and it was constructed against the Church's claim to intermediate.

munotes.in138

The Divine Right Theory of Kings

It is not extinct. Every claim that a leader has a mandate from a source above politics, and that opposing them is therefore not merely wrong but impious, is the same structure in modern clothing.

Passive obedience is not the right of resistance. It permits refusal and forbids resistance, and requires the refuser to accept the punishment. It is, however, the same shape as satyagraha at topic 2.3.3, and the resemblance is worth noticing.

Quick revision

  1. Four propositions: monarchy is divinely ordained; the crown is hereditary and indefeasible; the king answers to God alone; and the subject owes non-resistance.
  2. The sanction is divine. Disobedience is sin, and the penalty is God's. This is the University's own question.
  3. Filmer's Patriarcha: God's grant to Adam descends to kings, so royal authority is fatherly authority and no consent is needed.
  4. Passive obedience: where the command is against God's law, refuse to perform and submit to the punishment without resisting.
  5. Locke's answer: the line from Adam cannot be traced; fatherly power is not political power; government holds a trust and the power reverts when the trust is broken.
  6. Other criticisms: it cannot settle a contested succession; it rests on a premise not all share; it leaves tyranny unanswerable; it confuses the origin of authority with its limits.
  7. In India: divinely sanctioned kingship existed, but the king was bound by dharma he did not make, and forfeiture for failure of protection has no counterpart in indefeasible right.

Test yourself

1. State the divine right theory of kings in its four propositions. That monarchy is an institution ordained by God rather than a human convenience; that the crown descends by hereditary and indefeasible right, so that no act of the king and no decision of any body can defeat the lawful heir; that the king is accountable to God alone and may be judged by no earthly parliament or court; and that the subject owes non-resistance, being permitted at most passive obedience where a command conflicts with God's law.

2. What is the sanction behind political obligation on this theory? A divine sanction. Because the king holds his authority immediately from God, disobedience to the king is disobedience to God and is therefore sin, punished by God rather than merely by the king's officers. This is what gives the theory its force: the subject cannot escape the sanction by escaping the king's reach, and obedience is owed as a religious duty and not only as a political one.

3. Summarise Filmer's argument and Locke's reply. Filmer argued in Patriarcha that God gave Adam authority over his family and the earth, that this authority descended through the patriarchs to kings, and that royal authority is therefore fatherly authority, requiring no consent since a child does not consent to a father. Locke replied that even granting the premise, the line of descent cannot be traced, so nobody can show they hold Adam's right; that fatherly power is not political power, being temporary, ending at majority, shared with the mother and not extending to life and death; and that political power rests in the community, government holding it on trust.

munotes.in139

The Divine Right Theory of Kings

4. Explain passive obedience and why it undermined the theory. Passive obedience permits a subject to decline to perform a command that is contrary to God's law, while forbidding forcible resistance and requiring submission to the resulting punishment. It undermined the theory because it concedes a limit on royal authority, and once a limit exists somebody must judge when it has been reached. The subject who decides for themselves that a royal command offends God's law has begun to exercise private judgment against the king, which is the seed of the right of resistance.

5. How far does the theory apply to Indian kingship? Ideas of divinely sanctioned kingship existed in India, rulers asserted a sacred character, and texts such as the Manusmriti attribute a divine element to the king. But two differences prevent a simple identification. The Indian king was bound by dharma, a law he neither made nor could alter, and expounded by others, so he was not the source of law as the European doctrine required. And Indian thought contains a strong strand under which a ruler who fails in his duty of protection forfeits his claim, which the doctrine of indefeasible hereditary right expressly denies.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in140

Chapter Thirty-One

Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Social Contract/ Consent Theory"

In one line

Hobbes says life without government is so unbearable that rational people would hand over everything to a sovereign with no limits, and having handed it over they can never take it back.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Hobbes holds that in the state of nature, where there is no common power to keep men in awe, there is a war of every man against every man in which life is solitary, poor, nasty, brutish and short; that reason therefore dictates a covenant by which every man surrenders his right of governing himself to a sovereign, on condition that every other man does the same; and that since the sovereign is not a party to that covenant, the sovereign's power is absolute, indivisible and irrevocable, and the subject has no right of resistance except where life itself is directly threatened.

The state of nature

Hobbes begins from human nature rather than from history. Men are roughly equal in body and mind, so that even the weakest can kill the strongest by stealth or by combining with others. From equality comes equality of hope; from equality of hope, competition for the same things; and from competition, war.

He identifies three causes of quarrel: competition, for gain; diffidence, meaning distrust, for safety; and glory, for reputation.

The result is the condition he calls warre, and he is careful about the word: war does not consist only in fighting but in the known disposition to it, as foul weather lies not in a shower or two but in an inclination to rain over many days.

What is lost in that condition is the famous passage. There is no place for industry, because the fruit is uncertain; no cultivation of the earth, no navigation, no building, no arts, no letters, no society; and, worst of all, continual fear and danger of violent death. And, in Hobbes's own words, the life of man is "solitary, poore, nasty, brutish, and short."

Is it a historical claim? Hobbes anticipates the objection and answers it in the same passage: a man who doubts the inference from the passions should consider his own conduct, arming himself when he takes a journey and locking his doors at night, and ask what opinion he has of his fellow subjects when he rides armed. The state of nature is a claim about what people are, evidenced by what they do inside a state.

Natural right and natural law

The right of nature, in Hobbes, is the liberty of each to use their own power for the preservation of their own life, and to do anything they judge necessary to it. In that condition every man has a right to everything, including to another's body, which is why the right is worthless: a right everybody has to everything secures nothing to anybody.

munotes.in146

Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty

The laws of nature are, for Hobbes, precepts found out by reason, and they are not commands of a superior but theorems about what conduces to preservation. The first is to seek peace where it can be had and to defend oneself where it cannot. The second is that a man be willing, when others are too, to lay down his right to all things and be contented with so much liberty against others as he would allow others against himself.

The laws of nature bind in conscience always but in action only when there is security that others will observe them too. Without a common power they are empty words. That is the argument for the sovereign in a single sentence.

The covenant

The contract has a shape a student must be able to state precisely, because everything that offends people about Hobbes follows from it.

Each with each, not with the ruler. Every man covenants with every other man to give up his right of governing himself to one man or assembly, on condition that all do the same.

The sovereign is not a party. The sovereign is the beneficiary of the covenant, not a party to it. This is the hinge of the entire theory, and every consequence below comes out of it.

What is created. By this act the multitude becomes one person, and Hobbes's description is worth having exactly: by art is created "that great LEVIATHAN called a COMMON-WEALTH, or STATE", an artificial man of greater stature and strength than the natural, made for whose protection and defence it was intended. He calls the result, more reverently, that "Mortall God", to which we owe under the immortal God our peace and defence.

The consequences, and why they are inescapable

Each of these follows from "the sovereign is not a party".

The sovereign cannot breach the covenant, because a person who is not a party to an agreement cannot break it.

Therefore no subject can be released on the ground of breach.

Sovereignty is absolute. The sovereign decides law, judges disputes, makes war and peace, appoints ministers, and determines what doctrines may be taught, because leaving any of those outside would recreate a division that leads back to war.

Sovereignty is indivisible. A divided sovereignty is two sovereigns, which is civil war deferred. Hobbes wrote during the English civil war and this proposition is the lesson he drew from it.

Resistance is unlawful, because the subject is the author of the sovereign's acts. To resist the sovereign is to resist oneself.

munotes.in147

Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty

But there is a limit, and it is the one place the system has an opening. The covenant was made for the preservation of life, and a man cannot transfer the right to defend his own life, because no benefit could be had from such a transfer. So a man condemned to death may lawfully resist those who come to kill him, and a man may refuse to incriminate himself or to kill himself. It is a right of self preservation, not a right of rebellion, and it does not entitle anybody else to join him.

And obedience lasts only as long as protection. Hobbes says plainly that the obligation of subjects to the sovereign lasts as long, and no longer, than the power by which the sovereign is able to protect them. A sovereign who cannot protect has no claim, which is the most practical sentence in the book.

A worked example

A city is under a curfew during a communal riot. The order forbids anybody to leave their home between six in the evening and six in the morning.

On Hobbes's account the order binds absolutely. The subject authorised the sovereign to judge what is necessary for peace, so the question whether the curfew is a good idea is not the subject's to ask. Even a subject who is sure the curfew will make things worse is bound, because the whole point of the covenant was to substitute one judgment for many.

The limit appears in a specific case. A man's house is set on fire and the mob is at the door. He may leave, and no covenant obliges him to burn. He is not resisting the sovereign; he is exercising the one right he could never have transferred, because the transfer would have defeated the purpose of transferring.

And the practical test appears if the state fails. If the police have withdrawn and the sovereign cannot protect that street at all, Hobbes's own rule applies: obedience lasts as long as the protection, and no longer. On his theory the residents are back in the state of nature on that street, which is exactly what a breakdown of order looks like from inside.

The criticisms

The premise is too dark. Human beings are not only competitive and fearful; they cooperate, and anthropology finds stateless societies with elaborate order rather than universal war.

Absolute sovereignty is a cure worse than the disease. As Locke put the point, it is as if men, to avoid the harm of polecats and foxes, thought it safety to be devoured by lions. Hobbes has protected the subject against everybody except the one person with the most power to harm them.

munotes.in148

Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty

A right to life cannot survive alone. If the covenant is for preservation, why should the sovereign be entitled to take everything short of life? The logic that saves self defence should save more.

The sovereign is outside the covenant by stipulation, and the stipulation does the work. Change it and absolutism disappears, which is exactly what Locke does.

It cannot explain political obligation for those who did not covenant. Hobbes's answer, that people covenant tacitly by living under the protection, runs into every objection made to tacit consent.

Its account of law is thin. If whatever the sovereign commands is just because the sovereign commands it, then unjust law becomes a contradiction, which the whole of topic 2.3 denies.

Distinctions that carry marks

HobbesLockeRousseau
State of natureWar of every man against every man; life solitary, poor, nasty, brutish and shortFree and equal, governed by natural law, but inconvenientInnocent and free; corrupted by property and society
Chief defect of itNo security at allNo settled law, judge or executive powerGrowing inequality
Parties to the contractEach with each; sovereign outsideEach with each, then government as trusteeEach with all, forming the general will
What is surrenderedEvery right except self preservationOnly the power to enforce natural lawEverything, but to the whole of which one is a part
SovereignAbsolute, indivisible, irrevocableLimited, and holds a trustThe people themselves, always
Right of resistanceNone, except self defence of lifeYes, when the trust is brokenNot against the general will
Government's purposeSecurityPreservation of life, liberty and estateFreedom under a law one gives oneself

What Hobbes is NOT

He is not a defender of monarchy as such. The sovereign may be one man or an assembly. What he insists on is that it be undivided.

He is not saying people are wicked. He is saying they are rational and insecure, and that insecurity alone produces war.

He is not a divine right theorist. His sovereign is created by human agreement, which is why divine right theorists disliked him as much as republicans did.

"Solitary, poore, nasty, brutish, and short" is not a description of savages. It is a description of what any of us would face without a common power, and Hobbes evidences it from the conduct of people who do live under one.

Quick revision

  1. Three causes of quarrel: competition, diffidence, glory. War is not fighting only but the known disposition to it.
  2. The passage: no industry, no navigation, no building, no arts, no letters, no society, continual fear, and life "solitary, poore, nasty, brutish, and short."
  3. Right of nature is the liberty to preserve oneself; in that condition every man has a right to everything, which is why it is worthless.
  4. Laws of nature bind in conscience always and in action only when others can be relied on, so a common power is needed.
  5. The covenant is each with each; the sovereign is NOT a party. Everything else follows: no breach, no release, absolute and indivisible power, no right of resistance.
  6. The exception: the right of self preservation cannot be transferred, so a condemned man may resist those who come to kill him. It is not a right of rebellion.
  7. Obedience lasts as long as protection, and no longer.
  8. Locke's answer: to avoid polecats and foxes, men do not think it safety to be devoured by lions.
munotes.in149

Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty

Test yourself

1. Describe Hobbes's state of nature and say whether it is a historical claim. Men being roughly equal in body and mind, equality of hope produces competition, and the three causes of quarrel, competition, diffidence and glory, produce a war of every man against every man in which there is no industry, navigation, building, arts, letters or society, but continual fear, and life is solitary, poor, nasty, brutish and short. It is not offered as history. Hobbes evidences it from present conduct, asking the doubter what opinion he has of his fellow subjects when he arms himself for a journey and locks his doors at night.

2. Set out Hobbes's covenant and explain why the sovereign is absolute. Every man covenants with every other man to lay down his right of governing himself and confer it on one man or assembly, on condition that all do likewise. The sovereign is the beneficiary of that covenant and not a party to it. Since a person who is not a party cannot break an agreement, the sovereign can commit no breach, no subject can claim release, and the power conferred is absolute, indivisible and irrevocable. Every objectionable feature of the theory follows from that single stipulation.

3. What limit does Hobbes admit, and how far does it go? The covenant was made for the preservation of life, and a man cannot transfer the right to defend his own life, since no benefit could be had from such a transfer. So a man condemned to death may lawfully resist those who come to kill him, and may refuse to incriminate himself. It is a right of self preservation only: it does not entitle him to rebel, does not entitle others to assist him, and does not make the sovereign's sentence unlawful.

4. Explain Hobbes's rule that obedience lasts as long as protection. He states plainly that the obligation of subjects to the sovereign lasts as long, and no longer, than the power by which the sovereign is able to protect them, because protection is the whole end for which the covenant was made. A sovereign who cannot protect a place or a person has no claim to obedience there, which means that on his own theory a breakdown of order returns those affected to the state of nature, and that a conqueror who provides protection acquires a title to obedience.

munotes.in150

Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty

5. Give three criticisms of Hobbes. That his premise is too dark, since human beings cooperate as well as compete and stateless societies show elaborate order rather than universal war. That the remedy is worse than the disease, as Locke put it, since men who fear polecats and foxes do not think it safety to be devoured by lions: the subject is protected against everybody except the one person best able to harm them. And that his account makes unjust law a contradiction, since whatever the sovereign commands is just by definition, which the whole problem of obedience to unjust laws denies.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in151

Chapter Thirty-Two

Locke: The Contract as a Trust

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Social Contract/ Consent Theory"

In one line

Locke says people set up government to fix the three things missing in an otherwise tolerable state of nature, that they hand over only what is needed to fix them, and that a government which breaks that trust may be replaced.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Locke holds that the state of nature is a state of perfect freedom and equality governed by a law of nature which teaches that no one ought to harm another in life, health, liberty or possessions; that it lacks an established law, an impartial judge and a power to execute judgment, and is therefore inconvenient rather than intolerable; that men therefore consent to form a political society and entrust it with a limited power, held as a trust for their preservation; and that when the trust is broken the power reverts to the people, who may resume it and establish a new government.

The state of nature, and why the difference from Hobbes decides everything

Locke's state of nature is a state of perfect freedom to order one's actions and dispose of one's possessions as one thinks fit, and a state of equality, in which no one has more power or jurisdiction than another.

It is not a state of licence. It is governed by the law of nature, which is reason, and which teaches that being all equal and independent, no one ought to harm another in their life, health, liberty or possessions.

Two features of that condition matter enormously.

Property exists before government. Locke's account is that a person owns their own person and therefore their labour, so that by mixing their labour with what nature has left in common they make it theirs. Property is thus a natural right, not a creation of the state. This is why a Lockean government cannot simply take property: it did not create it, and it was set up to protect it.

Everybody may enforce the law of nature. In the state of nature each person may punish a transgressor. Locke calls this a strange doctrine and defends it: without it the law of nature would be vain.

The three inconveniences

Locke's state of nature is defective, but not in Hobbes's way. There are exactly three defects, and they are worth memorising because the powers of government correspond to them one for one.

1. There is no established, settled, known law, received by common consent as the standard of right and wrong.

2. There is no known and indifferent judge with authority to determine disputes according to that law.

3. There is no power to back and support the sentence and to give it due execution.

munotes.in152

Locke: The Contract as a Trust

Notice what each defect calls for: a legislature, a judiciary, and an executive. Locke's government is built out of the three holes in the state of nature, which is why his account is so much more useful to constitutional lawyers than Hobbes's.

The contract, and the trust

Locke has two stages, and running them together is the commonest error.

Stage one, the social contract. Individuals agree with each other to leave the state of nature and form one political society or community, agreeing to be bound by the decision of the majority.

Stage two, the trust. The community then entrusts power to a government. This is emphatically not a second contract: it is a trust, or as Locke also calls it, a fiduciary power.

Why "trust" rather than "contract" is the most important word in Locke. A contracting party who breaches gives the other a claim for a remedy. A trustee who breaches loses the trust, and the property returns to the person for whose benefit it was held. So on Locke's model the government is never a party with rights of its own: it is a holder of powers for a purpose, and if it acts against that purpose the power falls back to the community.

For a law student the point is sharper still. Locke's language is the language of the law of trusts, and every doctrine that public power is held for a public purpose and must be exercised in good faith is descended from it.

The limits on government

Locke sets out what the legislative power, the supreme power in his scheme, may not do, and this is examinable material in its own right.

It is not arbitrary. It cannot exceed the power the individuals had in the state of nature and transferred, and no one has an arbitrary power over their own life or another's.

It must govern by settled, promulgated laws, and not by extemporary decrees. Law must be known in advance.

It must be administered by indifferent and upright judges.

It cannot take a man's property without his consent. The preservation of property being the end of government, taking it away without consent defeats the purpose.

It cannot transfer the law-making power to anybody else. The people gave it to this body, and the body cannot hand it on.

Dissolution and the right of resistance

Chapter XIX of the Second Treatise is the classical statement, and Locke begins it with a distinction a student should reproduce.

Dissolution of the society is distinguished from dissolution of the government. The society, the community that people formed by agreement, is dissolved only by conquest from outside. The government may be dissolved while the society continues, and when that happens the people are not thrown back into the state of nature: they remain a community, and may set up a new government.

munotes.in153

Locke: The Contract as a Trust

When is a government dissolved? When the legislative is altered, when the ruler acts against the trust, when the executive prevents the legislature from assembling or from acting freely, when the people are delivered into the subjection of a foreign power, and, generally, when those in power use force upon the people without authority.

And who is to judge? Locke's answer is the one that made his book revolutionary: the people shall be judge. Where there is no earthly authority to decide between a ruler and the people, Locke says the remedy is an appeal to heaven, which is his phrase for a resort to force in the last extremity.

Locke defends himself against the charge that this lays a foundation for rebellion, and the defence is worth knowing. He says the doctrine does not encourage disorder, because people are slow to change what they are accustomed to and bear a great many mistakes without complaint; that resistance follows only a long train of abuses making the design visible; and that it is the ruler who breaks the trust, not the people, who are properly called rebels, since it is the ruler who returns to a state of war.

A worked example

A State government, elected for five years, passes a law in its fourth year postponing the next election indefinitely, and orders the police to prevent the legislature from meeting.

On Hobbes's account the subject has nothing to say. The sovereign judges what is necessary and the subject authorised that judgment.

On Locke's account several of his dissolution triggers have fired at once. The legislative has been altered otherwise than by the people's authority; the executive has prevented the legislature from assembling; and force is being used on the people without authority. The government is therefore dissolved, the power reverts to the community, and the people may constitute a new government.

Notice what has and has not happened. The society is intact: there is still a community of people bound to each other. Only the government has fallen. So Locke does not predict chaos; he predicts a new government, which is exactly what a constitutional order provides for by other means.

And notice the modern version of the appeal to heaven. In a constitutional state with an independent court, Locke's last resort is rarely reached, because there is an earthly authority to decide between the ruler and the people. The court doing what Locke could only give to heaven is the single largest difference between his world and a student's.

munotes.in154

Locke: The Contract as a Trust

Distinctions that carry marks

HobbesLocke
State of natureWar of all against allFree, equal, governed by natural law; inconvenient
What is missingEverything; there is no securityAn established law, an impartial judge, an executive power
PropertyCreated by the sovereignA natural right, existing before government
The second stageNone; the covenant creates the sovereignA trust, not a contract
What is surrenderedEvery right but self preservationOnly the power to enforce natural law
Government may be judged byNobodyThe people
On breachThere can be no breachThe power reverts to the community
ResistanceOnly self defence of lifeA right, after a long train of abuses

What Locke is NOT

He is not a democrat in the modern sense. The trust is enforced by the community, but Locke's community acts by majority and his political nation was narrow.

He does not say the people may rebel whenever they dislike a law. The trigger is a long train of abuses making a design visible, not a single grievance.

The trust is not a contract. Getting this wrong loses the whole force of his argument, because a contract would give the government rights against the people.

Dissolution of government is not dissolution of society. Locke opens chapter XIX with that distinction precisely because his opponents ran the two together to make his doctrine look like a recipe for anarchy.

Quick revision

  1. State of nature: perfect freedom and equality, governed by the law of nature, which teaches that no one ought to harm another in life, health, liberty or possessions.
  2. Property is a natural right, arising from mixing one's labour with what was held in common, and it exists before government.
  3. Three inconveniences: no settled known law, no indifferent judge, no power to execute the sentence. They correspond to legislature, judiciary and executive.
  4. Two stages: a contract forming the society, then a trust placing power in a government. The government is a fiduciary, never a party.
  5. Limits on the legislative: not arbitrary; by settled promulgated laws; through upright judges; no taking property without consent; no transfer of the law-making power.
  6. Dissolution of government is not dissolution of society. On dissolution the power reverts to the people, who may set up a new government.
  7. "The people shall be judge", and in the last extremity there is an appeal to heaven.
  8. Locke's defence against the charge of encouraging rebellion: people bear much before acting, resistance follows a long train of abuses, and it is the ruler who is properly the rebel.
munotes.in155

Locke: The Contract as a Trust

Test yourself

1. Describe Locke's state of nature and the three inconveniences of it. It is a state of perfect freedom to order one's actions and dispose of one's possessions, and of equality in which no one has more jurisdiction than another, governed by the law of nature which teaches that no one ought to harm another in life, health, liberty or possessions. Its defects are three: there is no established, settled and known law received by common consent; no known and indifferent judge with authority to decide disputes by it; and no power to support and execute the sentence when given.

2. Why is it important that Locke calls the second stage a trust rather than a contract? Because a contracting party who breaches merely gives the other side a claim, and would have rights of its own against the people. A trustee who breaches loses the trust altogether, and what was held returns to those for whose benefit it was held. On Locke's model the government therefore never holds power in its own right but only for a purpose, so that acting against the purpose ends the authority and returns the power to the community. Every modern doctrine that public power is held for a public purpose descends from this.

3. Set out the limits Locke places on the legislative power. It cannot be arbitrary, since it cannot exceed what individuals possessed in the state of nature and transferred, and nobody has arbitrary power over life. It must govern by settled and promulgated laws rather than extemporary decrees. It must act through indifferent and upright judges. It cannot take a person's property without consent, since preserving property is the end for which it was established. And it cannot transfer the law-making power to any other body, since the people entrusted it to this one.

4. When is a government dissolved, and what follows? When the legislative is altered otherwise than by the people's authority, when the ruler acts contrary to the trust, when the executive prevents the legislature from assembling or acting freely, when the people are delivered to a foreign power, and generally when those in power use force without authority. What follows is not a return to the state of nature, because the society survives; the power reverts to the community, which may constitute a new government. Locke opens the chapter by distinguishing dissolution of the government from dissolution of the society for exactly this reason.

5. How does Locke answer the charge that his doctrine encourages rebellion? By three arguments. People are slow to leave what they are accustomed to and bear many mistakes and inconveniences without rising. Resistance follows only a long train of abuses that makes the design visible, not a single grievance. And the person properly called a rebel is the ruler, since it is the ruler who breaks the trust and returns to a state of war with the people, so the people resisting are restoring the arrangement rather than destroying it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in156

Chapter Thirty-Three

Rousseau: The General Will

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Social Contract/ Consent Theory"

In one line

Rousseau says you can be governed and still be free, if the law you obey is a law you helped make and which aims at the good of everybody including you.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Rousseau seeks a form of association which defends the person and goods of each member with the whole common force, and in which each, while uniting himself with all, may still obey himself alone and remain as free as before; his solution is the total alienation of each associate with all his rights to the whole community, so that sovereignty rests permanently in the people acting as a body, and the law they make expresses the general will, which aims always at the common interest.

The problem he sets himself

Rousseau's book opens with the sentence everybody quotes and few can place: "Man is born free; and everywhere he is in chains." Read the next lines, because they contain the actual project. He says one who thinks himself the master of others remains a greater slave than they; that he does not know how the change came about; but that he thinks he can answer the question what can make it legitimate.

That is the whole book in one sentence. Rousseau is not asking how the state arose. He is asking what would make it rightful.

He rejects two answers immediately.

Force cannot make right. If force alone justified obedience, then the moment a people could shake off the yoke and did so, it would do still better, since it would be regaining its liberty by the same right by which it was taken. An obligation that disappears when the strength behind it disappears was never an obligation.

Nobody can contract into slavery. To renounce liberty is to renounce being a man, and an agreement which gives everything on one side and nothing on the other is void for want of any equivalent.

The contract

Rousseau states the terms of the compact himself, and this is the passage to quote: "Each of us puts his person and all his power in common under the supreme direction of the general will, and, in our corporate capacity, we receive each member as an indivisible part of the whole."

Three features of that formula do all the work.

The alienation is total. Everybody gives everything. This sounds worse than Hobbes and is not, for the reason in the next point.

Everybody gives to everybody, so nobody gives to anybody. Rousseau's own argument is that in giving himself to all, each man gives himself to nobody, and since there is no associate over whom he does not acquire the same right as he yields others over himself, he gains an equivalent for everything he loses, with more force to preserve what he has.

munotes.in157

Rousseau: The General Will

The sovereign is the people themselves. There is no third party to receive the transfer. That is the crucial difference from Hobbes, whose sovereign is a beneficiary outside the covenant, and from Locke, whose government is a trustee. In Rousseau the sovereign is the associated people, and it can never be alienated or represented.

The general will

This is the concept the University asks about, and it is best approached through a distinction.

The general will aims at the common interest. It is what the people will as a body, considering what is good for the whole.

The will of all is merely the sum of particular wills, each considering its own private interest.

Rousseau's own statement is that there is often a great difference between the two: the general will considers only the common interest, while the will of all takes private interest into account and is no more than a sum of particular wills; take from these same wills the pluses and minuses that cancel one another, and the general will remains as the sum of the differences.

Four further points make the concept usable.

It is about the object, not the number. A will is general because of what it aims at, not because many people hold it. A unanimous vote to plunder a minority is not the general will; a narrow majority aiming at the common good may be.

The people can be mistaken. Rousseau says the people is never corrupted but is often deceived, and only then does it seem to will what is bad. So a wrong decision does not prove the general will was absent; it may prove the people were misinformed, which is why he cares so much about how deliberation is conducted.

Law must be general in both directions. It must come from all and apply to all. A rule aimed at a named person is not law in Rousseau's sense at all.

Sovereignty cannot be represented. Rousseau's hostility to representation follows: a people that elects representatives to will on its behalf has given away the very thing that made it free.

"Forced to be free"

This is the most attacked sentence in political philosophy and it must be stated exactly.

Rousseau's argument is that the compact would be an empty formula if a member could claim the benefits of the association while refusing its burdens, since he would enjoy the rights of a citizen without being willing to fulfil the duties of a subject, and the continuance of such an injustice would undo the body politic. So the compact tacitly includes the undertaking that whoever refuses to obey the general will shall be compelled to do so by the whole body. And, in his own words, "this means nothing less than that he will be forced to be free", since it is this condition that, by giving each citizen to his country, secures him against all personal dependence.

munotes.in158

Rousseau: The General Will

How to read it charitably. The person being compelled is a member of the sovereign who is at that moment consulting his private interest rather than the general will he shares. Compelling him to obey the law is compelling him to act on his own real will as a citizen, and it frees him from dependence on other individuals, which is the only freedom the association can guarantee.

How to read it critically, and both readings should appear in an answer. It permits an authority to tell a person that what they say they want is not what they really want, and to coerce them in the name of their own freedom. That is precisely the structure of the argument every authoritarian regime has used, and Isaiah Berlin's critique of positive liberty, which appears again at topic 3.1.1, is built on this sentence.

A worked example

A village of two hundred households must decide about a common water tank in a drought.

The will of all is the sum of what each household wants: everybody wants as much water as possible for themselves, and the loudest voices belong to those with the most land.

The general will is what they will as a community considering the common interest: a rationing rule that keeps the tank alive through the summer. Notice it may be less than any household wanted individually.

Rousseau's conditions in miniature. The rule must apply to everybody, including whoever proposes it, or it is not law. Households must deliberate as citizens and not as landholders, which is why Rousseau distrusted factions: a bloc of large landholders voting together produces a particular will wearing a general disguise. And the decision cannot be handed to a representative, because the moment two men decide for two hundred, the two hundred have stopped being sovereign.

And the hard case. One household breaks the rationing at night. The village stops them and fines them. On Rousseau's account they are not being oppressed: as a member of the community they willed the rule, and they are being held to their own will as a citizen against their appetite as an individual. Whether that description is true or is a convenient way of describing coercion is the argument the sentence has generated for two hundred and fifty years.

munotes.in159

Rousseau: The General Will

Distinctions that carry marks

General willWill of all
Aims atThe common interestPrivate interests
What it isWhat the people will as a bodyThe sum of particular wills
Made general byIts objectNothing; it is only an aggregate
Can a majority be wrong about it?Yes; the people may be deceivedThe question does not arise
Rousseau's formulaWhat remains when the pluses and minuses of particular wills cancel outThe simple sum
HobbesLockeRousseau
Who holds sovereigntyThe sovereign, outside the covenantThe community, government as trusteeThe people, always and inalienably
Can it be represented?Yes, and must beYesNo
Freedom under the stateWhatever the sovereign leaves unregulatedLife, liberty and estate, protectedObedience to a law one gives oneself
What breach permitsNothingResumption of the trustThe question does not arise; the sovereign is the people

What Rousseau is NOT

The general will is not the majority. It is defined by its object. A majority may be deceived and a unanimous vote may be a particular will.

It is not "the will of the state". The state is the machinery; the general will belongs to the associated people.

"Forced to be free" is not a defence of tyranny in Rousseau's own intention, though it has repeatedly been used as one, and an answer should say both things.

Total alienation is not Hobbes's surrender. In Hobbes everything goes to a sovereign outside the agreement; in Rousseau everything goes to the whole of which each person is a part, so what is given is also received back.

Quick revision

  1. The opening: "Man is born free; and everywhere he is in chains." The project is not how it happened but what can make it legitimate.
  2. Force cannot make right, and nobody can contract into slavery.
  3. The compact: "Each of us puts his person and all his power in common under the supreme direction of the general will, and, in our corporate capacity, we receive each member as an indivisible part of the whole."
  4. Total alienation, but to everybody, so each gives himself to nobody and gains an equivalent.
  5. General will against will of all: common interest against the sum of private interests; the difference is Rousseau's own.
  6. Generality is about the object, not the number. The people is never corrupted but often deceived.
  7. Sovereignty is inalienable and cannot be represented.
  8. "Forced to be free": whoever refuses to obey the general will shall be compelled by the whole body, which secures each citizen against personal dependence. State the charitable and the critical reading together.

Test yourself

1. What is the general will, and how does it differ from the will of all? The general will is what a people wills as a body when it considers the common interest. The will of all is merely the sum of particular wills, each considering its own private interest. Rousseau's own account is that the difference is often great, and that if one takes from those particular wills the pluses and minuses that cancel one another, the general will remains as the sum of the differences. A will is general because of what it aims at, not because of how many hold it.

munotes.in160

Rousseau: The General Will

2. State the terms of Rousseau's social compact and explain why total alienation is not slavery. Each of us puts his person and all his power in common under the supreme direction of the general will, and in our corporate capacity we receive each member as an indivisible part of the whole. It is not slavery because everyone gives everything to everyone, so that in giving himself to all each man gives himself to nobody; there is no associate over whom he does not acquire the same right as he yields, so he receives an equivalent for what he loses, together with greater force to preserve it.

3. Can the general will be mistaken? Explain. The general will itself is always directed at the common interest and in that sense is always right, but the people can fail to see what the common interest is. Rousseau's formulation is that the people is never corrupted but is often deceived, and only on such occasions does it appear to will what is bad. A wrong decision therefore does not prove that the general will was absent, and this is why Rousseau attends so closely to how deliberation is conducted and why he distrusts factions.

4. Explain "forced to be free" and give the argument on both sides. Rousseau says the compact would be an empty formula if a member could claim the rights of a citizen while refusing the duties of a subject, so it tacitly includes an undertaking that whoever refuses to obey the general will shall be compelled by the whole body, which means nothing less than that he will be forced to be free, since this secures each citizen against personal dependence. Charitably, the person is being held to his own will as a citizen against his appetite as an individual. Critically, it licenses an authority to tell people that what they say they want is not what they really want and to coerce them in the name of their freedom, which is the structure Berlin attacked in his account of positive liberty.

5. Why does Rousseau reject representation? Because sovereignty is the exercise of the general will, and a will cannot be transferred to another without ceasing to be one's own. If a people elects representatives to will on its behalf, it has given away the very thing that made it free, and it is sovereign only during the moment of election. This is the sharpest contrast with Locke, whose legislature represents the community as a trustee, and it is why Rousseau's model fits a small city better than a large modern state.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in161

Chapter Thirty-Five

The Theory of Force

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Divine Right Theory of Kings, Social Contract/ Consent Theory, Theory of Force,"

In one line

The theory of force says the state was born of conquest and lives by superior strength, so obedience is owed to whoever is strong enough to compel it.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the force theory holds that the state originated in the subjugation of the weak by the strong, that its essential characteristic is the possession of coercive power, and that political authority rests on the capacity to compel obedience rather than on any agreement, divine appointment or moral title.

The two claims inside it, which must be separated

Almost every mistake in answering this topic comes from running these together.

The historical claim. States actually arose by force. War, conquest and subjugation produced the earliest political units, and continued to produce them afterwards.

The normative claim. Force is what makes obedience owed. Might, in the slogan, makes right.

The first is largely true. The second is almost universally rejected. A good answer says so in its opening paragraph.

Who argued it

The ancient version. The claim that justice is nothing but the interest of the stronger is put in Plato's Republic by Thrasymachus, and answering it is much of what the dialogue is about.

The historical school. Nineteenth century writers, of whom Ludwig Gumplowicz and Franz Oppenheimer are the ones usually named, argued that the state arose from the conquest of one group by another and is essentially an organisation by which a victorious group exploits a defeated one.

The German account of the state and war. Writers in that tradition treated war as the means by which states are made and remade, and force as the state's defining attribute.

Anarchists, from the other side. Anarchist writers accepted the description entirely and drew the opposite conclusion: if the state is founded on force, it deserves no obedience at all.

Notice that the last group agree with the theory's premise and reject its conclusion, which is the fastest way to see that the premise does not carry the conclusion.

What is right in it

An answer that only refutes the theory misses several marks.

Historically it is well supported. Very few states were founded by agreement. Conquest, annexation, partition and revolution are how the political map was actually made.

Force is a real element of every state. Weber's own definition of the state is the human community that successfully claims the monopoly of the legitimate use of physical force within a given territory. Force is not incidental to the state; it is part of what the state is.

It corrects a sentimental picture. Contract theories can make the state sound like a club that members joined. Force theory is a useful reminder that boundaries were drawn by armies and that consent had nothing to do with where most people were born.

munotes.in167

The Theory of Force

It explains a lot of behaviour. People do obey out of fear, and a government's ability to compel is one reason it is not defied.

Why it fails as a theory of obligation

Might does not make right. The oldest objection and still the best. From the fact that somebody can compel you, nothing follows about what you ought to do. If it did, then every gain in strength would be a gain in entitlement, and a successful robber would acquire a right to what he took.

Rousseau's argument, which is the classic statement. If force created right, then the moment a people is strong enough to shake off the yoke and does so, it does still better, since it regains its liberty by the very same right by which the liberty was taken away. An obligation that lasts only as long as the strength behind it, and that transfers to whoever is stronger, is not an obligation at all; it is a description of who is winning.

It cannot distinguish a state from a gang. This is Hart's gunman objection again, and here it is fatal, because the force theory has nothing to add beyond superior strength.

It cannot explain why force is not enough in practice. No state governs by force alone, because force is expensive and self limiting. That was the whole argument of Module I: authority is cheap and power is dear. A theory that says force is the basis of the state cannot explain why every state works so hard to be believed in.

It confuses origin with justification, which is the genetic fallacy. How a thing began does not settle what it is entitled to now. Many respectable institutions have disreputable origins, and many worthless ones have noble ones.

It cannot survive its own success. A regime that says obedience is owed to the strongest has told its opponents exactly what to do: become stronger. Force theory is the only theory of obligation that arms the opposition.

What survives of it

The theory is not simply discarded, and three things it draws attention to are permanent.

Force is a necessary condition of a state, though not a sufficient one. A body that cannot enforce anything is not a state, whatever else it is.

Effectiveness matters to recognition. In international practice a government that actually controls a territory is dealt with, whatever its title, which is the de facto recognition discussed at topic 1.2.1.

Hobbes's rule stands. Obedience lasts as long as protection, and no longer. Hobbes is not a force theorist, but he concedes the practical core of it: an authority that cannot protect has no claim.

munotes.in168

The Theory of Force

A worked example

A territory is annexed by a neighbouring country after a short war. The new administration begins issuing orders.

The force theory's account. The new administration has the power to compel; obedience is therefore owed; the question is closed.

Why that is unsatisfactory. Every inhabitant knows the difference between complying because a soldier is present and thinking that one ought to comply. The theory has no way to express that difference, and the difference is what the whole vocabulary of obligation exists for.

What the new administration actually does, and this is the practical refutation. It does not rely on force. It proclaims that existing laws continue. It keeps the courts sitting. It pays the salaries of the same officials. It announces a referendum. It seeks recognition from other states. Every one of those steps is an attempt to acquire something force cannot supply, and the administration's own behaviour shows it knows that superior strength is not enough.

And the test of the theory arrives later. Suppose the annexing power is defeated ten years afterwards and withdraws. On the force theory, obedience was owed to it while it was strong and is now owed to whoever replaced it, and nothing that happened in between was wrong. That conclusion is one almost nobody will accept, and rejecting it is rejecting the theory.

Distinctions that carry marks

Force theorySocial contractDivine right
Origin of the stateConquest and subjugationAgreementDivine appointment
Basis of obligationSuperior strengthYour own undertakingGod's command
Is obligation moral?It denies the questionYesYes
What happens if the ruler weakensObedience transfers to the strongerNothing; the agreement standsNothing; the title is God's
Right of resistanceWhoever can, mayYes, on breachNone, beyond passive obedience
Fatal objectionMight does not make rightThe contract never happenedThe premise is not universally shared

What the force theory is NOT

It is not Hobbes. Hobbes's sovereign is created by covenant, not by conquest, and his subjects have an obligation because they authorised the sovereign. A conqueror in Hobbes acquires a title by providing protection, which is still a covenant of a kind.

It is not Machiavelli either, though he is often listed here. Machiavelli advises a ruler on how to keep power; he is not arguing that the ruled have a duty to obey.

It is not a defence of tyranny by its nineteenth century exponents. Gumplowicz and Oppenheimer were offering a sociological account of how states arose, not a justification of the states that arose.

It is not refuted by showing that states also rest on consent. The historical claim can be true and the normative claim false at the same time, which is exactly the position this chapter takes.

munotes.in169

The Theory of Force

Quick revision

  1. Two claims: a historical one, that states arose by conquest, which is largely true; and a normative one, that force creates the duty to obey, which fails.
  2. Named: Thrasymachus in Plato's Republic; Gumplowicz and Oppenheimer in the nineteenth century; and anarchists, who accept the premise and reject the conclusion.
  3. What is right: most states did arise by force; force is part of the definition of a state (Weber's monopoly of legitimate physical force); and it corrects the sentimentality of contract theory.
  4. Rousseau's refutation: if force made right, a people that grows strong enough to throw off the yoke does still better, regaining liberty by the same right by which it was taken. So the obligation is not an obligation at all.
  5. Other objections: it cannot distinguish a state from a gang; it cannot explain why no state governs by force alone; it confuses origin with justification; and it tells the opposition to become stronger.
  6. What survives: force is necessary but not sufficient; effectiveness matters to recognition; and Hobbes's rule that obedience lasts as long as protection.

Test yourself

1. State the theory of force and identify the two claims within it. It holds that the state originated in the subjugation of the weak by the strong, that its essential character is coercive power, and that obedience is owed to whoever can compel it. The two claims must be separated. The historical claim, that states arose by conquest, is largely true and is well supported by the way boundaries were actually drawn. The normative claim, that force creates the duty to obey, is almost universally rejected, and confusing the two is the commonest error in answering this topic.

2. Give Rousseau's refutation. Rousseau argues that if force created right then the moment a people becomes strong enough to shake off the yoke and does so, it acts still better, because it regains its liberty by exactly the same right by which its liberty was taken from it. An obligation that lasts only while the strength behind it lasts, and that transfers automatically to whoever becomes stronger, is not an obligation at all but a description of who happens to be winning.

3. What is right in the force theory? Its history: very few states were founded by agreement, and conquest, annexation, partition and revolution made the political map. Its recognition that force is part of what a state is, since Weber defines the state by its successful claim to the monopoly of the legitimate use of physical force in a territory. Its correction of the sentimentality of contract theory, which can make the state sound like a club people joined. And its explanation of a real cause of compliance, since people do obey out of fear.

munotes.in170

The Theory of Force

4. Why can the force theory not distinguish a state from a gang? Because superior strength is the only thing it appeals to, and a gang has that within its reach. Hart's gunman objection therefore applies in its sharpest form: the victim of an armed robber is obliged to hand over the money but is not under an obligation to do so, and the force theory has no resource for marking that difference. Every other theory can point to consent, divine appointment, long settlement or class analysis; this one has nothing but the fact of power.

5. Explain the genetic fallacy as it applies here. It is the mistake of inferring what an institution is entitled to now from how it began. Even if every state began in conquest, nothing follows about whether today's government has a claim to be obeyed, any more than the disreputable origins of a university settle the worth of its degrees. This is why the historical claim in the force theory can be conceded in full while its normative claim is rejected, and it is the cleanest way to keep the two apart in an answer.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in171

Chapter Thirty-Six

The Theory of Prescriptive Possession

Syllabus topic 2.2.2, "Theory of Prescriptive Possession, Views of Karl Marx (Specified)"

In one line

The theory of prescription says that an arrangement which has lasted long enough acquires a title from its own duration, so that asking how it began is no longer a permitted question.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the theory of prescriptive possession holds that political authority is legitimated by long, uninterrupted and unchallenged enjoyment, so that a constitution or a government which has been accepted and obeyed over many generations acquires a title which does not depend on the manner of its origin, and which the present generation is not entitled to reopen.

The idea, and the word

Prescription, in law, is the acquisition of a right by long use, and its mirror image is limitation, the extinction of a right by long failure to assert it. A person who occupies land openly and continuously, as of right, for the period the law prescribes, acquires a title good against the world, and the true owner's right is extinguished. Nobody thinks this is an endorsement of trespass. It is a rule about what happens when a state of affairs has lasted long enough that unsettling it would do more harm than leaving it.

The political theory is the same idea applied to constitutions. If a government has been obeyed for centuries, its title comes from that, and the question how the first ruler acquired power is no longer a live one.

Edmund Burke, the theory's great exponent

Burke is the name to give, and his argument in the Reflections on the Revolution in France has four parts a student should be able to reproduce.

Society is a partnership across generations. It is a partnership not only between those living, but between those who are living, those who are dead and those who are to be born. That is why the present generation cannot simply cancel the arrangement: it holds the estate for others.

Prescription is the most solid of all titles. Long possession is not merely evidence of a title; it is a title, and Burke says it is the soundest one there is, precisely because it has been tested by time in a way that a paper theory has not.

Institutions carry latent wisdom. An arrangement that has worked for centuries encodes solutions to problems nobody now remembers, discovered by trial and error across many lifetimes. An individual reformer's reason, however brilliant, is a small stock compared with the accumulated stock of the ages.

Therefore reform, not reconstruction. Burke is not opposed to change; he supported the American colonists and attacked misgovernment in India. His objection is to demolishing an inherited constitution on the strength of an abstract theory, because the theorist can see what is wrong and cannot see what the arrangement was quietly doing.

munotes.in172

The Theory of Prescriptive Possession

What the theory explains well

Generality. What is protected by long standing is the whole settled arrangement, not selected parts of it, so the theory covers the entire body of law without justifying each rule separately. No other theory does this so easily.

Why people actually behave as they do. Most people obey without asking about origins, and prescription describes that accurately rather than treating it as a failure of reasoning.

Why the origin question is usually unanswerable. Trace any state back far enough and you reach conquest, and there is no state whose beginning would survive examination. A theory of obligation that required a clean origin would leave nobody with a government.

Stability. Prescription explains why unsettling settled expectations is itself a harm, which is the same reason limitation periods exist.

The criticisms

Time cannot convert a wrong into a right. This is the fundamental objection. If it could, then every injustice would only have to last long enough to become lawful, and the longest standing oppressions would be the best protected. In India that objection is not academic: untouchability, the exclusion of women from property, and bonded labour were all defended, in their day, by the argument that they were ancient.

It cannot tell you how long is long enough. Property law fixes a period by statute. Political prescription has no number, so in practice the question becomes which changes the speaker approves of.

It is conservative by construction. Any arrangement that has survived is thereby justified, including one that survived by suppressing the people it harmed. The very silence that prescription treats as acquiescence may be the effect of the arrangement being criticised.

It confuses acquiescence with acceptance. The second face of power in Module I is exactly the objection: an absence of protest may mean a grievance was kept off the agenda, not that nobody had one.

Whose long standing? In a plural society, an arrangement ancient for one group may be a recent imposition on another. Colonial rule was prescriptive from the point of view of the administration and an interruption from the point of view of the governed.

Paine's reply to Burke, and it is the sharpest thing said on the subject. Every generation must be as free to act for itself as the generations that preceded it, and the vanity and presumption of governing beyond the grave is the most ridiculous of tyrannies. Burke's partnership across generations, Paine says, is a claim by the dead to rule the living.

The Indian material

This is where an Indian answer can be much better than a textbook one, and the reason is that Indian constitutional history contains a deliberate rejection of the prescriptive argument.

munotes.in173

The Theory of Prescriptive Possession

The prescriptive case was made, repeatedly. Practices attacked by social reformers were defended as immemorial: sati, the exclusion of women from inheritance, restrictions on temple entry, and the disabilities of caste. In each case the answer was that antiquity is not a justification, and the Constitution's own provisions abolishing untouchability, throwing open Hindu religious institutions of a public character, and abolishing titles are answers to prescription written into the text.

And yet Indian law uses prescription heavily, because the practical case for it is real: limitation periods, adverse possession, easements acquired by long use, and customs recognised as law when ancient, certain, reasonable and continuously observed. Notice the qualifications in that last list. Indian law accepts long usage as a source of right and requires the usage to be reasonable, which is exactly the balance the political theory fails to strike.

That is the strongest thing a student can say on this topic: Indian law adopts prescription with a reasonableness filter, and the political theory of prescription has no such filter, which is why the legal doctrine is defensible and the political theory is not.

A worked example

A community has for two hundred years drawn water from a tank on land now claimed by a temple trust, and the trust seeks to stop them.

The private law answer is prescriptive and uncontroversial. Long, open, continuous use as of right creates an easement; the trust's silence over two centuries extinguishes its ability to object. Nobody feels that an injustice has been done, because a right has grown up which people ordered their lives around.

Now change the case to a political one. For two hundred years one group in the same village has been excluded from that tank. The exclusion is equally ancient, equally continuous, equally unchallenged.

Apply the theory to both. Prescription cannot distinguish them. Both arrangements are old, settled and relied upon. The first has produced a right worth protecting and the second has produced an injustice worth abolishing, and the difference between them is not duration.

What the difference actually is. In the first case the long usage was by the people the right benefits, and its continuance harms nobody's basic interests. In the second, the silence relied on is the silence of those harmed, produced by the very arrangement being defended. That is the whole answer to the theory: prescription treats time as proof of consent, and time proves consent only where dissent was possible.

Distinctions that carry marks

Prescription in property lawPrescription in political theory
What is acquiredA specific right over specific propertyThe title of a whole political order
Period requiredFixed by statuteUndefined
ConditionsOpen, continuous, as of right, and in the case of custom also reasonableNone stated
Who may objectA determinate owner who slept on their rightsThe governed, who may never have been able to object
Is it defensible?Generally yes, because settled expectations deserve protection and the owner could have actedContested, because silence may be the effect of the arrangement
munotes.in174

The Theory of Prescriptive Possession

What this theory is NOT

It is not the same as the force theory. Force says obey the strong; prescription says obey the old, and it is precisely the passage of time that is supposed to convert the original force into a title.

Burke is not opposed to all change. He is opposed to reconstructing a constitution on an abstract plan, and he defends reform that works with the inherited material.

It is not merely conservatism as a temperament. It is an argument, with premises that can be attacked, and answering it requires engaging with the premises.

Custom in Indian law is not the political theory. The legal doctrine carries a reasonableness requirement that the political theory does not, and that difference is the answer to the whole topic.

Quick revision

  1. Prescription is the acquisition of a right by long use; limitation is its mirror, the extinction of a right by long silence.
  2. Burke's four propositions: society is a partnership between the living, the dead and those to be born; prescription is the soundest title; institutions carry latent wisdom accumulated by trial across generations; therefore reform rather than reconstruction.
  3. What it explains best: generality, the whole arrangement at once; why people really behave as they do; and the fact that no state's origin would survive examination.
  4. Criticisms: time cannot turn a wrong into a right; it cannot say how long is long enough; it is conservative by construction; it confuses acquiescence with acceptance; and it asks whose long standing.
  5. Paine's answer to Burke: every generation must be as free to act for itself as its predecessors, and governing beyond the grave is the most ridiculous of tyrannies.
  6. The Indian point: antiquity was the standing defence of untouchability and of the disabilities of women, and the Constitution answers it in the text; while Indian law still accepts custom as a source of right only if it is reasonable, which is the filter the political theory lacks.

Test yourself

1. State the theory of prescriptive possession and give the private law analogy. It holds that a political order which has been enjoyed long, continuously and without effective challenge acquires a title from that duration alone, so that the manner of its origin is no longer a permitted question and the present generation may not reopen it. The analogy is adverse possession and limitation: a person occupying land openly and continuously as of right for the statutory period acquires a title good against the world while the true owner's right is extinguished, not because trespass is approved but because unsettling a long settled state of affairs does more harm than leaving it.

munotes.in175

The Theory of Prescriptive Possession

2. Set out Burke's argument. That society is a partnership not only among the living but between those living, those dead and those yet to be born, so the present generation holds an inheritance for others and cannot simply cancel it. That prescription is not merely evidence of title but the soundest title there is, having been tested by time as no paper theory has. That inherited institutions carry latent wisdom, encoding solutions discovered by trial and error across many lifetimes, against which any individual's stock of reason is small. And therefore that change should proceed by reform working with the inherited material rather than by reconstruction on an abstract plan.

3. What is the fundamental objection to the theory? That the passage of time cannot convert a wrong into a right. If it could, an injustice would need only to last long enough to become lawful, and the oldest oppressions would enjoy the strongest protection. The objection is not abstract in India, where untouchability, the exclusion of women from property and bonded labour were each defended in their day on the ground that they were ancient, and where the Constitution answers that defence expressly in its own text.

4. Explain the objection that prescription confuses acquiescence with acceptance. Prescription treats the absence of challenge as evidence that the arrangement is accepted. But an absence of challenge may be produced by the arrangement itself, by keeping the grievance off the agenda or by making dissent impossible, which is exactly the second face of power. Where those harmed could not object, their silence proves nothing about their acceptance, so the theory is at its weakest precisely where the injustice is greatest.

5. Why is prescription defensible in Indian law and not as a political theory? Because the legal doctrine is qualified and the political theory is not. Indian law recognises custom as a source of right only where it is ancient, certain, continuously observed and reasonable, and adverse possession runs against a determinate owner who could have acted and did not, for a period fixed by statute. The political theory sets no period, imposes no reasonableness requirement, and relies on the silence of people who may never have been in a position to object. The filter is what makes the difference.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in176

Chapter Thirty-Seven

Karl Marx on Political Obligation

Syllabus topic 2.2.2, "Theory of Prescriptive Possession, Views of Karl Marx (Specified)"

In one line

Marx's answer to "why should I obey the state?" is that the question has been asked the wrong way round: the state is an instrument by which one class holds another down, so there is no general duty to obey it, and the belief that there is one is part of how the arrangement is maintained.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Marx offers no theory of political obligation but a rejection of the question; since political power is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another, and law and morality form a superstructure serving the class that owns the means of production, obedience to the state is not a moral duty owed by citizens but a condition of class rule, which will disappear along with classes and with the state itself.

Why Marx is not answering the same question

Every other theory in this module takes the question at face value and offers a ground: God, agreement, force, time. Marx does something different, and an answer that misses this misses the point.

He treats the question itself as a symptom. Asking "what obliges me to obey the state?" presupposes that the state is a neutral body standing above society, whose claim on me needs explaining. Marx denies the presupposition. The state is not above society; it is one part of society organised against another. Once that is seen, the question changes from "why must I obey?" to "whose interest does my obeying serve?".

In the vocabulary of chapter 240, Marx does not answer the four problems of generality, particularity, content independence and universality. He denies that there is anything there to be explained, which is why he belongs in a list of theories of obligation while being of a different kind from the rest.

The argument, in four steps

1. The state is an instrument of class rule

The proposition is stated in the Manifesto in the sentence to quote: "The executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie." And more generally: "Political power, properly so called, is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another."

If that is what political power is, then obedience to it is not a relation between a citizen and a public authority. It is a relation between a subordinate class and the organised power of a dominant one.

2. Law is part of the same apparatus

Law defines and protects property, enforces contracts between parties of very unequal strength, and calls the arrangement freedom. The Manifesto addresses the bourgeois reader directly on this point, saying that his very ideas are products of the conditions of bourgeois production and property, and that his jurisprudence is but the will of his class made into a law for all.

munotes.in177

Karl Marx on Political Obligation

Read that carefully, because students overstate it. The claim is not that every judge is dishonest or that every statute was written by a capitalist. It is structural: a body of law which treats parties as formally equal will systematically favour whoever is substantively stronger, and it will do so through its ordinary, honest and impartial application.

3. The sense of obligation is itself produced

"The ruling ideas of each age have ever been the ideas of its ruling class." The belief that one owes obedience is not, on this account, an independent moral discovery. It is part of the superstructure, taught by schools, courts, religion and custom, and it is one of the cheapest instruments of rule, because a population that believes it ought to obey costs far less to govern than one that must be compelled.

Gramsci's later term for this is hegemony, and it is the Marxist counterpart of the third face of power from chapter 20.

4. So the duty disappears with the classes

Because the state exists to hold one class down, the end of classes removes its function. Engels states the sequence precisely: once there is no social class to be held in subjection, nothing remains to be repressed, a special repressive force is no longer necessary, state interference becomes superfluous in one domain after another and then "dies out of itself", the government of persons being replaced by the administration of things. And he insists on the word: "The State is not 'abolished'. It dies out."

Between the two conditions the Manifesto contemplates a transitional stage in which the proletariat organises itself as the ruling class and uses state power to sweep away the old conditions of production. In that stage obedience is demanded, and by an authority claiming exactly the general duty Marx denied to its predecessor. That tension is the theory's largest practical difficulty and is dealt with below.

What follows for a citizen, in practice

Marx wrote very little that is directly practical about whether to obey a particular law, and an honest answer says so rather than inventing a rule. Three things can be said, and they are enough for an examination.

There is no general duty of obedience, because there is no neutral authority to owe it to.

There may be excellent reasons to comply in a particular case: prudence, the avoidance of pointless harm, and the fact that many laws, such as those about traffic or contagious disease, serve everybody. Compliance for those reasons is not political obligation; it is judgment.

munotes.in178

Karl Marx on Political Obligation

The important question is different. For Marx the useful question is not whether to obey a law but what changing the law can and cannot achieve. On his account law reflects the underlying economic structure, so reforms that leave ownership untouched can improve conditions and cannot alter the relation that produced them. This is why Marxists have historically valued trade union rights and factory legislation while denying that such gains amount to emancipation.

The criticisms

It cannot account for law that helps the subordinate class. Factory Acts, minimum wages, rent control, workmen's compensation and social security were won and have real effects. The Marxist answer, that the state manages the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie and so concedes in order to preserve, is available, but it is capable of explaining any outcome whatever, which weakens it as an explanation.

It leaves the citizen without guidance. Denying a general duty says nothing about what to do on Tuesday. Every actual Marxist movement has had to develop rules about which laws to obey, and those rules are not derived from the theory.

The transitional state is the hardest problem. Where the theory was applied, the state that was supposed to wither grew, and it demanded obedience in the strongest terms any state has. Michels predicted exactly this, and the comparison chapter sets the two against each other.

Class is not the only determinant. In India the most consequential political divisions for decades have been caste, religion, language and region, none of which is reducible to ownership of the means of production, and each of which produces its own claims about obedience.

It underestimates constitutional gains. Universal suffrage, an independent judiciary and enforceable fundamental rights have delivered real protection to people who own nothing, without any change in the ownership of production. A theory that treats those as merely formal has difficulty explaining why the people they protect value them so highly.

A worked example

A factory is closed without notice and eight hundred workers lose their jobs. The closure complies with every legal requirement.

On the standard theories. A contract theorist asks whether the law was made by a body the workers can be taken to have authorised. A prescriptive theorist points to a settled legal order in which both employer and workers took their positions. Both conclude that the workers ought to comply while pursuing lawful remedies.

On Marx's account the questions are different. Who owns the plant? What happens to the value the workers produced? Why does a law which permits closure with compliance exist at all, and whose interest does it serve? The answer is that the legal permission to close is one of the powers ownership carries, and the law's role is to make its exercise orderly rather than to prevent it.

munotes.in179

Karl Marx on Political Obligation

Where it bites hardest. Notice that the workers' most effective response, a strike, is itself regulated by law: notice periods, prohibited categories, and consequences for breach. On Marx's account this is the point exactly. The law does not forbid resistance; it channels it into forms the arrangement can absorb, and calls the channelled version lawful.

And where the criticism bites back. The workers may in fact obtain compensation, reinstatement or a settlement through the very machinery the theory describes as an instrument of the owning class. A student who can hold both of those facts in one answer has understood the topic.

Distinctions that carry marks

Every other theory in 2.2Marx
What it doesSupplies a ground for the dutyDenies that the duty exists
The state isAn authority whose claim needs justifyingAn instrument of class rule
Law isThe medium of the authority's commandsPart of the superstructure serving the owning class
The sense of duty isA moral fact to be explainedAn idea produced by the ruling class
End pointA justified obligationClasslessness, and the state dying out
Right of resistanceOn breach (Locke), never (divine right), whoever can (force)The question does not arise; there was never a duty

What Marx's view is NOT

It is not a claim that laws should be broken. He denies a general duty; he does not assert a general licence, and prudence often counsels compliance.

It is not the claim that judges are bribed. The claim is structural, about how impartial rules operate between unequal parties.

It is not anarchism. The anarchist wants the state abolished now; Engels says it cannot be abolished and will become unnecessary, and the transitional state is expressly contemplated.

It is not the same as his theory of power. Chapter 110 is about who rules and why; this chapter is about whether anybody owes them obedience. MU sets them separately and so do we.

Quick revision

  1. Marx rejects the question rather than answering it: the state is not a neutral authority whose claim needs explaining, so the real question is whose interest obedience serves.
  2. "The executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie."
  3. "Political power, properly so called, is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another."
  4. "The ruling ideas of each age have ever been the ideas of its ruling class." The sense of obligation is itself produced; Gramsci calls the mechanism hegemony.
  5. Engels: the state "dies out of itself"; the government of persons is replaced by the administration of things; "The State is not 'abolished'. It dies out."
  6. In practice: no general duty; particular compliance may be prudent; and the useful question is what changing the law can and cannot achieve.
  7. Criticisms: it explains any outcome and so explains none; it gives the citizen no guidance; the transitional state grew instead of withering; caste, religion and language are not reducible to class; and constitutional protections have delivered real gains to the propertyless.
munotes.in180

Karl Marx on Political Obligation

Test yourself

1. Why is Marx's view different in kind from the other theories of political obligation? Because the others accept the question and supply a ground, whether divine appointment, agreement, force or long settlement, while Marx rejects the presupposition behind it. To ask what obliges me to obey the state assumes the state is a neutral body standing above society whose claim requires explanation; Marx denies that, holding it to be one part of society organised against another. The question therefore changes from why I must obey into whose interest my obeying serves.

2. Quote and explain the Manifesto's account of the state. That the executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie, and that political power properly so called is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another. The word committee denies that the state takes orders from individual capitalists, and the words common affairs and whole allow it to act against a particular owner or industry in order to preserve the system. It follows that obedience is not a relation between citizen and public authority but between a subordinate class and the organised power of a dominant one.

3. How does Marx explain the fact that people believe they ought to obey? As part of the superstructure. The ruling ideas of each age have ever been the ideas of its ruling class, so the sense of obligation is not an independent moral discovery but something taught by schools, courts, religion and custom. It is also the cheapest instrument of rule available, since a population that believes it ought to obey costs far less to govern than one that must be compelled. Gramsci's later name for the whole mechanism is hegemony.

4. What does Engels say happens to the state, and why is the wording important? That once there is no social class to be held in subjection, nothing remains to be repressed, a special repressive force becomes unnecessary, state interference becomes superfluous in one domain after another and then dies out of itself, the government of persons being replaced by the administration of things. The wording matters because Engels expressly denies that the state is abolished and insists that it dies out, which separates Marxism from anarchism: the anarchist demands abolition now, and Engels says abolition is impossible and redundancy is what will happen.

munotes.in181

Karl Marx on Political Obligation

5. Give three criticisms of Marx's account of obligation. That it can explain any outcome, since a law favouring workers is explained as a concession preserving the system, and a theory consistent with every result explains none. That the transitional state, which was to wither away, in fact grew wherever the theory was applied and demanded obedience in the strongest terms, which is what Michels predicted. And that in India the most consequential political divisions have been caste, religion, language and region, none reducible to ownership of the means of production, each generating its own claims about who owes obedience to whom.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in182

Chapter Thirty-Eight

What an Unjust Law Is

Syllabus topic 2.3, "Problems of Obedience to Unjust Laws"; 2.3.1, "What is Unjust Law?"

In one line

An unjust law is one that is validly made and ought not to have been made, and the tests for identifying one are that it treats people unequally without reason, that it takes away what it may not take away, that it was made or applied without fairness, or that its own purpose could not be stated in public.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: an unjust law is a rule which satisfies the formal requirements for validity in its legal system but violates the standards by which the content of law is judged, principally equality, the protection of basic interests, procedural fairness and the possibility of public justification; whether such a rule remains law is disputed between natural law theory, which holds that a sufficiently unjust rule is no law at all, and legal positivism, which holds that it is law and ought not to be obeyed.

The prior question: can a law be unjust at all?

Before you can ask what an unjust law is, you must be able to say that a law can be unjust, and two traditions answer differently.

Natural law. There is a standard above enacted law by which enacted law is judged, and a rule that fails badly enough is not law at all. The tradition's slogan is lex iniusta non est lex, an unjust law is not a law. On this view the citizen faced with such a rule is not facing a law and so faces no question of obedience.

Legal positivism. The existence of a law is one thing, its merit or demerit another. A rule enacted by a competent authority in the prescribed manner is law however wicked it is, and it should be described as law and then condemned.

Why the positivist position is the more useful one here, and Hart's reason for it. If a monstrous rule is said not to be law, the citizen's problem disappears by definition and the question of what to do about it is never asked. Saying "this is law, and it is too iniquitous to obey" states the problem accurately and keeps it open. A student who makes this point has understood the whole topic, and the point matters practically: a court in India does not say that section 377 was never law; it says the section was law and is now void.

Notice that Indian constitutional practice is a third thing, and is closer to natural law in effect while remaining positivist in form. A statute inconsistent with the Fundamental Rights is void, but it is void because a higher enacted rule says so, not because of a standard outside all enacted law.

munotes.in183

What an Unjust Law Is

The tests for identifying an unjust law

These are the workable tests, and an answer that applies them beats one that gestures at injustice.

1. It treats people unequally without a rational basis

The oldest test and the most used. Likes must be treated alike, and where a law separates one group from another it must be able to explain the separation by reference to the purpose of the law.

2. It denies a basic interest that no purpose can justify taking

Life, liberty of the person, freedom of conscience, the ability to earn a living. A law that takes these away is unjust whatever it achieves.

3. It was not made or applied fairly

Retrospective punishment; a rule that nobody could have known in advance; a decision without a hearing; a judge deciding their own case; a punishment fixed with no opportunity to be heard about it.

4. It cannot be justified in public

Lon Fuller's inner morality of law supplies the practical version: laws must be general, published, prospective, intelligible, not contradictory, capable of being obeyed, stable, and actually applied as announced. A rule that fails several of these cannot be defended in the open, and a rule whose real purpose could not be stated aloud is a strong candidate for injustice.

5. The affected group had no part in making it

The democratic test. A rule imposed on people who were excluded from the process that produced it lacks the one answer that is otherwise available, namely that they had a say. This is the test Martin Luther King uses at topic 2.3.2 and it is worth remembering that it comes from him.

6. Its only defence is that it has always been there

Which is the prescriptive argument of chapter 360, and chapter 360's answer applies: antiquity is not a justification.

Two Indian laws that were held unjust

Facts. Mithu v. State of Punjab, (1983) 2 SCC 277. Section 303 of the Indian Penal Code provided that whoever, being under sentence of imprisonment for life, commits murder shall be punished with death. The sentence was mandatory. A court convicting such a person had no discretion whatever, could hear nothing on sentence, and could not consider the circumstances of the offence or of the offender. The appellants argued that the section was unreasonable and arbitrary and that it authorised deprivation of life by an unjust and unfair procedure.

Held. A Constitution Bench struck section 303 down as unconstitutional and void, holding the mandatory death sentence for a murder committed by a life convict violative of articles 14 and 21. There was no rational basis for singling out life convicts for a punishment from which every other convicted murderer was protected by judicial discretion, and a procedure which excludes any consideration of the circumstances of the crime and the criminal is not the fair, just and reasonable procedure article 21 requires.

munotes.in184

What an Unjust Law Is

Why it matters. Test 1 and test 3, applied by a court. And notice what did not save the section: it had been validly enacted, and it had stood since 1860.

Facts. Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India, (2018) 10 SCC 1. Section 377 of the Penal Code punished carnal intercourse against the order of nature with imprisonment, and as applied it criminalised consensual sexual acts between adults of the same sex. The Delhi High Court had read it down in the Naz Foundation case and that decision had been reversed in Suresh Kumar Koushal. The petitioners challenged it on equality, expression, privacy and personal liberty.

Held. A Constitution Bench held section 377 unconstitutional so far as it criminalised consensual acts between adults in private. It found the provision manifestly arbitrary and over-broad, since making a consensual relationship a crime on the ground that it is against the order of nature suffers from manifest arbitrariness; it held the section violative of article 15; and it held that it offended dignity, privacy and the freedom to express one's identity. The Court held that a classification treated as valid when adopted may cease to be valid as social norms change, and that constitutional morality, not popular morality, governs.

Why it matters. Test 2 and test 5. And again notice the two defences that failed: popular disapproval, and the fact that the provision dated from 1860. Prescription lost in court.

The problem of obedience, which is what MU's 2.3 asks

Identifying an unjust law settles nothing about what to do, and three positions are defensible.

Obey and work to change it. The prima facie duty from chapter 270 is strong; the injustice must be very grave to outweigh it; and a legal system in which each citizen decides which laws to obey is worse for everybody, including the victims of the unjust law.

Disobey openly and accept the penalty. Civil disobedience: the breach is public, non-violent, and accompanied by submission to punishment, which distinguishes it from crime and demonstrates that the disobedient still accepts the system as a whole. This is topic 2.3.2 and 2.3.3.

Disobey and resist. Where the injustice is grave enough and no lawful route exists, the right of resistance is claimed. Locke's dissolution chapter is the classical warrant.

The variable that decides between them is the availability of a remedy. Both Indian sections above were removed by a court, at the instance of people who used the legal system rather than defied it. In a constitutional order with an independent judiciary, the first option is far more powerful than it was in Locke's England or in Gandhi's India, and any answer on this topic should say so.

munotes.in185

What an Unjust Law Is

A worked example

A State passes a law requiring every person applying for a ration card to produce proof of continuous residence for fifteen years.

Test 1, equality. It separates long residents from recent ones. Is the separation rational in relation to the purpose? If the purpose is preventing duplicate cards, a fifteen year rule is far wider than needed, and the separation begins to look arbitrary.

Test 2, basic interests. The card controls access to subsidised food. The rule therefore bears on subsistence, which is a basic interest.

Test 3, fairness. Is there an appeal? Can a person who cannot produce documents prove residence another way?

Test 4, public justification. Could the purpose be stated aloud? If the real purpose is to exclude migrants from a particular region, it could not, which is decisive.

Test 5, participation. The people worst affected are migrants, who in practice have the least political weight in the State that made the rule.

And the practical question. A person refused a card should apply, be refused, obtain the refusal in writing and challenge it. That is the first option above, and on these facts it is very likely to succeed, which is why it is the right advice. Civil disobedience is what remains when that route is closed.

Distinctions that carry marks

Natural lawLegal positivism
Is an unjust rule law?Not if the injustice is grave: lex iniusta non est lexYes; existence and merit are separate questions
What the citizen facesNot a law, so no question of obedience arisesA law that ought not to be obeyed
AdvantageRefuses to dignify monstrous rules with the name of lawKeeps the moral problem visible and answerable
NamesAquinas, Fuller, FinnisAustin, Hart, Kelsen
Unconstitutional lawUnjust law
Tested againstThe ConstitutionMoral standards
Decided byA courtArgument, and ultimately the citizen
ConsequenceVoid; nobody need obey itIt remains law until changed
OverlapLarge in India, because the Constitution enacts many moral standards

What an unjust law is NOT

It is not a law you dislike. Inconvenience, cost and disagreement are not injustice, and treating them as such destroys the concept.

It is not the same as an invalid law. An invalid law binds nobody and needs no theory of disobedience. The problem arises precisely because unjust laws are valid.

It is not always old or foreign. Both examples above were Indian, both were enacted in 1860, and both were struck down within living memory.

munotes.in186

What an Unjust Law Is

Identifying one does not settle what to do. That is a separate question and is the whole of the rest of Module II.

Quick revision

  1. Natural law: lex iniusta non est lex. Positivism: existence and merit are separate; better to say "this is law and it is too iniquitous to obey", which keeps the problem visible.
  2. Six tests: unequal treatment without a rational basis; denial of a basic interest; unfair making or application; incapable of public justification (Fuller's inner morality of law); the affected group excluded from making it; and defended only by its antiquity.
  3. Mithu v. State of Punjab, (1983) 2 SCC 277: section 303 IPC, mandatory death for murder by a life convict, struck down under articles 14 and 21; no rational basis, and a procedure allowing no consideration of the offence or the offender is not fair, just and reasonable.
  4. Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India, (2018) 10 SCC 1: section 377 IPC unconstitutional so far as it criminalised consensual acts between adults; manifestly arbitrary and over-broad; a classification valid when adopted may cease to be valid; constitutional morality, not popular morality.
  5. Neither section was saved by having been validly enacted in 1860, which is prescription failing in court.
  6. Three responses: obey and work to change; civil disobedience with acceptance of the penalty; resistance. The availability of a remedy is what decides between them.

Test yourself

1. Can a law be unjust and still be law? Set out both answers. Natural law says that a sufficiently unjust rule is not law at all, on the maxim lex iniusta non est lex, so the citizen confronting it faces no law and no question of obedience. Legal positivism says the existence of a law is one thing and its merit another, so a rule validly made is law however wicked, and should be called law and then condemned. The positivist position is more useful here, because saying that a monstrous rule is not law makes the citizen's problem vanish by definition instead of answering it.

2. Give the tests for identifying an unjust law. That it treats people unequally with no rational basis related to its purpose. That it denies a basic interest such as life, personal liberty, conscience or the ability to earn a living. That it was not made or applied fairly, being retrospective, unknowable in advance, or imposed without a hearing. That it cannot be justified in public, failing Fuller's requirements that law be general, published, prospective, intelligible, consistent, capable of being obeyed, stable and applied as announced. That the group it burdens was excluded from making it. And that its only defence is its antiquity.

munotes.in187

What an Unjust Law Is

3. State the facts and holding in Mithu. Section 303 of the Penal Code required the death sentence for any murder committed by a person under sentence of imprisonment for life, and the sentence was mandatory, so no court could hear anything on sentence or consider the circumstances of the offence or the offender. A Constitution Bench struck it down as violative of articles 14 and 21, finding no rational basis for singling out life convicts for a punishment from which every other murderer was protected by judicial discretion, and holding that a procedure excluding all consideration of the crime and the criminal is not the fair, just and reasonable procedure article 21 demands.

4. What did Navtej Singh Johar decide, and what defences did it reject? That section 377 of the Penal Code was unconstitutional so far as it criminalised consensual sexual acts between adults in private, being manifestly arbitrary and over-broad, violative of article 15, and destructive of dignity, privacy and the freedom to express one's identity. It rejected two defences. Popular disapproval was rejected because constitutional morality and not popular morality governs. Antiquity was rejected because a classification treated as valid when adopted may cease to be valid as social norms change, which is the prescriptive argument failing in court.

5. Having identified an unjust law, what should a citizen do? Three courses are defensible: obey while working through lawful means to change it, since the prima facie duty is strong and a system in which each person selects their laws harms everyone including the victims; disobey openly and non-violently while accepting the penalty, which is civil disobedience and marks the disobedient as still accepting the system; or resist, where the injustice is grave and no lawful route exists. The deciding variable is the availability of a remedy, and in a constitutional order with an independent court the first course is far more powerful than it was for Locke or for Gandhi, as both the Indian examples show.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in188

Chapter Thirty-Nine

The Right to Resistance and Dissent

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - T.H. Green, M. K. Gandhi, Harlod Laski, Martin Luther King Jr and Nelson Mandela (New)"

In one line

Resistance, revolution, civil disobedience and dissent are four different responses to an unjust law, they differ in what is broken, whether force is used and whether punishment is accepted, and the five men MU names chose differently between them.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the right of resistance is the claim that a citizen is entitled, and in some accounts obliged, to refuse obedience to a government that has exceeded or betrayed the purpose for which authority was conferred; it ranges from dissent, which uses lawful means to oppose, through civil disobedience, which breaks the law openly and non-violently and accepts the penalty, to revolution, which seeks to replace the government by force.

The four things, kept apart

This is the whole value of the chapter, and the table at the end is what an answer should reproduce.

Dissent. Disagreement expressed by lawful means: speech, writing, assembly, petition, voting, litigation, a strike within the law. No law is broken. In India dissent is not merely tolerated; it is a fundamental right under article 19(1)(a) and 19(1)(b), and the courts have repeatedly said that the space for it is what distinguishes a democracy.

Conscientious refusal. A person refuses to do a particular thing because their conscience forbids it: a doctor who will not perform a procedure, a person who will not take an oath in a particular form, a soldier who will not fire on a crowd. It is personal rather than persuasive: the object is to keep one's own hands clean, not to change public policy.

Civil disobedience. A public, non-violent and conscientious breach of law, undertaken to change a law or policy, by a person who accepts the legal consequences. Each of those four features is doing work, and dropping any one of them turns it into something else. It is not secret, or it could not persuade. It is not violent, or it destroys the moral advantage it depends on. It is not self interested. And the penalty is accepted, which is what demonstrates that the disobedient still accepts the legal order as a whole while rejecting one part of it.

Revolution or rebellion. An attempt to overthrow the government or the constitutional order itself, usually by force. The target is not one law but the regime.

The single most useful distinction for an examination. Civil disobedience breaks a law and accepts the system. Revolution rejects the system. That is why civil disobedience can be argued for inside a constitutional order and revolution cannot.

Where the right of resistance comes from

Every theory of obligation in chapter 280 produces a different answer, and the differences are worth a paragraph.

munotes.in189

The Right to Resistance and Dissent

Divine right: no right of resistance; at most passive obedience, refusing to perform and accepting the punishment.

Hobbes: none, beyond the untransferable right to defend one's own life.

Locke: yes, and this is the classical warrant. When the trust is broken the power reverts to the people, who may resume it. Locke's own limits are important: only after a long train of abuses making the design visible, and the ruler who breaks the trust is the true rebel.

Rousseau: the question does not arise in the same form, because the sovereign is the people; resistance against the general will is incoherent, and what a citizen may resist is a government that has usurped the sovereign's place.

Prescription: strongly against, since resistance unsettles what time has settled.

Marx: the question is transformed, because there was never a duty to breach.

The conditions writers place on it

No serious writer says one may resist whenever one disagrees. The standard conditions recur across all five men in the chapters that follow, and an answer that lists them is a strong answer.

  1. The injustice must be grave, not merely a disagreement about policy.
  2. Lawful means must have been tried and have failed. This is the condition that does most work in a constitutional state.
  3. There must be a reasonable prospect of success, or the harm caused is gratuitous.
  4. The response must be proportionate.
  5. It should be public, because a secret breach cannot persuade anybody.
  6. It should be non-violent, on the moral argument and equally on the practical one, that violence hands the government the justification it needs.
  7. The penalty should be accepted, which distinguishes the disobedient from the criminal.

Notice that conditions 5, 6 and 7 belong to civil disobedience specifically. Locke's right of resistance, and Mandela's decision at topic 2.3.2, do not accept all three, and that is precisely what makes those cases hard.

The five men, and where each sits

This is the map the next five chapters fill in.

T. H. Green is the theorist. He asks whether there can be a right of resistance at all when the state is founded on will rather than force, and answers carefully: obedience is owed to the state because it maintains the conditions of a moral life, so resistance is justified where the sovereign's command attacks those conditions, and the citizen must consider the effect on the whole social fabric.

Harold Laski is the theorist of the conditional obligation. Obedience depends on the state achieving its purpose, and we are the judges of that achievement. Where power is exercised for ends incompatible with the state's nature, he speaks of the duty of resistance rather than the right.

munotes.in190

The Right to Resistance and Dissent

M. K. Gandhi is the practitioner who built a technique. Obedience to an unjust law is itself a form of participation in the injustice, and the remedy is satyagraha: refuse, and accept the penalty.

Martin Luther King Jr is the practitioner who supplied the clearest test for identifying an unjust law and the clearest defence of breaking it while professing the highest respect for law.

Nelson Mandela is the case that tests every rule, because he began with non-violence, concluded that it had failed, and turned to sabotage, and then defended the decision in a court of the state he was resisting.

The Indian revolutionaries, whom MU has examined

The syllabus names five men and none of them is an Indian revolutionary, but MU has set a question on Bhagat Singh and asked how his strategies differed from Gandhi's. The comparison belongs here because it is the same axis the five chapters run along.

What he did. Bhagat Singh and B. K. Dutt threw two low intensity bombs and leaflets into the Central Legislative Assembly on 8 April 1929, in protest against the Public Safety Bill and the Trade Disputes Bill, and did not attempt to escape. The bombs were designed to make noise rather than casualties, and the leaflet's purpose was that the deaf should be made to hear. In prison he and his companions went on a long hunger strike over the treatment of Indian political prisoners as against European ones, and he used the trial itself as a platform.

What is shared with Gandhi. The willingness to be arrested rather than to escape; the acceptance of the penalty, including death; the use of the prison and the courtroom as places to make the argument; and the object of arousing a public rather than seizing power by force.

What is different, and it is the whole point of the comparison.

GandhiBhagat Singh
MeansNon-violence as a principle, binding whatever the costViolence permissible where it is effective and directed, and to be used sparingly
The targetThe opponent's conscienceThe opponent's attention, and the public's
The opponentTo be converted, and never humiliatedTo be compelled; conversion is not expected of an imperial power
The theory behind itTruth and self-suffering; means and ends are inseparableSocialist revolution; the end of the exploitation of man by man, not merely the departure of the British
On the penaltyAccept it, to show respect for lawAccept it, to make the trial a platform

Where each sits on this chapter's scale. Gandhi's is civil disobedience in its strictest form. Bhagat Singh's is nearer the revolutionary end of the four things kept apart above, since he did not accept the legitimacy of the colonial state at all and did not confine himself to non-violent means. Both are distinguished from ordinary crime by the openness of the act, the acceptance of the penalty and the public reason given for it.

munotes.in191

The Right to Resistance and Dissent

An answer should not turn this into a verdict on which man was right. What it should show is that resistance is a spectrum, from Green's carefully limited justification through Gandhi's and King's disciplined non-violence to Mandela's sabotage and Bhagat Singh's revolutionary action, and that the tests set out above are what locate any given act on it.

A worked example

A city bans all public meetings in its central area for six months by an executive order made under a general power, giving no reasons.

Dissent. Newspaper articles, petitions, a debate in the legislature, and a writ petition challenging the order. Nothing unlawful, and in India nothing that requires any justification at all: it is a fundamental right.

Conscientious refusal. A police officer resigns rather than enforce it. Personal, and not aimed at persuading anybody.

Civil disobedience. Two hundred people assemble in the central area, announcing the time and place in advance, sit peacefully, and allow themselves to be arrested without resistance. They break the order, publicly, without violence, and take the consequences.

Revolution. A group attempts to seize the municipal building and depose the administration.

Now apply the conditions to the third. Is the injustice grave? A blanket six month ban on assembly, with no reasons, in the central area of a city, is a serious restriction on a fundamental right. Were lawful means tried? If the writ petition is pending and listed for hearing next week, condition 2 is not satisfied and the case for disobedience is weak. If the petition has been pending for four months without a hearing while the ban runs out its term, condition 2 is satisfied and the case is much stronger.

That last contrast is the practical heart of this topic in a constitutional country: the strength of the case for disobedience varies inversely with the availability of an effective legal remedy, and it is the effectiveness rather than the formal existence of the remedy that matters.

Distinctions that carry marks

DissentConscientious refusalCivil disobedienceRevolution
Is a law broken?NoYes, a particular oneYesYes, and the order attacked
Public?YesNot necessarilyAlwaysNot necessarily
Violent?NoNoNoUsually
AimTo persuadeTo keep one's own hands cleanTo change a law or policyTo replace the government
Penalty accepted?No question arisesUsuallyYes, and this is the pointNo
Accepts the system?YesYesYesNo
Indian exampleA writ petition, a march with permissionRefusing to administer an order one believes unlawfulThe salt satyagrahaAn armed insurgency
munotes.in192

The Right to Resistance and Dissent

What the right of resistance is NOT

It is not a right to disobey any law you dislike. Every writer imposes conditions, and the conditions are most of the doctrine.

It is not the same as a legal right. No constitution confers a right to break its own laws. The right of resistance is a moral claim, and the Indian Constitution's answer to it is to supply lawful routes instead: fundamental rights, judicial review, and periodic elections.

Civil disobedience is not violence in slow motion. Its whole force depends on non-violence and on acceptance of the penalty.

Dissent is not resistance at all, and calling lawful criticism resistance both flatters it and endangers it.

Quick revision

  1. Four things: dissent (lawful), conscientious refusal (personal), civil disobedience (public, non-violent, conscientious, penalty accepted), revolution (rejects the system).
  2. The key line: civil disobedience breaks a law and accepts the system; revolution rejects the system.
  3. Where the right comes from: Locke is the classical warrant, on breach of the trust, after a long train of abuses. Divine right and Hobbes deny it; prescription is against it; Marx transforms the question.
  4. Seven conditions: grave injustice; lawful means exhausted; reasonable prospect of success; proportionality; publicity; non-violence; acceptance of the penalty.
  5. The five men: Green the theorist of moral conditions, Laski of conditional obligation and the duty to resist, Gandhi the builder of a technique, King the clearest test of an unjust law, Mandela the hardest case.
  6. In India dissent is a fundamental right under article 19, and the strength of any case for disobedience varies inversely with the effectiveness of the available remedy.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish dissent, civil disobedience and revolution. Dissent opposes by lawful means and breaks no law: speech, writing, assembly, petition, voting and litigation, all of which are protected in India by article 19. Civil disobedience is a public, non-violent, conscientious breach of law aimed at changing a law or policy, in which the disobedient accepts the legal consequences, and that acceptance shows they still accept the legal order as a whole. Revolution attacks the regime itself, usually by force, and rejects the system rather than one part of it.

2. State the four features of civil disobedience and say what each is doing. It is public, because a secret breach cannot persuade anybody and persuasion is its object. It is non-violent, both because violence destroys the moral advantage the technique depends on and because it hands the government the justification it wants. It is conscientious rather than self interested, so it is distinguished from ordinary crime by its motive. And the penalty is accepted, which is the feature that shows the disobedient rejects one law while continuing to accept the authority of the legal order.

munotes.in193

The Right to Resistance and Dissent

3. What conditions do writers place on the right of resistance? That the injustice be grave rather than a policy disagreement; that lawful means have been tried and failed; that there be a reasonable prospect of success, since otherwise the harm is gratuitous; that the response be proportionate; that it be public; that it be non-violent; and that the penalty be accepted. The last three belong specifically to civil disobedience, and Locke's right of resistance and Mandela's turn to sabotage do not satisfy all of them, which is what makes those cases difficult.

4. Which theory of obligation supplies the classical warrant for resistance, and on what terms? Locke's. Because the community entrusts power to a government as a fiduciary rather than granting it by contract, a government that acts against the purpose of the trust loses the power, which reverts to the people, who may resume it and establish a new one. Locke's terms are strict: resistance is justified only after a long train of abuses making the design visible, and he insists that the person properly called a rebel is the ruler who broke the trust and thereby returned to a state of war.

5. How does the availability of a legal remedy affect the case for disobedience? It weakens it in proportion to the remedy's effectiveness. Where a challenge can be filed and heard promptly, the second condition, that lawful means be exhausted, is not satisfied and the case for breaking the law is poor. Where the remedy exists only formally, so that a petition remains unheard while the impugned measure runs its full course, the condition is satisfied and the case becomes much stronger. What matters is the effectiveness of the remedy and not its existence on paper, which is why the same conduct can be indefensible in one system and defensible in another.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in194

Chapter Forty

T. H. Green on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - T.H. Green, ... (New)"

In one line

Green says the state rests on will and not on force, that a citizen obeys because the state maintains the conditions in which people can live a moral life, and that where a law attacks those conditions the ground of obedience is gone.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: T. H. Green holds that political obligation rests not on force or on a contract but on the common recognition of a common good; that the state exists to maintain the conditions under which its members can realise their moral capacities, which he describes as hindering the hindrances to the good life; that rights are powers recognised by society as necessary to that end; and that a right of resistance therefore exists where the sovereign's command destroys the very conditions the state exists to secure, subject always to the effect of resistance on the social fabric as a whole.

The position Green is arguing from

Green is an idealist, which in this context means something precise: he thinks the state is not an external machine standing over individuals but the arrangement through which individuals become what they are capable of being. Everything in his account follows from that.

"Will, not force, is the basis of the state." This is the heading of section 113, and it is the sentence every Indian textbook attributes to Green without saying where it is. His point is not that states never use force; it is that force cannot explain why they hold together. What holds a state together is the common recognition, by its members, of a common good.

The contract theorists went wrong in the same way as the force theorists. Green's own criticism, in the same section, is that theories explaining political obligation by contract treat sovereign and subject apart, whereas the two are correlative: there is no sovereign without subjects who recognise the sovereign, and no subject except in relation to a recognised sovereign. A contract between two pre-existing parties gets the relation the wrong way round.

But the contract theorists were groping at something true. Green says the theory of contract expresses, in a confused way, the truth that it is only through the common recognition of a common good that political society exists at all. That generosity is characteristic and is worth reproducing in an answer: Green does not simply refute his predecessors, he says what they were reaching for.

Freedom, and why it is not being left alone

This is Green's most influential contribution and it returns at topic 3.1.1.

Freedom is positive. It is not the absence of restraint but the positive power or capacity of doing or enjoying something worth doing or enjoying, and doing it in common with others.

munotes.in195

T. H. Green on Resistance

Freedom is social. Green's own argument in section 114 is that the desire for freedom in an individual is not a real desire unless he is a member of a society that recognises it. A person alone has no freedom in this sense, because there is nobody to recognise the claim.

And rights come from recognition. Without an authority embodied in civil institutions, Green says in section 115, a person would not even have the elementary idea of right that enables him to question authority. This is a striking claim and students should sit with it: the very capacity to say "this law is unjust" is something the political community gave you.

Why this matters for resistance. If freedom is a positive capacity that only a society can supply, then the state is not the enemy of freedom but its condition, and the case for obeying it is very strong. Green's account therefore makes resistance harder to justify than Locke's, and that is what makes his eventual justification of it more interesting.

The state's purpose, and the limit that follows

Green's formula for what the state does is that its function is to maintain the conditions without which a free exercise of the human faculties is impossible. It cannot make people moral, because an act done under compulsion has no moral worth at all; what it can do is remove obstacles. The standard summary is that the state hinders the hindrances to the good life.

Two consequences follow directly, and both are examinable.

A wide power to legislate for welfare. Because the state's job is to remove obstacles, Green's theory justifies factory legislation, compulsory education, public health measures and restrictions on the sale of liquor, all of which he defended. Interference with contract is justified where the contract is made under conditions that make it not really free.

A sharp limit. The state may not do anything that destroys the conditions of moral life, because that is the opposite of its function. A law which prevents people from exercising moral judgment, or which degrades them, is acting against the ground of its own authority.

The right of resistance

Green puts the question directly in section 102, asking whether, where a command can be resisted without serious detriment to the social order and fabric, there may be a right of resistance based on a higher law than the command of the ostensible sovereign. His answer has four parts.

1. The ground of obedience is the common good, so it can fail. Obedience is owed because the state maintains the conditions of a moral life. Where a particular law attacks those conditions, the reason for obeying it is not merely outweighed; it is absent.

munotes.in196

T. H. Green on Resistance

2. But the effect on the whole fabric must be weighed. This is Green's characteristic caution, and it is what separates him from Locke. Even a bad law is part of a system that as a whole maintains the conditions of the good life, and disobedience weakens the system. So a citizen must ask not only whether the law is bad but whether resisting it damages more than it repairs.

3. Where the legal authority of the command is doubtful, the case is easier. Green notes in the same section that the definition of sovereignty, that is, the determination of who holds the supreme power to make and enforce law, has been arrived at slowly and remains uncertain in many states, several of which were formed by combination or by the gradual conversion of feudal superiority into sovereignty. Where it is genuinely doubtful that the person commanding has the authority to command, refusing is not disobedience to the sovereign at all.

4. Resistance is a duty of citizens, not a licence for individuals. Because rights exist through recognition by a society, an individual's claim to resist has to be a claim that appeals to the common good as the society understands it, not to private preference. This is why Green's resistance is closer to reform and public agitation than to rebellion.

A worked example

A State makes it an offence for any person to assist a manual scavenger to seek alternative employment, on the ground that it disrupts a settled occupational arrangement.

Apply Green's test. The state's function is to maintain the conditions in which people can exercise their faculties freely. A law that forbids helping somebody escape degrading work does the exact opposite: it manufactures an obstacle to the moral life of both parties, the scavenger and the helper.

So the ground of obedience is absent. This is not a case of weighing a bad law against the general benefit of obedience. On Green's account there is nothing on the obedience side of the scale, because the law is acting against the very purpose that gives the state its claim.

But Green's second condition still applies. How is it to be resisted? Green would ask whether public agitation, petitioning, and refusing to comply openly would repair more than they damage, and would be sceptical of anything that weakened the general habit of obedience beyond what this particular evil requires. A campaign to have the law repealed, and open refusal to comply with it meanwhile, satisfies him. An attempt to overthrow the State government does not.

Distinctions that carry marks

LockeGreen
Basis of the stateA trust created by consentThe common recognition of a common good
RightsNatural, held before the stateRecognised by society; there are no rights outside a community
FreedomAbsence of subjection to another's arbitrary willPositive: the capacity to do something worth doing, in common with others
The state's jobProtect life, liberty and estateMaintain the conditions of moral life; hinder the hindrances
Ground of resistanceBreach of the trustThe command destroys the conditions the state exists to secure
Limit on resistanceA long train of abusesThe effect on the whole social fabric must be weighed
Scope for welfare legislationNarrow; property is prior to the stateWide; obstacles to the good life may be removed by law
munotes.in197

T. H. Green on Resistance

What Green is NOT

He is not saying the state can do no wrong. The whole point of grounding obedience in a purpose is that the purpose can be betrayed.

He is not a defender of unlimited state power, though his positive conception of freedom has been criticised as opening the door to it. Berlin's critique at topic 3.1.1 is aimed at this family of theories, and a good answer notes the criticism without pretending Green held the view attacked.

"Will, not force" does not mean states do not use force. It means force cannot explain why they hold together.

He does not deny rights against the state. He denies that rights exist outside a community, which is a different claim, and one that has consequences he accepted: a person in a society that recognises no such claim has, on his view, no right, only a case for one being recognised.

Quick revision

  1. "Will, not force, is the basis of the state", section 113. Force cannot explain why a state holds together; common recognition of a common good can.
  2. Contract theory's error: it treats sovereign and subject apart, when they are correlative. Its truth: political society exists only through common recognition of a common good.
  3. Freedom is positive: the capacity to do or enjoy something worth doing, in common with others, and it is social, so it requires a society that recognises it.
  4. Rights are powers recognised by society as necessary to the common good. Without civil institutions one would not even have the idea of right that enables one to question authority.
  5. The state's function: maintain the conditions of a free exercise of human faculties; it cannot make people moral, only hinder the hindrances. This justifies wide welfare legislation.
  6. Resistance: justified where a command destroys the conditions the state exists to secure, but the effect on the whole social fabric must be weighed, and the case is easier where the authority of the command is itself doubtful.
munotes.in198

T. H. Green on Resistance

Test yourself

1. Explain Green's proposition that will, not force, is the basis of the state. That force can compel individuals but cannot explain why a political society holds together at all. What holds it together is the common recognition by its members of a common good, so that they will the arrangement rather than merely submit to it. Green adds that theories explaining obligation by contract err in the same direction as force theories, by treating sovereign and subject as separate pre-existing parties when the two are correlative, though contract theory expresses in a confused way the truth that society exists only through that common recognition.

2. What is Green's conception of freedom, and why is it social? Freedom is positive: not the absence of restraint but the actual power or capacity of doing or enjoying something worth doing or enjoying, and doing it in common with others. It is social because, on Green's argument, the desire for freedom in an individual is no real desire unless he belongs to a society that recognises it, and because without an authority embodied in civil institutions a person would not possess even the elementary idea of right that allows them to question authority.

3. What is the state's function on Green's account, and what follows? To maintain the conditions without which a free exercise of the human faculties is impossible. It cannot make anybody moral, because an act done under compulsion has no moral worth, so its work is to remove obstacles, which is usually summarised as hindering the hindrances to the good life. Two consequences follow: a wide power to legislate for welfare, including factory laws, compulsory education and public health; and a sharp limit, since a law that destroys the conditions of moral life acts against the ground of the state's own authority.

4. When does Green permit resistance? Where the sovereign's command destroys the conditions the state exists to secure, since the reason for obedience is then not outweighed but absent. He adds two qualifications. The effect on the whole social fabric must be weighed, because even a bad law forms part of a system that as a whole maintains the conditions of the good life, so resistance must repair more than it damages. And the case is easier where the legal authority of the command is itself doubtful, which he notes is common in states whose sovereignty was arrived at slowly by combination or by the conversion of feudal superiority.

5. How does Green's position differ from Locke's? Locke grounds the state in a trust created by consent, treats rights as natural and prior to the state, and permits resistance on breach of the trust after a long train of abuses. Green grounds it in the common recognition of a common good, treats rights as powers recognised by a society rather than as pre-existing possessions, conceives freedom positively as a capacity requiring society rather than negatively as the absence of interference, and permits resistance only where the command attacks the conditions of moral life and after weighing the damage to the whole social fabric. Green's theory therefore justifies far more welfare legislation and makes resistance harder.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in199

Chapter Forty-One

Harold Laski on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... Harlod Laski, ... (New)"

In one line

Laski says the state has to earn obedience: we obey it because of what it achieves, we are the judges of whether it is achieving it, and where it is being used for ends incompatible with its nature we are under a duty to resist.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Harold Laski holds that the state is not an end in itself but an organisation for enabling its members to realise themselves at their best; that power is always a trust held upon conditions, so that our obligation to obey depends on the degree to which the state achieves its purpose and we are the judges of that achievement; and that where the state's power is exercised for ends incompatible with its nature the civic outcome is a duty of resistance, exercisable only at the margins of political conduct and only where there is reasonable ground to believe the change sought will produce the end desired.

The starting point: the state is judged by what it does

Laski's whole position is contained in a passage a student should be able to state closely.

He argues that there is a difference between the purpose institutions embody and the substance they give to that purpose, and that our obligation to obey the State is, law apart, an obligation dependent upon the degree to which the State achieves its purpose. Then the sentence that makes him famous: "We are the judges of that achievement." We must obey the state, he says, not because its theoretic purpose is a splendid one, but because of our conviction that it is genuinely pursuing it.

Three things are packed in there.

Obligation is conditional. It is not owed to the state as such, and it does not follow from the state's existence. It follows from performance.

The condition is the state's purpose, which for Laski is that each member, in common with their fellows, may be themselves at their best.

The citizen is the judge. Not the government, not the courts, and not a theorist. The person subject to the decision assesses whether the state is doing its job.

Power is a trust, and scrutiny is a duty

Laski's second key passage develops this and adds an obligation most writers do not.

He says that power is always a trust, and it is always held upon conditions; that the will of the state is subject to the scrutiny of all who come within the ambit of its decisions; and that because it moulds the substance of their lives they have the right to pass judgment on the quality of its effort. Then he goes further: "They have, indeed, the duty so to pass judgment", because it is the plain lesson of the historic record that the wants of men will only secure recognition to the point that they are forcibly articulate.

munotes.in200

Harold Laski on Resistance

That last phrase carries the argument. A grievance which is not pressed is not met. Laski's citizen is therefore not merely permitted to criticise but required to, because a silent population's needs will simply not be recognised. This is the same observation Module I made about the second face of power, put as a civic duty.

He adds a sentence worth remembering: the State is not ourselves save where we identify ourselves with what it does. It becomes ourselves as it seeks to give expression to our wants and desires.

The duty of resistance

Laski states the conclusion and then immediately limits it, and an answer must give both halves.

The conclusion. Analysis of the state may ethically compel a person to seek its overthrow. If he holds that its power is being exercised not for the ends implied in its nature but for ends incompatible with them, then the civic outcome of such perception is the duty of resistance. His reason is the one already given: I am a member of the state in order that, in common with my fellows, I may be myself at my best.

The first limit. He says he ought not to resist if he is convinced that the state is seeking, as best it may, to play its part, and adds that for most people that conviction will be the result of whatever inquiry they undertake. Resistance is for the case where the state is not trying, not for the case where it is trying and failing.

The second limit. He ought not to resist unless he has reasonable ground for the belief that the changes he advocates are likely to result in the end he has in view. Resistance that cannot succeed is not justified merely by the grievance.

The third limit. Elsewhere Laski puts the same point structurally: if the state is to be a moral entity it must be built upon the organised acquiescence of its members, and that demands their scrutiny of government orders, which in turn implies a right to disobedience. But, he says, such a right is reasonably exercised only at the margins of political conduct, because no community could fulfil its purpose if rebellion became a settled habit of the population.

And the corresponding limit on the state. In the same passage he insists that equally, no community could fulfil its purpose unless the will of its government were limited in a variety of ways: it must answer at stated periods to those from whom it derives its powers, and it must be powerless to touch certain fundamentals, of which freedom of speech is the supreme example, without which the benefits of social life will not be had.

munotes.in201

Harold Laski on Resistance

Read those two together and Laski's system appears. A right to disobey at the margins, balanced by institutional limits on government, of which periodic elections and free speech are the two he names. A student who gives both halves has given Laski accurately.

The pluralist background

Laski's earlier work is pluralist, and one passage in the Grammar shows the idea at work on authority generally. Quoting Father Tyrrell, he writes that it is not their red robes but one's own judgment about them that gives a body of cardinals any title to distinction; the phrase he draws from it is that the authority of any group rests on the living and spontaneous trust it can command, and that if it betrays or stultifies itself it ceases to win the loyalty that is its life.

That is Laski's general theory of authority in one line, and it applies to the state exactly as it applies to a church: authority is not a possession but a standing achievement.

What Laski notices about ordinary citizens

He is not sentimental about the citizen he is empowering. He observes that people are conscious of their neighbours and rarely grasp that their neighbours are in truth the whole world; that they set their wills by the wills of institutions they rarely explore; that they obey the orders of government from inertia; and that even their resistance is too often a blind resentment rather than a reasoned desire to secure an alternative. The characteristic of social life, he says, is the unthinking obedience of the many to the will of the few.

This matters for an answer, because it shows Laski's duty to scrutinise is a demand made against the ordinary tendency, not a description of it. He knows most people do not do it. That is why he calls it a duty.

A worked example

A government facing an economic crisis suspends the publication of official statistics, postpones local elections for two years, and prohibits public discussion of the crisis in broadcast media.

Apply the first test. Is the state seeking, as best it may, to play its part? A government may make bad economic decisions while genuinely trying, and Laski says one ought not to resist in that case. But suspending statistics, postponing elections and prohibiting discussion are not economic decisions at all; they are measures directed at the citizens' capacity to judge.

So the condition is engaged. Power is being exercised for an end incompatible with the state's nature, because the state's purpose is that members may be themselves at their best, and that requires knowing what is happening and being able to say so.

munotes.in202

Harold Laski on Resistance

And notice which limits are hit. Laski names two fundamentals: answering at stated periods to those from whom power derives, and freedom of speech. Both have been touched.

Apply the second test. Is there reasonable ground to believe that resistance will produce the change sought? If organised public pressure has previously forced this government to reverse decisions, yes. If the state is in a position to ignore any protest indefinitely, Laski's own condition is not met, and his answer is uncomfortable but honest: the grievance is real and resistance is not thereby justified.

Apply the third. Resistance belongs at the margins. Refusing to comply with the prohibition on discussion, publicly and with the consequences accepted, is at the margin. An attempt to bring down the state is not.

Distinctions that carry marks

GreenLaski
Basis of obligationCommon recognition of a common goodThe degree to which the state achieves its purpose
Who judgesThe society, through recognitionWe are the judges of that achievement
Scrutiny isImpliedAn express duty, because wants are met only when forcibly articulate
Resistance isA right, weighed against the social fabricA duty, where power is used for incompatible ends
LimitsEffect on the whole fabricState must be trying; success must be likely; resistance only at the margins
Institutional guarantees namedNot the focusPeriodic answerability, and freedom of speech

What Laski is NOT

He is not an anarchist. He requires organised acquiescence and says explicitly that no community could fulfil its purpose if rebellion became a settled habit.

He is not saying you may disobey whenever you disagree. The state must be failing to try, and the resistance must be likely to work.

"We are the judges" is not a claim about courts. He means the citizens subject to the decision.

He is not describing how people behave. He records that people obey from inertia and resist from blind resentment. His duty of scrutiny is set against that, not derived from it.

Quick revision

  1. "Our obligation to obey the State is, law apart, an obligation dependent upon the degree to which the State achieves its purpose. We are the judges of that achievement."
  2. Power is always a trust, held upon conditions, and those within the ambit of its decisions have not only the right but the duty to pass judgment on the quality of its effort, because wants secure recognition only so far as they are forcibly articulate.
  3. The State is not ourselves save where we identify ourselves with what it does.
  4. The duty of resistance arises where power is exercised for ends incompatible with the state's nature.
  5. Three limits: do not resist a state that is genuinely trying; do not resist without reasonable ground to believe the change will follow; exercise the right only at the margins of political conduct.
  6. The matching limits on government: it must answer at stated periods to those from whom it derives its powers, and must be powerless to touch fundamentals, of which freedom of speech is the supreme example.
  7. Authority rests on living and spontaneous trust, and a body that betrays itself ceases to win the loyalty that is its life.
munotes.in203

Harold Laski on Resistance

Test yourself

1. On what does Laski say political obligation depends? On performance. He holds that our obligation to obey the state is, law apart, dependent on the degree to which the state achieves its purpose, that purpose being that each member, in common with their fellows, may be themselves at their best. We obey not because the state's theoretical purpose is a splendid one but because we are convinced it is genuinely pursuing it, and, in his own words, we are the judges of that achievement.

2. Why does Laski describe scrutiny of government as a duty rather than a right? Because power is always a trust held upon conditions and the will of the state is subject to the scrutiny of all whose lives it moulds, which gives them a right to judge the quality of its effort. He then says they have the duty so to judge, and gives the reason from history: the wants of men secure recognition only to the extent that they are forcibly articulate. A grievance never pressed is never met, so silence is not neutral, and a citizen who does not scrutinise fails not only themselves but everybody whose needs go unrecognised.

3. When does Laski say a duty of resistance arises, and what limits does he place on it? It arises where a person holds that the state's power is being exercised not for the ends implied in its nature but for ends incompatible with them. He limits it three ways. One ought not to resist a state that is seeking, as best it may, to play its part. One ought not to resist without reasonable ground for believing the changes advocated will produce the end sought. And the right of disobedience is reasonably exercised only at the margins of political conduct, since no community could fulfil its purpose if rebellion became a settled habit of the population.

4. What limits does Laski place on government, and why do they belong with the duty of resistance? That it must answer at stated periods to those from whom it derives its powers, and that it must be powerless to touch certain fundamentals, of which he names freedom of speech as the supreme example, without which the benefits of social life will not in practice be had. They belong with the duty of resistance because they are what make the duty ordinarily unnecessary: a government that must face the electorate and cannot silence criticism can be corrected without anybody disobeying anything.

munotes.in204

Harold Laski on Resistance

5. What does Laski observe about ordinary citizens, and why does it matter? That they are conscious of their neighbours and rarely grasp that their neighbours are in truth the whole world; that they set their wills by the wills of institutions they rarely examine; that they obey government orders from inertia; and that their resistance is too often blind resentment rather than a reasoned desire for an alternative, the characteristic of social life being the unthinking obedience of the many to the will of the few. It matters because it shows his duty of scrutiny is a demand made against the ordinary tendency rather than a description of it, which is precisely why he states it as a duty.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in205

Chapter Forty-Two

M. K. Gandhi on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... M. K. Gandhi, ... (New)"

In one line

Gandhi's answer is that obeying an unjust law is itself a form of taking part in the injustice, and that the way out is to disobey openly and take the punishment, which he calls using soul-force instead of body-force.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Gandhi holds that a law is not entitled to obedience merely because a legislature made it; that a citizen who complies with a law repugnant to conscience is a partner in the wrong it does; that the remedy is passive resistance, which he defines as a method of securing rights by personal suffering and describes as the reverse of resistance by arms; and that the disobedient must accept the penalty for the breach, since it is the willingness to suffer, and not the breach itself, that constitutes the force of the method.

The passage that carries the topic

In chapter 17 of Hind Swaraj the Reader asks the Editor to explain passive resistance, and the answer is the text to know.

"Passive resistance is a method of securing rights by personal suffering; it is the reverse of resistance by arms."

Then the worked distinction, in Gandhi's own words. When I refuse to do a thing that is repugnant to my conscience, I use soul-force. Suppose the Government of the day has passed a law which is applicable to me, and I do not like it. If by using violence I force the Government to repeal the law, I am employing what may be termed body-force. If I do not obey the law and accept the penalty for its breach, I use soul-force. It involves sacrifice of self.

Read that carefully, because it contains the entire doctrine and students routinely lose half of it. There are two ways of not complying, and only one of them is Gandhi's. Forcing the repeal is body-force. Disobeying and taking the punishment is soul-force. The penalty is not an unfortunate consequence of the method; it is the method.

The four propositions

1. A law's provenance does not settle its claim. Gandhi rejects the idea that a legislature's enactment is by itself a reason for a person to act against conscience. The law's claim on me is not established by the fact that somebody with power passed it.

2. Obedience to an unjust law is participation in it. This is the moral premise. A tax paid to an unjust regime funds it; a rule complied with is a rule that works. The person who obeys quietly is not neutral, and cannot regard the injustice as somebody else's doing.

3. The remedy is refusal plus suffering. Refusal alone is defiance; refusal with acceptance of the penalty is soul-force. The suffering is what communicates, because it demonstrates that the resister is not acting out of self-interest and that they have counted the cost.

munotes.in206

M. K. Gandhi on Resistance

4. The means and the end are inseparable. Gandhi's most distinctive philosophical claim, developed further at topic 3.4.3. There is, he says, the same inviolable connection between the means and the end as between the seed and the tree. A just society cannot be reached by unjust means, so violence is excluded not merely because it is wrong but because it cannot produce what is wanted.

Why non-violence, on his own arguments

The moral argument. Violence injures the person it is aimed at, and it injures the person who uses it. It also assumes that the user is certainly right, and human beings are not entitled to that certainty when the cost of error is another person's life.

The argument from means and ends. A movement that wins by violence has trained itself in violence and will govern by it.

The practical argument, which is often forgotten. Non-violence deprives the government of the one thing it is best equipped to answer. A state has overwhelming superiority in force; meeting it with force plays to its strength and supplies it with the justification it needs. Meeting it with disciplined non-violence forces it either to concede or to be seen using force against people offering none.

Gandhi's chapter 16 is titled "Brute Force", and he treats history's record of violence as the record of what has failed to change anything fundamental. Later, writing about the book in 1921, he described it as teaching the gospel of love in place of that of hate, replacing violence with self-sacrifice, and pitting soul force against brute force, and said he withdrew nothing from it except one word.

The conditions Gandhi imposes on the resister

This is where his account is strictest, and an answer that gives the conditions distinguishes itself.

Truthfulness. The resister's case must be stated honestly, including the parts that help the other side. Satyagraha is from satya, truth.

Non-violence in act, word and thought. Not merely refraining from blows.

No hatred of the opponent. The object is to convert, not to defeat. Gandhi's opponent is to be won over and remains a person to be reasoned with.

Openness. Nothing secret. Notice given in advance, including to the authorities.

Acceptance of the penalty, cheerfully and without evasion, which is the definition above.

Self-purification and discipline, because a person who cannot control themselves cannot conduct a campaign that depends on absorbing provocation.

Willingness to suffer, and to lose. The resister must be prepared for the campaign to fail and to bear the cost anyway.

munotes.in207

M. K. Gandhi on Resistance

Exhaustion of other means. Petition, negotiation and arbitration first.

The criticisms

It requires a conscience in the opponent. Non-violent resistance works by appealing to something in the other side and in the watching public. Against a regime that is indifferent to opinion and prepared to kill without the fact becoming known, the method has nothing to work on. This is the criticism Mandela's chapter takes up directly.

It is slow, and the cost falls on the victims. The people who suffer are the resisters, who are usually the people already suffering.

It can be used by anybody. A technique of moral pressure is available to unjust causes too, and Gandhi's insistence on truth is a moral requirement rather than a built-in safeguard.

Ambedkar's objection, which an Indian answer should include. Ambedkar disputed both the method and the priority. He argued that for the most oppressed the problem was not a foreign government but the social order at home, that a technique of moral appeal to those who benefit from a hierarchy leaves the hierarchy's beneficiaries in charge of when to concede, and that legal and constitutional guarantees are a surer protection than another person's conscience. That disagreement is set out at topic 4.3.1 on the village, and it applies here too.

Its scale is uncertain. Gandhi's campaigns worked with mass participation, sustained organisation and a press that reported them. Whether the method transfers to conditions lacking any of those three is genuinely disputed.

A worked example

A municipality requires every street vendor in a market to obtain a licence, and then issues licences only to vendors who can produce ten years of documentary proof of trading, which excludes almost every woman vendor in the market because the receipts were always issued in a male relative's name.

Gandhi's analysis. The rule is repugnant to conscience because it takes a livelihood from people on a ground unconnected with anything they did. A vendor who complies, stops trading and goes home has not merely suffered the injustice; she has helped it work.

Body-force would be to occupy the municipal office and prevent it functioning, or to resist the officers who come to clear the stalls.

Soul-force is to continue trading without the licence, having written to the Commissioner in advance stating exactly what will be done and why, to offer no resistance when the stalls are removed or when arrests are made, to state the case truthfully in court, and to accept the fine or the imprisonment without seeking to avoid it.

Watch what the acceptance of the penalty does. It removes the accusation of self-interest, because the vendor is paying rather than gaining. It makes the injustice visible, because the spectacle is now of women being prosecuted for selling vegetables. And it keeps the movement inside a frame the public can support, which a riot would not.

munotes.in208

M. K. Gandhi on Resistance

And watch the conditions bite. If the vendors had first refused to negotiate with the Commissioner, Gandhi's requirement that other means be exhausted is not met. If the campaign hides its plans, the requirement of openness fails. If a vendor pays a bribe to avoid the fine, the method has been abandoned at the point where it does its work.

Distinctions that carry marks

Body-forceSoul-force
MethodCompelling the government to yieldRefusing, and bearing the penalty
Who suffersThe opponentThe resister
What it appeals toFearConscience, and public opinion
Relation of means to endDifferent in kindThe same in kind
If it succeedsThe victors have learned to use forceThe victors have learned to suffer for a principle
Gandhi's word for itBrute force, chapter 16 of Hind SwarajPassive resistance, chapter 17

What Gandhi is NOT saying

He is not saying disobey any law you dislike. The law must be repugnant to conscience, other means must have been tried, and the resister must satisfy every condition above.

Passive resistance is not passive. Gandhi disliked the English phrase for that reason and eventually preferred satyagraha. It is an active method that involves initiating a breach and bearing the consequences.

It is not a claim that suffering is good in itself. The suffering is instrumental: it communicates, and it excludes the suspicion of self-interest.

It is not compatible with escaping the penalty. A resister who evades arrest or pays a bribe has substituted evasion for soul-force, which is the one thing the method cannot survive.

Quick revision

  1. The definition: "Passive resistance is a method of securing rights by personal suffering; it is the reverse of resistance by arms."
  2. The distinction, in his own words: forcing repeal by violence is body-force; not obeying the law and accepting the penalty for its breach is soul-force, and it involves sacrifice of self.
  3. Four propositions: a law's provenance does not settle its claim; obeying an unjust law is participation in it; the remedy is refusal plus suffering; and means and ends are inseparable.
  4. Three arguments for non-violence: moral, the means and ends argument, and the practical one that force plays to the state's strength while non-violence removes its justification.
  5. Conditions: truth, non-violence in act and word and thought, no hatred of the opponent, openness including notice to the authorities, acceptance of the penalty, self-discipline, willingness to lose, and exhaustion of other means.
  6. Criticisms: it needs a conscience in the opponent and a watching public; it is slow and the cost falls on the victims; it is available to unjust causes; Ambedkar's objection that constitutional guarantees are surer than another person's conscience; and its dependence on scale, organisation and a reporting press.
munotes.in209

M. K. Gandhi on Resistance

Test yourself

1. Give Gandhi's definition of passive resistance and the distinction he draws with it. He defines passive resistance as a method of securing rights by personal suffering, and says it is the reverse of resistance by arms. The distinction is between two ways of not complying with a law one dislikes: if by using violence one forces the Government to repeal it, one employs what may be termed body-force; if one does not obey the law and accepts the penalty for its breach, one uses soul-force, and it involves sacrifice of self. The acceptance of the penalty is not a consequence of the method but is the method.

2. Why does Gandhi say obedience to an unjust law is not neutral? Because a law works only through the compliance of those subject to it. A tax paid funds the regime, a rule complied with is a rule that operates, and a person who quietly obeys has supplied the injustice with what it needs to continue. On this view the quiet citizen is a partner in the wrong rather than a bystander to it, which is what converts the question from what one may permissibly do into what one is already doing.

3. Set out Gandhi's arguments for non-violence. The moral argument, that violence injures both the person it is aimed at and the person who uses it, and presumes a certainty about being right that no human being is entitled to when the price of error is a life. The means and ends argument, that there is the same inviolable connection between means and end as between seed and tree, so a movement that wins by violence will govern by it. And the practical argument, that a state has overwhelming superiority in force, so meeting it with force plays to its strength and supplies its justification, while disciplined non-violence leaves it the choice of conceding or being seen to use force against people offering none.

4. What conditions must a Gandhian resister satisfy? Truthfulness, including about what helps the other side. Non-violence in act, word and thought. Absence of hatred, since the object is to convert the opponent rather than defeat them. Openness, with notice given in advance to the authorities. Acceptance of the penalty without evasion. Self-purification and discipline, since the method depends on absorbing provocation. Willingness to suffer and to lose. And the exhaustion of petition, negotiation and arbitration first.

5. State the strongest criticisms of Gandhi's method. That it depends on a conscience in the opponent and on a watching public, so it has nothing to work on against a regime indifferent to opinion and able to kill unobserved. That it is slow and loads the cost onto the resisters, who are usually those already suffering. That it is a technique available to unjust causes as much as just ones, truthfulness being a moral requirement rather than a safeguard built into it. And Ambedkar's objection, that a method of moral appeal leaves the beneficiaries of a hierarchy in charge of when to concede, so that legal and constitutional guarantees are a surer protection for the oppressed than another person's conscience.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in210

Chapter Forty-Three

Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... Martin Luther King Jr ... (New)"

In one line

King's contribution is a test for telling a just law from an unjust one, and a defence of breaking the unjust one openly while professing the highest respect for law itself.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Martin Luther King Jr defended civil disobedience on the ground that an unjust law is no law in the moral sense, offering a test by which a just law uplifts human personality while an unjust law degrades it, that an unjust law is one a majority imposes on a minority which it does not make binding on itself, and that a law is unjust where those bound by it had no part in enacting it; and he insisted that one who breaks an unjust law must do so openly, lovingly and with a willingness to accept the penalty, which is the highest respect for law.

The situation the argument arose in

King wrote in April 1963 from a cell in Birmingham, Alabama, where he had been arrested for taking part in a demonstration against racial segregation in breach of a court injunction. The letter answers a public statement by eight local clergymen who agreed that segregation was wrong but urged that the campaign was untimely, that the courts should be used instead of the streets, and that outsiders should not have come.

That is worth stating, because it explains the shape of the argument. King is not answering a defender of segregation. He is answering people who agreed with his goal and objected to his method, which is exactly the objection every student instinctively makes, and it is why the letter is on so many syllabuses.

The four steps of a campaign

King describes non-violent direct action as a disciplined sequence, and this is the part most easily reproduced accurately.

1. Collection of the facts to determine whether injustices are alive.

2. Negotiation with those in a position to remedy them.

3. Self-purification, in which those who will take part train themselves, ask whether they can endure being struck without striking back and being jailed without bitterness, and withdraw if they cannot.

4. Direct action, only after the first three have been done.

Notice the resemblance to Gandhi's conditions, which is not accidental: King had studied Gandhi's campaigns closely and said so. The differences are that King's sequence is stated as an organisational method for a movement, and that self-purification is a formal stage with a test attached.

The tests for an unjust law

This is the most examinable material in the chapter, and there are four tests.

1. The moral test. A just law squares with the moral law; an unjust law is out of harmony with it. Any law that uplifts human personality is just; any law that degrades human personality is unjust.

munotes.in211

Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance

2. The reciprocity test. An unjust law is a code that a majority group compels a minority group to obey but does not make binding on itself. A just law is a code that a majority compels a minority to follow and that it is willing to follow itself. This is the test that does the most work, because it can be applied without agreeing about morality: you simply ask whether the rule-makers exempted themselves.

3. The participation test. A law is unjust if it is inflicted on a minority that had no part in enacting it, because it was denied the vote. King ties this directly to the disenfranchisement of Black voters in the segregated South, and the point generalises: a rule imposed on people excluded from the process that produced it lacks the one justification otherwise available.

4. The application test. A law that is just on its face may be unjust in application. A statute requiring a permit for a parade is unobjectionable in itself and becomes unjust when it is used to deny the permit to one group in order to prevent it from protesting.

The fourth test is the one students most often omit and the one a good Indian answer can use immediately, because in India the challenge to a law is very often that it is neutral in terms and discriminatory in operation.

How an unjust law must be broken

King's answer to the accusation of lawlessness is the passage the syllabus is really after, and it has three parts.

Openly. Not evasively or in secret.

Lovingly, meaning without hatred of the opponent, and with the willingness to keep dealing with them afterwards.

With a willingness to accept the penalty. The person who breaks an unjust law and willingly accepts imprisonment in order to arouse the conscience of the community is, King argues, expressing the very highest respect for law.

That last proposition is the answer to the whole objection. The civil disobedient is not saying that law does not matter. They are saying that this law is not entitled to obedience, and they prove that they still hold the legal order in respect by submitting to its penalty rather than escaping it.

Two things King says that are easily missed

On the moderate. King says the movement's most difficult obstacle was not the outright opponent of desegregation but the moderate who preferred order to justice, who preferred a negative peace in which there was an absence of tension to a positive peace in which justice is present, and who kept advising the movement to wait for a more convenient season. That criticism is aimed at people of goodwill, and it is what makes the letter uncomfortable to read.

munotes.in212

Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance

On tension. King accepts openly that non-violent direct action creates tension, and argues that it is meant to. The tension it creates is not violence; it is the constructive, non-violent tension that forces a community that has consistently refused to negotiate to confront the issue. He distinguishes that from the violent tension the movement was accused of causing.

The Beloved Community

MU has asked this term directly, so it is worth a paragraph of its own.

What it names. The beloved community is King's expression for the end that non-violent struggle is aimed at: a reconciled and integrated society in which the opponent has been won over rather than defeated. It is the answer to the question of what the movement wanted after the unjust laws had gone.

Why the method follows from the goal. Because the aim is reconciliation and redemption rather than victory, the means cannot be the humiliation or defeat of the opponent. Non-violence attacks the evil and not the person doing it, so that the two can live together afterwards. King's contrast is that the aftermath of non-violence is the creation of the beloved community, while the aftermath of violence is bitterness.

Why it is not sentimental. It does not mean the absence of conflict, which is precisely the negative peace King attacked in the passage above. Getting there requires the tension that forces negotiation, so the beloved community is the destination of confrontation rather than an alternative to it.

Where it connects. It is the point at which King is closest to Gandhi, whose satyagraha likewise aims at converting the opponent rather than coercing them, and furthest from the arguments at chapter 440, where Mandela concluded that a state which had closed every peaceful channel could not be reached by appeal alone.

The criticisms

It requires an audience with a conscience. Like Gandhi's method, King's depends on the wrong being seen and on the watching public being capable of shame. Where the media does not report and the public does not care, the method has nothing to work on.

Who decides which law is unjust? If each person applies King's tests for themselves, the objection is that the legal order becomes a matter of individual assessment. King's answer is his insistence on accepting the penalty: the disobedient is not exempting themselves from the law's operation, only from its moral claim, and the community's response through the courts remains.

The moderate's objection is not absurd. The clergymen's point, that a legal remedy was available and should be used, is exactly the condition this book has stressed throughout. King's answer is factual: the legal route had been tried for years and had produced desegregation on paper and not in Birmingham. The strength of his answer therefore depends on the facts, which is the right place for it to depend.

munotes.in213

Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance

It is easier to state than to satisfy. The self-purification stage is demanding, and a movement that skips it produces the violence it disclaims.

A worked example

A municipal corporation makes a rule that no person may sleep in a public place at night, and enforces it only against people living on the pavements in one part of the city, while the same conduct at a festival or a public celebration is never proceeded against.

Test 1. Does it uplift or degrade? A rule whose enforcement takes away the only place a person has to sleep degrades.

Test 2. Do the rule-makers accept it themselves? They are not affected by it at all, and could not be. That is the reciprocity test failing.

Test 3. Did the affected group take part in making it? Pavement dwellers are among the least represented people in any municipal process, and many are migrants without a local vote.

Test 4. Is the application discriminatory? The rule is neutral on its face and is enforced against one group only. King's fourth test is satisfied on its own.

And how it would be resisted. Openly, with prior notice; without hostility to the officers enforcing it; with the participants prepared to be arrested and not to resist arrest; and with the penalty accepted rather than evaded. Notice that in India there is also a strong legal challenge available on the same facts, so King's own sequence would require negotiation and the legal route first, and only then direct action.

Distinctions that carry marks

GandhiKing
Central termSatyagraha, soul-forceNon-violent direct action
Test for an unjust lawRepugnant to conscienceFour tests: degrades personality; not binding on the majority; imposed on the unrepresented; unjust in application
SequencePetition, negotiation, then satyagraha, with self-purificationFacts, negotiation, self-purification, direct action
Attitude to tensionTo be borneDeliberately created, as constructive non-violent tension
PenaltyAccepted; it is the methodAccepted; it expresses the highest respect for law
Chief obstacle identifiedThe opponent's blindnessThe moderate who prefers order to justice

What King is NOT saying

He is not saying law does not matter. His claim is the opposite: accepting the penalty is what shows respect for law.

He is not licensing evasion. Secret breach is excluded by the requirement of openness.

"Unjust law is no law" is used morally, not technically. King is not making the jurisprudential claim that such a rule fails to exist as law; he is saying it lacks moral claim, which is why he still expects to be punished under it.

munotes.in214

Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance

He is not saying negotiation is pointless. It is step two of his own sequence, and his argument is that it had been tried and had failed on these facts.

Quick revision

  1. The setting: Birmingham, April 1963, answering clergymen who agreed with the goal and objected to the method as untimely.
  2. Four steps: collection of the facts; negotiation; self-purification; direct action.
  3. Four tests for an unjust law: it degrades human personality; it is a code the majority imposes on a minority without binding itself; it is inflicted on those denied a part in enacting it; and it is just on its face and unjust in application.
  4. How to break it: openly, lovingly, and with a willingness to accept the penalty, which expresses the highest respect for law.
  5. The moderate: preferring a negative peace, the absence of tension, to a positive peace in which justice is present, and always advising the movement to wait.
  6. Tension is deliberate, and is constructive and non-violent, aimed at a community that has refused to negotiate.
  7. Criticisms: it needs an audience with a conscience; it puts the identification of unjust laws in individual hands, answered by the acceptance of the penalty; and the moderate's objection stands wherever an effective legal remedy really is available.

Test yourself

1. Give King's tests for distinguishing a just from an unjust law. First, the moral test: a just law uplifts human personality and an unjust law degrades it. Second, the reciprocity test: an unjust law is a code a majority compels a minority to obey while not making it binding on itself, and this test can be applied without agreement about morality by asking whether the makers exempted themselves. Third, the participation test: a law is unjust if inflicted on a minority that had no part in enacting it, having been denied the vote. Fourth, the application test: a law just on its face becomes unjust when used against one group, as with a parade permit requirement applied to deny a permit only to those protesting.

2. What are the four steps of a non-violent campaign, and what does self-purification involve? Collection of the facts to determine whether injustices are alive; negotiation with those able to remedy them; self-purification; and direct action, which is undertaken only after the first three. Self-purification is a formal stage in which the participants train and test themselves, asking whether they are able to endure being struck without striking back and to accept imprisonment without bitterness, and withdrawing if they cannot, since a movement that omits this stage produces the violence it disclaims.

munotes.in215

Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance

3. How does King answer the charge that civil disobedience is lawlessness? By the manner of the breach. One who breaks an unjust law must do so openly rather than evasively, lovingly rather than with hatred of the opponent, and with a willingness to accept the penalty. A person who breaks such a law and willingly accepts imprisonment in order to arouse the conscience of the community is, on his argument, expressing the very highest respect for law, because they deny the moral claim of one rule while submitting to the legal order's response rather than escaping it.

4. What did King say about the moderate, and why is it uncomfortable? That the movement's greatest obstacle was not the outright segregationist but the moderate who preferred order to justice, who preferred a negative peace consisting in the absence of tension to a positive peace in which justice is present, and who constantly advised waiting for a more convenient season. It is uncomfortable because it is directed at people of goodwill who agree with the goal, and because the advice to wait is exactly what a reasonable and sympathetic person is most likely to give.

5. Compare King and Gandhi. Both require non-violence, prior negotiation, self-discipline and acceptance of the penalty, and King had studied Gandhi's campaigns closely. King's distinctive additions are a set of four testable criteria for identifying an unjust law, of which the reciprocity and participation tests can be applied without moral agreement; the express embrace of constructive, non-violent tension as the object of direct action rather than as its unfortunate consequence; and the identification of the sympathetic moderate, rather than the opponent, as the principal obstacle.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in216

Chapter Forty-Four

Nelson Mandela on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... Nelson Mandela (New)"

In one line

Mandela's argument is that non-violence is a tactic rather than a principle, that a government which answers peaceful protest with force and closes every lawful channel leaves its opponents no other means, and that the responsibility for the turn to force lies with the government that closed the channels.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Nelson Mandela defended the decision to abandon exclusively non-violent methods on the ground that fifty years of constitutional and peaceful struggle had produced only more repressive legislation and fewer rights; that the government met peaceful demands with force and outlawed the organisations pressing them; that in those conditions continued non-violence would have been a passive submission to a permanent state of inferiority; and that violence directed at property and at the machinery of the state, and calculated to avoid loss of life, was the least destructive of the alternatives remaining.

The situation

Mandela was tried at Rivonia in 1963 and 1964 with others, on charges arising from sabotage and from the activities of Umkhonto we Sizwe, the organisation formed to carry it out. He faced the death penalty. Rather than deny the acts, he made a long statement from the dock in which he set out why the decision had been taken and accepted personal responsibility for it. He was sentenced to life imprisonment and served twenty-seven years.

The context that matters for this topic is the legal one. Apartheid was not lawlessness. It was a comprehensive body of legislation: statutes classifying people by race, allocating land by race, requiring passes, prohibiting mixed marriages, reserving occupations, and removing the franchise. That is what makes the case central to a module on unjust laws. Everything Mandela objected to had been validly enacted by a parliament.

The argument, in five steps

1. The struggle began, and long remained, non-violent. Mandela's account emphasises that the movement had for decades used petitions, deputations, strikes, boycotts and defiance campaigns in which volunteers deliberately broke unjust laws and submitted to arrest, which is exactly the technique of the two previous chapters.

2. Peaceful methods were met with force and with more law. Demonstrations were fired on; leaders were banned, restricted and imprisoned; and the response to each campaign was fresh legislation making the next one an offence. The organisations themselves were declared unlawful, which removed even the possibility of lawful political activity.

3. Non-violence was a tactic, not a creed. This is the point on which Mandela differs from Gandhi and the point an answer must state clearly. For Gandhi, non-violence is a principle bound up with truth and with the relation of means to ends. For Mandela it was a method, adopted because it was thought effective, and to be reconsidered when it ceased to be. When the government's response made peaceful protest impossible, continuing it would have been not a moral stand but an acceptance of permanent subjection.

munotes.in217

Nelson Mandela on Resistance

4. The choice was not whether there would be violence but what form it would take. Mandela's argument is that violence was already occurring, in spontaneous outbreaks by people with no organisation and no discipline, and that it would grow. A controlled campaign directed at chosen targets was, on this reasoning, less destructive than the terrorism or civil war that unorganised anger would produce.

5. Sabotage was chosen precisely because it was the least destructive option. The four forms considered were sabotage, guerrilla warfare, terrorism and open revolution. Sabotage was selected because it damages installations, communications and the economy rather than people, because it could be undertaken without loss of life, and because it left open the possibility of relations between the races afterwards. Instructions were given that no life was to be taken.

The moral structure of the argument. Mandela does not claim that violence is good, or that the ordinary presumption against it is weak. He claims that the presumption was overcome, states exactly what was tried before, names the alternatives considered and why the least destructive was chosen, and accepts the legal consequence in a court. That structure is what makes it an argument rather than an excuse, and it is what a student should be able to set out.

What Mandela shares with Gandhi and King

More than students expect, and an answer that notices it is a better answer.

Openness and acceptance of consequences. He did not deny the acts. He explained them in open court, on the record, at the risk of his life, and served the sentence.

Discipline. The instruction that no life be taken is the counterpart of King's self-purification stage: a rule imposed on the participants to keep the campaign within limits.

The opponent remains a person. Mandela's insistence that the aim was a shared future, not the expulsion or destruction of any group, is why the later negotiated transition was possible at all.

Exhaustion of lawful means. The first two steps of his argument are precisely the condition Gandhi and King both require, and his case rests on being able to show that it was satisfied over half a century.

Where he departs, and why it matters

Non-violence as tactic against non-violence as principle. This is the central difference and the source of every other.

Who bears responsibility. Gandhi holds the resister responsible for the means they choose. Mandela argues that the government which closed every lawful channel bears responsibility for what its opponents were left with.

munotes.in218

Nelson Mandela on Resistance

The role of the audience. Gandhi's and King's methods work by appealing to the conscience of the opponent and of the watching public. Mandela's argument implicitly reports that this had been tried and had failed: a government prepared to legislate away every peaceful avenue is not one that non-violence can shame.

This is the single most important criticism of the two previous chapters, and it comes from the case itself rather than from a theorist. The Gandhian method requires an opponent with a conscience and a public capable of shame. Mandela's evidence was that neither existed in his situation.

The criticisms of Mandela's position

An answer should give these, because the topic is set to be argued rather than admired.

Where does the argument stop? If a movement may turn to force once it concludes that lawful means have failed, the judgment of failure is made by the movement itself, and every violent group makes exactly that claim. The answer has to lie in verifiable conditions rather than in sincerity: how long, what was tried, what was closed, and what limits were imposed on the force used.

Violence rarely stays where it is aimed. A campaign restricted to property may become something else, and the discipline that holds it depends on leadership that can be arrested.

Gandhi's reply would be available. That the means shape the end, and that a movement trained in force will govern by it. Mandela's own later conduct is the strongest evidence against that particular prediction, which is worth saying, but the prediction is not absurd and has often been borne out elsewhere.

It cannot be generalised from. Apartheid closed every avenue: no vote, no lawful organisation, no free press for the affected population, no court able to strike down the legislation. Very few situations are like that, and a movement in a constitutional order with an independent judiciary cannot claim the same premises.

A worked example

Compare three situations that look similar and are not.

A group protesting a discriminatory municipal rule in India. It has the vote, a free press, a lawful right to organise and assemble, and a court that can strike the rule down. Mandela's own reasoning does not license force here, because his first two steps cannot be established: the channels are open. On his argument as much as on Gandhi's, the lawful route and open civil disobedience are what is available.

A group in a state that has banned its organisation, jailed its leaders and criminalised its assemblies, but where courts still function and the press still reports. Some channels are closed and some remain. Mandela's argument is engaged and not concluded, because the remaining channels have to be shown to be ineffective and not merely difficult.

munotes.in219

Nelson Mandela on Resistance

A population denied the vote entirely, whose organisations are outlawed, whose protests are fired on, and whose grievances no court is competent to hear. This is the Rivonia premise, and it is rare.

The lesson to write. Mandela's argument is powerful precisely because its premises are demanding. It is not a general licence, and using it as one misreads it. The right question is never "was the cause just?" but "were the channels in fact closed, and what was done before they were said to be?".

Distinctions that carry marks

GandhiKingMandela
Non-violence isA principle, tied to truth and to means and endsA principle and a methodA tactic, to be reconsidered when it fails
What the opponent is assumed to haveA conscienceA conscience, and a watching publicNeither, on the evidence
Who is responsible for violenceThe person who uses itThe person who uses itThe government that closed the channels
TargetNever personsNever personsProperty and installations; no life to be taken
PenaltyAcceptedAccepted, as the highest respect for lawAccepted: he stood trial and served the sentence
What licenses the stepNothing licenses violenceNothing licenses violenceExhaustion of all lawful means over decades

What Mandela's position is NOT

It is not a rejection of non-violence in principle. He describes decades of non-violent struggle and says it was abandoned only when it had been made impossible.

It is not terrorism. The distinction he draws is explicit: sabotage was chosen over terrorism and guerrilla warfare precisely because it was aimed at property rather than people.

It is not a general licence for armed struggle. Its premises are unusually strong and are rarely satisfied.

It is not inconsistent with accepting the law's response. He made his case in court and served twenty-seven years, which is the one feature he shares with Gandhi and King exactly.

Quick revision

  1. Rivonia, 1963 to 1964. Mandela did not deny the acts; he explained them from the dock, facing the death penalty, and was sentenced to life imprisonment, serving twenty-seven years.
  2. Apartheid was legislation, validly enacted, which is why the case belongs to a module on unjust laws.
  3. Five steps: the struggle was long non-violent; it was met with force and with more law; non-violence was a tactic and not a creed; the choice was about the form violence would take, not whether; and sabotage was chosen as the least destructive of four options, with instructions that no life be taken.
  4. Shared with Gandhi and King: openness, discipline, the opponent as a future fellow citizen, and exhaustion of lawful means.
  5. The departure: responsibility for the turn to force lies with the government that closed the channels, and non-violence has nothing to work on where there is no conscience to appeal to and no public able to hear.
  6. Criticisms: the judgment that lawful means have failed is made by the movement itself; violence rarely stays where it is aimed; the means may shape the end; and the premises are so demanding that the argument cannot be generalised.
munotes.in220

Nelson Mandela on Resistance

Test yourself

1. Why does Mandela's case belong in a module on obedience to unjust laws? Because apartheid was not lawlessness but a body of validly enacted legislation: statutes classifying people by race, allocating land by race, requiring passes, prohibiting mixed marriages, reserving occupations and removing the franchise. Everything he opposed had been passed by a parliament in the prescribed manner, so the question was not whether the state was acting outside the law but what a person owes to a legal order whose laws are unjust in their content.

2. Set out Mandela's argument for abandoning exclusively non-violent methods. That the movement had for decades used petitions, deputations, strikes, boycotts and defiance campaigns; that these were met with force and with fresh legislation criminalising the next campaign, until the organisations themselves were outlawed; that non-violence had been adopted as a tactic rather than as a creed and had ceased to be effective, so that continuing it would have meant accepting permanent inferiority; that violence was already occurring in undisciplined form and would grow; and that of sabotage, guerrilla warfare, terrorism and open revolution, sabotage was the least destructive, being directed at installations rather than people, with instructions that no life be taken.

3. What does Mandela share with Gandhi and King? Openness, since he did not deny the acts but explained them in open court at the risk of his life. Acceptance of the consequences, since he served twenty-seven years. Discipline imposed on participants, the instruction that no life be taken corresponding to King's stage of self-purification. Insistence that the opponent remains a person with whom a shared future is intended, which is why the later negotiated transition was possible. And the requirement that lawful means be exhausted first, which is the foundation of his whole case.

4. Where exactly does he depart from Gandhi, and what follows? On whether non-violence is a principle or a tactic. For Gandhi it is bound up with truth and with the inseparability of means and ends, so it cannot be abandoned; for Mandela it was a method adopted because it was thought effective and reconsidered when it was not. Two things follow. Responsibility for the turn to force is placed on the government that closed every lawful channel rather than on those left without one. And the assumption underlying Gandhi's and King's methods, that the opponent has a conscience and the public can be shamed, is treated as a factual claim that had been tested and had failed.

munotes.in221

Nelson Mandela on Resistance

5. Can Mandela's argument be used generally? Give reasons. No, because its premises are unusually demanding and rarely satisfied. It requires that the affected population be denied the vote, that its organisations be outlawed, that peaceful protest be met with force, and that no court be competent to strike the offending legislation down. A movement in a constitutional order with an independent judiciary, a free press and a right to organise cannot establish those premises, and on Mandela's own reasoning as much as on Gandhi's the lawful route and open civil disobedience remain what is available to it. The right question is not whether the cause is just but whether the channels were in fact closed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in222

Chapter Forty-Five

Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.3, "Satyagraha - Gandhian Technique of Resistance against Unjust Laws"

In one line

Satyagraha is the technique of holding to the truth by accepting suffering rather than inflicting it, conducted in a disciplined sequence, in which the resister breaks an unjust law openly and takes the punishment.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: satyagraha, from satya meaning truth and agraha meaning firmness or holding fast, is the Gandhian technique of resisting injustice by refusing to comply with it while accepting the suffering that the refusal brings, without violence and without hatred of the opponent, the object being not to defeat the opponent but to convert them.

The word, and why Gandhi coined it

Gandhi first used the English phrase passive resistance, and came to dislike it for two reasons: it suggested weakness, and it suggested the method was for those too weak to fight. He wanted a word for a method requiring more courage than fighting, so the term was coined from satya, truth, and agraha, firmness or holding fast.

Two things follow from the etymology and both are examinable.

Truth is the object, not victory. A satyagrahi who discovers that their own case is wrong is required to abandon it. This is what distinguishes the technique from a strategy of moral pressure.

Firmness, not passivity. The satyagrahi initiates. They break the law, publish their intention and bear the consequence. Nothing about it is passive except the refusal to strike back.

The three foundations

Satya, truth. The case must be true and must be stated truthfully, including what tells against it. The opponent must never be misled.

Ahimsa, non-violence. Not merely refraining from physical harm, but the absence of ill-will in act, word and thought. Gandhi's positive formulation is that it is love of the opponent, extended to those who wrong you.

Tapasya, self-suffering. The willingness to accept the consequence of the refusal, including imprisonment, loss of property and physical injury, without retaliation. This is the operative element: as Hind Swaraj puts it, if I do not obey the law and accept the penalty for its breach, I use soul-force, and it involves sacrifice of self.

How the three work together. Truth supplies the case; non-violence removes the opponent's justification and preserves the possibility of reconciliation; and self-suffering is what communicates, because a person who accepts loss rather than inflicts it cannot easily be accused of self-interest.

The rules of a satyagraha campaign

Gandhi's own discipline, and an answer that gives it in sequence is a strong answer.

Before the campaign.

  1. Exhaust every other means: petition, negotiation, arbitration, and appeal to the authority concerned.
  2. State the demand precisely and make it minimal, so that the opponent knows exactly what would end the campaign.
  3. Give notice to the authority, saying what will be done and when. Nothing is secret.
  4. Prepare the participants: training, a pledge, and the withdrawal of anybody who cannot maintain non-violence under provocation.
munotes.in223

Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance

During the campaign.

  1. No violence, no insult, no provocation.
  2. No exploitation of the opponent's weakness or embarrassment. If the opponent is in difficulty for an unrelated reason, the campaign is suspended.
  3. Accept arrest and punishment without evasion, and do not seek bail or reduction as a tactic.
  4. Never escalate the demand because the campaign is going well.
  5. Suspend the campaign if the participants turn violent, however costly. Gandhi did this after the violence at Chauri Chaura in 1922, when the movement was at its strongest, and was severely criticised within his own movement for it.

Concluding.

  1. Accept a settlement that meets the stated demand, and do not press for more.
  2. The opponent is not humiliated. The aim is to convert, so a defeated opponent is not the object.

The forms satyagraha takes

Worth listing, because a question may ask for the technique's methods rather than its philosophy.

Non-cooperation. Withdrawing the cooperation on which an unjust arrangement depends: resigning offices and titles, withdrawing from official schools and courts, boycotting elections.

Civil disobedience. Deliberately breaking a specific law regarded as unjust, publicly, and accepting the penalty.

Hartal. A voluntary suspension of work and business, for a defined period, as a mark of protest and mourning.

Boycott. Refusal to buy or use particular goods or services.

Fasting. The most contested form, used as self-purification, as penance for the failings of one's own side, and as an appeal. Gandhi imposed conditions on it: it must never be used against a person who does not care, and must not be used to coerce those with whom no bond of affection exists, because used against a stranger it is coercion by threat of one's own death.

Picketing. Non-violent persuasion at the point of the activity.

Constructive programme. The work done alongside the resistance: spinning, village industry, sanitation, education, and the removal of untouchability. Gandhi treated this as essential rather than incidental, because a movement that only resists has not built anything to put in place of what it opposes.

Three campaigns, worked

Champaran, 1917. The grievance was the system under which indigo cultivators in Bihar were compelled to plant a portion of their land with indigo on terms fixed by the planters. Gandhi went to investigate, was ordered to leave the district, and refused, offering to accept the penalty. The order was withdrawn, an inquiry was appointed with Gandhi on it, and the arrangement was ended by legislation. What the case shows: the technique's first use in India, the centrality of establishing the facts, and the fact that the campaign's demand was specific and limited.

munotes.in224

Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance

The salt satyagraha, 1930. The grievance was the salt law, under which the manufacture and sale of salt was a government monopoly and a tax was levied on a necessity that anybody living near the sea could otherwise make. Gandhi wrote to the Viceroy setting out the demand and the intention, walked to Dandi over about three weeks, and made salt from sea water in breach of the law, after which the breach was repeated across the country and tens of thousands were arrested. What the case shows: the choice of a law that was simple, universal, visible and morally indefensible; prior notice to the authority; and the deliberate courting of arrest.

Chauri Chaura, 1922, and the suspension of non-cooperation. During the non-cooperation movement a procession at Chauri Chaura was fired on, and the crowd set fire to a police station, killing the policemen inside. Gandhi suspended the entire movement. What the case shows, and it is the most important of the three for this topic: rule 9 is real. The method was not a strategy to be maintained while it worked; it was a discipline that failed when its own participants used violence, and the discipline was enforced against the movement's own interests.

The criticisms

It is slow, and the suffering falls on the resisters.

It presupposes an opponent capable of shame, which is chapter 440's objection in its sharpest form.

Fasting is coercive. Even Gandhi's own conditions do not fully answer the objection: a fast by a person whose death would be a catastrophe for the other side applies pressure that has little to do with persuasion. Ambedkar made exactly this objection about the fast that preceded the Poona Pact of 1932.

Suspension is costly and can destroy momentum. The 1922 suspension was criticised by leaders within the movement as throwing away a position that had taken years to build.

Ambedkar's larger objection. That for the most oppressed, the opponent is not a distant government but the surrounding society, and a technique which depends on appealing to the conscience of those who benefit from a hierarchy leaves them in control of the timing and extent of any concession. His preference for enforceable constitutional guarantees over moral appeal is the standing alternative and belongs in any full answer.

It requires exceptional leadership and discipline. Every element of the technique depends on participants who will not retaliate, and that is difficult to sustain at scale, which is what Chauri Chaura demonstrated.

A worked example

A State requires every fisherman to sell his catch only at a government auction centre, at prices fixed there, and a cooperative of fishing families in one village believes the arrangement is ruining them.

munotes.in225

Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance

Before. They petition the Fisheries Department, ask for arbitration and get no reply for months. They state one precise demand: the freedom to sell up to half the catch directly. They write to the Collector saying that from a stated date they will sell directly, in the open, outside the centre, and will not resist any action taken. They hold a meeting at which those who cannot promise not to retaliate withdraw.

During. They sell openly at a stall beside the centre. When officers seize the fish, nobody obstructs them. When arrests are made, nobody resists, and nobody applies for bail as a tactic. A newspaper photograph of women being led away from a fish stall does more than any petition did.

The discipline tested. A group of young men from the village stone the centre one night. The cooperative suspends the campaign, states publicly that it has done so and why, and does not resume until it has re-established the pledge. This is rule 9, and it is the point at which most movements abandon the method.

Concluding. The Department offers direct sale of forty per cent. The cooperative had demanded fifty and accepts the offer, because the object was the substance of the demand and not the defeat of the Department.

Distinctions that carry marks

SatyagrahaOrdinary civil disobediencePassive resistance as Gandhi rejected the term
ObjectTo convert the opponentTo change a law or policyTo resist without fighting
TruthBinding; the case is abandoned if wrongNot a formal requirementNot a requirement
Non-violenceIn act, word and thoughtIn actOften only in act
Attitude to opponentNo hatred; no exploitation of their weaknessOppositionOpposition
Suspension if one's own side turns violentRequiredNot requiredNot required
Constructive programmePart of the methodNot part of itNot part of it

What satyagraha is NOT

It is not passive. Gandhi abandoned the English phrase for exactly this reason.

It is not a technique for the weak. Gandhi's claim is that it demands more courage than fighting, since the satyagrahi faces force without the relief of returning it.

It is not a bargaining strategy. The demand is not inflated to be traded down, and it is not escalated when the campaign is winning.

It is not compatible with evading the penalty, with secrecy, or with exploiting the opponent's difficulties.

It is not merely a political method. The constructive programme, and the requirement of self-purification, mean the technique makes demands on the resister's own conduct, which is what most distinguishes it from every other form of protest.

munotes.in226

Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance

Quick revision

  1. Satya truth plus agraha firmness. Gandhi coined it because "passive resistance" suggested weakness.
  2. Three foundations: satya, ahimsa, tapasya (self-suffering). Truth supplies the case, non-violence removes the opponent's justification, self-suffering communicates.
  3. Before: exhaust other means; state a precise and minimal demand; give notice; prepare and pledge the participants.
  4. During: no violence or insult; no exploitation of the opponent's weakness; accept arrest without evasion; never escalate the demand; suspend if your own side turns violent.
  5. Concluding: accept a settlement meeting the stated demand; do not humiliate the opponent.
  6. Forms: non-cooperation, civil disobedience, hartal, boycott, fasting (with conditions), picketing, and the constructive programme.
  7. Champaran 1917 established the facts and won a limited demand. Salt 1930 chose a simple, universal, visible and indefensible law, with notice given in advance. Chauri Chaura 1922 is the proof that rule 9 was real.
  8. Criticisms: slow; needs an opponent capable of shame; fasting is coercive; suspension is costly; Ambedkar preferred enforceable guarantees to moral appeal; and it needs discipline that is hard to sustain at scale.

Test yourself

1. What does satyagraha mean, and why did Gandhi coin the term? It is formed from satya, meaning truth, and agraha, meaning firmness or holding fast, so it is holding fast to the truth. Gandhi coined it because he had first used the English phrase passive resistance and came to dislike it: it suggested weakness and implied a method for those unable to fight, whereas he considered his method to demand more courage than fighting, since the resister faces force without the relief of returning it. Nothing about the technique is passive except the refusal to strike back.

2. Set out the three foundations and explain how they work together. Satya, truth, requires that the case be true and stated honestly, including what tells against it, and requires the satyagrahi to abandon a case discovered to be wrong. Ahimsa, non-violence, requires the absence of ill-will in act, word and thought, not merely the avoidance of blows. Tapasya, self-suffering, requires acceptance of the consequences of refusal without retaliation. Truth supplies the case, non-violence deprives the opponent of any justification and keeps reconciliation possible, and self-suffering is what communicates, since a person who accepts loss rather than inflicting it cannot easily be charged with self-interest.

3. Give the rules a satyagraha campaign must follow. Before: exhaust petition, negotiation and arbitration; state one precise and minimal demand; give notice to the authority of what will be done and when; and prepare and pledge the participants, withdrawing those who cannot maintain non-violence. During: no violence, insult or provocation; no exploitation of the opponent's unrelated difficulties; acceptance of arrest and punishment without evasion; no escalation of the demand; and suspension if one's own side turns violent. At the end: accept a settlement meeting the stated demand, and do not humiliate the opponent.

munotes.in227

Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance

4. Why is Chauri Chaura the most important of the three campaigns for this topic? Because it shows that the discipline was real rather than tactical. During the non-cooperation movement a crowd at Chauri Chaura set fire to a police station and killed the policemen inside, and Gandhi suspended the entire movement at the moment of its greatest strength, drawing severe criticism from leaders within his own side. It demonstrates that satyagraha was not a strategy to be maintained while it was working but a method that fails when its own participants use violence, and that the failure was enforced against the movement's own interests.

5. State the principal criticisms of satyagraha. That it is slow and loads the suffering onto the resisters. That it presupposes an opponent capable of shame and a public able to be moved, which the Rivonia case denies for some conditions. That fasting is coercive, since a fast by a person whose death would be a catastrophe for the other side applies pressure unrelated to persuasion, an objection Ambedkar pressed about the fast preceding the Poona Pact. That suspension destroys momentum built over years. That for the most oppressed the opponent is the surrounding society rather than a distant government, so a technique of moral appeal leaves the beneficiaries of hierarchy in charge of the timing of any concession. And that it requires a level of discipline that is very hard to sustain at scale.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in228

Chapter Forty-Six

Punishment: Why the State Does It at All

Syllabus topic 2.4, "Punishment - Objectives, Justification and Deviation"; 2.4.1, "Responsibility of the Modern State to Punish"

In one line

Punishment is the deliberate infliction of suffering by the state on somebody it has found guilty, and because that is what it is, it needs a justification that ordinary state action does not.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: punishment is the intentional imposition of a hardship or deprivation on a person for a breach of a rule, by an authority constituted for the purpose and against the offender's will, and it requires justification because the state is doing to a person, deliberately, the very kind of thing the criminal law exists to prevent private persons doing to each other.

What punishment is

The standard analysis gives five elements, and an answer that lists them handles almost any question in this block.

1. It involves hardship or deprivation. Something the person would not choose: liberty, money, reputation, and at the limit life.

2. It is imposed for an offence against a rule.

3. It is imposed on an actual or supposed offender for that offence.

4. It is intentionally administered by human beings other than the offender.

5. It is imposed by an authority constituted by the legal system against which the offence was committed.

Every element is doing work. Remove the second and you have arbitrary harm; remove the third and you have punishing the innocent; remove the fifth and you have a lynching. When a question asks you to distinguish punishment from something else, it is one of these five that has been dropped.

What it is not

It is not compensation. Compensation looks at the victim's loss and restores it; punishment looks at the offender's wrong and imposes a deprivation. The same act may attract both, and they are different in aim, in measure and in who receives the benefit.

It is not a tax or a fee. A fee is a price for a permitted activity; a penalty marks the activity as forbidden. Two identical payments may be either, and which they are depends on whether the conduct is being priced or condemned.

It is not treatment. Treatment is directed at curing a condition, is measured by what the patient needs, and can be given to somebody who has committed no offence. Punishment is measured by what was done. The reformative theory at chapter 510 pulls hard on this line and the line still exists.

It is not preventive detention. Detention to stop a future harm is imposed on the basis of what somebody may do, not what they have done, and it lacks elements 2 and 3. Whether it can be justified at all is a separate constitutional question.

It is not revenge. Revenge is personal, unlimited, need not be inflicted by an authority, and need not be deserved. Punishment is imposed by a body with jurisdiction, is limited by rules, and requires guilt. The distinction between retribution and revenge is chapter 470's job and it is the distinction students most often collapse.

munotes.in229

Punishment: Why the State Does It at All

Why it needs justifying at all

This is the question MU's word "justification" is asking, and the answer must be stated sharply.

Everything the criminal law forbids, the state does when it punishes. Imprisonment is confinement. A fine is a taking of property. Execution is killing. If a private person did these things they would be crimes, and the state's doing them is not made harmless by the fact that it does them in a courtroom.

Two consequences follow.

Punishment is a prima facie wrong that requires a positive justification. Not a neutral administrative act that requires only authority.

A justification must answer three separate questions, and confusing them causes most of the muddle in this area.

Why punish at all? The general justifying aim.

Whom may be punished? Only the guilty, and only for what they did.

How much? The measure of the sentence.

The reason this matters is that different theories answer different questions best, and the mature position, which chapter 490 sets out, is that they can be combined: a deterrent or protective aim can be pursued within limits set by desert. A student who separates the three questions can write that answer.

The responsibility of the modern state to punish

MU's topic 2.4.1 asks not whether the state may punish but why it must, and there are five answers.

1. It has taken the right away from everybody else. In a state of nature each person may punish a wrong done to them, as Locke says expressly. The state removes that right, and having removed it, it owes the citizen the thing it took: a system that responds to wrongs. A state that will not punish has disarmed the victim and done nothing in exchange.

2. Only impartiality makes punishment tolerable. Locke's three inconveniences again. Private punishment is administered by somebody who is a party, and self-love makes them partial, so the same wrong produces different responses depending on the strength and temper of the victim. A public authority is the answer to that, and it works only if it actually acts.

3. Private vengeance escalates. A wrong avenged privately produces a counter-wrong, and feud replaces adjudication. The state's monopoly of force is worth nothing unless it is exercised.

4. It is the condition of the state's own claim to obedience. If the state cannot protect, Hobbes says obedience lapses. A state that does not punish assault is not protecting.

munotes.in230

Punishment: Why the State Does It at All

5. The victim's standing. The modern justification most emphasised: punishment publicly declares that what was done to this person was a wrong against them and against the community, which no compensation payment does.

And with the responsibility come limits, which is why the topic sits in this module rather than in criminal law. A state that punishes the innocent, punishes disproportionately, punishes without a hearing or punishes for what a person is rather than what they did has not discharged the responsibility; it has committed the wrong the responsibility exists to prevent.

Deviation

MU's third word is "Deviation", and it means the ways punishment departs from its own justification. Naming them here sets up chapters 520 and 530.

Disproportion, where the sentence exceeds anything the offence could warrant.

Selectivity, where the same offence attracts different treatment depending on who committed it.

Punishment of the innocent, whether by error or, in the utilitarian objection at chapter 660, by design.

Punishment beyond the sentence, where prison conditions inflict what no court imposed. This is what Sunil Batra is about at chapter 510.

Punishment of status rather than conduct, where a person is dealt with for what they are.

A worked example

A man is convicted of stealing a mobile phone.

Is what follows punishment? Apply the five elements. A hardship, yes. For an offence, yes. On the offender, yes. Intentionally administered by others, yes. By the authority of the system, yes.

Now vary it. He is ordered to pay the owner the value of the phone. That is compensation, and it would be owed even if there were no criminal law at all.

Vary it again. He is sent to a de-addiction programme because the theft was to fund a dependency. Is that punishment or treatment? It is imposed for the offence, by the court, against his preference, so it satisfies the elements. But its measure is what he needs rather than what he did, and if the programme takes four years while the offence would carry three months, the theory of punishment has been left behind.

And again. He is refused bail, and spends eleven months in custody before trial, at the end of which he is acquitted. Nothing here is punishment on the definition, because there was no offence and no finding. That is precisely why the situation is troubling: he has undergone the whole of what punishment consists in, without any of the elements that justify it.

That last variation is worth an answer of its own if the question allows it, because in India a very large proportion of prisoners are undertrials, and every justification in this chapter is unavailable for them.

munotes.in231

Punishment: Why the State Does It at All

Distinctions that carry marks

PunishmentCompensationTreatmentRevenge
Looks atThe offender's wrongThe victim's lossThe person's conditionThe avenger's grievance
Measured byDesert, deterrence or need for protectionThe lossWhat the person needsNothing fixed
Requires guilt?YesNo, liability sufficesNoNo
Imposed byA constituted authorityA court, or agreementA professionalAnybody
Limited?By rules and proportionBy the lossBy clinical judgmentNo

Quick revision

  1. Five elements: hardship; for an offence; on the offender; intentionally administered by others; by an authority of the system offended against.
  2. Not compensation, a fee, treatment, preventive detention, or revenge.
  3. It needs justification because the state deliberately does what the criminal law forbids: confining, taking, and at the limit killing.
  4. Three separate questions: why punish at all; whom may be punished; how much. Different theories answer different ones best.
  5. The responsibility to punish: the state took the right of private punishment away; impartiality requires a public authority; private vengeance escalates; protection is the condition of obedience; and punishment declares the victim's standing.
  6. Deviation: disproportion, selectivity, punishment of the innocent, punishment beyond the sentence, and punishment of status rather than conduct.

Test yourself

1. Define punishment by its elements. It is the intentional imposition of hardship or deprivation on an actual or supposed offender, for an offence against a rule, administered by human beings other than the offender, under the authority of the legal system against which the offence was committed. All five elements matter: removing the requirement of an offence leaves arbitrary harm, removing the requirement that it fall on the offender leaves punishment of the innocent, and removing the requirement of constituted authority leaves a lynching.

2. Why does punishment require justification when other state action does not? Because the state, in punishing, deliberately does the very kind of thing the criminal law exists to prevent private persons doing. Imprisonment is confinement, a fine is a taking of property, and execution is killing, and none of these ceases to be a harm because it is imposed in a courtroom. Punishment is therefore a prima facie wrong requiring a positive justification, and not a neutral administrative act needing only authority.

3. What are the three questions a theory of punishment must answer separately? Why punish at all, which is the general justifying aim; whom may be punished, which is answered by desert, since only the guilty and only for what they did; and how much, which is the measure of the sentence. Keeping them apart is what allows a combined theory in which a deterrent or protective aim is pursued only within limits set by desert, and confusing them is the source of most of the muddle in this area.

munotes.in232

Punishment: Why the State Does It at All

4. Why does the modern state have a responsibility to punish, and not merely a power? Because it has taken from every citizen the right to punish wrongs done to them, and owes in exchange a system that responds. Because private punishment is administered by a party whose self-love makes them partial, so only a public authority can be impartial, and an authority that does not act supplies nothing. Because private vengeance escalates into feud. Because protection is the condition of the state's own claim to obedience. And because punishment publicly declares that what was done was a wrong against the victim and the community, which compensation does not.

5. What does "deviation" mean in this topic, and give examples. The ways in which punishment departs from the justification that alone makes it permissible. Disproportion, where the sentence exceeds anything the offence could warrant. Selectivity, where the same offence is treated differently according to who committed it. Punishment of the innocent, whether by error or, as the utilitarian objection has it, by design. Punishment beyond the sentence, where prison conditions inflict what no court imposed. And punishment of status rather than conduct, where a person is dealt with for what they are rather than for what they did.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in233

Chapter Forty-Seven

Kant's Retributivism

Syllabus topic 2.4.2, "Philosophical underpinnings: Kant's Retributivism, Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian"

In one line

Kant says punishment is owed to the guilty because they are guilty, that it may never be inflicted as a means of producing some benefit, and that the measure of it is what the offender did.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Kant holds that juridical punishment can never be administered merely as a means of promoting another good, whether for the criminal himself or for civil society, but must in all cases be imposed only because the individual on whom it is inflicted has committed a crime; that the principle of equality determines both the quality and the quantity of punishment, which he calls the right of retaliation or ius talionis; and that this is the only principle which, in regulating a public court as distinguished from private judgment, can definitely assign the kind and degree of punishment.

The moral foundation

Kant's theory of punishment is not a separate doctrine bolted on to his ethics. It follows from two propositions that run through everything he wrote.

A person must never be treated merely as a means. Human beings possess dignity, which is a worth beyond price, and to use a person as an instrument for producing some result is to deny that worth. This is why the utilitarian theory of the next chapter is, for Kant, not merely mistaken but a wrong done to the person punished.

Punishment must be deserved, and desert is backward looking. The question is what the offender did, not what will follow from punishing them. Consequences are irrelevant to whether punishment is owed, and can be relevant only within the limits desert has already fixed.

The consequence students find hardest. On Kant's account, punishing a guilty person is not a regrettable necessity to be minimised. It is required. A society that let a murderer go free because nothing would be gained by punishing him would, in Kant's language, be a party to the wrong.

The two passages

The right of retaliation

Kant's own text puts the principle plainly. Whatever undeserved evil you inflict upon another within the people, that you inflict upon yourself: if you strike yourself, you strike another; if you kill another, you kill yourself. This, he says, is the Right of Retaliation, in his Latin the ius talionis, and, properly understood, it is the only principle which, in regulating a public court as distinguished from mere private judgment, can definitely assign both the quality and the quantity of a just penalty.

Three things to notice.

It is a principle of measurement, not of vengeance. Kant's claim is not that the victim's family are entitled to satisfaction. It is that the offence itself supplies the standard by which a court can fix a sentence, and that no other principle can.

munotes.in234

Kant's Retributivism

It is what distinguishes a court from private judgment. Kant's own words. Without a principle of measurement, sentencing is arbitrary.

"Like for like" is not literal. Kant is aware that the crime cannot always be reproduced on the criminal, and his own worked cases show him applying the principle in terms of the kind and degree of harm rather than by imitation.

The island

The passage every textbook quotes and few quote correctly. Kant imagines that a civil society resolves to dissolve itself with the consent of all its members, as might be supposed in the case of a people inhabiting an island who resolve to separate and scatter themselves throughout the whole world. Even then, he says, the last murderer lying in the prison ought to be executed before the resolution was carried out.

And the reason, which is the part that is always dropped: this ought to be done in order that every one may realise the desert of his deeds, and that bloodguiltiness may not remain upon the people, for otherwise they might all be regarded as participators in the murder as a public violation of justice.

Why the reason matters. The example is designed to remove every consequentialist consideration at once. The society is dissolving, so nobody will be deterred, nobody protected, and nobody reformed. If punishment is still owed, then its ground cannot be any of those things. And the reason Kant gives is not vengeance but complicity: a community that knowingly leaves a murder unanswered has associated itself with the wrong.

The elements of the theory

Punishment is justified only by desert. Guilt is the necessary and the sufficient condition.

It may never be inflicted merely as a means. Not to deter others, not to protect society, and, importantly, not even to improve the offender, because that too uses the person as material for a purpose.

Proportionality is not a limit but the measure. Other theories treat desert as a ceiling; Kant treats it as the standard that fixes the sentence.

Only the guilty may be punished. Punishing the innocent is not merely inefficient; it is a wrong of a different order, and the theory excludes it absolutely.

Punishment respects the offender. Kant's most counter-intuitive claim, and it earns marks when explained. To punish a person for what they chose is to treat them as a rational being who is answerable for their acts. To treat them instead as a case to be managed, cured or deterred is to treat them as an object acted upon rather than as an agent. On this view the offender has a right to be punished.

munotes.in235

Kant's Retributivism

The offender wills their own punishment, in a formal sense: in adopting a maxim of action, they willed a principle that, applied universally, licenses the same treatment of themselves.

The criticisms

It is vengeance dressed up. The commonest objection, and the answer is in chapter 460's table: retribution is imposed by a constituted authority, requires guilt, is limited by proportion, and is not personal to any victim. Revenge has none of those features. The two are distinguished by their structure, not by the feelings of the person imposing them.

It cannot measure. The ius talionis works for murder and works badly for fraud, perjury or drunk driving. What is the like for like of an environmental offence? Modern retributivists answer with ordinal proportionality, ranking offences by seriousness and matching them to a scale of penalties, which preserves Kant's insight while abandoning literal equivalence.

It is indifferent to consequences. A theory which requires punishment even where nothing whatever is gained is, to a utilitarian, the deliberate addition of suffering to the world. Bentham's objection at chapter 480 is exactly this.

It ignores what produced the offender. Poverty, coercion and circumstance are given no weight, and desert on Kant's account looks past them to the free choice.

It has been used to justify severity. The theory sets a floor as well as a ceiling, so it obliges punishment as well as limiting it, and it has been invoked for capital punishment more often than against harsh sentencing.

It cannot accommodate mercy. If punishment is owed, a pardon is a failure to do what justice requires.

The theory in Indian law

Indian sentencing law contains Kant's principle and refuses to be governed by it alone, and saying so is a strong close to an answer.

Facts. Bachan Singh v. State of Punjab, (1980) 2 SCC 684. Bachan Singh was convicted under section 302 of the Penal Code of three murders and sentenced to death, and the High Court confirmed the sentence. On his appeal the question was whether the facts found amounted to the special reasons that section 354(3) of the Code of Criminal Procedure 1973 requires before a death sentence may be passed, and a Constitution Bench was constituted to decide whether the death penalty in section 302 and the sentencing procedure in section 354(3) were constitutional.

Held. The Court rejected the challenge to both provisions. It held that for persons convicted of murder life imprisonment is the rule and the death sentence an exception, that a real and abiding concern for the dignity of human life postulates resistance to taking life through the instrumentality of the law, and that this ought not to be done save in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative option is unquestionably foreclosed. The connected matters were directed to be decided on their individual merits in the light of those guidelines.

munotes.in236

Kant's Retributivism

Why it matters here. The retributive element survives: the sentence is fixed by what was done, and the gravity of the offence is what can take a case into the rarest category. But desert operates as a ceiling and a threshold rather than as a command, since the Court's rule is a presumption against the maximum. That is retributivism as a limiting principle, which is where most modern systems have arrived and where Kant himself would not have stopped.

A worked example

A man is convicted of culpable homicide. He is sixty three, has no previous conviction, is in poor health, and the family of the deceased has publicly said it does not want him imprisoned. The offence was committed in a sudden quarrel.

A pure Kantian analysis. The question is what he did and what that deserves. His age, his health, the family's wishes and the effect of imprisonment on him are all irrelevant to desert, because none of them changes what was done or the responsibility with which it was done. What is relevant is the gravity of the act, the intention behind it and the culpability of the choice, and the sudden quarrel is relevant precisely because it goes to culpability.

Why the family's forgiveness changes nothing on this theory. The wrong was not only against the family. It was a public violation of justice, and on the island passage's reasoning a community that lets it pass associates itself with it. Forgiveness by a private party cannot discharge a public wrong.

What a Kantian will not do. Increase the sentence to send a message to others in the district, which uses this man as a means. Reduce it because prison is expensive. Extend it until he is reformed, which measures by need rather than by desert.

And what an Indian court actually does. It considers desert first, through the gravity of the offence and the degree of culpability, and then considers the offender: age, health, absence of antecedents, the circumstances of the quarrel, and the possibility of reform. Giasuddin, at chapter 510, holds that a court which never looks at the offender has failed in its statutory duty. So the Indian position is Kantian in its foundation and not Kantian in its execution.

Distinctions that carry marks

Retributive (Kant)Utilitarian (Bentham)
LooksBackward, at the offenceForward, at the consequences
JustificationDesertPrevention of greater evil
Guilt isNecessary and sufficientNecessary in practice only, which is the objection
MeasureThe offence itselfWhatever quantity produces the best result
Punishing the innocentAbsolutely excludedExcluded only because it usually does not pay
Punishment of a harmless offenderStill requiredPointless, and therefore wrong
Treats the offender asA rational agent answerable for a choiceA subject whose behaviour can be influenced
munotes.in237

Kant's Retributivism

RetributionRevenge
Imposed byA constituted authorityAnybody
Requires guiltYesNo
LimitedBy proportionNot at all
Personal to a victimNoYes
EmotionIrrelevant to its validityIts motive

What Kant is NOT saying

He is not saying punishment should satisfy the victim. The victim's feelings do not appear in the argument.

He is not saying an eye for an eye literally. He offers a principle of measurement and applies it by kind and degree.

He is not indifferent to the offender's welfare. His objection to reformative punishment is not that reform is bad but that it uses the person as material for an end, and he says the same of deterrence.

The island is not an argument about the death penalty. It is an argument about the ground of punishment, constructed so that no consequence can be doing the work.

Quick revision

  1. Two foundations: a person must never be treated merely as a means; and desert is backward looking.
  2. The ius talionis: whatever undeserved evil you inflict on another, you inflict on yourself. It is the only principle which, in regulating a public court as distinguished from private judgment, can definitely assign the quality and quantity of punishment.
  3. The island: a people dissolving their society must first execute the last murderer lying in the prison, so that everyone realises the desert of his deeds and bloodguiltiness may not remain upon the people.
  4. Elements: desert is necessary and sufficient; punishment may never be a mere means, not even for the offender's own improvement; proportion is the measure, not merely a limit; and punishing the innocent is absolutely excluded.
  5. The offender has a right to be punished, because to punish is to treat them as a rational agent rather than as an object to be managed.
  6. Criticisms: it is said to be vengeance (answered structurally); it cannot measure non-violent offences, answered by ordinal proportionality; it is indifferent to consequences; it ignores circumstance; it obliges severity as well as limiting it; and it has no room for mercy.
  7. Bachan Singh, (1980) 2 SCC 684: life imprisonment is the rule and death the exception, in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative is unquestionably foreclosed. Desert as a ceiling and a threshold, not as a command.
munotes.in238

Kant's Retributivism

Test yourself

1. State Kant's justification of punishment. That juridical punishment can never be administered merely as a means of promoting some other good, whether for the criminal himself or for civil society, but must be imposed in all cases only because the person on whom it falls has committed a crime. Desert is therefore both the necessary and the sufficient condition, the question being what the offender did and not what will follow from punishing them, and consequences may operate only within limits that desert has already fixed.

2. What is the ius talionis, and what work does Kant say it does? It is the right of retaliation, expressed as the principle that whatever undeserved evil you inflict upon another you inflict upon yourself. Kant's claim for it is not about satisfying victims but about measurement: he says it is the only principle which, in regulating a public court as distinguished from mere private judgment, can definitely assign both the quality and the quantity of a just penalty. Without such a principle sentencing has no standard and becomes arbitrary, which is what separates a court from private judgment.

3. Explain the island example and the reason Kant gives. Kant imagines a civil society resolving to dissolve itself with the consent of all its members, as with a people on an island who decide to scatter across the world, and says that even then the last murderer lying in the prison ought to be executed before the resolution is carried out. The reason he gives is that everyone may realise the desert of his deeds and that bloodguiltiness may not remain upon the people, who might otherwise be regarded as participators in the murder as a public violation of justice. The example removes deterrence, protection and reform at once, so whatever justifies the punishment cannot be any of them, and the ground offered is complicity rather than vengeance.

4. "Kant's theory is vengeance in academic dress." Answer the charge. The two differ in structure and not in feeling. Retribution is imposed by a constituted authority, requires proof of guilt, is limited by proportion to the offence, and is not personal to any victim, whose wishes and emotions play no part in Kant's argument at all. Revenge may be inflicted by anybody, needs no guilt, has no limit, and is by definition personal. A person may impose retribution with no desire for it and may feel vengeful without any right to act, which shows the distinction does not lie in the state of mind.

5. How far does Indian sentencing law follow Kant? It adopts the foundation and rejects the conclusion. In Bachan Singh a Constitution Bench upheld section 302 of the Penal Code and section 354(3) of the Code of Criminal Procedure while holding that for murder life imprisonment is the rule and death the exception, to be imposed only in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative option is unquestionably foreclosed. Desert therefore fixes the ceiling and the threshold, but it does not command the maximum, and in Giasuddin the Court held that a sentencing judge who considers only the gravity of the offence and never the offender has failed in the duty the Code imposes.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in239

Chapter Forty-Eight

Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.2, "Philosophical underpinnings: Kant's Retributivism, Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian"

In one line

Bentham says punishment is itself an evil, so it can never be justified by what the offender deserves, but only by the greater evil it prevents, and where it prevents nothing it must not be inflicted.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Bentham holds that the business of government is to promote the happiness of society by punishing and rewarding; that punishment is mischief and all punishment in itself is evil, so that upon the principle of utility it ought to be admitted only in so far as it promises to exclude some greater evil; and that punishment is therefore improper in four classes of case, where it is groundless, inefficacious, unprofitable or needless.

The starting point

Bentham's whole system rests on the principle of utility, which approves or disapproves of every action according to its tendency to augment or diminish the happiness of the party whose interest is in question. The legislator's business is to promote the happiness of the society, and to exclude, as far as may be, everything that tends to subtract from that happiness, which is to say, to exclude mischief.

Then comes the sentence on which this chapter turns. But punishment is mischief: all punishment in itself is evil. Upon the principle of utility, if it ought at all to be admitted, it ought only to be admitted in as far as it promises to exclude some greater evil.

Read that against Kant and the whole disagreement appears in two lines. For Kant, punishing the guilty is required. For Bentham, punishing anybody is a harm which needs to buy something, and if it buys nothing it is simply harm added to harm.

The ends of punishment

On the utilitarian account, punishment is instrumental, and four purposes are recognised.

General prevention, which later writers call general deterrence: the example made of this offender deters others. Bentham regards this as the chief end, because it operates on the whole population rather than on one person.

Particular prevention, or special deterrence: the offender is deterred from repeating.

Incapacitation: while confined, the offender cannot offend against the public.

Reformation: the offender's disposition is changed.

Bentham also stresses that the profit of the offence must be outweighed. Punishment must be so calibrated that the expected evil of the punishment exceeds the expected profit of the offence, allowing for the probability of detection, which is why he treats certainty as more important than severity: a small penalty that is certain deters better than a heavy one that is unlikely.

The four classes of case in which punishment must not be inflicted

This is Bentham's most distinctive contribution and the part of him a student should be able to reproduce. Punishment ought not to be admitted where it is groundless, inefficacious, unprofitable, or needless.

munotes.in240

Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment

1. Groundless

Where there is no mischief for it to prevent.

Where there never was any mischief, as where the person said to be injured consented. Where the mischief was outweighed, as in precaution against a calamity or the exercise of a lawful power. And where the mischief will for a certainty be cured by compensation, which is why Bentham says favour is shown to the offences of responsible offenders such as simple mercantile frauds.

2. Inefficacious

Where the punishment cannot operate to prevent the mischief, because the threat could not have reached the will of the person at the time.

This class is the ancestor of most of the general exceptions in a modern penal code: where the law was made after the act, or was never published; where the person was an infant, insane or intoxicated so that the threat could not act on them; where they were unaware of the facts, or acted under a mistake; and where they acted under a compulsion the threat of punishment could not overcome.

3. Unprofitable

Where the evil of the punishment would exceed the evil it prevents. Bentham lists among the considerations the extraordinary value of the services of a particular offender, where punishing would deprive the community of the benefit of those services; the displeasure of the people, where they conceive that the offence or the offender ought not to be punished at all or not in that way; and the displeasure of foreign powers.

This third class is the one modern readers find most uncomfortable, because it makes the propriety of punishment turn partly on the offender's usefulness and on public and diplomatic reaction. It is worth stating honestly rather than hiding, because it is the clearest illustration of what the utilitarian account permits and the retributive account forbids.

4. Needless

Where the mischief may be prevented as effectually at a cheaper rate. Bentham's own example is instructive: by instruction rather than by terror, by informing the understanding rather than exercising an immediate influence on the will. He says this is so of offences consisting in disseminating pernicious principles in matters of duty, whether political, moral or religious, because it is the readers rather than the writer whom instruction can reach.

Every argument for education, treatment, regulation or civil remedies in place of criminal sanctions is an argument from Bentham's fourth class, and saying so is a strong point in an answer.

Bentham's rules of proportion

Because punishment is an evil to be minimised, Bentham derives rules for fixing its amount, and the following are the ones most often set.

munotes.in241

Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment

The value of the punishment must not be less than what is sufficient to outweigh the profit of the offence.

The greater the mischief of the offence, the greater the expense it is worth incurring by way of punishment.

Where two offences come in competition, the punishment for the greater offence must be sufficient to induce a man to prefer the less.

The punishment should be adjusted so as to induce the offender to do no more mischief than is necessary to his purpose.

The punishment ought in no case to be more than what is necessary to bring it into conformity with the rules here given.

Notice the direction of all of these: they are limits, aimed at using no more punishment than the purpose needs. Bentham is commonly described as the theorist of harsh utilitarian punishment, and his own rules point the other way.

The criticisms

The innocent objection. This is the central and the most damaging. If punishment is justified by consequences alone, then framing and punishing an innocent person is justified whenever it produces enough good, for example by quelling a riot. Utilitarian answers are available: the practice of punishing the innocent would be discovered, would destroy confidence in the system and would produce worse consequences overall. But the answer is contingent, and the objection is that a theory which condemns the punishment of the innocent only because it usually does not pay has not condemned it at all.

Disproportion in both directions. If deterrence is the aim, a very harsh sentence for a common minor offence might deter more than a proportionate one, and a trivial sentence for a grave offence that nobody is tempted to commit would be enough. Desert alone explains why neither is acceptable.

It uses the offender. Kant's objection: on this theory the person punished is a means to a public benefit.

Deterrence is empirically doubtful. Bentham's own emphasis on certainty over severity is well supported, and the evidence that increasing severity deters is weak, which cuts against the way the theory is usually invoked.

The third class is uncomfortable. Bentham's own list makes punishment turn partly on the offender's usefulness and on public and foreign reaction, which is exactly what equality before the law forbids.

A worked example

A first-time offender is convicted of selling adulterated food. Nobody was harmed. He has already been shut down, has paid compensation to those who bought the goods, and has cooperated with the prosecution.

On Kant's approach the question is what he did and what that deserves, and the absence of harm and the compensation go to the gravity of the offence but not to whether punishment is owed.

munotes.in242

Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment

On Bentham's approach the four classes are worked through in order.

Groundless? Not entirely, since selling adulterated food is a mischief whether or not somebody happened to fall ill. But Bentham's own third head, mischief cured for a certainty by compensation, is engaged as to the purchasers' loss.

Inefficacious? No. He knew what he was selling; the threat could have operated on his will.

Unprofitable? Consider whether a prison sentence costs more in suffering, in the loss of a business that employs people, and in public expense than the mischief it prevents.

Needless? This is the strongest head on these facts. If licensing conditions, inspection and publication of the conviction will prevent repetition as effectually as imprisonment, then the mischief can be prevented at a cheaper rate, and Bentham's fourth class says punishment must not be inflicted.

The conclusion, and the contrast. A Benthamite may properly conclude that a fine and a licensing condition are sufficient and that imprisonment is forbidden. A Kantian will say that this reasoning has never asked what the offender deserved, and that the same reasoning would have licensed imprisoning him if the calculation had gone the other way, which is precisely the objection.

Distinctions that carry marks

KantBentham
Punishment isOwed to the guiltyAn evil, admissible only to exclude a greater evil
Justified byDesertConsequences: prevention
LooksBackwardForward
Chief aimJusticeGeneral prevention, that is, deterring others
MeasureThe offenceEnough to outweigh the profit of the offence, and no more
InnocentNever, absolutelyExcluded only because it usually does not pay
Where nothing is gainedPunish anywayDo not punish: it is groundless, inefficacious, unprofitable or needless
Severity or certaintyNot the questionCertainty, which deters better than severity

What Bentham is NOT saying

He is not a defender of harsh punishment. His rules of proportion are limits, and his fourth class positively forbids punishing where a cheaper method will do.

He is not indifferent to the offender. Reformation is one of his four ends, and his fourth class prefers instruction to terror.

He does not say the innocent may be punished. He does not say it; the objection is that his theory does not rule it out in principle.

"All punishment in itself is evil" is not a criticism of the state. It is the premise from which he derives the conditions on which punishment becomes permissible.

Quick revision

  1. The principle: "But punishment is mischief: all punishment in itself is evil. Upon the principle of utility, if it ought at all to be admitted, it ought only to be admitted in as far as it promises to exclude some greater evil."
  2. Four ends: general prevention (the chief one), particular prevention, incapacitation, reformation.
  3. Certainty over severity: a small penalty that is certain deters better than a heavy one that is unlikely.
  4. Four classes where punishment must not be inflicted: groundless (no mischief; consent; outweighed; cured by compensation); inefficacious (the threat could not reach the will: retrospective, unpublished, infancy, insanity, intoxication, mistake, compulsion); unprofitable (the evil of the punishment exceeds the evil prevented); needless (the mischief can be prevented at a cheaper rate, by instruction rather than terror).
  5. Rules of proportion are limits: no more punishment than is needed to outweigh the profit of the offence and to make the offender prefer the lesser offence.
  6. Criticisms: the innocent objection, which is the central one; disproportion in both directions; the offender is used as a means; the empirical weakness of severity as a deterrent; and the third class making punishment turn on the offender's usefulness.
munotes.in243

Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment

Test yourself

1. State Bentham's justification of punishment in his own terms. That the legislator's business is to promote the happiness of society and to exclude mischief, but that punishment is itself mischief, all punishment in itself being evil. It follows that upon the principle of utility punishment ought to be admitted, if at all, only in so far as it promises to exclude some greater evil. Punishment is therefore never owed and never deserved; it is a harm which must purchase a larger reduction of harm, and where it purchases nothing it is simply harm added to harm.

2. Set out the four classes of case in which Bentham says punishment must not be inflicted. Groundless, where there is no mischief to prevent, as where the person supposedly injured consented, where the mischief was outweighed by a lawful purpose, or where it will certainly be cured by compensation. Inefficacious, where the threat could not have operated on the will, as with retrospective or unpublished laws, infancy, insanity, intoxication, mistake of fact, and compulsion. Unprofitable, where the evil of the punishment would exceed the evil it prevents. And needless, where the mischief can be prevented as effectually at a cheaper rate, by instruction rather than by terror.

3. Why does Bentham prefer certainty to severity? Because deterrence works on the expected evil of the punishment, which is its severity discounted by the probability that it will actually be imposed. A heavy penalty that is rarely inflicted produces a small expected evil and deters weakly, while a modest penalty that is certain produces a reliable one and deters well. Since punishment is itself an evil to be minimised, the efficient course is to raise certainty rather than severity, which uses less punishment to achieve more prevention.

munotes.in244

Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment

4. State the objection from punishing the innocent and the utilitarian reply. If punishment is justified solely by its consequences, then framing and punishing an innocent person is justified whenever it produces sufficient good, as by quelling a riot or reassuring a frightened public. The utilitarian reply is that such a practice would be discovered, would destroy confidence in the whole system, and would therefore produce worse consequences overall. The objection to the reply is that it is contingent on discovery and on the state of public confidence, so a theory which condemns the punishment of the innocent only because it usually does not pay has not condemned it in principle at all.

5. Which of Bentham's four classes underlies modern arguments for alternatives to imprisonment? The fourth, where punishment is needless because the mischief can be prevented as effectually at a cheaper rate. Bentham's own example is preferring instruction to terror, informing the understanding rather than acting immediately on the will. Every modern argument for education, treatment, regulation, licensing conditions or civil remedies in place of a criminal sanction is an argument of exactly that form, and identifying it as Bentham's fourth class is what turns a general observation into an answer.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in245

Chapter Forty-Nine

The Justification of Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.3, "Justification of Punishment"

In one line

There are five classical justifications of punishment, none of them is sufficient by itself, and the position modern law has reached is that a forward looking aim may be pursued only within limits fixed by what the offender deserves.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the justifications of punishment are the retributive, which looks backward to desert; the deterrent, which looks forward to the prevention of offences by others and by the offender; the preventive or incapacitative, which removes the offender's opportunity to offend; the reformative, which seeks to change the offender; and the expiatory, which treats punishment as atonement; and the prevailing modern position is a combined theory in which the general justifying aim is forward looking while the distribution and the amount of punishment are limited by desert.

The five theories

Retributive

Punishment is deserved. The offender has done wrong and the wrong itself is the reason for the punishment. Kant is the classical exponent, and chapter 470 sets him out in full. Its answer to "how much" is the offence itself.

Strength. It is the only theory that explains why we may punish only the guilty and only in proportion, and it treats the offender as a responsible agent.

Weakness. It requires punishment even where nothing is gained, and it cannot measure non-violent offences without help.

Deterrent

Punishment prevents future offences by making the prospect unattractive, to the offender and to others watching. Bentham is the classical exponent. Chapter 500 works it in detail.

Strength. It gives a reason for punishing that is intelligible to somebody who does not accept desert.

Weakness. It permits punishing the innocent if that would deter, and it permits disproportionate sentences where they would deter more.

Preventive or incapacitative

Punishment removes the offender's ability to offend, by imprisonment, disqualification, forfeiture or, at the limit, death. Chapter 500 also covers this.

Strength. It works whether or not anybody is deterred, since the incapacitated person simply cannot offend against the public.

Weakness. It looks to what the person may do rather than to what they did, so taken alone it leads to detention on prediction, which is punishment without an offence.

Reformative

Punishment should change the offender so that they do not offend again, and should be measured by what will achieve that. Chapter 510 works it, with the Gandhian version and the Indian cases.

Strength. It is the only theory that treats the sentence as an opportunity, and it produces the whole apparatus of probation, parole, remission, open prisons and juvenile justice.

Weakness. Its measure is need rather than desert, so it can justify detaining a minor offender until they are cured, and it has no answer to the offender who is not in need of reform.

munotes.in246

The Justification of Punishment

Expiatory

Punishment permits the offender to atone, discharge the guilt and be restored to the community. It is the oldest justification and the one most often omitted from answers.

Strength. It explains why remorse, apology and restitution matter, and why a person who has served a sentence is said to have paid for the offence.

Weakness. It supposes a shared moral and often religious framework, and it says nothing about how much punishment discharges the wrong.

Why no single theory is sufficient

An answer that says "the theories are complementary" gets a little; an answer that says exactly what each one cannot do gets a lot.

Retribution alone requires the state to punish where punishing achieves nothing, and gives no reason to prefer a sentence that prevents further crime to one that does not.

Deterrence alone does not require the person punished to be guilty. This is the objection that decides the argument, and it is worth stating in its strongest form: if deterrence were the whole justification, then a public and convincing punishment of an innocent person would be as good as the punishment of the guilty one, provided nobody discovered the difference.

Prevention alone justifies detaining a dangerous person who has committed no offence at all.

Reformation alone makes the sentence depend on the offender's condition, so the same offence produces one week for one person and ten years for another, and the person who needs no reform must be released at once.

Expiation alone cannot say when the account is settled.

The combined theory, and how it works

The position most modern systems have reached, and the one to write, is that the theories answer different questions and can therefore be combined rather than chosen between. The framework is usually attributed to H. L. A. Hart.

The general justifying aim, the answer to "why have a system of punishment at all", is forward looking: the prevention of crime.

Distribution, the answer to "whom may be punished", is governed by desert: only a person who has committed the offence, and only for it.

Amount, the answer to "how much", is limited by proportionality, within which forward looking considerations may operate.

The elegance of this is that each objection above is answered by a different limb. Punishing the innocent is excluded by the distribution limb even though the aim is deterrence. Disproportionate sentences are excluded by the amount limb even where they would deter. And reformation operates freely below the ceiling desert fixes, which is exactly where probation, parole and remission live.

How an Indian court chooses

Facts. Bachan Singh v. State of Punjab, (1980) 2 SCC 684. The appellant was convicted under section 302 of the Penal Code of three murders and sentenced to death, and the High Court confirmed. On his appeal the question was whether the facts amounted to the special reasons section 354(3) of the Code of Criminal Procedure 1973 requires before a death sentence may be passed, and a Constitution Bench was constituted to decide whether section 302 and section 354(3) were constitutionally valid.

munotes.in247

The Justification of Punishment

Held. The Court rejected the challenge to both provisions. It laid down that for persons convicted of murder life imprisonment is the rule and the death sentence an exception; that a real and abiding concern for the dignity of human life postulates resistance to taking a life through the instrumentality of the law; and that this ought not to be done save in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative option is unquestionably foreclosed. The connected matters were remitted to be decided on their merits in the light of those guidelines. Bhagwati J. gave a separate opinion.

Why it matters here, and this is the point of the chapter. Every theory appears and none of them wins.

Retribution survives, because the gravity of the offence is what can carry a case into the rarest category, and because the sentence is fixed by reference to what was done.

Deterrence was argued for the State and was not accepted as a reason making the death penalty necessary in the ordinary case.

Reformation appears as a presumption: life imprisonment is the rule, and the alternative must be unquestionably foreclosed before the maximum is imposed, which is desert operating as a ceiling and not as a command.

And the structure is Hart's. The aim is forward looking, the distribution is by desert, and the amount is capped by proportionality with a presumption against the maximum.

A worked example

A young man with no previous conviction, addicted to a substance, breaks into three houses in a month and steals electronics. He is convicted of housebreaking and theft.

Retributive. The offences are serious, repeated and deliberate. What is deserved is a substantial sentence, and the addiction reduces culpability somewhat without removing it.

Deterrent. Housebreaking is common in the locality, and a visible sentence may reduce it. General deterrence pulls upward, and Bentham's own rule, that certainty matters more than severity, warns against relying on the sentence to do work that detection should do.

Preventive. While confined he cannot break into houses. This pulls upward too, and the theory alone would justify keeping him confined indefinitely, which is why it must be capped.

Reformative. Untreated addiction makes reoffending near certain; treatment makes it much less likely. This pulls towards a supervised sentence with a treatment condition, and if measured by need alone it could exceed what the offences deserve.

munotes.in248

The Justification of Punishment

Expiatory. Restitution to the three households, and an apology, matter to the victims and to his standing in the community afterwards.

The combined answer. The aim is preventing further burglaries, so the forward looking theories set the direction. Desert fixes the ceiling: he may not be given more than three housebreakings warrant, however useful a longer sentence might be. Within that ceiling the sentence is designed to reform: a term with a treatment condition, supervision on release, and an order for restitution.

Notice that this is precisely what an Indian court does when it applies the pre-sentencing provision the Supreme Court insisted on in Giasuddin, and it is why the theories are set out in a paper on political science rather than left to criminal law.

Distinctions that carry marks

RetributiveDeterrentPreventiveReformativeExpiatory
LooksBackwardForwardForwardForwardBackward and forward
Justified byDesertPrevention by threatRemoval of opportunityChange in the offenderAtonement
MeasureThe offenceEnough to deterAs long as the danger lastsAs long as reform needsThe wrong discharged
Guilt required?Yes, absolutelyNot in principleNot in principleNot in principleYes
Chief exponentKantBenthamBentham and modern penologyGandhi; Krishna Iyer J. in IndiaOlder religious traditions
Its own failurePunishes where nothing is gainedWould punish the innocentDetains on predictionSentence turns on need, not on the actCannot say when the account is settled

What the justification is NOT

It is not a choice of one theory. Every serious modern account combines them, and an answer that picks one and defends it against all comers has missed what the subject has learned.

Combining them is not vagueness. Hart's framework is precise: different theories answer different questions, and each limb excludes a specific abuse.

"Rarest of rare" is not a theory. It is a sentencing rule that gives effect to a combination of them.

A justification is not an explanation. Why societies punish is a question for sociology; whether they are entitled to is this question, and the two are constantly confused.

Quick revision

  1. Five theories: retributive, deterrent, preventive, reformative, expiatory.
  2. Each fails alone: retribution punishes where nothing is gained; deterrence would punish the innocent; prevention detains on prediction; reformation measures by need rather than by the act; expiation cannot say when the account is settled.
  3. The combined theory, associated with Hart: the general justifying aim is forward looking; distribution is governed by desert, so only the guilty; amount is limited by proportionality, within which forward looking aims operate.
  4. Bachan Singh, (1980) 2 SCC 684: sections 302 IPC and 354(3) CrPC upheld; life imprisonment is the rule and death the exception; only in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative option is unquestionably foreclosed.
  5. In that case retribution supplies the threshold, deterrence was not accepted as making death necessary, and reformation appears as the presumption in favour of life imprisonment. The structure is Hart's.
  6. The practical shape of a sentence: aim forward, cap by desert, design for reform below the cap, and add restitution.
munotes.in249

The Justification of Punishment

Test yourself

1. Name the five justifications of punishment and give the measure each proposes. Retributive, measured by the offence itself, since punishment is deserved. Deterrent, measured by what is enough to make the prospect unattractive to the offender and to others. Preventive or incapacitative, measured by how long the danger lasts. Reformative, measured by what will change the offender. And expiatory, measured by what discharges the wrong so that the offender may be restored to the community.

2. Show that no single theory is sufficient. Retribution alone requires punishment where nothing whatever is achieved by it. Deterrence alone does not require the person punished to be guilty, since a convincing public punishment of an innocent would deter equally if the difference were not discovered. Prevention alone justifies detaining a dangerous person who has committed no offence. Reformation alone makes the sentence depend on the offender's condition, so the same offence yields a week for one person and ten years for another and the person needing no reform must be released at once. Expiation alone cannot say when the account is settled.

3. Set out the combined theory and explain how it answers the objections. The theories answer different questions, so they combine rather than compete. The general justifying aim, why have punishment at all, is forward looking and is the prevention of crime. Distribution, whom may be punished, is governed by desert, so only a person guilty of the offence and only for it. Amount, how much, is limited by proportionality, and forward looking considerations operate within that ceiling. Punishing the innocent is thereby excluded by the distribution limb even though the aim is deterrence, disproportion by the amount limb even where it would deter, and reformation operates freely below the ceiling, which is where probation, parole and remission live.

4. How does Bachan Singh illustrate the combined theory? A Constitution Bench upheld section 302 of the Penal Code and section 354(3) of the Code of Criminal Procedure while ruling that for murder life imprisonment is the rule and the death sentence an exception, to be imposed only in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative option is unquestionably foreclosed. Retribution supplies the threshold, since the gravity of the offence is what can carry a case into that category. Deterrence was argued and was not accepted as making the death penalty necessary in ordinary cases. Reformation appears as the presumption in favour of life imprisonment. Desert therefore operates as ceiling and threshold rather than as a command, which is Hart's structure applied to sentencing.

munotes.in250

The Justification of Punishment

5. Apply the theories to a repeat burglar with an untreated addiction. Retribution asks what three deliberate housebreakings deserve, with the addiction reducing culpability without removing it. Deterrence and prevention both pull the sentence upward, prevention indefinitely if left uncapped. Reformation points to a treatment condition and supervision, and if measured by need alone could exceed what the offences deserve. Expiation points to restitution and apology. The combined answer sets prevention as the aim, caps the sentence at what the three offences warrant however useful a longer one might be, designs the sentence within that cap for treatment and supervision, and adds restitution to the households.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in251

Chapter Fifty

The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches

Syllabus topic 2.4.4, "Deterrent, & Preventive approaches"

In one line

The deterrent approach punishes in order to frighten people out of offending; the preventive approach punishes in order to take away the offender's ability to offend, and the two are constantly confused because a prison sentence does both.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the deterrent approach justifies punishment by its effect on the will, holding that the prospect of the penalty will dissuade the offender and others from committing the offence, and it is divided into general deterrence, aimed at the public, and special or particular deterrence, aimed at the offender; the preventive or incapacitative approach justifies punishment by its effect on the capacity to offend, holding that a person imprisoned, disqualified or executed is thereby prevented from committing further offences against the public.

Deterrence

The two kinds

General deterrence operates on everybody except the offender. The sentence is a public message: this is what happens. Bentham regarded this as the principal end of punishment, because it operates on the whole population rather than on one person.

Special or particular deterrence operates on the offender, who is expected to weigh the experience and decline to repeat it.

What deterrence assumes

The assumptions are what an examiner is testing, because each one can fail.

A rational calculator. The person weighs the expected gain against the expected cost before acting.

Knowledge of the penalty. They must know roughly what the punishment is.

Belief in the risk of detection. They must think there is a real chance of being caught, since a penalty that will never be applied costs nothing.

Capacity to act on the calculation. They must be in a state in which the calculation can operate, which excludes offences committed in rage, under intoxication, under compulsion, or by the very young.

Alternatives. A person with no lawful means of subsistence is not choosing between two options in the way the theory requires.

The three variables

The expected cost of an offence is the product of three things, and the ranking between them is the most useful thing in this chapter.

Certainty, the probability of being caught and convicted.

Severity, the size of the penalty.

Celerity, the speed with which it follows.

Bentham's own conclusion, and the modern evidence agree. Certainty matters most. A modest penalty that is very likely deters better than a heavy one that is unlikely, because the offender's expected cost is severity discounted by probability, and the probability of detection for most offences is low. This has a direct practical consequence in India, where conviction rates for many offences are low and delays are long: raising sentences in such a system adds severity to an expectation that is already close to zero, while investment in investigation and in speed changes the multiplier.

munotes.in252

The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches

The evidence

Research findings should be stated carefully, and an answer that does so is much stronger than one that asserts.

Certainty deters, and the effect is real but modest. Increases in the probability of detection are associated with reductions in offending.

Severity has a weak effect at best. Studies of sentence increases repeatedly find small or no effects on offence rates, which is uncomfortable for the way deterrence is usually invoked in public argument.

The death penalty has not been shown to deter murder better than long imprisonment. This is the finding most relevant to the Indian material below. The honest statement is that the studies do not establish a marginal deterrent effect, not that they prove there is none.

Deterrence works better for planned than for impulsive offences, which follows directly from the assumptions above.

The objections

It permits punishing the innocent. If the object is the effect on the public, then the punishment of somebody believed guilty produces the effect whether or not they are.

It permits disproportion. A very heavy sentence for a common minor offence may deter more than a proportionate one. Only desert explains why that is not permissible.

It uses the offender as a means, which is Kant's objection.

It sits badly with the facts about who offends. If most offending is impulsive, opportunistic or driven by dependency, then the theory's central assumption fails for most of the cases it is invoked in.

Prevention or incapacitation

What it is

The offender is deprived of the opportunity to offend. Imprisonment is the ordinary means; disqualification from driving, from holding office or from practising a profession; forfeiture of the instrument of the offence; and, at the limit, death.

Its distinguishing feature. It does not depend on the offender's state of mind at all. A person who is incapacitated does not offend against the public whether or not they are deterred, reformed or remorseful, which is why the theory keeps its appeal in exactly the cases where deterrence fails.

The forms

Selective incapacitation, targeting those assessed as likely to reoffend.

Collective incapacitation, imprisoning a whole class of offender for longer.

Non-custodial incapacitation, which is much of what modern law actually does: disqualification, licence conditions, restraining orders, and prohibitions on holding particular positions. These are important for an answer because they show the theory operating without imprisonment.

The objections

It punishes for what a person may do. The theory's logic is prediction, and prediction about individuals is unreliable. Taken alone it justifies detaining a dangerous person who has committed no offence, which is punishment without a crime.

munotes.in253

The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches

It is only as good as the prediction. Assessments of dangerousness produce both false positives, people detained who would not have offended, and false negatives, and the cost of the first falls on the person detained.

It is expensive and displaces. Incapacitating one offender in a market offence often results in another taking their place, so the offence rate is unchanged.

Its logic has no natural stopping point, which is why every system that uses it caps it with desert.

Prison itself may increase the danger. If the sentence makes the person more likely to offend on release, incapacitation has bought a period of safety at the cost of a longer risk.

The two theories in Indian sentencing

Facts. Bachan Singh v. State of Punjab, (1980) 2 SCC 684. A Constitution Bench considered the validity of the death penalty for murder in section 302 of the Penal Code and of the sentencing procedure in section 354(3) of the Code of Criminal Procedure 1973, which requires special reasons for a death sentence.

Held. Both provisions were upheld, with the rule that for persons convicted of murder life imprisonment is the rule and the death sentence an exception, that a real and abiding concern for the dignity of human life postulates resistance to taking life through the instrumentality of the law, and that this ought not to be done save in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative option is unquestionably foreclosed.

Facts. Machhi Singh v. State of Punjab, (1983) 3 SCC 470. A feud between two families produced seventeen deaths in five incidents in five neighbouring villages in Punjab on the night of 12 and 13 August 1977, the dead and injured including men, women and children related to one Amar Singh and his sister Piaro Bai. Machhi Singh and eleven others were prosecuted in five sessions cases, he being the common accused in each. Four were sentenced to death and nine to life imprisonment, and the death sentences were confirmed by the High Court.

Held. The Court explained the rarest of rare formula and set out guidelines for identifying such cases, grouping the relevant considerations under the manner of commission of the murder, the motive, the anti-social or socially abhorrent nature of the crime, its magnitude, and the personality of the victim. It directed that aggravating and mitigating circumstances be drawn up and balanced, and that death be imposed only where the option of life imprisonment is unquestionably foreclosed.

Why the two cases belong in this chapter. They are where the deterrent and preventive arguments were put to an Indian court and were not allowed to decide the matter. Deterrence was pressed and did not make the death penalty the ordinary sentence for murder. Incapacitation is achieved by life imprisonment, which is why the Court could treat that as the rule. And the guidelines in Machhi Singh are drawn from the offence, that is, from desert, rather than from any prediction about the offender's future conduct, which is desert limiting the forward looking theories in practice.

munotes.in254

The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches

A worked example

A State faces a rise in road accidents caused by drunk driving and considers three measures: raising the maximum sentence from six months to three years; buying breath analysers and deploying them at random on twenty roads every night; and disqualifying convicted drivers from holding a licence for five years.

The first is severity. It raises the penalty for those convicted, and the evidence that severity alone changes behaviour is weak. If the present chance of being stopped is very small, tripling a penalty that is almost never imposed changes the expected cost of drunk driving hardly at all.

The second is certainty, and on both Bentham's reasoning and the modern evidence it is the measure most likely to work. Random and visible testing changes the driver's estimate of being caught, which is the multiplier in the calculation.

The third is incapacitation. A disqualified driver cannot lawfully drive, so the theory operates without any change in their attitude at all. Notice that it is non-custodial, which shows incapacitation does not require prison, and notice its weakness: it works only so far as disqualification is enforced, since a person determined to drive can drive without a licence.

A combined answer. Certainty first, because it changes the calculation; disqualification second, because it works on those the calculation does not reach; and the increase in maximum sentence last, capped by what the offence deserves, because it addresses the smallest of the three variables.

Distinctions that carry marks

DeterrentPreventive or incapacitative
Operates onThe willThe capacity
Works byFear of the consequenceRemoval of the opportunity
Needs the offender to be rational?YesNo
General or particularBoth, and general is Bentham's chief endParticular only
Key variableCertainty, then severity, then celerityDuration of the restriction
Non-custodial formsFines, publicity of convictionDisqualification, forfeiture, restraining orders
Main objectionWould punish the innocent, and permits disproportionPunishes for what a person may do, and depends on prediction
EvidenceCertainty deters; severity weakly at bestWorks while it lasts; displacement is common

What these approaches are NOT

Deterrence is not vengeance. It is entirely forward looking and is indifferent to desert, which is its problem, not its similarity to retribution.

Prevention is not preventive detention. Incapacitation as a theory of punishment follows conviction for an offence. Detention on the basis of what somebody may do, without an offence, is a different thing and raises different constitutional questions.

munotes.in255

The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches

A prison sentence is not evidence for one theory over the other. It deters, incapacitates, and is said to reform, which is precisely why the theories must be separated when they are being assessed.

"Deterrence has failed" is too strong. The accurate statement is that certainty deters and severity does so weakly, and that most public argument invokes the variable with the weakest support.

Quick revision

  1. Deterrence operates on the will; prevention operates on the capacity. A prison sentence does both, which is why they are confused.
  2. General deterrence aims at the public and was Bentham's chief end; special deterrence aims at the offender.
  3. Assumptions: a rational calculator, who knows the penalty, believes in the risk of detection, is in a state to calculate, and has alternatives.
  4. Three variables: certainty, severity, celerity. Certainty matters most, on Bentham's reasoning and on the evidence.
  5. Evidence: certainty deters modestly; severity weakly at best; the death penalty has not been shown to deter murder better than long imprisonment; deterrence works better on planned than on impulsive offences.
  6. Incapacitation does not depend on the offender's state of mind at all, and has non-custodial forms: disqualification, forfeiture, restraining orders.
  7. Objections: deterrence would punish the innocent and permits disproportion; incapacitation punishes for what a person may do, depends on unreliable prediction, and has no natural stopping point.
  8. Bachan Singh made life imprisonment the rule and death the exception; Machhi Singh supplied the guidelines, drawn from the manner, motive, anti-social nature, magnitude and victim, that is, from the offence rather than from prediction.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish the deterrent from the preventive approach. Deterrence operates on the will, seeking to dissuade by making the prospect of the penalty unattractive, and it therefore requires an offender capable of calculating. Prevention operates on the capacity, removing the ability to offend by imprisonment, disqualification, forfeiture or death, and it works whatever the offender thinks or feels. A prison sentence achieves both at once, which is why the two are constantly run together, but they are justified by different arguments and fail in different ways.

2. What does deterrence assume, and when do the assumptions fail? That the offender is a rational calculator who weighs expected gain against expected cost; that they know roughly what the penalty is; that they believe there is a real chance of detection; that they are in a state in which calculation can operate; and that they have lawful alternatives. The assumptions fail for offences committed in rage, under intoxication or compulsion, by the very young, where detection is so improbable that the penalty has no expected cost, and where the offender has no lawful means of subsistence.

munotes.in256

The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches

3. Rank certainty, severity and celerity, and explain the consequence for India. Certainty first, then celerity, then severity. The expected cost of an offence is the penalty discounted by the probability of its being imposed, so a modest penalty that is very likely deters better than a heavy one that is unlikely. The consequence is that in a system with low conviction rates and long delays, raising sentences adds severity to an expectation already close to zero, while investment in investigation, prosecution and speed changes the multiplier and therefore changes behaviour.

4. State the objections to the preventive approach. That it punishes for what a person may do rather than for what they did, so that taken alone it justifies detaining a dangerous person who has committed no offence at all. That it depends on predictions of dangerousness that are unreliable, producing false positives whose cost falls on those wrongly detained. That in market offences it merely displaces, another person taking the incapacitated offender's place. That its logic has no natural stopping point, which is why every system caps it with desert. And that imprisonment may itself increase the risk on release.

5. How do Bachan Singh and Machhi Singh limit these approaches? Bachan Singh upheld the death penalty and the special reasons requirement while ruling that life imprisonment is the rule and death the exception, imposable only in the rarest of rare cases when the alternative option is unquestionably foreclosed, so the deterrent argument did not make death the ordinary sentence for murder and incapacitation was treated as achieved by life imprisonment. Machhi Singh then supplied guidelines drawn from the manner of the killing, the motive, the anti-social nature of the crime, its magnitude and the personality of the victim, all of which are features of the offence rather than predictions about the offender, which is desert limiting the forward looking theories in practice.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in257

Chapter Fifty-One

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.5, "Gandhian thought on Reformative Approach to Punish"

In one line

Gandhi's view is that the offender is a person to be healed rather than an enemy to be crushed, that one may hate the offence and not the offender, and that a prison should work as a hospital works.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the reformative approach holds that the object of punishment is to change the offender so that they do not offend again, and the Gandhian version of it treats crime as a disease of society as much as of the individual, the offender as a patient rather than an enemy, and the prison as a place of treatment; its Indian legal expression is the requirement that a court hear the offender before sentence and consider the circumstances of the criminal and not only the gravity of the crime.

Gandhi's position

Hate the offence and not the offender. Gandhi's formulation is that one should hate the sin and not the sinner, and he treated the distinction as a practical rule and not a pious sentiment: a person who is treated as an enemy will behave as one, and a society that treats offenders as enemies produces more of them.

Crime is a symptom. For Gandhi much offending is produced by poverty, by unemployment, by the destruction of village occupations and by the loss of a moral community. A society that creates those conditions and then punishes the results is punishing its own product.

The offender is capable of change. This follows from his general position that human beings are capable of being reached, which is the same premise that underlies satyagraha at chapter 450: the technique works because the opponent has a conscience, and so does the offender.

Punishment must not degrade. Whatever else is done to a person, they are not to be dehumanised. A punishment that destroys self respect makes reform impossible and is a wrong of the same kind as the offence.

The community is implicated and must act. Gandhi's constructive programme is relevant here: reform of the offender is meaningless if there is nothing to return to.

Self-suffering rather than the infliction of suffering. The pattern of satyagraha applied to wrongdoing generally: the response to a wrong is to take suffering on oneself rather than to inflict it, which is why Gandhi undertook fasts as penance for the failings of his own side.

What the reformative theory means in practice

The theory is not merely an attitude, and an answer that lists its institutional consequences is stronger than one that describes a sentiment.

Individualised sentencing. The sentence is fixed after looking at the offender and not only at the offence, which requires the court to have material about them.

munotes.in258

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

Probation. Release under supervision instead of imprisonment, for offenders for whom prison would do more harm than good.

Parole and remission. Release before the end of the term, conditioned on conduct.

Open prisons and prison labour with wages.

Education, training and treatment inside prison.

Separate systems for children, which is the reformative theory applied to a whole class of offender.

Restorative processes, in which the offender, the victim and the community deal with the consequences of the offence, which is closer to Gandhi than any other modern development.

The Indian authority

Facts. Mohammad Giasuddin v. State of Andhra Pradesh, (1977) 3 SCC 287. The appellant, about twenty eight, an unemployed man who had worked as a junior assistant in the Andhra Pradesh Secretariat, and a co-accused deceived several desperate unemployed young men and obtained sums totalling about twelve hundred rupees by falsely representing that they would secure jobs for them through politically influential friends. Cheating under section 420 of the Penal Code was made out and all three courts below convicted him. He was sentenced to three years of rigorous imprisonment. The Supreme Court granted special leave limited to the question of sentence.

Held. Allowing the appeal in part, the Court held that the pre-sentencing provision in section 248(2) of the Code of Criminal Procedure has a penological significance of far reaching import which the trial magistrate had missed, since at all three tiers the focus had been on the seriousness of the crime and no ray of light on the criminal, or on the social facts surrounding him, had penetrated the forensic mentation. Because the whole territory of punishment in its modern setting was, in the Court's words, virtually virgin so far as this country was concerned, it examined the subject at length for the guidance of the subordinate judiciary. It held that progressive criminologists agree that the Gandhian diagnosis of offenders as patients and his conception of prisons as hospitals, mental and moral, is the key to the pathology of delinquency and to the therapeutic role of punishment; that the whole man is a healthy man and every man is born good; and that criminality is a curable deviance. It observed that a new class of crime arises from the restlessness of the spirit and the frustration of ambitions, and that white collar crime of the kind before it belongs to that condition. The sentence was reduced and the appellant directed to be dealt with on reformative lines.

Why it matters. This is the direct authority for MU's topic. The Gandhian conception is adopted by name by the Supreme Court, and it is adopted to decide a sentence, with the consequence that a court which considers only the gravity of the offence and never the offender has failed to perform the exercise the Code requires.

munotes.in259

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

Facts. Sunil Batra v. Delhi Administration, (1978) 4 SCC 494. Two petitions were heard together. A convict under sentence of death challenged his solitary confinement, contending that section 30(2) of the Prisons Act, which requires that such a prisoner be confined in a cell apart from all others and placed under the charge of a guard, does not authorise solitary confinement and that the jail authorities could not impose such punishment under the guise of giving effect to it. A second petitioner challenged section 56 of the Prisons Act, which empowers the Superintendent to confine a prisoner in irons, as conferring unguided and arbitrary power contrary to articles 14 and 21.

Held. The petitions were dismissed but both sections were read down severely. Section 30(2) does not empower prison authorities to impose solitary confinement on a prisoner under sentence of death, and even jail discipline inhibits solitary confinement as a punishment. Convicts are not by reason of conviction denuded of all fundamental rights. As to bar fetters, they may be imposed only after considering the particular characteristics of the individual prisoner; no ordinary routine reasons will do; reasons must be recorded in the Superintendent's journal and in the prisoner's history ticket in language the prisoner can understand; the case must be reviewed at regular and frequent intervals; the fetters must be removed as soon as it is safe; and the section does not permit their use for an unusually long period, day and night, particularly where the prisoner is in a secure cell from which escape is barely conceivable. Krishna Iyer J., concurring, observed that prison manuals are mostly callous colonial compilations whose copies are largely beyond the prisoner's knowledge, that punishments in civilised societies must not degrade human dignity, and that the cardinal sentencing goal is to change the consciousness of the criminal.

Why it matters. The reformative theory does not stop at the sentence. A theory that says the object is to change the offender, and then permits that offender to be degraded in prison, has contradicted itself. This is the case in which an Indian court said so and imposed procedural controls to make the statement operative.

The criticisms

It measures by need rather than by desert. If the sentence is fixed by what will reform, then two people who did the same thing receive different sentences, and a person who needs a great deal of reform may be detained far longer than the offence warrants. This is the objection that limits the theory rather than defeating it, and the combined theory at chapter 490 answers it by capping the sentence with desert.

munotes.in260

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

It has no answer to the offender who needs no reform. A person who committed a grave offence in circumstances that will never recur requires no treatment at all, and the theory alone would release them immediately.

It can be coercive. Treatment imposed on a person who has not asked for it, and whose release depends on being pronounced cured, gives enormous power to those doing the pronouncing.

It ignores the victim. A theory wholly concerned with the offender's future has little to say to the person harmed, which is why restorative processes are an important supplement.

The evidence on rehabilitation is mixed. Some programmes reduce reoffending and many do not, and the honest position is that the theory's promise is greater than its demonstrated delivery.

And the Indian objection that matters most: prisons do not reform. Overcrowding, understaffing, delay and the very large proportion of undertrial prisoners mean that in practice the institution the theory relies on is not doing the work the theory assigns it. Sunil Batra is evidence for that, and so is every prison inquiry since.

A worked example

A woman with two young children is convicted of stealing food and household goods from a shop on four occasions over three months. She has no previous conviction. Her husband has left, she has no regular income, and the goods were consumed.

A purely retributive sentence looks at four deliberate thefts and fixes a term.

A purely deterrent sentence asks what will discourage others in the locality from shoplifting.

A purely preventive sentence removes her opportunity to steal by imprisoning her.

A reformative sentence, on Gandhi's premises, asks a different question: what produced this, and what will stop it? The offences are consecutive and small, and the pattern is subsistence. Imprisonment removes the children's mother, ends any employment prospect and makes the next offence more likely, so the measure that would satisfy the preventive theory is the one that most damages the reformative aim.

What the Indian authority requires. Under section 248(2), and on Giasuddin, the court must hear her before sentence and take account of the social facts surrounding her, not merely of the four thefts. A sentence of probation with a condition of supervision, an order for restitution, and a referral to whatever assistance exists, is the answer the reformative theory gives.

And the honest limit. If she offends again while on probation, the theory has no further move that does not become preventive. That is not a defect in Gandhi; it is the point at which one theory hands over to another, and a good answer says so.

munotes.in261

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

Distinctions that carry marks

DeterrentPreventiveReformative
AimTo frightenTo disableTo change
Looks atThe public and the offender's fearThe offender's capacityThe offender's condition and circumstances
Measured byWhat is enough to deterHow long the danger lastsWhat reform requires
The offender isAn exampleA riskA person capable of change
Gandhi's imageNot applicableNot applicableThe offender as a patient, the prison as a hospital
Indian authorityBachan Singh, Machhi SinghBachan SinghGiasuddin, Sunil Batra
Its own failureWould punish the innocentDetains on predictionMeasures by need rather than by the act

What the reformative approach is NOT

It is not leniency. A supervised sentence with conditions may be more demanding than a short term of imprisonment, and the theory is compatible with long sentences where reform genuinely requires them, which is precisely why it needs a cap.

It is not a denial of responsibility. Gandhi's offender is a person capable of change, which presupposes that they are an agent and not a mechanism.

"Hate the sin and not the sinner" is not indifference to the offence. The offence is condemned; it is the person who is not written off.

It does not end at the courtroom door. Sunil Batra is the authority for the proposition that a reformative theory which tolerates degradation in prison has contradicted itself.

Quick revision

  1. Gandhi: hate the offence and not the offender; crime is a symptom of social conditions; the offender is capable of change; punishment must not degrade; the community is implicated; and the pattern is self-suffering rather than infliction.
  2. Institutional consequences: individualised sentencing, probation, parole and remission, open prisons, wages for prison labour, education and treatment, separate systems for children, and restorative processes.
  3. Giasuddin, (1977) 3 SCC 287: section 248(2) CrPC has a penological significance the courts below missed; no ray of light on the criminal had reached the sentencing; progressive criminologists agree that the Gandhian diagnosis of offenders as patients and his conception of prisons as hospitals, mental and moral, is the key to the pathology of delinquency; criminality is a curable deviance.
  4. Sunil Batra, (1978) 4 SCC 494: section 30(2) of the Prisons Act does not authorise solitary confinement of a prisoner under sentence of death; convicts are not denuded of all fundamental rights; bar fetters need individual reasons recorded in language the prisoner understands, frequent review, and removal as soon as it is safe.
  5. Criticisms: it measures by need rather than desert; it has nothing to say to the offender who needs no reform; treatment can be coercive; it ignores the victim; the evidence is mixed; and Indian prisons do not in fact reform.
  6. The place it occupies: below the ceiling that desert fixes, which is where the combined theory of chapter 490 puts it.
munotes.in262

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

Test yourself

1. State Gandhi's view of the offender and of punishment. That one should hate the offence and not the offender, treated as a practical rule rather than a sentiment, since a person treated as an enemy behaves as one. That crime is largely a symptom of social conditions, so a society which produces poverty, unemployment and the loss of occupation and community is punishing its own product. That the offender is capable of change, which is the same premise that makes satyagraha possible. That punishment must never degrade, since a punishment destroying self respect makes reform impossible. And that the community is implicated, so reform is meaningless without something to return to.

2. What did the Supreme Court hold in Giasuddin, and why is it the authority for this topic? That the pre-sentencing provision in section 248(2) of the Code of Criminal Procedure carries a penological significance of far reaching import which the trial magistrate had missed, since at all three tiers the focus had been on the gravity of the crime and no ray of light on the criminal or the social facts surrounding him had penetrated the sentencing. It held that progressive criminologists agree that the Gandhian diagnosis of offenders as patients and his conception of prisons as hospitals, mental and moral, is the key to the pathology of delinquency and the therapeutic role of punishment, and that criminality is a curable deviance. It is the authority because the Gandhian conception is adopted by name and applied to decide an actual sentence.

3. Why does Sunil Batra belong in a chapter on the reformative approach? Because a theory whose object is to change the offender contradicts itself if it permits that offender to be degraded once sentenced. The Court held that section 30(2) of the Prisons Act does not authorise solitary confinement of a prisoner under sentence of death, that convicts are not by reason of conviction denuded of all fundamental rights, and that bar fetters require reasons particular to the individual, recorded in language the prisoner can understand, reviewed frequently and removed as soon as it is safe. Krishna Iyer J. added that punishments in civilised societies must not degrade human dignity and that the cardinal sentencing goal is to change the consciousness of the criminal.

4. What is the principal objection to the reformative theory, and how is it answered? That it measures by need rather than by desert, so that two people who did the same thing receive different sentences and a person requiring a great deal of reform may be held far longer than the offence warrants, while an offender needing no reform must be released at once. It is answered not by abandoning the theory but by capping it: the combined theory makes desert the ceiling and lets reformation operate freely below it, which is where probation, parole, remission and treatment conditions belong.

munotes.in263

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

5. "The reformative theory fails in Indian prisons." Discuss. The criticism is factual rather than theoretical and it has force. Overcrowding, understaffing, long delays and a very large proportion of undertrial prisoners mean the institution the theory relies on is not performing the function the theory assigns it, and Sunil Batra is itself evidence of conditions the theory cannot accommodate. The answer is that this is an argument for reforming prisons rather than for abandoning the aim, and that the theory's Indian legal expression is not confined to prison: individualised sentencing, probation, remission and the separate system for children all operate outside it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in264

Chapter Fifty-Two

Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System

Syllabus topic 2.4.6, "Implicit Biases in the Justice Delivery System , Social Injustice and Social Inequality"

In one line

Implicit bias is an association a person carries without being aware of it, which influences their decisions while they believe they are being impartial, and a justice system made of such decisions can produce unequal outcomes without anybody in it being prejudiced.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: implicit bias is an unconscious association between a social group and an attribute, acquired from the surrounding culture, which operates automatically on perception, memory and judgment; it is distinguished from explicit bias, which is consciously held and can be reported, and its significance for the justice delivery system is that it can produce systematically unequal treatment through the ordinary, honest and well-intentioned decisions of individual officers, prosecutors and judges.

The concept, defined precisely

Explicit bias is a belief or attitude a person holds and can state: they know they have it, and they may act on it or restrain it.

Implicit bias is an association operating below awareness. The person does not know it is there, would sincerely deny holding it, and may hold the opposite belief consciously.

Three features follow, and each is examinable.

It is acquired from the environment. Implicit associations reflect the patterns a person has been exposed to, in language, in media, in family and in institutions, rather than anything they decided.

Sincerity is no defence and no evidence. A decision maker who honestly reports having no prejudice may still be affected, which is exactly why the concept exists. Asking officials whether they are biased tests explicit bias only.

It operates hardest where information is thin and time is short. A judgment made quickly, on incomplete facts, with discretion, is where automatic associations fill the gaps. This is precisely the shape of most criminal justice decisions.

Where it can enter a criminal process

Listing the decision points is what turns a general observation into an answer, because each point is a place where discretion exists.

Whether an incident is treated as a crime at all, which is often decided informally at a police station.

Whether a complaint is recorded. A refusal to register is invisible in every subsequent statistic.

Who is stopped, questioned and searched.

Whether a person is arrested or released, and how force is used during arrest.

How witnesses perceive and identify, since perception itself is affected by expectation, and cross-group identification is known to be less reliable.

Whether bail is opposed and granted, where much turns on assessments of respectability, roots in the community and likelihood of absconding, all of which are judgments about a person's social position.

The quality of representation, which depends on means.

Charging decisions, including which of several available offences is charged.

munotes.in265

Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System

Assessments of credibility. A judge or a magistrate decides whom to believe, and confidence, manner, language and accent affect that judgment.

Sentencing, where discretion is widest and where perceptions of remorse, of dangerousness and of prospects of reform are made.

Remission, parole and prison classification.

Why it matters more than individual prejudice

Two reasons, and both are worth marks.

It survives good intentions. A system can be staffed entirely by people who genuinely intend to be fair and still produce unequal outcomes, because the bias operates on the perception and not on the intention. The usual remedies for prejudice, exhortation and codes of conduct, do not reach it.

It compounds. Each decision point produces a small effect, and the points are sequential. A slightly higher probability of being stopped, multiplied by a slightly higher probability of arrest rather than warning, of bail being opposed, of being unrepresented, and of a longer sentence, produces an outcome at the end far more unequal than any single step.

How it is measured, and the honest limits

An answer that reports the measurement critically is a much better answer than one that treats the science as settled.

Implicit association tests measure how quickly a person pairs categories with attributes, on the reasoning that faster pairing reveals a stronger association.

Audit and correspondence studies send otherwise identical applications or complaints differing only in a marker of group identity and compare the responses. These are the most persuasive design because everything else is held constant.

Outcome studies compare decisions across groups while controlling for legally relevant factors, and attribute the residue to something other than the facts.

The limits, stated plainly. The link between scores on association tests and actual behaviour is contested and appears to be weak at the individual level. Outcome studies can never control for everything, so a residue is evidence and not proof. And a finding about a population does not tell you anything about a particular decision. What survives all of this is the audit design, which is why it carries most of the weight.

What can be done about it

Reduce discretion where it is not needed. Structured decisions, checklists and stated criteria narrow the space in which automatic associations operate.

Require reasons. A decision that must be explained is a decision the maker has to examine, which is the practical value of the requirement in Sunil Batra that reasons for bar fetters be recorded in the prisoner's history ticket.

Blind the decision where possible. Removing identifying information at the point of decision is the most effective single intervention where it can be done.

Change the conditions. Bias operates hardest under time pressure and cognitive load, so reducing caseloads and delay is a bias measure and not only an efficiency measure.

munotes.in266

Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System

Collect and publish disaggregated data. Nothing can be corrected that is not measured, and the absence of data is itself a policy choice.

Diversify the decision makers, which changes both the associations in the room and the willingness of others to challenge a judgment.

Training, with a caution. Awareness training alone has a poor record and can produce complacency. It is worth doing as part of a package and is not a substitute for structural change.

A worked example

Two men are arrested on the same night in the same city for the same offence, an assault outside a bar. Both are twenty six, both were drinking, neither has a previous conviction, and the injuries are identical.

The first speaks the language of the officers, is dressed in office clothes, gives an address in a housing society, and produces a colleague who vouches for him.

The second speaks a different first language, works on a construction site, gives an address at a labour camp, and has nobody to call at two in the morning.

Trace the sequence. The first is more likely to be released on station bail or to have his arrest treated as a formality. The second is more likely to be produced before a magistrate. At the bail hearing the first has an address that is verifiable, employment that is documented and a surety; the second has none of these, and every one of the criteria applied at that hearing correlates with social position rather than with the risk the criteria are meant to measure. The first engages a lawyer of his choice; the second waits for legal aid. The first is at liberty and can gather evidence; the second cannot. At trial the first appears from the body of the court, composed, and the second from custody.

Notice what has not happened. No officer, magistrate or judge has held any prejudice or done anything improper. Every decision is defensible in isolation, and each was made on a criterion that looks neutral. The inequality was produced by the accumulation, and by criteria that are proxies for social position.

And notice the remedy this suggests. It is not to exhort the officials. It is to change the criteria: to accept alternative proofs of identity and residence, to fix bail conditions that do not require a surety with property, to provide representation at the first hearing rather than later, and to publish the figures on who is released and who is not.

Distinctions that carry marks

Explicit biasImplicit bias
AwarenessThe person knows and can report itThe person does not know and would deny it
Consistency with stated beliefConsistentMay be the opposite of what the person believes
How detectedAsking, and conductAssociation tests, audit studies, outcome analysis
RemedyRules, discipline, removalStructure, blinding, reasons, data, conditions
Legal characterisationDiscrimination, and often an offenceUsually not actionable against an individual; a systemic problem
munotes.in267

Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System

Individual prejudiceStructural inequality
Located inA personRules, procedures and criteria
Requires an intentionYesNo
Fixed byRemoving or disciplining the personChanging the rule or the criterion
ExampleAn officer who refuses to record a complaint from a particular groupA bail criterion requiring a surety with immovable property

What implicit bias is NOT

It is not an accusation of prejudice. The entire point of the concept is that it operates in people who are not prejudiced, and treating it as an accusation guarantees that the discussion will go nowhere.

It is not an excuse. That a bias was unconscious does not make the outcome acceptable; it changes the remedy from blame to redesign.

It is not proved by an unequal outcome alone. An unequal outcome is consistent with bias and with other explanations, and the work of an argument is to eliminate the others.

It is not the whole of the problem. Chapter 530 deals with the part that is structural and needs no bias at all: money, delay, representation, and who can afford to defend themselves.

Quick revision

  1. Implicit bias is an unconscious association operating on perception, memory and judgment; explicit bias is consciously held and reportable.
  2. Sincerity is neither a defence nor evidence, which is why asking officials whether they are biased tests only explicit bias.
  3. It operates hardest where information is thin, time is short and discretion is wide, which describes most criminal justice decisions.
  4. Decision points: whether an incident is treated as a crime, registration, stop and search, arrest, identification, bail, representation, charge, credibility, sentencing, remission and parole.
  5. Two reasons it matters: it survives good intentions, and it compounds across sequential decisions.
  6. Measurement: association tests (contested), audit studies (strongest), outcome studies (evidence, not proof).
  7. Remedies: reduce unnecessary discretion, require reasons, blind the decision, reduce time pressure, publish disaggregated data, diversify decision makers, and treat training as a supplement rather than a solution.

Test yourself

1. Define implicit bias and distinguish it from explicit bias. Implicit bias is an unconscious association between a social group and an attribute, acquired from the surrounding culture, which operates automatically on perception, memory and judgment. Explicit bias is a belief or attitude the person holds consciously and can report. The crucial difference is awareness: a person affected by implicit bias would sincerely deny holding it and may consciously believe the opposite, which is why sincerity is neither a defence nor evidence, and why asking officials whether they are biased tests only the explicit kind.

munotes.in268

Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System

2. Where can implicit bias enter a criminal process? At every point where discretion exists: whether an incident is treated as a crime at all; whether a complaint is registered; who is stopped, questioned and searched; whether a person is arrested or released and how force is used; how witnesses perceive and identify; whether bail is opposed and granted; the quality of representation; which offence is charged; assessments of credibility; sentencing, where discretion is widest; and remission, parole and prison classification.

3. Why does implicit bias matter more than individual prejudice? Because it survives good intentions, so a system staffed entirely by people who genuinely mean to be fair can still produce unequal outcomes, and the usual remedies for prejudice, exhortation and codes of conduct, do not reach it. And because it compounds: each decision point contributes a small effect and the points are sequential, so slightly higher probabilities of being stopped, arrested, refused bail, left unrepresented and sentenced longer multiply into an outcome far more unequal than any single step would suggest.

4. How is implicit bias measured, and what are the limits of the evidence? By implicit association tests, which time how quickly categories are paired with attributes; by audit or correspondence studies, which send otherwise identical applications differing only in a marker of group identity; and by outcome studies, which compare decisions across groups while controlling for legally relevant factors. The limits are real: the link between association test scores and individual behaviour is contested and weak, outcome studies cannot control for everything so a residue is evidence rather than proof, and population findings say nothing about a particular decision. The audit design carries most of the weight because everything else is held constant.

5. What can be done about it? Reduce discretion where it is not needed by structuring decisions and stating criteria. Require reasons, since a decision that must be explained is one the maker has to examine. Blind the decision to identifying information wherever that is possible, which is the single most effective intervention. Reduce time pressure and caseload, since bias operates hardest under load. Collect and publish disaggregated data, because nothing unmeasured can be corrected. Diversify decision makers. And treat awareness training as a supplement, since alone it has a poor record and can produce complacency.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in269

Chapter Fifty-Three

Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.6, "Implicit Biases in the Justice Delivery System , Social Injustice and Social Inequality"

In one line

Even a system with no biased person in it will punish the poor more than the rich, because almost every stage of a criminal process costs money, time and standing, and those are exactly what the poor do not have.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: social inequality affects punishment not only through the prejudices of individuals but structurally, because criminal procedure at every stage distributes advantages according to wealth, literacy, social standing and access to representation, so that formally equal rules produce systematically unequal outcomes, and because the conduct that is defined and enforced as crime is itself shaped by who has the power to define it.

The structural argument, in five steps

1. Formal equality is not substantive equality

The law is the same for everybody, and that is the problem rather than the answer. Anatole France's observation is the classic statement of the point: the law in its majestic equality forbids rich and poor alike to sleep under bridges, to beg in the streets and to steal bread. A rule that applies identically to unequal people produces unequal results.

2. Every stage of a criminal process has a price

Being stopped. Policing is concentrated where it is visible and cheap, which is public space, and people who live and work in public space are poor.

Bail. Release before trial commonly depends on a surety, on proof of a permanent address and on documented employment. Each of those is a proxy for property and settled work rather than for the risk of absconding. A person who cannot furnish them remains in custody though the law grants them bail.

Representation. Article 39A of the Constitution directs the State to secure that the operation of the legal system promotes justice on a basis of equal opportunity and, in particular, to provide free legal aid so that opportunities for securing justice are not denied to any citizen by reason of economic or other disabilities. The gap between that direction and the quality actually available is where much of this topic lives.

Time. A trial requires attendance on many dates. A salaried person takes leave; a daily wage earner loses the day's wage each time, and after several dates may prefer to plead guilty to a minor offence rather than continue.

Fines. A fixed fine is a trivial sum for one person and a month's food for another, which is why day-fine systems, calibrated to income, exist elsewhere.

Appeal. An appeal costs money and requires somebody to conduct it.

3. Custody before conviction does the work of punishment

The most important structural fact in the Indian criminal process, and it needs no bias at all. A person who cannot obtain bail undergoes confinement, loss of employment, loss of housing and damage to reputation, all before any finding of guilt, and often for longer than the sentence the offence would carry. Every justification in chapter 460 is unavailable, because there is no conviction, no finding, and often in the end no offence.

munotes.in270

Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment

4. Who defines crime, and what is enforced

Definition. Conduct characteristic of the poor is more often defined as an offence, and enforced when it is: encroachment, unlicensed vending, begging, sleeping in public places. Conduct characteristic of the wealthy is more often regulated than criminalised, and where it is criminal it is prosecuted by specialised agencies, slowly, with the accused at liberty and represented throughout.

Detection. Offences committed in public are detected easily; offences committed through documents and companies require investigation capacity that is scarce.

This is the Marxist argument of chapter 370 in its concrete form, and it can be made without accepting the rest of Marxism: the criminal law's shape reflects the interests of those with the power to shape it.

5. The consequences of punishment are themselves unequal

A conviction costs a professional their licence and a labourer their next job; a fine ends one person's inconvenience and another's savings; imprisonment removes one household's second income and another household's only one. The same sentence is not the same punishment.

What the Indian data shows, and where to find it

The house rule forbids quoting figures that have not been read, so this section teaches what to look for rather than asserting numbers.

The source is the National Crime Records Bureau's annual Prison Statistics India, published by the Ministry of Home Affairs, together with the periodic reports of the Law Commission of India and of the National Human Rights Commission.

The four things to look for in it.

The share of prisoners who are undertrials rather than convicts. This is the single most revealing number in the volume, because every one of those persons is in custody without a finding of guilt.

Occupancy against capacity, which measures overcrowding.

The composition of the prison population by education and by community, compared with the composition of the general population. A large divergence is the beginning of an argument and not the end of one, because it is consistent with several explanations.

The duration of pre-trial detention, compared with the maximum sentence for the offence charged.

How to use the figures in an answer. Report them as evidence requiring explanation rather than as proof of discrimination, and set out the competing explanations: differential offending, differential detection, differential ability to obtain bail and representation, and bias. The strength of a candidate's answer lies in eliminating explanations, not in the size of the disparity quoted.

munotes.in271

Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment

What can be done

Bail reform. Reduce reliance on sureties and on documentary proof of address and employment, and provide for release on personal bond where the offence and the record permit.

Representation at the first hearing, rather than at the trial, since the decisions that matter most are taken early.

Fines calibrated to means, so that the burden of a penalty is comparable across incomes.

Speed. Delay is a tax that falls on those who cannot afford to wait, so reducing it is a measure of equality and not only of efficiency.

Decriminalising conduct that is a consequence of poverty, and dealing with it by regulation, licensing or assistance instead, which is Bentham's fourth class of case at chapter 480.

Publishing disaggregated data, since a disparity that is not measured cannot be corrected.

A worked example

Two people are charged with the same offence: causing hurt in a quarrel, punishable with a short term of imprisonment or a fine.

A is a salaried professional. He is granted bail on the same day on a personal bond with a colleague as surety, engages a lawyer, attends four hearings by taking leave, and is eventually acquitted, or convicted and fined an amount equal to two days' income.

B is a migrant construction worker. He cannot produce a local surety or proof of a permanent address, so bail is granted and cannot be furnished. He spends eleven weeks in custody, during which he loses his job and his place in the labour camp. Legal aid counsel meets him on the day of the hearing. He is advised that pleading guilty will end the matter and that contesting will take another year, and he pleads guilty. The fine is the same amount as A's, which for him is three weeks of food.

Now list the differences. Not one of them is a bias. Every rule applied to both men identically. The differences are: the surety requirement, the proof of address, the availability of counsel at the first hearing, the ability to take leave, the value of time, and the value of money. Each is neutral on its face.

And notice the outcome. B, who may well be innocent, has been punished more than A, who may well be guilty, and the record will show that B was convicted and A was not. Every statistic built on that record will report that people like B commit more offences.

Distinctions that carry marks

Implicit biasStructural inequality
Requires an association in somebody's mindYesNo
Located inDecisionsRules, criteria and procedures
Detected byAudit studies, outcome analysisReading the rule and asking who can satisfy it
ExampleA credibility judgment affected by accentA bail condition requiring a surety with property
RemedyBlinding, reasons, structureChange the criterion
Can persist in a system of entirely fair-minded peopleYesYes, and more easily
munotes.in272

Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment

What this topic is NOT

It is not the claim that the poor commit more crime. It is the claim that the process converts poverty into conviction, and that the resulting statistics then look like evidence of the first claim.

It is not an argument for impunity. Nothing here suggests that offences should go unpunished; it suggests that the burden of the process should not fall where it presently does.

It is not solved by better people. The rules would produce these outcomes if every officer, prosecutor and judge were beyond reproach.

It is not a foreign import. The Constitution's own article 39A recognises the problem in terms, which is why the topic belongs in an Indian answer rather than an American one.

Quick revision

  1. Formal equality is not substantive equality: a rule applied identically to unequal people produces unequal results, which is the point of France's remark about sleeping under bridges.
  2. Every stage has a price: policing of public space, bail and its surety requirements, representation, the cost of attending hearings, fixed fines, and appeals.
  3. Custody before conviction does the work of punishment, and every justification of punishment is unavailable for it because there has been no finding.
  4. Definition and detection are unequal: conduct characteristic of the poor is criminalised and easily detected; conduct characteristic of the wealthy is regulated and hard to detect.
  5. The consequences of the same sentence are unequal, so the same punishment is not the same punishment.
  6. The source for figures is NCRB's Prison Statistics India, and the four things to look for are the undertrial share, occupancy against capacity, composition by education and community against the general population, and pre-trial detention against the maximum sentence. Report them as evidence requiring explanation, not as proof.
  7. Remedies: bail reform, representation at the first hearing, means-calibrated fines, speed, decriminalising conduct that is a consequence of poverty, and publishing disaggregated data.
  8. Article 39A directs the State to secure equal opportunity in the legal system and to provide free legal aid so that justice is not denied by economic or other disabilities.

Test yourself

1. Explain the structural argument that punishment falls unequally. That criminal procedure distributes advantages by wealth, standing and access to representation, so that identical rules produce unequal outcomes. Policing concentrates on public space, where the poor live and work. Bail commonly requires a surety, a permanent address and documented employment, all proxies for property rather than for the risk of absconding. Representation depends on means. Attending hearings costs a daily wage earner a day's wage each time. Fixed fines are trivial for one person and a month's food for another. And appeals cost money. None of this requires anybody to be biased.

munotes.in273

Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment

2. Why is pre-trial custody the most important fact in this topic? Because it inflicts the whole substance of punishment, confinement, loss of employment and housing, and damage to reputation, on a person against whom there has been no finding of guilt, and frequently for longer than the sentence the offence carries. Every justification examined in this module is unavailable for it: there is no desert because there is no conviction, no deterrent message because no wrong has been established, and no reformative aim because there is nothing yet to reform. It is punishment without any of the elements that make punishment permissible.

3. How does inequality operate at the stage of defining crime? Conduct characteristic of the poor is more readily defined as an offence and is easy to detect because it happens in public: encroachment, unlicensed vending, begging and sleeping in public places. Conduct characteristic of the wealthy is more often regulated than criminalised, and where it is criminal it is committed through documents and companies, requiring investigative capacity that is scarce, and it is prosecuted slowly with the accused at liberty and represented. This is the concrete form of the Marxist argument, and it can be made without accepting the rest of that theory.

4. What should a student look for in Prison Statistics India, and how should it be used? The share of prisoners who are undertrials rather than convicts, which is the single most revealing figure since each of those persons is confined without a finding; occupancy against sanctioned capacity, which measures overcrowding; the composition of the prison population by education and community compared with the general population; and the length of pre-trial detention compared with the maximum sentence for the offence charged. The figures should be reported as evidence requiring explanation rather than as proof of discrimination, and the competing explanations, differential offending, differential detection, differential access to bail and representation, and bias, should be set against each other.

5. What reforms follow from this analysis? Bail reform, reducing reliance on sureties and documentary proof of address and employment and providing for personal bonds. Representation at the first hearing rather than at trial, since the decisions that matter are taken early. Fines calibrated to means so that the burden is comparable across incomes. Reduction of delay, which is a tax falling on those who cannot afford to wait. Decriminalising conduct that is a consequence of poverty and dealing with it by regulation or assistance, which is Bentham's fourth class of case. And publishing disaggregated data, since a disparity that is not measured cannot be corrected.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in274

Chapter Fifty-Four

Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States

Syllabus topic 2.4.7, "Ethnic profiling in the European Union and US ,Case Study- Black Lives Matter Movement"

In one line

Ethnic profiling is the use of a person's race, ethnicity, religion or national origin, rather than their individual behaviour, as a ground for stopping, searching or investigating them, and the objection to it is that it is unlawful discrimination and that it does not work.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: ethnic profiling is the reliance by law enforcement or other authorities on race, ethnicity, religion, national origin or language, without objective and reasonable justification, as a basis for decisions to stop, question, search, detain or investigate; it is prohibited as direct or indirect discrimination under European Union and Council of Europe instruments, and it is criticised as ineffective, because it lowers the accuracy of policing, and as counterproductive, because it destroys the cooperation on which policing depends.

What profiling is, and what it is not

Criminal profiling is lawful and ordinary. A description of a suspect from a witness, an assessment of behaviour, or an intelligence-led operation based on evidence about a particular group of offenders are all normal policing.

Ethnic profiling is the use of a group characteristic as a proxy for individual suspicion. The officer's ground for acting is not what this person did but which category they belong to.

The distinguishing question is therefore individual behaviour. If the reason for the stop would survive the removal of the person's ethnicity from the description, it is not ethnic profiling. If it would not, it is.

A hard case worth stating, because examiners like it. Where a witness describes a specific offender by, among other things, their appearance, using that description is not profiling: it is identification of an individual. Where officers stop members of a group because offenders of that description have committed offences in the area, it is profiling, because the ground is category membership.

Why it is unlawful in the European Union

The clearest anchor is the Union's own legislation, and it is worth quoting because it captures profiling precisely.

Council Directive 2000/43/EC of 29 June 2000 implements the principle of equal treatment between persons irrespective of racial or ethnic origin.

Article 2 defines both kinds of discrimination. Direct discrimination occurs where one person is treated less favourably than another is, has been or would be treated in a comparable situation on grounds of racial or ethnic origin. And indirect discrimination is taken to occur where an apparently neutral provision, criterion or practice would put persons of a racial or ethnic origin at a particular disadvantage compared with other persons, unless that provision, criterion or practice is objectively justified by a legitimate aim and the means of achieving that aim are appropriate and necessary.

Why the second definition matters most for this topic. A police force will rarely have a written instruction to stop members of a particular group. What it will have is a practice, neutral on its face, which in operation falls overwhelmingly on one group. The Directive's definition reaches exactly that, and it puts the burden on the authority to show a legitimate aim and means that are appropriate and necessary. Necessity is the demanding word: it is not enough that profiling helps a little; it must be shown that no less discriminatory means would do.

munotes.in275

Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States

Beyond the Directive, the general framework is the prohibition of discrimination in the European Convention on Human Rights read with the right to respect for private life, and the equivalent guarantees in the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union. Both are the subject of a substantial case law of the European Court of Human Rights, which a student should look up rather than take from a summary.

Why it is contested in the United States

The American position differs in structure, and the difference is worth an answer.

The constitutional handles are two, and they operate differently. The Fourth Amendment governs stops and searches and asks whether they were reasonable. The Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment governs discrimination and asks whether the person was treated unequally on a prohibited ground.

The practical difficulty in American law is that an equal protection claim generally requires proof of discriminatory purpose and not merely of discriminatory effect. That is the reverse of the European Directive's approach to indirect discrimination, and it is why disparities in stop rates have been so much harder to litigate in the United States than the raw numbers would suggest.

Where American law has moved is through litigation about particular programmes, through consent decrees with individual police departments, through data collection requirements imposed on forces, and through State legislation. An Indian student should notice the pattern: the remedy has come from measurement and supervision of individual forces rather than from a single national rule.

Why profiling does not work

The efficiency argument is the one that persuades people who are not moved by the rights argument, and a good answer gives both.

It lowers the hit rate. Where a group is stopped at a much higher rate than others, the proportion of stops that find anything is generally lower for that group, not higher. That is the crucial measurement: it means officers are applying a lower threshold of suspicion to members of the profiled group, and a lower threshold produces worse decisions.

It is easily defeated. Any organised offender can select participants who do not fit the profile, so profiling displaces offending onto people the profile does not describe, while the police continue to look at people it does.

munotes.in276

Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States

It wastes capacity. Stops that find nothing consume officer time that could have been used on behavioural indicators, which perform better.

It destroys cooperation. Policing depends on information from the public: complaints made, witnesses who come forward, communities that talk to officers. A group that experiences policing as harassment supplies less of all three, and the loss is invisible in any statistic of stops.

It is self-confirming. Concentrating attention on a group produces more detected offences among that group, which is then cited as the justification for the concentration. The statistic measures where the police looked, not where offending is.

The link to the previous two chapters

It is bias made operational. Chapter 520's implicit associations become a formal or informal practice.

It is structural inequality with an ethnic marker. Chapter 530's argument was that neutral criteria fall unequally by class; this is the same argument with ethnicity as the axis.

And it is what Bentham's third and fourth classes forbid. Punishment and enforcement that produce less benefit than harm, and that could be achieved by better means, are unprofitable and needless in his sense.

A worked example

A city's police introduce a stop and search operation in a commercial district after a rise in thefts. Officers are told to look for people who appear not to belong in the area.

Is this ethnic profiling? The instruction does not mention ethnicity, which is what makes it a good example. But "appears not to belong" is a criterion that officers will apply using dress, language, and appearance, and in operation it will fall on migrants and on the poor.

Apply the Directive's test. Is there an apparently neutral provision, criterion or practice? Yes, the instruction. Does it put persons of a racial or ethnic origin at a particular disadvantage? That is a question of measurement, answered by recording the ethnicity of those stopped and comparing it with the composition of people present in the district, which is the correct comparator and not the composition of the city. Is it objectively justified by a legitimate aim? Reducing theft is legitimate. Are the means appropriate and necessary? This is where the operation fails, if a criterion based on observed behaviour, such as trying door handles or watching a shop entrance, would achieve as much without the disparate effect.

And the efficiency test. Record the hit rate: what proportion of stops of each group produced any finding. If the rate is lower for the group stopped most, the operation is applying a lower threshold to that group and is producing worse decisions as well as unequal ones.

munotes.in277

Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States

What a lawful operation would look like. Criteria stated in terms of behaviour; reasons recorded for each stop; ethnicity and outcome recorded and published; supervision of officers whose hit rates are outliers; and review of the operation against its own figures.

Distinctions that carry marks

Criminal profilingEthnic profiling
Ground of suspicionBehaviour, or a description of an individualMembership of a group
Would it survive removing ethnicity from the description?YesNo
Lawful?YesProhibited as direct or indirect discrimination
Effect on hit rateRaises itGenerally lowers it for the profiled group
Effect on cooperationNeutralDestroys it
European Union approachUnited States approach
Principal instrumentDirective 2000/43/EC and the human rights frameworkFourth Amendment and the Equal Protection Clause
Effect or purposeIndirect discrimination reaches disparate effectEqual protection generally requires discriminatory purpose
BurdenOn the authority to show a legitimate aim and means appropriate and necessaryOn the claimant
Route to remedyLegislation and supranational courtsLitigation, consent decrees, data requirements, State law

What ethnic profiling is NOT

It is not all use of appearance. Acting on a witness's description of a particular offender identifies an individual and is not profiling.

It is not always deliberate. Much of it is produced by neutral instructions applied through implicit associations, which is why the indirect discrimination test matters more than any inquiry into intention.

It is not defended by the disparity in offending. Even if a group offended at a higher rate, that would not license stopping its members without individual suspicion, and the disparity itself is partly produced by where the police look.

It is not a purely foreign topic. The concept applies wherever policing uses group markers as proxies for suspicion, and every one of the analytical tools in this chapter, the hit rate, the correct comparator, the necessity test and the recording of reasons, can be applied in India.

Quick revision

  1. Ethnic profiling is reliance on race, ethnicity, religion, national origin or language, without objective and reasonable justification, as a ground for stopping, searching, detaining or investigating.
  2. The test: would the reason for the stop survive removing ethnicity from the description? If not, it is profiling.
  3. Directive 2000/43/EC, article 2: direct discrimination is less favourable treatment on grounds of racial or ethnic origin; indirect discrimination is where an apparently neutral provision, criterion or practice puts persons of a racial or ethnic origin at a particular disadvantage, unless objectively justified by a legitimate aim and the means are appropriate and necessary.
  4. Indirect discrimination is the operative concept, because forces rarely have a written instruction and always have a practice.
  5. In the United States the Fourth Amendment governs the stop and the Equal Protection Clause the discrimination, and the requirement of discriminatory purpose makes disparate effect much harder to litigate. Remedies have come through data requirements and supervision of individual forces.
  6. Why it does not work: it lowers the hit rate, which shows a lower threshold of suspicion is being applied; it is easily defeated; it wastes capacity; it destroys cooperation; and it is self-confirming.
  7. A lawful operation: behavioural criteria, recorded reasons, recorded ethnicity and outcomes, published figures, supervision of outliers, and review against the numbers.
munotes.in278

Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States

Test yourself

1. Define ethnic profiling and give the test that identifies it. It is reliance by law enforcement on race, ethnicity, religion, national origin or language, without objective and reasonable justification, as a basis for deciding to stop, question, search, detain or investigate. The test is whether the ground of suspicion is individual behaviour or category membership: if the reason for the stop would survive the removal of the person's ethnicity from the description, it is ordinary criminal profiling; if it would not, it is ethnic profiling.

2. How does European Union law reach a police practice that mentions nobody's ethnicity? Through the definition of indirect discrimination in article 2 of Council Directive 2000/43/EC, under which discrimination occurs where an apparently neutral provision, criterion or practice would put persons of a racial or ethnic origin at a particular disadvantage compared with others, unless that provision, criterion or practice is objectively justified by a legitimate aim and the means of achieving it are appropriate and necessary. Since a force will rarely have a written instruction naming a group but will have practices that fall unequally in operation, this definition rather than the definition of direct discrimination does the work, and the word "necessary" requires the authority to show that no less discriminatory means would achieve the aim.

3. Why has profiling been harder to challenge in the United States? Because the two constitutional handles operate differently and neither maps onto disparate effect. The Fourth Amendment asks whether a stop or search was reasonable, which is a question about the individual encounter. The Equal Protection Clause reaches discrimination but generally requires proof of discriminatory purpose rather than discriminatory effect, which is the reverse of the European approach to indirect discrimination. The result is that statistical disparity, however large, does not by itself establish a claim, and reform has come instead through litigation against particular programmes, consent decrees, data collection requirements and State legislation.

4. Explain the hit rate argument. The hit rate is the proportion of stops that produce any finding. If a group is stopped far more often than others and yet a smaller proportion of those stops finds anything, the difference cannot be explained by that group offending more; it shows that officers are applying a lower threshold of suspicion to its members. A lower threshold means worse decisions, so profiling reduces the accuracy of policing at the same time as it increases its unfairness, which is why the efficiency argument and the rights argument point the same way.

munotes.in279

Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States

5. Why is profiling described as self-confirming? Because concentrating attention on a group produces more detected offences among that group, and the resulting statistics are then cited as the justification for the concentration. What such a statistic measures is where the police looked rather than where offending occurred. The way to break the circle is to record the ethnicity and outcome of every stop, to compare stops against the composition of the population actually present in the area rather than the whole city, and to publish the hit rates, since only then does the disparity become visible as a fact about policing rather than about offending.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in280

Chapter Fifty-Five

Black Lives Matter: A Case Study

Syllabus topic 2.4.7, "Ethnic profiling in the European Union and US ,Case Study- Black Lives Matter Movement"

In one line

Black Lives Matter is a movement that arose from the deaths of Black people in encounters with police in the United States, and its importance for this syllabus is that it puts every question in Module II at once: whether the law is just, what a citizen owes it, how they may resist, and whether punishment is being administered equally.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Black Lives Matter is a decentralised social movement that began in the United States in 2013 and grew internationally, which asserts that Black people are subjected to disproportionate and often lethal force by the police, that the criminal justice system enforces the law unequally against them, and that the remedy requires structural change in policing rather than the discipline of individual officers; it is significant for political theory because it raises the problem of obedience to a legal order that a section of the population experiences as unjust in its operation rather than in its terms.

What happened

The origin. The movement's name and organisation date from 2013, arising from the acquittal of the man who had shot an unarmed Black teenager, Trayvon Martin, in Florida in 2012. It became a national movement in 2014 after the deaths of Michael Brown in Ferguson, Missouri, and Eric Garner in New York, and the decisions of grand juries not to indict the officers involved.

The expansion. In May 2020 the death of George Floyd during an arrest in Minneapolis, recorded on video by a bystander, produced protests across the United States and in many other countries, including large demonstrations in Europe where the local grievances were about local policing rather than American policing.

The form of the movement. It is decentralised, with no single leadership, organised largely through networks and social platforms, and it has repeatedly produced local campaigns with different demands. That structure is itself a subject for analysis and appears in the criticisms below.

What is claimed

An answer must state the claims precisely, because they are different in kind and are supported by different sorts of evidence.

Disproportionate use of force, including lethal force, in police encounters with Black people.

Unequal enforcement, so that the same conduct is more likely to be detected, charged and punished when the person is Black. This is chapter 530's structural argument with ethnicity as the axis.

Profiling, which is chapter 540 exactly: stops made on the ground of appearance rather than behaviour.

Failure of accountability, meaning that officers are rarely prosecuted and still more rarely convicted, so the ordinary mechanism by which a legal system corrects itself does not operate.

And a claim about the structure rather than the individuals: that the pattern is produced by rules, training, incentives and legal doctrines, so that disciplining individual officers cannot correct it.

munotes.in281

Black Lives Matter: A Case Study

That last claim is the analytically important one, and it is the reason the movement belongs in a political science paper rather than in a criminal law one. It is a claim about institutions, and it is answered, if at all, by evidence about institutions.

The demands, and the argument between them

The movement has produced demands of three quite different kinds, and distinguishing them is where a strong answer is made.

Accountability demands. Body cameras, independent investigation of deaths in custody, publication of complaint records, removal of doctrines that shield officers from suit, and the prosecution of officers where the evidence warrants it. These accept the institution and seek to make it answerable.

Reallocation demands. The slogan "defund the police" covers a range from redirecting a share of police budgets to mental health, housing and social services, to abolishing police departments in their present form. The moderate version is a claim about which agency should respond to which problem; the strong version is a claim about the institution's existence.

Structural demands. Ending profiling, ending practices that produce disparate impact, and changing the legal standards that govern the use of force.

The three are frequently run together by supporters and by opponents, and doing so damages the argument in both directions. An answer that separates them can then say which are supported by the movement's own analysis and which do not follow from it.

What changed

Measurable institutional change. Requirements for body cameras and for recording and publishing stop data in many jurisdictions; changes to use of force policies in a number of departments, including restrictions on chokeholds and duties to intervene; and legislation in several American States on investigation of deaths in custody.

Prosecutions. The officer who knelt on George Floyd's neck was convicted of murder, which was widely treated as significant precisely because such convictions had been rare.

Public opinion and vocabulary. Terms such as systemic racism and structural inequality moved from academic writing into ordinary political speech.

And a reaction. In several jurisdictions the response included legislation restricting protest, increasing penalties for obstruction of highways, and protecting officers from suit, which is a fact an honest answer includes because it bears directly on the question of whether lawful channels remain open.

The criticisms

Its decentralisation is a strength and a weakness. It allowed rapid growth and made the movement hard to suppress or to co-opt, and it also left it without a body that could negotiate, could discipline participants, or could disavow those who used its name for violence.

Some protests involved violence and destruction of property, which the movement's own leadership condemned. Chapter 430's requirement of self-purification is exactly what a decentralised movement cannot deliver, and Gandhi's rule 9, suspension when one's own side turns violent, has no mechanism in such a structure.

munotes.in282

Black Lives Matter: A Case Study

"Defund" damaged the case. A slogan capable of being read as abolition was used to answer demands that were mostly about reallocation, and it allowed opponents to reply to the strongest version of a claim that most supporters were not making.

The evidence is contested. The existence of large racial disparities in stops, arrests and incarceration is well documented; the interpretation, and in particular the extent to which disparities in police use of lethal force persist after controlling for the circumstances of encounters, is genuinely disputed among researchers. An answer that acknowledges this is stronger than one that does not.

Transferability. European protests borrowed the American vocabulary for grievances with different histories, and a comparison that assumes the American analysis applies unchanged elsewhere is doing the work badly.

Why this case study closes Module II

This is the part of the chapter that earns marks, because MU has placed the case study at the end of a module about obligation, and it is worth asking why.

On political obligation, chapter 240. The movement raises the sharpest version of the question: what does a person owe a legal order which is just in its terms and which they experience as unjust in its operation? Every ground of obligation in chapter 260 is weakened for such a person. Fair play requires that they receive the benefits of the scheme. The natural duty of justice requires the institutions to be just. Consent was never given.

On unjust laws, chapter 380. The claim is not usually that a statute is unjust on its face. It is King's fourth test: a law just in its terms and unjust in its application. That is why the movement's demands are so often about practice, data and accountability rather than about repealing a provision.

On resistance, chapters 390 to 440. The movement is overwhelmingly dissent and protest, which are lawful. Where it has broken the law, it has usually done so in King's manner, publicly and non-violently. Where protests turned violent, the movement lost the moral advantage the technique depends on, exactly as Gandhi and King both predicted. And the reaction of restricting protest raises Mandela's question about whether channels remain open, which is why an answer should mention it.

On punishment, chapters 460 to 540. It is the practical form of the argument that punishment is administered unequally, and it is the case study MU chose because it makes chapters 520, 530 and 540 concrete.

munotes.in283

Black Lives Matter: A Case Study

A worked example

A student is asked: "With reference to the Black Lives Matter movement, discuss the problem of obedience to laws that are unjust in their application."

A weak answer narrates the events and stops.

A strong answer does four things.

Identifies the kind of injustice. Not an unjust statute but unequal application, which engages King's fourth test rather than his first.

Applies the grounds of obligation. Shows that fair play and the natural duty of justice both weaken as the benefits and the justice of the institutions diminish for a particular group, so the strength of the obligation is not uniform across a population.

Applies the conditions for resistance. Grave injustice, yes; lawful means tried, which requires examining whether litigation, complaint, and the political process were available and effective; publicity and non-violence, which the movement mostly satisfied and did not always; and acceptance of the penalty.

States what follows. That the case for lawful protest and litigation is overwhelming, that the case for civil disobedience strengthens exactly as accountability mechanisms fail, and that measures restricting protest are therefore not neutral: they weaken the argument for obedience by closing the channel that made obedience reasonable.

Distinctions that carry marks

Unjust in termsUnjust in application
What is wrongThe rule itselfHow the rule is enforced
King's testFirst, second and thirdFourth
RemedyRepeal or strike downData, supervision, accountability, changed criteria
Indian exampleSection 303 of the Penal Code in MithuA neutral rule enforced against one group only
Why it is harderA court can void the ruleThere is no single rule to void
Accountability demandsReallocation demandsStructural demands
Accept the institution?YesPartly, or not at allYes
ExampleBody cameras, independent investigation, publication of recordsRedirecting budgets to social servicesEnding profiling, changing use of force standards
Supported by the movement's own analysis?DirectlyOnly the moderate version followsDirectly

What this case study is NOT

It is not a claim that individual officers are all racist. The movement's central analytical claim is structural, and treating it as an accusation about individuals answers a different argument.

It is not a movement with a single programme. Its decentralisation means that "what Black Lives Matter demands" is not a question with one answer.

It is not directly transferable to India. The analytical tools are, and the history is not. An answer that applies the tools to Indian conditions, using the vocabulary of chapters 520 to 540, is doing what the syllabus wants; one that describes India as though it were the United States is not.

It is not outside the scope of a political science paper. MU set it as a case study of punishment, obedience and resistance, and that is what it should be used for.

munotes.in284

Black Lives Matter: A Case Study

Quick revision

  1. Origin 2013, after the acquittal in the Trayvon Martin case; national in 2014 after Ferguson and Eric Garner; international in 2020 after George Floyd.
  2. Form: decentralised, no single leadership, organised through networks and platforms.
  3. Five claims: disproportionate use of force; unequal enforcement; profiling; failure of accountability; and that the cause is structural rather than individual.
  4. Three kinds of demand, which must be separated: accountability, reallocation, structural.
  5. Changes: body cameras and stop data requirements, use of force policy changes, legislation on deaths in custody, a murder conviction in the George Floyd case, and a shift in public vocabulary. And a reaction: laws restricting protest.
  6. Criticisms: decentralisation prevents discipline and negotiation; some protests were violent, which is exactly what Gandhi's rule 9 exists for and what this structure cannot deliver; "defund" invited a reply to the strongest version of the claim; the interpretation of the evidence is contested; and transfer to other countries is not automatic.
  7. Why it closes Module II: it is King's fourth test, a law just in terms and unjust in application; it weakens fair play and the natural duty of justice for one group; it is mostly lawful dissent; and restricting protest raises Mandela's question about closed channels.

Test yourself

1. What does the Black Lives Matter movement claim, and which claim is analytically most important? That Black people are subjected to disproportionate and often lethal force in police encounters; that enforcement is unequal, so the same conduct is more likely to be detected, charged and punished; that profiling occurs, stops being made on appearance rather than behaviour; that accountability fails, since officers are rarely prosecuted or convicted; and that the pattern is produced by rules, training, incentives and legal doctrines rather than by the attitudes of individuals. The last is the important one, because it is a claim about institutions, it is answerable only by evidence about institutions, and it is what places the movement in a political science syllabus rather than in criminal law.

2. Distinguish the three kinds of demand the movement has produced. Accountability demands, such as body cameras, independent investigation of deaths in custody, publication of complaint records and prosecution where the evidence warrants, which accept the institution and seek to make it answerable. Reallocation demands, ranging from redirecting part of police budgets to mental health, housing and social services, to abolishing departments in their present form. And structural demands, such as ending profiling and changing the legal standards governing the use of force. Running them together damages the argument, since opponents can then answer the strongest version of a claim most supporters are not making.

munotes.in285

Black Lives Matter: A Case Study

3. Why does this case study belong at the end of a module on political obligation? Because it poses the question in its sharpest form: what does a person owe a legal order that is just in its terms and that they experience as unjust in its operation? Fair play weakens as the benefits of the scheme are unequally received; the natural duty to support just institutions weakens as the institutions fall short; and consent was never given. It also engages King's fourth test, a law just on its face and unjust in application, which explains why the demands concern practice, data and accountability rather than the repeal of any provision.

4. What criticisms should be made of the movement, and why do they matter for this syllabus? That its decentralisation, which enabled rapid growth, left it without a body able to negotiate, to discipline participants or to disavow those acting in its name, so that Gandhi's rule requiring suspension when one's own side turns violent has no mechanism. That the slogan "defund" invited replies to the strongest version of a claim most supporters were not making. That the interpretation of the evidence, particularly on use of lethal force after controlling for the circumstances of encounters, is genuinely disputed. And that the analysis is not automatically transferable to other countries with different histories.

5. How should an Indian student use this case study? By taking the analytical tools rather than the history. The hit rate, the correct comparator, the necessity test, the recording of reasons, the distinction between implicit bias and structural inequality, and the distinction between a law unjust in terms and one unjust in application are all portable, and every one can be applied to Indian policing, bail practice and prison composition. What is not portable is the specific history, and an answer that describes India as though it were the United States has misused the case study MU set.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in286

Module III

Political Ideologies

munotes.in

Chapter Fifty-Six

What a Political Ideology Is

Syllabus topic Module III, "Political Ideologies"; 3.1, "Liberalism"

In one line

An ideology is a connected set of beliefs about how society is, how it ought to be, and how to get from one to the other, held by a group and used to justify or to challenge power.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: a political ideology is a more or less coherent set of ideas which provides an account of the existing social and political order, a model of a desired future, and an indication of how political change can and should be brought about; it is distinguished from a political philosophy by being action oriented and held by groups rather than argued by individuals, and from a mere opinion by being systematic.

The three parts every ideology has

This is the framework, and it is what makes the four ideologies comparable.

1. A description. An account of how things are, and what is wrong with them. Liberalism describes a world of individuals; socialism describes a world of classes and cooperation; communism describes a world of class conflict driven by ownership.

2. A prescription. A picture of how things ought to be. This is where the ideology's central value sits: liberty for liberalism, the greatest happiness for utilitarianism, equality and community for socialism, a classless society for communism.

3. A programme. A route from the first to the second. This is the part most often left out of student answers, and it is where two ideologies that share a goal can differ completely: socialism and communism both want common ownership and disagree about whether to get there by election or by revolution, which is topic 3.4.2 exactly.

What an ideology is not

It is not a political philosophy. A philosophy asks whether a proposition is true and is argued by individuals. An ideology is held by groups and its function is to guide and justify action. The two overlap: Mill wrote philosophy that became liberal ideology, and Marx wrote analysis that became communist ideology.

It is not a party programme. A manifesto is a list of promises for one election; an ideology is the set of ideas from which such lists are generated.

It is not necessarily false. The word acquired a pejorative sense from Marx, for whom ideology meant the distorted consciousness produced by a society's material conditions, and from Napoleon, who used it as an insult. That sense is worth knowing and is not the sense used in this module.

It is not the same as a religion, though the two can occupy the same space, because an ideology's claims are about how society should be organised rather than about the ultimate nature of things.

munotes.in287

What a Political Ideology Is

The functions ideologies perform

They explain. They give people a way of making sense of events that would otherwise be a jumble.

They evaluate. They supply the standards by which arrangements are judged good or bad.

They orient. They tell a person where they stand and who is with them.

They mobilise. They give a movement something to demand and a reason to act together.

They legitimate. Which is Mosca's political formula at chapter 100 and Marx's ruling ideas at chapter 110, seen from a different side. Every ruling group has an account of why it should rule.

The six questions to ask of each ideology

This is the practical value of the chapter. Ask the same six questions of liberalism, utilitarianism, socialism and communism, and every comparison MU sets becomes a matter of lining up answers.

1. What is the basic unit? The individual, or the class, or the community, or the whole of sentient life?

2. What is human nature? Rational and self-interested, or cooperative and shaped by conditions?

3. What is the central value? Liberty, happiness, equality, community?

4. What is the role of the state? A necessary evil to be limited, an instrument of reform, an instrument of class rule to be captured and then dissolved?

5. What is the attitude to property? A natural right, a social institution to be regulated, or the root of the problem?

6. What is the method of change? Reform through law and election, or revolution?

Where the four MU sets fit

Liberalism. Unit: the individual. Value: liberty. State: limited, and later enabling. Property: a right. Method: reform.

Utilitarianism. Unit: the individual, but only as a site of pleasure and pain. Value: the greatest happiness. State: an instrument to be judged by results. Property: justified so far as it produces utility. Method: legislative reform, and Bentham's whole life was that.

Socialism. Unit: the community or the class. Value: equality and cooperation. State: an instrument of social reform. Property: to be socially owned or heavily regulated. Method: usually reform.

Communism. Unit: the class. Value: a classless society. State: an instrument of class rule, to be captured and then to wither. Property: the source of the problem, to be abolished as private ownership of the means of production. Method: revolution.

Two warnings a good answer includes. First, each of these is a family rather than a single doctrine: classical and modern liberalism differ profoundly, and Fabian socialism and revolutionary socialism have almost nothing in common in method. Second, the left and right labels are cruder than the six questions and often mislead, so use the questions.

Where Gandhi fits, and why MU keeps returning to him

MU sets Gandhi against utilitarianism at 3.2.1 and against communism at 3.4.3, so it is worth placing him here.

munotes.in288

What a Political Ideology Is

Unit: the individual, but understood as inseparable from the village community. Value: truth and non-violence, from which everything else follows, and Sarvodaya, the welfare of all. State: viewed with suspicion, as concentrated force; the ideal is the largest possible decentralisation. Property: neither a right nor to be abolished, but held on trusteeship for the community. Method: non-violent, and the means must be of the same kind as the end.

That entry is what makes the two comparisons MU marks (Specified) answerable, and it is worth memorising before either of them is reached.

A worked example

A government proposes a law guaranteeing every rural household a hundred days of paid work each year, funded by taxation.

A classical liberal objects: it takes property by taxation to give it to others, and the state's job is to protect rights rather than to redistribute. A modern liberal supports it: liberty is worth little to a person with no means, and the state should secure the conditions in which liberty can be used, which is Green's argument at chapter 400.

A utilitarian asks a purely empirical question: does the scheme produce more happiness than the same money spent otherwise, or left with the taxpayer? Nothing is settled in advance, and the answer depends on measurement.

A socialist supports it and calls it insufficient: it treats a symptom of an unequal distribution of land and capital without touching the distribution.

A communist makes the same point more sharply: the scheme stabilises the existing order by relieving its worst effects, and a wage guarantee leaves the wage relation exactly where it was.

A Gandhian asks a different question altogether: does it strengthen the village's ability to sustain itself, or does it make the village dependent on a distant government? If the work is on local assets decided locally, it fits Gram Swaraj; if it is a transfer administered from above, it does not.

Notice that six positions produce five different questions, and only two of them are about whether the scheme is a good idea. That is what an ideology does: it decides what the relevant question is.

Distinctions that carry marks

Political philosophyPolitical ideology
AsksIs this true?What is to be done?
Held byIndividuals, arguedGroups, shared
FunctionUnderstandingGuiding and justifying action
TestCoherence and truthAbility to explain, evaluate, orient and mobilise
ExampleMill's argument in On LibertyLiberalism as a movement
QuestionLiberalismUtilitarianismSocialismCommunism
Basic unitThe individualThe individual as a site of pleasure and painThe community or classThe class
Central valueLibertyThe greatest happinessEquality and cooperationA classless society
The stateLimited, then enablingAn instrument judged by resultsAn instrument of reformClass rule, to be captured then to wither
PropertyA rightJustified by its utilityTo be socially owned or regulatedPrivate ownership of production abolished
MethodReformLegislative reformUsually reformRevolution
munotes.in289

What a Political Ideology Is

Quick revision

  1. Three parts: a description of how things are, a prescription of how they ought to be, and a programme for getting there. The third is where socialism and communism part.
  2. Not a philosophy, not a manifesto, not necessarily false, not a religion.
  3. Five functions: explain, evaluate, orient, mobilise, legitimate. The last connects to Mosca's political formula and Marx's ruling ideas.
  4. Six questions: basic unit; human nature; central value; role of the state; attitude to property; method of change.
  5. Each ideology is a family, and classical against modern liberalism, and Fabian against revolutionary socialism, differ more than the labels suggest.
  6. Gandhi's entry: unit the individual in the village; value truth, non-violence and Sarvodaya; state distrusted; property held on trusteeship; method non-violent, with means of the same kind as the end.

Test yourself

1. Define a political ideology and give its three parts. A more or less coherent set of ideas which accounts for the existing social and political order, offers a model of a desired future, and indicates how change can and should be brought about. Its three parts are the description, of how things are and what is wrong with them; the prescription, of how they ought to be, which is where the central value sits; and the programme, the route from one to the other, which is the part students most often omit and where ideologies sharing a goal can differ completely.

2. Distinguish an ideology from a political philosophy. A philosophy asks whether a proposition is true and is argued by individuals, its test being coherence and truth. An ideology is held by groups, is action oriented, and is tested by its capacity to explain events, to supply standards of evaluation, to orient people and to mobilise them. The two overlap, since Mill wrote philosophy that became liberal ideology and Marx wrote analysis that became communist ideology, but the questions they answer are different.

3. What six questions should be asked of every ideology, and why do they matter? What is the basic unit, the individual, the class or the community. What is human nature, rational and self-interested or cooperative and shaped by conditions. What is the central value, liberty, happiness, equality or community. What is the role of the state. What is the attitude to property. And what is the method of change, reform or revolution. They matter because every comparison the syllabus sets becomes a matter of lining up answers to the same six questions instead of comparing on whatever happens to occur to the candidate.

munotes.in290

What a Political Ideology Is

4. Why is calling an ideology false a confusion? Because the pejorative sense of the word belongs to a particular usage rather than to the concept. Napoleon used it as an insult, and Marx used it to mean the distorted consciousness produced by a society's material conditions, so that on his account the ruling ideas of an age are the ideas of its ruling class. In the sense used in this module an ideology is simply a systematic set of political beliefs, which may be well founded or badly founded, and describing an arrangement as ideological settles nothing about whether it is right.

5. Place Gandhi on the six questions. Basic unit, the individual understood as inseparable from the village community. Human nature, capable of being reached by truth and by suffering willingly borne. Central value, truth and non-violence, from which Sarvodaya, the welfare of all, follows. The state, viewed with suspicion as concentrated force, with the ideal being the greatest possible decentralisation. Property, neither a natural right nor to be abolished, but held on trusteeship for the community. Method, non-violent, with the means required to be of the same kind as the end. That entry is what makes the two comparisons MU marks as specified answerable.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in291

Chapter Fifty-Seven

Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "Meaning and Definition, Basic Principles, Arguments in Favour and Against. Shift from Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty (Classical and ModernLiberalism)"

In one line

Liberalism is the belief that the individual comes first, that the individual's liberty is the highest political value, and that any power exercised over a person has to be justified to them.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: liberalism is the political ideology which takes the individual human being as the basic unit of society and the possessor of rights that exist independently of the state; which holds liberty to be the supreme political value; which insists that all political authority requires justification and consent, and must therefore be limited, constitutional and accountable; and which regards toleration, equality before the law and the use of reason as the necessary conditions of a free society.

The word, and the two things it names

Liberalism comes from the Latin liber, free. The word entered political use in Spain in the early nineteenth century and spread from there.

It names two different things and students should say which they mean.

A historical movement. The struggle against absolute monarchy, religious compulsion, hereditary privilege and restrictions on trade, running from the seventeenth century.

A body of ideas, which is what this module examines, and which has since divided into the classical and modern strands of the next chapter.

The basic principles

The basic principles of liberalism are eight, and the meaning of liberalism is best conveyed by working through them rather than by any single sentence: a definition of liberalism that omits toleration or limited government has left out something the doctrine cannot do without.

Each of these is a claim, and each has a consequence in law that an Indian student will recognise.

1. Individualism

The individual is the basic unit of political analysis and the ultimate bearer of value. Groups, classes, nations and communities matter because of what they do for the individuals who compose them.

Its consequence. Rights are held by persons rather than by groups, and the person is entitled to be treated as an end. Every fundamental right in Part III of the Indian Constitution is drafted this way.

What it denies. That a person's identity is exhausted by their membership of a caste, a religion or a family, and that a group's interest can override an individual's rights.

2. Liberty as the supreme political value

Liberty comes first among political values, and other goods are pursued so far as they are compatible with it.

Its consequence. Restrictions require justification, and the burden lies on whoever restricts. This is exactly the structure of article 19 of the Indian Constitution, which states freedoms and then requires that any restriction be reasonable and made on stated grounds.

3. Reason

Human beings are capable of reasoning about their own interests and about public questions, so problems are to be solved by argument, evidence and debate rather than by authority, tradition or force.

munotes.in292

Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Its consequence. A commitment to free discussion, to education, to a free press, and to progress by criticism.

4. Equality

Not equality of outcome, but a foundational equality: every person is of equal moral worth, and equality before the law and of opportunity follow.

Its consequence. Careers open to talent, equality before the law, and the abolition of hereditary privilege.

5. Toleration

Because people disagree, and because reason does not compel agreement about religion or ways of life, the state must permit ways of living it does not endorse.

Its consequence. Freedom of religion and conscience, and the idea that the state is not to prefer one conception of the good life.

6. Consent and constitutionalism

Political authority is legitimate only if it is derived from those subject to it and exercised within limits. Chapter 300's contract theory is liberalism's founding argument.

Its consequence. A written constitution, separation of powers, judicial review, and periodic elections.

7. Limited government

Government is necessary, because chapter 320 showed what the absence of it costs, and dangerous, because power concentrated is power abused. So it must be limited, divided and answerable.

8. Justice, and the rule of law

Like cases treated alike, by known general rules applied by independent courts, with nobody above the law.

The two propositions that hold it together

An answer that lists eight principles has listed. An answer that shows what connects them is doing political theory.

Power requires justification, and the justification must be one the person subject to it could accept. This is the single idea from which the rest follow. If authority must be justified to each person, then it must be limited, consented to, exercised by known rules, and open to criticism, and the person must be free to disagree.

The state may not decide how people should live. Liberalism separates the question of how people should live, which individuals answer for themselves, from the question of how they should live together, which is politics. Toleration, freedom of religion and freedom of speech all descend from that separation.

Liberalism in the Indian Constitution

MU asks for the influence on the Indian Constitution at 3.1.2 and 3.3.1, and it helps to see the general shape here before the detail.

The Preamble secures liberty of thought, expression, belief, faith and worship, and equality of status and of opportunity, which is the liberal vocabulary exactly.

Part III confers rights on persons and on citizens rather than on communities, and makes them enforceable against the state.

Article 19 states the freedoms and permits only reasonable restrictions on stated grounds, which puts the burden on the state.

munotes.in293

Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Article 14 guarantees equality before the law and equal protection of the laws.

Articles 25 to 28 guarantee freedom of conscience and religion, which is toleration made justiciable.

Article 18 abolishes titles, which is the assault on hereditary privilege.

And the Constitution is not purely liberal, which is why this book returns to it at chapter 710. The Directive Principles are socialist in inspiration, group-based reservations qualify pure individualism, and the freedoms are subject to restrictions no classical liberal would accept. The Indian Constitution is a considered mixture, and saying so is more accurate than calling it liberal.

A worked example

A State proposes a law prohibiting the sale and consumption of alcohol, on the ground that drinking harms the drinker, impoverishes families and offends the moral sense of the community.

Test it against the principles.

Individualism and liberty. The prohibition restricts what an adult may do with their own body, which is exactly the case liberalism protects most strongly.

The justification offered. Three grounds are given, and a liberal separates them.

Harm to the drinker. This is paternalism, and Mill's principle at chapter 610 rejects it: a person's own good is not a sufficient warrant.

Harm to the family. This is harm to others, and is a permissible ground. A liberal then asks whether prohibition is the appropriate and necessary means, or whether the harm can be met by rules on domestic violence, by welfare measures, or by restrictions on hours and places of sale.

Offence to the moral sense of the community. A liberal rejects this ground outright. That others disapprove of how a person lives is precisely what toleration exists to overrule, and a state that legislates on it has decided how people should live.

Notice what the analysis has done. It has not answered whether prohibition is a good policy. It has sorted the reasons into those a liberal state may act on and those it may not, and it has put the burden of justification on the state. That sorting is what liberalism contributes.

Distinctions that carry marks

LiberalismSocialismConservatism
Basic unitThe individualThe community or classThe society, as an inherited order
Supreme valueLibertyEquality and cooperationOrder and continuity
View of human natureRational, self-directingCooperative, shaped by conditionsImperfect, needing restraint
The stateNecessary and dangerous; to be limitedAn instrument of reformThe guardian of an inheritance
Attitude to changeReform, by reasonReform or transformationCautious; prescription, chapter 360
PropertyA rightTo be regulated or socially ownedA steadying institution

What liberalism is NOT

It is not the absence of government. That is anarchism. Liberalism wants government limited, not abolished, and chapter 320 explains why it wants it at all.

munotes.in294

Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles

It is not a demand that everyone be equal in outcome. Its equality is of moral worth, before the law and of opportunity.

It is not indifference. Toleration means permitting what one disapproves of, which requires that one has a view and declines to impose it.

It is not a single doctrine. Classical and modern liberalism disagree about the role of the state so sharply that the next chapter is needed to separate them.

It is not the same as the economic policy called liberalisation. The economic sense is one strand of classical liberalism and is not the political ideology.

Quick revision

  1. Liberalism takes the individual as the basic unit, treats liberty as the supreme political value, and holds that all political power requires justification to those subject to it.
  2. Eight principles: individualism, liberty, reason, equality of moral worth, toleration, consent and constitutionalism, limited government, and justice under the rule of law.
  3. Two propositions hold it together: power requires a justification the person subject to it could accept; and the state may not decide how people should live, only how they live together.
  4. In the Indian Constitution: the Preamble's liberty and equality; Part III's rights held by persons; article 19's reasonable restrictions on stated grounds; article 14; articles 25 to 28; article 18.
  5. But the Constitution is a mixture: Directive Principles socialist in inspiration, group-based reservations qualifying pure individualism, and restrictions no classical liberal would accept.
  6. Not anarchism, not equality of outcome, not indifference, not one doctrine, and not the economic policy called liberalisation.

Test yourself

1. Define liberalism and state its basic principles. Liberalism takes the individual as the basic unit of society and as the bearer of rights existing independently of the state, holds liberty to be the supreme political value, and insists that all political authority requires justification and consent and must be limited, constitutional and accountable. Its principles are individualism, liberty, reason, equality of moral worth with equality before the law and of opportunity, toleration, consent and constitutionalism, limited government, and justice under the rule of law.

2. What single idea connects liberalism's principles? That power over a person requires a justification which that person could accept. Everything else follows: if authority must be justified to each individual, it must be limited in scope, derived from consent, exercised through known general rules rather than arbitrary command, and open to criticism, and the individual must be free to disagree and to live differently. The second connecting proposition is that the state may settle how people live together but not how they should live, from which toleration, freedom of religion and freedom of speech descend.

munotes.in295

Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles

3. Where does liberalism appear in the Indian Constitution? In the Preamble's securing of liberty of thought, expression, belief, faith and worship, and of equality of status and opportunity. In Part III, which confers rights on persons and citizens rather than on communities and makes them enforceable against the state. In article 19, which states the freedoms and permits only reasonable restrictions on stated grounds, so that the burden falls on the state. In article 14's equality before the law. In articles 25 to 28's freedom of conscience and religion. And in article 18's abolition of titles.

4. Is the Indian Constitution a liberal document? Give reasons. It is substantially liberal and is not purely so. Its rights are individual and justiciable, its restrictions must be reasonable, and it abolishes hereditary privilege. But its Directive Principles are socialist in inspiration and direct the State towards distributive ends; its provisions for reservation confer benefits on groups, which qualifies pure individualism; and its freedoms are subject to restrictions on grounds, such as public order and the sovereignty and integrity of India, that a classical liberal would resist. The accurate description is a considered mixture rather than a liberal document.

5. A State proposes prohibition of alcohol on three grounds. Analyse them as a liberal would. Harm to the drinker is paternalism, and liberalism rejects it: a person's own good is not a sufficient warrant for compelling them. Harm to the family is harm to others and is a permissible ground, but the liberal then asks whether prohibition is appropriate and necessary or whether laws on domestic violence, welfare measures or restrictions on hours and places of sale would answer it. Offence to the moral sense of the community is rejected outright, since disapproval of how others live is precisely what toleration exists to overrule. The analysis does not decide whether prohibition is wise; it sorts the reasons into those the state may act on and those it may not.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in296

Chapter Fifty-Eight

Classical and Modern Liberalism

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "... (Classical and ModernLiberalism)"

In one line

Classical liberalism wants the state to leave people alone; modern liberalism came to see that leaving people alone is worth very little to somebody with nothing, and asked the state to supply the conditions in which liberty can actually be used.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: classical liberalism, dominant from the seventeenth to the nineteenth century, conceives liberty negatively as the absence of interference, treats the state as a necessary evil to be confined to the protection of life, liberty and property, and favours free markets and minimal regulation; modern liberalism, developing from the late nineteenth century, conceives liberty positively as the capacity to make effective use of one's freedom, and accordingly accepts an enabling state which removes obstacles such as poverty, ignorance and disease through welfare provision and regulation.

Classical liberalism

Its period and setting. From Locke in the seventeenth century through the nineteenth, formed in a struggle against absolute monarchy, established religion, hereditary privilege and restrictions on trade. Every one of its doctrines is aimed at a form of power that then existed.

Its core commitments.

Negative liberty. Freedom is the absence of external constraint. A person is free to the extent that nobody is stopping them.

A minimal state. Its functions are defence, the maintenance of order, the enforcement of contracts and the protection of property, and little else. The image often used is a night watchman.

Natural rights, especially property. Locke's account at chapter 320 makes property a natural right existing before government, so the state finds property already there and may not take it without consent.

Free markets. Exchange between willing parties produces prosperity, and interference distorts it.

Equality of opportunity and not of outcome. Careers open to talent; results are the individual's own.

Its assumption about human beings. Rational, self-interested and self-directing adults, capable of looking after themselves if left unobstructed.

What went wrong with the assumption

An answer that explains the transition is much stronger than one that describes the two phases side by side. The transition happened because the assumption failed in a particular set of conditions.

The conditions. Industrialisation produced a working population in cities, without land, dependent on wages, working long hours in dangerous conditions, living in insanitary housing, without education, and without any means of subsistence when unemployed, injured or old.

Why the classical answer did not work. These people were, in the classical sense, free: nobody was legally stopping them from doing anything. The employment contract was voluntary. And their situation was not remotely one of liberty in any sense that mattered to them.

The three observations that produced modern liberalism.

Freedom without capacity is empty. A right to educate one's children is worth nothing to a person who cannot pay a fee.

munotes.in297

Classical and Modern Liberalism

Voluntary agreements between very unequal parties are not really voluntary. A contract signed by somebody whose alternative is starvation is formally free and substantively coerced.

The obstacles to liberty are not only legal. Poverty, ignorance, disease and idleness restrict what a person can do as effectively as any law.

T. H. Green, at chapter 400, is the hinge. His argument that freedom is a positive power of doing something worth doing, and that the state's job is to maintain the conditions of a moral life, is where the change is made in theory. Beveridge's later naming of want, disease, ignorance, squalor and idleness as the giants to be defeated is the same argument turned into a programme.

Modern liberalism

Its period. From the late nineteenth century, developed in the twentieth.

Its core commitments.

Positive liberty. Freedom is the capacity to make effective use of one's freedom.

An enabling state. Not a minimal state and not a socialist one. Its function is to remove the obstacles that prevent people from using their liberty: compulsory education, public health, social insurance, regulation of working conditions, and support for those who cannot support themselves.

Regulated markets. Markets are accepted and their failures are corrected: monopoly, information asymmetry, external harms such as pollution, and the exploitation of unequal bargaining power.

Equality of opportunity, taken seriously. Genuine equality of opportunity requires that people start from a position where the opportunity can be used, which means education and health rather than the mere absence of legal barriers.

Social justice. A concern with the distribution of resources, on the ground that a distribution nobody could accept from behind Rawls's veil of ignorance is not a just one.

What did not change. Modern liberalism keeps individualism, the priority of liberty, toleration, constitutionalism and the rule of law. It is a change in the means, and in what liberty is taken to consist of, rather than an abandonment of the ideology. This is exactly the point that separates modern liberalism from socialism, and it is the sentence that saves an answer from confusing them.

The transition in one comparison

Ask both what should be done about a person who cannot read.

A classical liberal says nobody is preventing them from learning; the state has no business compelling attendance or taxing others to pay for schools; and charity and self-improvement are the answer.

A modern liberal says an illiterate adult cannot use the vote, cannot read a contract, cannot know their rights, and cannot compete for work; that their liberty is therefore formal and not real; and that compulsory free education is a measure of liberty rather than an interference with it.

munotes.in298

Classical and Modern Liberalism

Notice that both are arguing from liberty. That is why this is a development within liberalism and not a defeat of it.

Where India sits

Both strands are present in the Indian Constitution and the tension between them is much of Indian constitutional law.

Classical in Part III: rights against the state, freedoms with reasonable restrictions, the rule of law, and originally a fundamental right to property.

Modern in Part IV: directive principles on the right to work, education and public assistance, just and humane conditions of work, a living wage, and the health of workers.

The tension is real and has been litigated. The right to property was moved out of Part III and made a constitutional right in article 300A; the Directive Principles were repeatedly relied on to sustain legislation restricting property and contract; and article 21A now makes free and compulsory education for children a fundamental right, which is a modern liberal proposition sitting in a classical liberal chapter.

A worked example

A State requires all private employers to provide a workplace crèche where more than fifty people are employed.

The classical objection. It is an interference with the employer's freedom of contract and with the use of their property, and it imposes a cost on somebody who has not agreed to it. If employees value a crèche they can bargain for it, and if they will not pay for it in lower wages, they do not value it.

The modern liberal answer. The employees' bargaining position is not equal; the absence of childcare removes an entire class of people, in practice mostly women, from the possibility of employment altogether; and their liberty to work is therefore formal and not real. Removing that obstacle is a measure of liberty.

The test a modern liberal applies. Not whether the measure interferes, since it plainly does, but whether the interference removes a larger obstacle to liberty than it creates, and whether it is the least restrictive way of doing so.

And the socialist's different question, which shows the boundary: a socialist asks who owns the enterprise and how its surplus is distributed, and would regard a crèche as an amelioration that leaves the ownership untouched. The modern liberal is not asking that question at all.

Distinctions that carry marks

Classical liberalismModern liberalism
Concept of libertyNegative: absence of interferencePositive: capacity to act effectively
Role of the stateMinimal, a night watchmanEnabling: removes obstacles
View of the stateA necessary evilA potentially positive force
EconomyFree markets, minimal regulationRegulated markets, correction of failures
PropertyA natural right, nearly inviolableA right qualified by social purpose
EqualityOf opportunity, understood as absence of legal barriersOf opportunity, understood as requiring real capacity
WelfareCharity, voluntaryA public responsibility
Period17th to 19th centuryLate 19th century onwards
Associated withLocke, Adam Smith, early Bentham, Herbert SpencerT. H. Green, Hobhouse, Keynes, Beveridge, Rawls
In the Indian ConstitutionPart IIIPart IV, and article 21A
munotes.in299

Classical and Modern Liberalism

What this distinction is NOT

It is not liberalism against socialism. Modern liberalism keeps individualism, the priority of liberty and the market; socialism does not. The disagreement between the two liberalisms is about means.

It is not a chronological replacement. Classical liberalism did not disappear, and its economic strand revived strongly in the late twentieth century in what is often called neo-liberalism.

It is not that classical liberals were indifferent to poverty. Many were not. They believed the remedy was growth, charity and self-improvement rather than the state.

"Modern" is not a compliment and "classical" is not an insult. They are labels for two phases of one ideology, and the argument between them is live.

Quick revision

  1. Classical liberalism: negative liberty, a minimal state, natural rights especially property, free markets, and equality of opportunity meaning the absence of legal barriers. Locke, Smith, Spencer.
  2. What broke it: industrial conditions in which people were legally free and substantively unfree, so that freedom without capacity was empty, agreements between unequal parties were not really voluntary, and the obstacles to liberty were not only legal.
  3. T. H. Green is the hinge: freedom as a positive power, and the state hindering the hindrances.
  4. Modern liberalism: positive liberty, an enabling state, regulated markets, equality of opportunity taken seriously, and social justice. Green, Hobhouse, Keynes, Beveridge, Rawls.
  5. What did not change: individualism, the priority of liberty, toleration, constitutionalism and the rule of law. The change is in means, which is what separates modern liberalism from socialism.
  6. In India: Part III is classical, Part IV is modern, property moved from Part III to article 300A, and article 21A puts a modern liberal proposition into a classical liberal chapter.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish classical from modern liberalism. Classical liberalism conceives liberty negatively, as the absence of interference, treats the state as a necessary evil confined to defence, order, contract and property, favours free markets and minimal regulation, and understands equality of opportunity as the absence of legal barriers. Modern liberalism conceives liberty positively, as the capacity to make effective use of one's freedom, accepts an enabling state that removes obstacles such as poverty, ignorance and disease, regulates markets to correct their failures, and understands equality of opportunity as requiring the real capacity to use it.

2. Why did classical liberalism give way to modern liberalism? Because its central assumption failed under industrial conditions. A population without land, dependent on wages, working long hours in dangerous conditions, uneducated and without provision for unemployment, injury or old age was free in the classical sense, since nobody was legally stopping them from anything, and was not free in any sense that mattered. Three observations followed: freedom without capacity is empty; agreements between very unequal parties are formally voluntary and substantively coerced; and the obstacles to liberty are not only legal.

munotes.in300

Classical and Modern Liberalism

3. Why is modern liberalism not socialism? Because what changed was the means and the conception of liberty, not the ideology's foundations. Modern liberalism retains individualism, the priority of liberty, toleration, constitutionalism, the rule of law and the market, and it justifies state action by reference to liberty rather than to equality. A socialist asks who owns the enterprise and how its surplus is distributed; a modern liberal asks whether an obstacle to a person's effective freedom has been removed, and does not ask the ownership question at all.

4. Show both strands in the Indian Constitution. Part III is classical: rights held against the state, freedoms subject only to reasonable restrictions, the rule of law, and originally a fundamental right to property. Part IV is modern: directive principles on the right to work, to education and to public assistance, on just and humane conditions of work, on a living wage and on the health of workers. The tension has been worked out in practice, with the right to property moved out of Part III into article 300A, the Directive Principles repeatedly relied on to sustain legislation restricting property and contract, and article 21A making free and compulsory education for children a fundamental right.

5. Apply both to a law requiring workplace crèches. The classical objection is that it interferes with freedom of contract and with the use of property and imposes a cost on somebody who did not agree, employees being able to bargain for a crèche if they value it. The modern liberal answer is that bargaining positions are unequal and that the absence of childcare removes a whole class of people from employment altogether, so their liberty to work is formal and not real, and removing that obstacle is a measure of liberty. The modern liberal test is not whether the law interferes, which it plainly does, but whether it removes a larger obstacle to liberty than it creates and does so in the least restrictive way.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in301

Chapter Fifty-Nine

The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "Shift from Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty"

In one line

Negative liberty is freedom from interference, positive liberty is freedom to actually do something, and the whole argument is about whether the second is a genuine kind of freedom or a licence for somebody else to decide what you really want.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: negative liberty is the absence of external obstacles, coercion or interference, so that a person is free to the extent that others do not prevent them from acting; positive liberty is the presence of the capacity, resources and self-mastery required to act effectively on one's own purposes, so that a person is free to the extent that they are actually able to determine and pursue their own life; and the shift from the first conception to the second is what transformed classical liberalism into modern liberalism and what supplies the theoretical basis for the welfare state.

The two conceptions

The classic statement of the distinction is Isaiah Berlin's, in a lecture of 1958, and it is put as two different questions.

Negative liberty answers: what is the area within which I am left to do what I want, without interference by others?

Positive liberty answers: who or what is the source of control that determines what I do?

They are not opposites and they are not two names for one thing. They are answers to different questions, and a person can have a great deal of one and almost none of the other.

Negative liberty

Freedom is the absence of obstacles placed by other people. A prisoner is unfree because a person locks the door. A person who cannot fly is not unfree, because no one is preventing them.

Its characteristic questions. How wide is the area? Who may narrow it, and on what justification?

Its characteristic institutions. Rights against the state, limits on power, the requirement that restrictions be justified.

Its advocates. Hobbes, Locke, Bentham, Mill and Berlin himself, who thought this the safer conception.

Its blind spot. It counts only obstacles that people put there. A person who is starving, illiterate and ill is, on this conception, perfectly free, because nobody is stopping them.

Positive liberty

Freedom is the capacity to act on one's own purposes. It has two related senses, and separating them is what makes an answer good.

Freedom as capacity. Having the means, education, health and resources to do the things one has a formal right to do. This is Green's sense at chapter 400.

Freedom as self-mastery. Being governed by one's own reason rather than by impulse, addiction, ignorance or manipulation. This is the older philosophical sense, and it is where the trouble starts.

Its characteristic questions. What can this person actually do? What prevents them?

munotes.in302

The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty

Its characteristic institutions. Education, health care, social security, regulation of unequal bargaining, and democratic participation.

Its advocates. Rousseau, Kant in one strand, Hegel, Green, and in the twentieth century the theorists of the welfare state.

The shift, and what caused it

The shift is a historical development and MU asks for it as one.

The negative conception was formed against a particular enemy, absolute government, established religion and legal privilege, and it was well designed for that fight: what those things did was interfere.

The industrial conditions of the nineteenth century produced a different problem. People whose liberty nobody was interfering with, and who could do almost nothing. The negative conception could not describe their situation as one of unfreedom at all, and that is what broke it.

Green made the theoretical move by defining freedom as a positive power or capacity of doing something worth doing, and by insisting that it is exercised in common with others, so that a society which does not supply the conditions of that capacity is not supplying freedom.

The programme followed. Compulsory education, public health, factory legislation, social insurance and, in the twentieth century, the welfare state.

Berlin's warning, which is the heart of the topic

Berlin drew the distinction in order to warn against the second conception, and an answer that gives the warning is a much better answer than one that treats positive liberty as simply an improvement.

The argument in four steps.

1. Positive liberty as self-mastery divides the self into a higher, rational self and a lower, empirical self driven by appetite and ignorance.

2. Being free then means being governed by the higher self.

3. Somebody may know better than you what your higher self would choose: a teacher, a party, a state, a doctrine.

4. Coercing you into what your higher self would have chosen can then be described as making you free.

And this is not a hypothetical. Rousseau's own sentence at chapter 330 says that whoever refuses to obey the general will shall be compelled to do so by the whole body, and that this means nothing less than that he will be forced to be free. Berlin's point is that the sentence is not an aberration but the natural conclusion of the positive conception, and that regimes which suppressed people in the name of their real interests were using exactly this structure.

The answer to Berlin, which an answer should also give.

The capacity sense does not require the self to be divided. Providing schools, hospitals and a subsistence income does not tell anybody what they really want; it lets them pursue what they say they want. Green's version, and the welfare state, rest on that sense.

munotes.in303

The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty

Negative liberty is not innocent either. A conception which counts only obstacles placed by people treats a starving person as free, and that description has been used to resist every measure of social reform for two centuries.

The two are needed together. The right without the capacity is empty; the capacity without the right is dependence on whoever supplies it.

Where India stands

The Indian Constitution contains both conceptions, in two Parts, and its history is the argument between them.

Negative liberty is Part III. Article 19's freedoms are stated as protections against interference, subject to reasonable restrictions. Article 21 protects life and personal liberty against deprivation except by procedure established by law.

Positive liberty is Part IV. The Directive Principles direct the State to secure an adequate means of livelihood, to prevent the concentration of wealth, to secure a living wage, to make provision for just and humane conditions of work, and to raise the level of nutrition and public health. Every one of these is about capacity.

And the two have been fused by interpretation. Article 21's guarantee of life has been read to include what a life requires, and article 21A now makes free and compulsory education for children between six and fourteen a fundamental right, which puts a positive obligation on the State inside the chapter of negative rights.

The Indian answer to Berlin, in effect. Positive obligations were created as enforceable rights of individuals rather than as powers of the State to decide what people really need. That is the structural safeguard: the citizen enforces the capacity against the State, rather than the State supplying it and defining it.

A worked example

Two women in the same city each wish to start a small business.

A has capital, an education, a family that will look after her children, and access to a bank. B has none of these.

On the negative conception both are equally free. No law prevents either from starting a business, no official refuses either a licence, and if either is obstructed she has a remedy.

On the positive conception they are not remotely equally free. A can do the thing she is free to do; B cannot.

What each conception says should be done. The negative liberal asks whether any rule is obstructing B, finds the licensing requirements, the paperwork and the inspections, and works to remove them, which is a real answer and does help. The positive liberal asks what B lacks, and points to credit, training, and childcare.

And the case for both together. Remove every obstacle and B still cannot start. Provide credit and childcare while leaving a licensing regime that requires four visits to an office in working hours, and she still cannot. The two conceptions identify different obstacles, and both sets are real.

munotes.in304

The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty

And Berlin's warning applied. If the scheme requires B to attend a training course that tells her which businesses are suitable for women, decides on her behalf that she should not attempt something ambitious, and conditions the credit on her compliance, then positive liberty has begun to do what Berlin feared. The safeguard is that the assistance should enlarge what she can choose rather than narrow it.

Distinctions that carry marks

Negative libertyPositive liberty
The questionWhat is the area in which I am left alone?Who or what determines what I do?
Freedom isThe absence of interferenceThe presence of capacity and self-mastery
Obstacles countedOnly those placed by other peopleAlso poverty, ignorance, disease, addiction
A starving person isFreeUnfree
The state's roleTo refrainTo enable
InstitutionsRights, limits, judicial reviewEducation, health, social security, regulation
AdvocatesHobbes, Locke, Bentham, Mill, BerlinRousseau, Hegel, Green, welfare theorists
DangerTreats the destitute as freeCan license coercion in the name of freedom
In the ConstitutionPart IIIPart IV, and article 21A

What this distinction is NOT

It is not freedom against equality. Both are conceptions of freedom, which is exactly why the argument matters.

It is not old against new. Both are old. Berlin's contribution was to name them, not to invent either.

Positive liberty is not the same as welfare. Welfare is one thing positive liberty may require; the concept is about capacity and self-direction.

Berlin did not say positive liberty is worthless. He said it is more easily perverted, and he was arguing about a danger rather than denying the value.

Quick revision

  1. Berlin, 1958. Negative liberty answers: what is the area within which I am left alone? Positive liberty answers: who or what is the source of control that determines what I do?
  2. Negative: absence of obstacles placed by other people. Its blind spot is that a starving person counts as free.
  3. Positive has two senses: capacity, which is Green's, and self-mastery, which is where the danger lies.
  4. The shift happened because industrial conditions produced people whom nobody was interfering with and who could do almost nothing.
  5. Berlin's warning in four steps: the self is divided; freedom becomes rule by the higher self; somebody else may claim to know it; coercion is then described as liberation. Rousseau's "forced to be free" is the text he has in mind.
  6. The answer: the capacity sense divides no self, negative liberty is not innocent either, and the two are needed together.
  7. In India: Part III is negative, Part IV is positive, and the two were fused by reading article 21 to include what a life requires and by article 21A. The safeguard is that positive obligations were made enforceable rights of individuals.
munotes.in305

The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty

Test yourself

1. State Berlin's two questions and the two conceptions they identify. Negative liberty answers the question what is the area within which I am left to do what I want without interference by others, so that freedom is the absence of obstacles placed by other people. Positive liberty answers the question who or what is the source of control that determines what I do, so that freedom is the presence of the capacity, resources and self-mastery to act on one's own purposes. They are answers to different questions rather than opposites, and a person may have a great deal of one and almost none of the other.

2. Why did the shift from negative to positive liberty occur? Because the negative conception had been formed against a particular enemy, absolute government, established religion and legal privilege, all of which operated by interfering, and it could not describe the situation produced by industrial conditions. A population without land, dependent on wages, uneducated, unhealthy and without provision for unemployment or old age was free on the negative conception, since nobody was legally stopping them from anything, and yet could do almost nothing. Green made the theoretical move by defining freedom as a positive power of doing something worth doing, and the welfare programme followed.

3. State Berlin's warning about positive liberty. That the self-mastery sense divides the person into a higher rational self and a lower empirical self; that being free then means being governed by the higher self; that another person, party, doctrine or state may claim to know what the higher self would choose; and that coercion can then be described as making the person free. Berlin's point is that this is not an aberration but the natural conclusion of the conception, and Rousseau's own statement that whoever refuses to obey the general will shall be compelled and thereby forced to be free is the text that shows it.

4. How is Berlin answered? By separating the two senses of positive liberty. The capacity sense does not divide the self at all: providing schools, hospitals and a subsistence income does not tell anybody what they really want but enables them to pursue what they say they want, and that is the sense on which Green and the welfare state rest. It is added that negative liberty is not innocent either, since a conception counting only obstacles placed by people describes a starving person as free and has been used to resist social reform for two centuries. And that the two are needed together, since a right without the capacity is empty and a capacity without the right is dependence on whoever supplies it.

munotes.in306

The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty

5. Where do the two conceptions appear in the Indian Constitution, and what safeguard did India adopt? Negative liberty appears in Part III: article 19's freedoms stated as protections against interference subject to reasonable restrictions, and article 21's protection of life and personal liberty. Positive liberty appears in Part IV: directives to secure an adequate means of livelihood, prevent the concentration of wealth, secure a living wage, provide just and humane conditions of work, and raise nutrition and public health. The two were fused by reading article 21 to include what a life requires and by article 21A. The safeguard against Berlin's danger is structural: the positive obligations were made enforceable rights of the individual against the State, rather than powers of the State to determine what people really need.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in307

Chapter Sixty

Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "Arguments in Favour and Against"

In one line

Liberalism is defended as the only doctrine that takes each person seriously and the only one that has reliably limited power, and it is attacked from four directions: for producing atomised individuals, for protecting formal freedoms while ignoring real ones, for pretending to be neutral when it is not, and for exporting a Western model as though it were universal.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: liberalism is supported on the grounds that it protects the individual against arbitrary power, that it alone has produced constitutional and limited government, that toleration is the only workable arrangement in a plural society, and that free discussion is the condition of finding out anything; and it is criticised by conservatives for dissolving the social fabric, by socialists for protecting formal liberties while permitting substantive inequality, by communitarians and feminists for resting on an abstract individual who does not exist, and by postcolonial critics for universalising a particular Western experience.

The arguments in favour

1. It protects the individual against power. The historical record is the strongest thing liberalism has. The institutions that actually limit governments, constitutions, enforceable rights, independent courts, free elections, a free press, are liberal in origin, and they exist in no other tradition in that combination.

2. It takes each person seriously. On no other account is it true that a person may not be sacrificed for a larger benefit. Utilitarianism permits it, chapter 660 shows how, and collective doctrines permit it more readily.

3. It is the only workable arrangement in a plural society. Where people disagree deeply about religion and about how to live, the alternatives to toleration are suppression or civil conflict. India, with several religions, many languages and a deep caste hierarchy, is the case that makes the argument concrete rather than abstract.

4. Free discussion is how anything is found out. Mill's argument at chapter 610: a silenced opinion may be true; if false it may contain part of the truth; and even a wholly false opinion keeps a true one from becoming dead dogma.

5. It is self-correcting. Liberalism's own commitments to criticism and to evidence let it change, which is what the shift to modern liberalism at chapter 580 actually was. Ideologies that treat their own doctrine as settled cannot do that.

6. It has delivered. The societies that adopted liberal constitutional arrangements have generally produced higher standards of living, longer lives, and fewer people killed by their own governments than those that did not. That is a claim about the record, and it is the argument that persuades people who are unmoved by the philosophy.

The arguments against

From conservatism

It dissolves the fabric it depends on. Liberalism inherits a society held together by family, religion, custom and shared obligation, treats all of these as optional attachments, and then relies on the social trust they produced. Chapter 360's Burke is the classical statement.

munotes.in308

Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against

It is too confident in reason. The belief that arrangements can be redesigned by argument underestimates how much settled institutions know that nobody can articulate.

Its individual is not how people actually experience themselves. People are born into families, communities and obligations they never chose, and a theory that treats these as voluntary describes nobody.

From socialism

Formal freedom without substantive means is empty. This is the most powerful criticism and it produced the shift to modern liberalism. A right to property is worth nothing to a person who has none; freedom of contract between very unequal parties is the freedom of the stronger.

It protects the distribution it found. By treating existing holdings as rights, liberalism converts an unequal starting point into a set of entitlements, and calls interference with them a violation of liberty.

Political equality does not survive economic inequality. Equal votes coexist with grossly unequal influence, which is chapter 60's structural power and chapter 840's ethical decay of democracy.

From communitarians and feminists

The unencumbered self does not exist. Liberalism's individual is imagined as choosing their attachments, when in fact people's identities are constituted by attachments they never chose. Sandel and MacIntyre press this.

The public and private division protects domination. Liberalism confines the state to the public sphere and treats the household as private, with the result that inequality and violence within the family are outside politics. The feminist reply that the personal is political is aimed exactly here, and it is an important criticism in India, where personal law governs marriage, divorce, inheritance and guardianship.

Neutrality is not neutral. A state that claims to take no view about how people should live in fact embeds one, since the arrangements it treats as normal advantage some ways of living over others.

From postcolonial and Indian critics

It universalises a particular history. The rights, the individual and the market were formulated in a specific European experience and were exported by force to societies with different structures.

Liberal states practised the opposite abroad. The same states that developed constitutional government at home governed colonies without consent, without representation and without rights, and the contradiction was not incidental but simultaneous.

Its individualism misdescribes caste. A doctrine built on individuals treats a hierarchy that operates on birth groups as a series of private preferences. Ambedkar's position is the sharpest form of this criticism and belongs in an Indian answer: he accepted liberal constitutional forms and insisted they were insufficient, because political democracy without social democracy, that is, without liberty, equality and fraternity as principles of social life, rests on nothing. His warning that India was entering a life of contradictions, with equality in politics and inequality in social and economic life, is the criticism in one sentence.

munotes.in309

Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against

The assessment an answer should reach

Notice what the criticisms have in common: almost none of them argues for abolishing rights, courts, elections or toleration. They argue that these are insufficient, and they differ about what must be added. That is the honest summary and it is what a strong answer says.

The socialist criticism was answered from inside, by the shift to modern liberalism, which is why chapter 580 matters here.

The communitarian and feminist criticisms remain live, and the public and private division in particular is not settled.

The postcolonial criticism is historically unanswerable and does not by itself show that the institutions are unsuitable, which is a distinction Ambedkar himself drew when he adopted liberal constitutional forms and demanded that social democracy be added to them.

A worked example

A community runs a school and refuses admission to children of one caste, saying that its members are free to associate as they choose and that the school is private.

The liberal defence available. Freedom of association, freedom of religion, and the right to run one's own institutions are liberal principles, and a state that overrides them is deciding how people should live.

The liberal answer to that defence. The children excluded are individuals whose equal moral worth is the first principle of liberalism itself, and the exclusion is on a ground of birth, which is exactly what liberalism was formed to attack. Freedom of association does not include a right to impose a disability on somebody else.

The communitarian point. Both parties are appealing to freedom, which shows that liberalism's own vocabulary does not settle the case without a further judgment about which attachment matters more.

The Ambedkarite point, and it is the decisive one for India. A rule of formal equality that leaves an inherited hierarchy in place will be defeated by that hierarchy, using liberal freedoms as its instruments. Which is why the Indian Constitution does not stop at prohibiting state discrimination: article 15(2) reaches access to shops, public restaurants and places of public entertainment; article 17 abolishes untouchability; and article 25(2)(b) permits the throwing open of Hindu religious institutions of a public character. Those provisions are liberalism modified by an accurate reading of the society it was being applied to.

Distinctions that carry marks

CriticismMade byThe claimLiberalism's answer
Dissolves the social fabricConservativesIt consumes the trust and obligation it did not createIt removed obligations that were imposed rather than chosen
Formal freedom is emptySocialistsRights without means are worthlessAccepted; this produced modern liberalism
The unencumbered selfCommunitariansPeople do not choose their attachmentsIt describes a legal and political standing, not a psychology
Public and privateFeministsThe household is left outside politicsIncreasingly accepted; personal law is where it bites in India
Neutrality is not neutralCommunitarians and feministsThe default arrangements embed a viewContested; liberals reply that the alternative is an official view
Universalising a Western historyPostcolonial criticsThe model was formed elsewhere and exported by forceHistorically true; the institutions may still be suitable
Political without social democracyAmbedkarEquality in politics with inequality in social life is a life of contradictionsAccepted by the Indian Constitution, which adds group remedies
munotes.in310

Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against

What these arguments are NOT

They are not mostly arguments for abolishing liberal institutions. Almost every critic keeps rights, courts and elections and argues that they are not enough.

"Liberalism failed" is too crude. The record on limiting arbitrary power is the strongest single argument in political theory, and an answer that ignores it is unbalanced.

The socialist criticism is not a live objection to modern liberalism in the same form. It was answered in part from inside, which is why the two criticisms must be dated.

Ambedkar is not an opponent of liberalism. He adopted its constitutional forms and demanded that social democracy be added, which is a criticism from within.

Quick revision

  1. In favour: it limits power, and the institutions that actually do so are liberal in origin; it forbids sacrificing a person for a larger benefit; toleration is the only workable arrangement in a plural society; free discussion is how anything is found out; it is self-correcting; and the record of liberal states on living standards and on government killing its own people is the strongest empirical argument.
  2. Conservative criticism: it dissolves the fabric it inherits, over-trusts reason, and describes nobody's actual experience of family and community.
  3. Socialist criticism: formal freedom without means is empty; it protects the distribution it found; political equality does not survive economic inequality.
  4. Communitarian and feminist: the unencumbered self does not exist; the public and private division puts the household outside politics; neutrality is not neutral.
  5. Postcolonial and Indian: it universalises a particular history; liberal states governed colonies on opposite principles at the same time; and its individualism misdescribes caste.
  6. Ambedkar: political democracy without social democracy is a life of contradictions, equality in politics and inequality in social and economic life. This is criticism from inside liberalism, and the Constitution answers it with articles 15(2), 17 and 25(2)(b).
  7. The honest summary: almost every criticism says liberal institutions are insufficient rather than wrong.
munotes.in311

Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against

Test yourself

1. State the strongest arguments in favour of liberalism. That it has actually limited power, since constitutions, enforceable rights, independent courts, free elections and a free press are liberal in origin and exist nowhere else in that combination. That it alone forbids sacrificing an individual for a larger benefit. That toleration is the only workable arrangement where people disagree deeply about religion and about how to live, which is India's condition. That free discussion is how anything is discovered, on Mill's argument. That it is self-correcting, as the shift to modern liberalism shows. And that the societies adopting it have produced longer lives, higher living standards and fewer people killed by their own governments.

2. State the socialist criticism and say what became of it. That formal freedom without substantive means is empty: a right to property is worth nothing to a person who has none, and freedom of contract between very unequal parties is the freedom of the stronger; that by treating existing holdings as rights liberalism converts an unequal starting point into entitlements; and that political equality does not survive economic inequality. It was answered in part from inside liberalism, since it is precisely what produced the shift from classical to modern liberalism, the enabling state and the welfare programme. The criticism therefore has to be dated: it is decisive against classical liberalism and only partly effective against the modern form.

3. Explain the feminist criticism of the public and private division. That liberalism confines the state to a public sphere and treats the household as private, with the result that inequality of power, unequal distribution of work, and violence within the family fall outside politics altogether. The claim that the personal is political is directed at exactly this. It has particular force in India, where personal law governs marriage, divorce, inheritance and guardianship, so that the arrangements affecting women most directly are placed in the sphere the state is said not to enter.

4. What is Ambedkar's criticism, and why is it a criticism from within? That political democracy cannot survive without social democracy, meaning liberty, equality and fraternity as principles of social life; that India was entering a life of contradictions, with equality in politics and inequality in social and economic life; and that a formal equality laid over an inherited hierarchy will be defeated by that hierarchy. It is a criticism from within because he adopted liberal constitutional forms, rights, courts, elections and the rule of law, and demanded that they be supplemented rather than replaced, which is what articles 15(2), 17 and 25(2)(b) do.

munotes.in312

Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against

5. What do the criticisms of liberalism have in common? That almost none of them argues for abolishing rights, courts, elections or toleration. They argue that these are insufficient, and they differ about what must be added: social obligation for conservatives, material means for socialists, recognition of constitutive attachments for communitarians, entry into the private sphere for feminists, and social democracy for Ambedkar. That is why the honest assessment is not that liberalism failed but that liberal institutions are necessary and, on their own, not enough.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in313

Chapter Sixty-One

J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle

Syllabus topic 3.1.2, "J.S Mill views on Liberty - Influence on Indian Constitution"

In one line

Mill says the only reason for which power may rightfully be used against a person against their will is to prevent harm to others, and that their own good is never a sufficient reason.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the object of Mill's essay is to assert one very simple principle as entitled to govern absolutely the dealings of society with the individual by way of compulsion and control, whether by legal penalty or by the moral coercion of public opinion, namely that the sole end for which mankind are warranted in interfering with the liberty of action of any of their number is self-protection, and that the only purpose for which power can rightfully be exercised over any member of a civilised community against his will is to prevent harm to others.

The principle, in Mill's own words

Mill states it in a single passage and it repays reading slowly.

The object of the essay, he says, is to assert one very simple principle, entitled to govern absolutely the dealings of society with the individual in the way of compulsion and control, whether the means used be physical force in the form of legal penalties, or the moral coercion of public opinion.

That principle is that the sole end for which mankind are warranted, individually or collectively, in interfering with the liberty of action of any of their number is self-protection; that the only purpose for which power can be rightfully exercised over any member of a civilised community, against his will, is to prevent harm to others.

His own good, either physical or moral, is not a sufficient warrant. A person cannot rightfully be compelled to do or forbear because it will be better for him to do so, because it will make him happier, or because in the opinion of others it would be wise or even right. These, Mill says, are good reasons for remonstrating with him, or reasoning with him, or persuading him, or entreating him, but not for compelling him or visiting him with any evil in case he does otherwise.

And the conclusion: in the part of his conduct which merely concerns himself, his independence is of right absolute. Over himself, over his own body and mind, the individual is sovereign.

What each part of that is doing

"One very simple principle." Mill is offering a single test, not a list of protected activities. That is what makes it usable.

"Compulsion and control ... or the moral coercion of public opinion." The principle limits society and not only the state. Mill was as worried about social pressure, respectability and the tyranny of majority opinion as about law, and in some passages more so, because law can be resisted in court and opinion cannot.

munotes.in314

J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle

"Self-protection" and "harm to others." The only admissible ground.

"His own good is not a sufficient warrant." This is the exclusion of paternalism, and it is the most contested part of the principle.

"Remonstrating, reasoning, persuading, entreating." Mill is not saying you must be silent about somebody's conduct. You may argue with them, avoid them, warn others. What you may not do is compel.

"Over himself, over his own body and mind, the individual is sovereign." The sentence that makes it a principle of liberty rather than a rule about the scope of legislation.

The self-regarding and other-regarding distinction

Self-regarding conduct affects only the person acting, or affects others only with their free and informed consent. Here society has no jurisdiction at all.

Other-regarding conduct affects others without their consent. Here society may consider whether to interfere, and the harm principle then applies.

The obvious objection, and it must be stated. No conduct is purely self-regarding. A person who ruins their health burdens their family, their employer and the public hospital.

Mill's answers. First, remote and indirect effects are not harm in the relevant sense; if they counted, nothing would be left of the principle. Second, where a person fails in a distinct and assignable obligation to another, they may be dealt with for that breach, and not for the self-regarding conduct that led to it: a person who neglects their children is punished for the neglect and not for the drinking.

The three exceptions Mill states

The principle applies, Mill says, only to human beings in the maturity of their faculties, and he is explicit about three limits.

Children and young persons below the age the law fixes must be protected against their own actions as well as against external injury.

Those in a state requiring care by others.

And a third, which an Indian answer should confront rather than omit. Mill excludes what he calls backward states of society in which the race itself may be considered as in its nonage. This is a claim about civilisation and it was written by a man who spent his working life in the East India Company's administration. It should be stated, and it should be criticised: the exception has no support in the argument that produces the principle, and it was used to justify precisely the rule without consent that the essay's own reasoning condemns.

The three departments of liberty

Mill sets out what the principle protects.

Liberty of thought and feeling, including absolute freedom of opinion and sentiment on all subjects, and the freedom of expressing and publishing opinions, which he treats as practically inseparable from it.

munotes.in315

J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle

Liberty of tastes and pursuits, of framing the plan of our life to suit our own character, and of doing as we like subject to such consequences as may follow, without impediment from others so long as we do not harm them.

Liberty of combination, the freedom of individuals to unite for any purpose not involving harm to others.

The argument for free discussion

Mill's defence of free speech is the most quoted part of the book and is a separate argument from the harm principle. Silencing an opinion is wrong, he argues, whatever the opinion is.

If the opinion is right, those who silence it are deprived of the opportunity of exchanging error for truth.

If it is wrong, they lose the clearer perception and livelier impression of truth produced by its collision with error.

If it is partly right, which is the commonest case, the prevailing opinion contains only part of the truth and the suppressed one supplies the remainder.

And even a wholly true opinion, if not contested, is held as a dead dogma rather than a living truth, so that those who hold it do not know why.

The criticisms

Harm cannot be defined. Everything from physical injury to offence to economic loss has been called harm, and the principle is only as determinate as the word. Mill's own restriction to direct harm and to assignable obligations narrows it and does not settle it.

Offence is not harm, and yet societies protect against it. Almost every legal system restricts obscenity, blasphemy and insult, which the principle as stated does not permit.

Paternalism is sometimes right. Compulsory seat belts and helmets, restrictions on dangerous drugs, and rules against selling oneself into slavery are widely accepted, and Mill himself refused to allow a person to sell themselves into slavery, on the ground that the principle of freedom cannot require that a person be free not to be free.

Consent is not always real. The self-regarding category assumes free and informed consent, and consent given by a person with no alternatives is exactly the modern liberal problem of chapter 580.

It presupposes a developed individual. Mill assumes a person capable of forming a plan of life, which is a capacity produced by education and security, and his own civilisational exception shows how badly the assumption can be used.

A worked example

A city considers three measures.

One, requiring helmets for motorcyclists. Purely paternalistic on its face: the person harmed by not wearing one is the rider. On Mill's principle this is not permitted, and this is the case that shows how demanding the principle is. Two answers are available inside it: the harm to dependants and to the public health system is a distinct assignable obligation, which is a stretch; and Mill's own limit on selling oneself into slavery suggests a category of decisions so destructive of future choice that they may be restricted, which is a better fit for a fatal head injury.

munotes.in316

J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle

Two, prohibiting loud amplified music after eleven at night. Straightforwardly permitted. The noise reaches people who have not consented, so it is other-regarding, and the only question is proportion.

Three, prohibiting a play that many people find blasphemous. Not permitted. Offence at what others say or perform is precisely what Mill's argument for free discussion is directed against, and the fact that the offence is deeply felt does not convert it into harm. The remedy available on Mill's principle is not to attend, and to argue against it.

The three together show the principle's shape: it is permissive about the first and third and is entirely comfortable with the second, and the disagreements about it in modern law are almost all about the first and third.

Distinctions that carry marks

Self-regarding conductOther-regarding conduct
AffectsOnly the actor, or others who consentOthers, without their consent
Society's jurisdictionNoneMay interfere, subject to the harm test
Permitted responsesRemonstrate, reason, persuade, entreat, avoidLegal penalty, and social sanction
ExampleA person's diet, religion, choice of work, private conductNoise at night, fraud, assault, pollution
Mill's principleWhat most legal systems actually do
PaternalismExcludedAccepted for helmets, seat belts, drugs
OffenceNot a groundFrequently a ground
Public moralityNot a groundOften a ground
Harm to othersThe only groundThe principal ground

What Mill is NOT saying

He is not saying society may say nothing. Remonstrating, reasoning, persuading, entreating and avoiding a person are all permitted; compulsion is not.

He is not confining the principle to the state. The moral coercion of public opinion is expressly within it, and Mill regarded it as the greater danger.

He is not defending harm. The principle protects conduct that harms nobody but the actor, which is a different thing.

He does not treat liberty as an end in itself. He was a utilitarian, and his argument is that liberty produces the best consequences in the long run, for individuals capable of development. That is why chapter 650 belongs with this one.

Quick revision

  1. One very simple principle: the sole end for which mankind are warranted in interfering with the liberty of any of their number is self-protection, and the only purpose for which power may rightfully be exercised over a member of a civilised community against his will is to prevent harm to others.
  2. His own good is not a sufficient warrant. The permitted responses are remonstrating, reasoning, persuading, entreating, not compelling.
  3. Over himself, over his own body and mind, the individual is sovereign.
  4. The principle limits society as well as the state, expressly including the moral coercion of public opinion.
  5. Self-regarding conduct is outside society's jurisdiction; other-regarding conduct may be interfered with. The objection that nothing is purely self-regarding is met by excluding remote effects and by punishing breach of a distinct and assignable obligation.
  6. Three exceptions: children, those requiring care, and, notoriously, backward states of society, which an Indian answer should state and criticise.
  7. Three departments: thought and feeling with expression; tastes and pursuits; combination.
  8. Free discussion: a silenced opinion may be true, may be partly true, and even a true opinion uncontested becomes a dead dogma.
  9. Criticisms: harm is undefined; offence is excluded though every system restricts it; some paternalism is accepted, and Mill himself refused to permit selling oneself into slavery; consent is not always real; and the principle presupposes a developed individual.
munotes.in317

J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle

Test yourself

1. State Mill's principle in his own terms. That the sole end for which mankind are warranted, individually or collectively, in interfering with the liberty of action of any of their number is self-protection, and that the only purpose for which power can rightfully be exercised over any member of a civilised community against his will is to prevent harm to others. A person's own good, physical or moral, is not a sufficient warrant; he cannot rightfully be compelled because it would be better or wiser for him. Those are reasons for remonstrating, reasoning, persuading or entreating, not for compelling. Over himself, over his own body and mind, the individual is sovereign.

2. Why does the principle limit society and not only the state? Because Mill applies it to the dealings of society with the individual by way of compulsion and control, whether the means used is physical force in the form of legal penalties or the moral coercion of public opinion. He regarded the second as the greater danger in his own time, since a law can be challenged in a court while social pressure operates continuously, cannot be appealed against, and penetrates the details of life in a way legislation cannot.

3. Explain the self-regarding and other-regarding distinction and the objection to it. Self-regarding conduct affects only the actor, or affects others only with their free consent, and society has no jurisdiction over it. Other-regarding conduct affects others without their consent, and society may then consider interference subject to the harm test. The objection is that no conduct is purely self-regarding, since a person who ruins their health burdens family, employer and public services. Mill answers that remote and indirect effects are not harm in the relevant sense, since counting them would destroy the principle, and that where a person breaches a distinct and assignable obligation they are dealt with for that breach rather than for the self-regarding conduct behind it.

munotes.in318

J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle

4. Set out Mill's argument for free discussion. That a silenced opinion may be true, in which case those who silence it are deprived of the chance to exchange error for truth. That if it is false, its suppression costs the clearer perception and livelier impression of truth produced by collision with error. That most commonly it is partly true, the prevailing opinion holding only part of the truth and the suppressed one supplying the rest. And that even a wholly true opinion, if never contested, comes to be held as a dead dogma rather than a living truth, so that those who hold it no longer know why.

5. How should an Indian student treat Mill's exception for "backward states of society"? By stating it accurately and criticising it. Mill confines the principle to human beings in the maturity of their faculties and excludes children, those requiring care, and societies he regarded as in their nonage. That third exception has no support in the argument that produces the principle, which turns on the individual's sovereignty over their own body and mind, and it was written by a man employed in the East India Company's administration. It was used to justify precisely the government without consent that the essay's own reasoning condemns, and an answer that omits it treats the text less carefully than it should.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in319

Chapter Sixty-Two

Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Syllabus topic 3.1.2, "J.S Mill views on Liberty - Influence on Indian Constitution"

In one line

The Indian Constitution takes Mill's structure, freedoms first and restrictions requiring justification, and then permits restrictions on grounds Mill's principle would not allow.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Mill's influence on the Indian Constitution is structural rather than textual: article 19 confers the freedoms of speech, assembly, association, movement, residence and occupation on all citizens and permits the State to restrict them only by law and only by reasonable restrictions imposed for stated purposes, which places the burden of justification on the State exactly as Mill's principle requires; but the stated purposes include public order, decency or morality, defamation and contempt of court, which are grounds wider than harm to others, so the Constitution adopts Mill's method and departs from his test.

What article 19 actually says

Clause (1) confers on all citizens the right (a) to freedom of speech and expression; (b) to assemble peaceably and without arms; (c) to form associations or unions, and since 2012 co-operative societies; (d) to move freely throughout the territory of India; (e) to reside and settle in any part of the territory of India; and (g) to practise any profession, or to carry on any occupation, trade or business.

Sub-clause (f), the right to acquire, hold and dispose of property, was omitted by the Constitution (Forty-fourth Amendment) Act 1978 with effect from 20 June 1979, and property became a constitutional right under article 300A instead. That removal is itself the classical to modern liberal shift of chapter 580, made in the text.

Clause (2) permits reasonable restrictions on freedom of speech and expression in the interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India, the security of the State, friendly relations with foreign States, public order, decency or morality, or in relation to contempt of court, defamation or incitement to an offence. The words "sovereignty and integrity of India" were inserted by the Sixteenth Amendment in 1963, and the clause as a whole was substituted with retrospective effect by the First Amendment in 1951.

Clause (3) permits reasonable restrictions on assembly in the interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India or public order.

Clause (4) permits reasonable restrictions on association in the interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India, public order or morality.

Clause (5) permits reasonable restrictions on movement and residence in the interests of the general public or for the protection of the interests of any Scheduled Tribe.

Clause (6) permits reasonable restrictions on profession, occupation, trade or business in the interests of the general public.

What is Millian about it

The structure is exactly Mill's. The freedom is stated first and without qualification; the power to restrict is an exception; and the exception must be justified. That is the arrangement Mill's principle demands, and it is not the only arrangement a constitution could have adopted.

munotes.in320

Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution

The word "reasonable" puts the burden on the State. A restriction is not valid because a legislature enacted it. It must be shown to be reasonable, and the courts decide, which means the citizen's liberty is not at the disposal of a majority.

The grounds are exhaustive. The State may restrict only for the purposes clause (2) to clause (6) name, and a restriction imposed for any other purpose is void however sensible it may be. That closed list is the practical form of Mill's insistence that a reason must be given.

Freedom of speech is given the widest protection, with its own clause and its own list, which reflects the special place Mill gives to discussion.

Article 21's personal liberty, and articles 25 and 26 on freedom of conscience and religion, extend the same structure to the areas Mill called the liberty of tastes and pursuits and of thought and feeling.

Where the Constitution departs from Mill

This is the part of the answer that earns the marks, because it requires reading the grounds against the principle.

"Decency or morality" is not harm. Mill's principle expressly excludes the fact that others regard conduct as immoral. Clause (2) makes it a ground for restricting speech and clause (4) for restricting association.

"Public order" is wider than harm. It reaches conduct that disturbs the tranquillity of the community without injuring any person.

"Defamation" and "contempt of court" are grounds Mill would have examined much more sceptically than the Constitution does.

"The general public" in clauses (5) and (6) is the widest formula in the article, and it covers restrictions imposed for the collective benefit rather than to prevent harm to identified persons.

Paternalism is permitted in practice. Legislation requiring helmets, restricting alcohol and regulating dangerous employment is sustained under these clauses, and each is precisely the interference Mill said may never be justified by a person's own good.

So the correct statement is this. The Constitution adopts Mill's method, that liberty is the rule and restriction the justified exception, and rejects his test, that only harm to others may justify it. A student who says the Constitution enacts the harm principle is contradicted by the words "decency or morality" in clause (2).

Where Mill's argument has actually been used

Facts. Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India, (2018) 10 SCC 1. Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code punished carnal intercourse against the order of nature, and as applied it criminalised consensual sexual acts between adults of the same sex. Its earlier reading down by a High Court had been reversed. The petitioners challenged it on equality, expression, privacy and personal liberty.

munotes.in321

Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Held. A Constitution Bench held section 377 unconstitutional so far as it criminalised consensual acts between adults in private. The provision was manifestly arbitrary and over-broad, since making a consensual relationship a crime on the ground that it is against the order of nature suffers from manifest arbitrariness; it violated article 15; and it offended dignity, privacy and the freedom to express one's identity. The Court held that a classification treated as valid when adopted may cease to be valid as social norms change, and that constitutional morality and not popular morality governs.

Why it belongs in this chapter. The reasoning is Millian in substance without invoking him. Conduct between consenting adults in private harms nobody who has not consented; disapproval by others is not a reason for compulsion; and the Court's phrase constitutional morality does exactly the work Mill's principle does, by ruling out the community's distaste as a ground. It is also the answer to the objection above: the word morality appears in the Constitution, and the Court held that the morality that counts is the Constitution's own and not the public's.

A worked example

A State proposes three restrictions and each must be tested twice, once against Mill and once against article 19.

One, prohibiting a film that portrays a religious figure in a manner many find offensive.

On Mill: not permitted. Offence at an expression is precisely what the argument for free discussion protects against.

On article 19(2): the State would rely on public order and on decency or morality. It must show the restriction is reasonable, and the courts have required a proximate connection with the disorder apprehended rather than a remote or conjectural one. So the Constitution permits the ground and controls it through reasonableness, which is not Mill's answer and is not the opposite of it either.

Two, requiring a licence to practise as a diagnostic laboratory.

On Mill: permitted. False results harm patients who have not consented to the risk.

On article 19(6): permitted as a reasonable restriction in the interests of the general public.

Three, prohibiting an association formed to campaign for a change in the law on inheritance.

On Mill: not permitted. Advocating a change in the law is the central case of protected discussion.

On article 19(4): the State could only invoke public order or morality, and neither is available for peaceful advocacy, so the restriction fails on the Constitution's own terms as well.

The three together show the useful conclusion: the Constitution and Mill agree at both ends and differ in the middle, and the middle is where the litigation is.

munotes.in322

Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Distinctions that carry marks

Mill's principleArticle 19
StructureLiberty is the rule; interference the exception requiring justificationSame
Who bears the burdenWhoever interferesThe State, which must show the restriction is reasonable
Permitted groundHarm to others, and nothing elseThe listed grounds in clauses (2) to (6)
Morality as a groundExcludedExpressly included in clauses (2) and (4)
Public orderNot a separate groundExpressly included
PaternalismExcludedPermitted in practice under the general public head
Who decidesArgumentThe courts, on reasonableness
Applies againstThe state and societyThe State

What this topic is NOT

It is not a claim that the framers read Mill and copied him. The influence is through a tradition of constitutional thought and through the Government of India Act and the American Bill of Rights, and an answer should claim structural influence rather than direct transcription.

It is not the claim that article 19 is the harm principle. The word morality in clause (2) refutes that on the face of the text.

Article 19 does not apply against private persons, while Mill's principle expressly reaches the coercion of public opinion. That is a real and often overlooked difference.

The absence of a Millian ground does not mean a restriction is valid. It must still be reasonable, and reasonableness has done most of the work in Indian free speech law.

Quick revision

  1. Article 19(1) confers on citizens: (a) speech and expression, (b) peaceable assembly without arms, (c) associations, unions and co-operative societies, (d) movement, (e) residence and settlement, (g) profession, occupation, trade or business.
  2. Sub-clause (f), property, was omitted by the Forty-fourth Amendment, with effect from 20 June 1979; property is now article 300A.
  3. Clause (2) grounds for restricting speech: sovereignty and integrity of India, security of the State, friendly relations with foreign States, public order, decency or morality, contempt of court, defamation, incitement to an offence. Sovereignty and integrity was added by the Sixteenth Amendment 1963; the clause was substituted by the First Amendment 1951 with retrospective effect.
  4. Millian: the structure, the burden on the State through the word reasonable, the exhaustive list of grounds, and the special protection of speech.
  5. Not Millian: decency or morality, public order, the general public, and the acceptance of paternalism.
  6. The formula to write: the Constitution adopts Mill's method and rejects his test.
  7. Navtej Singh Johar: section 377 manifestly arbitrary and over-broad; constitutional morality, not popular morality. Millian reasoning without Mill.

Test yourself

1. Set out the structure of article 19 and say why it is Millian. Clause (1) confers six freedoms on citizens: speech and expression, peaceable assembly without arms, associations and unions, movement, residence, and profession or occupation. Clauses (2) to (6) permit the State to restrict each of them, but only by law, only for the purposes those clauses name, and only by restrictions that are reasonable. The structure is Millian because the freedom is stated first and without qualification, the power to restrict is an exception, and the burden of justifying the exception falls on the State rather than on the citizen, with the courts deciding.

munotes.in323

Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution

2. Where does article 19 depart from Mill's principle? In the grounds it permits. Clause (2) allows restrictions on speech in the interests of decency or morality, which Mill's principle expressly excludes since disapproval by others is never a warrant for compulsion. It allows public order, which is wider than harm to identified persons. Clauses (5) and (6) allow restrictions in the interests of the general public, which is the widest formula in the article. And in practice paternalistic legislation is sustained under these heads, which is precisely the interference Mill said may never be justified by a person's own good.

3. What is the correct formula for describing Mill's influence? That the Constitution adopts Mill's method and rejects his test. The method is that liberty is the rule and restriction a justified exception, with the burden on whoever restricts; that is faithfully reproduced by the requirement that restrictions be reasonable and confined to a closed list of purposes. The test is that only harm to others may justify interference; that is not adopted, since the closed list includes decency or morality, public order and the interests of the general public.

4. How does Navtej Singh Johar illustrate Millian reasoning in Indian law? Section 377 as applied criminalised consensual acts between adults in private, and a Constitution Bench held it unconstitutional to that extent as manifestly arbitrary and over-broad, violative of article 15, and destructive of dignity, privacy and the freedom to express identity. The reasoning is Mill's in substance: conduct between consenting adults harms nobody who has not consented, and the disapproval of others is not a reason for compulsion. The Court's distinction between constitutional morality, which governs, and popular morality, which does not, performs exactly the function Mill's principle performs, and it answers the objection that the Constitution names morality as a ground.

5. Name one difference between Mill's principle and article 19 that students usually miss. That article 19 operates only against the State, while Mill's principle expressly extends to the moral coercion of public opinion, which he regarded as the greater danger. A person whose employer, caste association or neighbours compel conformity has suffered exactly the interference Mill's essay is about, and article 19 gives them nothing, since it is a right against the State. Indian law reaches such conduct, if at all, through other provisions, and the gap is a real limit on the parallel between the two.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in324

Chapter Sixty-Three

Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.2, "Utilitarianism"; 3.2.1, "Meaning and Definition, Basic Principles, Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Utilitarianism says the right action is the one that produces the most happiness, counting everybody's happiness equally, and nothing else matters at all.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: utilitarianism is the moral and political doctrine that the rightness of an action, a law or an institution is determined solely by its consequences for the happiness of all those affected, the standard being the greatest happiness of the greatest number, each person's happiness counting equally; its distinguishing features are therefore consequentialism, hedonism, aggregation and impartiality.

The principle of utility

Bentham defines the principle of utility as that principle which approves or disapproves of every action whatsoever according to the tendency it appears to have to augment or diminish the happiness of the party whose interest is in question. He notes that the principle was latterly called the greatest happiness principle, and Mill uses that name.

Mill's own observation about how widely it operates is worth having: since men's sentiments of approval and aversion are greatly influenced by what they suppose to be the effects of things on their happiness, the principle of utility has had a large share in forming the moral doctrines even of those who most scornfully reject its authority, and no school of thought denies that the influence of actions on happiness is a material and often predominant consideration.

The four components

The meaning of utilitarianism is exhausted by four propositions, and any definition of utilitarianism that drops one of them is describing something else.

Every question on utilitarianism can be answered by taking these apart, because every criticism attacks one of them.

1. Consequentialism

The rightness of an act depends entirely on its consequences. Nothing about the act itself, no promise given, no right violated, no duty owed, counts except through its effects.

What this excludes. Desert, rights, promises and duties as independent considerations. They matter only if and so far as respecting them produces good consequences.

2. Hedonism, or welfarism

The consequence that counts is happiness, understood by Bentham as pleasure and the absence of pain. Later utilitarians substituted preference satisfaction or wellbeing, which avoids some objections and keeps the structure.

3. Aggregation

The happiness of everybody affected is added together, and the option with the largest total is the right one. Gains to some are offset against losses to others.

What this permits. Imposing a loss on a few to produce a larger gain for many, which is the source of nearly every objection at chapter 660.

4. Impartiality

Each person's happiness counts equally. Bentham's formula, as reported by Mill, is that everybody is to count for one and nobody for more than one.

The fourth component is why utilitarianism was a radical doctrine and not a conservative one. In a society organised by rank, caste, sex and property, the proposition that a labourer's pain counts exactly as much as a landowner's was an attack on the whole arrangement, and Bentham's followers used it to argue for legal reform, prison reform, the extension of the franchise and the equal treatment of women.

munotes.in325

Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles

The two versions

Act utilitarianism applies the principle to each act: do whatever produces the most happiness on this occasion.

Rule utilitarianism applies it to rules: follow the rule whose general observance produces the most happiness, even where breaking it on this occasion would produce more.

Why the distinction matters. Most objections to utilitarianism are objections to the act version. Rule utilitarianism answers many of them, since a rule permitting the punishment of the innocent, or the breaking of promises when convenient, would produce dreadful consequences if generally followed. It is criticised in turn for collapsing: if the rule is to be broken whenever breaking it produces more good, it is act utilitarianism; and if it is never to be broken, it has stopped being utilitarian and has become rule worship.

What utilitarianism produced

An answer that treats the doctrine only as a target for objections misses why it mattered, and MU's syllabus places it beside liberalism precisely because of what it did.

Legal reform. Bentham's life work was the reform of law by the test of utility: codification, the abolition of archaic offences and procedures, and the redesign of punishment on the lines of chapter 480.

Prison and asylum reform, because a practice inflicting suffering that produced no compensating benefit could not be defended.

The extension of the franchise, since each person's interest counts equally and each is the best judge of it.

The equal treatment of women. Mill's argument for it is straightforwardly utilitarian: excluding half the population wastes their capacities and inflicts avoidable misery.

The beginnings of animal welfare. Bentham's question is the famous one, and it is a direct application of the principle: the question is not whether they can reason or talk, but whether they can suffer.

Modern policy analysis. Cost benefit analysis, quality adjusted life years in health, and the whole apparatus of impact assessment are utilitarianism applied by governments.

Utilitarianism in India

Its influence is greater than students expect and is worth a paragraph.

In the codes. The nineteenth century Indian codes, and the Penal Code in particular, were drafted in a period when Bentham's ideas dominated English legal reform, and their design, a systematic code with graded offences and calibrated punishments, is Benthamite in conception.

In policy today. Every scheme justified by the number of beneficiaries against the cost is a utilitarian argument.

munotes.in326

Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles

And its Indian critic is Gandhi, whose Sarvodaya at chapter 670 is a direct answer to the greatest number.

A worked example

A city must decide whether to build a metro line whose route requires demolishing four hundred houses in a low income settlement.

The utilitarian analysis. Count the happiness. Two million commuters save forty minutes a day for thirty years. Four hundred families lose their homes and their neighbourhood. Add compensation, resettlement and the cost. Sum it. If the total is positive, the metro is not merely permitted but required.

What the doctrine gets right here. It forces the decision maker to count the commuters' time, which no rights-based analysis does well; it counts the four hundred families equally, which a political process would not; and it makes the compensation an item to be got right rather than an afterthought.

What is troubling about it. The four hundred families' loss has been outweighed rather than answered. On the aggregative test, if the number of commuters were large enough, no level of loss to the four hundred would block the project, and there is no point at which the doctrine says stop. That is objection three at chapter 660.

And the rule utilitarian reply. A society that expropriates without limit whenever the arithmetic favours it produces insecurity for everybody, so a rule protecting homes, subject to compensation and to due process, produces more happiness overall than case by case calculation. Notice what has happened: the rule utilitarian has arrived at something that looks exactly like a right.

Distinctions that carry marks

UtilitarianismKantian ethics
Right action determined byConsequencesThe nature of the act and the maxim behind it
The individualA site where happiness occursAn end in themselves, never merely a means
May a person be sacrificed for a larger gain?Yes, if the sum favours itNever
Rights areUseful rules that generally maximise happinessFundamental
Test of a punishmentDoes it prevent more evil than it inflicts?Is it deserved?
Act utilitarianismRule utilitarianism
Applies the principle toEach individual actRules of conduct
Question askedWhat should I do now?What rule should be generally followed?
Handles the promise-breaking objectionBadlyWell
CriticismPermits any act if the sum favours itEither collapses into act utilitarianism or becomes rule worship

What utilitarianism is NOT

It is not selfishness. The principle counts everybody's happiness equally including one's own, and requires sacrificing one's own interest whenever that increases the total. It is one of the most demanding doctrines in ethics.

It is not the same as pragmatism or expediency. It is a strict and impartial standard, not a licence to do what is convenient.

munotes.in327

Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles

"The greatest good of the greatest number" is a loose formula and a source of confusion, because it appears to state two maximands. The accurate statement is the greatest aggregate happiness, counting each person equally.

It is not indifferent to distribution by design, though it is by construction: because it counts totals, it can be satisfied by an unequal distribution, and its answer, that a rupee is worth more to a poor person than to a rich one, gives it a distributive tendency without a distributive principle.

Quick revision

  1. The principle of utility approves or disapproves of every action according to its tendency to augment or diminish the happiness of the party whose interest is in question. Bentham later called it the greatest happiness principle.
  2. Four components: consequentialism, hedonism or welfarism, aggregation, impartiality. Every criticism attacks one of them.
  3. Impartiality made it radical: everybody to count for one and nobody for more than one, in a society organised by rank, caste, sex and property.
  4. Act against rule utilitarianism: the rule version answers most objections and is charged with either collapsing into the act version or becoming rule worship.
  5. What it produced: legal codification and reform, prison reform, the extension of the franchise, the argument for the equal treatment of women, animal welfare, and modern cost benefit analysis.
  6. In India: the nineteenth century codes are Benthamite in design, and every scheme justified by beneficiaries against cost is a utilitarian argument. Its Indian critic is Gandhi.
  7. Not selfishness, not expediency, and the loose slogan about the greatest good of the greatest number should be replaced by the greatest aggregate happiness, counting each equally.

Test yourself

1. State the principle of utility and its four components. The principle of utility approves or disapproves of every action according to the tendency it appears to have to augment or diminish the happiness of the party whose interest is in question. Its components are consequentialism, since rightness depends entirely on effects; hedonism or welfarism, since the effect that counts is happiness, understood as pleasure and the absence of pain; aggregation, since everybody's happiness is summed and the largest total wins; and impartiality, since each person counts for one and nobody for more than one.

2. Why was utilitarianism a radical doctrine? Because of its fourth component. In a society organised by rank, caste, sex and property, the proposition that every person's pleasure and pain counts exactly the same, so that a labourer's suffering weighs as much as a landowner's, was an attack on the entire arrangement. Bentham's followers used it to argue for the codification of law, for prison and asylum reform, for the extension of the franchise, for the equal treatment of women, and for the consideration of animals, on the ground that the question is not whether they can reason but whether they can suffer.

munotes.in328

Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles

3. Distinguish act from rule utilitarianism and state the objection to each. Act utilitarianism applies the principle to each act, requiring whatever produces the most happiness on the occasion. Rule utilitarianism applies it to rules, requiring the rule whose general observance produces the most happiness even where breaking it would produce more on this occasion. Act utilitarianism is objected to because it permits any act, including punishing the innocent or breaking a promise, whenever the sum favours it. Rule utilitarianism is objected to on a dilemma: if the rule may be broken whenever breaking it maximises happiness it collapses into the act version, and if it may never be broken it has ceased to be utilitarian and become rule worship.

4. What has utilitarianism produced in practice? The reform and codification of law by the test of utility, which was Bentham's life work and shaped the nineteenth century Indian codes. Prison and asylum reform, since a practice inflicting suffering without compensating benefit could not be defended. The extension of the franchise, since each person's interest counts equally and each is the best judge of it. Mill's argument for the equal treatment of women. The beginning of concern for animals. And in modern government, cost benefit analysis, health measures such as quality adjusted life years, and impact assessment generally.

5. Why is "the greatest good of the greatest number" an unsatisfactory formula? Because it appears to require the maximisation of two different things at once, the amount of good and the number of people, which can conflict: an option producing a great deal of good for many is not obviously to be preferred to one producing slightly less for slightly more people, and the slogan does not say. The accurate statement of the doctrine is the greatest aggregate happiness, with each person's happiness counted equally, which makes clear that there is a single maximand and that the equality lies in the counting rather than in the distribution.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in329

Chapter Sixty-Four

Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "Jeremy Bentham's Views"

In one line

Bentham says pleasure and pain govern everything we do and everything we ought to do, and that morals and legislation can therefore be put on a footing as exact as arithmetic.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Bentham holds that nature has placed mankind under the governance of two sovereign masters, pain and pleasure, which alone point out what we ought to do and determine what we shall do; that the principle of utility, which approves or disapproves of every action according to its tendency to augment or diminish happiness, is therefore the only defensible standard of right and wrong; and that the value of any pleasure or pain can be estimated by seven measurable dimensions, so that legislation can be made a matter of calculation rather than of custom, sentiment or authority.

The opening, in Bentham's own words

The first sentence of chapter I is the whole doctrine compressed.

Nature has placed mankind under the governance of two sovereign masters, pain and pleasure. It is for them alone to point out what we ought to do, as well as to determine what we shall do. On the one hand the standard of right and wrong, on the other the chain of causes and effects, are fastened to their throne. They govern us in all we do, in all we say, in all we think; every effort we can make to throw off our subjection will serve but to demonstrate and confirm it. In words a man may pretend to abjure their empire, but in reality he will remain subject to it all the while.

Two claims are packed into that and they must be separated, because a student who runs them together cannot answer the standard objection.

A psychological claim. People are in fact moved by pleasure and pain. This is psychological hedonism.

A moral claim. Pleasure and pain are also the standard of right and wrong. This is ethical hedonism.

The standard objection is that the second does not follow from the first: that people are moved by something does not show it is what they ought to pursue. That is the naturalistic objection and Bentham does not answer it.

What Bentham was against

His doctrine is best understood by what he rejected, and each rejection is a target he names.

Natural rights. Bentham regarded them as nonsense, and imprescriptible natural rights as nonsense upon stilts. A right, for him, is the creature of law: to say that a right exists before any law confers it is to mistake what one wants for what is.

The social contract. A fiction. What the state actually rests on is the habit of obedience, and the question is whether obedience produces more happiness than resistance.

munotes.in330

Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus

Custom and authority. The fact that a rule is old, or that a great authority stated it, tells you nothing about whether it produces happiness. This is his answer to the prescriptive theory of chapter 360.

Moral sentiment as a standard. Any principle which says that an act is wrong because one feels it to be wrong makes each person's feeling the measure, which is what Bentham called the principle of sympathy and antipathy and rejected as no principle at all: it is despotism dressed as morality.

The felicific calculus

Bentham's proposal that the value of a pleasure or pain can be measured. The dimensions are set out in chapter IV and are the most examinable material in this chapter.

Considered by itself, the value of a pleasure or pain is greater or less according to four circumstances.

1. Intensity, how strong it is. 2. Duration, how long it lasts. 3. Certainty or uncertainty, how likely it is to occur. 4. Propinquity or remoteness, how soon it will occur.

When the value is considered for the purpose of estimating the tendency of an act, two more are added.

5. Fecundity, the chance it has of being followed by sensations of the same kind: pleasures if it is a pleasure, pains if it is a pain. 6. Purity, the chance it has of not being followed by sensations of the opposite kind.

Bentham himself says these last two are strictly scarcely to be deemed properties of the pleasure or the pain itself, which is a qualification students almost always omit and which shows him to be a more careful writer than his reputation suggests.

And where a number of persons are concerned, a seventh.

7. Extent, the number of persons affected.

How the calculation runs. For each person affected, sum the values of all the pleasures on one side and all the pains on the other; take the balance; then repeat for every person and add the balances. If the total is on the side of pleasure, the act is good in its tendency for that community; if on the side of pain, bad.

What the calculus is for

An answer that treats the calculus as an absurdity has missed the point, and Bentham was aware of the difficulty.

It is a standard, not a procedure to be gone through before every act. Bentham says the process is not to be strictly pursued before every moral judgment, and that it may be kept in view as a standard by which the accuracy of any such judgment may be tested.

Its real target is legislation. A legislator deciding between two rules, each of which will affect a very large number of people, needs some way of comparing them, and the alternative to a calculus is custom, prejudice or the interest of whoever is drafting.

munotes.in331

Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus

It made suffering visible. Because extent counts and each counts for one, the calculus forces a legislator to count the pain of the poor, the imprisoned, the transported and the enslaved, and that is what Bentham's followers used it for.

The criticisms of Bentham specifically

Pleasures cannot be measured, still less compared between people. There is no unit of pleasure and no way of establishing that one person's satisfaction is greater than another's.

Quality is ignored. Bentham treats all pleasures as differing only in quantity, which produces the notorious implication that a simple amusement is as good as poetry if it yields the same quantity. This is exactly the objection Mill answers at chapter 650.

Psychological hedonism is false as psychology. People act from duty, habit, love, spite and principle, often against their own pleasure.

The move from is to ought is unearned, as above.

It has no place for rights or for distribution. Because only the total is counted, a distribution that concentrates misery on a minority passes if the total is large enough. This is chapter 660's central objection.

It is a doctrine of a calculating individual, and its picture of human beings as adding machines was resisted from the start, notably by Carlyle who called it a pig philosophy, and by Dickens, whose Gradgrind is a portrait of it.

Bentham's achievement

The reform programme. Almost everything Bentham argued for was eventually done: the codification of law, the abolition of archaic offences and procedures, penal reform, the reform of evidence, the extension of the franchise, and the removal of legal disabilities.

A method. The demand that every institution justify itself by its effects on the people it affects is now how policy is argued everywhere, and cost benefit analysis is his invention in a modern form.

And a warning that is also his. Because he made the test entirely aggregative, he supplied the tool with which majorities can be shown to be entitled to override minorities, and the answer to that had to come from elsewhere.

A worked example

A State is deciding whether to permit a chemical plant near a small town. Two hundred thousand people in the region will gain employment and cheaper goods. Four thousand people living beside the plant will suffer a measurable increase in respiratory illness.

Apply the seven dimensions to the four thousand. Intensity: illness is severe. Duration: chronic, lasting decades. Certainty: high, if the epidemiology is sound. Propinquity: immediate. Fecundity: illness produces further pains, loss of work and of income. Purity: it produces no compensating pleasures. Extent: four thousand.

munotes.in332

Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus

Apply them to the two hundred thousand. Intensity: employment and cheaper goods, moderate. Duration: long. Certainty: moderate, since employment depends on the plant continuing. Propinquity: some delay. Fecundity: income produces further goods. Purity: high. Extent: two hundred thousand.

The result. On a straightforward aggregation the plant is approved, and the four thousand's chronic illness is outweighed by a moderate benefit spread over fifty times as many people.

What the exercise shows. First, that the calculus is genuinely useful: it forced the decision maker to count the illness, to ask about duration and certainty, and to notice fecundity, which a political process would not have done. Second, that it contains no point at which the answer becomes no. Increase the number of beneficiaries and any burden on the four thousand is justified.

The two replies inside utilitarianism. The rule utilitarian says a rule requiring emission standards and compensation produces more happiness over many such decisions than case by case calculation. And a utilitarian may point out that a rupee, or an hour of relief, is worth more to somebody who has little of it, which gives the doctrine a distributive tendency without giving it a distributive principle.

Distinctions that carry marks

DimensionWhat it measuresApplies to
IntensityHow strongThe pleasure or pain itself
DurationHow longThe pleasure or pain itself
CertaintyHow likelyThe pleasure or pain itself
PropinquityHow soonThe pleasure or pain itself
FecundityChance of being followed by more of the same kindThe act producing it
PurityChance of not being followed by the opposite kindThe act producing it
ExtentHow many personsA community
BenthamMill
Pleasures differ inQuantity onlyQuantity and quality
Test of valueThe calculusThe preference of those who know both
Individual libertyProtected only so far as it maximises happinessGiven a principle of its own, chapter 610
RightsNonsense upon stiltsSecurity of expectation, grounded in utility
ToneLegislative and systematicEthical and literary

What Bentham is NOT

He is not saying morality is whatever feels nice. The principle is impartial and aggregative and constantly requires a person to sacrifice their own pleasure.

The calculus is not to be performed before every act. Bentham says so expressly; it is a standard against which judgments can be tested.

He is not indifferent to the poor. The reverse: extent and equal counting are what make the poor visible in the calculation, and his followers used it accordingly.

"Nonsense upon stilts" is about natural rights, not about rights. Bentham thought rights created by law were real and valuable; what he denied was rights existing before any law.

munotes.in333

Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus

Quick revision

  1. The opening: nature has placed mankind under the governance of two sovereign masters, pain and pleasure, which alone point out what we ought to do and determine what we shall do.
  2. Two claims in it: psychological hedonism, that people are moved by pleasure and pain, and ethical hedonism, that these are the standard of right and wrong. The second does not follow from the first.
  3. What he rejected: natural rights (nonsense upon stilts), the social contract (a fiction), custom and authority, and moral sentiment as a standard, which he called the principle of sympathy and antipathy.
  4. The calculus, four dimensions of the pleasure itself: intensity, duration, certainty, propinquity. Two of the act: fecundity, purity. One of the community: extent.
  5. Bentham himself notes that fecundity and purity are scarcely properties of the pleasure itself.
  6. The calculus is a standard, not a procedure, and its real target is legislation.
  7. Criticisms: pleasures cannot be measured or compared between persons; quality is ignored; psychological hedonism is false; the is to ought move is unearned; there is no place for rights or distribution; and it pictures human beings as calculating machines.

Test yourself

1. Quote and analyse Bentham's opening proposition. That nature has placed mankind under the governance of two sovereign masters, pain and pleasure, which alone point out what we ought to do as well as determining what we shall do, the standard of right and wrong and the chain of causes and effects both being fastened to their throne. It contains two distinct claims: a psychological one, that people are as a matter of fact moved by pleasure and pain, and a moral one, that pleasure and pain are the standard of right and wrong. The standard objection is that the second does not follow from the first, since the fact that people are moved by something does not establish that it is what they ought to pursue.

2. Set out the felicific calculus. Considered by itself, a pleasure or pain has four dimensions: intensity, duration, certainty or uncertainty, and propinquity or remoteness. When the value is considered in order to estimate the tendency of the act producing it, two more are added: fecundity, the chance of being followed by sensations of the same kind, and purity, the chance of not being followed by sensations of the opposite kind. Where a number of persons is concerned there is a seventh, extent, the number affected. The values are summed for each person, the balance taken, and the balances added across everybody affected.

3. What did Bentham reject, and why? Natural rights, which he called nonsense, and imprescriptible natural rights nonsense upon stilts, on the ground that a right is the creature of law and that asserting one before any law confers it mistakes what one wants for what exists. The social contract, as a fiction, the state resting in fact on the habit of obedience. Custom and authority, since the age of a rule or the eminence of its author says nothing about whether it produces happiness. And moral sentiment as a standard, which he called the principle of sympathy and antipathy, because it makes each person's feeling the measure and is therefore no principle at all.

munotes.in334

Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus

4. Is the calculus absurd? Give the argument on both sides. Against it: there is no unit of pleasure, no way of comparing satisfaction between persons, and the exercise cannot be performed with the precision the language suggests. For it: Bentham says expressly that it is not to be strictly pursued before every judgment but kept in view as a standard by which the accuracy of a judgment may be tested; its real target is legislation, where a legislator comparing rules affecting very large numbers needs some method and the alternative is custom, prejudice or the interest of the drafter; and because extent counts and each counts for one, it forces the suffering of the poor and the imprisoned into the reckoning, which is what his followers used it for.

5. What is Bentham's principal weakness as a political doctrine? That it is purely aggregative. Because only the total is counted and gains to some offset losses to others, a distribution that concentrates severe suffering on a minority passes the test whenever the number of beneficiaries is large enough, and there is no point at which the doctrine returns the answer no. It therefore supplies the tool by which majorities can be shown entitled to override minorities, and the correction had to come from outside it, from rights, from Mill's addition of quality and liberty, and from rule utilitarianism.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in335

Chapter Sixty-Five

J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "J.S Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism"

In one line

Mill accepted Bentham's principle and added that pleasures differ in kind as well as in amount, that the judges of which kind is better are those who know both, and that individual liberty and justice must be protected even by a utilitarian.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Mill modified Bentham's utilitarianism in four respects: he introduced a distinction between higher and lower pleasures, holding that quality as well as quantity is to be considered and that the test of quality is the decided preference of those who have experience of both; he broadened happiness beyond sensation to include the development of the higher faculties; he grounded individual liberty in a principle of its own; and he treated justice and rights as founded on the most vital of all interests, security, so that they may not be traded away against ordinary gains.

The problem Mill was answering

Bentham's doctrine had been attacked as a pig philosophy: if pleasure is the only good and pleasures differ only in quantity, then a life of simple sensual satisfaction is as good as any other provided the quantity is equal, and the doctrine is fit for swine rather than for human beings.

Mill's answer is the first and most famous of the modifications, and he begins by conceding that the objection would be fatal if the premise were true and then denying the premise.

The first modification: quality of pleasures

Mill's own statement. It is, he says, quite compatible with the principle of utility to recognise the fact that some kinds of pleasure are more desirable and more valuable than others. It would be absurd, he adds, that while in estimating all other things quality is considered as well as quantity, the estimation of pleasures should be supposed to depend on quantity alone.

The test of quality, which is what students most often leave out. If asked what makes one pleasure more valuable than another merely as a pleasure, he says there is but one possible answer: of two pleasures, if there is one to which all or almost all who have experience of both give a decided preference, irrespective of any feeling of moral obligation to prefer it, that is the more desirable pleasure.

The judges. Those qualified by knowledge of both, or, if they differ, the majority among them, and Mill calls their verdict that of the only competent judges, from which he says there can be no appeal. He adds a point that is often missed: there is the less hesitation in accepting this judgment about quality, since there is no other tribunal to be referred to even on the question of quantity.

munotes.in336

J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism

The famous consequence. A being of higher faculties requires more to make him happy, is capable of more acute suffering, and yet can never wish to sink into what he feels to be a lower grade of existence. Mill's conclusion is the sentence everybody quotes: it is better to be a human being dissatisfied than a pig satisfied; better to be Socrates dissatisfied than a fool satisfied. And if the fool or the pig is of a different opinion, it is because they only know their own side of the question, while the other party to the comparison knows both sides.

Is this consistent with utilitarianism? The standard objection is that it is not: if a pleasure is preferred for its quality and not for the quantity of pleasure it yields, then something other than pleasure is being used as the standard, and Mill has abandoned hedonism while claiming to defend it. Mill's defence is that the preference of those who know both is itself evidence about pleasure, and that the competent judges are reporting a fact about the pleasures rather than importing an external standard. Whether that succeeds is the argument, and an answer should state both sides.

The second modification: what happiness is

Bentham's happiness is pleasure and the absence of pain, as sensation. Mill's is broader.

Happiness includes the exercise and development of the higher faculties, the intellect, the feelings and imagination, and the moral sentiments.

It includes a sense of dignity, which Mill says all human beings possess in some form and which is so essential to their happiness that nothing which conflicts with it can be an object of desire to them.

And it is not to be confused with contentment. A person of higher faculties may be less contented and more happy in Mill's sense than one whose capacities of enjoyment are low but fully satisfied.

The third modification: liberty gets a principle of its own

This is the modification with the greatest practical consequence and it is what chapter 610 is about.

Bentham protects liberty only so far as protecting it maximises happiness, which is a contingent and revisable protection. Mill gives liberty a principle: the only purpose for which power may rightfully be exercised over any member of a civilised community against his will is to prevent harm to others.

How he keeps it utilitarian. Mill says expressly that he forgoes any advantage from the idea of abstract right and regards utility as the ultimate appeal on all ethical questions, but utility in the largest sense, grounded on the permanent interests of man as a progressive being. The protection of liberty is justified because individuality and the development of character are among the largest of those permanent interests.

munotes.in337

J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism

Critics say this is where Mill's utilitarianism finally breaks: a principle stated as governing absolutely is not something a calculation can override, and yet on his own account the calculation is the ultimate appeal.

The fourth modification: justice and rights

Mill devotes the last chapter of Utilitarianism to justice, which is the part most relevant to a law student.

The problem. Justice feels categorically different from expediency. We do not say it would be inexpedient to convict an innocent person; we say it would be unjust, and the feeling is of a different order.

Mill's account. To have a right is to have something society ought to defend one in possessing, and the reason society ought to is general utility. What makes the rules of justice feel different is that they protect the most vital of all interests, security, without which nothing else a person values can be relied on from one moment to the next. Because the interest is so extraordinarily important, the rules protecting it acquire an absoluteness of obligation that ordinary rules of expediency do not have.

Why this matters for the objections at chapter 660. Mill's answer to the charge that utilitarianism would permit punishing an innocent person is that no ordinary gain can outweigh the damage to security, so a rule permitting it could never be justified on utilitarian grounds. Whether that answer is sufficient, or whether it is available only because Mill has smuggled in something that functions as a right, is the question.

Was the modification an improvement or an abandonment?

The examiner's question, and both answers must be given.

An improvement. It rescues the doctrine from the swine objection; it accounts for the fact that we do think some satisfactions better than others; it protects liberty and justice, which pure aggregation cannot; and it makes the theory match the moral judgments people actually make.

An abandonment. Quality cannot be assessed by a hedonistic standard without importing another one; a liberty principle governing absolutely cannot be overridden by calculation, so it is not doing utilitarian work; and treating security as generating obligations of a different order is, in substance, a theory of rights. On this view Mill's utilitarianism is a doorway out of utilitarianism.

The fair conclusion. Mill made the doctrine humane and made it less pure, and both halves of that sentence are true.

A worked example

A State must allocate a limited budget between two schemes.

Scheme A funds free public libraries, evening classes and music instruction in a hundred towns, benefiting perhaps two lakh people.

Scheme B subsidises a popular entertainment channel's rural transmission, benefiting perhaps twenty lakh people.

munotes.in338

J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism

On Bentham's calculus. Extent is ten times greater for B, intensity is comparable, duration is similar, certainty is higher for B since it needs no attendance. B wins on the arithmetic.

On Mill's modification. The question is not only how much satisfaction each produces but what kind. Ask the people who have experience of both, an education and passive entertainment, and Mill's claim is that those who know both give a decided preference to the first. If that is so, the quality of the pleasure counts and A is not to be dismissed because the numbers favour B.

Two honest observations about the example. First, Mill's test is empirical, so it can be wrong: if the competent judges actually prefer the entertainment, the doctrine says so. Second, the argument is easily abused, because it lets an educated official say that what they enjoy is a higher pleasure than what everybody else enjoys. Mill's protection against that is that the judges must have experience of both, which excludes the official who has never watched the channel.

Distinctions that carry marks

BenthamMill
Pleasures differ inQuantity onlyQuantity and quality
Test of qualityNoneThe decided preference of those with experience of both
Happiness isPleasure and absence of pain, as sensationIncluding the exercise of the higher faculties and a sense of dignity
ContentmentThe same as happinessNot the same; better a human being dissatisfied than a pig satisfied
LibertyProtected so far as it maximises happinessA principle of its own, grounded in utility in the largest sense
Rights and justiceNonsense upon stilts; rights are creatures of lawGrounded in the vital interest of security, and therefore near absolute
Style of the doctrineLegislative, systematic, quantitativeEthical, qualitative, concerned with character

What the modification is NOT

It is not a rejection of the principle of utility. Mill states expressly that utility is the ultimate appeal on all ethical questions, and defends the doctrine as its most careful exponent.

"Better Socrates dissatisfied" is not an argument for misery. Mill's point is about the capacity for happiness, not about the desirability of being unhappy.

The competent judge test is not a test of who is more educated. It requires experience of both pleasures, which excludes anybody who has not had the lower one.

It is not a minor adjustment. It changes what happiness means, adds a test the original doctrine had no room for, and gives liberty and justice a protection aggregation cannot supply.

Quick revision

  1. The problem: Bentham's doctrine was attacked as a pig philosophy, fit for swine, if pleasures differ only in quantity.
  2. Modification one, quality: it is quite compatible with the principle of utility to recognise that some kinds of pleasure are more desirable, and absurd that quality should be considered in estimating everything else and not pleasures.
  3. The test: of two pleasures, that to which all or almost all who have experience of both give a decided preference, irrespective of any feeling of moral obligation, is the more desirable. The competent judges are those who know both, and there is no appeal from them; and there is no other tribunal even for quantity.
  4. The consequence: better to be a human being dissatisfied than a pig satisfied, better Socrates dissatisfied than a fool satisfied; the fool knows only one side of the question.
  5. Modification two: happiness includes the exercise of the higher faculties and a sense of dignity, and is not the same as contentment.
  6. Modification three: liberty gets a principle of its own, justified by utility in the largest sense, grounded on the permanent interests of man as a progressive being.
  7. Modification four: justice and rights rest on the most vital interest, security, which gives them an absoluteness ordinary expediency lacks.
  8. The examiner's question: improvement or abandonment? Say both, and conclude that Mill made the doctrine humane and made it less pure.
munotes.in339

J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism

Test yourself

1. What objection was Mill answering, and how did he answer it? The objection that utilitarianism is a doctrine worthy only of swine: if pleasure is the only good and pleasures differ only in quantity, a life of simple sensual satisfaction is as good as any other of equal quantity. Mill answered that the objection would be fatal if the premise were true and denied the premise, holding it quite compatible with the principle of utility to recognise that some kinds of pleasure are more desirable and more valuable than others, and that it would be absurd for quality to count in estimating everything else while pleasures were estimated by quantity alone.

2. State Mill's test for the quality of pleasures. That of two pleasures, if there is one to which all or almost all who have experience of both give a decided preference, irrespective of any feeling of moral obligation to prefer it, that is the more desirable pleasure. The judges are those qualified by knowledge of both, or, where they differ, the majority among them, whom Mill calls the only competent judges and from whose verdict he says there can be no appeal. He adds that there is the less hesitation in accepting their judgment about quality since there is no other tribunal available even on the question of quantity.

3. Is the introduction of quality consistent with utilitarianism? The objection is that it is not: if a pleasure is preferred for its kind rather than for the quantity of pleasure it produces, then something other than pleasure is functioning as the standard, and hedonism has been abandoned while being defended. Mill's answer is that the preference of those who have experienced both is itself evidence about the pleasures rather than an external criterion, so the competent judges are reporting a fact about pleasure and not importing another value. Whether that succeeds is the live argument, and a good answer gives both sides.

munotes.in340

J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism

4. How does Mill account for justice and rights? To have a right is to have something society ought to defend one in possessing, and the reason it ought to is general utility. What makes the rules of justice feel categorically different from rules of expediency is that they protect the most vital of all interests, security, without which nothing a person values can be relied on from moment to moment. Because that interest is so extraordinarily important, the rules protecting it acquire an absoluteness of obligation which ordinary expediency lacks, which is Mill's answer to the objection that utilitarianism would permit convicting an innocent person.

5. Did Mill improve utilitarianism or abandon it? Both answers are defensible. He improved it by rescuing it from the swine objection, by accounting for the fact that people do think some satisfactions better than others, and by protecting liberty and justice, which pure aggregation cannot. He abandoned it, on the other view, because quality cannot be assessed on a hedonistic standard without importing another, because a liberty principle stated as governing absolutely cannot be overridden by calculation and so is not doing utilitarian work, and because treating security as generating obligations of a different order is in substance a theory of rights. The fair conclusion is that he made the doctrine humane and made it less pure.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in341

Chapter Sixty-Six

Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Utilitarianism is defended because it is simple, impartial, secular, practical and demanding, and it is attacked because counting only the total permits sacrificing a person, and because it can require you to do what everybody knows is monstrous.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: utilitarianism is supported on the grounds that it supplies a single, clear and secular standard applicable to any question, that it counts every person equally and so has been a force for reform, that it takes consequences seriously where rival theories do not, and that it is the working method of modern public policy; and it is criticised on the grounds that consequences cannot be predicted or measured, that pleasure is not the only good, that aggregation permits the sacrifice of individuals and ignores distribution, that it leaves no room for rights, promises, desert or special obligations, and that it is impartial to the point of being inhuman.

The arguments in favour

1. It has a single clear standard. One question, applicable to any decision, from a sentencing hearing to a highway alignment. No rival theory offers anything so usable.

2. It is impartial. Everybody counts for one and nobody for more than one, which is what made it an instrument of reform against rank, caste, sex and property, at chapter 630.

3. It is secular and public. Its reasons can be stated to anybody, without appeal to revelation, tradition or authority, which matters most in a society of several religions.

4. It takes consequences seriously. A theory that says a thing must be done though the heavens fall is not obviously superior to one that asks what will happen if they do. Insisting on a rule when following it produces avoidable suffering requires a justification, and utilitarianism at least demands one.

5. It is demanding, not permissive. Because one's own happiness counts for exactly one, the doctrine constantly requires personal sacrifice for others, and it is among the most exacting positions in ethics.

6. It is the working method of public policy. Cost benefit analysis, health measures such as quality adjusted life years, environmental impact assessment and every scheme evaluated by beneficiaries against cost are utilitarianism in operation, and a government has to make comparisons of exactly this kind.

7. It is progressive by construction. Because nothing is exempt from the question, no institution is protected by its age, which is the answer to prescription at chapter 360.

The arguments against, by which component they attack

Attacking consequentialism

Consequences cannot be known. Every calculation runs into the future, and effects ramify indefinitely. A decision maker knows a little about the near consequences and almost nothing about the remote ones.

munotes.in342

Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against

It has no place for the past. Promises, contracts, desert and gratitude are all backward looking, and on a strict consequentialist view they matter only through their effects. But a promise seems to bind because it was made.

It cannot accommodate special obligations. A parent's duty to their own child is stronger than to a stranger's child, and impartial aggregation cannot explain why.

Attacking hedonism

Pleasure is not the only good. Knowledge, achievement, friendship, autonomy and beauty seem valuable in themselves and not only as sources of satisfaction.

The experience machine objection. If a machine could give a person any experience they wished while they floated in a tank, hedonism says they should plug in. Almost nobody would, which suggests people value doing things and not only the experience of doing them.

Pleasures cannot be measured or compared between persons. There is no unit and no way of establishing that one person's satisfaction exceeds another's.

Attacking aggregation

This is where the decisive objections are, and an answer should say so.

It permits sacrificing an individual. If the sum favours it, a person may be used, harmed or killed for the greater good. Every version of this objection is one instance: convicting an innocent person to quell a riot; taking one person's organs to save five; permitting an industry to injure a few thousand for the benefit of a few million.

It ignores distribution. Two arrangements with the same total are equivalent on the doctrine, even if one distributes it evenly and the other concentrates misery on a minority. Aggregation is blind to who gets what.

It cannot say when to stop. There is no threshold at which a burden becomes impermissible however large the benefit. Increase the number of beneficiaries and any burden is justified.

Rawls's version, and it is the sharpest. Utilitarianism does not take seriously the distinction between persons. It extends to society a principle of choice appropriate for one individual, who may reasonably accept a present sacrifice for a greater future benefit to themselves, and applies it to different people, where the person bearing the loss is not the person receiving the gain.

Attacking impartiality

It is inhuman in its impartiality. It requires a person to be indifferent between their own child and a stranger, and treats attachment as a bias.

It is too demanding. If every rupee spent on oneself could have produced more happiness elsewhere, then almost every ordinary life is a moral failure.

It leaves no room for integrity. Bernard Williams's objection: a doctrine that requires a person to abandon their deepest commitments whenever the calculation demands it alienates them from their own projects, and a person is not merely a channel through which the best outcome flows.

munotes.in343

Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against

The replies utilitarians make

An answer that gives the objections without the replies is half an answer.

Rule utilitarianism answers most of the aggregation objections, since rules permitting the punishment of the innocent, or the breaking of promises, would be catastrophic if generally followed.

Mill's security argument at chapter 650 does the same work within act utilitarianism: no ordinary gain can outweigh the damage to security that a practice of punishing the innocent would do.

Indirect utilitarianism. The doctrine may be true as a criterion of rightness and a bad decision procedure. Human beings calculate badly, so they should follow rules, cultivate dispositions and keep promises, because doing so produces better results than calculating case by case.

Diminishing marginal utility supplies a distributive tendency: a rupee is worth more to somebody with few, so on the doctrine's own terms an equal distribution usually produces more total happiness than an unequal one.

And a concession worth making. The objections about measurement are the weakest, because every alternative theory also requires judgment, and none of them has a procedure either.

The assessment an answer should reach

Two propositions, and both are defensible together.

Utilitarianism is indispensable as a component. Any theory that ignored consequences entirely would be monstrous in a different way, and no government can decide without comparing effects. It is what stops rights talk becoming an excuse for not thinking about outcomes.

It is insufficient as the whole. Because it counts only totals, it cannot supply the constraint that says a person may not be used, and that constraint has to come from somewhere else: from rights, from desert, or from the Kantian requirement that a person is never merely a means.

Which is exactly the position modern law occupies. Chapter 490's combined theory of punishment is utilitarianism operating within limits set by desert, and article 19's structure at chapter 620 is a public interest justification operating within a requirement of reasonableness. The mature position is not a choice between the doctrines but a division of labour.

A worked example

A vaccine will prevent a disease in ten crore people. It is known that a very small number, perhaps one in a lakh, will suffer a serious adverse reaction, and there is no way to identify them in advance.

The utilitarian analysis is straightforward and correct. The programme prevents an enormous quantity of suffering and causes a small one. It should proceed.

Notice what the doctrine got right. A rights-based analysis that forbade any imposition of risk on an unconsenting person would forbid the programme and let the disease continue, which nobody thinks is the right answer. This is the case that shows why utilitarianism cannot be dispensed with.

munotes.in344

Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against

Now change one fact. Suppose the thousand people who will be harmed could be identified in advance, and the programme proceeded anyway without telling them.

The arithmetic is identical, and almost everybody's judgment changes. What has changed is not the total but that identified persons are now being knowingly used for others' benefit.

And what the law actually does with the original case. It proceeds with the programme, requires informed consent, and establishes a compensation scheme for those injured. That is aggregation supplying the decision and a non-aggregative principle supplying the constraint and the remedy, which is the assessment above in operation.

Distinctions that carry marks

ObjectionWhich component it attacksThe reply
Consequences cannot be knownConsequentialismAll theories need judgment; use rules as a decision procedure
No place for promises and desertConsequentialismRule utilitarianism; the utility of promise-keeping
Pleasure is not the only goodHedonismSubstitute preference satisfaction or wellbeing
The experience machineHedonismConcede; the doctrine survives as preference utilitarianism
Sacrificing an individualAggregationRule utilitarianism; Mill's security argument
Ignores distributionAggregationDiminishing marginal utility, which is a tendency and not a principle
Ignores the distinction between persons (Rawls)AggregationThe hardest to answer
Too demanding, and destroys integrityImpartialityIndirect utilitarianism; agent-relative permissions

What these arguments are NOT

They are not arguments for ignoring consequences. The vaccine example shows what that would cost.

The measurement objection is not the strongest. Students reach for it first and it is the weakest, because every rival theory requires judgment too.

Rule utilitarianism is not a complete escape. It faces the dilemma at chapter 630: either it collapses into act utilitarianism or it becomes rule worship.

"Utilitarianism justifies anything" is false. It justifies anything whose consequences are best, which is a real and often demanding constraint. The objection is that the constraint is the wrong kind, not that there is none.

Quick revision

  1. In favour: a single clear standard; impartiality, which made it a reforming doctrine; secular and public reasons; consequences taken seriously; demanding rather than permissive; the working method of public policy; and progressive by construction.
  2. Against consequentialism: consequences cannot be known; no place for promises, contracts, desert or gratitude; no room for special obligations.
  3. Against hedonism: pleasure is not the only good; the experience machine; pleasures cannot be measured or compared between persons.
  4. Against aggregation, and these are decisive: it permits sacrificing an individual; it ignores distribution; it cannot say when to stop; and Rawls, that it does not take seriously the distinction between persons, extending to society a principle of choice fit for one individual.
  5. Against impartiality: inhuman between one's own child and a stranger; too demanding; and Williams's integrity objection.
  6. Replies: rule utilitarianism, Mill's security argument, indirect utilitarianism, and diminishing marginal utility.
  7. The assessment: indispensable as a component and insufficient as the whole, which is exactly the position of the combined theory of punishment and of article 19's reasonableness requirement.
munotes.in345

Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against

Test yourself

1. Set out the strongest arguments in favour of utilitarianism. That it supplies a single, clear and usable standard applicable to any question, which no rival theory does. That it is impartial, counting everybody for one and nobody for more than one, which made it an instrument of reform against rank, caste, sex and property. That its reasons are secular and public and can be stated to anybody. That it takes consequences seriously, so that insisting on a rule which produces avoidable suffering must be justified. That it is demanding rather than permissive, since one's own happiness counts for exactly one. And that it is the working method of public policy, since governments must compare effects.

2. Which objections are decisive, and why? Those attacking aggregation. Because only the total is counted, an individual may be sacrificed whenever the sum favours it, which generates the objections about convicting the innocent and about imposing severe burdens on a few for a moderate benefit to many. Because gains and losses offset, distribution is invisible, so two arrangements with the same total are equivalent however unevenly one is distributed. And because there is no threshold, no burden is impermissible if the number of beneficiaries is large enough.

3. State Rawls's objection. That utilitarianism does not take seriously the distinction between persons. It takes a principle of choice which is entirely reasonable for a single individual, who may accept a present sacrifice in order to secure a greater benefit to themselves later, and extends it to a society, where the person bearing the loss is not the person who receives the gain. What makes the trade-off acceptable within one life is that the same person experiences both sides of it, and that feature is exactly what is absent when the doctrine is applied across different people.

4. What replies do utilitarians make to the aggregation objections? Rule utilitarianism, since a rule permitting the punishment of the innocent or the breaking of promises would be catastrophic if generally followed. Mill's security argument, that no ordinary gain can outweigh the damage done to the vital interest in security by a practice of that kind. Indirect utilitarianism, that the doctrine may be the correct criterion of rightness and a bad decision procedure, so that people should follow rules and keep promises because doing so produces better results than case by case calculation. And diminishing marginal utility, which gives the doctrine a distributive tendency without a distributive principle.

munotes.in346

Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against

5. What is the fair assessment of utilitarianism? That it is indispensable as a component of political and legal reasoning and insufficient as the whole of it. Indispensable, because a theory ignoring consequences would be monstrous in its own way and because no government can decide without comparing effects, as the vaccine example shows. Insufficient, because counting only totals cannot generate the constraint that a person may not be used, which must come from rights, desert or the requirement that a person never be treated merely as a means. Modern law occupies exactly that position, with utilitarian aims operating inside non-utilitarian limits.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in347

Chapter Sixty-Seven

Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "Comparison to Sarvodaya (Specified)"

In one line

Utilitarianism seeks the greatest good of the greatest number; Sarvodaya seeks the good of all, and Gandhi's objection is that the first will always be willing to sacrifice somebody and the second never is.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Sarvodaya, meaning the rise or welfare of all, is Gandhi's social ideal, according to which the object of social and political arrangements is the good of every member of society without exception, beginning with the last and weakest, which he called Antyodaya; it is contrasted with utilitarianism, which seeks the greatest happiness of the greatest number and therefore accepts, in principle, the sacrifice of a minority whenever the aggregate is thereby increased.

The word and its source

Sarvodaya is formed from sarva, all, and udaya, rise or uplift: the rise of all.

Gandhi coined it as the title of his 1908 paraphrase in Gujarati of John Ruskin's Unto This Last, a book he read on a train journey in South Africa and which he said changed his life. He drew three lessons from it, and the first two are exactly the point of this chapter.

That the good of the individual is contained in the good of all.

That a lawyer's work has the same value as a barber's, since all have the same right of earning their livelihood from their work.

That the life of labour, that is, of the tiller of the soil and the handicraftsman, is the life worth living.

Notice that the first lesson is a denial of the very structure utilitarianism assumes. Utilitarianism assumes individual goods that can conflict and must be traded off. Gandhi's premise is that they cannot ultimately conflict, because one person's good is not separable from everybody's.

Antyodaya, and why it is the operative principle

Antyodaya means the rise of the last, and it is Gandhi's practical test.

His own formulation of it, often called the talisman, is a rule for decision: when in doubt, recall the face of the poorest and weakest person you have seen, and ask whether the step you contemplate will be of any use to them, whether it will restore to them control over their own life and destiny.

Why this is more than a sentiment. It is a decision rule, and it is the opposite of aggregation. Aggregation asks what the total is; Antyodaya asks what happens to the person at the bottom. A scheme that raises the total while leaving the poorest exactly where they were fails the test and passes the calculus.

The resemblance to Rawls is worth noticing and is a strong point in an answer. Rawls's difference principle permits inequalities only where they work to the greatest benefit of the least advantaged, which is a very similar structure arrived at from an entirely different direction.

munotes.in348

Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism

The four points of difference

1. The good of all against the good of the greatest number

Utilitarianism maximises a total, and a total can be increased while some people are made worse off.

Sarvodaya requires the good of all, so an arrangement that benefits ninety and harms ten has failed, whatever the arithmetic.

Gandhi's objection stated exactly. The formula of the greatest good of the greatest number means, in practice, that the interest of the greatest number may be secured at the cost of the rest, and he regarded the willingness to write off a minority as the doctrine's essential defect rather than an incidental one.

2. Means and ends

Utilitarianism is consequentialist: the means are justified by the end, and any means producing the best consequences is required.

Gandhi holds that means and ends are inseparable, and that there is the same connection between them as between the seed and the tree. A good end cannot be reached by bad means, so the doctrine that the end justifies the means is precisely what he rejects.

This is the deepest difference and it is structural. Utilitarianism is a theory about ends; Gandhi denies that ends can be assessed apart from means.

3. What the good is

Utilitarianism measures happiness, understood as pleasure or preference satisfaction.

Sarvodaya is not about satisfaction at all. Its measure is whether people are able to live a decent, self-respecting and self-reliant life, which includes work, dignity, self-control and the absence of dependence. A person who is comfortable and dependent has not achieved it, and a person who is poor and self-reliant may have.

4. Quantity against non-violence

Utilitarianism permits harming a few for the benefit of many, and the harm is a cost to be weighed.

Sarvodaya rests on ahimsa, so harm is not an item in a calculation at all. There is no quantity of benefit that makes injuring a person acceptable.

What Sarvodaya proposes in practice

An answer that gives the programme is stronger than one that stays with the principle.

Trusteeship. Wealth is held in trust for the community rather than owned absolutely, so the holder's title is conditional on use for the general good. Gandhi's answer both to unlimited private property and to expropriation.

Decentralisation and village self-sufficiency, which is Gram Swaraj at chapter 870.

Bread labour, the proposition that everybody should do some physical work.

Swadeshi, the preference for local production and local exchange.

The dignity of manual work, which in India is inseparable from the attack on caste, since the degradation of labour and the degradation of those who perform it are the same fact.

munotes.in349

Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism

Vinoba Bhave's Bhoodan movement, which asked landowners to give land voluntarily for redistribution, was the largest attempt to put Sarvodaya into practice, and its results, considerable in area donated and much less in land actually redistributed and cultivated, are a fair test of the method.

The criticisms of Sarvodaya

It is not a decision procedure. A government must sometimes choose between options, all of which harm somebody: a road, a dam, a hospital's location. Sarvodaya says the good of all, and does not say what to do when that is unavailable.

It has no way to compare. Utilitarianism at least offers a method. Antyodaya tells you to look at the poorest, which is a powerful corrective and not a way of choosing between two schemes both of which help the poorest differently.

Trusteeship depends on the goodwill of the wealthy. This is Ambedkar's objection in its economic form: a principle which asks those who hold to hold for others leaves them holding, and leaves the timing and extent of any concession to them.

Its economics are contested. Village self-sufficiency and the preference for handicraft are argued to condemn people to low productivity and to poverty, and this was the substance of Nehru's disagreement with Gandhi.

It is demanding to the point of impracticality, requiring a change in individual conduct that most people will not make.

The honest assessment

The comparison is not best answered by declaring a winner, and the strongest conclusion is this.

Sarvodaya identifies exactly the right defect. Chapter 660 showed that aggregation is where utilitarianism is weakest, and Antyodaya is a direct answer to it.

Utilitarianism has the method Sarvodaya lacks. A government needs a way to compare options, and cost benefit analysis is the only workable one.

The Indian Constitution, in effect, does what the comparison suggests. It permits schemes justified by their aggregate benefit and requires them to answer to a floor: the Directive Principles direct the State to secure an adequate means of livelihood for all, to raise nutrition and public health, and to promote with special care the interests of the weaker sections. That is aggregation working above a floor set by the position of the worst off, which is the practical reconciliation of the two doctrines.

A worked example

A State must choose between two irrigation schemes with the same budget.

Scheme A, a large dam, will irrigate a hundred thousand hectares belonging mostly to medium and large farmers, will raise agricultural output substantially, and will submerge eleven villages whose four thousand residents will be resettled with compensation.

Scheme B, several thousand small check dams and wells, will irrigate forty thousand hectares belonging mostly to small and marginal farmers, will raise output much less, and will displace nobody.

munotes.in350

Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism

The utilitarian answer. A produces more output, benefits more land, and its cost, the displacement of four thousand people, is compensable. A wins on aggregate, and a careful utilitarian will insist that the compensation be real, which is a genuine contribution.

The Sarvodaya answer. Ask about the poorest. The four thousand displaced are among the poorest people affected by either scheme, and they will lose their land, their village and their occupation, none of which compensation restores. The small farmers who gain under B are also among the poorest. Antyodaya therefore points clearly to B, and it points there even though B produces less.

Where the comparison becomes interesting. Suppose the displaced four thousand are properly resettled with land of equal quality, with their village rebuilt, and with a share of the irrigation the dam produces. A utilitarian regards that as making A better still. A Sarvodaya answer can accept it too, because the objection was never to the aggregate but to the sacrifice, and if there is no sacrifice the objection falls away.

That last move is what a good answer ends with: Sarvodaya's demand is not that the total be ignored but that nobody be written off, and a scheme which meets that demand is not objectionable on Gandhian grounds merely because it is large.

Distinctions that carry marks

UtilitarianismSarvodaya
ObjectThe greatest happiness of the greatest numberThe good of all, and of the last first
MethodAggregation, and calculationAntyodaya: look at the poorest and weakest
May a minority be sacrificed?Yes, if the sum favours itNever
Means and endsThe end justifies the meansInseparable, as seed and tree
The good isPleasure or preference satisfactionA decent, self-reliant, self-respecting life
Attitude to harmA cost to be weighedExcluded by ahimsa
PropertyJustified by its utilityHeld on trusteeship
ScaleIndifferentSmall, local, decentralised
Its strengthIt supplies a workable methodIt identifies exactly the right defect in the other
Its weaknessAggregation writes people offIt is not a decision procedure
Modern parallelCost benefit analysisRawls's difference principle

What this comparison is NOT

It is not a difference of emphasis. Gandhi's objection is to a specific structural feature, aggregation, and it is the feature chapter 660 identifies as the doctrine's weakest.

Sarvodaya is not a variety of utilitarianism with a bigger number. Changing "the greatest number" to "all" changes the logic completely, because a total can be maximised and a universal condition cannot be traded against.

It is not anti-modern by necessity. The trusteeship and Antyodaya principles are compatible with large-scale production if the burden is not concentrated on the powerless, as the worked example shows.

munotes.in351

Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism

Gandhi is not saying consequences do not matter. He is saying that a consequence obtained by wrong means is not the consequence intended, which is a claim about consequences rather than an indifference to them.

Quick revision

  1. Sarvodaya is sarva plus udaya, the rise of all. Gandhi coined it as the title of his 1908 Gujarati rendering of Ruskin's Unto This Last.
  2. Ruskin's three lessons as Gandhi took them: the good of the individual is contained in the good of all; a lawyer's work has the same value as a barber's; and the life of labour is the life worth living.
  3. Antyodaya, the rise of the last, is the operative decision rule: recall the face of the poorest and weakest person you have seen and ask whether the step will be of any use to them and restore control over their own life.
  4. Four differences: the good of all against the greatest number; means and ends inseparable against the end justifying the means; a decent self-reliant life against satisfaction; and ahimsa excluding harm rather than weighing it.
  5. The programme: trusteeship, decentralisation and Gram Swaraj, bread labour, swadeshi, the dignity of manual work, and Bhoodan as the largest attempt to apply it.
  6. Criticisms: it is not a decision procedure; it cannot compare options; trusteeship depends on the goodwill of the wealthy, which is Ambedkar's objection; its economics are contested, which was Nehru's disagreement; and it is demanding to the point of impracticality.
  7. The assessment: Sarvodaya identifies exactly the right defect and lacks a method; utilitarianism has the method and the defect; and the Indian Constitution's Directive Principles are aggregation working above a floor set by the position of the worst off.
  8. The parallel to notice: Rawls's difference principle, reached from an entirely different direction.

Test yourself

1. What is Sarvodaya, and where does the term come from? It is Gandhi's social ideal, formed from sarva, all, and udaya, rise, meaning the welfare or uplift of all without exception. He coined it as the title of his 1908 Gujarati rendering of Ruskin's Unto This Last, from which he said he took three lessons: that the good of the individual is contained in the good of all; that a lawyer's work has the same value as a barber's, all having the same right to earn their livelihood from their work; and that the life of labour, of the tiller of the soil and the handicraftsman, is the life worth living.

munotes.in352

Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism

2. State Gandhi's objection to the utilitarian formula. That the greatest good of the greatest number means, in practice, that the interest of the greatest number may be secured at the cost of the remainder, and that a doctrine willing to write off a minority is defective in its essential structure rather than in its application. The objection is precise and is directed at aggregation, which is the component that permits gains to some to offset losses to others and which supplies no threshold at which a burden becomes impermissible.

3. What is Antyodaya, and why is it more than a sentiment? It is the rise of the last, and Gandhi expressed it as a rule for decision: when in doubt, recall the face of the poorest and weakest person you have seen and ask whether the step contemplated will be of any use to them and will restore to them control over their own life and destiny. It is more than a sentiment because it is a decision rule and it is the exact inverse of aggregation: the calculus asks what the total is, and Antyodaya asks what has happened to the person at the bottom, so a scheme which raises the total while leaving the poorest where they were fails one test and passes the other.

4. Compare the two doctrines on means and ends. Utilitarianism is consequentialist: the rightness of an act depends entirely on its effects, so any means producing the best consequences is not merely permitted but required, and the end justifies the means. Gandhi holds that means and ends are inseparable, with the same connection between them as between the seed and the tree, so that a good end cannot be reached by bad means. This is the deepest of the differences and it is structural, since utilitarianism is a theory about ends while Gandhi denies that ends can be assessed apart from the means used to reach them.

5. What is the honest assessment of the comparison? That each supplies what the other lacks. Sarvodaya identifies precisely the defect that the criticism of utilitarianism establishes independently, namely that aggregation permits people to be written off, and Antyodaya answers it directly. Utilitarianism supplies the comparative method that Sarvodaya does not have, and a government choosing between options needs one. The Indian Constitution occupies the reconciliation: schemes may be justified by aggregate benefit, and the Directive Principles require an adequate means of livelihood for all, improved nutrition and public health, and special care for the weaker sections, which is aggregation operating above a floor set by the position of the worst off.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in353

Chapter Sixty-Eight

Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.3, "Socialism"; 3.3.1, "Meaning and Definition, Basic Principles, Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Socialism is the belief that human beings are cooperative rather than competitive by nature, that the great inequalities of a market society are produced by its institutions rather than by nature, and that production should be owned or controlled in common.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism is the political ideology which holds that human beings are social by nature and cooperative rather than essentially competitive; that the inequalities of wealth and power in a market society arise from its institutions, and in particular from the private ownership of the means of production, rather than from unequal natural endowments; and that the remedy is the common ownership or social control of productive resources, together with distribution according to need, so as to secure equality, community and the fullest development of every person.

The word and its target

Socialism entered political use in the 1820s and 1830s, in England and France, as the name for a set of criticisms of the society that industrialisation had produced.

What it was formed against. Not feudalism, which liberalism had already attacked, but the new industrial order: large scale production, a propertyless working population, extreme inequality, insecurity of employment, and the doctrine that the market's outcomes were natural and beyond criticism.

This matters for the comparison with liberalism at chapter 570. Liberalism was a doctrine of a rising commercial class against aristocratic privilege. Socialism was a doctrine of a working population against the commercial order that liberalism had helped to create. They are successive answers to different enemies, which is why the second takes so much of the first for granted.

The basic principles

1. Community

Human beings are social creatures, bound together by a common humanity, and are best understood by reference to the groups and communities they belong to rather than as separate individuals. This is the direct denial of liberal individualism at chapter 570 and everything else follows from it.

2. Cooperation

People are naturally disposed to work together, and competition sets them against each other and wastes their capacities. Cooperation, socialists argue, moralises the individual and is also more efficient, since it removes duplication and the costs of conflict.

3. Equality

The central socialist value, and it is not equality of opportunity. Socialists argue that formal equality of opportunity is worthless where starting positions differ, and press instead for equality of outcome, or, in more moderate versions, the reduction of inequality to a level compatible with a common life.

Their argument for it. That inequality is largely produced by unequal circumstances rather than by unequal natural talent; that it is unjust to reward what a person did not earn; that inequality corrodes community; and that political equality cannot survive severe economic inequality.

munotes.in354

Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles

4. Common ownership

The distinguishing principle. Private ownership of the means of production is criticised on four grounds: it is unjust, since wealth is created collectively and appropriated privately; it breeds acquisitiveness; it is divisive, generating classes; and it is inefficient, since production is directed by what is profitable rather than by what is needed.

What varies is how far this goes. Full common ownership of all productive property is the strong version; the social ownership of major industries with a large private sector is a moderate version; and social democracy in practice has settled on regulation and redistribution with private ownership left largely intact.

5. Distribution according to need

The most quoted socialist formula is Marx's from the Critique of the Gotha Programme: from each according to his ability, to each according to his needs. Its structure should be noticed: contribution is measured by ability and entitlement by need, and the two are deliberately separated.

6. Class

Society is analysed in terms of classes defined by their economic position, and political conflict is understood as reflecting the conflict between them. Socialism is thus a doctrine that takes sides: it speaks for the working class.

7. Work as fulfilment

Work is not merely a means of earning but is where human capacities are exercised, so an arrangement that makes work degrading, meaningless or dangerous has damaged the person and not merely underpaid them. The concept of alienation belongs here.

The two great internal divisions

An answer that treats socialism as one thing will be marked down, because its internal quarrels are sharper than its quarrel with liberalism.

On means: revolution or reform. Whether the existing order must be overthrown or can be transformed by legislation and election. This is the division chapter 740 examines.

On ends: abolition or amelioration. Whether the object is a wholly different society without classes or private ownership of production, or a market society whose inequalities are limited and whose worst consequences are relieved.

A worked example

A large textile mill closes and eight hundred workers lose their jobs. The mill is sold and the land is redeveloped as housing, and the proceeds go to the owner.

A liberal analysis asks whether contracts were honoured, whether notice was given, whether statutory dues were paid, and whether the workers' freedom to seek other employment is unimpaired.

A socialist analysis asks four different questions, and each one is one of the principles above.

Who created the value in the land? The mill's value was built by generations of workers, and on its sale the whole of the accumulated value goes to the person who held the title. This is the objection about collective creation and private appropriation.

munotes.in355

Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Why does one party bear the whole risk? The owner's downside is the loss of an investment; the workers' downside is subsistence. The risks are not comparable and the returns are distributed the other way round.

Was there any alternative form of ownership? A cooperative, a workers' trust, or public ownership would have distributed both the decision and the proceeds differently. A socialist's point is that the question was never asked, because the form of ownership is treated as given.

What happens to the community? Eight hundred households, the shops that served them, and the neighbourhood built around the mill. On an individualist analysis these are unrelated private losses; on a socialist analysis they are a single social fact.

Notice that a socialist is not saying the closure was unlawful. The entire transaction may have been perfectly lawful, and that is the point: the objection is to the institutions that made it lawful.

Distinctions that carry marks

LiberalismSocialism
Basic unitThe individualThe community or class
Human natureRational, self-interested, self-directingSocial and cooperative, shaped by conditions
Central valueLibertyEquality, and community
Equality meansOf moral worth, before the law, of opportunityOf outcome, or the substantial reduction of inequality
Cause of inequalityDifferences of talent and effortInstitutions, especially ownership
Property in productionA rightTo be commonly owned or socially controlled
Distribution byContract and desertNeed
The stateTo be limitedAn instrument of social transformation
Work isA means to incomeWhere human capacities are exercised

What socialism is NOT

It is not the same as communism. Communism is one variety, distinguished by its analysis, its methods and how far it takes common ownership, and chapter 740 sets out the differences precisely.

It is not the abolition of all private property. The target is productive property, the means by which goods are produced. Personal possessions are not what any serious socialist proposes to socialise.

It is not necessarily undemocratic. Democratic socialism and social democracy have contested elections for more than a century, and Fabian socialism is defined by its commitment to gradual constitutional change.

It is not merely welfare. A welfare state relieves the consequences of an unequal distribution; socialism proposes to change the distribution. That distinction separates modern liberalism at chapter 580 from socialism, and it is the sentence that saves an answer from confusing them.

It is not a doctrine only of poverty. Its objection is to inequality and to the relations that produce it, which persist in a rich society.

Quick revision

  1. Socialism is the doctrine that people are cooperative by nature, that inequality is produced by institutions rather than by nature, and that production should be commonly owned or socially controlled.
  2. Seven principles: community, cooperation, equality, common ownership, distribution according to need, class, and work as fulfilment.
  3. The formula: from each according to his ability, to each according to his needs. Contribution is measured by ability, entitlement by need.
  4. Four objections to private ownership of production: it is unjust, since wealth is created collectively and appropriated privately; it breeds acquisitiveness; it is divisive; and it directs production to what is profitable rather than what is needed.
  5. Two internal divisions: revolution or reform on means, and abolition or amelioration on ends.
  6. Not communism, not the abolition of personal property, not undemocratic by definition, and not merely welfare, which relieves consequences while socialism changes the distribution.
munotes.in356

Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Test yourself

1. Define socialism and state its basic principles. Socialism holds that human beings are social by nature and cooperative rather than essentially competitive, that the inequalities of a market society arise from its institutions and especially from private ownership of the means of production rather than from unequal natural endowments, and that the remedy is common ownership or social control of productive resources with distribution according to need. Its principles are community, cooperation, equality, common ownership, distribution by need, the analysis of society in terms of class, and the conception of work as the exercise of human capacities rather than merely a means of income.

2. What was socialism formed against, and why does that matter? Against the industrial order rather than against feudalism: large scale production, a propertyless working population, extreme inequality, insecurity of employment, and the doctrine that market outcomes were natural and beyond criticism. It matters because liberalism had already fought and largely won the battle against aristocratic privilege, so socialism is directed at the society liberalism helped create. That is why the two are successive answers to different enemies, and why socialism takes so much of liberalism, such as legal equality and constitutional government, for granted.

3. On what grounds do socialists object to private ownership of the means of production? That it is unjust, since wealth is produced collectively and appropriated privately by whoever holds the title. That it breeds acquisitiveness and makes the pursuit of possessions the organising motive of social life. That it is divisive, generating classes with opposed interests and destroying community. And that it is inefficient, because production is directed by what is profitable rather than by what people need, so that goods are made for those who can pay while needs go unmet.

4. Distinguish socialism from a welfare state. A welfare state accepts the existing distribution of ownership and relieves its consequences through transfers, insurance and public services; socialism proposes to change the distribution itself by altering who owns and controls productive resources. The distinction is what separates modern liberalism from socialism: a modern liberal justifies welfare provision by reference to liberty, arguing that a person without means cannot use their freedom, while a socialist argues from equality and from the injustice of the ownership arrangements that produce the need for welfare.

munotes.in357

Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles

5. Apply a socialist analysis to a mill closure in which every legal requirement was met. The socialist does not say the closure was unlawful, which is the point: the objection is to the institutions that made it lawful. Four questions are asked. Who created the value realised on the sale, which was built by generations of workers and accrues wholly to the title holder. Why the risks are so unequal, the owner's downside being an investment and the workers' subsistence, with returns distributed the other way. Whether another form of ownership, a cooperative, a workers' trust or public ownership, would have distributed the decision and the proceeds differently, a question never asked because the form of ownership is treated as given. And what happens to the community, which an individualist analysis sees as unrelated private losses and a socialist sees as one social fact.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in358

Chapter Sixty-Nine

The Kinds of Socialism

Syllabus topic 3.3.1, "Basic Principles"

In one line

Socialism is a family of doctrines that agree about what is wrong and disagree about how far to go and how to get there, and naming the branch you are discussing is the first requirement of a good answer.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism divides principally into utopian and scientific socialism, a distinction drawn by Engels; into revolutionary socialism, which holds that the existing order must be overthrown, and evolutionary or democratic socialism, which holds that it can be transformed by constitutional means; and into further varieties distinguished by what is to be owned and by whom, including state socialism, Fabian socialism, guild socialism, syndicalism, market socialism and, in India, Gandhian socialism.

Utopian and scientific socialism

This is Engels's own distinction, drawn in a work whose title states it.

Utopian socialism describes the early socialists, chiefly Saint-Simon, Fourier and Robert Owen, who denounced the injustice of the new industrial order, designed model communities and appealed to the reason and the benevolence of the rich to bring them about.

Engels's criticism is not that they were wrong about the injustice but about the method. They treated socialism as a good idea that had merely to be explained persuasively, they appealed to all classes indifferently, and they did not see that the transformation depended on the development of the productive forces and on the class that industrial production had itself created.

Scientific socialism is Engels's name for the Marxist alternative: socialism derived from an analysis of the actual development of capitalism and of the class relations within it, rather than from an ideal invented in someone's head.

The word scientific should be handled carefully in an answer. It is a claim, not a description: the claim that the analysis is derived from observable historical development rather than from moral preference. Whether it is scientific in any stricter sense is exactly what critics dispute, and Popper's objection, that a theory which can accommodate any outcome is not testable, is directed at it.

Revolutionary and evolutionary socialism

The most important division in practice, and the one that produced the split between socialists and communists in the twentieth century.

Revolutionary socialism holds that the state is an instrument of the owning class, that it will not be surrendered by consent, and that a fundamental change of ownership therefore requires the existing order to be overthrown. Marx and Engels in most of their writing, Lenin definitively.

Evolutionary, democratic or parliamentary socialism holds that where there is universal suffrage the working class is a majority and can achieve its ends by winning elections, so that a revolution is unnecessary and, in a constitutional state, wrong. Eduard Bernstein's revisionism is the classical statement, and every social democratic party in the world is its descendant.

munotes.in359

The Kinds of Socialism

The argument between them, in one line each. The revolutionary says that a class which owns the economy will not permit a parliament to expropriate it, and that reforms are concessions that stabilise the system. The evolutionary says that a revolution destroys the constitutional protections the working class also needs, and that a century of legislation has delivered more than any insurrection.

The other varieties

State socialism. Productive resources are owned and directed by the state through public ownership and central planning. Its criticism, made by socialists as much as by liberals, is that it replaces the private owner with an official who is no more accountable.

Fabian socialism. Gradual, constitutional and administrative, working through research, publication and the persuasion of decision makers, on the expectation that socialism would arrive by the accumulation of measures rather than by a single change. Its name comes from a Roman general noted for delay, and it names its own method.

Guild socialism. Industries are to be run by guilds of the workers in them, on the ground that state ownership merely changes the master. It is the ancestor of every argument for workers' control.

Syndicalism. Trade unions, or syndicates, are to take over and run production directly, the general strike being the means. Its distinguishing feature is hostility to the state and to political parties alike.

Market socialism. Enterprises are socially or cooperatively owned and compete in a market, which is an attempt to keep the information and incentives a market supplies while removing private ownership of capital.

Christian socialism, and its counterparts in other traditions, which derive the same conclusions from religious teaching about justice and the poor.

Gandhian socialism, which belongs in an Indian answer. It reaches socialist conclusions about inequality from an entirely different premise: non-violence, decentralisation, trusteeship instead of expropriation, and the village rather than the factory. Chapter 750 sets it against communism, which MU marks (Specified).

Democratic socialism in India. The Congress Socialist Party of the 1930s, and later socialist parties, argued for socialism through parliamentary means, and their influence on the Constitution's Directive Principles is real.

How the varieties differ, systematically

Ask each variety three questions and the classification becomes usable rather than a list.

What is to be owned in common? Everything productive, or the commanding heights, or nothing so long as it is regulated and taxed.

By whom? The state, the workers in each industry, cooperatives, or the community.

By what means? Revolution, election, administration, the general strike, or voluntary transfer.

Apply those three to the list and each variety is a set of three answers. State socialism: everything productive, by the state, by election or revolution. Guild socialism: industry, by its workers, by transfer. Syndicalism: industry, by unions, by the general strike. Fabian: the commanding heights, by the state, by administration. Gandhian: nothing formally, by the holder as trustee, by voluntary change of heart.

munotes.in360

The Kinds of Socialism

A worked example

A country nationalises its coal industry. Ask each variety whether this is socialism.

A state socialist says yes, and that this is the model.

A Fabian says yes, and that it should have been done a decade earlier and by stages, with a public corporation and professional management.

A guild socialist says only partly: the mines are now owned by the state, and the miners have exchanged a private employer for a public one, so the relation of subordination is unchanged. The test is whether the miners run the mines.

A syndicalist says no: the state has taken the industry, and the state is the enemy. The union should have taken it.

A revolutionary socialist says it is a real gain and is not socialism, because one industry has changed hands while the class relations of the economy as a whole are untouched, and because a capitalist state nationalises what is unprofitable and returns it when it is not.

A market socialist says the question is not who holds the title but whether the enterprise faces a market and whether its surplus goes to those who work in it.

A Gandhian asks whether the mine should be worked at that scale at all, and whether the community whose land it is has any say.

Seven answers to one fact, and none of them is confused about socialism. That is why the first sentence of any answer on this topic should name the branch.

Distinctions that carry marks

UtopianScientific
Source of the idealInvented by a reformer and offered as a planDerived from the development of capitalism itself
Appeals toAll classes, by reason and benevolenceThe working class, by its position
MethodModel communities, persuasion of the wealthyClass struggle
Named byEngels, as a criticismEngels, of Marxism
FiguresSaint-Simon, Fourier, OwenMarx, Engels
Revolutionary socialismEvolutionary socialism
The state isAn instrument of the owning classA machine that can be captured and used
MeansOverthrowElection and legislation
View of reformConcessions that stabilise the systemThe method itself
Universal suffrageDoes not change the analysisChanges everything, since workers are a majority
FiguresMarx, Engels, LeninBernstein, and social democratic parties
Risk it acceptsDestroying the protections it also needsBeing absorbed and achieving nothing fundamental
VarietyOwned in commonBy whomBy what means
State socialismAll productive propertyThe stateElection or revolution
FabianThe commanding heightsThe stateAdministration and gradual legislation
GuildIndustryIts workers, in guildsTransfer
SyndicalismIndustryTrade unionsThe general strike
Market socialismEnterprisesCooperatives or societyLegislation
GandhianNothing formallyThe holder, as trusteeVoluntary change of heart
munotes.in361

The Kinds of Socialism

What this classification is NOT

It is not a ranking. Each variety is an answer to a defect the others have.

The utopian and scientific labels are not neutral. They are Engels's, and both are compliments to one side.

Revolutionary is not the same as violent by definition, though in practice the two have gone together.

"Socialism failed" is not an assessment of a doctrine. It is an assessment of one variety, state socialism with central planning, in particular countries, and it says nothing about Fabian, guild, market or Gandhian socialism, none of which was tried in those places.

Quick revision

  1. Engels's distinction: utopian socialism, Saint-Simon, Fourier and Owen, which invents an ideal and appeals to reason and benevolence; scientific socialism, derived from the development of capitalism and from class relations. The word scientific is a claim, and Popper's objection is directed at it.
  2. Revolutionary against evolutionary: overthrow against election. Bernstein's revisionism is the classical statement of the second, and every social democratic party descends from it.
  3. The argument: an owning class will not let a parliament expropriate it, against a revolution destroying the protections the working class also needs.
  4. Other varieties: state socialism, Fabian, guild (workers' control), syndicalism (unions, general strike, hostile to the state and to parties), market socialism, and Gandhian socialism with trusteeship.
  5. Three questions make the classification usable: what is owned in common, by whom, and by what means.
  6. "Socialism failed" assesses one variety in particular countries and says nothing about the others.

Test yourself

1. Explain Engels's distinction between utopian and scientific socialism. Utopian socialism describes the early socialists, chiefly Saint-Simon, Fourier and Owen, who denounced the injustice of industrial society, designed model communities and appealed to the reason and benevolence of the wealthy. Engels's criticism was of the method rather than the diagnosis: they treated socialism as a good idea needing only persuasive explanation, appealed to all classes indifferently, and failed to see that the transformation depended on the development of productive forces and on the class industrial production had itself created. Scientific socialism is his name for socialism derived from an analysis of capitalism's actual development rather than from an ideal invented in someone's head.

2. State the argument between revolutionary and evolutionary socialism. The revolutionary holds that the state is an instrument of the owning class which will not be surrendered by consent, that a fundamental change of ownership therefore requires the existing order to be overthrown, and that reforms are concessions which stabilise the system. The evolutionary holds that where there is universal suffrage the working class is a majority and can achieve its ends by winning elections, that a revolution destroys the constitutional protections the working class also needs, and that a century of legislation has delivered more than any insurrection.

munotes.in362

The Kinds of Socialism

3. What are guild socialism and syndicalism, and what do they have in common? Guild socialism holds that industries should be run by guilds of the workers in them, on the ground that state ownership merely changes the master. Syndicalism holds that trade unions or syndicates should take over and run production directly, the general strike being the means, and it is hostile to the state and to political parties alike. What they share is the objection that transferring ownership to the state leaves the worker subordinate to somebody else's direction, so that the real question is not who holds the title but who controls the work.

4. What three questions make the classification of socialisms usable? What is to be owned in common, whether everything productive, only the commanding heights, or nothing so long as it is regulated and taxed. By whom, whether the state, the workers in each industry, cooperatives or the community. And by what means, whether revolution, election, administration, the general strike or voluntary transfer. Each variety is then a set of three answers, and a question about socialism can be answered by identifying which set is being discussed.

5. Is it accurate to say that socialism failed? Not as stated. The claim assesses one variety, state socialism with comprehensive public ownership and central planning, as it operated in particular countries in the twentieth century, and its failure there is a matter of record. It says nothing about Fabian socialism, whose gradual legislative programme produced much of the modern welfare state, nor about guild socialism, market socialism or Gandhian socialism, none of which was tried in those places. A question about socialism therefore requires the branch to be named before anything can be said about success or failure.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in363

Chapter Seventy

Socialism: The Arguments For and Against

Syllabus topic 3.3.1, "Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Socialism is defended because it identifies inequality as a product of institutions rather than of nature and proposes to change the institutions, and it is attacked because common ownership destroys the information and the incentives a modern economy runs on, and because the power required to bring it about is dangerous to hold.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism is supported on the grounds that its account of the causes of inequality is more accurate than the liberal one, that formal freedom without material means is empty, that cooperation is both more humane and more efficient than competition, and that its record in producing welfare states, labour protection and public services is substantial; and it is criticised on the grounds that central planning cannot solve the problem of economic information, that common ownership destroys incentives, that the concentration of economic and political power in one set of hands threatens liberty, and that its account of human motivation is over-optimistic.

The arguments in favour

1. Its diagnosis is accurate. The claim that inequality is largely produced by institutions rather than by differences of natural talent is supported by the evidence that outcomes correlate far more strongly with the circumstances of birth than with anything a person did. That is a factual claim and it is the strongest thing socialism has.

2. Formal freedom without means is empty. Chapter 600 showed that this criticism of liberalism was strong enough to change liberalism itself.

3. Cooperation is undervalued. A great deal of what is most valuable is produced cooperatively, and the competitive model both misdescribes it and damages it.

4. Markets fail, systematically and predictably. Monopoly, information asymmetry, external harms such as pollution, public goods that nobody has an incentive to provide, and the exploitation of unequal bargaining power are not accidents but structural features, and each is a reason for collective provision or control.

5. Political equality does not survive economic inequality. Equal votes coexist with grossly unequal influence over what is decided, which is chapter 60's structural power and chapter 840's ethical decay.

6. Its record is substantial. The eight hour day, the prohibition of child labour, workplace safety, social insurance, public health services, universal schooling, pensions and paid leave were won by socialist and labour movements against opposition, and are now so completely accepted that their origin is forgotten.

7. It supplies an answer utilitarianism cannot. Because it attends to distribution rather than to totals, it addresses the defect chapter 660 identified as decisive.

The arguments against

The economic calculation problem

The most serious objection, and an answer that gives it properly is a strong answer. It is due to Mises and Hayek and it is not an objection about incentives.

munotes.in364

Socialism: The Arguments For and Against

The argument. In a complex economy, the knowledge of what is scarce, what is wanted, what can be substituted for what, and at what cost, is dispersed among millions of people and much of it is local, tacit and constantly changing. Prices in a market aggregate that knowledge automatically: a rising price tells everybody, without anybody being told, that something has become scarcer or more wanted. A central planner abolishing markets in the means of production destroys the mechanism that generates the information and then has to make the decisions the information was needed for.

Why it is not a point about honesty or effort. Even perfectly informed and entirely benevolent planners face it, because the information does not exist in a form anybody could collect.

The replies. Market socialism at chapter 690 accepts the objection and keeps markets while changing ownership. Computation is said to have changed what is feasible, though the tacit and preference-dependent character of the knowledge is the harder half. And a mixed economy concedes the point for most goods while insisting on collective provision where markets fail worst, which is what almost every country actually does.

Incentives

Common ownership weakens the connection between effort and reward, so people work less, take fewer risks and innovate less.

The replies. People are motivated by more than money, as professions, cooperatives and open collaboration show; extreme inequality is not required to produce any incentive; and market socialism preserves the connection.

Liberty

Concentration of power. Where the state owns the economy it is also every person's employer, landlord and supplier, so a dissenter has nowhere to go. The dispersal of economic power is a protection of political liberty, whatever else it is.

The road to serfdom argument. Hayek's claim that comprehensive planning requires agreement about a scale of ends that a free society will not produce, so that planning tends towards compulsion.

The replies. These are objections to comprehensive state socialism and not to socialism generally, and every democratic socialist accepts them, which is why democratic socialism exists. The rebuttal is that private concentration of economic power also threatens liberty, and is not answerable at an election.

Human nature

Socialism assumes a cooperativeness that people do not reliably display, and its programme requires either a transformation of character or continual compulsion.

The replies. Behaviour is heavily shaped by institutions, and competitive institutions produce competitive behaviour, so the observation may be a description of the arrangement rather than of the species. But this reply must not be overstated, and the honest position is that the evidence supports neither extreme.

Efficiency and record

Where comprehensive state socialism was tried it produced shortages, poor quality, technological backwardness and, in several countries, famine and mass repression.

munotes.in365

Socialism: The Arguments For and Against

The replies. These are the record of one variety in particular circumstances, several of which were dictatorships before they were socialist; the comparison should be with what those countries would otherwise have been rather than with the wealthiest market economies; and the social democratic record in Western Europe is a socialist record too and is a very different one. The honest concession is that the failure of central planning was decisive and changed socialist thinking permanently.

Bureaucracy

Public ownership substitutes an official for an owner, and the official is neither elected nor disciplined by competition. This is guild socialism's own objection at chapter 690, made from inside.

The assessment an answer should reach

Three propositions, and they can all be held together.

Socialism's diagnosis has largely been accepted. That inequality is institutionally produced, that markets fail predictably, and that formal freedom without means is thin, are now common ground and are built into every developed state's arrangements.

Its central institutional proposal, comprehensive common ownership with central planning, failed, and the calculation problem is the reason.

What survived is the mixed economy and the welfare state, in which markets allocate most goods, the state provides those markets provide badly, and redistribution limits the resulting inequality. That settlement is not a defeat of socialism but is not socialism either, and describing it accurately is what a good answer does.

A worked example

A State is considering whether to run its bus services publicly, franchise them to private operators under a regulated contract, or leave them to an open market.

The socialist case for public operation. Transport is a necessity, and access to work, school and hospital depends on it. A private operator will run profitable routes and abandon others, so the people most dependent on buses will be worst served. The surplus from busy routes should cross-subsidise thin ones, which only a single operator can do.

The calculation objection. How will the public operator know how many buses to run where, when demand shifts, and what fare covers cost? A market generates that information; a planner must collect it, and will collect it late.

The market socialist answer. Franchise the routes competitively, so that bidding reveals costs, while the State specifies the network, including the unprofitable routes, and owns the depots and the fare system.

Which is what most systems actually do, and it is a good illustration of the assessment above: the socialist objective, universal access, is achieved through a mechanism that concedes the calculation objection.

Distinctions that carry marks

ObjectionAimed atReply
Economic calculationCentral planningMarket socialism; mixed economy; concede for most goods
IncentivesCommon ownershipNon-monetary motivation; market socialism
Concentration of powerState socialismDemocratic socialism; private concentration also threatens liberty
The road to serfdomComprehensive planningAccepted by democratic socialists
Human natureAll varietiesInstitutions shape behaviour; do not overstate
The historical recordState socialism in particular countriesSocial democracy is also a socialist record
BureaucracyPublic ownershipGuild and market socialism, from inside
munotes.in366

Socialism: The Arguments For and Against

Modern liberalismDemocratic socialismState socialism
Ownership of productionPrivateMixed, with key sectors publicPublic
MarketsCentral, regulatedSubstantial, regulatedReplaced by planning
Justification of state actionLibertyEqualityEquality and planning
RedistributionTo secure a minimumTo reduce inequality substantiallyNot the mechanism; ownership is
Vulnerable to the calculation objectionNoOnly at the marginYes, decisively

What these arguments are NOT

They are not all aimed at the same thing. The calculation objection destroys central planning and leaves market socialism standing. Naming the variety is the first step of any answer here.

"Socialism failed" is a claim about one variety. Chapter 690 made the point and it is worth repeating.

The success of the welfare state is not a socialist victory alone. Modern liberalism arrived at much of the same programme from a different premise, and a careful answer notices that.

The calculation objection is not the incentive objection. They are constantly confused. One is about information, the other about motivation, and only the first is fatal to planning even among saints.

Quick revision

  1. In favour: the diagnosis is accurate, since outcomes correlate with circumstances of birth more than with effort; formal freedom without means is empty; cooperation is undervalued; markets fail predictably; political equality does not survive economic inequality; the record on the eight hour day, child labour, safety, insurance, health and schooling is substantial; and it answers the distributive defect of utilitarianism.
  2. The economic calculation problem, Mises and Hayek, is the serious objection: the knowledge of scarcity and want is dispersed, local and tacit, prices aggregate it automatically, and abolishing markets in the means of production destroys the mechanism that generates the information. It applies even to perfectly benevolent and honest planners.
  3. Other objections: incentives; concentration of power, since a state that owns the economy is every dissenter's employer; the road to serfdom; over-optimism about human nature; the historical record; and bureaucracy, which is guild socialism's objection from inside.
  4. Replies: market socialism concedes the calculation problem and keeps markets; democratic socialism concedes the liberty objection; the record is of one variety and social democracy is also a socialist record.
  5. The assessment: the diagnosis was accepted, the institutional proposal failed, and what survived is the mixed economy and the welfare state, which is neither a defeat of socialism nor socialism.
munotes.in367

Socialism: The Arguments For and Against

Test yourself

1. State the economic calculation problem and say why it is the serious objection. That in a complex economy the knowledge of what is scarce, what is wanted, what can substitute for what and at what cost is dispersed among millions of people and is largely local, tacit and constantly changing. Prices aggregate that knowledge automatically, a rising price signalling scarcity or increased demand without anybody being informed. A planner who abolishes markets in the means of production destroys the mechanism that generates the information and must then take the decisions the information existed for. It is the serious objection because it applies to perfectly informed and entirely benevolent planners: the difficulty is that the information does not exist in any form that could be collected.

2. Distinguish the calculation objection from the incentive objection. The incentive objection is about motivation: common ownership weakens the link between effort and reward, so people work and innovate less. The calculation objection is about information: even people working with complete dedication cannot know what to produce, in what quantities and by what methods, once the price system that generated the answers has been abolished. The two are constantly confused, and only the first can be met by appealing to non-monetary motivation, professional ethics or cooperative enterprise, since none of those supplies the missing information.

3. What are the strongest arguments in favour of socialism? That its diagnosis is factually accurate, outcomes correlating far more strongly with circumstances of birth than with individual effort. That formal freedom without means is thin, a criticism strong enough to have changed liberalism itself. That markets fail predictably through monopoly, information asymmetry, external harms, public goods and unequal bargaining power. That political equality does not survive severe economic inequality. And that its practical record includes the eight hour day, the prohibition of child labour, workplace safety, social insurance, public health and universal schooling, all won against opposition and now so accepted that their origin is forgotten.

4. How should the historical record of socialism be assessed? Carefully, and by variety. Comprehensive state socialism with central planning produced shortages, poor quality, technological backwardness and, in several countries, famine and repression, and that failure was decisive and permanently changed socialist thinking. But several of those states were dictatorships before they were socialist, so the political failures are not all attributable to the economics; the comparison should be with what those countries would otherwise have been rather than with the wealthiest market economies; and the social democratic record in Western Europe is also a socialist record and is a very different one.

5. What is the fair assessment of socialism? That its diagnosis was largely accepted and its central institutional proposal failed. The claims that inequality is institutionally produced, that markets fail predictably, and that formal freedom without material means is thin are now built into the arrangements of every developed state. Comprehensive common ownership with central planning failed, and the calculation problem is the reason. What survived is the mixed economy and the welfare state, in which markets allocate most goods, the state supplies what markets supply badly, and redistribution limits inequality; that settlement is neither a defeat of socialism nor socialism, and saying so accurately is the answer.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in368

Chapter Seventy-One

Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Syllabus topic 3.3.1, "Influence on Indian Constitution"

In one line

The Indian Constitution was socialist in inspiration before the word was inserted and became explicitly socialist in 1976, but the word operates as a direction to the State and an aid to interpretation rather than as a rule that overrides rights.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism influenced the Indian Constitution through the Directive Principles of State Policy, which direct the State to minimise inequalities of income, status, facilities and opportunities, to distribute the material resources of the community to subserve the common good, and to prevent the concentration of wealth to the common detriment; through the insertion of the word socialist in the Preamble by the Constitution (Forty-second Amendment) Act 1976; and through the removal of property from the fundamental rights by the Forty-fourth Amendment; but the Supreme Court has held that the word does not authorise the State to disregard the interests of private owners, while also treating it as a legitimate and effective aid to the construction of legislation and executive action.

Where socialism entered

Before the Constitution. The demand was made inside the national movement long before independence. The Karachi resolution of the Indian National Congress in 1931, on fundamental rights and economic policy, set out obligations about a living wage, limited hours, protection against sickness and old age, and state ownership or control of key industries, and it is the ancestor of Part IV.

In the Constituent Assembly. A proposal to describe India as socialist in the Preamble was made and was not accepted at the time, on the view that the economic structure was a matter for the people to decide from time to time and should not be fixed by the Constitution. That refusal is worth knowing, because it shows the 1976 insertion was a change and not a clarification.

What was adopted instead was Part IV, which is socialist in substance without using the word.

The Directive Principles

The provisions that carry the socialist content, and an answer should be able to name them.

Article 38 requires the State to secure a social order in which justice, social, economic and political, shall inform all the institutions of national life, and, by the clause added in 1978, to minimise inequalities in income, and to endeavour to eliminate inequalities in status, facilities and opportunities, not only among individuals but also among groups.

Article 39 directs that the State shall in particular direct its policy towards securing that citizens have an adequate means of livelihood; that the ownership and control of the material resources of the community are so distributed as best to subserve the common good; that the operation of the economic system does not result in the concentration of wealth and means of production to the common detriment; equal pay for equal work for men and women; that the health and strength of workers is not abused and that they are not forced by economic necessity into unsuited occupations; and that children are given opportunities to develop in conditions of freedom and dignity.

munotes.in369

Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Article 39A requires equal justice and free legal aid, so that opportunities for securing justice are not denied by reason of economic or other disabilities.

Article 41 requires the State, within the limits of its economic capacity, to make effective provision for the right to work, to education and to public assistance in unemployment, old age, sickness and disablement.

Article 42 requires just and humane conditions of work and maternity relief; article 43 a living wage and conditions of work ensuring a decent standard of life; article 43A the participation of workers in the management of industries; and article 43B the promotion of co-operative societies.

The word in the Preamble

Inserted by the Constitution (Forty-second Amendment) Act 1976, which changed the description of India to a sovereign socialist secular democratic republic.

Three things a good answer says about that.

It was inserted during the Emergency, by an amendment much of which was later repealed, and its insertion is therefore politically as well as legally significant.

It was declaratory of what was already there. The Directive Principles had directed the State to socialist ends since 1950, so the word named an existing commitment rather than creating one.

It did not make socialism enforceable. The Preamble is not a source of power and confers no rights, and what the word does is supply a description of the polity that assists in construing everything else.

What the courts have done with it

Facts. Excel Wear v. Union of India, (1978) 4 SCC 224. Excel Wear was a partnership manufacturing garments for export and employing about four hundred workmen. Saying that relations had deteriorated and that it had become almost impossible to carry on the business, it applied under section 25-O(1) of the Industrial Disputes Act 1947 for previous approval of an intended closure, and the State Government refused approval on the ground that the closure was prejudicial to the public interest. The firm contended that the right to close a business is part of the right to carry it on under article 19(1)(g) and that the section was an unreasonable restriction.

Held. The Court struck down section 25-O as an unreasonable restriction. On socialism it held that the concept of socialism or a socialist state has undergone changes from time to time, from country to country and from thinker to thinker, though some basic concept still holds the field; and that so long as private ownership of an industry is recognised and governs an overwhelmingly large proportion of our economic structure, the principles of socialism and social justice cannot be pushed to such an extreme as to ignore completely, or to a very large extent, the interests of another section of the public, namely the private owners of the undertakings. It also noted that creditors, depositors and others dealing with an undertaking have rights affected by such legislation, and that the section did not require reasons to be stated in the order.

munotes.in370

Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Facts. D. S. Nakara v. Union of India, (1983) 1 SCC 305. A memorandum of 25 May 1979 liberalised the formula for computing pension under the Central Civil Services (Pension) Rules 1972 and applied it only to those retiring on or after 31 March 1979, a second memorandum doing the same for the Armed Forces from 1 April 1979. Two petitioners who had retired in 1972 and a registered society of pensioners challenged the cut-off, contending that all pensioners under the rules form one class whatever the date of retirement and that the chosen date was arbitrary and violated article 14.

Held. The Court held the classification by date of retirement arbitrary and extended the liberalised formula to earlier retirees. It used the Preamble's word as an aid to construction, holding that the basic framework of socialism is to provide a decent standard of life to the working people and especially to provide security from cradle to grave; that article 41 enjoins the State to secure public assistance in old age, sickness and disablement; that every State action must be directed and so interpreted as to take society one step towards the goal of establishing a socialist welfare society; and that in examining the validity of legislative or administrative action the Directive Principles read in the light of the Preamble provide a reliable yardstick.

Read the two together and the position is clear. The word socialist is a real and operative direction: it decided Nakara, and it shapes how legislation and executive action are construed. It is not a rule that overrides fundamental rights or the interests of private owners: that is Excel Wear, and the Court's observation that socialism has no single settled content is the reason.

The other structural changes

Article 31C, inserted in 1971, protects laws giving effect to the directives in article 39(b) and (c) from challenge under articles 14 and 19. Its scope has been the subject of major litigation, and it is the clearest instance of the Constitution preferring the socialist directives to the liberal rights within a defined field.

munotes.in371

Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Property. The fundamental right to property in articles 19(1)(f) and 31 was removed by the Constitution (Forty-fourth Amendment) Act 1978, and property became a constitutional right under article 300A, under which no person is to be deprived of property save by authority of law. This is the single largest structural change socialism produced in the Indian Constitution, and it is the classical to modern shift of chapter 580 made in the text.

A worked example

A State enacts a law requiring every company employing more than a thousand workers to allot ten per cent of its equity to a trust for the benefit of its employees, without payment.

The socialist justification. Article 39(b) and (c): the ownership and control of the material resources of the community should be distributed to subserve the common good, and the operation of the economic system should not result in the concentration of wealth and means of production to the common detriment. Article 43A: the participation of workers in management.

The Excel Wear objection. Private ownership of industry is recognised and governs an overwhelmingly large part of the economy, so the principles of socialism cannot be pushed so far as to ignore the interests of the owners. Existing shareholders, and the creditors and others who dealt with the company on the basis of its capital structure, have interests the law affects.

How the question would actually be decided. Not by the word in the Preamble but by whether the law is within the legislature's competence, whether the deprivation of property is by authority of law under article 300A, whether the restriction on the right to carry on business is reasonable under article 19(6), and whether article 31C protects it as a law giving effect to article 39(b) or (c).

Notice what the analysis shows: the socialist commitment supplies the purpose and the liberal structure supplies the test. That is the Indian arrangement in one sentence, and it is the sentence to end an answer with.

Distinctions that carry marks

Fundamental Rights, Part IIIDirective Principles, Part IV
CharacterLiberalSocialist
EnforceableYes, by courtsNo, but fundamental in the governance of the country
AddressRestrain the StateDirect the State
Typical contentFreedoms, equality, life and libertyLivelihood, distribution of resources, living wage, public assistance
Function in litigationGround of challengeAid to construction, and justification for restriction
Excel WearNakara
What socialism was invoked to doJustify restricting a businessJustify extending a benefit
ResultThe restriction struck downThe exclusion struck down
Holding on socialismIt has no single settled content and cannot be pushed to ignore private ownersIt provides security from cradle to grave and is a reliable yardstick with the Directive Principles
What it showsThe word is not a trumpThe word is real and operative
munotes.in372

Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution

What this topic is NOT

It is not the claim that India adopted socialism. The Constituent Assembly declined to fix the economic structure, and the Constitution permits a wide range of economic arrangements.

The Preamble is not a source of power. It confers no rights and no legislative competence, and it assists in construction.

The word socialist did not create the commitment. The Directive Principles carried it from 1950; the 1976 amendment named it.

Directive Principles are not unenforceable in the sense of being irrelevant. Article 37 declares them fundamental in the governance of the country and a duty of the State to apply in making laws, and Nakara shows a case decided with their assistance.

Quick revision

  1. Before the Constitution: the Congress's Karachi resolution of 1931 on fundamental rights and economic policy is the ancestor of Part IV. The Constituent Assembly declined to put socialist in the Preamble.
  2. Part IV carries the content: article 38 on minimising inequalities of income, status, facilities and opportunities; article 39(b) distribution of material resources to subserve the common good; article 39(c) no concentration of wealth and means of production to the common detriment; 39A legal aid; 41 work, education and public assistance; 42 humane conditions and maternity relief; 43 a living wage; 43A workers in management; 43B co-operative societies.
  3. The word socialist was inserted by the Forty-second Amendment 1976, during the Emergency; it was declaratory and it is not enforceable by itself.
  4. Excel Wear: socialism has changed from time to time, from country to country and from thinker to thinker, and cannot be pushed so far as to ignore the interests of private owners while private ownership governs the economy.
  5. Nakara: the basic framework of socialism is a decent standard of life and security from cradle to grave; every State action must be interpreted so as to take society a step towards a socialist welfare society; the Directive Principles with the Preamble are a reliable yardstick.
  6. Structural changes: article 31C protects laws giving effect to article 39(b) and (c); and property was removed from Part III by the Forty-fourth Amendment 1978 and became article 300A.
  7. The sentence to end with: the socialist commitment supplies the purpose and the liberal structure supplies the test.

Test yourself

1. How did socialism enter the Indian Constitution? Through the Directive Principles, which were socialist in substance from 1950 and which descend from the Congress's Karachi resolution of 1931 on fundamental rights and economic policy. The Constituent Assembly declined a proposal to describe India as socialist in the Preamble, on the view that the economic structure should be left to the people to decide from time to time. The word was inserted only in 1976, by the Forty-second Amendment, during the Emergency, and it named a commitment that Part IV already carried rather than creating one.

munotes.in373

Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution

2. Which provisions carry the socialist content, and what do they require? Article 38 requires a social order informed by social, economic and political justice, and the minimising of inequalities in income and the elimination of inequalities in status, facilities and opportunities among individuals and groups. Article 39 requires an adequate means of livelihood, the distribution of the ownership and control of material resources to subserve the common good, the prevention of concentration of wealth and means of production to the common detriment, equal pay for equal work, and protection of the health and strength of workers. Articles 39A, 41, 42, 43, 43A and 43B add legal aid, public assistance in unemployment, old age and sickness, humane conditions of work and maternity relief, a living wage, workers' participation in management, and the promotion of co-operative societies.

3. What did Excel Wear hold about the word socialist? That the concept of socialism or a socialist state has undergone changes from time to time, from country to country and from thinker to thinker, though some basic concept still holds the field; and that so long as private ownership of industry is recognised and governs an overwhelmingly large proportion of the economic structure, the principles of socialism and social justice cannot be pushed to such an extreme as to ignore completely or largely the interests of another section of the public, namely private owners. Section 25-O of the Industrial Disputes Act was accordingly struck down as an unreasonable restriction on the right to carry on business.

4. What did Nakara do with the same word? It used it to decide the case. Holding a classification of pensioners by date of retirement arbitrary and extending the liberalised pension formula to earlier retirees, the Court reasoned that the basic framework of socialism is to provide a decent standard of life to working people and especially security from cradle to grave, that article 41 enjoins public assistance in old age, sickness and disablement, that every State action must be directed and interpreted so as to take society one step towards a socialist welfare society, and that the Directive Principles read with the Preamble supply a reliable yardstick for testing legislative and administrative action.

5. State the Indian position on socialism in one sentence, and justify it. That the socialist commitment supplies the purpose and the liberal structure supplies the test. Excel Wear shows that the word cannot override the rights and interests of private owners while private ownership governs the economy, and that it has no single settled content; Nakara shows that it is nevertheless a genuine interpretive direction capable of deciding how a benefit must be distributed. Article 31C and the removal of property from Part III show the Constitution preferring the socialist directives to the liberal rights within defined fields, and article 300A and the requirement of reasonableness show the liberal structure continuing to supply the standard by which any such preference is tested.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in374

Chapter Seventy-Two

Communism: The Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.4, "Communism"; 3.4.1, "Basic Principles and Evaluation of Communism"

In one line

Communism says that history is driven by the conflict between classes created by who owns the means of production, that capitalism produces the class which will end it, and that the result is a society without classes, without private ownership of production, and eventually without a state.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: communism is the political and economic ideology, derived from Marx and Engels, which holds that the history of all hitherto existing society is the history of class struggles; that the mode of production of material life conditions the social, political and intellectual life of a society; that capitalism produces its own gravedigger in the proletariat; that the proletariat must capture political power and abolish private ownership of the means of production; and that the outcome is a classless and stateless society distributing according to the principle from each according to his ability, to each according to his needs.

The seven principles

1. Historical materialism

The foundation. The way a society produces its material life, that is, its technology and its relations of ownership, conditions its social, political and intellectual life. Ideas, law, religion and morality form a superstructure on an economic base, and change in the base produces change in the superstructure.

What follows. History is not driven by ideas, by great men or by accident. It is driven by the development of the productive forces and by the conflict this produces with existing relations of ownership.

2. Class struggle

The Manifesto's opening proposition, that the history of all hitherto existing society is the history of class struggles, freeman and slave, patrician and plebeian, lord and serf, in a word oppressor and oppressed, standing in constant opposition to one another. Under capitalism the classes have been simplified into two: bourgeoisie and proletariat.

3. The analysis of capitalism

Labour theory of value. The value of a commodity derives from the socially necessary labour required to produce it.

Surplus value. The worker is paid the value of their labour power, that is, what it costs to reproduce it, and produces more value than that. The difference is surplus value, appropriated by the owner. This is Marx's account of exploitation, and it is a structural claim rather than an accusation about wage rates: it holds even where wages are generous and the employer is decent.

Alienation. Under this system the worker is estranged from the product of their labour, which belongs to another; from the act of working, which is imposed and unfulfilling; from their own human capacities; and from other people, who become competitors.

Concentration and crisis. Capital concentrates in fewer hands, small producers are driven into the proletariat, and the system produces recurrent crises of overproduction.

munotes.in375

Communism: The Basic Principles

4. The state as an instrument of class rule

Chapter 110's material, in one line here: the executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie, and political power properly so called is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another.

5. Revolution

The transformation cannot be achieved within the existing arrangements, because the class which owns also controls the state, the law and the prevailing ideas. The proletariat, which capitalism has assembled, disciplined and made numerous, is the class whose interest requires the abolition of all class rule, and the Manifesto says the bourgeoisie produces, above all, its own gravediggers.

6. Dictatorship of the proletariat

A transitional stage. The proletariat, having made itself the ruling class, uses state power to sweep away the old conditions of production. The word dictatorship in the nineteenth century meant the rule of a class rather than of a person, and that should be said in an answer, though what it became in practice is chapter 730's business.

7. The classless and stateless society

Because the state exists to hold one class down, the end of classes removes its function. Engels's own account is that once there is no social class to be held in subjection, nothing remains to be repressed, state interference becomes superfluous in one domain after another and then dies out of itself, the government of persons being replaced by the administration of things; and he insists that the State is not "abolished". It dies out.

Distribution in the final stage follows Marx's formula from the Critique of the Gotha Programme: from each according to his ability, to each according to his needs.

The stages

Students confuse socialism and communism partly because Marxists themselves use the words for two stages of one process, and setting the stages out solves it.

Capitalism, in which the means of production are privately owned and labour is sold as a commodity.

The dictatorship of the proletariat, a transitional period in which the working class holds state power and expropriates the owning class.

Socialism, the lower stage: the means of production are socially owned, classes have been abolished, but scarcity remains and distribution is according to work contributed.

Communism, the higher stage: abundance, the disappearance of the division of labour, the withering of the state, and distribution according to need.

This is the answer to a very common confusion. In Marxist usage socialism is not a milder alternative to communism; it is its first stage. In ordinary political usage socialism names a different family of doctrines altogether, most of which reject revolution. Chapter 740 is entirely about keeping the two senses apart.

munotes.in376

Communism: The Basic Principles

Lenin's additions

Communism as a twentieth century movement is Marx plus Lenin, and an answer that omits Lenin has described only half of it.

The vanguard party. The working class left to itself develops only trade union consciousness, that is, a concern with wages and conditions, so a disciplined party of professional revolutionaries is required to bring it revolutionary consciousness and to lead.

Democratic centralism. Free discussion before a decision, absolute unity in carrying it out.

Imperialism. Capitalism postpones its crisis by exporting capital and exploiting colonies, which explains why the revolution came first in a country like Russia rather than in the most industrialised ones.

Revolution in a backward country. Marx expected socialism to arrive where capitalism was most developed; Lenin argued the chain would break at its weakest link.

Why this matters for the evaluation. The vanguard party is where the twentieth century's outcome begins. A party that claims to know the class's interest better than the class does is Michels's iron law at chapter 100 with a doctrine attached, and Rosa Luxemburg said so at the time.

Communism in India

Worth a short paragraph in an Indian answer.

Communist parties have contested Indian elections since independence and have formed State governments, most durably in Kerala, West Bengal and Tripura, which is a communist movement operating within a constitutional democracy.

Their land reform in Kerala and West Bengal is the most substantial redistribution achieved anywhere in India, and is the strongest practical argument available to them.

And the movement has split repeatedly, principally over exactly the question of chapter 740: parliamentary means or armed struggle.

A worked example

A garment factory pays its workers well above the statutory minimum, provides safe conditions, and is regarded as a model employer. Its owner takes a substantial annual profit.

A liberal sees nothing to criticise. The contracts are freely made, the terms are generous, and both parties are better off than they would otherwise be.

A social democrat may want a stronger union and a larger share, and treats the case as satisfactory.

A communist analysis is different in kind, and this example is chosen to show it. The question is not whether the workers are well paid. It is where the profit comes from. On the analysis, the workers produce more value than the value of their labour power, and the surplus is appropriated by somebody who did not produce it. That is true however high the wages are, so long as a surplus exists at all, which is why the objection cannot be answered by raising pay.

And the alienation point is independent of both. The workers do not decide what is made, how, or what happens to it. The product belongs to another the moment it exists.

munotes.in377

Communism: The Basic Principles

Stating the example this way is what separates a good answer from one that treats Marxism as a complaint about low wages. The claim is structural: the relation, not the rate, is the object of the criticism.

Distinctions that carry marks

BaseSuperstructure
Consists ofForces of production and relations of ownershipLaw, politics, religion, morality, art
Direction of determinationConditions the superstructureReflects and protects the base
Change beginsHereFollows
StageOwnershipClassesDistributionThe state
CapitalismPrivateBourgeoisie and proletariatBy ownership and wageInstrument of the owning class
Dictatorship of the proletariatBeing transferredBeing abolishedTransitionalHeld by the working class
Socialism, the lower stageSocialAbolishedAccording to workWithering
Communism, the higher stageSocialNoneAccording to needDied out

What communism is NOT

It is not the abolition of all property. The Manifesto is explicit that what is to be abolished is bourgeois property, that is, private ownership of the means of production, not personal possessions.

"Dictatorship of the proletariat" did not originally mean rule by a dictator. It meant the rule of a class, as against the rule of the bourgeoisie, and the shift in meaning is one of the things chapter 730 has to evaluate.

It is not the same as socialism in ordinary usage, and this is the commonest confusion in the whole module.

Exploitation is not a claim about low wages. It is a structural claim about the appropriation of surplus value, true of a generous employer as much as of a harsh one.

It is not a moral doctrine in its own presentation. Marx and Engels presented the analysis as an account of how history works rather than as a demand about how it ought to work, which is what the word scientific at chapter 690 was claiming.

Quick revision

  1. Historical materialism: the mode of production conditions social, political and intellectual life; base and superstructure.
  2. Class struggle: the history of all hitherto existing society is the history of class struggles; under capitalism, bourgeoisie and proletariat.
  3. The analysis: labour theory of value, surplus value and exploitation, alienation in four forms, concentration and crisis.
  4. The state is an instrument of class rule.
  5. Revolution, because the owning class controls the state, the law and the prevailing ideas; the bourgeoisie produces its own gravediggers.
  6. Dictatorship of the proletariat, a transitional stage, meaning the rule of a class.
  7. The classless, stateless society: the state dies out of itself, the government of persons being replaced by the administration of things; distribution from each according to his ability, to each according to his needs.
  8. The four stages: capitalism, dictatorship of the proletariat, socialism distributing by work, communism distributing by need.
  9. Lenin adds: the vanguard party, democratic centralism, imperialism, and revolution at the weakest link. The vanguard party is where the twentieth century's outcome begins.
munotes.in378

Communism: The Basic Principles

Test yourself

1. State the principles of communism. Historical materialism, that the mode of production of material life conditions social, political and intellectual life, with law, politics and ideas forming a superstructure on an economic base. Class struggle, the history of all hitherto existing society being the history of class struggles, simplified under capitalism into bourgeoisie and proletariat. The analysis of capitalism through the labour theory of value, surplus value and alienation. The state as an instrument of class rule. Revolution, since the owning class controls the state and the prevailing ideas. The dictatorship of the proletariat as a transitional stage. And the classless, stateless society distributing according to need.

2. Explain surplus value and say why it is not a complaint about low wages. The worker is paid the value of their labour power, that is, what it costs to reproduce it, and in the course of the working day produces more value than that; the difference is surplus value and is appropriated by the owner of the means of production. It is not a complaint about low wages because it holds wherever a surplus exists at all, which is to say in every profitable enterprise, however generous the pay and however decent the employer. The objection is to the relation by which the surplus is appropriated by somebody who did not produce it, and it cannot be answered by raising the rate.

3. Set out the stages between capitalism and communism. Capitalism, in which the means of production are privately owned and labour is sold as a commodity. The dictatorship of the proletariat, a transitional period in which the working class holds state power and expropriates the owning class. Socialism, the lower stage, in which the means of production are socially owned and classes are abolished, but scarcity remains and distribution is according to work contributed. And communism, the higher stage, marked by abundance, the disappearance of the division of labour, the withering of the state, and distribution according to need.

4. What did Lenin add, and why does it matter for the evaluation? The vanguard party, on the view that the working class left to itself develops only trade union consciousness so that a disciplined party of professional revolutionaries must supply revolutionary consciousness and leadership; democratic centralism, free discussion before a decision and absolute unity after it; the theory of imperialism, explaining how capitalism postpones its crisis by exporting capital and exploiting colonies; and the argument that the chain would break at its weakest link, so that revolution could come in a backward country. It matters because the vanguard party is where the twentieth century's outcome begins: a party claiming to know the class's interest better than the class is Michels's iron law of oligarchy with a doctrine attached, and Luxemburg said so at the time.

munotes.in379

Communism: The Basic Principles

5. Explain what Engels meant by saying the state dies out, and why the wording matters. That once there is no social class to be held in subjection nothing remains to be repressed, so a special repressive force becomes unnecessary; state interference in social relations becomes superfluous in one domain after another and then dies out of itself, the government of persons being replaced by the administration of things. The wording matters because Engels expressly denies that the state is abolished. Abolition is what the anarchists demanded and he considered impossible; what he predicted was redundancy, arriving as a consequence of the disappearance of classes rather than as an act of policy.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in380

Chapter Seventy-Three

An Evaluation of Communism

Syllabus topic 3.4.1, "Basic Principles and Evaluation of Communism"

In one line

Communism produced the most powerful analysis of how economic power shapes politics that anybody has written, and the states built on it destroyed the liberty it promised and failed at the economics it claimed to have solved.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: communism is to be evaluated on two levels, as an analysis and as a programme; as an analysis it made permanent contributions in showing that economic structure shapes law, politics and ideas, that formal equality can coexist with substantive domination, and that class is a real determinant of political outcomes; as a programme it failed, because the abolition of markets in the means of production destroyed the information the economy required, because the dictatorship of the proletariat became the dictatorship of a party, and because the state did not wither but grew.

What is right in it

1. The relation between economic structure and politics. That who owns and who works shapes the law, the political arrangements and the prevailing ideas of a society is now so widely accepted that its origin is forgotten. Every study of the influence of money on legislation, of who is prosecuted, of whose interests are consulted, is doing work Marx made available.

2. Formal equality can coexist with substantive domination. Chapter 530's structural argument about punishment, and chapter 600's socialist criticism of liberalism, are both Marxist in ancestry.

3. Class is real. Whatever else determines political behaviour, the position a person occupies in the production of goods affects their interests and their opportunities, and a political science that ignores it explains less.

4. Alienation. The account of work under industrial conditions, that a worker may be estranged from the product, from the act of working and from their own capacities, describes something that other traditions did not describe at all.

5. Ideology. The claim that prevailing ideas serve the interests of those who prevail is now a standard tool of analysis, and Gramsci's hegemony is its most useful form.

6. It compelled the reform of its opponent. Much of the twentieth century's labour legislation, social insurance and public provision was enacted by liberal and conservative governments who preferred reform to the alternative, and this is a real effect that an evaluation should count.

7. And in India, a specific achievement. Land reform in Kerala and West Bengal is the most substantial redistribution of land carried out anywhere in India, done by communist State governments through legislation within a constitutional democracy.

What is wrong in it

As economics

The calculation problem, from chapter 700. The abolition of markets in the means of production destroys the mechanism that generates the information about scarcity, want and cost, and no planner can collect it because it does not exist in collectible form. This is the decisive economic objection and it applies to honest and benevolent planners.

munotes.in381

An Evaluation of Communism

The labour theory of value has not survived. Modern economics explains prices by scarcity and demand as well as by cost, and the theory cannot account for goods whose value bears no relation to the labour in them.

The predictions failed. Marx expected the immiseration of the working class, the disappearance of the middle class, and revolution in the most industrialised societies. Living standards of workers in industrial societies rose, the middle class expanded, and revolutions occurred in agrarian countries instead.

As politics

The dictatorship of the proletariat became the dictatorship of a party. The transitional stage did not end, and in no state was it succeeded by the withering of the state. Chapter 120's comparison is the theoretical explanation: Michels predicted that any organisation, including one dedicated to ending domination, produces an oligarchy, and Luxemburg made the same warning at the time, saying that freedom is always the freedom of the one who thinks differently.

The state grew rather than withered. This is the single largest failure of prediction, because the withering of the state is not a detail but the promised end.

There was no mechanism for correction. Having abolished opposition parties, an independent press and independent courts as instruments of class rule, the system had no way of discovering its own errors or of removing those who made them. Whatever one thinks of elections, they change governments without violence, and nothing replaced them.

And the human cost was enormous. Famine, forced collectivisation, mass imprisonment and executions occurred on a very large scale, and an evaluation which does not say so is not an evaluation.

As theory

Economic determinism is too strong. Caste, religion, language, nationalism and gender have organised politics powerfully and are not reducible to ownership. In India this objection is decisive rather than academic.

It cannot be falsified. Popper's objection: a theory that explains a revolution as confirmation and its absence as false consciousness or as a delay caused by imperialism cannot be tested, and its capacity to explain everything is a weakness rather than a strength.

The transition is unexplained. How a classless society is to be reached, administered and kept classless, without the state whose disappearance is promised, is not worked out, and the absence of a design is part of why the transitional stage became permanent.

The evaluation an answer should reach

Three propositions, and they are consistent with each other.

As a critique it is indispensable and has been absorbed. The analysis of how economic structure shapes law and politics is now used by people who reject every other part of the doctrine, which is the strongest thing that can be said of any theory.

munotes.in382

An Evaluation of Communism

As a programme it failed, and the failure is decisive. Not because its opponents said so but because the states built on it could not solve the economic problem and destroyed the liberty they promised, and because their own populations dismantled them.

And the correct response is not to discard the questions. The concentration of economic power, the influence of wealth on legislation, the position of those who own nothing but their labour, and the gap between formal and substantive equality are real problems whether or not the communist answer to them was right. That is why the module places communism beside liberalism and socialism rather than treating it as a curiosity.

A worked example

A country in 1950 has an agrarian economy, most land held by a small number of families, ninety per cent of the population illiterate and poor, and a state controlled by the landholding families.

The communist analysis is accurate. Political power follows land ownership; the law of tenancy and debt operates to preserve it; the state will not redistribute because it is composed of those who would lose; and reform through that state is unlikely.

The communist prescription is revolution, expropriation of the landholders, collectivisation of agriculture and central planning.

Test it against the record. Where this was done, the landholders were dispossessed, which achieved the redistribution; collectivisation produced catastrophic falls in agricultural output and, in several countries, famine; and the party that carried it out did not relinquish power.

Test the alternative against the record too, because an honest evaluation compares like with like. Where land reform was attempted by legislation within a constitutional system, it was slow, was evaded through ceilings and benami transfers, and in most Indian states achieved much less than was intended. Except where it did not: Kerala and West Bengal, under communist State governments working through legislation and elections.

That last observation is the most useful thing in the chapter. The most successful communist achievement in India was made by the parliamentary route, which is chapter 740's argument settled by evidence rather than by assertion.

Distinctions that carry marks

The analysisThe programme
What it claimsEconomic structure shapes law, politics and ideasAbolish private ownership of production by revolution
AssessmentLargely absorbed, and used by its opponentsFailed
Best evidence forStudies of money in politics, of who is prosecuted, of whose interests are heardLand reform in Kerala and West Bengal
Best evidence againstCaste, religion, language and nationalism are not reducible to classThe calculation problem; the state grew rather than withered
munotes.in383

An Evaluation of Communism

PredictionWhat happened
Immiseration of the working classLiving standards in industrial societies rose
Disappearance of the middle classIt expanded
Revolution in the most industrialised countriesRevolutions occurred in agrarian ones
The state will wither awayIt grew
The transitional dictatorship will endIt did not

What this evaluation is NOT

It is not the claim that Marx was wrong about everything. The analysis is used daily by people who reject the programme entirely.

It is not the claim that capitalism answered the criticism. Concentration of ownership, the influence of money on politics, and the position of those who own nothing but their labour remain, which is why the questions survive the answers.

"Communism failed" is about the states that called themselves communist, and their failure was decisive; it does not by itself refute a proposition about surplus value or about ideology.

The Indian communist record is not the Soviet record. Communist parties in India have contested elections for over seventy years, held office in States, and carried out their most substantial achievement through legislation.

Quick revision

  1. Right: the relation of economic structure to law and politics; formal equality with substantive domination; class as a real determinant; alienation; ideology, and Gramsci's hegemony; it compelled the reform of its opponent; and land reform in Kerala and West Bengal.
  2. Wrong, as economics: the calculation problem; the labour theory of value; and the failed predictions of immiseration, the disappearance of the middle class, and revolution in the most industrialised countries.
  3. Wrong, as politics: the dictatorship of the proletariat became the dictatorship of a party; the state grew rather than withered; there was no mechanism for correction once opposition, press and courts were abolished; and the human cost was enormous.
  4. Wrong, as theory: economic determinism is too strong, decisively so in India where caste is not reducible to class; Popper's objection that it cannot be falsified; and the transition is unexplained.
  5. Michels and Luxemburg both predicted the political outcome, from inside and at the time.
  6. The evaluation: indispensable and absorbed as a critique, failed as a programme, and the questions survive the answers.
  7. The Indian observation: the most successful communist achievement in India was made by the parliamentary route.

Test yourself

1. What are communism's permanent contributions? The demonstration that economic structure shapes law, politics and prevailing ideas, which is now used by people who reject everything else in the doctrine. The insight that formal equality can coexist with substantive domination, which underlies the socialist criticism of liberalism and the structural analysis of criminal justice. The recognition of class as a real determinant of interests and opportunities. The account of alienation, which describes something no other tradition described. And the concept of ideology, in Gramsci's form of hegemony, as a standard tool of analysis.

munotes.in384

An Evaluation of Communism

2. Why did the programme fail as economics? Principally because of the calculation problem: abolishing markets in the means of production destroys the price mechanism that aggregates dispersed, local and tacit knowledge about scarcity, want and cost, and no planner can collect that information because it does not exist in collectible form. In addition the labour theory of value has not survived, since prices depend on scarcity and demand as well as on labour cost; and the central predictions failed, living standards of industrial workers rising, the middle class expanding, and revolutions occurring in agrarian rather than in industrialised countries.

3. Why did the programme fail as politics, and who predicted it? Because the dictatorship of the proletariat became the dictatorship of a party and never ended; because the state grew rather than withering, which is the failure of the promised end and not of a detail; because abolishing opposition parties, independent courts and an independent press removed every mechanism by which the system could discover its errors or remove those who made them; and because the human cost in famine, forced collectivisation, imprisonment and execution was enormous. Michels predicted the outcome from the general logic of organisation, and Rosa Luxemburg warned of it at the time, insisting that freedom is always the freedom of the one who thinks differently.

4. Is economic determinism sustainable? Answer with reference to India. No, in its strong form. Caste has organised Indian politics for decades and is a status hierarchy operating on birth groups rather than a relation to the means of production; religion, language and region have similarly organised political conflict and are not reducible to ownership. Engels himself conceded in later letters that the economic factor is determining only in the last instance, which is an admission that it is not determining in the first. The defensible position is that economic structure is one powerful determinant among several, which is a much weaker claim than the theory makes.

5. What conclusion should an evaluation reach? That communism is indispensable as a critique and failed as a programme. The analysis of how economic structure shapes law and politics has been absorbed and is used by those who reject every other part of the doctrine. The programme failed on the economics, through the calculation problem, and on the politics, through a transitional dictatorship that never ended and a state that grew rather than withered. And the questions survive the answers: the concentration of economic power, the influence of wealth on legislation and the gap between formal and substantive equality are real whether or not the communist remedy was right, which is why the ideology is studied rather than dismissed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in385

Chapter Seventy-Four

Socialism and Communism Compared

Syllabus topic 3.4.2, "Comparative Study of Socialism and Communism (Specified)"

In one line

Communism and democratic socialism want a great deal of the same thing and disagree completely about how far to go and how to get there, and the disagreement about method is the one that has mattered.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism and communism share the analysis that inequality is produced by the private ownership of the means of production and that production should be commonly owned or controlled, but they differ in the extent of common ownership sought, communism requiring the abolition of private ownership of production altogether while socialism in its democratic forms accepts a mixed economy; in method, communism holding that revolution is necessary because the owning class controls the state while democratic socialism works through elections and legislation; and in their attitude to the state, communism treating it as an instrument of class rule which will eventually wither away while democratic socialism treats it as a machine that can be captured and used.

First, which socialism

In Marxist usage socialism is the lower stage of communism, described at chapter 720: social ownership, classes abolished, distribution according to work contributed, the state withering. On that usage the comparison is between two stages of one process and the differences are of degree.

In ordinary political usage, and in this chapter unless otherwise stated, socialism means the wider family at chapter 690, most of whose branches reject revolution and accept a mixed economy. On that usage the comparison is between two ideologies, and the differences are fundamental.

An answer should open by saying this. It is the difference between a good answer and a confused one, and it takes two sentences.

What they agree about

The diagnosis. That the great inequalities of a market society are produced by its institutions and by private ownership of the means of production rather than by unequal natural talent.

That production should be commonly owned or socially controlled, though they disagree about how much and by whom.

That formal freedom without material means is empty.

That work should be a source of fulfilment rather than a commodity.

That the interests of the working population should be the object of policy, and both are movements that speak for it.

Where they differ

1. How far common ownership goes

Communism requires the abolition of private ownership of the means of production altogether.

Democratic socialism in practice has settled for a mixed economy: some sectors public, the rest private and regulated, with redistribution through taxation.

2. Method

The decisive difference.

Communism holds that the owning class controls the state, the law and the prevailing ideas, so it will not permit its own expropriation, and revolution is therefore necessary.

munotes.in386

Socialism and Communism Compared

Democratic socialism holds that where there is universal suffrage the working population is a majority and can achieve its ends by winning elections, and that a revolution destroys the constitutional protections that population also needs.

The exchange between them. The communist says that reforms are concessions which stabilise the system and postpone the change; the democratic socialist replies that a century of legislation has delivered the eight hour day, social insurance, public health and universal schooling, while revolutions delivered one-party states.

3. The state

Communism: an instrument of class rule, to be captured, used in the transition, and then to wither away.

Democratic socialism: a machine which can be captured and used permanently for social purposes, and whose constitutional protections are valuable in themselves.

4. Political pluralism

Communism, in its Leninist form: a vanguard party which alone represents the class's real interest, and therefore no room for a competing party claiming to represent it.

Democratic socialism: multi-party competition, opposition, a free press and the acceptance of electoral defeat, which is the single sharpest institutional difference between the two.

5. Attitude to liberal rights

Communism regards them as formal, and as instruments by which the owning class protects itself.

Democratic socialism regards them as genuine gains to be kept and extended, which is why it fought for the franchise rather than dismissing it.

6. Speed and reversibility

Communism seeks a decisive and irreversible transformation.

Democratic socialism proceeds by measures that can be reversed at the next election, which it regards as the price of consent and communists regard as the proof of futility.

7. Internationalism

Communism is internationalist by doctrine, holding that the workers have no country, and organised internationally.

Democratic socialism has operated overwhelmingly through national parties within national parliaments.

The historical split

An answer that gives the history is stronger than one that gives only the doctrine.

One movement until the First World War. European socialist parties contained both tendencies and argued within one organisation.

Bernstein's revisionism, from the late 1890s, argued that Marx's predictions were not being borne out, that the middle class was not disappearing, that workers' conditions were improving through legislation, and that socialism should be pursued by democratic means. This is the intellectual origin of social democracy.

The war and the Russian revolution split it. Parties divided over whether to support their national governments in the war and over whether to follow the Bolshevik model, and the two wings became separate movements.

And the split repeated in India, where communist parties divided over parliamentary participation and armed struggle, and where the Congress Socialist Party and later socialist parties took the democratic route.

The record

MU asks for a comparative study, so it is fair to compare the results, and the comparison should be made carefully.

munotes.in387

Socialism and Communism Compared

Democratic socialism's record is the welfare states of Western Europe, labour protection, public health services, universal schooling and pensions, achieved without abolishing markets or elections, and reversible at an election.

Communism's record is rapid industrialisation from a low base and substantial gains in literacy and basic health in several countries, together with the calculation problem, one-party rule, the absence of any mechanism for correcting error, and, in several states, famine and mass repression.

In India specifically, the most substantial land reform was carried out by communist State governments, working through legislation and elections, which is the democratic method used by a communist party.

A worked example

A country decides its steel industry, which is privately owned and highly concentrated, should serve the public interest.

The communist prescription. Expropriate the owners and take the industry into social ownership, as part of a general programme of abolishing private ownership of production. Compensation is not owed, because the property was accumulated from surplus value in the first place.

The democratic socialist prescription. Nationalise the industry by legislation with compensation, or leave it private and regulate prices, safety and employment, tax the profits, and require worker representation on the board. Whichever is chosen must be enacted by a legislature and can be undone by the next one.

The three questions that expose the difference.

Is compensation owed? Communism says no in principle; democratic socialism says yes, because it accepts the legal order it is operating within.

What if the government loses the next election and the industry is privatised again? The democratic socialist accepts it as the price of the method; the communist treats it as proof that the method cannot work.

Who decides that this industry should be taken and not another? In the democratic route, a legislature after public argument. In the revolutionary route, the party.

That third question is the one to end on. It is where the two doctrines part, and it is where the twentieth century's evidence is.

Distinctions that carry marks

Democratic socialismCommunism
DiagnosisInequality is institutionally producedThe same
Extent of common ownershipA mixed economy; key sectors publicAll means of production
MethodElections and legislationRevolution
The stateA machine to be captured and usedAn instrument of class rule, later to wither
Political partiesMulti-party competitionThe vanguard party
Liberal rightsGenuine gains to be kept and extendedFormal, and instruments of class protection
ReversibilityAccepted, as the price of consentRejected, as the proof of futility
Compensation on nationalisationOwedNot owed in principle
ScopeNational parties in national parliamentsInternationalist by doctrine
Key figuresBernstein, Attlee, the FabiansMarx, Engels, Lenin
RecordWelfare states, labour protection, public servicesRapid industrialisation; one-party rule; famine and repression in several states
munotes.in388

Socialism and Communism Compared

Socialism in Marxist usageSocialism in ordinary usage
What it isThe lower stage of communismA family of doctrines, most rejecting revolution
DistributionAccording to workMixed, with redistribution
Relation to communismThe same process, earlierA different ideology
The stateWitheringRetained and used

What this comparison is NOT

It is not a difference of degree only. On the ordinary usage the difference in method is a difference of kind, and it produced two separate movements that fought each other for a century.

Communism is not simply extreme socialism. It has a distinct analysis, a distinct theory of the state, and a distinct organisational form in the vanguard party.

Democratic socialism is not the same as modern liberalism, though they overlap in policy. Chapter 700's table makes the distinction: the liberal justifies state action by reference to liberty, the socialist by reference to equality and to ownership.

Communist parties are not necessarily revolutionary in practice. Indian communist parties have contested elections since independence, and their most substantial achievement came through legislation.

Quick revision

  1. Say first which socialism. In Marxist usage it is communism's lower stage, distributing according to work. In ordinary usage it is a different family, most of whose branches reject revolution.
  2. They agree on the diagnosis, on common ownership or control in some degree, on formal freedom being empty without means, on work as fulfilment, and on speaking for the working population.
  3. Seven differences: extent of common ownership; method; the state; political pluralism; attitude to liberal rights; reversibility; and internationalism.
  4. The decisive one is method: revolution against elections and legislation.
  5. The history: one movement until 1914; Bernstein's revisionism from the late 1890s; the split over the war and the Russian revolution; and the same split repeated in India.
  6. The record: welfare states, labour protection and public services on one side; rapid industrialisation with one-party rule, no mechanism for correction, and famine and repression in several states on the other.
  7. In India the most substantial land reform was achieved by communist State governments through legislation, which is the argument settled by evidence.

Test yourself

1. Why must an answer on this topic begin by distinguishing two senses of socialism? Because in Marxist usage socialism is the lower stage of communism, with social ownership, classes abolished and distribution according to work contributed, so that the comparison is between two stages of one process and the differences are of degree. In ordinary political usage socialism names a wider family of doctrines, most of which reject revolution and accept a mixed economy, so that the comparison is between two ideologies and the differences are fundamental. An answer that does not say which sense it is using is incoherent from the first paragraph.

munotes.in389

Socialism and Communism Compared

2. On what do socialism and communism agree? That the great inequalities of a market society are produced by its institutions and particularly by private ownership of the means of production rather than by unequal natural talent. That production should be commonly owned or socially controlled in some degree. That formal freedom without material means is empty. That work should be a source of human fulfilment rather than a commodity. And that the interests of the working population should be the object of policy, both being movements which speak for it.

3. What is the decisive difference, and how do the two sides argue it? Method. Communism holds that the owning class controls the state, the law and the prevailing ideas and will therefore never permit its own expropriation, so that revolution is necessary. Democratic socialism holds that under universal suffrage the working population is a majority and can achieve its ends by winning elections, and that a revolution destroys the constitutional protections that population also needs. The communist replies that reforms are concessions which stabilise the system; the democratic socialist replies that a century of legislation produced the eight hour day, social insurance, public health and universal schooling, while revolutions produced one-party states.

4. What is the sharpest institutional difference between them? Political pluralism. Communism in its Leninist form rests on a vanguard party which alone represents the real interest of the class, so there is no room for a competing party claiming to represent it, and no mechanism by which the party can be removed. Democratic socialism rests on multi-party competition, an opposition, a free press and the acceptance of electoral defeat. That difference is what determines whether a system can correct its own errors, and it is where the twentieth century's evidence lies.

5. What does the Indian experience contribute to this comparison? That the two need not be arranged as doctrine against doctrine. Communist parties in India have contested elections since independence and have formed State governments, and their most substantial achievement, land reform in Kerala and West Bengal, was carried out by legislation within a constitutional democracy. That is a communist party using the democratic socialist method and achieving by it what revolution was said to be necessary for, which makes the Indian record the strongest single piece of evidence in the argument about means.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in390

Chapter Seventy-Five

Gandhism and Communism Compared

Syllabus topic 3.4.3, "Comparative Study of Gandhism and Communism (Specified)"

In one line

Gandhism and communism agree that the present arrangement of wealth is indefensible and disagree about almost everything else: about violence, about the state, about industry, about property, and about whether means and ends can be separated.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Gandhism and communism share a rejection of the existing distribution of wealth, a concern for the poorest and a hostility to exploitation, but they differ fundamentally in that communism holds class conflict to be the motor of history and revolution the means of change, while Gandhism holds that means and ends are inseparable and that non-violence is therefore obligatory; that communism seeks the abolition of private property in the means of production while Gandhism seeks its retention under trusteeship; that communism is industrial and centralising while Gandhism is agrarian and decentralising; and that communism is materialist while Gandhism is founded on a spiritual conception of the person.

What they agree about

An answer that begins with the agreements is stronger, because the disagreements are only interesting once the common ground is clear.

That the existing distribution of wealth is indefensible. Both regard extreme inequality as a wrong requiring change and not as a natural fact.

That exploitation is real. Gandhi's language is different, but his objection to the mill owner who grows rich on the labour of the poor is an objection to the same relation.

That the poorest are the point. Antyodaya and the proletariat's centrality are different formulations of the same priority.

That the existing order will not reform itself. Both regard the beneficiaries as unlikely to give up what they hold voluntarily, which is why Gandhi organised strikes as well as appealing to conscience.

Hostility to colonialism, and both movements treated imperial rule as an economic relation and not only a political one.

And a shared final image. Both look forward to a society without coercive authority: Gandhi's ideal of enlightened anarchy, in which everyone is their own ruler, and Engels's withering away of the state, are strikingly similar destinations reached by opposite roads.

Where they differ

1. Means and ends

The deepest difference, and every other one follows from it.

Communism is consequentialist about method. The transformation is the end, and the means are chosen for their effectiveness, so revolutionary violence is justified by what it achieves.

Gandhism holds that means and ends are inseparable, with the same connection between them as between the seed and the tree. A society reached through violence will be a violent society, so the doctrine that the end justifies the means is exactly what he rejects.

2. Violence

Communism treats violence as sometimes necessary, and in the classical account as the midwife of the new society.

munotes.in391

Gandhism and Communism Compared

Gandhism treats ahimsa as absolute. Non-violence is not a tactic to be reviewed when it stops working, which is where Gandhi differs from Mandela at chapter 440 as well as from the communists.

3. Class conflict or class harmony

Communism treats class conflict as the motor of history and requires the working class to act as a class against another.

Gandhism treats the two as capable of reconciliation, and aims to convert the owner rather than to defeat them. Trusteeship depends on that possibility.

4. Property

Communism: abolition of private ownership of the means of production.

Gandhism: trusteeship. The owner keeps the title and holds the property for the community, taking only what they need. Property is neither an absolute right nor to be expropriated.

This is where the comparison is most often examined and where Gandhism is weakest. Trusteeship depends on the owner's willingness, and a communist's objection is exactly Ambedkar's economic objection: a principle that asks those who hold to hold for others leaves them holding, and leaves the timing and extent of any concession entirely to them.

5. Industry and scale

Communism is industrial and large-scale, and treats the development of the productive forces as the condition of any advance.

Gandhism is agrarian and small-scale, distrusts machinery that displaces labour, and prefers the village, the handicraft and swadeshi. Chapter 870's Gram Swaraj is this in constitutional form.

6. The state

Communism: capture the state, use it in the transition, and it withers away.

Gandhism: distrust the state at every stage, because it is organised force and, in Gandhi's own image, represents violence in a concentrated and organised form. The direction of travel is decentralisation from the start rather than centralisation followed by dissolution.

7. Materialism and spirituality

Communism is materialist: consciousness is conditioned by material conditions, and religion is part of the superstructure.

Gandhism is founded on a religious conception of the person, on self-purification, and on the discipline of the individual as the beginning of social change.

8. Where change begins

Communism: in the structure. Change ownership and the people will change.

Gandhism: in the person. Change people and the structures will follow. The constructive programme, and the requirement that a satyagrahi discipline themselves first, are this proposition in practice.

The criticisms each makes of the other

Setting these out is the strongest way to organise the second half of an answer.

The communist criticism of Gandhism. That trusteeship is a device for leaving property where it is; that appeals to the conscience of the powerful have never redistributed anything; that Gandhi's economics condemns people to poverty by rejecting the productivity that industry supplies; and that a movement of moral appeal is easily accommodated by those it appeals to.

munotes.in392

Gandhism and Communism Compared

The Gandhian criticism of communism. That violence corrupts those who use it and reproduces itself in the society that results; that a doctrine which subordinates the individual to a historical process ends by sacrificing individuals; that centralised state ownership creates a new master rather than removing mastery, which is what happened; and that a materialist account of the person leaves out what makes change durable.

And notice that each criticism was substantially borne out. Trusteeship did not redistribute; and the states built on the communist programme did produce a new ruling apparatus. That is the fairest thing that can be said, and it is what an evaluation should say.

Ambedkar's position, which belongs here

An Indian answer is incomplete without it, because Ambedkar criticised both.

Against Gandhism: that moral appeal leaves the beneficiaries of hierarchy in control of the timing of concessions, that the village he idealised was for the excluded a place of oppression rather than of self-rule, and that enforceable constitutional rights are a surer protection than another person's conscience.

Against communism: that its exclusive focus on class does not reach caste, which in India is the more fundamental division and is not produced by ownership; and that its willingness to use violence and to dispense with constitutional protections endangers precisely the people who most need them.

His own answer: constitutional democracy with enforceable rights, State-directed economic measures, and social reform aimed at caste. Chapter 880 develops this.

A worked example

A landlord in a district holds two thousand acres. Five hundred families work the land as tenants and labourers.

The communist prescription. Organise the tenants as a class, establish that the relation is one of exploitation, and take the land, by legislation where possible and by direct action where not. The landlord's consent is not required and no compensation is owed in principle, since the holding was accumulated from the labour of those who worked it.

The Gandhian prescription. Approach the landlord. Establish the facts truthfully. Explain that he holds the land in trust and that his own good is contained in the good of all. Ask him to give what is not needed for his own reasonable requirements. If he refuses, use satyagraha: non-violent non-cooperation by the tenants, openly, with the penalty accepted. Vinoba Bhave's Bhoodan movement is exactly this, and its result is the fairest test available: a very large area was donated, and much less of it was actually redistributed, cultivable and cultivated.

The two results, honestly stated. Where communist State governments in India legislated land reform, substantial redistribution occurred. Where Bhoodan operated, donation greatly exceeded redistribution. That is evidence, and an answer that gives it is far stronger than one that argues from principle alone.

munotes.in393

Gandhism and Communism Compared

And the qualification the other way. Where land reform was attempted by legislation in most other Indian States, it was extensively evaded, which means the comparison is not simply between persuasion and law but between different degrees of political will behind the law.

Distinctions that carry marks

GandhismCommunism
Means and endsInseparable, as seed and treeThe end justifies the means
ViolenceExcluded absolutely, ahimsaJustified where necessary
Class relationsReconcilable; convert the ownerConflict, and it drives history
Property in productionTrusteeship; title retained, held for the communityAbolished
Scale of productionVillage, handicraft, swadeshiLarge-scale industry
The stateDistrusted throughout; decentralise from the startCaptured, used, then withers
BasisSpiritual; self-purificationMaterialist
Change beginsIn the personIn the structure
Final imageEnlightened anarchyThe withering away of the state
Its weaknessTrusteeship depends on the owner's goodwillThe transitional state did not wither
Indian test caseBhoodanLand reform in Kerala and West Bengal

What this comparison is NOT

It is not a comparison of an economic doctrine with a moral one. Gandhism has an economic programme, in trusteeship, swadeshi, bread labour and village industry, and communism has a moral content, in its account of exploitation and alienation.

Gandhi was not indifferent to inequality. His objection to the communist method is not an objection to redistribution, and he organised industrial strikes.

Communism is not indifferent to the individual. Its account of alienation is a claim about what industrial work does to persons, which is closer to Gandhi than most comparisons admit.

Neither is refuted by the other's failure. Trusteeship's poor record does not establish the communist programme, and the failure of the communist states does not establish trusteeship.

Quick revision

  1. Agreements: the existing distribution is indefensible; exploitation is real; the poorest are the point; the order will not reform itself; hostility to colonialism; and a shared final image, Gandhi's enlightened anarchy and Engels's withering state.
  2. Eight differences: means and ends inseparable; ahimsa absolute; class harmony against class conflict; trusteeship against abolition; village against industry; distrust of the state throughout against capture then withering; spiritual against materialist; and change beginning in the person against the structure.
  3. The communist criticism: trusteeship leaves property where it is, moral appeal has never redistributed anything, and rejecting industry condemns people to poverty.
  4. The Gandhian criticism: violence corrupts and reproduces itself, the individual is sacrificed to a historical process, and centralised state ownership creates a new master.
  5. Both criticisms were substantially borne out, which is the fair evaluation.
  6. Ambedkar criticised both: Gandhism for leaving the powerful in control of the timing, communism for missing caste and for endangering constitutional protections; and answered with enforceable rights.
  7. The Indian evidence: Bhoodan produced donation far in excess of redistribution; communist State governments achieved the most substantial land reform, by legislation.
munotes.in394

Gandhism and Communism Compared

Test yourself

1. On what do Gandhism and communism agree? That the existing distribution of wealth is indefensible and requires change rather than being a natural fact. That exploitation is real, Gandhi's objection to the owner who grows rich on the labour of the poor being directed at the same relation. That the poorest are the point, Antyodaya and the centrality of the proletariat being different formulations of one priority. That the existing order will not reform itself voluntarily. That colonial rule was an economic relation and not only a political one. And, remarkably, on the final image, Gandhi's enlightened anarchy and Engels's withering away of the state describing similar destinations.

2. What is the deepest difference between them? The relation of means to ends. Communism is consequentialist about method: the transformation is the end and the means are selected for effectiveness, so revolutionary violence is justified by what it achieves. Gandhism holds that means and ends are inseparable, with the same connection between them as between the seed and the tree, so that a society reached through violence will be a violent society. Every other difference follows: the absoluteness of non-violence, the preference for converting rather than defeating the owner, and trusteeship rather than expropriation.

3. What is trusteeship, and what is the objection to it? Gandhi's proposal that an owner retain the title to property while holding it for the community, taking only what is needed for reasonable requirements, so that property is neither an absolute right nor a thing to be expropriated. The objection, made by communists and by Ambedkar in the same terms, is that a principle asking those who hold to hold for others leaves them holding, and leaves the timing and extent of any concession entirely to them. The Bhoodan movement is the fairest test: a very large area was donated and much less was actually redistributed and cultivated.

4. What criticism does each make of the other, and how have the criticisms fared? The communist criticism is that trusteeship leaves property where it is, that appeals to the conscience of the powerful have never redistributed anything, that rejecting industrial productivity condemns people to poverty, and that a movement of moral appeal is easily accommodated. The Gandhian criticism is that violence corrupts those who use it and reproduces itself in the resulting society, that subordinating the individual to a historical process ends in sacrificing individuals, and that centralised state ownership creates a new master rather than removing mastery. Both criticisms were substantially borne out: trusteeship did not redistribute, and the communist states produced a new ruling apparatus.

munotes.in395

Gandhism and Communism Compared

5. Where does Ambedkar stand between them? Against both. Against Gandhism, because moral appeal leaves the beneficiaries of hierarchy in control of when and how much to concede, because the idealised village was for the excluded a place of oppression rather than self-rule, and because enforceable rights are a surer protection than another person's conscience. Against communism, because its exclusive attention to class does not reach caste, which in India is the more fundamental division and is not produced by ownership, and because its readiness to use violence and to dispense with constitutional protections endangers exactly the people who most need them. His answer was constitutional democracy with enforceable rights, State-directed economic measures, and social reform aimed at caste.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in396

Module IV

Indian Democracy at Work

munotes.in

Chapter Seventy-Six

What a Political Party Is

Syllabus topic 4.1.1, "Political Parties -Meaning, differences between Political Parties andInterest Groups"

In one line

A political party is an organised group that seeks to capture governmental power through elections in order to carry out a programme, which is what separates it from every other kind of political organisation.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: a political party is an organised body of persons holding broadly similar political views who seek to obtain and exercise governmental power, ordinarily by contesting elections, in order to give effect to a programme; its defining features are organisation, a measure of ideological or programmatic coherence, the pursuit of governmental office rather than merely of influence, the claim to represent a national or general interest, and the acceptance of responsibility for governing.

The five features

1. Organisation. A structure, a membership, office bearers and a means of taking decisions. A crowd, a mood or a tendency is not a party.

2. Some coherence of views or programme. Not unanimity, which no large party has, but enough shared position for the party to mean something to a voter.

3. The pursuit of governmental power. The decisive feature. An interest group seeks to influence whoever governs; a party seeks to be the government.

4. A claim to speak for a general interest. A party asks for the votes of people whose interests differ, so it must present a programme for the whole and not for a section. This is why parties are broad and often internally inconsistent, and it is a consequence of the third feature rather than a defect.

5. The acceptance of responsibility. A party that wins must govern, must answer for what it does, and must face the electorate again. This is what disciplines it, and it is what an interest group never has to accept.

Where Indian law defines a party

The definition matters practically, because in India recognition confers real advantages, and a law student should know where the definitions sit.

Section 29A of the Representation of the People Act 1951 provides for the registration of political parties with the Election Commission. An association or body of individual citizens of India calling itself a political party applies to the Commission, and its memorandum or rules must contain a specific provision that it shall bear true faith and allegiance to the Constitution of India as by law established, and to the principles of socialism, secularism and democracy, and would uphold the sovereignty, unity and integrity of India.

Recognition as a State or a national party is a separate matter, governed by the Election Symbols (Reservation and Allotment) Order made by the Election Commission under article 324, and turns on performance at elections in terms of seats and vote share. Recognition brings a reserved symbol, free time on public broadcasting, and a larger number of proposers and star campaigners.

munotes.in397

What a Political Party Is

The Tenth Schedule gives the party a hold over its members that no other association has. Paragraph 2 disqualifies a member who voluntarily gives up membership of the party that set them up, or who votes or abstains contrary to a direction of that party without permission and without condonation within fifteen days. Chapter 790 works this out.

What the Constitution itself does not do. The Constitution as adopted did not mention political parties at all, and they entered its text only through the Tenth Schedule in 1985. That is a striking fact about a document designed to establish a parliamentary democracy, and it is worth a sentence in an answer.

What parties do

Six functions, and a question may ask for these alone.

Aggregating interests. A party takes the demands of many groups and combines them into a programme that can be presented to an electorate. Chapter 70's interest groups articulate; parties aggregate.

Simplifying the choice. A voter cannot assess a thousand candidates on a hundred issues. A party label carries information, and without parties an election would be unintelligible.

Recruiting and training leaders. Almost every person who holds executive office in a parliamentary system arrives through a party.

Forming and sustaining a government. In a parliamentary system the executive exists only so long as it commands a majority, and a party is what makes a stable majority possible.

Providing opposition. An organised alternative that scrutinises, criticises and is ready to take office is a constitutional necessity, and it is a party that supplies it.

Political education and mobilisation. Explaining issues, drawing people into public life, and bringing them to vote.

The kinds of party

By organisation. Cadre parties, built on a small body of activists; mass parties, built on a large enrolled membership; and catch-all parties, which subordinate ideology to the widest possible appeal.

By ideology. Programmatic parties committed to a doctrine; pragmatic parties that adjust; and parties organised around a personality, a region or a community.

By the system they operate in. One-party, two-party and multi-party systems, which is chapter 810's material.

In India, by recognition. National parties, State parties, and registered unrecognised parties, which is a legal classification with practical consequences.

A worked example

A farmers' organisation with three lakh members has campaigned for a decade on procurement prices. It decides to contest the next State election.

Before the decision it was an interest group. It sought to influence whoever governed; it took no position on education, policing or the budget; and it accepted no responsibility for anything except its own demand.

The moment it contests, four things change.

munotes.in398

What a Political Party Is

It must have a position on everything. A voter asking what it will do about school fees cannot be told that this is outside its remit.

It must appeal beyond its members. Three lakh members will not win a State, so it must ask for the votes of people who are not farmers, which requires a programme framed as a general interest.

It becomes answerable. If it wins and procurement prices do not rise, it will be blamed, which it never was as a group.

And it acquires legal identity. It must register under section 29A, its memorandum must contain the allegiance provision, its elected members become subject to the Tenth Schedule, and its symbol becomes a legal question.

Notice that the fourth is a consequence of the first three and not an administrative detail. Indian law recognises the party as an entity precisely because it is doing something an interest group does not do.

Distinctions that carry marks

Political partyInterest groupSocial movement
ObjectTo hold officeTo influence policyTo change society
Contests electionsYesNoNo
Scope of programmeThe whole of policyOne interestOne cause, broadly
Appeals toThe whole electorateIts members and sympathisersThe public
Accepts responsibility for governingYesNoNo
Legal recognition in IndiaRegistration under section 29A, recognition by symbol orderNone as suchNone
Binds its elected membersYes, by the Tenth ScheduleNoNo

What a political party is NOT

It is not a group of people who agree. Every large party contains deep disagreement, and it is held together by the pursuit of office as much as by doctrine.

It is not defined by ideology. Parties organised around a region, a community or a leader are parties, and in India many of the most successful are.

It is not the same as a faction. A faction operates within a party for control of it; a party operates in the electoral arena for control of the government.

And it is not mentioned in the Constitution as adopted. Parties entered the constitutional text only in 1985, through the Tenth Schedule.

Quick revision

  1. Five features: organisation; some coherence of programme; the pursuit of governmental power, which is decisive; a claim to speak for a general interest; and the acceptance of responsibility for governing.
  2. Section 29A of the Representation of the People Act 1951: registration with the Election Commission, the memorandum containing the provision on true faith and allegiance to the Constitution and to the principles of socialism, secularism and democracy, and the sovereignty, unity and integrity of India.
  3. Recognition as a State or national party comes from the Election Symbols (Reservation and Allotment) Order under article 324 and turns on seats and vote share; it brings a reserved symbol and broadcasting time.
  4. The Tenth Schedule, paragraph 2, gives a party a legal hold over its members that no other association has.
  5. Six functions: aggregating interests, simplifying the choice, recruiting leaders, forming and sustaining a government, providing an opposition, and political education.
  6. The Constitution as adopted did not mention parties at all. They entered its text in 1985.
munotes.in399

What a Political Party Is

Test yourself

1. Define a political party and give its essential features. An organised body of persons holding broadly similar political views who seek to obtain and exercise governmental power, ordinarily by contesting elections, in order to give effect to a programme. Its features are organisation, with a structure, membership and a means of taking decisions; a measure of programmatic coherence, though not unanimity; the pursuit of governmental office rather than merely of influence, which is the decisive feature; a claim to speak for a general rather than a sectional interest; and the acceptance of responsibility for governing and of the electorate's judgment on it.

2. Where does Indian law define and regulate political parties? Section 29A of the Representation of the People Act 1951 provides for registration with the Election Commission, requiring the party's memorandum or rules to contain a specific provision that it will bear true faith and allegiance to the Constitution as by law established and to the principles of socialism, secularism and democracy, and will uphold the sovereignty, unity and integrity of India. Recognition as a State or national party is separate, arising under the Election Symbols (Reservation and Allotment) Order made under article 324 and depending on seats and votes. And the Tenth Schedule, inserted in 1985, gives a party a legal hold over its elected members.

3. What functions do parties perform? They aggregate interests, combining the demands of many groups into a programme presentable to an electorate, where interest groups only articulate. They simplify the electoral choice, since a party label carries information no voter could otherwise assemble. They recruit and train the people who hold executive office. They form and sustain governments, which in a parliamentary system depend on a stable majority. They provide an organised opposition ready to take office. And they educate and mobilise, explaining issues and bringing people to vote.

4. Why must a party claim to speak for a general interest? Because it seeks office, and office is won by the votes of people whose interests differ. A body appealing only to one section cannot assemble a majority, so it must present a programme framed for the whole community. That is why large parties are broad, internally inconsistent and often vague, and why those features are consequences of what a party is rather than defects in particular parties.

munotes.in400

What a Political Party Is

5. What changes when an interest group becomes a party? It must take a position on the whole of policy rather than on one interest, since a voter's question about any subject cannot be answered by saying it is outside its remit. It must appeal beyond its own members, framing its programme as a general interest, because its membership will not win an election by itself. It becomes answerable for outcomes it was never blamed for as a group. And it acquires legal identity: registration under section 29A, the allegiance provision in its memorandum, a symbol that becomes a legal question, and elected members subject to the Tenth Schedule.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in401

Chapter Seventy-Seven

Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished

Syllabus topic 4.1.1, "differences between Political Parties andInterest Groups"

In one line

A party wants to be the government; an interest group wants to influence whoever the government is, and every other difference follows from that one.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: a political party seeks to capture governmental power by contesting elections and accepts responsibility for the whole range of policy and for governing, whereas an interest group seeks only to influence public policy in favour of the interest it represents, does not contest elections, takes no position on matters outside its concern, and accepts no responsibility for the consequences of what it demands.

The master difference

A party seeks office. A group seeks influence.

Every difference in the table is a consequence of this, and an answer that establishes it first and then derives the rest reads far better than one that lists ten unrelated differences.

Derive the consequences. Because a party seeks office it must contest elections; because it contests elections it must appeal beyond any single interest; because it appeals to everyone it must have a position on everything; because it may win it must accept responsibility; and because it may lose it is disciplined by the electorate. A group does none of these, and is therefore free to be single-minded, uncompromising and permanent in a way no party can be.

The differences

1. Object. Office against influence.

2. Elections. A party contests; a group does not, though it may support candidates, campaign on issues and mobilise voters.

3. Breadth of programme. A party must cover the whole of policy; a group covers its own concern and is silent elsewhere.

4. Membership. A party's membership is open and is meant to be as large as possible; a group's is defined by the interest, and in the case of a professional or sectional body may be closed.

5. Accountability. A party answers to the whole electorate at intervals; a group answers to its members alone, and to nobody else at all.

6. Responsibility. A party that wins must implement and must live with the consequences; a group may demand what it likes and is never asked to pay for it.

7. Continuity of position. A group can hold the same demand for fifty years; a party must adjust to remain electable, which is why groups regard parties as unprincipled and parties regard groups as unrealistic.

8. Legal status in India. A party registers under section 29A of the Representation of the People Act 1951, may be recognised under the Symbols Order, and binds its elected members through the Tenth Schedule. An interest group has no such status and no such power.

9. Compromise. A party is a machine for compromise, since it must hold together people who disagree; a group exists precisely in order not to compromise.

munotes.in402

Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished

The borderline cases

This is where an answer distinguishes itself, because the categories are clear and reality is not.

A group that becomes a party. Farmers' organisations, trade unions and community associations have converted themselves into parties, in India and elsewhere. The moment they contest for office the four consequences at chapter 760 follow.

A party that behaves like a group. A party representing one region, one community or one occupation, with no realistic prospect of forming a government alone, functions in practice as an interest group with seats: it bargains for its constituency and leaves the rest of policy to its coalition partners. A great deal of Indian coalition politics is of this kind, and chapter 800 develops it.

A group formally attached to a party. The affiliated trade union, student organisation or farmers' wing. It is an interest group by every structural test and cannot press a demand that embarrasses its party, which is the distinctive feature of the Indian pattern noticed at chapter 70.

A group that supplies candidates. Where a professional body's members are elected in numbers and act together in the legislature, the line becomes very thin.

A movement. Neither a party nor quite a group: looser, larger, without formal membership, aiming at social change rather than at a policy. Movements frequently produce both groups and parties.

Why the distinction matters practically

For regulation. Parties are regulated: registration, disclosure of contributions above thresholds, expenditure limits on candidates, a model code of conduct during elections. Interest groups in India are regulated hardly at all, which is chapter 90's point about the absence of a lobbying statute.

For democratic theory. A party's claim to speak for the whole is what allows an election to confer a mandate. If the legislature were composed only of representatives of interests, nothing could be decided for the community as a whole.

For the citizen. A voter's relation to a party is a relation of authorisation, exercised rarely and over everything. A citizen's relation to a group is a relation of membership, continuous and over one thing. Both are needed, and neither substitutes for the other.

A worked example

A State proposes to allow shops to open on all seven days.

A traders' federation opposes it, saying small shopkeepers will be forced to work every day to compete. It has no view on the State's education policy and is not asked for one. If the change goes through, nobody blames the federation.

A workers' union supports a change with a mandatory weekly off for employees. Again a single position, and no responsibility for the outcome.

A party in government must weigh the traders, the workers, the consumers who want Sunday shopping, the municipal authorities who must inspect, the revenue implications, and the effect on its vote in a dozen constituencies. It must decide, and it will be answerable at the next election whichever way it decides.

munotes.in403

Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished

A small party representing traders, holding eight seats in a coalition, behaves like the federation and votes like a party: it presses the traders' demand as its price for support, and it takes no position on education either. That is the borderline case, and identifying it is the point.

The example shows what the distinction is for: the group states a preference and the party makes a decision, and only one of them will be held to account.

Distinctions that carry marks

Political partyInterest group
ObjectGovernmental officeInfluence on policy
Contests electionsYesNo
ProgrammeThe whole of policyOne interest
MembershipOpen, and as large as possibleDefined by the interest, sometimes closed
Accountable toThe whole electorateIts members only
Responsible for outcomesYesNo
Attitude to compromiseEssential to itContrary to its purpose
Consistency over timeAdjusts to remain electableCan hold one demand for decades
Legal status in IndiaRegistration under s.29A; symbol recognition; Tenth ScheduleNone
RegulatedSubstantiallyHardly at all
Typical complaint about the otherGroups are unrealistic and sectionalParties are unprincipled and evasive

What this distinction is NOT

It is not that groups are narrow and parties are broad in spirit. It is structural: the breadth follows from seeking office.

It is not that groups have no power. Chapters 60 to 90 showed that they often have more influence over a particular decision than a backbench member of the governing party.

It is not always clean. The borderline cases above are numerous in India, and an answer that gives them is stronger than one that pretends the categories are watertight.

It is not a hierarchy. A democracy needs both: parties to make decisions for the whole and to be answerable, groups to keep the whole continuously informed of what the parts want.

Quick revision

  1. The master difference: a party seeks office, a group seeks influence. Everything else follows.
  2. Derive it: office requires elections, elections require breadth, breadth requires a position on everything, winning requires responsibility, and losing supplies discipline.
  3. Nine differences: object, elections, breadth, membership, accountability, responsibility, consistency over time, legal status, and attitude to compromise.
  4. Borderline cases: a group that becomes a party; a party that functions as a group with seats, which is much of Indian coalition politics; a group affiliated to a party, which cannot embarrass it; and a movement, which is neither.
  5. Why it matters: parties are regulated and groups are not; a party's claim to speak for the whole is what makes a mandate possible; and a voter's relation to a party is authorisation, a member's to a group is membership.
munotes.in404

Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished

Test yourself

1. State the master difference and derive the others from it. A party seeks governmental office and a group seeks influence over whoever holds it. Because a party seeks office it must contest elections; because it contests elections it must appeal beyond any single interest; because it appeals to everyone it must have a position on the whole of policy; because it may win it must accept responsibility for outcomes; and because it may lose it is disciplined by the electorate. A group does none of these and is therefore free to be single-minded, uncompromising and consistent in a way no party can be.

2. Set out the principal differences. Object, office against influence. Elections, contested by one and not the other. Breadth, the whole of policy against a single interest. Membership, open and as large as possible against defined by the interest. Accountability, to the whole electorate against to members alone. Responsibility for outcomes, accepted by one and never by the other. Consistency, a party adjusting to remain electable while a group holds a demand for decades. Legal status in India, registration, symbol recognition and the Tenth Schedule against nothing. And compromise, essential to a party and contrary to a group's purpose.

3. Give the borderline cases and explain each. A group that converts itself into a party, as farmers' organisations and unions have, at which point the consequences of seeking office follow. A party that functions as an interest group with seats, representing one region, community or occupation without any prospect of governing alone, and bargaining for its constituency while leaving the rest of policy to coalition partners. A group formally affiliated to a party, which is structurally a group but cannot press a demand embarrassing its party. And a movement, which is looser and larger than a group, has no formal membership, aims at social change rather than at a policy, and often produces both groups and parties.

4. Why does the distinction matter for democratic theory? Because a party's claim to speak for the whole community is what allows an election to confer a mandate. If a legislature were composed only of representatives of particular interests, each answerable to its own section, nothing could be decided for the community as a whole and every question would be settled by bargaining between sections. The party's obligation to have a position on everything, and to answer for the results, is what converts an aggregation of preferences into a decision somebody can be held responsible for.

munotes.in405

Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished

5. Why is the difference in regulation significant in India? Because parties are regulated and interest groups are not. Parties must register under section 29A, disclose contributions above prescribed thresholds, observe expenditure limits on candidates and comply with the model code of conduct during elections. Interest groups face none of this, and India has no statute registering lobbyists or requiring disclosure of lobbying at all. The result is that the body which seeks office is visible and accountable while the body which seeks to influence it is neither, which is the asymmetry the absence of a lobbying law produces.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in406

Chapter Seventy-Eight

The Significance of Political Parties in India

Syllabus topic 4.1, "Significance of Political Parties in India"

In one line

Parties matter in India because the Constitution's machinery cannot work without them and because, since 1985, a party's direction binds the member it elected on pain of losing the seat.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: political parties are significant in India because the parliamentary executive depends on a stable legislative majority which only parties can supply; because the electorate's choice of a government is made through party labels rather than through individual candidates; because parties recruit almost the whole political leadership; because they organise the opposition without which accountability is impossible; and because, since the Constitution (Fifty-second Amendment) Act 1985 inserted the Tenth Schedule, a legislator who votes against the direction of the party that returned them may be disqualified, which converts party discipline from a convention into a rule of law.

What parties supply that the Constitution assumes

The Constitution as adopted did not mention parties and cannot work without them, and setting out why is the strongest opening an answer on this topic can have.

A government that commands confidence. The Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the House and holds office only while it commands a majority. Without parties there is no way to assemble a stable majority from several hundred individuals, and no way for the electorate to know in advance who will govern.

A choice the voter can make. A voter chooses one candidate in one constituency and is in fact choosing a government. That is possible only because the candidate carries a party label that carries a programme and a prospective Prime Minister or Chief Minister.

An opposition. Scrutiny, questions, committee work and the readiness to take office all require an organised alternative, and only a party supplies it.

Leadership. Almost every person who holds ministerial office in India arrived through a party organisation.

Aggregation across an extraordinarily diverse country. A party seeking a majority in India must assemble support across languages, religions, castes and regions, and the necessity of doing so is itself a moderating force.

Continuity. Governments change and parties persist, so a programme can outlast a term.

The Tenth Schedule, which is where parties enter the law

What it does. The Constitution (Fifty-second Amendment) Act 1985 inserted the Tenth Schedule. Paragraph 2 disqualifies a member of either House of Parliament or of a State Legislature who voluntarily gives up membership of the party which set them up as a candidate, or who votes or abstains contrary to any direction issued by that party without prior permission and without being condoned within fifteen days. It also covers an independent who joins a party after the election, and a nominated member who joins one after six months. Paragraph 6 gives the decision on disqualification to the Speaker or Chairman and declares it final, and paragraph 7 purported to exclude the jurisdiction of all courts.

munotes.in407

The Significance of Political Parties in India

Facts. Kihoto Hollohan v. Zachillhu, 1992 Supp (2) SCC 651. A large number of petitions challenged the constitutionality of the Amendment. It was argued that paragraph 7 took away the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court under article 136 and of the High Courts under articles 226 and 227, so that the Bill required ratification by the legislatures of not less than half the States under the proviso to article 368(2) and, not having been ratified, failed altogether; that disqualification for defection violates a representative's freedom of speech, right to dissent and freedom of conscience and destroys a basic feature; that the Speaker, being a party nominee, is not an independent adjudicator; and that the expression "any direction" was unduly restrictive of the freedom of speech.

Held. A Constitution Bench upheld the Schedule in substance and severed paragraph 7.

On paragraph 7: it excludes the jurisdiction of all courts including the Supreme Court and the High Courts and changes the operation of articles 136, 226 and 227, so it required ratification under the proviso to article 368(2). It is severable, and the rest of the Tenth Schedule stands independently, being complete, workable and untruncated by its excision.

On paragraph 2: valid. Its provisions do not subvert the democratic rights of elected members and do not violate their freedom of speech, of vote or of conscience, or any right under articles 105 and 194. They are salutary and intended to strengthen the fabric of Indian parliamentary democracy by curbing unprincipled and unethical political defections.

On "any direction": the words must be construed harmoniously with the other provisions and confined to the objects and purposes of the Schedule. The direction whose violation may entail disqualification is limited to a vote on a motion of confidence or no confidence, or where the motion relates to a matter that was an integral part of the policy and programme on which the party approached the electorate.

On the Speaker: while functioning under the Tenth Schedule the Speaker or Chairman exercises judicial power and acts as a tribunal, so the decision is amenable to judicial review. The finality clause in paragraph 6(1) does not exclude the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court under article 136 or of the High Courts under articles 226 and 227, and the legal fiction in paragraph 6(2) brings the proceeding within article 122 or 212, making it justiciable on the ground of illegality or perversity despite immunity from challenge for irregularity of procedure.

munotes.in408

The Significance of Political Parties in India

Why this is the significance of parties in Indian law. After 1985 the party is not merely the vehicle by which a candidate reaches the House; it holds the seat. A member who votes against the whip on a confidence motion or on the party's central programme loses their membership of the House. No other association in India has any comparable power over a person's public office.

What follows, and it cuts both ways

In favour. The anti-defection law ended the practice by which governments were made and unmade by legislators changing sides for office, which was so common that the phrase for it entered ordinary speech. Stability improved, and the Court called the provisions salutary.

Against. A legislator who is disqualified for voting against the party cannot function as a representative exercising independent judgment, and the House loses the deliberative character a legislature is supposed to have. Members vote as instructed on everything that matters, so debate cannot change an outcome, which is a real cost and is part of chapter 840's ethical decay.

And the Speaker problem, which the Court identified and could not cure. The person deciding whether a member has defected is elected by the House and in practice belongs to a party. The Court's answer, judicial review for illegality or perversity, addresses the outcome and not the delay: a decision withheld until the term expires cannot be reviewed usefully.

A worked example

A State government has a majority of four. Twelve members of the governing party are dissatisfied with the Chief Minister.

Before 1985 they could have crossed the floor, brought the government down, and joined or formed another, which is what the Amendment was enacted to stop.

After 1985, if they vote against the government on a confidence motion contrary to the whip they are liable to be disqualified, and they lose their seats rather than change the government. The vote will therefore not happen.

What they may lawfully do instead. Persuade within the party; seek a change of leader through the party's own processes; resign, which forfeits the seat but is not a defection; or, if their number is large enough to constitute a merger within the terms the Schedule permits, act together.

And the question a student should notice. Is that a good outcome? The government survives, which is stability; the members' judgment about their own government's leadership is legally irrelevant, which is the loss. The Court held the first justified the second, and reasonable people continue to disagree about it.

Distinctions that carry marks

Before the Tenth ScheduleAfter it
Party disciplineA convention, enforced politicallyA rule of law, enforced by disqualification
A member voting against the whipRisked deselectionRisks losing the seat
Government stabilityVulnerable to floor crossingSubstantially protected
Deliberation in the HouseFormally freeConstrained on everything that matters
Who decides a defectionNobodyThe Speaker, as a tribunal
Judicial reviewNot applicableAvailable for illegality or perversity, not for irregularity of procedure
munotes.in409

The Significance of Political Parties in India

What this topic is NOT

It is not the claim that parties are mentioned in the Constitution as adopted. They were not, and they entered the text in 1985.

It is not a claim that the anti-defection law abolished defection. It changed its form, and a great deal of litigation concerns resignations, mergers and delayed decisions.

"Any direction" does not mean every direction. Kihoto Hollohan confines it to confidence motions and to matters integral to the party's electoral programme, and an answer that omits this states the law too widely.

Paragraph 7 was not upheld. It was held to require ratification, and was severed, which is why judicial review of a Speaker's decision exists at all.

Quick revision

  1. What parties supply: a government commanding confidence; a choice the voter can actually make; an opposition; leadership; aggregation across languages, religions, castes and regions; and continuity.
  2. The Constitution as adopted did not mention parties, and they entered its text through the Tenth Schedule in 1985.
  3. Paragraph 2 disqualifies a member who voluntarily gives up party membership, or who votes or abstains contrary to any direction without permission and without condonation within fifteen days.
  4. Kihoto Hollohan, 1992 Supp (2) SCC 651: paragraph 7 required ratification under the proviso to article 368(2) and was severable; paragraph 2 is valid and does not violate articles 105 and 194, being salutary and intended to strengthen the fabric of Indian parliamentary democracy; "any direction" is confined to a confidence or no confidence motion or a matter integral to the party's electoral programme; and the Speaker acts as a tribunal, so the decision is reviewable for illegality or perversity but not for irregularity of procedure.
  5. The significance in one line: since 1985 the party holds the seat, and no other association in India has comparable power over a person's public office.
  6. Both sides: it ended government-making by floor crossing, and it removed the legislator's independent judgment from everything that matters.

Test yourself

1. Why are parties indispensable to the working of the Indian Constitution? Because the Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the House and holds office only while it commands a majority, and no stable majority can be assembled from several hundred individuals without parties. Because a voter chooses one candidate in one constituency and is in fact choosing a government, which is possible only because the candidate carries a label that carries a programme and a prospective head of government. Because scrutiny requires an organised opposition ready to take office. And because a party seeking a majority in India must assemble support across languages, religions, castes and regions.

munotes.in410

The Significance of Political Parties in India

2. What does paragraph 2 of the Tenth Schedule provide? That a member of either House of Parliament or of a State Legislature is disqualified if they voluntarily give up membership of the political party which set them up as a candidate, or if without prior permission of that party they vote or abstain from voting contrary to any direction issued by it and the voting or abstention is not condoned within fifteen days. It also disqualifies an independent member who joins a party after the election, and a nominated member who joins one after six months from taking their seat.

3. What did Kihoto Hollohan decide? That paragraph 7, which excluded the jurisdiction of all courts, changed the operation of articles 136, 226 and 227 and therefore required ratification under the proviso to article 368(2), and that it was severable so the rest of the Schedule stood. That paragraph 2 is valid and does not violate the freedom of speech, vote or conscience of members or articles 105 and 194, being salutary and intended to curb unprincipled and unethical defections. That "any direction" is confined to votes on confidence or no confidence motions or on matters integral to the party's electoral programme. And that the Speaker acts as a tribunal, so the decision is subject to judicial review for illegality or perversity though not for irregularity of procedure.

4. Why is the narrow construction of "any direction" important? Because on a wide reading a party could disqualify a member for voting against any instruction whatever, which would make the member an agent of the party in every matter and would raise a serious question about the freedom of speech in the House. The Court's construction limits the sanction to a vote on the survival of the government or on a matter that was an integral part of the policy and programme on which the party approached the electorate, on the reasoning that voting against such a direction is a breach of the trust reposed by the electorate. An answer that omits the limitation states Indian law far too widely.

5. Assess the effect of the anti-defection law. It ended the practice by which governments were made and unmade by legislators changing sides for office, and the Supreme Court described its provisions as salutary and as strengthening the fabric of parliamentary democracy. The cost is that a legislator can no longer exercise independent judgment on anything that matters without losing their seat, so debate cannot change an outcome and the House loses much of its deliberative character. And the Court's remedy for a partisan Speaker, review for illegality or perversity, addresses the decision and not the delay, since a determination withheld until the term expires cannot usefully be reviewed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in411

Chapter Seventy-Nine

The Features of Political Parties in India

Syllabus topic 4.1.2, "Features of Political Parties in India"

In one line

Indian parties are numerous, internally undemocratic, organised as much around leaders, regions and communities as around ideology, dependent on money, and legally able to bind the members they elect.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the features of political parties in India are a multi-party system with a very large number of registered parties; the coexistence of national and State parties; the prominence of regional, caste and community based parties; the personalisation of leadership and the prevalence of political families; weak internal democracy; ideological convergence with programmatic differences narrower than the rhetoric suggests; heavy dependence on money; and, since 1985, a legal power over their elected members through the Tenth Schedule.

The features

1. A multi-party system, with very many parties

India has a multi-party system in the strict sense: several parties are capable of winning seats and of participating in government. Alongside the recognised national and State parties there are a very large number of registered unrecognised parties, most of which never win anything.

The cause is the country's size and diversity together with a first past the post system that nonetheless rewards parties with geographically concentrated support, which regional and community parties have.

2. National and State parties

A structural feature written into the law. Recognition under the Election Symbols Order distinguishes national parties, State parties and registered unrecognised parties, by reference to seats won and vote share. The distinction is not merely descriptive: it determines the reserved symbol, broadcasting time and the number of star campaigners, and therefore affects who can compete.

3. Regional, caste and community parties

Regional parties have governed States for decades and have repeatedly held the balance in coalitions at the Union.

Caste and community based parties organise around a group's political mobilisation, which chapter 850 treats as one of the older challenges to Indian democracy and which is also, on another reading, a form of representation the older parties denied.

State the fact and both readings. A party organised around a community is a party whose appeal is sectional, which chapter 770 says a party cannot afford; and it is also how groups excluded from power for generations obtained it. Both are true.

4. Personalisation and political families

Many Indian parties are identified with a founder or a leader, and in several the leadership has passed within a family. This is a feature of parties across the spectrum and not of any one of them.

Why it matters. A party organised around a person has no mechanism for changing its leadership except the person's departure, which is Michels's oligarchy at chapter 100 in an Indian form.

5. Weak internal democracy

Internal elections are rare, and where they are held they are often uncontested. Candidates for public office are usually selected by a central committee or a leader rather than by the members in the constituency. There is no legal requirement of internal democracy beyond the requirements of registration.

munotes.in412

The Features of Political Parties in India

This is the single most examinable feature, because it is where Michels's iron law of oligarchy at chapter 100 is confirmed most exactly, and because it is what the Tenth Schedule makes consequential: if the party's direction binds the member's vote, then whoever controls the party controls the legislature, and nobody elected that person.

6. Ideological convergence

Across the major parties the differences of economic programme are narrower than the rhetoric suggests, and coalitions have repeatedly been formed between parties whose declared ideologies are opposed. The competition is often about who will govern rather than about what will be done, and about which social coalition is assembled rather than about doctrine.

The honest qualification. Convergence is not identity. There are real and persistent differences on federalism, on the place of religion in public life, on language, on reservation, and on labour and land.

7. Money

Elections are expensive, and parties depend on contributions whose sources have historically been opaque. Chapter 860 examines the law on political funding and what the courts have done with it.

8. Legal power over members

Since 1985, a party's whip on a confidence motion or on a matter integral to its electoral programme binds its members on pain of disqualification. Facts and holding: Kihoto Hollohan v. Zachillhu, 1992 Supp (2) SCC 651, is set out at chapter 780; what matters here is the consequence, that a party in India possesses a legal hold over the votes of legislators that parties in many other democracies do not have.

9. Weak membership organisation between elections

Most parties mobilise intensively at elections and are much thinner in between, with organisational work concentrated in the hands of office bearers and of whatever social organisations are affiliated to them.

What causes these features

An answer that explains rather than lists is a stronger answer, and four causes account for most of the list.

Diversity. A society divided by language, religion, caste and region will produce parties organised on those lines, and no electoral system prevents it.

The electoral system. First past the post rewards concentrated support, which is exactly what regional and community parties have, and it penalises parties whose support is thin and spread.

The absence of any legal requirement of internal democracy. Registration under section 29A requires an allegiance clause and not a functioning internal election, so nothing compels parties to be democratic inside.

The cost of elections, which makes parties dependent on those who can supply money and reduces the influence of members who cannot.

munotes.in413

The Features of Political Parties in India

A worked example

A State party formed twenty years ago by a popular film actor holds thirty seats. Its president is the founder's son. Candidates are selected by the president. It has never held an internal election. It is in a coalition with a national party whose declared economic programme it does not share.

Which features does this display? Regional; personalised; family led; internally undemocratic; ideologically flexible; and, in a coalition, functioning as an interest group with seats.

And what does the law say about each?

On internal democracy: nothing. The Representation of the People Act requires registration and an allegiance clause and does not require an internal election.

On candidate selection: nothing. It is entirely a matter for the party.

On the members' votes: the Tenth Schedule. The thirty members must vote as the president directs on any confidence motion, on pain of disqualification.

Put those three together and the feature that matters becomes visible. The party's president was elected by nobody, selects the candidates, and controls thirty votes in the legislature by force of law. That is not a criticism of any particular party; it is a description of what the combination of no internal democracy and the Tenth Schedule produces, and it is the best thing a student can say on this topic.

Distinctions that carry marks

FeatureStatementCauseConsequence
Multi-partySeveral parties can win and governSize, diversity, first past the postCoalitions are normal
National and State partiesA legal classification by seats and votesSymbols Order under article 324Affects symbol, broadcasting, campaigners
Regional and community partiesOrganised on region, caste or communityDiversity; concentrated support rewardedRepresentation for the excluded; sectional appeal
PersonalisationIdentified with a leader or familyWeak organisation; recognition value of a nameNo mechanism for changing leadership
Weak internal democracyInternal elections rare; candidates chosen centrallyNo legal requirementWith the Tenth Schedule, whoever controls the party controls its votes
Ideological convergenceProgrammes narrower than rhetoricCompetition for the same median votersCoalitions across declared ideologies
MoneyExpensive elections, opaque sourcesScale of the electorateDependence on contributors
Legal power over membersWhip binding on pain of disqualificationTenth Schedule, 1985Stability, at the cost of deliberation

What these features are NOT

They are not peculiar to India. Personalisation, weak internal democracy and dependence on money are found in most democracies; what is distinctive is the combination and the legal power the Tenth Schedule confers.

They are not all defects. The rise of regional and community parties gave political power to groups that had been excluded from it, which is an achievement of Indian democracy and not only a problem for it.

munotes.in414

The Features of Political Parties in India

Ideological convergence is not the absence of difference. Federalism, religion in public life, language, reservation, labour and land divide the parties genuinely.

And weak internal democracy is not illegal. No Indian law requires a party to elect its own officers, which is the point of the topic rather than an omission from it.

Quick revision

  1. Nine features: a multi-party system with very many registered parties; national and State parties as a legal classification; regional, caste and community parties; personalisation and political families; weak internal democracy; ideological convergence; dependence on money; legal power over members under the Tenth Schedule; and weak organisation between elections.
  2. The feature that matters most is the combination: no legal requirement of internal democracy, plus a whip that binds on pain of disqualification, means whoever controls a party controls its votes in the legislature, and that person was elected by nobody.
  3. Four causes: diversity; first past the post, which rewards concentrated support; the absence of any legal requirement of internal democracy; and the cost of elections.
  4. Michels at chapter 100 is confirmed exactly by Indian party organisation.
  5. Regional and community parties are both a sectional appeal and the route by which excluded groups obtained power. Give both readings.
  6. Convergence is not identity: federalism, religion, language, reservation, labour and land divide parties genuinely.

Test yourself

1. State the principal features of political parties in India. A multi-party system with a very large number of registered parties, most of which win nothing. A legal classification into national parties, State parties and registered unrecognised parties. The prominence of regional, caste and community based parties. Personalisation of leadership and the prevalence of political families. Weak internal democracy, with internal elections rare and candidates chosen centrally. Ideological convergence, the programmatic differences being narrower than the rhetoric. Heavy dependence on money from opaque sources. Legal power over elected members under the Tenth Schedule. And thin organisation between elections.

2. What causes these features? Diversity, since a society divided by language, religion, caste and region produces parties organised on those lines. The electoral system, since first past the post rewards geographically concentrated support, which regional and community parties have, and penalises parties whose support is thin and widely spread. The absence of any legal requirement of internal democracy, since registration under section 29A requires an allegiance clause and not a functioning internal election. And the cost of elections, which makes parties dependent on those able to supply money.

3. Why is weak internal democracy the most important feature? Because of what it combines with. No Indian law requires a party to hold internal elections or to select candidates by any particular process, so the leadership is typically self-perpetuating. The Tenth Schedule then makes the party's direction binding on its legislators on pain of disqualification. Put together, whoever controls the party controls its votes in the legislature, and that person holds their position without having been elected to it by anybody, which is Michels's iron law of oligarchy operating with the force of constitutional law behind it.

munotes.in415

The Features of Political Parties in India

4. How should the growth of caste and community based parties be assessed? On two readings, both of which are accurate. As a sectional appeal, it is what chapter 770 says a party cannot afford, since a body appealing to one community cannot claim to speak for the whole and tends to bargain rather than to govern. As representation, it is the route by which groups excluded from political power for generations obtained it, replacing parties which had claimed to speak for everybody while recruiting from a narrow social base. An answer that gives only one reading has described half the phenomenon.

5. Are these features peculiar to India? Not individually. Personalisation of leadership, weak internal party democracy and dependence on money are found across democracies, and coalitions between parties of divergent declared ideologies are common. What is distinctive is the combination and its legal setting: the scale of diversity, the number of parties, and above all the Tenth Schedule, which gives an Indian party a legal hold over the votes of its legislators that parties in many other democracies do not possess.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in416

Chapter Eighty

Coalition Politics in India

Syllabus topic 4.1.3, "Coalition Politics and Future of Multi- Party System in India"

In one line

A coalition is a government formed by more than one party because no single party has a majority, and in India it has been the normal condition at the Union for long stretches and is the normal condition in many States.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: coalition politics is the practice by which two or more political parties combine, before or after an election, to form and sustain a government, because no single party commands a majority in the legislature; it becomes necessary in a multi-party system operating under a parliamentary constitution in which the Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the House and must retain its confidence.

Why coalitions happen in India

The constitutional requirement. Under articles 75(3) and 164(2) the Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the House of the People and to the Legislative Assembly of a State respectively. A government must therefore command a majority continuously, and where no party has one, several must combine.

The electoral system does not prevent it. First past the post is often said to manufacture majorities, and it does so where competition is between two parties. Where competition is multi-cornered and support is regionally concentrated, it produces neither a majority nor proportionality, which is the Indian pattern.

The social basis. A country divided by language, religion, caste and region produces parties whose support is regional or sectional, and such parties can win seats without ever approaching a majority.

The kinds of coalition

Pre-poll alliances, formed before the election, with seats distributed among the partners and often a common programme and a declared leader. These have a stronger claim to a mandate, because the voter knew what combination they were voting for.

Post-poll coalitions, assembled after the results. The voter did not choose the combination, which is the standing objection to them.

Coalitions with outside support, where a party sustains the government by voting with it without joining the Council of Ministers. This is a distinctively Indian arrangement and it is unstable, because the supporting party has influence without responsibility and can withdraw at any time.

Minority governments, which are not coalitions at all but survive by issue by issue support, and which belong in the same discussion because they arise from the same arithmetic.

The phases of coalition government in India

An answer that gives the phases is much stronger than one that describes coalitions in the abstract.

Dominance at the Union with coalitions in the States. For the first two decades after independence one party held a clear majority at the Union while several States saw non-Congress coalitions, particularly from the late 1960s. Coalition politics in India begins in the States.

munotes.in417

Coalition Politics in India

The first non-Congress governments at the Union, formed by combinations of parties, which demonstrated both that an alternative was possible and how quickly a coalition of parties with little in common can break.

The era of coalitions. From the end of the 1980s to the middle of the 2010s no single party won a majority in the House of the People, and every Union government was a coalition or a minority government dependent on support. Two long-lived alliances governed for a decade each, which is the strongest evidence that coalitions can be stable.

A return to single-party majorities at the Union, while alliances continued to be maintained and while many States continued to be governed by coalitions.

The right lesson from that sequence is that coalition and single-party government alternate with the state of party competition, and that India has experienced both repeatedly. An answer that treats coalition government as a permanent feature or as a temporary aberration is wrong in the same way.

What makes a coalition work

A common minimum programme. A written statement of what the coalition will do, confining the government to the ground the partners agree on and leaving the rest aside. This is the single most important device Indian coalitions have developed.

A coordination mechanism. A committee of the partners meeting regularly, which is where disputes are settled before they reach the House.

A distribution of offices that the partners regard as fair, which in practice means portfolios in proportion to seats.

A leader acceptable to all partners, which is why coalitions often produce a Prime Minister or Chief Minister who was nobody's first choice.

Restraint on the largest party, which must forgo policies it would otherwise pursue, and which is the price of office.

What makes them fail

Absence of a shared programme, so that every issue is renegotiated.

Withdrawal by a partner, which where the majority is thin brings the government down.

Outside support, which gives a party influence without responsibility.

Disputes about portfolios, which are about power rather than policy and are the commonest immediate cause of a breakdown.

Competition between partners in the same State, since parties that are allies at the Union are frequently opponents in a State, which is a specifically Indian difficulty.

The arguments about coalitions

In favour.

They represent more people. A government of several parties commands the support of a larger share of the electorate than a single party with a plurality.

They restrain the largest party. Policies that could not survive negotiation are dropped, which is a check that a majority government does not face.

They strengthen federalism. Regional parties in a Union coalition carry State concerns into national decisions in a way nothing else does, and much of India's federal practice was developed in the coalition era.

munotes.in418

Coalition Politics in India

They produce consultation. Because nothing passes without agreement, more people are consulted and more interests are accommodated.

Against.

Instability, where a government can fall on the withdrawal of one partner.

Policy paralysis, where necessary but contentious measures are avoided because a partner objects.

Bargaining power out of proportion to size, since a small party holding the balance can extract far more than its votes warrant.

Accountability is blurred. When a coalition fails, no party is clearly responsible, and the voter cannot direct the blame.

Post-poll coalitions lack a mandate, since the voter never chose the combination.

A worked example

After an election, party A has 130 seats, B has 70, C has 40, D has 25 and independents 15, in a house of 280 with a majority at 141.

The arithmetic. A cannot govern alone. A plus C is 170, A plus D is 155, and B plus C plus D is 135, which needs the independents.

What the arithmetic does to D. D has 25 seats and can supply a majority to A, so it can demand portfolios and policy concessions far beyond what 25 seats out of 280 would suggest. That is the disproportionate bargaining power objection, in numbers.

What C can demand. More, because it can also make a majority with B if the independents come along, so it has an alternative.

What a common minimum programme does. It fixes in advance what the coalition will and will not do, so that D cannot reopen every question. It is the answer to the paralysis objection, and it is why Indian coalitions adopted it.

And what the Tenth Schedule does. It secures the coalition against defection by individual members, so the arrangement can be broken only by a party withdrawing as a party, which is public and attributable. That is the stability the anti-defection law delivered, and it is why coalitions after 1985 were more durable than those before it.

Distinctions that carry marks

Pre-poll alliancePost-poll coalitionOutside support
FormedBefore the electionAfter the resultsAfter the results
Voter knew the combinationYesNoNo
Claim to a mandateStrongWeakWeak
Partners in the Council of MinistersYesYesNo
StabilityHigherVariableLowest
ResponsibilitySharedSharedInfluence without responsibility
Single-party majority governmentCoalition government
Decision makingFastSlow, by negotiation
RepresentationA plurality of votersA larger share
Restraint on the leading partyInternal onlyExternal and continuous
FederalismWeaker channel for State concernsRegional parties inside the Union government
AccountabilityClearBlurred
RiskMajoritarianismInstability and paralysis
munotes.in419

Coalition Politics in India

What coalition politics is NOT

It is not a sign of a failing democracy. It is the normal condition of parliamentary systems in multi-party societies, and India has had stable coalitions lasting full terms.

It is not the same as a minority government, which survives on issue by issue support without a formed coalition.

It is not confined to the Union. Coalition politics in India began in the States and continues there.

It has not been ended by the return of single-party majorities. Alliances have been maintained even where a single party has a majority, and States continue to be governed by coalitions.

Quick revision

  1. Why they happen: articles 75(3) and 164(2) require collective responsibility and continuous confidence; first past the post does not manufacture a majority where competition is multi-cornered and support regionally concentrated; and India's diversity produces regional and sectional parties.
  2. Kinds: pre-poll alliance, post-poll coalition, outside support, and the minority government which is not a coalition at all.
  3. Phases: dominance at the Union with coalitions first appearing in the States; the first non-Congress Union governments; the era of coalitions from the late 1980s to the mid 2010s, including two alliances that governed for a decade each; and a return to single-party majorities with alliances maintained.
  4. What makes them work: a common minimum programme, a coordination committee, a fair distribution of portfolios, an acceptable leader, and restraint on the largest party.
  5. What makes them fail: no shared programme, withdrawal by a partner, outside support, portfolio disputes, and partners who compete against each other in a State.
  6. For: wider representation, restraint on the largest party, stronger federalism, and consultation. Against: instability, paralysis, disproportionate bargaining power, blurred accountability, and the absent mandate of a post-poll combination.
  7. The Tenth Schedule made coalitions more durable, because the arrangement can now be broken only by a party acting as a party, which is public and attributable.

Test yourself

1. Why does coalition government arise in India? Because articles 75(3) and 164(2) make the Council of Ministers collectively responsible to the House, so a government must command a majority continuously, and where no single party has one several must combine. First past the post manufactures majorities only where competition is between two parties; where it is multi-cornered and support is regionally concentrated it produces neither a majority nor proportionality. And India's divisions of language, religion, caste and region produce parties whose support is regional or sectional and which can win seats without approaching a majority.

2. Distinguish the kinds of coalition. A pre-poll alliance is formed before the election with seats distributed among partners and often a common programme and declared leader, so the voter knew the combination and its claim to a mandate is strong. A post-poll coalition is assembled after the results, and the standing objection is that the voter never chose it. Outside support is where a party sustains the government by voting with it without joining the Council of Ministers, which gives influence without responsibility and is the least stable arrangement. A minority government is not a coalition at all but survives on issue by issue support.

munotes.in420

Coalition Politics in India

3. What devices make Indian coalitions work? A common minimum programme, a written statement of what the coalition will do, which confines the government to agreed ground and prevents every question being reopened; this is the most important device Indian coalitions developed. A coordination committee of the partners, meeting regularly, which settles disputes before they reach the House. A distribution of portfolios the partners regard as fair, usually in proportion to seats. A leader acceptable to all, which often means somebody who was nobody's first choice. And restraint by the largest party, which is the price of office.

4. State the arguments for and against coalition government. For: it represents a larger share of the electorate than a single party with a plurality; it restrains the largest party, since policies that cannot survive negotiation are dropped; it strengthens federalism by carrying regional parties and State concerns into national decisions; and it produces consultation, since nothing passes without agreement. Against: instability, since withdrawal by one partner can bring the government down; policy paralysis on contentious measures; bargaining power out of all proportion to size for a party holding the balance; blurred accountability, since no party is clearly responsible for failure; and the absence of a mandate where the combination was assembled after the poll.

5. How did the Tenth Schedule affect coalitions? It made them substantially more durable. Before 1985 a coalition could be broken by individual legislators crossing the floor, so any government with a thin majority was continuously vulnerable to inducement of its own members. After 1985 a member who votes against the party's direction on a confidence motion is liable to disqualification, so the arrangement can be broken only by a partner withdrawing as a party, which is a public act attributable to an identifiable body. That is why coalitions in the era after the Amendment lasted longer than those before it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in421

Chapter Eighty-One

The Future of the Multi-Party System in India

Syllabus topic 4.1.3, "Coalition Politics and Future of Multi- Party System in India"

In one line

Whether India remains a multi-party system depends on whether regional parties keep their hold on States, on how party finance is regulated, and on how the recognition rules operate, and there are strong arguments both ways.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the future of the multi-party system in India is contested; the case for its continuance rests on the country's linguistic, regional and social diversity, on the entrenchment of regional parties in State politics, and on the federal structure which gives them a permanent arena; the case for a return to a dominant party system rests on the advantages of scale in finance, organisation and communication, on the consolidation of votes behind national parties, and on the difficulty small parties face in meeting the thresholds for recognition.

What a multi-party system is, and what India has

A multi-party system exists where more than two parties are capable of winning seats and of participating in government, so that a single party's majority is not the normal expectation.

A dominant party system exists where many parties compete but one wins repeatedly, so that competition is real and alternation is rare.

A two-party system exists where two parties alternate and others are marginal. The standard examples are the United States, where the Democrats and the Republicans alternate and no third party has won the presidency in more than a century, and the United Kingdom, where Labour and the Conservatives have formed every government since the nineteen twenties. MU has asked for two such countries by name, so learn a pair.

India has been all three at different times, and describing which is which is the first task of an answer.

The first two decades: a dominant party system at the Union with genuine competition inside the dominant party and multi-party competition in several States.

From the late 1960s to the 1980s: increasing competition, the first alternations, and the growth of State parties.

From the late 1980s to the mid 2010s: a genuine multi-party system in which no party won a majority at the Union.

Since then: single-party majorities at the Union with the multi-party structure intact beneath them, since States continue to be governed by parties that do not compete nationally.

That last observation is the key to the whole question. India's party system is not one system but two: a system at the Union and a system in each State, and they need not be the same shape at the same time.

The case for the multi-party system continuing

1. Diversity has not diminished. The languages, regions, religions and castes that produced regional and community parties are still there, and no party that must appeal across all of them can be everybody's first preference.

munotes.in422

The Future of the Multi-Party System in India

2. Federalism supplies a permanent arena. A party that cannot win a national majority can govern a State, control substantial resources and patronage, and continue indefinitely. That is a structural guarantee no dominant national party can remove, and it is the strongest single argument.

3. State elections are decided on State issues. Voters have repeatedly given different verdicts in national and State elections held close together, which shows they distinguish the two arenas.

4. Regional parties are entrenched organisationally. They have cadres, established leaderships, alliances with social groups and decades of incumbency.

5. Social mobilisation continues. Groups that have not yet obtained political representation continue to organise, and new parties continue to be formed.

6. Coalitions have proved they can work. Two long-lived alliances governed for a decade each, which removed the argument that multi-party government is inherently unstable.

The case for consolidation towards a dominant party system

1. Scale in finance. Elections are expensive, and a party that can raise resources nationally can outspend a State party in every State at once. Chapter 860 shows why the law on funding matters to this question.

2. Scale in communication. National media and, increasingly, centrally organised digital campaigning favour parties operating at national scale.

3. Nationalisation of issues. Where an election is fought on national questions, a national party has the advantage, and State parties are pushed to define themselves in relation to it.

4. First past the post rewards consolidation. A national party that becomes the leading choice in a State converts a plurality of votes into a large majority of seats, and the effect compounds.

5. The recognition thresholds. Recognition under the Symbols Order requires a minimum performance in seats and votes, so a party that falls below it loses its symbol and much of its capacity to compete, which accelerates decline once it begins.

6. Defection and absorption. Legislators and leaders move towards the party in office, and the Tenth Schedule's exceptions for mergers permit whole groups to move.

The factors that will actually decide it

An answer that identifies the variables rather than predicting the outcome is what the question is asking for.

Whether State elections stay separate. If national and State elections continue to be held at different times and decided on different issues, regional parties survive. Any change that fuses the two arenas would work strongly against them, which is why proposals to hold simultaneous elections are relevant to this topic and not merely administrative.

How party finance is regulated. Rules that favour large national fundraising favour national parties; rules that cap and equalise do not.

Whether the recognition thresholds are applied strictly or relaxed.

munotes.in423

The Future of the Multi-Party System in India

Whether social mobilisation continues to produce new parties, or whether existing parties absorb new groups.

Whether coalitions continue to deliver stable government, since instability is the strongest argument against a multi-party system.

And the independence of the Election Commission, since the rules on symbols, recognition and disqualification are administered by it, and their administration affects who can compete.

A worked example

A State party has governed its State for fifteen years. At the last national election its vote fell by eight points while it held its State assembly seats. Its founder has died and the leadership has passed to a son.

The arguments that it will survive. It holds the State government, with the resources and patronage that brings; State elections are decided on State issues on which it has a record; its organisation and its social alliances are intact; and it retains its symbol.

The arguments that it will decline. Its national vote is falling, which reduces its bargaining value in any Union coalition; a leadership succession within a family is exactly where such parties fracture; if it loses one State election it loses the resources that sustain it; and if its vote falls below the recognition threshold it loses the symbol, which makes recovery much harder.

What would settle it. Whether it wins the next State election. That is not evasion; it is the correct answer, because the party system's shape is determined in the States and the State is where this party's existence is decided.

Distinctions that carry marks

Dominant party systemMulti-party systemTwo-party system
Number capable of governingSeveral compete, one wins repeatedlySeveralTwo
AlternationRareFrequent, often by coalitionRegular
Government formed byOne partyUsually a coalitionOne party
Indian periodThe first two decades at the UnionLate 1980s to mid 2010sPresent in some States
FactorFavours multi-partyFavours consolidation
DiversityYes
Federal arena and separate State electionsYes, decisively
Scale in financeYes
National media and digital campaigningYes
First past the postWhere support is regionally concentratedWhere a national party becomes the leading choice
Recognition thresholdsYes
Continuing social mobilisationYes
Simultaneous elections, if adoptedYes, strongly

What this topic is NOT

It is not a request for a prediction. The question asks about the future of a system, and the marks are in the argument and the identification of the variables.

Single-party majorities at the Union do not end the multi-party system. The States are a separate arena and continue to be governed by parties that do not compete nationally.

A large number of registered parties is not a multi-party system. Most registered parties never win a seat. What matters is how many are capable of governing.

munotes.in424

The Future of the Multi-Party System in India

And the question is not only about parties. It is about federalism, about election finance, and about the administration of the recognition rules, which is why an answer confined to describing parties is thin.

Quick revision

  1. Three systems: dominant party, multi-party, two-party. India has been all three, and is currently a Union-level single-party majority sitting on a multi-party structure in the States.
  2. India's party system is two systems: one at the Union and one in each State, and they need not have the same shape at the same time.
  3. For continuance: diversity persists; federalism supplies a permanent arena; State elections are decided on State issues; regional parties are organisationally entrenched; social mobilisation continues; and coalitions have proved they can be stable.
  4. For consolidation: scale in finance and in communication; the nationalisation of issues; first past the post compounding a plurality into a large seat majority; the recognition thresholds; and absorption of leaders and groups.
  5. The deciding variables: whether State elections stay separate, how party finance is regulated, how the thresholds are applied, whether new parties keep forming, whether coalitions stay stable, and the independence of the Election Commission.
  6. Simultaneous elections, if adopted, would work strongly against the multi-party system, which is why the proposal belongs in this topic.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish a multi-party system from a dominant party system, and place India. A multi-party system exists where more than two parties can win seats and participate in government, so a single-party majority is not the normal expectation. A dominant party system exists where many parties compete but one wins repeatedly, so competition is real and alternation is rare. India was a dominant party system at the Union for its first two decades, a genuine multi-party system from the late 1980s to the mid 2010s when no party won a Union majority, and is now a Union-level single-party majority resting on a multi-party structure in the States.

2. What is the strongest argument that the multi-party system will continue? Federalism. A party that cannot win a national majority can nonetheless govern a State, control substantial resources and patronage, and continue indefinitely, and no dominant national party can remove that arena. It is reinforced by the fact that State elections are decided on State issues, voters having repeatedly given different verdicts in national and State elections held close together, which shows that they distinguish the two arenas rather than voting the same way in both.

3. What is the strongest argument for consolidation? Scale, principally in finance. Elections are expensive, and a party able to raise resources nationally can outspend a State party in every State simultaneously, while national media and centrally organised digital campaigning reinforce the same advantage. First past the post then compounds it: a national party which becomes the leading choice in a State converts a plurality of votes into a large majority of seats, and once a party's vote falls below the recognition thresholds it loses its symbol and much of its capacity to compete, which accelerates decline.

munotes.in425

The Future of the Multi-Party System in India

4. Which variables will decide the question? Whether national and State elections continue to be held separately and decided on different issues, since fusing the arenas would work strongly against regional parties. How party finance is regulated, since rules favouring large national fundraising favour national parties. Whether recognition thresholds are applied strictly. Whether social mobilisation continues to produce new parties or existing parties absorb new groups. Whether coalitions continue to deliver stable government. And the independence of the Election Commission, which administers the rules on symbols, recognition and disqualification.

5. Why is the proposal for simultaneous elections relevant to this topic? Because it would fuse the two arenas on which the multi-party system depends. Regional parties survive because State elections are held at different times and decided on State issues and records, so a voter can support a national party at the Union and a State party in the State. Holding both together would make it far more likely that a single national campaign, on national issues, determined both results, which would work strongly against parties whose appeal is regional. It is therefore not merely an administrative reform but a change in the structure of party competition.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in426

Chapter Eighty-Three

The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.2, "Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy"

In one line

A democracy needs an educated and participating citizenry, a measure of economic security, tolerance and the acceptance of dissent, independent institutions that hold rulers to the rules, and an opposition ready to take office.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the success of democracy requires social conditions, principally an educated citizenry, a spirit of tolerance and a willingness to accept dissent and the verdict of the electorate; economic conditions, principally a level of security and a limitation of inequality sufficient to make political equality real; and institutional conditions, principally free and fair elections, an independent judiciary and election commission, a free press, the rule of law, an organised opposition, effective local government and a neutral administration.

The social conditions

Education. A voter must be able to obtain and assess information about candidates and policies, which is the practical form of the right to know at chapter 820. It is why article 21A now makes free and compulsory education a fundamental right, and it is what Mill and Ambedkar both insisted on.

Tolerance and the acceptance of dissent. A democracy asks a defeated group to accept a decision it opposes and to continue to work within the system. That is only possible where disagreement is not treated as disloyalty. Where it is, elections become contests to be won at any cost.

Acceptance of the electoral verdict. The single most important habit, and the least noticed. A democracy survives because losers concede.

A sense of common citizenship. Where the divisions of a society are so deep that a group regards a government drawn from another group as illegitimate in principle, the arithmetic of elections cannot hold the society together.

Public spirit and participation. Voting, joining associations, attending meetings, and the willingness to hold office.

The economic conditions

Security of subsistence. A person whose next meal is uncertain cannot deliberate, cannot afford to offend a patron and cannot risk the loss of work that political activity may bring. This is chapter 590's positive liberty applied to democracy.

Limitation of inequality. Political equality does not survive severe economic inequality, because influence follows resources. Ambedkar's warning at chapter 600 is the sharpest Indian statement of this, and it is properly placed here rather than treated as a slogan.

And the honest qualification. India adopted universal adult franchise at once, in a poor and largely illiterate society, and the experiment worked better than almost anybody predicted. Any answer which says that prosperity and literacy are preconditions must confront that fact, and the correct formulation is that they make democracy easier and are not conditions precedent.

The institutional conditions

Free and fair elections, held at fixed intervals, on a universal adult franchise, by secret ballot, conducted by an authority independent of the government.

munotes.in432

The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy

An independent judiciary, able to hold the government to the law and to protect rights against a majority.

An independent election commission, since the body that conducts the election decides in practice who may compete. Article 324 vests the superintendence, direction and control of elections in the Election Commission, and chapter 900's State Election Commissions perform the same function for local bodies.

Freedom of speech, press and association, without which the voter cannot know and the opposition cannot organise.

The rule of law, so that power is exercised through known general rules applied by independent courts, which is chapter 190's legal rational authority in constitutional form.

An organised opposition, ready to take office. Where there is no alternative, an election offers no choice.

A neutral administration and armed forces, serving whichever government is elected.

Effective local government, which is where most citizens actually encounter public power and where participation is possible, and which is chapters 900 to 920.

A federal or decentralised structure, in a large and diverse country, so that defeat at the centre is not total exclusion.

Which conditions carry the rest

An answer that ranks is much stronger than one that lists, and two conditions do most of the work.

The acceptance of defeat. Every institution above can exist on paper and fail if those who lose an election will not hand over. Conversely, where losers concede, a great deal else can be repaired.

Independent institutions with the power to say no. Elections alone do not make a democracy, because a government that controls the courts, the election commission and the press can win elections indefinitely. The condition is not that these institutions exist but that they are able to rule against the government of the day and be obeyed.

And the two are connected. Independent institutions are what make defeat survivable, because a party out of office retains its rights, its property and its liberty, and can expect to compete again. Where losing office means prosecution and ruin, nobody concedes.

Testing the conditions against India

MU's question is about success, so the honest thing is to test the list against the case the student lives in.

What India had, at the outset, that helped. A constitution with enforceable rights and an independent judiciary; a national movement that had accustomed a large population to organised political activity; and a leadership committed to constitutional methods.

What India lacked. Literacy, prosperity, and any historical experience of universal franchise.

What happened. Elections have been held at regular intervals for over seventy years; governments have been defeated and have handed over, at the Union and in the States, repeatedly; the franchise has been extended in practice as much as in law, with turnout among poorer voters frequently exceeding that among the well off; and social groups excluded for centuries have obtained office.

munotes.in433

The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy

Where the conditions have been under strain. The Emergency, when elections were postponed and rights suspended, which is chapter 850's material; the criminalisation of politics and the influence of money, which is chapter 840; and pressure on independent institutions, which is chapter 860.

The conclusion an answer should reach. The Indian experience shows that literacy and prosperity are not preconditions, and that acceptance of defeat and institutional independence are. That is a real contribution to the theory and not merely a national observation.

A worked example

Two countries hold elections on the same day. Both have universal suffrage, secret ballots, several parties and a written constitution.

In the first, the governing party loses, concedes within a day, and hands over. The former ministers become the opposition, retain their seats, criticise the new government in the House, and expect to contest again.

In the second, the governing party loses narrowly, alleges fraud, the election commission's members are its own appointees and decline to certify the result, the courts defer, and the outgoing ministers are told that prosecutions await them if they leave office.

The formal conditions are identical. Suffrage, ballot, parties, constitution.

What differs is the two that carry the rest. In the second country nobody can afford to lose, and the institutions that would have made losing survivable are not independent. The election is real and the democracy is not.

That is the answer to MU's question in one example: the conditions essential for the success of democracy are not the visible machinery but what makes the machinery's verdict acceptable to the side that loses.

Distinctions that carry marks

GroupConditionsWhat fails without it
SocialEducation; tolerance; acceptance of the verdict; common citizenship; participationThe verdict is contested; disagreement becomes disloyalty
EconomicSecurity of subsistence; limitation of inequalityPolitical equality becomes formal; the poor are unable to participate
InstitutionalFree and fair elections; independent judiciary and election commission; free press; rule of law; organised opposition; neutral administration; effective local government; decentralisationElections continue and stop deciding anything
Necessary conditionsHelpful but not necessary
Established by the Indian experienceAcceptance of defeat; independent institutions; free press; organised oppositionLiteracy; prosperity; a long prior experience of self-government

What this topic is NOT

It is not a list. Group the conditions, rank them, and test them, or the answer is a catalogue.

It is not the claim that poor countries cannot be democracies. India refutes it, and saying so is the most useful thing an Indian student can contribute here.

munotes.in434

The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy

Elections are not sufficient. A government that controls the courts, the commission and the press can hold elections indefinitely and lose none.

And the conditions are not permanent achievements. They are maintained continuously or they decay, which is what chapter 840 is about.

Quick revision

  1. Social: education; tolerance and acceptance of dissent; acceptance of the electoral verdict; a sense of common citizenship; participation.
  2. Economic: security of subsistence; limitation of inequality, since political equality does not survive severe economic inequality.
  3. Institutional: free and fair elections; an independent judiciary; an independent election commission under article 324; freedom of speech, press and association; the rule of law; an organised opposition; a neutral administration; effective local government; and decentralisation.
  4. Two conditions carry the rest: the acceptance of defeat, and independent institutions able to rule against the government and be obeyed. They are connected, because independence is what makes defeat survivable.
  5. The Indian test: literacy and prosperity are not preconditions, as India's adoption of universal adult franchise in a poor and largely illiterate society showed; acceptance of defeat and institutional independence are.
  6. The conditions are maintained or they decay, which is chapter 840.

Test yourself

1. Group the conditions essential for the success of democracy. Social conditions: education sufficient to obtain and assess information, tolerance and acceptance of dissent, acceptance of the electoral verdict, a sense of common citizenship, and public participation. Economic conditions: security of subsistence, since a person whose livelihood is precarious cannot deliberate or risk offending a patron, and a limitation of inequality, since political equality does not survive severe economic inequality. Institutional conditions: free and fair elections at fixed intervals on universal adult franchise, an independent judiciary and election commission, freedom of speech, press and association, the rule of law, an organised opposition, a neutral administration, effective local government and decentralisation.

2. Which two conditions carry the rest, and why? The acceptance of defeat and the independence of institutions able to rule against the government and be obeyed. Every other condition can exist on paper and fail if those who lose an election will not hand over, and elections continue to be held in states where the government controls the courts, the commission and the press and therefore never loses. The two are connected: independent institutions are what make defeat survivable, since a party out of office keeps its rights, property and liberty and can expect to compete again, whereas where losing office means prosecution and ruin nobody concedes.

3. Are literacy and prosperity preconditions of democracy? No, and the Indian experience is the evidence. India adopted universal adult franchise at once, in a society that was poor and largely illiterate and had no prior experience of it, and elections have been held at regular intervals for over seventy years, governments have been defeated and have handed over repeatedly at the Union and in the States, turnout among poorer voters has frequently exceeded that among the well off, and groups excluded for centuries have obtained office. Literacy and prosperity make democracy easier; they are not conditions precedent, and an answer claiming otherwise must confront the Indian case.

munotes.in435

The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy

4. Why is an organised opposition a condition and not a by-product? Because without an alternative ready to take office an election offers no choice, and the government's accountability becomes theoretical. An opposition performs three functions no other body performs: it scrutinises, forcing the government to explain; it presents an alternative programme, which is what makes the vote a decision rather than a ratification; and it stands ready to govern, which is what makes the threat of defeat real. Where the opposition is disorganised, prosecuted or absorbed, elections continue to be held and cease to decide anything.

5. How should the Indian experience be used in an answer on this topic? As a test of the list rather than as an illustration of it. India had a constitution with enforceable rights, an independent judiciary, a population accustomed to organised political activity by the national movement, and a leadership committed to constitutional methods; it lacked literacy, prosperity and any prior experience of universal franchise. The record of regular elections, repeated alternations of government, high participation among the poor and the entry into office of long excluded groups establishes which conditions are truly necessary. The strains, in the Emergency, in the criminalisation of politics and the influence of money, and in pressure on independent institutions, show which conditions must be continuously maintained.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in436

Chapter Eighty-Four

The Ethical Decay of Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.3, "Ethical Decay of Democracy"

In one line

Ethical decay is what happens when the forms of democracy are kept and the substance is hollowed out, so that elections continue while the things that made them meaningful are removed one at a time.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the ethical decay of democracy refers to the erosion of the moral and institutional conditions on which democratic government depends, while its outward forms are preserved; its principal manifestations are the criminalisation of politics, the dominance of money in elections, defection and the trade in legislators, the capture or weakening of institutions meant to hold rulers to the rules, the decline of deliberation in legislatures, the use of communal and caste appeals, and the manipulation of information.

What is being claimed, and what is not

The claim is not that politicians are dishonest, which is a complaint about individuals and is made in every country and every century.

The claim is not that the machinery has been abolished. Elections are held, legislatures sit and courts function.

The claim is that the conditions at chapter 830 are being eroded while the machinery continues, so that an election ceases to perform the functions that made it a means of consent. That is a structural claim, it can be tested, and stating it in that form is the difference between an answer and a complaint.

The manifestations

1. Criminalisation of politics

Candidates and legislators against whom serious criminal cases are pending, and in some cases who have been convicted.

Why it is decay rather than crime. A person facing serious charges is not disqualified until convicted, and trials take many years, so the position is lawful and the effect is corrosive. It also alters the incentives of everybody else, because a candidate who can deter opponents has an advantage that has nothing to do with the electorate.

What the law has done. The disclosure requirement in Union of India v. Association for Democratic Reforms, (2002) 5 SCC 294, is the principal remedy: the voter has a right to know the antecedents of a candidate, derived from article 19(1)(a), because the casting of a vote is an expression of opinion and a meaningful choice requires information, and the Election Commission was directed under article 324 to require affidavits on pending cases and convictions, on assets and liabilities of the candidate, spouse and dependants, and on educational qualifications. The remedy is disclosure, which leaves the decision to the voter.

2. Money

The cost of contesting has risen far beyond what an ordinary candidate can raise, which restricts who can stand, makes parties dependent on contributors, and creates an expectation of return. Chapter 860 sets out the electoral bonds judgment, which is the constitutional treatment of it.

munotes.in437

The Ethical Decay of Democracy

3. Defection and the trade in legislators

The Tenth Schedule was enacted precisely as a remedy for ethical decay, and it is worth putting it here rather than only at chapter 780. Kihoto Hollohan v. Zachillhu, 1992 Supp (2) SCC 651, upheld paragraph 2 as salutary and intended to strengthen the fabric of Indian parliamentary democracy by curbing unprincipled and unethical political defections, which is the Supreme Court naming the problem in MU's own vocabulary.

And the decay adapted. Resignation in numbers followed by re-election on another party's ticket, delayed decisions by Speakers, and mergers within the Schedule's exceptions have reproduced much of what the Amendment was enacted to stop, which is why the Court's identification of the Speaker as a tribunal subject to judicial review matters practically.

4. Weakening of the institutions that say no

The conditions at chapter 830 depend on bodies able to rule against the government and be obeyed: courts, the election commission, the audit institution, the information commissions and the investigating agencies. Decay here takes the form of appointments, of resources, of the timing of decisions and of the treatment of officials who decide inconveniently, none of which requires any rule to be broken.

5. The decline of deliberation

Legislatures sitting for fewer days, bills passed without committee scrutiny or after brief debate, the use of money bills to avoid a second chamber, and adjournments. The Tenth Schedule contributes, because a member whose vote is fixed by a whip has little reason to be persuaded and none to persuade. Chapter 780 sets out the cost.

6. Communal and caste appeals

Mobilisation by religion or caste in place of programme, which converts an election from a choice between policies into a census of communities and makes the losing group's position permanent rather than temporary. This is the condition at chapter 830 of a sense of common citizenship failing.

7. Manipulation of information

Chapter 860's material: coordinated disinformation, the concentration of media ownership, and the use of platforms to target messages that nobody else sees, so that different voters are addressed with inconsistent claims and no common set of facts survives.

Why the decay is hard to resist

Each step is lawful. Nothing in the list requires a rule to be broken, which is what makes it decay rather than crime.

Each step benefits whoever is in office, and the remedy must be enacted by those who benefit.

The forms remain, so the appearance of democracy is preserved and criticism sounds exaggerated.

And the ratchet. A party that suffers from the decay while in opposition uses the same instruments when it wins, because unilateral restraint is costly.

munotes.in438

The Ethical Decay of Democracy

What resists it

Disclosure, which is the Indian courts' preferred remedy, in the 2002 decision and again in the electoral bonds judgment. It does not prohibit; it makes the fact known and leaves the decision to the voter.

Judicial review, including of a Speaker's decision under the Tenth Schedule for illegality or perversity.

An independent election commission exercising powers under article 324.

A free press and independent research, since almost everything known about criminalisation and funding comes from organisations that compile and publish it.

Federalism, because a party defeated at the Union governs States and retains the capacity to resist.

And the voter. Disclosure works only if it changes votes, and the evidence about whether it does is mixed. That is an uncomfortable finding and an answer should include it: the courts have supplied information and the electorate has not always acted on it.

A worked example

A party wins a State election with 42 per cent of the vote and 55 per cent of the seats. Consider four things that then happen, none of which is unlawful.

It appoints as Speaker a member who then declines to decide a defection petition against eight legislators who have supported the government. No rule is broken. The Court's remedy exists, and the term may expire before it is exercised.

It passes its budget and eleven other bills in six sitting days without committee reference. Lawful, and deliberation has been removed.

It funds its campaign through instruments whose donors are not disclosed. Lawful until the scheme permitting it is struck down, which is chapter 860.

It appoints to the State Information Commission and to the State Election Commission persons who have served the party. Lawful, subject to the statutory qualifications.

Nothing here is a scandal, and that is the point. A student asked about ethical decay should be able to show that the erosion is composed of lawful acts, each defensible on its own, whose combined effect is that the conditions in chapter 830 no longer hold. That is a much stronger answer than a list of scandals.

Distinctions that carry marks

CorruptionEthical decay
Is a rule broken?YesUsually not
Located inIndividuals and transactionsInstitutions and practices
Detected byInvestigation and prosecutionComparison with the conditions of democracy over time
RemedyCriminal lawDisclosure, institutional independence, and the voter
Visible?When exposedGradual, and each step looks defensible
ManifestationThe condition it erodesThe principal Indian remedy
CriminalisationFree and fair choiceDisclosure, the 2002 ADR case
MoneyPolitical equalityDisclosure; the electoral bonds judgment
DefectionAccountability to the voterTenth Schedule, and review of the Speaker
Capture of institutionsInstitutions able to say noJudicial review; appointments reform
Decline of deliberationGovernment by discussionCommittee scrutiny; sitting days
Communal and caste appealsCommon citizenshipElectoral law; the courts
DisinformationThe voter's right to knowDisclosure; platform regulation
munotes.in439

The Ethical Decay of Democracy

What ethical decay is NOT

It is not corruption. Corruption breaks rules; decay does not.

It is not the failure of democracy. The claim is precisely that the forms survive, which is what makes it hard to resist.

It is not confined to India. The phenomena on the list are discussed in most democracies, and treating them as an Indian peculiarity misdescribes them.

And it is not irreversible. The Tenth Schedule, the disclosure requirement and the electoral bonds judgment are all instances of the decay being resisted from inside the system.

Quick revision

  1. The claim: the forms are kept and the conditions at chapter 830 are eroded, so an election continues while ceasing to perform its function. Structural, testable, and not a complaint about individuals.
  2. Seven manifestations: criminalisation; money; defection; weakening of the institutions that say no; the decline of deliberation; communal and caste appeals; and manipulation of information.
  3. Union of India v. Association for Democratic Reforms, (2002) 5 SCC 294: right to know under article 19(1)(a); affidavits directed under article 324 on criminal cases, assets and liabilities and educational qualifications. The remedy is disclosure.
  4. Kihoto Hollohan, 1992 Supp (2) SCC 651: paragraph 2 is salutary and intended to strengthen the fabric of Indian parliamentary democracy by curbing unprincipled and unethical political defections, which is the Court using MU's own vocabulary.
  5. Why it is hard to resist: every step is lawful; each benefits whoever must enact the remedy; the forms remain; and unilateral restraint is costly, so the decay ratchets.
  6. What resists it: disclosure, judicial review, an independent election commission, a free press, federalism, and ultimately the voter, whose response to disclosure has been mixed.

Test yourself

1. What exactly is claimed by the phrase ethical decay of democracy? Not that politicians are dishonest, which is a complaint about individuals made everywhere, and not that the machinery has been abolished, since elections are held and legislatures sit. The claim is that the conditions on which democratic government depends are being eroded while its outward forms are preserved, so that an election continues to be held and ceases to perform the functions that made it a means by which the governed consent. It is a structural claim about institutions and practices rather than about particular scandals, and it can be tested by comparing the conditions over time.

2. Set out the principal manifestations. The criminalisation of politics, with candidates and legislators facing serious pending charges. The dominance of money, which restricts who can stand and makes parties dependent on contributors. Defection and the trade in legislators. The weakening of the institutions able to rule against the government, through appointments, resources, timing and the treatment of officials. The decline of deliberation, with fewer sitting days and bills passed without scrutiny. Communal and caste appeals in place of programme. And the manipulation of information through disinformation, concentrated media ownership and targeted messaging.

munotes.in440

The Ethical Decay of Democracy

3. Distinguish ethical decay from corruption. Corruption breaks a rule, is located in individuals and transactions, is detected by investigation and answered by the criminal law. Ethical decay usually breaks no rule at all: each step is lawful and separately defensible, it is located in institutions and practices rather than in transactions, it is detected only by comparing the conditions of democracy over time, and its remedies are disclosure, institutional independence and the response of the voter. That is why decay is harder to resist than corruption, and why an answer built on a list of scandals misses the subject.

4. What has Indian law done about it, and what is the pattern of the remedy? The pattern is disclosure rather than prohibition. In the 2002 Association for Democratic Reforms case the Court held that the voter has a right under article 19(1)(a) to know a candidate's antecedents and directed the Election Commission, under article 324, to require affidavits on pending criminal cases and convictions, on assets and liabilities of the candidate, spouse and dependants, and on educational qualifications. The Tenth Schedule addressed defection, and Kihoto Hollohan upheld it as salutary and as curbing unprincipled and unethical political defections while making the Speaker's decision reviewable for illegality or perversity. The electoral bonds judgment applied the same disclosure reasoning to party funding.

5. Why is ethical decay difficult to resist? Because every step in it is lawful, so there is nothing to prosecute and criticism sounds exaggerated. Because each step benefits whoever is in office, and the remedy must be enacted by those who benefit from its absence. Because the outward forms are preserved, so the appearance of democracy continues and the erosion is gradual. And because of a ratchet: a party that suffers from the decay while in opposition uses the same instruments once it wins, since unilateral restraint is costly and unrewarded.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in441

Chapter Eighty-Five

The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.4, "Challenges to Indian Democracy - Old and New"

In one line

The challenges India began with were poverty, illiteracy, caste, communalism, regionalism, the centre's power to dismiss State governments, and the possibility that a government could suspend the Constitution from inside, and the last two were answered by cases and the first five have not been answered at all.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the older challenges to Indian democracy are the social and economic conditions with which it began, namely mass poverty, illiteracy and extreme inequality; the divisions of caste, religion, language and region, which threatened both the working of elections and the unity of the country; the misuse of central power to dismiss State governments under article 356; and the demonstrated possibility that a government could suspend rights and postpone elections while remaining formally lawful, which occurred during the Emergency.

Why "old" is a defensible category

They were present from 1950. Each was identified in the Constituent Assembly and by the leadership of the time as a threat to the arrangement being adopted.

They arose from India's social and constitutional structure, not from any later development.

And most of them persist. The point of the category is not that they are past but that they are original, which is why an answer must not say that the old challenges have been overcome.

The challenges

1. Poverty and economic inequality

The problem. A democracy adopted in a society where most people lacked subsistence, in which the conditions at chapter 830 for real political equality were absent.

Why it threatens democracy. A person dependent for their livelihood on a landlord, an employer or a patron cannot vote freely, cannot afford to protest and cannot risk the loss of work. Ambedkar's warning at chapter 600 is the classical Indian statement.

What was done. The Directive Principles, land reform legislation, and later welfare and employment programmes, which chapter 710 examined.

Where it stands. Poverty has fallen very substantially and inequality has not, and the second is what bears on democracy.

2. Illiteracy

Why it threatens democracy. A voter who cannot read cannot check a claim, cannot read a manifesto or an affidavit, and is dependent on intermediaries.

What was done. Universal schooling as a directive, symbols on ballot papers so that illiteracy did not disenfranchise anybody, and eventually article 21A.

What is worth noticing, because it corrects a widespread assumption: turnout among poorer and less literate voters in India has frequently exceeded turnout among the well educated and prosperous. Illiteracy limited what a voter could check and did not prevent them from voting.

3. Caste

The problem. A hierarchy of birth in a system founded on the equality of persons, and the most fundamental of the old challenges.

munotes.in442

The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy

Two ways it bears on democracy. As exclusion, keeping whole groups out of public life; and as mobilisation, organising votes by community rather than by programme, which chapter 840 treats as decay.

What was done. Abolition of untouchability, reservation of seats in legislatures and of posts in public employment, and later reservation in local bodies at chapter 940.

The honest assessment. Caste has not disappeared and its political effect has changed direction: it excluded groups from power for a very long time, and it has more recently been the vehicle by which some of them obtained it.

4. Communalism

The problem. The organisation of politics by religious community, which India experienced at its most destructive at Partition.

Why it threatens democracy. It converts an election from a choice of policies into a count of communities, so a permanent minority can never win and has no reason to accept the result. It attacks the condition at chapter 830 of common citizenship.

What was done. A secular constitutional structure, freedom of religion, prohibition of discrimination, and the treatment of appeals to religion in elections as a corrupt practice.

And the judicial statement. In S. R. Bommai v. Union of India, (1994) 3 SCC 1, several judges of a bench of nine held that secularism is a basic feature of the Constitution, observing that by the Forty-second Amendment what had been implicit was made explicit.

5. Regionalism and linguistic division

The problem. A country of many languages and strong regional identities, with movements for separate States and, in places, for separation.

What was done. Linguistic reorganisation of States, a federal structure, the language provisions, and the accommodation of regional parties in national coalitions, which chapter 800 treated as one of the benefits of coalition government.

The assessment. This is the challenge India has handled best. Accommodation rather than suppression has kept regional demands inside the constitutional system, and the survival of regional parties at chapter 810 is part of the same fact.

6. Misuse of central power over the States

The problem. Article 356 permits the President, on a Governor's report or otherwise, to assume the functions of a State government. It was used many times, and repeatedly against governments whose only difficulty was that they were of a different party from the Union government.

Facts and holding. S. R. Bommai v. Union of India, (1994) 3 SCC 1, arose out of several proclamations under article 356 dissolving Assemblies, and required the Court to consider the scope of the power, the role of Governors and the extent of judicial review, with reference to articles 74(2), 163, 355 and 357. The Court held that a proclamation is subject to judicial review, that the power is conditional and the President's satisfaction must rest on relevant material, and that the proper test of whether a Ministry retains confidence is a floor test in the House. A proclamation is therefore liable to be struck down where President's rule is imposed without exploring the possibility of an alternative government commanding support or ordering fresh elections, and where a Governor, despite the advice of a Ministry that has not been defeated on the floor of the House, declines to dissolve the Assembly and recommends its supersession on a merely subjective assessment.

munotes.in443

The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy

Why it matters. It converted the dismissal of a State government from a political instrument into a legal question, and the frequency of such dismissals fell sharply afterwards.

7. The Emergency, and the demonstration that the Constitution could be used against itself

The problem. Between 1975 and 1977 an emergency was proclaimed, fundamental rights were suspended, opposition leaders were detained, the press was censored and elections were postponed. None of this was done outside the Constitution; the machinery permitted it.

The constitutional amendment that accompanied it. The Thirty-ninth Amendment inserted article 329A, clause (4) of which declared that an election of a person holding the office of Prime Minister, which a court had declared void, should continue to be valid and that the court's order and findings should be deemed always to have been void.

Facts and holding. Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, 1975 Supp SCC 1, is set out at chapter 230. The Court struck down clause (4) in its entirety: democracy is a basic feature and free and fair elections are part of that democratic structure, so a provision declaring valid an election which a court had found invalid for corrupt practices destroyed an essential feature; and the constituent power, being legislative in nature, cannot exercise judicial power by validating one election without laying down any law.

What followed. The government was defeated at the election of 1977 and handed over, which is the acceptance of defeat at chapter 830 operating at the hardest possible moment; and the Forty-fourth Amendment tightened the conditions for proclaiming an emergency, requiring armed rebellion rather than internal disturbance and a written recommendation of the Cabinet.

The Emergency is the most important item on this list for an answer, because it is the only occasion on which the whole arrangement was suspended, and because the way it ended is the strongest evidence about Indian democracy that exists.

A worked example

A State government of a party opposed to the Union is dismissed, the Assembly is dissolved, and the Governor's report says the Ministry has lost the confidence of the House.

munotes.in444

The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy

Before 1994 the question would have been political. The proclamation would have been laid before Parliament, where the Union government had a majority, and there was no effective remedy.

After Bommai the question is legal. Was the Ministry defeated on the floor of the House? If not, why was it not required to demonstrate its majority by a floor test? Was the possibility of an alternative government explored? Was the material before the President relevant? Each of these is a ground of challenge, and a court may restore a dissolved Assembly.

Notice what changed. The article was not amended and the power was not removed. What changed is that its exercise became reviewable and a standard was supplied, which is how most of the old challenges were addressed: not by removing a power but by subjecting it to law.

Distinctions that carry marks

ChallengeNatureWhat was doneWhere it stands
Poverty and inequalitySocial and economicDirective Principles, land reform, welfarePoverty much reduced; inequality is not
IlliteracySocialSymbols on ballots, schooling, article 21AImproved; turnout was never the problem
CasteSocialAbolition of untouchability, reservationPersists; now a vehicle of inclusion as well as exclusion
CommunalismSocial and politicalSecular structure, corrupt practice provisionsPersists; Bommai: secularism is a basic feature
RegionalismPolitical and linguisticLinguistic States, federalism, coalitionsHandled best; accommodation rather than suppression
Article 356ConstitutionalBommai: judicial review, floor testLargely answered
The EmergencyConstitutionalIndira Gandhi, the election of 1977, the Forty-fourth AmendmentAnswered, and the possibility remains

What these challenges are NOT

They are not past. Old means original, not resolved.

They were not all answered the same way. Two were answered by courts, one by an election, several by legislation, and the social ones have not been answered at all.

Caste mobilisation is not simply a challenge. It has been the route by which excluded groups obtained power, and an answer that treats it only as a problem is one-sided.

And the Emergency is not only a warning. How it ended is the strongest evidence available that the conditions at chapter 830 held.

Quick revision

  1. Old means original, present from 1950, arising from India's social and constitutional structure. Most persist.
  2. Seven: poverty and inequality; illiteracy; caste; communalism; regionalism; misuse of article 356; and the Emergency.
  3. S. R. Bommai, (1994) 3 SCC 1: a proclamation under article 356 is subject to judicial review, the power is conditional and must rest on relevant material, and the test of confidence is a floor test in the House; and secularism is a basic feature of the Constitution.
  4. Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, 1975 Supp SCC 1: clause (4) of article 329A struck down; democracy is a basic feature and free and fair elections are part of the democratic structure; the constituent power cannot exercise judicial power.
  5. The Emergency ended by an election the government lost and conceded, and the Forty-fourth Amendment tightened the conditions for proclaiming one.
  6. Regionalism was handled best, by accommodation rather than suppression, and the survival of regional parties is part of the same fact.
  7. The pattern of the answers: powers were not removed, they were subjected to law, and their exercise made reviewable against a standard.
munotes.in445

The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy

Test yourself

1. What makes a challenge "old", and why does the category not mean "resolved"? Old means original: present from 1950, identified in the Constituent Assembly, and arising from India's social and constitutional structure rather than from any later development. It does not mean resolved, because poverty has fallen while inequality has not, caste and communalism persist, and the constitutional possibility of an emergency remains even after the Forty-fourth Amendment. An answer which says the old challenges have been overcome misdescribes every item on the list except the misuse of article 356.

2. How did Bommai change the position on article 356? By making its exercise a legal question. The Court held that a proclamation is subject to judicial review, that the power is conditional and the President's satisfaction must rest on relevant material, and that the proper test of whether a Ministry retains confidence is a floor test in the House. A proclamation is therefore liable to be set aside where President's rule is imposed without exploring an alternative government or ordering fresh elections, and where a Governor recommends supersession of a Ministry that has not been defeated on the floor on a merely subjective assessment. The article was not amended and the power was not removed; its exercise was subjected to a standard.

3. Why is the Emergency the most important item on the list? Because it was the only occasion on which the entire arrangement was suspended, and it was done through the Constitution's own machinery rather than outside it: rights were suspended, opponents detained, the press censored and elections postponed, and the Thirty-ninth Amendment inserted article 329A to validate the Prime Minister's election which a court had set aside. It matters even more for how it ended: the Court struck down clause (4) of article 329A, holding democracy a basic feature and free and fair elections part of the democratic structure; the government was defeated in 1977 and handed over; and the Forty-fourth Amendment tightened the conditions for proclaiming an emergency.

munotes.in446

The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy

4. How should caste be treated in an answer on the challenges to Indian democracy? On both of its aspects. As exclusion, it kept whole groups out of public life for centuries, and the Constitution answered it by abolishing untouchability, prohibiting discrimination and reserving seats and posts. As mobilisation, it organises votes by community rather than by programme, which converts an election from a choice of policies into a count of groups and belongs with the ethical decay of democracy. But the same mobilisation has been the means by which excluded groups obtained office from parties that had claimed to speak for everybody while recruiting narrowly, so an answer treating it only as a problem is one-sided.

5. Which challenge has India handled best, and why? Regionalism and linguistic division, by accommodation rather than suppression. States were reorganised on linguistic lines, a federal structure gave regional identities an arena in which they could govern, the language provisions avoided the imposition of a single language, and regional parties were absorbed into national coalitions where they carried State concerns into Union decisions. The survival and entrenchment of regional parties, which chapter 810 treats as the strongest guarantee of a multi-party system, is the same fact seen from a different side.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in447

Chapter Eighty-Six

The New Challenges to Indian Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.4, "Challenges to Indian Democracy - Old and New"

In one line

The newer threats are money on a scale that decides who can compete, information environments in which voters are addressed separately and cannot check what they are told, and pressure on the institutions whose job is to say no.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the newer challenges to Indian democracy are the scale and opacity of political finance; the transformation of the information environment by social media, targeted messaging and coordinated disinformation; the concentration of media ownership; pressure on the independence of institutions charged with holding governments to the rules; surveillance and the erosion of privacy; the shrinking of legislative deliberation; and the rise of a majoritarian conception of democracy in which winning an election is treated as authorising anything.

The challenges

1. Money, and the electoral bonds judgment

The problem. Elections cost sums no ordinary candidate can raise, so parties depend on those who can supply them, and a contributor who cannot be identified cannot be held to account by anybody.

Facts. Association for Democratic Reforms v. Union of India, decided 15 February 2024. The Finance Act 2017 introduced the Electoral Bond Scheme and made four connected amendments: to section 31 of the Reserve Bank of India Act, to section 29C of the Representation of the People Act 1951, to section 13A of the Income Tax Act, and to section 182 of the Companies Act. Together these permitted contributions to parties through bearer instruments bought from a bank, exempted parties from disclosing contributions received in that form, exempted them from maintaining records of those contributors, and removed the previous cap on the proportion of profits a company could contribute. Petitioners under article 32 sought a declaration that the Scheme and those provisions were unconstitutional.

Held. A Constitution Bench held that information about the funding of a political party is essential for a voter to exercise the freedom to vote in an effective manner, so that the Scheme and the impugned provisions, to the extent that they infringe the voter's right to information by anonymising contributions, violate article 19(1)(a). Applying the proportionality standard, which requires a legitimate goal, a suitable means, the least restrictive and equally effective alternative, and a balance between the restriction and the goal, the Court held the infringement unjustified. It declared unconstitutional the Electoral Bond Scheme, the proviso to section 29C(1) of the Representation of the People Act as amended, section 182(3) of the Companies Act as amended, and section 13A(b) of the Income Tax Act as amended. It further held that the deletion of the proviso to section 182(1) of the Companies Act, which had permitted unlimited corporate contributions, is arbitrary and violative of article 14. And it directed disclosure of the information on contributions already received under the Scheme.

munotes.in448

The New Challenges to Indian Democracy

Why it matters. It is the Indian decision holding that money in politics is a constitutional question. Its reasoning descends directly from the voter's right to know at chapter 820: an election consents to nothing unless the voter can know what they are consenting to, and who paid for a party is part of that.

2. The information environment

Targeted messaging. A party can address different messages to different voters, each unseen by the others, so that no common account of what a party is promising exists and inconsistent claims cannot be compared.

Coordinated disinformation. Organised production of false material, distributed at a scale and speed that correction cannot match.

Encrypted messaging. Much Indian political communication moves through closed groups, where material is neither public nor attributable, so it cannot be checked, answered or regulated in the way a broadcast can.

Why this is a democratic problem and not merely a nuisance. The condition at chapter 820 is that the voter must be able to know what they are choosing. An environment in which the voter is addressed privately, cannot verify what they are told, and shares no common set of facts with other voters, defeats that condition without any law being broken.

3. Concentration and dependence in the media

Ownership of news media concentrated in a small number of hands, several with substantial interests in regulated industries, so that the outlet's commercial position depends on the government's decisions in an unrelated field. Dependence on government advertising has the same effect. Neither requires any instruction to be given.

4. Pressure on the institutions that say no

Chapter 830 held that the crucial condition is institutions able to rule against the government and be obeyed. The pressure takes the form of appointments, of resources and staffing, of the timing of decisions, of transfers, and of the treatment of officials who decide inconveniently. None of it breaks a rule, which is what makes it decay rather than illegality.

5. Surveillance and privacy

The capacity of a state to know what citizens read, say and do is now vastly greater than any previous government's. A person who believes they are watched will not organise, criticise or associate freely, which affects the freedoms on which the whole arrangement rests, and it does so whether or not the surveillance is actually taking place.

6. The shrinking of deliberation

Fewer sitting days, fewer bills referred to committees, guillotined debates, and the use of the money bill route to avoid the second chamber. Government by discussion is a phrase for what a legislature is supposed to do, and it is measurable by how much discussion there is.

munotes.in449

The New Challenges to Indian Democracy

7. Majoritarianism

The claim that winning an election authorises whatever the winner chooses to do. Chapter 820 separated democracy from constitutionalism precisely to answer this: a majority decides who governs, and the Constitution decides what may be done.

Why these are harder than the old challenges

This is the analytical point of the chapter and an answer should make it.

They are not violations. The old challenge of article 356 was answered because a proclamation is an identifiable act that a court can review. Most of the new challenges consist of lawful acts, private conduct or the absence of regulation, and there is often nothing to strike down.

They are transnational. Disinformation, platform design and media concentration are not confined to any jurisdiction, and a national regulator has limited reach.

They move faster than law. A statute takes years and a distribution technique takes weeks.

And the remedy can become the problem. Powers taken to combat disinformation can be used against criticism, which is why every proposal in this area has to be examined for what a future government could do with it.

What has worked

Disclosure. The Indian courts' consistent remedy, in the 2002 decision on candidate affidavits and in the electoral bonds judgment on party funding. It does not prohibit anything; it makes the fact known.

Proportionality. The standard applied in the electoral bonds judgment gives courts a structured method for testing a restriction, and it is now the standard instrument for the new challenges.

Independent research and journalism, which is where almost everything known about political finance and about coordinated disinformation comes from.

Federalism, which keeps an alternative in existence.

And an honest limit. Disclosure works only if the electorate acts on what is disclosed, and the evidence about whether it does is mixed. A court can supply information and cannot supply a response to it.

A worked example

A party runs a campaign in a State election. Consider four features, none of which is unlawful when it happens.

It funds the campaign through instruments whose purchasers are not disclosed. Lawful until the scheme is struck down, and it was struck down for exactly this reason: the voter's right to know under article 19(1)(a).

It runs different advertisements for different groups of voters, targeted by data, so that no voter sees what another is told. Lawful. No court has yet held that this defeats the right to know, and the reasoning of the electoral bonds judgment is the obvious foundation for an argument that it does.

Most of its material circulates in closed messaging groups. Lawful, unattributable, and outside the reach of the rules that govern broadcasting.

munotes.in450

The New Challenges to Indian Democracy

And the outlets that would investigate depend on government advertising and are owned by companies in regulated industries. Lawful, and it requires nobody to give an instruction.

The four together defeat the condition that the voter must know what they are choosing, and not one of them can be prosecuted. That is the difference between the new challenges and the old, and it is the answer to MU's question.

Distinctions that carry marks

Old challengesNew challenges
OriginIndia's social and constitutional structure, from 1950Money, technology and institutional practice
FormConditions, or identifiable actsLawful acts, private conduct, or the absence of regulation
Reviewable by a court?Often yes: article 356, article 329AOften nothing to review
Confined to India?LargelyNo, they are transnational
SpeedSlowFaster than legislation
Principal remedyJudicial review of an actDisclosure, proportionality, and the voter
ChallengeCondition erodedIndian legal response
Political financeThe voter's right to knowElectoral bonds judgment: scheme and provisions unconstitutional under article 19(1)(a); unlimited corporate funding arbitrary under article 14
Targeted messagingA common set of factsNone yet
DisinformationInformed choiceFragmentary
Media concentrationScrutiny of governmentCompetition and broadcasting law, weakly
Pressure on institutionsBodies able to say noJudicial review; appointments litigation
SurveillanceFree association and criticismThe privacy jurisprudence
Shrinking deliberationGovernment by discussionCommittee practice; none binding
MajoritarianismConstitutionalismBasic structure doctrine

What these challenges are NOT

They are not replacements for the old ones. Poverty, caste and communalism persist, and the new challenges operate on top of them.

They are not arguments against technology. The same platforms have made political organisation possible for people with no access to a newspaper.

They are not peculiar to India. Every established democracy is arguing about the same list, which is why comparison is useful and why the assumption that this is an Indian failing misdescribes it.

And they are not beyond remedy. The electoral bonds judgment is proof that at least one of them can be decided, and the method it used, the right to know plus proportionality, is available for the others.

Quick revision

  1. Seven new challenges: political finance; the information environment, including targeted messaging, disinformation and closed messaging groups; media concentration and dependence; pressure on independent institutions; surveillance; the shrinking of deliberation; and majoritarianism.
  2. The electoral bonds judgment, 15 February 2024: information about a party's funding is essential for a voter to vote effectively, so the Scheme and the amendments to section 29C of the Representation of the People Act, section 182(3) of the Companies Act and section 13A(b) of the Income Tax Act violate article 19(1)(a); the infringement fails the proportionality standard; and the removal of the cap on corporate contributions is arbitrary and violates article 14. Disclosure of past contributions was directed.
  3. Why they are harder: they are not violations; they are transnational; they move faster than law; and the remedy can become the problem.
  4. What has worked: disclosure, proportionality, independent research and journalism, and federalism.
  5. The honest limit: a court can supply information and cannot supply a response to it, and the evidence that disclosure changes votes is mixed.
munotes.in451

The New Challenges to Indian Democracy

Test yourself

1. What did the electoral bonds judgment decide? That information about the funding of a political party is essential for a voter to exercise the freedom to vote in an effective manner, so that the Electoral Bond Scheme and the connected provisions, to the extent that they anonymise contributions and thereby infringe the voter's right to information, violate article 19(1)(a). Applying the proportionality standard the Court held the infringement unjustified and declared unconstitutional the Scheme, the proviso to section 29C(1) of the Representation of the People Act, section 182(3) of the Companies Act and section 13A(b) of the Income Tax Act as amended by the Finance Act 2017. It further held the deletion of the cap on corporate contributions arbitrary and violative of article 14, and directed disclosure of contributions already received.

2. Why is the transformation of the information environment a democratic problem? Because the condition on which an election operates as consent is that the voter can know what they are choosing. Targeted messaging allows a party to address different voters with different and possibly inconsistent claims, none of which the others see, so no common account of what is being promised exists. Coordinated disinformation distributes false material faster than correction can follow. And material circulating in closed messaging groups is neither public nor attributable, so it cannot be checked, answered or regulated as broadcast material can. The condition is defeated without any law being broken.

3. Why are the new challenges harder to answer than the old ones? Because most of them are not violations. The misuse of article 356 was answered because a proclamation is an identifiable act that a court can review against a standard, whereas the new challenges consist largely of lawful acts, private conduct or the absence of regulation, and often there is nothing to strike down. They are also transnational, so a national regulator has limited reach; they change faster than legislation can; and the powers taken to combat them, particularly against disinformation, can be turned against criticism, so every proposed remedy must be examined for what a future government could do with it.

4. What is the pattern of the Indian judicial response, and what are its limits? Disclosure, tested by proportionality. In 2002 the Court required candidates to file affidavits about criminal cases, assets and educational qualifications; in 2024 it struck down a scheme that anonymised party funding. Neither decision prohibits anything: they make facts known and leave the decision to the voter. The limit is that disclosure works only if the electorate acts on what is disclosed, and the evidence about whether it does is mixed. A court can supply the information and cannot supply the response, which is the honest boundary of the judicial remedy.

munotes.in452

The New Challenges to Indian Democracy

5. Are the new challenges peculiar to India? No. Political finance, targeted messaging, coordinated disinformation, media concentration, surveillance and pressure on independent institutions are debated in every established democracy, which is why comparison is useful and why treating the list as an Indian failing misdescribes it. What is distinctive is the scale, the number of voters reached through closed messaging groups, and the fact that these challenges operate on top of the older ones of poverty, caste and communalism rather than in place of them.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in453

Chapter Eighty-Seven

Gandhian Gram Swaraj

Syllabus topic 4.3, "Democratic Decentralisation and Local Governments"; 4.3.1, "Beginnings - Gandhian Gram Swaraj and Dr Ambedkar's Views Decentralisation"

In one line

Gram Swaraj is Gandhi's proposal that India be organised as a very large number of self-governing villages, each managing its own affairs, related to each other not as a pyramid but as widening circles with the individual at the centre.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Gram Swaraj, meaning village self-rule, is Gandhi's conception of the ideal political order, in which every village is a self-sufficient republic managing its own agriculture, industry, education, health, sanitation and justice, exercising full powers over its own affairs, and related to larger units not by subordination but by voluntary cooperation, so that political power is exercised at the level nearest to the people and the state above exists to serve rather than to direct.

The two words

Gram is village. Swaraj is self-rule, and Gandhi insisted the word means more than independence from foreign rule.

His own distinction, from Hind Swaraj. Independence is the removal of a foreign government; swaraj is rule over oneself, which begins with the individual's control over their own conduct and extends outward. A country whose foreign rulers have gone and whose people are governed from a distant capital by people they cannot reach has independence and not swaraj.

That distinction is the whole of Gram Swaraj. Swaraj at the level of a country is only real if there is swaraj at the level of a village, and swaraj at the level of a village is only real if there is swaraj in the person.

What Gandhi proposed

A self-sufficient village. Producing its own food and cloth, meeting its own basic needs, so that it is not dependent on a distant economy over which it has no control. Dependence, on his account, is the opposite of self-rule.

Full authority over its own affairs. Its own agriculture, its own village industries, its own school, its own sanitation and health, its own watch and ward, and its own settlement of disputes.

Managed by a panchayat chosen annually by the adults of the village, exercising the functions of legislature, executive and judiciary together for village matters. Gandhi was explicit that this combination, which would be objectionable at a larger scale, is workable in a body small enough for everybody to see what it does.

Non-violent. The village defends itself by non-violent means, and Gandhi accepted that this required a level of discipline most villages did not have.

Bread labour and swadeshi. Everybody performs some physical work, and needs are met locally by preference.

Trusteeship within the village, so that those with more hold it for the community, which is chapter 750's material applied locally.

The oceanic circle

Gandhi's answer to the obvious question, what holds the villages together, and the image should be reproduced in an answer because it is precisely designed against the alternative.

munotes.in454

Gandhian Gram Swaraj

The structure is not a pyramid. In a pyramid the base supports the apex and the apex directs the base. Gandhi rejects that picture.

It is a set of ever widening, never ascending circles. The individual is at the centre, always ready to perish for the village; the village for the circle of villages; and so outward, until the whole becomes one life composed of individuals, never aggressive in their arrogance but ever humble.

The outermost circumference does not crush the inner circles but gives strength to all within, and derives its own strength from them.

The political content of the image. Authority runs from the individual outward rather than from the state downward. That is the exact inverse of the arrangement every modern state has, and it is why Gram Swaraj is not simply a proposal for stronger local government.

Why Gandhi believed in it

Scale. A person can influence a decision taken by a hundred neighbours and cannot influence one taken in a capital, so real participation requires small units.

Self-reliance. Dependence on a distant power, whether a foreign government or a national market, is a form of subjection.

Non-violence. A centralised state is organised force, which Gandhi described as violence in a concentrated and organised form. The less centralised the arrangement, the less force it requires.

Character. Self-government develops the people who practise it, which is the argument Mill makes for participation and Green makes for positive freedom.

And an economic argument. Village industry uses the labour that India has in abundance rather than the capital it lacked, which is chapter 750's disagreement with communism.

The criticisms

An answer that gives Gandhi and stops has given half the topic, because MU sets Ambedkar in the same breath.

Ambedkar's objection, which chapter 880 gives in his own words, is the fundamental one: the village was for the excluded not a republic but the place where their exclusion was enforced most closely.

Self-sufficiency and poverty. A village producing everything it consumes forgoes the gains of specialisation and exchange, and is likely to remain poor. This was Nehru's disagreement.

Small units are not necessarily democratic. A village dominated by one family, one caste or one landholder is not more free for being small; it is less free, because the dominant party is closer and cannot be escaped.

Some functions cannot be local. Defence, currency, railways, epidemic control, environmental regulation and the redistribution of resources between rich and poor regions all require larger units.

And the practical objection. Villages are not equal in resources, so village self-sufficiency freezes the inequality between them, and only a larger unit can transfer resources from a rich district to a poor one.

munotes.in455

Gandhian Gram Swaraj

What survived of it

The proposal was not adopted and it was not discarded either, and saying exactly what happened is the strongest close to an answer.

Article 40 directs the State to organise village panchayats and to endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government. That is Gandhi's phrase in a Directive Principle, and chapter 890 works out how it got there.

The 73rd Amendment made panchayats constitutional bodies with guaranteed elections, reservation and a defined place in the structure, which is chapter 900.

The Gram Sabha, in article 243A, is the one body in the Indian constitutional scheme composed of every adult voter of a village, and it is the nearest thing in Indian law to Gandhi's assembly. Chapter 920.

What was not adopted. The village as the unit of the Constitution, self-sufficiency as an economic policy, and the oceanic circle as the structure of authority. India adopted a strong centre, a federal structure and individual rights, and then added local self-government beneath them.

A worked example

A village of two thousand people must decide how to use a common pond, whether to build a road to the highway, and what to do about a dispute over a boundary.

On Gram Swaraj, all three are settled in the village, by a panchayat the villagers chose this year, meeting where everybody can attend. The pond is a village asset; the road is decided by those who will use it; the boundary is settled by neighbours who know the facts.

The strengths are visible. The people deciding are the people affected. The information is local. The decision can be revisited. Nobody has to travel to a district headquarters.

And so are the weaknesses. If the pond has always been closed to one community, the panchayat that decides is drawn from those who closed it. If the boundary dispute is between a large landholder and a labourer, the tribunal is composed of the landholder's neighbours and dependants. And if the road requires more money than the village has, the decision is not the village's at all.

That paragraph is the whole of the topic. Gandhi's case for the village is that it is close, and Ambedkar's case against it is that closeness is exactly what the excluded suffer from. Both statements are about the same fact.

Distinctions that carry marks

Gram SwarajThe modern state
Basic unitThe villageThe individual, and the nation
Direction of authorityFrom the individual outward, in widening circlesFrom the state downward
StructureNever ascending circles; the outer strengthens the innerA pyramid
EconomySelf-sufficient, village industry, swadeshiIntegrated, specialised, exchange based
ForceMinimised; a centralised state is violence organisedMonopoly of legitimate force
JusticeSettled in the villageCourts applying general law
Its strengthParticipation is real; decisions are nearScale, specialisation, redistribution, rights
Its weaknessDomination is also nearDistance from the citizen
munotes.in456

Gandhian Gram Swaraj

What Gram Swaraj is NOT

It is not merely decentralisation. Decentralisation devolves powers from a centre that retains them. Gram Swaraj reverses the direction: authority begins in the village and is lent upward.

It is not a claim that villages were once like this. Gandhi acknowledged what villages were and described what they should become, and much of the constructive programme was aimed at village conditions he regarded as intolerable.

It is not anti-national. The oceanic circle ends in a whole; what it rejects is a whole that directs its parts.

And it is not what the Constitution adopted. Article 40 and Part IX take a great deal from it and reject its central proposition, which is that the village should be the unit.

Quick revision

  1. Gram village, swaraj self-rule, and Gandhi's distinction: independence is the removal of a foreign government, swaraj is rule over oneself, beginning in the person.
  2. The village: self-sufficient; full authority over agriculture, industry, education, sanitation, health, watch and ward and disputes; a panchayat chosen annually by the adults, combining legislative, executive and judicial functions; non-violent; bread labour, swadeshi, trusteeship.
  3. The oceanic circle: not a pyramid but ever widening, never ascending circles, the individual at the centre, the outermost circumference giving strength to all within and deriving strength from them. Authority runs outward, not downward.
  4. Why: scale makes participation real; self-reliance; a centralised state is organised force; self-government builds character; and village industry uses labour rather than capital.
  5. Criticisms: Ambedkar's, that the village enforced exclusion; self-sufficiency entrenches poverty, which was Nehru's objection; small units are not necessarily free; some functions cannot be local; and self-sufficiency freezes inequality between villages.
  6. What survived: article 40's "units of self-government", the 73rd Amendment, and the Gram Sabha in article 243A. What did not: the village as the constitutional unit, self-sufficiency, and the oceanic circle.

Test yourself

1. What did Gandhi mean by swaraj, and how does the meaning generate Gram Swaraj? He distinguished independence, the removal of a foreign government, from swaraj, which is rule over oneself and begins with the individual's control of their own conduct. On that meaning a country whose foreign rulers have left but whose people are governed from a distant capital they cannot reach has independence and not swaraj. Gram Swaraj follows directly: self-rule at the level of a country is real only if it exists at the level of the village, and at the level of the village only if it exists in the person.

munotes.in457

Gandhian Gram Swaraj

2. Describe the oceanic circle and state its political content. Gandhi rejected the image of a pyramid, in which the base supports the apex and the apex directs the base, and proposed instead ever widening, never ascending circles: the individual at the centre, ready to perish for the village, the village for the circle of villages, and so outward until the whole is one life composed of individuals, with the outermost circumference not crushing the inner circles but giving strength to all within and deriving its strength from them. Its political content is that authority runs from the individual outward rather than from the state downward, which is the exact inverse of every modern state's arrangement.

3. Why did Gandhi believe self-government must be local? Because participation is only real at a scale where a person can influence what is decided, and nobody can influence a decision taken in a distant capital. Because dependence on a distant power, whether a foreign government or a national market, is itself a form of subjection, so self-reliance is part of self-rule. Because a centralised state is organised force, and the less centralised an arrangement the less force it requires. Because self-government develops the character of those who practise it. And because village industry uses the labour India had rather than the capital it lacked.

4. State the criticisms of Gram Swaraj. Ambedkar's, that the village was for the excluded not a republic but the place where their exclusion was enforced most closely. Nehru's, that self-sufficiency forgoes specialisation and exchange and condemns villages to poverty. That small units are not necessarily democratic, since a village dominated by one family, caste or landholder is less free for being small because the dominant party is nearer and cannot be escaped. That defence, currency, epidemic control, environmental regulation and interregional redistribution cannot be local. And that self-sufficiency freezes inequality between villages, since only a larger unit can transfer resources from a rich district to a poor one.

5. What survived of Gram Swaraj in the Constitution, and what did not? Article 40 directs the State to organise village panchayats and endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government, which is Gandhi's phrase in a Directive Principle. The 73rd Amendment made panchayats constitutional bodies with guaranteed elections and a defined structure, and article 243A created the Gram Sabha, the only body in the constitutional scheme composed of every adult voter of a village. What was not adopted is the central proposition: the village is not the unit of the Constitution, self-sufficiency was not adopted as economic policy, and authority runs downward from a strong centre through a federal structure rather than outward from the individual.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in458

Chapter Eighty-Eight

Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation

Syllabus topic 4.3.1, "Beginnings - Gandhian Gram Swaraj and Dr Ambedkar's Views Decentralisation"

In one line

Ambedkar opposed making the village the unit of the Constitution, because for the people he represented the village was not a republic but the place where their exclusion was enforced, and he said so in the Constituent Assembly in terms nobody has been able to soften.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Ambedkar rejected the proposal that the village should be the unit of the Indian Constitution, holding that the village republics had been the ruination of India, that the village was a sink of localism, a den of ignorance, narrow-mindedness and communalism, and that he was glad the Draft Constitution had discarded the village and adopted the individual as its unit; his objection rested on the position of the excluded, for whom local dominance was closer and more inescapable than any distant government, and his alternative was constitutional democracy with enforceable individual rights, State-directed economic measures and social reform aimed at caste.

The passage

In his speech on the Draft Constitution, Ambedkar answered those who criticised the Constitution for ignoring the village. He first quoted the classic description of village communities surviving every dynasty and every conquest, and then turned it against those who admired it.

His own words. Such is the part the village communities have played in the history of their country. Knowing this, what pride can one feel in them? That they have survived through all vicissitudes may be a fact. But mere survival has no value. The question is on what plane they have survived. Surely on a low, on a selfish level. I hold that these village republics have been the ruination of India. I am therefore surprised that those who condemn provincialism and communalism should come forward as champions of the village. What is the village but a sink of localism, a den of ignorance, narrow-mindedness and communalism? I am glad that the Draft Constitution has discarded the village and adopted the individual as its unit.

Read the argument, not only the words. Ambedkar's point is not that villages are unpleasant. It is that survival is not a merit, that what survived was a particular social order, and that admiring the survival is admiring the order.

Why he held it

Because of who lives at the bottom of a village. For those excluded by caste, the village was where the exclusion was administered: which well, which street, which land, which occupation, which temple. A distant government is remote and can be appealed to; a village is neither.

Because closeness is not the same as freedom. Gandhi's argument at chapter 870 is that participation is real at village scale. Ambedkar's reply is that domination is also real at village scale, and that a person dominated by neighbours cannot leave, cannot appeal and cannot be anonymous.

munotes.in459

Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation

Because he wanted the individual as the unit. If the village is the unit, its internal arrangements are its own affair, and the person the arrangements exclude has no standing. If the individual is the unit, the excluded person holds rights that the village cannot override, and can enforce them against the village.

Because he trusted enforceable law more than local goodwill. This is the same objection he made to trusteeship at chapter 750, and it is his most consistent position: a remedy that depends on the good intentions of those who benefit from an arrangement leaves them in charge of it.

And because he was arguing about a real institution rather than an ideal one. Gandhi described what a village might become. Ambedkar described what villages were.

The larger argument: political democracy needs social democracy

The village passage belongs to a bigger claim, and an answer that gives both is much stronger.

In the same speech Ambedkar said that on 26 January 1950 we are going to enter into a life of contradictions: in politics we will have equality and in social and economic life we will have inequality; in politics we will be recognising the principle of one man one vote and one vote one value, and in social and economic life we shall, by reason of our social and economic structure, continue to deny the principle of one man one value. How long shall we continue to live this life of contradictions? If we continue to deny equality in our social and economic life for long, we will do so only by putting our political democracy in peril.

He set out what social democracy means: liberty, equality and fraternity as principles of life, not as separate items but as a union, since liberty without equality produces the supremacy of the few over the many, equality without liberty kills individual initiative, and without fraternity liberty and equality would require a constable to enforce them.

This is the connection to chapter 830. Ambedkar's list of the conditions essential for the success of democracy is social democracy, and his warning is that political forms cannot survive a society organised on graded inequality.

Where he did agree with decentralisation

Ambedkar was not an opponent of local government as such, and an answer that presents him as one is inaccurate.

His objection was to the village as the constitutional unit, and to the assumption that a small unit is a free one.

He accepted local administration subject to the two things he insisted on everywhere: enforceable individual rights, so that the excluded person can proceed against the local body; and safeguards for those whom local majorities would exclude, which is why reservation appears at every level of Indian government.

munotes.in460

Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation

And the Constitution took both positions. Article 40 was adopted as a Directive Principle, so the village entered the text; and the individual remained the unit of Part III, with rights enforceable against every authority including a panchayat. Chapter 890 shows how that compromise was arrived at, and chapters 900 and 940 show that when panchayats were finally given constitutional status in 1993, reservation for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and women was written into the same amendment. That is Ambedkar's condition being satisfied forty years later.

A worked example

A Gram Panchayat resolves that a common well in the village will be used only by residents of certain streets, on the ground that this is the long established arrangement and that the village should manage its own affairs.

On Gram Swaraj as a principle of authority, the village decides its own matters and this is a village matter.

On Ambedkar's principle, the resolution is void. The individual is the unit; the excluded villagers hold rights that the panchayat cannot override; untouchability is abolished and its practice in any form is forbidden; and the excluded person may proceed against the panchayat in a court that is not composed of their neighbours.

Notice which argument the Constitution adopted. Not by rejecting local government, which article 40 and Part IX establish, but by placing enforceable individual rights above it. The panchayat exists and it cannot do this.

That is the reconciliation, and it is the answer to MU's topic: India adopted Gandhi's institution and Ambedkar's condition.

Distinctions that carry marks

GandhiAmbedkar
The unitThe villageThe individual
The village isA republic capable of self-ruleA sink of localism, a den of ignorance, narrow-mindedness and communalism
Closeness meansReal participationInescapable domination
Direction of authorityOutward, from the individual through the villageDownward, with rights enforceable against every level
TrustsThe conscience of the communityEnforceable law
Method of changeSelf-purification and moral appealConstitutional guarantees and State action
On the excludedTo be raised by the community's own reformTo be armed with rights and safeguards
In the ConstitutionArticle 40, and Part IX in 1993Part III, and reservation at every level

What Ambedkar's position is NOT

It is not opposition to local government. It is opposition to the village as the constitutional unit and to the assumption that small units are free.

It is not centralisation for its own sake. He wanted a level of government that the excluded could appeal to, which requires that it be above the one excluding them.

munotes.in461

Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation

It is not hostility to villagers. He was describing an institution and a social order, and his own words locate the fault in the plane on which the village survived rather than in the people.

And it did not lose. The Constitution adopted the individual as the unit, and when the village finally received constitutional status in 1993 it came with reservation, guaranteed elections and enforceable rights attached.

Quick revision

  1. The passage: mere survival has no value, the question is on what plane they have survived; these village republics have been the ruination of India; what is the village but a sink of localism, a den of ignorance, narrow-mindedness and communalism; and he was glad the Draft Constitution has discarded the village and adopted the individual as its unit.
  2. The argument: for the excluded, the village is where exclusion is administered; closeness is not freedom; the individual as the unit gives the excluded person standing against the village; and enforceable law is surer than local goodwill.
  3. The larger claim: on 26 January 1950 we enter a life of contradictions, equality in politics and inequality in social and economic life, one man one vote against the denial of one man one value, and continuing to deny it puts political democracy in peril.
  4. Social democracy is liberty, equality and fraternity as a union: liberty without equality produces the supremacy of the few, equality without liberty kills initiative, and without fraternity both would need a constable.
  5. He was not against local government, only against the village as the unit and against assuming small units are free; he required enforceable rights and safeguards at every level.
  6. The reconciliation: India adopted Gandhi's institution in article 40 and Part IX, and Ambedkar's condition in Part III and in the reservation written into the 73rd Amendment.

Test yourself

1. State Ambedkar's view of the village in his own terms, and the argument behind it. That mere survival has no value and the question is on what plane the village communities survived, which was a low and selfish one; that these village republics have been the ruination of India; that the village is a sink of localism, a den of ignorance, narrow-mindedness and communalism; and that he was glad the Draft Constitution had discarded the village and adopted the individual as its unit. The argument is that survival is not a merit, that what survived was a particular social order, and that admiring the survival means admiring the order.

2. Why does Ambedkar's objection follow from the position of the excluded? Because for those excluded by caste the village was where the exclusion was administered, deciding which well, which street, which land, which occupation and which temple were open to them. A distant government is remote and can be appealed to; neighbours are neither. Gandhi's case for the village is that participation is real at that scale, and Ambedkar's reply is that domination is equally real at that scale and far harder to escape, since the dominated person cannot leave, cannot appeal to anybody outside, and cannot be anonymous.

munotes.in462

Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation

3. Why did he insist on the individual as the unit? Because if the village is the unit its internal arrangements are its own affair and the person those arrangements exclude has no standing to complain. If the individual is the unit, the excluded person holds rights the village cannot override and can enforce them against the village in a forum not composed of their neighbours. It is the same reasoning he applied to trusteeship: a remedy depending on the goodwill of those who benefit from an arrangement leaves them in control of it.

4. What did Ambedkar mean by a life of contradictions? That from 26 January 1950 India would have equality in politics and inequality in social and economic life, recognising one man one vote and one vote one value while continuing, by reason of its social and economic structure, to deny one man one value. He asked how long the contradiction could last and warned that continuing to deny equality in social and economic life would put political democracy in peril. Social democracy, which he defined as liberty, equality and fraternity held together as a union, was his condition for the survival of the political forms.

5. How did the Constitution reconcile Gandhi and Ambedkar? By adopting Gandhi's institution and Ambedkar's condition. Article 40 directs the State to organise village panchayats and endow them with powers enabling them to function as units of self-government, and Part IX gave panchayats constitutional status in 1993. But the individual remained the unit of Part III, with rights enforceable against every authority including a panchayat, so that a village resolution excluding a group from a common well is void whatever the village decides. And when panchayats received constitutional status, reservation for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and women was written into the same amendment, which is Ambedkar's safeguard supplied forty years after he demanded it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in463

Chapter Eighty-Nine

Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments"

In one line

Article 40 told the State to organise village panchayats and to give them the powers of units of self-government, and because a Directive Principle cannot be enforced in a court, almost nothing happened until Parliament wrote local government into the Constitution as an enforceable Part in 1992.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: article 40 is a Directive Principle of State Policy under which the State shall take steps to organise village panchayats and endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government; being a Directive Principle it is by article 37 not enforceable by any court although it is fundamental in the governance of the country, and the consequence was that panchayats existed only where a State chose to create them, were dissolved and left unelected at the State's convenience, and were given whatever powers and money the State wished, so that after four decades and four expert committees Parliament enacted the Seventy-third and Seventy-fourth Amendments, which took the subject out of the State's discretion and placed it in Part IX and Part IXA of the Constitution.

The text of article 40

Article 40, in Part IV, reads: The State shall take steps to organise village panchayats and endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government.

Three things about that sentence.

"Units of self-government". Not units of administration. Self-government means governing, not carrying out somebody else's programme, which is the difference between a panchayat and a village level office of the State.

"Take steps to organise". The State is directed to create them. In 1950 there were no panchayats to protect, so the Article is a direction to build.

"Such powers and authority as may be necessary." The powers are not listed. That was left to the State, and became the gap through which the Article was emptied.

Why it is a Directive Principle, and what follows

Article 36 and article 37 govern the whole of Part IV. By article 37, the provisions of Part IV shall not be enforceable by any court, but the principles laid down are nevertheless fundamental in the governance of the country and it shall be the duty of the State to apply these principles in making laws.

So a citizen could not sue. A villager whose panchayat had not been constituted, or had been superseded for eleven years, had nothing to file. There was no right, so there was no remedy.

And the compromise at chapter 880 is visible here. The village entered the Constitution, which is what the Gandhians wanted, and it entered a Part that cannot be enforced, which is what the Assembly was prepared to concede. Article 40 records the disagreement rather than settling it.

munotes.in464

Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments

Do not say article 40 was worthless. It is the source of the phrase "units of self-government", it was the constitutional warrant for every State panchayat Act passed between 1950 and 1992, and it is the provision the 73rd Amendment was enacted to make real. What it lacked was enforceability.

What went wrong between 1950 and 1992

Four failures, and an answer should name them because they explain every feature of the amendments that followed.

1. Panchayats existed only if a State wanted them. Some States legislated early, others barely at all, and the pattern had no relation to need.

2. Elections were not held. This is the central failure. A State could dissolve or supersede a panchayat and then simply not hold the election, sometimes for a decade or more, and nobody could compel it. Local government in much of India was run by appointed administrators.

3. Powers and funds were withheld. Where panchayats existed, States devolved functions without money or staff, so the body was responsible for services it could not deliver.

4. Those excluded were excluded again. Without reservation, the composition of a village body reproduced the composition of village power, which is Ambedkar's objection at chapter 880 turning out to be correct in practice.

Read the 73rd Amendment against this list and every one of its features is an answer to one item on it: constitution of panchayats is mandatory; a five year term with elections before it expires and within six months of dissolution; a State Election Commission to conduct them; a State Finance Commission on money; and reservation of seats and of chairperson offices.

The committees

MU's topic is "beginnings" and then "key features", so the committees can be stated compactly. Each identified a defect and each was ignored, which is itself the argument for a constitutional amendment.

CommitteeYearWhat it said
Balwantrai Mehta1957Democratic decentralisation; a three tier structure of village panchayat, panchayat samiti at the block and zila parishad at the district; the middle tier to be the executive body. This is the origin of the three tier design.
Ashok Mehta1978Panchayati raj had declined; recommended a two tier structure with the district as the first point of decentralisation, regular elections, reservation for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, and open participation by political parties.
G. V. K. Rao1985Development administration had been bureaucratised and the panchayats bypassed; the district should be the unit of planning and the panchayats given a real role in it.
L. M. Singhvi1986The decisive one: panchayati raj should be given constitutional status, in a separate Part of the Constitution, with the Gram Sabha as the base and elections guaranteed.
munotes.in465

Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments

Then two failed Bills. The Constitution (Sixty-fourth Amendment) Bill, 1989 was passed by the Lok Sabha and failed in the Rajya Sabha, largely on the objection that it centralised control over what was a State subject. A further Bill in 1990 lapsed when the Lok Sabha was dissolved.

And then the two Acts. The Constitution (Seventy-third Amendment) Act, 1992 inserted Part IX, The Panchayats, with effect from 24 April 1993, and the Constitution (Seventy-fourth Amendment) Act, 1992 inserted Part IXA, The Municipalities, with effect from 1 June 1993.

Note what the amendments did and did not do about the federal objection. Almost every article in Part IX says the Legislature of a State may by law provide. The Constitution fixes what a State cannot avoid, which is the existence of the bodies, the elections, the term, the reservation and the commissions, and leaves the content of the powers to the State. That is the settlement between the 1989 objection and the 1992 Acts.

A worked example

A State has a Panchayat Act of 1961 passed under article 40. In 1975 it supersedes every zila parishad in the State and appoints administrators. No elections are held until 1990.

Before 1993. Nothing can be done. Article 40 is a Directive Principle and by article 37 is not enforceable by any court. The State Act permits supersession, the State is not obliged to hold an election under it, and a villager has no right on which to sue.

After 1993. Every step is unlawful. By article 243E a panchayat continues for five years from the date appointed for its first meeting, an election to constitute a panchayat must be completed before the expiry of its duration and, where it is dissolved, within six months of the dissolution; and a panchayat constituted after a dissolution continues only for the remainder of the original term, which removes the incentive to dissolve early. By article 243K the conduct of the election is vested in a State Election Commission, not in the State Government. And the Supreme Court has enforced this, in Kishansing Tomar v. Municipal Corporation of the City of Ahmedabad, (2006) 8 SCC 352, holding that elections must be held before the expiry of the term and that the State authorities must provide the State Election Commission whatever is needed, including police and staff, since the constitutional mandate is not to be defeated by administrative excuses.

That single change, from unenforceable direction to enforceable term, is the substance of the 73rd Amendment, and it is the best short answer to why article 40 was not enough.

munotes.in466

Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments

Distinctions that carry marks

Article 40Part IX and Part IXA
WherePart IV, Directive PrinciplesParts IX and IXA, the body of the Constitution
Enforceable?No, article 37Yes
Panchayats existIf the State legislatesMandatorily, article 243B
ElectionsAt the State's convenienceFive year term, article 243E; before expiry, within six months of dissolution
Conducted byThe State GovernmentState Election Commission, article 243K
ReservationNoneArticle 243D, Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes and women
MoneyWhatever the State givesState Finance Commission, article 243I
FunctionsUnspecifiedEleventh Schedule, article 243G
Remedy of a citizenNoneWrit petition

What this is NOT

Article 40 was not repealed. It remains in Part IV, and the amendments are the steps taken in obedience to it.

The amendments did not create local government. Panchayats and municipalities existed, some of them from the nineteenth century. What the amendments created was the obligation to have them and to elect them.

They did not make local bodies a third tier of the federation in the full sense. They are constituted by State law, their powers come from State law, and their money comes largely from the State. The Constitution guarantees their existence, not their strength.

And they did not settle Gandhi against Ambedkar. They adopted Gandhi's institution with Ambedkar's safeguards attached, which is chapter 880's conclusion.

Quick revision

  1. Article 40: the State shall take steps to organise village panchayats and endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government. Note the phrase, and that the powers were left unspecified.
  2. Article 37: Part IV is not enforceable by any court, though fundamental in the governance of the country and a duty of the State in making laws. So there was no right and no remedy.
  3. Four failures 1950 to 1992: panchayats only where a State chose; elections not held, often for years; powers and funds withheld; and no reservation, so village power reproduced itself.
  4. Committees: Balwantrai Mehta 1957, democratic decentralisation and the three tier structure; Ashok Mehta 1978, two tiers with the district as the unit; G. V. K. Rao 1985, the district as the planning unit; L. M. Singhvi 1986, constitutional status.
  5. Then: the 64th Amendment Bill 1989 failed in the Rajya Sabha on the federal objection, a 1990 Bill lapsed, and the 73rd (Part IX, 24 April 1993) and 74th (Part IXA, 1 June 1993) Amendments were enacted in 1992.
  6. The settlement with the States: the Constitution fixes existence, elections, term, reservation and the two commissions; the content of the powers is left to State law, which is why Part IX repeatedly says "the Legislature of a State may, by law".
munotes.in467

Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments

Test yourself

1. Set out article 40 and explain each of its three parts. The State shall take steps to organise village panchayats and endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government. "Take steps to organise" is a direction to create, since in 1950 there was little to protect. "Units of self-government" means bodies that govern rather than administer somebody else's programme, and it is the phrase later repeated in article 243G. "Such powers and authority as may be necessary" leaves the powers unspecified, which was the gap through which the Article was emptied, since the State that was to confer the powers decided how few to confer.

2. Why did a Directive Principle produce so little? Because by article 37 the provisions of Part IV are not enforceable by any court, although they are fundamental in the governance of the country and it is the duty of the State to apply them in making laws. A villager whose panchayat had never been constituted, or had been superseded and left unelected for a decade, had no right on which to sue and therefore no remedy. The consequence was that panchayats existed only where a State chose to create them, elections were held at the State's convenience, functions were devolved without money or staff, and the composition of village bodies reproduced the composition of village power.

3. Name the committees and state what each contributed. Balwantrai Mehta in 1957 recommended democratic decentralisation through a three tier structure of village panchayat, block level panchayat samiti and district zila parishad, with the middle tier as the executive body, which is the origin of the three tier design. Ashok Mehta in 1978 found panchayati raj in decline and recommended a two tier structure with the district as the first point of decentralisation, regular elections, reservation for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, and open participation by parties. G. V. K. Rao in 1985 found development administration bureaucratised and the panchayats bypassed, and recommended the district as the planning unit. L. M. Singhvi in 1986 recommended constitutional status in a separate Part, with the Gram Sabha as the base and guaranteed elections, which is what was eventually enacted.

4. What happened between the Singhvi report and the Amendments? The Constitution (Sixty-fourth Amendment) Bill, 1989 was passed by the Lok Sabha but failed in the Rajya Sabha, principally on the objection that it intruded on local government as a State subject and would let the Union deal directly with local bodies over the heads of the States. A further Bill in 1990 lapsed on the dissolution of the Lok Sabha. The Seventy-third and Seventy-fourth Amendment Acts of 1992 answered the federal objection by fixing only what a State cannot avoid, namely the existence of the bodies, the elections, the five year term, reservation and the two commissions, while leaving the content of the powers to State legislation, which is why Part IX repeatedly provides that the Legislature of a State may by law make provision.

munotes.in468

Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments

5. Give a concrete illustration of the difference the amendments made. Take a State that supersedes every zila parishad in 1975 and holds no election until 1990. Before 1993 nothing could be done, because article 40 was unenforceable and the State Act permitted supersession without compelling an election. After 1993 each step is unlawful: article 243E gives a panchayat a term of five years, requires the election to be completed before the expiry of that term or within six months of a dissolution, and confines a panchayat constituted after dissolution to the remainder of the original term; article 243K vests the conduct of elections in a State Election Commission rather than the State Government; and in Kishansing Tomar v. Municipal Corporation of the City of Ahmedabad the Supreme Court held that elections must be held before the expiry of the term and that the State must supply the Commission with the staff and police it needs, so that administrative difficulty is no answer to the constitutional mandate.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in469

Chapter Ninety

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments"

In one line

The 73rd Amendment inserted Part IX into the Constitution, which makes panchayats compulsory, elected, reserved, term limited and financed through a defined process, so that local self-government stopped depending on what a State Government felt like doing.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the Constitution (Seventy-third Amendment) Act, 1992, in force from 24 April 1993, inserted Part IX, "The Panchayats", comprising articles 243 to 243O and the Eleventh Schedule; its key features are a Gram Sabha at the village level, a three tier structure of panchayats at the village, intermediate and district levels, direct election to all seats, reservation for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and women, a fixed term of five years with elections completed before its expiry or within six months of a dissolution, an independent State Election Commission, a State Finance Commission every five years, and a list of twenty nine subjects in the Eleventh Schedule which a State may devolve to enable panchayats to function as institutions of self-government.

The features, article by article

Article 243: definitions

Gram Sabha means a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls relating to a village comprised within the area of a panchayat at the village level. Panchayat means an institution, by whatever name called, of self-government constituted under article 243B, for the rural areas. Intermediate level and village are what the Governor notifies.

Two things are settled in the definitions themselves: the Gram Sabha is every voter and not a committee, and a panchayat is an institution of self-government, which repeats article 40's phrase in an enforceable Part.

Article 243A: the Gram Sabha

A Gram Sabha may exercise such powers and perform such functions at the village level as the Legislature of a State may, by law, provide. Chapter 920 is on this article, including the weakness of the word "may".

Article 243B: constitution of panchayats

There shall be constituted in every State panchayats at the village, intermediate and district levels. The word is mandatory, and this single sentence ends the position described at chapter 890 under which panchayats existed only where a State chose.

The exception: the intermediate level may be omitted in a State having a population not exceeding twenty lakhs.

Article 243C: composition

All the seats in a panchayat shall be filled by persons chosen by direct election from territorial constituencies, with the population to seats ratio kept as nearly the same as practicable.

The chairperson of a village panchayat is elected as the State Legislature provides, and of an intermediate or district panchayat by and from amongst the elected members.

The State may also provide representation for chairpersons of the tier below, and for members of the Lok Sabha, the Rajya Sabha and the State legislature within the area, at levels other than the village.

munotes.in470

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

Article 243D: reservation of seats

The most examined article in Part IX.

Clause (1). Seats shall be reserved for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes in every panchayat, in the same proportion, as nearly as may be, as their population in that panchayat area bears to the total population, and the seats may be allotted by rotation to different constituencies.

Clause (2). Not less than one-third of the seats reserved under clause (1) shall be reserved for women belonging to the Scheduled Castes or the Scheduled Tribes.

Clause (3). Not less than one-third, including the seats reserved for Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe women, of the total seats to be filled by direct election in every panchayat shall be reserved for women, allotted by rotation.

Clause (4). The offices of chairperson shall be reserved for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and women as the State Legislature provides, with the Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe share proportionate to population, not less than one-third of chairperson offices at each level reserved for women, and rotation between panchayats.

Clause (5). Reservation for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes under clauses (1) and (2), and of chairperson offices other than for women under clause (4), ceases on the expiration of the period specified in article 334. There is no such time limit for the reservation of women, a point the Supreme Court noted in K. Krishna Murthy v. Union of India, (2010) 7 SCC 202, observing that it implies those reservations operate in perpetuity.

Clause (6). Nothing in Part IX prevents a State Legislature from reserving seats or chairperson offices in favour of backward classes. This is enabling and not mandatory, and it is the clause litigated in chapters 940.

Article 243E: duration

Five years from the date appointed for the first meeting, and no longer, unless sooner dissolved.

An election must be completed before the expiry of the term, or within six months of a dissolution.

A panchayat constituted after a dissolution continues only for the remainder of the original term, which removes the advantage of dissolving early.

Kishansing Tomar v. Municipal Corporation of the City of Ahmedabad, (2006) 8 SCC 352, is the enforcement of this scheme in its municipal twin, article 243U. The Court held that the object and purpose of the article must be carried out so that the election is completed before the term expires, that administrative difficulties such as delimitation and the preparation of rolls are no justification for postponement, that the powers of a State Election Commission in its own domain are no less than those of the Election Commission of India, and that where a State does not cooperate the Commission may seek a mandamus from the High Court and thereafter from the Supreme Court.

munotes.in471

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

Article 243F: disqualifications

Those disqualified for the State legislature are disqualified here, except that a person of twenty one years may not be disqualified for being under twenty five, and whatever further disqualifications State law imposes.

Article 243G: powers, authority and responsibilities

The State Legislature may, by law, endow the panchayats with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as institutions of self-government, including the preparation of plans for economic development and social justice and the implementation of schemes for the same, including matters in the Eleventh Schedule.

This is the weak article and an answer should say so. It is permissive. Article 243B compels a State to constitute panchayats; article 243G leaves it to the State how much they may actually do.

Articles 243H, 243I and 243J: money

243H: the State may authorise a panchayat to levy taxes, assign it State taxes, make grants in aid from the Consolidated Fund of the State, and constitute Funds.

243I: the Governor shall constitute a Finance Commission within one year of the commencement of the Amendment and every fifth year thereafter, to review the financial position of the panchayats and recommend on the distribution of taxes between the State and the panchayats, the taxes to be assigned to them and grants in aid; and every recommendation, with an explanatory memorandum on the action taken, shall be laid before the State Legislature.

243J: the State may provide for accounts and audit.

Note the asymmetry: constituting the Finance Commission is mandatory, and accepting its recommendations is not. The obligation is to receive advice and to answer for it in public.

Article 243K: elections

The superintendence, direction and control of electoral rolls and of the conduct of all panchayat elections is vested in a State Election Commission consisting of a State Election Commissioner appointed by the Governor, who shall not be removed except in like manner and on the like grounds as a judge of a High Court and whose conditions of service shall not be varied to his disadvantage after appointment.

That removal protection is the whole point. It gives the Commission the security a State Government cannot touch, which is why Kishansing Tomar could hold that the Commission may compel the State.

Articles 243L to 243O

243L: application to Union territories. 243M: the Part does not apply to certain areas, including the Scheduled Areas and tribal areas, though Parliament may extend it with exceptions, which it did by the Panchayats (Extension to the Scheduled Areas) Act, 1996. 243N: existing laws continue for one year unless earlier repealed. 243O: a bar on interference by courts in the delimitation of constituencies or the allotment of seats, and a bar on questioning an election except by an election petition as State law provides.

munotes.in472

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

The Eleventh Schedule

Twenty nine subjects, under article 243G. Agriculture; land improvement and land reform; minor irrigation and watershed development; animal husbandry, dairying and poultry; fisheries; social and farm forestry; minor forest produce; small scale industries; khadi, village and cottage industries; rural housing; drinking water; fuel and fodder; roads and other communications; rural electrification; non-conventional energy; poverty alleviation; education including primary and secondary schools; technical and vocational training; adult and non-formal education; libraries; cultural activities; markets and fairs; health and sanitation; family welfare; women and child development; social welfare; welfare of the weaker sections and in particular the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes; the public distribution system; and the maintenance of community assets.

The Eleventh Schedule is a list of subjects that may be devolved, not a grant of power. A panchayat has a function only when State law confers it. An answer that says the Schedule gives panchayats twenty nine functions is wrong.

A worked example

A State conducts its panchayat elections in 2020 and constitutes the bodies. In 2023 it dissolves a zila parishad after a dispute with its chairperson, and proposes to hold the fresh election in 2026 along with the general panchayat elections, saying that delimitation is pending and that two elections in three years is wasteful.

Article 243E(3)(b): the election must be completed within six months of the dissolution.

Article 243E(4): the panchayat then constituted would in any case continue only for the remainder of the original term, so the State's convenience argument gains it nothing that the Constitution allows.

Kishansing Tomar: delimitation and the preparation of rolls do not justify postponement, and the State Election Commission may seek a mandamus if the State does not cooperate.

And article 243O does not save the State, because the bar operates against questioning an election that has been held, not against a direction that one be held.

The 73rd Amendment in one example: before 1993 the State's plan was lawful, and after 1993 it is not.

Distinctions that carry marks

FeatureArticleMandatory or enabling
Gram Sabha exists243(b), 243AExists mandatorily; its powers are what the State gives
Three tiers243BMandatory, subject to the twenty lakh exception
Direct election of all seats243C(2)Mandatory
Reservation, Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes243D(1)Mandatory, proportionate
Reservation, women, not less than one-third243D(3)Mandatory, and no time limit
Reservation, chairperson offices243D(4)Mandatory, one-third for women
Reservation, backward classes243D(6)Enabling only
Five year term and timely elections243EMandatory
Powers and functions243GEnabling
Eleventh Schedule, 29 subjects243G(b)A list to devolve from, not a grant
Finance Commission every five years243IMandatory to constitute; recommendations not binding
State Election Commission243KMandatory, with High Court judge removal protection
munotes.in473

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

What the 73rd Amendment is NOT

It is not a grant of powers to panchayats. It guarantees their existence, their election and their term. What they may do is left to State law under article 243G, which is the principal criticism of it.

It does not make panchayats a third tier of the federation. They are creatures of State law within a constitutional frame, they have no legislative list, and their revenue depends mainly on State transfers.

It did not apply everywhere at once. Article 243M excluded the Scheduled Areas and tribal areas, and Parliament extended the Part to the Scheduled Areas separately in 1996.

And it did not by itself deliver inclusion. It delivered seats. Chapters 930 and 940 are about the difference.

Quick revision

  1. Act and dates: the Constitution (Seventy-third Amendment) Act, 1992, inserting Part IX, articles 243 to 243O and the Eleventh Schedule, in force 24 April 1993.
  2. Structure: 243B, panchayats shall be constituted at village, intermediate and district levels, the intermediate tier optional below twenty lakhs; 243C, all seats by direct election, chairpersons of the upper tiers elected by and from the elected members.
  3. Reservation, 243D: Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in proportion to population; one-third of those seats for their women; not less than one-third of all seats for women; chairperson offices reserved likewise; SC and ST reservation ends with article 334 but the women's reservation has no time limit; and 243D(6) merely enables reservation for backward classes.
  4. Term, 243E: five years and no longer; election before expiry or within six months of dissolution; the successor serves only the remainder.
  5. Institutions: 243I, a State Finance Commission every five years whose report is laid before the legislature; 243K, an independent State Election Commission whose Commissioner is removable only as a High Court judge is.
  6. Functions: 243G is permissive, and the Eleventh Schedule's twenty nine subjects are a menu for devolution. This is the gap the Amendment did not close.
  7. Cases: Kishansing Tomar, the term is mandatory and the State Election Commission may compel the State by mandamus; K. Krishna Murthy, the women's reservation has no article 334 sunset, and reservation in local bodies rests on a distinct constitutional basis.
munotes.in474

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

Test yourself

1. Name the key features of the 73rd Amendment with the article for each. Article 243 defines the Gram Sabha as the body of persons registered in the electoral rolls of a village and a panchayat as an institution of self-government. Article 243A leaves the Gram Sabha's powers to State law. Article 243B makes panchayats compulsory at the village, intermediate and district levels, the intermediate tier being optional in a State under twenty lakhs. Article 243C requires all seats to be filled by direct election. Article 243D reserves seats for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in proportion to population, one-third of those seats for their women, and not less than one-third of all directly elected seats and of chairperson offices for women. Article 243E fixes a five year term with elections before expiry or within six months of dissolution. Article 243G enables the State to devolve powers, with the Eleventh Schedule's twenty nine subjects. Article 243I requires a State Finance Commission every five years and article 243K an independent State Election Commission. Articles 243M and 243O deal with excluded areas and the bar on judicial interference in electoral matters.

2. Which provisions are mandatory and which merely enabling, and why does the difference matter? Mandatory: the constitution of panchayats at three levels, direct election of all seats, reservation for the Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes and women, the five year term with timely elections, the constitution of a Finance Commission every five years, and the establishment of a State Election Commission. Enabling: the conferment of powers and functions under article 243G, the taxation provisions in article 243H, and reservation for backward classes under article 243D(6). The difference matters because it identifies exactly what the Amendment achieved and what it left open. A State cannot avoid having elected, reserved, term limited panchayats, but it can leave them with almost nothing to do, which is why devolution has varied so widely between States since 1993.

3. Explain article 243E and the case that enforces it. Every panchayat continues for five years from the date appointed for its first meeting and no longer unless sooner dissolved; an election to constitute a panchayat must be completed before the expiry of that duration or, where it has been dissolved, before the expiration of six months from the dissolution; and a panchayat constituted upon a dissolution continues only for the remainder of the period the dissolved body would have served. In Kishansing Tomar v. Municipal Corporation of the City of Ahmedabad, decided on the identical municipal provision in article 243U, the Supreme Court held that the object and purpose of the article must be carried out so that elections are completed before the expiry of the term, that administrative difficulties such as delimitation and the preparation of electoral rolls do not justify postponement, that a State Election Commission's powers in its own domain are no less than those of the Election Commission of India, and that where a State does not render assistance the Commission may seek a writ of mandamus from the High Court and thereafter from the Supreme Court.

munotes.in475

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

4. What does the Eleventh Schedule do, and what does it not do? It lists twenty nine subjects, from agriculture, minor irrigation and drinking water to primary education, health and sanitation, women and child development, the public distribution system and the maintenance of community assets. It is referred to in article 243G, under which the State Legislature may by law endow panchayats with powers to enable them to function as institutions of self-government, including for the preparation and implementation of plans for economic development and social justice in relation to the matters listed. What it does not do is confer any function on any panchayat. A panchayat acquires a function only when a State law devolves it, so the Schedule is a menu for devolution rather than a grant of power, and an answer that treats it as conferring twenty nine functions is wrong.

5. Why is the State Election Commission the centrepiece of the reform? Because the principal failure between 1950 and 1992 was that elections were simply not held, and the body that had to hold them was answerable to the Government whose defeat they might produce. Article 243K vests the superintendence, direction and control of the rolls and of the conduct of all panchayat elections in a State Election Commission, and protects the State Election Commissioner by providing that he may not be removed except in the like manner and on the like grounds as a judge of a High Court and that his conditions of service may not be varied to his disadvantage after appointment. That security is what allows the Commission to insist, and in Kishansing Tomar the Court held that it may compel a reluctant State by mandamus, so the guarantee of a five year term has an institution behind it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in476

Chapter Ninety-One

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments"

In one line

The 74th Amendment did for towns what the 73rd did for villages, and added two things villages did not need: a committee inside the town below the level of the council, and a committee above the town that makes the rural and urban plans into one plan for the district.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the Constitution (Seventy-fourth Amendment) Act, 1992, in force from 1 June 1993, inserted Part IXA, "The Municipalities", comprising articles 243P to 243ZG and the Twelfth Schedule; it requires the constitution of a Nagar Panchayat for a transitional area, a Municipal Council for a smaller urban area and a Municipal Corporation for a larger urban area, direct election of all seats from wards, reservation for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and women on the same pattern as article 243D, a five year term with timely elections, elections conducted by the same State Election Commission, finance reviewed by the same State Finance Commission, and eighteen subjects listed in the Twelfth Schedule; and it adds Wards Committees in municipalities of three lakhs or more, a District Planning Committee in every district and a Metropolitan Planning Committee in every metropolitan area.

What is the same as Part IX

An answer should dispose of this in a paragraph and then go to the differences.

PanchayatsMunicipalitiesSubstance
243B243QConstitution of the bodies is mandatory
243C243RAll seats by direct election
243D243TReservation for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in proportion to population, one-third of those seats for their women, not less than one-third of all seats for women, chairperson offices reserved as State law provides, backward classes enabling only under 243T(6)
243E243UFive years and no longer; election before expiry or within six months of dissolution
243F243VDisqualifications, with the twenty one years proviso
243G243WPowers may be devolved, with the Twelfth Schedule
243H243XTaxes, assignment, grants in aid, Funds
243I243YThe same Finance Commission constituted under 243I reviews municipal finances too
243J243ZAccounts and audit
243K243ZAThe same State Election Commission conducts municipal elections
243M243ZCScheduled Areas and tribal areas excluded
243O243ZGBar on interference by courts in electoral matters

Note the two economies. There is one State Election Commission and one State Finance Commission for both rural and urban bodies, under articles 243ZA and 243Y. This is worth a line in an answer because it is what makes Kishansing Tomar, decided on a municipal corporation, authority for panchayats as well.

The four things that are different

1. Three kinds of municipality, article 243Q

There shall be constituted in every State:

a Nagar Panchayat for a transitional area, that is, an area in transition from rural to urban;

munotes.in477

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

a Municipal Council for a smaller urban area; and

a Municipal Corporation for a larger urban area.

Who decides which is which. The Governor, by public notification, having regard to population, density, the revenue generated for local administration, the percentage of employment in non-agricultural activities, economic importance and such other factors as he thinks fit.

The industrial township proviso. A municipality may not be constituted in an urban area where an industrial establishment provides or proposes to provide the municipal services, if the Governor so specifies. This is the one place in Part IXA where an urban population may lawfully have no elected local government, and it is worth knowing because it is the exception a question can be built on.

Why the three fold classification matters. Village panchayats are all of one kind at each tier, and towns are not. A settlement of eight thousand becoming urban and a city of eight million cannot have the same institution, so Part IXA classifies by the character of the area rather than by a tier.

2. Wards Committees, article 243S

There shall be constituted Wards Committees, consisting of one or more wards, within the territorial area of a municipality having a population of three lakhs or more.

The State decides their composition and territorial area and how their seats are filled.

Every municipal councillor of a ward within the committee's area is a member of it, and where the committee is one ward that councillor is its chairperson, and where it is two or more wards the chairperson is elected by the committee from among those councillors.

And the State may constitute other committees besides, under clause (5).

The point of the article. In a city of several million a councillor may represent fifty thousand people, so the "local" body is not local at all. The Wards Committee is the attempt to create a level below the corporation, and it is the nearest urban equivalent of a Gram Sabha.

But notice the difference from a Gram Sabha. A Gram Sabha is every voter. A Wards Committee is composed as the State provides, and in most States it is composed of councillors and nominees rather than residents. This is the standing criticism of the urban half of the reform: the citizen has no assembly.

3. The District Planning Committee, article 243ZD

There shall be constituted in every State at the district level a District Planning Committee to consolidate the plans prepared by the panchayats and the municipalities in the district and to prepare a draft development plan for the district as a whole.

munotes.in478

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

Not less than four-fifths of its members shall be elected by and from amongst the elected members of the district panchayat and of the municipalities in the district, in proportion to the ratio between the rural and urban population of the district.

In preparing the plan it shall have regard to matters of common interest between the panchayats and the municipalities, including spatial planning, the sharing of water and other physical and natural resources, the integrated development of infrastructure and environmental conservation, and to the resources available; and it shall consult such institutions as the Governor specifies.

The chairperson forwards the plan to the State Government.

This is the most under-used article in both Parts and the best material for a distinguishing answer. It is the only provision in the Constitution that makes rural and urban local government plan together. A city's water, its landfill, its quarries and its outward growth all lie in the villages around it, and article 243ZD is the mechanism by which those villages have four-fifths elected representation in deciding the district plan.

4. The Metropolitan Planning Committee, article 243ZE

There shall be constituted in every metropolitan area a Metropolitan Planning Committee to prepare a draft development plan for the metropolitan area as a whole.

Metropolitan area, defined in article 243P, means an area of ten lakhs or more, in one or more districts, consisting of two or more municipalities or panchayats or other contiguous areas, notified by the Governor.

Not less than two-thirds of its members shall be elected by and from amongst the elected members of the municipalities and the chairpersons of the panchayats in the metropolitan area, in proportion to their populations; and the State may provide for the representation of the Union and State Governments and of such organisations as are necessary.

Note the drop from four-fifths to two-thirds and the express space for the two Governments: the drafters accepted that a metropolitan plan cannot be made by local bodies alone, and kept an elected majority anyway.

The Twelfth Schedule

Eighteen subjects, under article 243W. Urban planning including town planning; regulation of land use and construction of buildings; planning for economic and social development; roads and bridges; water supply; public health, sanitation, conservancy and solid waste management; fire services; urban forestry, protection of the environment and promotion of ecological aspects; safeguarding the interests of weaker sections; slum improvement and upgradation; urban poverty alleviation; urban amenities such as parks, gardens and playgrounds; promotion of cultural, educational and aesthetic aspects; burials and cremations; cattle pounds and prevention of cruelty to animals; vital statistics including registration of births and deaths; public amenities including street lighting, parking lots, bus stops and public conveniences; and the regulation of slaughter houses and tanneries.

munotes.in479

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

Like the Eleventh Schedule it is a menu for devolution under a permissive article, not a grant. And in cities the gap is wider than in villages, because water, transport, housing and planning are commonly run by State parastatals that no municipality controls.

A worked example

A city of forty lakhs has a Municipal Corporation. Its landfill is in a village panchayat eleven kilometres outside the municipal limits, its water is drawn from a reservoir in the next district, and a State development authority, not the corporation, prepares its master plan and allots land. Residents of a ward complain that they were never consulted about a flyover.

On the ward. A Wards Committee is mandatory, the population exceeding three lakhs. Whether the residents may attend it depends on how the State composed it under article 243S(2), which is where the urban reform is weakest.

On the landfill and the reservoir. These are exactly what article 243ZD names as matters of common interest between panchayats and municipalities, being the sharing of physical and natural resources and environmental conservation, and the District Planning Committee, four-fifths of whose members are elected local representatives in the rural to urban population ratio, is the body that should be resolving them.

On the metropolitan scale. Ten lakhs or more makes it a metropolitan area if notified, so a Metropolitan Planning Committee with a two-thirds elected membership should be preparing the draft development plan for the area as a whole.

On the development authority. Nothing in Part IXA abolishes it. Article 243W is permissive, so if the State has not devolved planning, the corporation does not have it.

That last line is the honest conclusion about the 74th Amendment. It guaranteed that towns would have elected councils on time. It did not guarantee that those councils would govern the town.

Distinctions that carry marks

73rd Amendment74th Amendment
Part and articlesPart IX, 243 to 243OPart IXA, 243P to 243ZG
In force24 April 19931 June 1993
BodiesVillage, intermediate, district panchayatsNagar Panchayat, Municipal Council, Municipal Corporation
Classified byTierCharacter of the area, decided by the Governor
Base level assemblyGram Sabha, every voter, 243AWards Committee, composed as the State provides, 243S, only above three lakhs
ScheduleEleventh, 29 subjectsTwelfth, 18 subjects
PlanningNone specificDistrict Planning Committee 243ZD, four-fifths elected; Metropolitan Planning Committee 243ZE, two-thirds elected
Election Commission243KThe same one, 243ZA
Finance Commission243IThe same one, 243Y
May be excludedScheduled Areas, 243MScheduled Areas, 243ZC; and an industrial township, proviso to 243Q(1)
munotes.in480

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

What the 74th Amendment is NOT

It is not a separate scheme. It is Part IX applied to towns with four additions, and the two commissions are shared.

It is not a transfer of urban government to municipalities. Article 243W is permissive, and in most large cities water, transport, housing and master planning remain with State authorities.

The Wards Committee is not an urban Gram Sabha. It is a committee of councillors, not an assembly of residents, and only in municipalities of three lakhs or more.

And the planning committees are not optional. Articles 243ZD and 243ZE say "there shall be constituted". Their neglect in practice is a failure to comply, not a permitted choice.

Quick revision

  1. Act and dates: the Constitution (Seventy-fourth Amendment) Act, 1992, Part IXA, articles 243P to 243ZG, Twelfth Schedule, in force 1 June 1993.
  2. Three bodies, 243Q: Nagar Panchayat for a transitional area, Municipal Council for a smaller urban area, Municipal Corporation for a larger urban area, classified by the Governor on population, density, revenue, non-agricultural employment and economic importance. The industrial township proviso allows no municipality at all.
  3. Wards Committees, 243S: mandatory in municipalities of three lakhs or more; ward councillors are members; composition otherwise left to the State. Not an assembly of residents.
  4. District Planning Committee, 243ZD: in every district; consolidates panchayat and municipal plans into a draft district plan; not less than four-fifths elected by and from the elected members of the district panchayat and the municipalities in the rural to urban population ratio; regard to spatial planning, sharing of water and other resources, infrastructure and environmental conservation.
  5. Metropolitan Planning Committee, 243ZE: in every metropolitan area, meaning ten lakhs or more with two or more municipalities or panchayats; not less than two-thirds elected; the two Governments may be represented.
  6. Shared institutions: the same State Election Commission (243ZA) and the same State Finance Commission (243Y), which is why Kishansing Tomar, a municipal case on article 243U, governs panchayats under article 243E as well.
  7. Twelfth Schedule, 18 subjects, under the permissive article 243W.

Test yourself

1. State the key features of the 74th Amendment. It inserted Part IXA, articles 243P to 243ZG, and the Twelfth Schedule, with effect from 1 June 1993. Article 243Q requires a Nagar Panchayat for a transitional area, a Municipal Council for a smaller urban area and a Municipal Corporation for a larger urban area, the classification being made by the Governor. Article 243R requires all seats to be filled by direct election from wards. Article 243T reserves seats for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in proportion to population, one-third of those for their women, and not less than one-third of all seats for women, and enables reservation for backward classes. Article 243U fixes a five year term with elections before expiry or within six months of dissolution. Article 243W enables devolution with the Twelfth Schedule's eighteen subjects. Articles 243Y and 243ZA place municipal finance and municipal elections with the same State Finance Commission and State Election Commission as for panchayats. And articles 243S, 243ZD and 243ZE add Wards Committees, District Planning Committees and Metropolitan Planning Committees.

munotes.in481

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

2. What is genuinely different about the urban Part, and why? Four things. The three fold classification of municipalities, because towns differ in kind, whereas panchayat tiers are uniform, and because the Governor must judge population, density, revenue, non-agricultural employment and economic importance. The Wards Committee, because a city councillor may represent fifty thousand people, so a level below the council is needed if local government is to be local. The District Planning Committee, because a city's water, waste and outward growth lie in the villages around it and somebody must make one plan out of the rural and urban plans. And the Metropolitan Planning Committee, because a metropolitan area of ten lakhs or more spans several municipalities and panchayats and no single body within it can plan for the whole.

3. Explain article 243ZD and say why it matters. There shall be constituted in every State at the district level a District Planning Committee, to consolidate the plans prepared by the panchayats and the municipalities in the district and to prepare a draft development plan for the district as a whole. Not less than four-fifths of its members must be elected by and from amongst the elected members of the district panchayat and of the municipalities, in proportion to the district's rural and urban populations. In preparing the plan it must have regard to matters of common interest between panchayats and municipalities, including spatial planning, the sharing of water and other physical and natural resources, the integrated development of infrastructure and environmental conservation, and to available resources, and it must consult the institutions the Governor specifies; the chairperson forwards the plan to the State Government. It matters because it is the only provision in the Constitution that makes rural and urban local government plan together, and because it gives the villages that carry a city's landfill, water and expansion a four-fifths elected voice in the district plan.

4. Compare the Gram Sabha with the Wards Committee. The Gram Sabha, under article 243, is a body consisting of every person registered in the electoral rolls of the village, so it is an assembly of citizens, and it exists in every village by force of the definition itself, though its powers are what State law gives it under article 243A. A Wards Committee under article 243S exists only in a municipality of three lakhs or more, its composition and the manner of filling its seats are left entirely to State law, and the only members the Constitution guarantees are the councillors representing the wards it covers, one of whom is its chairperson. So the rural citizen has a constitutional assembly with uncertain powers, and the urban citizen has no assembly at all, which is the sharpest criticism of the urban half of the 1992 reform.

munotes.in482

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

5. Why is Kishansing Tomar authority for both Parts? Because it was decided on article 243U, the municipal provision on duration, which is in identical terms to article 243E for panchayats, and because articles 243ZA and 243Y make the State Election Commission and the State Finance Commission common to both Parts. The Court held that elections to a municipality must be completed before the expiry of its five year term, that administrative difficulties such as delimitation and the preparation of electoral rolls do not justify postponement, that the powers of a State Election Commission in respect of the conduct of elections are no less than those of the Election Commission of India in its domain, and that where a State does not render assistance the Commission may seek a writ of mandamus from the High Court and then the Supreme Court. Since the same Commission conducts panchayat elections under the same design, the holding governs the rural bodies equally.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in483

Chapter Ninety-Two

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy"

In one line

The Gram Sabha is the only body in the Indian constitutional scheme that consists of every voter rather than of representatives, which makes it the point at which participatory democracy enters a Constitution that is otherwise representative throughout.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: by article 243(b) the Gram Sabha is a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls relating to a village comprised within the area of a panchayat at the village level, and by article 243A it may exercise such powers and perform such functions at the village level as the Legislature of a State may by law provide; it is thus the assembly of the whole village electorate rather than an elected body, and it is the constitutional expression of participatory democracy, meaning a system in which citizens take part directly in decisions rather than only in choosing those who decide, though its powers depend on State law and are in most States advisory, so that the article guarantees the assembly and not its authority.

The Gram Sabha in the Constitution

Article 243(b): "Gram Sabha" means a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls relating to a village comprised within the area of a panchayat at the village level.

Read the definition carefully, because everything follows from it.

It is a body of persons, not of representatives. Every registered voter of the village is a member by virtue of being on the roll. There is no election to it and no seats in it.

It exists automatically. A State does not constitute a Gram Sabha; it exists wherever there is a village panchayat, because the definition makes it the electorate of that village.

It is only at the village level. There is no equivalent at the intermediate or district level, and none in Part IXA for towns, which chapter 910 identifies as the sharpest gap in the urban reform.

Article 243A: A Gram Sabha may exercise such powers and perform such functions at the village level as the Legislature of a State may, by law, provide.

The word is "may", and the powers are the State's to give. This is the weakness in the design and an answer must name it. The Constitution creates an assembly of every voter and then leaves it to the State to decide whether that assembly decides anything. In most States its statutory functions are to meet a fixed number of times a year, to consider the annual accounts, the audit report and the development programme, and to be consulted, and its resolutions do not bind the panchayat.

Where the Gram Sabha has real power: two central Acts

This is the material that turns a general answer into a good one, because it is where Parliament did what article 243A only permitted.

munotes.in484

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

PESA, 1996

The Provisions of the Panchayats (Extension to the Scheduled Areas) Act, 1996, Act 40 of 1996, extends Part IX to the Scheduled Areas under article 243M(4) and, by section 4, forbids a State Legislature to make any law inconsistent with the features it lists. Among them:

Section 4(b): a village shall ordinarily consist of a habitation, a group of habitations, a hamlet or a group of hamlets comprising a community and managing its affairs in accordance with traditions and customs. The unit is the community, not an administrative area.

Section 4(c): every village shall have a Gram Sabha consisting of persons whose names are in the electoral rolls for the panchayat at the village level.

Section 4(d): every Gram Sabha shall be competent to safeguard and preserve the traditions and customs of the people, their cultural identity, community resources and the customary mode of dispute resolution.

Section 4(e): every Gram Sabha shall approve the plans, programmes and projects for social and economic development before they are taken up by the village panchayat, and shall be responsible for the identification or selection of beneficiaries under poverty alleviation and other programmes.

Section 4(f): the village panchayat must obtain from the Gram Sabha a certification of utilisation of funds for those plans and projects.

Section 4(i): the Gram Sabha or the panchayat at the appropriate level shall be consulted before the acquisition of land in the Scheduled Areas for development projects and before resettling or rehabilitating those affected.

Sections 4(k) and 4(l): the recommendation of the Gram Sabha or the panchayat shall be mandatory before a prospecting licence or mining lease for minor minerals is granted, and before a concession for their exploitation by auction.

Section 4(m): the State must specifically endow the panchayats and the Gram Sabha with the power to prohibit or regulate intoxicants, the ownership of minor forest produce, the power to prevent alienation of land and restore land unlawfully alienated from a Scheduled Tribe, the management of village markets, control over money lending to Scheduled Tribes, control over institutions and functionaries in the social sectors, and control over local plans and resources including tribal sub-plans.

Section 4(n): the State law must contain safeguards to ensure that a panchayat at a higher level does not assume the powers of a panchayat at a lower level or of the Gram Sabha.

PESA is the strongest answer to "what could a Gram Sabha be". Approval before implementation, selection of beneficiaries, certification of expenditure, mandatory consultation before land acquisition and a mandatory recommendation before a mining lease are decision powers, not consultative ones. In the Scheduled Areas Parliament made the Gram Sabha a governing body; in the rest of India the States have not.

munotes.in485

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

The Forest Rights Act, 2006

Section 2(g) defines the Gram Sabha for that Act as a village assembly which shall consist of all adult members of a village, and, in States having no panchayats, of Padas, Tolas and other traditional village institutions and elected village committees, with full and unrestricted participation of women.

Section 6(1): the Gram Sabha shall be the authority to initiate the process for determining the nature and extent of individual or community forest rights, by receiving claims, consolidating and verifying them and preparing a map of each recommended claim, and shall then pass a resolution and forward it to the Sub-Divisional Level Committee.

Section 6(2): a person aggrieved by the Gram Sabha's resolution may petition that Committee within sixty days, and may not be decided against without a reasonable opportunity to present his case.

Section 4(2)(e): where rights holders are to be resettled out of a critical wildlife habitat, resettlement requires that the free informed consent of the Gram Sabhas in the areas concerned has been obtained in writing.

Two things here are worth a line in an answer. The Act widens the assembly to all adult members with full and unrestricted participation of women, which is broader than the electoral roll of article 243(b). And it makes the Gram Sabha an authority determining rights with an appeal from its decisions, which is a judicial rather than an advisory function.

Participatory democracy

The definition. Participatory democracy is a system in which citizens take part directly and continuously in the decisions that affect them, rather than only in the periodic choice of the representatives who will decide.

Its argument, which is Rousseau's and Mill's and Green's from Modules I and III. From Rousseau, that the general will cannot be represented, so a citizen who only votes for a representative is free only on election day. From Mill, that participation educates: a person who takes part in a public decision learns to weigh interests other than his own, and that is the chief benefit of local institutions. From Green, that freedom is a positive power to do things worth doing, and taking part in the government of one's own place is one of them.

Its forms: the assembly, as in the Gram Sabha; the referendum; participatory budgeting, in which residents decide directly how a share of the local budget is spent; the social audit, in which the people who were meant to receive a benefit verify the record in public; and the right to information, which is what makes any of the others possible.

munotes.in486

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

Representative democracy is also called indirect democracy, and MU has asked for its two main features by that name. They are that the people do not decide the questions themselves but elect representatives who decide for them, and that those representatives are accountable at periodic elections, from which the rest follows: a fixed term, a defined constituency, and a body small enough to sit, debate and legislate. Direct democracy is the opposite arrangement, in which the citizens decide the questions themselves, and the Gram Sabha is the one place in the Indian constitutional scheme where it survives.

Its relation to representative democracy is not competition. No modern State can be run by assembly, and no assembly can legislate for a country. The claim of participatory democracy is that representation is necessary at scale and insufficient by itself, and that at the level where people live there should be direct decision, which is exactly the design of Part IX: representation in the panchayat and participation in the Gram Sabha.

The criticisms. Attendance is low, and those who attend are not a cross section, so an assembly may be captured more easily than an election. Deliberation in public exposes the poor and the excluded to pressure from those they depend on, which is Ambedkar's objection at chapter 880 applied to the meeting itself. It is slow. And decisions taken by those present bind those absent without their having consented, which is not obviously better than representation.

A worked example

A company applies for a lease to quarry sand from a river bed in a Scheduled Area. The village panchayat supports it. Thirty of the households that use the river for irrigation object. The Gram Sabha meets and resolves against the lease.

Outside the Scheduled Areas, under article 243A alone, the resolution has whatever effect the State Act gives it, which is usually none. The panchayat may proceed and the Gram Sabha has no remedy, because the article says the State Legislature may provide the powers and this State has not.

Inside a Scheduled Area, section 4(k) of PESA makes the recommendation of the Gram Sabha mandatory prior to the grant of a prospecting licence or mining lease for minor minerals, and section 4(n) requires the State law to prevent a higher panchayat from assuming the Gram Sabha's powers. The lease cannot lawfully be granted against the Gram Sabha's recommendation.

If forest rights are involved, section 6 of the Forest Rights Act makes the Gram Sabha the authority to determine community forest rights over the same land, with a petition to the Sub-Divisional Level Committee for anybody aggrieved.

munotes.in487

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

The example is the whole topic in one page. The same assembly of the same villagers is a debating society in one part of India and a decision maker in another, and the difference is not the Constitution but what Parliament and the State Legislatures have done with article 243A.

Distinctions that carry marks

Gram SabhaGram Panchayat
Composed ofEvery voter of the villageMembers elected from wards
Created byThe definition in article 243(b)Constituted under article 243B
PowersWhatever State law gives, article 243ADevolved under article 243G
ReservationNone, and none is possible: everybody is a memberArticles 243D, seats and chairperson
TermNone; it is permanentFive years, article 243E
CharacterParticipatoryRepresentative
Representative democracyParticipatory democracy
The citizenChooses who decidesDecides
FrequencyPeriodicContinuous
ScaleAnySmall
StrengthWorkable at scale; specialised; accountable at electionsEducates; decisions reflect those affected; harder to capture from outside
WeaknessDistance; the voter's control is weak between electionsLow and unrepresentative attendance; pressure on the weak; slow; binds the absent
In Part IXThe panchayatThe Gram Sabha

What this is NOT

The Gram Sabha is not a committee of the panchayat. It is the village electorate itself, and article 243A treats it as a separate institution.

It is not elected. There is no such thing as a member or a chairperson of a Gram Sabha elected as such, and nothing in article 243D applies to it.

Article 243A does not give it any power. It permits a State to give it powers. That distinction is the point of the article.

And participatory democracy is not a substitute for representative democracy. It is a claim about the level at which direct decision is possible, not a proposal to abolish legislatures.

Quick revision

  1. Article 243(b): the Gram Sabha is a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls of a village within a village level panchayat area. Not elected, not a committee, and existing automatically.
  2. Article 243A: it may exercise such powers as the Legislature of a State may, by law, provide. The assembly is guaranteed; its authority is not.
  3. Only at the village level, and there is no urban equivalent; article 243S's Wards Committee is a committee of councillors.
  4. PESA 1996, section 4: the village is a community managing its affairs by tradition and custom; every village shall have a Gram Sabha; it is competent to safeguard traditions, cultural identity, community resources and customary dispute resolution; it approves plans before implementation and selects beneficiaries; it certifies utilisation of funds; it must be consulted before land acquisition; its recommendation is mandatory before a minor mineral lease; and higher panchayats may not assume its powers.
  5. Forest Rights Act 2006: section 2(g), a village assembly of all adult members with full and unrestricted participation of women; section 6, the Gram Sabha is the authority to initiate the determination of forest rights, with a petition to the Sub-Divisional Level Committee within sixty days; section 4(2)(e), resettlement from a critical wildlife habitat needs its free informed consent in writing.
  6. Participatory democracy: citizens decide rather than only choosing deciders. Grounded in Rousseau (the general will cannot be represented), Mill (participation educates) and Green (positive freedom). Forms: assembly, referendum, participatory budgeting, social audit, and the right to information.
  7. Criticisms: low and unrepresentative attendance; public deliberation exposes the dependent, which is Ambedkar's objection inside the meeting; slowness; and binding the absent.
munotes.in488

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

Test yourself

1. What is a Gram Sabha, and what does the Constitution do about it? Article 243(b) defines it as a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls relating to a village comprised within the area of a panchayat at the village level, so it is the whole village electorate rather than an elected body, it has no seats and no term, and it exists automatically wherever there is a village panchayat. Article 243A provides that it may exercise such powers and perform such functions at the village level as the Legislature of a State may by law provide. The Constitution therefore guarantees the assembly and leaves its authority to State law, which in most States has amounted to a duty to meet a fixed number of times a year and to consider accounts, audit reports and programmes, with resolutions that do not bind the panchayat.

2. Where does the Gram Sabha have real power, and what power is it? Under two central Acts. Under section 4 of PESA, 1996, in the Scheduled Areas, every village must have a Gram Sabha; it is competent to safeguard the traditions, customs, cultural identity, community resources and customary dispute resolution of the people; it approves plans, programmes and projects for social and economic development before the panchayat takes them up; it identifies or selects beneficiaries under poverty alleviation programmes; it certifies the utilisation of funds; it must be consulted before land is acquired for development projects and before resettlement; its recommendation is mandatory before a prospecting licence or mining lease for minor minerals; and State law must ensure that higher panchayats do not assume its powers. Under the Forest Rights Act, 2006, it is the authority to initiate the determination of individual and community forest rights by receiving, consolidating and verifying claims and passing a resolution, subject to a petition to the Sub-Divisional Level Committee within sixty days, and resettlement from a critical wildlife habitat requires its free informed written consent.

munotes.in489

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

3. Define participatory democracy and give the argument for it. It is a system in which citizens take part directly and continuously in the decisions that affect them, rather than only in the periodic choice of representatives. The argument has three strands from earlier modules. Rousseau's, that the general will cannot be represented, so that a citizen who merely elects a representative is free only on polling day. Mill's, that participation educates, because a person who takes part in a public decision must weigh interests other than his own, which he treated as the chief benefit of local institutions. And Green's, that freedom is a positive power to do things worth doing, of which governing one's own place is one. Its forms are the assembly, the referendum, participatory budgeting, the social audit and the right to information.

4. Is participatory democracy an alternative to representative democracy? No, and Part IX shows why. No modern State can be governed by assembly and no assembly can legislate for a country, so representation is unavoidable at scale. The claim of participatory democracy is that representation is necessary but not sufficient, and that at the level where people actually live there should be direct decision. Part IX embodies exactly that division: the panchayat is representative, elected from wards for a fixed term with reserved seats, and the Gram Sabha is participatory, consisting of every voter with no election, no term and no reservation, because everyone is already a member.

5. State the criticisms of the Gram Sabha as an instrument of participation. That attendance is low and those who attend are not a cross section of the village, so an assembly can be captured more cheaply than an election can. That deliberating in public exposes the poor, the landless and the excluded to pressure from the people they depend on for work and credit, which is Ambedkar's objection to the village applied to the meeting itself, and it is why the Forest Rights Act's insistence on full and unrestricted participation of women matters. That assemblies are slow and cannot handle technical business. That decisions taken by those present bind those absent, who have consented to nothing. And, most importantly in India, that article 243A leaves its powers to the State, so that outside the Scheduled Areas the assembly usually has no decision to be captured or contested in the first place.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in490

Chapter Ninety-Three

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Syllabus topic 4.3.3, "Implications for gender and social inclusion- Promises & Limitations"

In one line

The 73rd and 74th Amendments reserved not less than one third of all seats and of chairperson offices for women, which put more women into elected office in India than any other measure ever has, and the limits are that a seat is not the same as authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: articles 243D(3) and 243T(3) reserve not less than one third of the seats to be filled by direct election in every panchayat and municipality for women, articles 243D(2) and 243T(2) reserve not less than one third of the seats reserved for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes for women of those communities, and articles 243D(4) and 243T(4) reserve not less than one third of the offices of chairperson at each level for women; the reservation has no time limit, since article 243D(5) applies the article 334 sunset only to the Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe reservation, and many States have raised the share to one half by law, which the words "not less than" permit; the promise is descriptive representation and its documented effects on what local bodies spend on and on what voters come to accept, and the limitations are the proxy exercise of office by male relatives, the disruption caused by rotation of reserved seats, the dependence of local bodies on officials and on money they do not control, and disqualifications in State law that fall hardest on the women the reservation was meant to reach.

The promise

What the Constitution actually reserved

Article 243D(3), and identically article 243T(3) for municipalities: not less than one-third, including the seats reserved for women of the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes, of the total number of seats to be filled by direct election in every panchayat shall be reserved for women, and such seats may be allotted by rotation to different constituencies.

Article 243D(2), and 243T(2): not less than one-third of the seats reserved for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes shall be reserved for women belonging to those communities. This is the intersection, and it matters: without clause (2) the Scheduled Caste quota could have gone entirely to men and the women's quota entirely to the dominant castes.

Article 243D(4), and 243T(4): not less than one-third of the total number of offices of chairperson in the panchayats at each level shall be reserved for women, allotted by rotation. Office, not merely membership, which is what makes the reservation more than symbolic.

Three features that carry marks

"Not less than" is a floor, not a quota. A State may reserve more, and many have legislated for one half. Nothing in Part IX prevents it.

munotes.in491

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

There is no sunset. By article 243D(5) the reservation for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, and of chairperson offices other than the reservation for women, ceases on the expiry of the period in article 334. In K. Krishna Murthy v. Union of India, (2010) 7 SCC 202, the Court noted that there is no such time limit for the reservations made in favour of women, implying that they will operate in perpetuity. It also recorded that the challenge to the women's reservation was given up in the course of argument, so its validity has not been seriously contested.

And it came thirty years before Parliament's own. Local bodies have had this reservation since 1993. The Constitution (One Hundred and Sixth Amendment) Act, 2023 inserted articles 330A and 332A reserving as nearly as may be one third of the directly elected seats in the House of the People and in State Legislative Assemblies for women, but by article 334A those provisions come into effect only after a delimitation undertaken on the figures of the first census after that Act's commencement, and cease after fifteen years from it. The comparison is a strong closing point: the panchayat has had a woman sarpanch for three decades while the Lok Sabha's reservation has not yet begun.

What the reservation delivered

Numbers that nothing else produced. Every panchayat and municipality in India has had at least a third of its seats and a third of its chairperson offices held by women continuously since the mid nineteen nineties, across more than two lakh village panchayats. On any measure of descriptive representation this is the largest such change anywhere.

Presence changes the agenda. The research on Indian panchayats reports that bodies headed by women invest differently, with more attention to drinking water, to the condition of village roads and paths, and to services whose burden falls on women. The finding is contested in detail and the direction has been reported repeatedly.

Presence changes what voters accept. The most important reported effect is on prejudice rather than on policy: repeated exposure to women as heads of local bodies is associated with a fall in the stated belief that women are unsuited to public office, and with a greater willingness to elect them where seats are not reserved. If that is right, the reservation is self-liquidating in the long run, which is the answer to the standard objection that quotas entrench the categories they use.

And it built a route into public life. A reserved sarpanch's office is, for many women, the first position of formal authority any woman in that family has held, and a proportion of those elected on reserved seats contest again on unreserved ones.

munotes.in492

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

One more textual point. Section 2(g) of the Forest Rights Act, 2006 defines the Gram Sabha as a village assembly of all adult members with full and unrestricted participation of women, which is Parliament legislating against the practice of women being counted as members and prevented from attending. That phrase is evidence that the problem in the next section is recognised in the statute book.

The limitations

1. The proxy: sarpanch pati

The problem. A woman is elected to a reserved seat and her husband, father or son exercises the office: he attends the meetings, he signs, he deals with the officials, he is addressed by the title. The practice is common enough to have its own names in ordinary speech, sarpanch pati and pradhan pati, which is itself the best evidence that it is not rare.

Why it happens. Because the reservation changed who may hold the office and not the household, the land, the literacy or the customs that decide who speaks in a village. A seat is a legal fact; authority is a social one.

What has been done about it. Some States require the elected member personally to preside and to sign, treat proxy attendance as a ground for action, and provide training. None of it is a complete answer, because the sanction falls on the woman rather than on the relative.

And how far it goes is disputed. Proxy exercise is reported and so is its decline with time in office, second terms and exposure, and an answer should say both. The honest statement is that the reservation put women into office, that a substantial part of the office was initially exercised by men, and that the proportion falls the longer the arrangement lasts.

2. Rotation

Articles 243D(3) and 243D(4) permit reserved seats and offices to be allotted by rotation. The purpose is fairness between constituencies: no ward should be permanently reserved and no ward permanently open.

The cost is incumbency. A woman elected in a ward reserved this term finds it unreserved next term, and must either contest against the men who were excluded from it or stop. The experience she has acquired is discarded on a five year cycle, which is the opposite of what building a political career requires.

And it cuts against the strongest argument for reservation, which is the change in attitudes that comes from seeing the same person hold office and do the work.

Note that the drafters of the 2023 Amendment took the same approach for Parliament: article 334A(3) provides for rotation of the reserved seats after each subsequent delimitation, so the criticism is live at the national level too.

munotes.in493

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

3. Seats without powers, and money

Everything at chapter 900 applies here. Article 243G is permissive, so a woman sarpanch may preside over a body that has no functions worth exercising; and the money comes largely from State transfers and tied schemes. Reservation distributes the offices of local government, and it cannot make those offices powerful.

This is the most important limitation and the one most often omitted. The question is not only whether a woman holds the chair but whether the chair decides anything, and Part IX left that to the States.

4. The permanent officials

A sarpanch deals with a secretary, a block development officer and a line department, most of whom are men, most of whom are permanent, and all of whom know the rules better than a first term member does. Where the member is a woman entering public life for the first time, that asymmetry is sharper, and it is the practical form the limitation takes on any ordinary day.

5. Disqualifications that fall unevenly

Article 243F allows a State to add disqualifications for panchayat membership. Some States have imposed conditions such as a minimum educational qualification, a household toilet, no arrears of dues and a limit on the number of children. Each has a stated purpose. Their effect is to disqualify candidates from exactly the households the reservation was designed to bring in, and since literacy and control over family decisions are unequal between the sexes, they fall hardest on women.

6. Reservation is not participation

A third of the seats is a third of the seats. It does not follow that the women elected speak in meetings, that their proposals are carried, or that the women of the village attend the Gram Sabha. This is why the Forest Rights Act's phrase, full and unrestricted participation of women, does work that a seat quota cannot.

A worked example

A village panchayat of eleven seats has four reserved for women under article 243D(3), one of them for a woman of the Scheduled Castes under clause (2), and the office of sarpanch is reserved for a woman this term under clause (4). Sunita is elected sarpanch. At the first three meetings her husband occupies the chair and signs the proceedings. The block development officer deals only with him. In the fourth year she begins presiding herself and pushes through a piped water connection for the hamlet she comes from. At the next election the office is rotated to another panchayat and her ward is unreserved.

The promise is all of it. Without articles 243D(3) and (4) she is not elected at all; without clause (2) the Scheduled Caste seat and the women's seats could have been kept separate; and the water line for her hamlet is exactly the change in priorities the research reports.

munotes.in494

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

The limitations are all of it too. The proxy for three meetings is the reservation delivering a seat and not authority. The officer's conduct is the asymmetry with the permanent administration. The rotation destroys the incumbency in the year she becomes effective. And whether the water line could be built at all depended on what the State had devolved under article 243G and on money she did not control.

The correct conclusion is neither triumphal nor dismissive: the reservation is a necessary condition that is plainly not a sufficient one, and the fourth year of the example is the reason for keeping it.

Distinctions that carry marks

Local bodies, 1993Parliament and Assemblies, 2023
Provisions243D(2), (3), (4); 243T(2), (3), (4)330A, 332A, with 334A
In forceFrom 1993, immediatelyOnly after a delimitation on the first census after commencement
DurationNo time limit for womenFifteen years, article 334A(1)
QuantumNot less than one-third; States may raise itAs nearly as may be one-third
OfficesChairperson offices also reservedSeats only
RotationPermitted, 243D(3) and (4)After each delimitation, 334A(3)
PromiseLimitation
A third of all seats, and of chairperson offices, in every local bodyThe office may be exercised by a male relative
Reservation of seats for Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe women specificallyRotation destroys incumbency on a five year cycle
No sunset; States may go to one halfThe body itself may have no devolved powers or money
Changes what local bodies spend onThe permanent officials hold the expertise
Changes what voters believe about women in officeState disqualifications exclude the intended beneficiaries
A first route into public lifeA seat is not participation

What this is NOT

It is not a claim that reservation failed. Nothing else in Indian history has put comparable numbers of women into elected office, and the case against it has to explain what would have done so instead.

It is not a claim that reservation is enough. Every limitation above is real and documented.

The proxy problem is not an argument for withdrawing the reservation. It is an argument about how long the reservation must last, since the proxy declines with time and exposure and would return at once with the reservation's removal.

And reservation for women is not on the same constitutional footing as reservation for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. By article 243D(5) it has no article 334 sunset, and K. Krishna Murthy noted that it therefore operates in perpetuity.

Quick revision

  1. The provisions: 243D(3)/243T(3), not less than one-third of directly elected seats for women; 243D(2)/243T(2), one-third of the Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe seats for their women; 243D(4)/243T(4), one-third of chairperson offices at each level; allotment by rotation.
  2. "Not less than" is a floor, so States may and do reserve one half; and article 243D(5) puts no time limit on the women's reservation, which K. Krishna Murthy noted implies it operates in perpetuity, the challenge to it having been given up in argument.
  3. The contrast with 2023: articles 330A and 332A reserve a third for women in the Lok Sabha and State Assemblies, but article 334A postpones them to a delimitation after the next census and ends them after fifteen years, with rotation after each delimitation.
  4. Promises: unmatched descriptive representation across more than two lakh panchayats; a documented shift in what local bodies spend on, towards water and local infrastructure; a documented fall in stated prejudice against women in office after exposure, which makes the measure self-liquidating if it holds; and a first route into public life.
  5. Limitations: sarpanch pati, the proxy exercise of office; rotation destroying incumbency; seats without powers, since 243G is permissive and money is transferred; the asymmetry with permanent officials; State disqualifications under 243F that fall hardest on the intended beneficiaries; and the gap between holding a seat and participating.
  6. The conclusion to write: a necessary condition, plainly not a sufficient one, and the practices that defeat it decline the longer it lasts, which is an argument for continuing it rather than against it.
munotes.in495

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Test yourself

1. What exactly did the 73rd and 74th Amendments reserve for women? Not less than one third of the total number of seats to be filled by direct election in every panchayat and every municipality, under articles 243D(3) and 243T(3), including within that third the seats reserved for women of the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. Not less than one third of the seats reserved for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes, for women of those communities, under articles 243D(2) and 243T(2). And not less than one third of the total number of offices of chairperson at each level, under articles 243D(4) and 243T(4). Seats and offices so reserved may be allotted by rotation to different constituencies and panchayats. Because the words are "not less than", the one third is a floor and a State may reserve more, and several have legislated for one half.

2. Why is the women's reservation in local bodies constitutionally different from the reservation for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes? Because of article 243D(5). That clause provides that the reservation of seats for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes under clauses (1) and (2), and the reservation of chairperson offices under clause (4) other than the reservation for women, ceases on the expiration of the period specified in article 334. The reservation for women is expressly carved out of the sunset, and in K. Krishna Murthy v. Union of India the Supreme Court observed that there is no such time limit for reservations in favour of women, implying that they will operate in perpetuity. The Court also recorded that the challenge to the women's reservation was given up in the course of argument, so it has never been seriously contested.

munotes.in496

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

3. Set out the promises the reservation has delivered. First, descriptive representation on a scale no other measure has achieved, with a third of the seats and a third of the chairperson offices in more than two lakh village panchayats and every municipality held by women continuously since the mid nineteen nineties. Second, a change in what local bodies do: research on Indian panchayats reports that bodies headed by women give more attention to drinking water, to village roads and paths, and to services whose burden falls on women. Third, and most significantly, a change in what voters believe: repeated exposure to women heading local bodies is associated with a decline in the stated view that women are unsuited to public office and with greater willingness to elect them to unreserved seats, which would make the measure self-liquidating over time. Fourth, a first route into public life for women whose households had never held formal authority, some of whom go on to contest unreserved seats.

4. Set out the limitations. The proxy, known in ordinary speech as sarpanch pati or pradhan pati, in which a male relative exercises the office of the elected woman, because the reservation changed who may hold office without changing the land, the literacy or the customs that decide who speaks. Rotation, which is fair between constituencies but destroys incumbency every five years and discards the experience that makes an elected member effective. The weakness of the office itself, since article 243G is permissive and money comes largely from State transfers, so a woman may preside over a body with little to decide. The asymmetry with the permanent officials, who are usually men, usually permanent, and always better acquainted with the rules than a first term member. State disqualifications under article 243F, such as educational or family size conditions, whose effect falls hardest on the households the reservation was meant to reach. And the gap between a reserved seat and actual participation, which is why the Forest Rights Act had to speak of full and unrestricted participation of women.

munotes.in497

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

5. Compare the local reservation with the Constitution (One Hundred and Sixth Amendment) Act, 2023. Articles 330A and 332A, inserted in 2023, reserve as nearly as may be one third of the directly elected seats in the House of the People and in the Legislative Assemblies of the States for women, with one third of the Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe seats for women of those communities, which is the same architecture as article 243D. The differences are in force and in time. Article 334A(1) provides that these provisions come into effect only after an exercise of delimitation undertaken for the purpose after the figures of the first census taken following the commencement of the Amendment are published, and that they cease on the expiration of fifteen years from that commencement; article 334A(3) provides for rotation after each subsequent delimitation. The local bodies, by contrast, have had a reservation in force since 1993, without any time limit, extending to chairperson offices as well as seats. The comparison is the strongest close to an answer: India reserved office for women in the village thirty years before it did so in Parliament, and the parliamentary reservation has still not begun.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in498

Chapter Ninety-Four

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Syllabus topic 4.3.3, "Implications for gender and social inclusion- Promises & Limitations"

In one line

The 73rd and 74th Amendments reserved seats and chairperson offices in every local body for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes in proportion to their population, and merely permitted reservation for backward classes, which the Supreme Court has since confined by a triple test, so that inclusion in local government is guaranteed for two groups, conditional for a third, and in every case delivers a seat rather than authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: articles 243D(1) and 243T(1) make reservation for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes mandatory in every panchayat and municipality in proportion to their population in the area, with one third of those seats for their women under clause (2) and chairperson offices reserved under clause (4), the reservation ceasing under clause (5) with the period fixed by article 334; articles 243D(6) and 243T(6) merely enable a State to reserve seats and chairperson offices for backward classes, and in K. Krishna Murthy v. Union of India the Supreme Court upheld those enabling clauses while holding that political backwardness is distinct from social and educational backwardness, that identification must be by a dedicated commission conducting a rigorous empirical inquiry, and that the aggregate of vertical reservation must not exceed fifty per cent except to safeguard Scheduled Tribes in Scheduled Areas, a triple test applied in Vikas Kishanrao Gawali v. State of Maharashtra to read down a uniform statewide quota; and the limitations are proxy exercise of reserved offices, rotation, the untouchability and dominance that the reservation of a seat cannot reach, and the weakness of the office itself.

The promise: what Part IX guarantees

The Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes

Articles 243D(1) and 243T(1): seats shall be reserved for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes in every panchayat and every municipality, and the number shall bear, as nearly as may be, the same proportion to the total number of seats to be filled by direct election as their population in the area bears to the total population; the seats may be allotted by rotation.

Proportional, not a fixed quota, and everywhere. In a village where a quarter of the population is Scheduled Caste, a quarter of the seats are reserved. This is what makes the guarantee real in the places where it is most needed: it is largest exactly where the excluded population is largest.

Clause (2): not less than one third of those reserved seats for women of those communities, which is chapter 930's intersection.

Clause (4): the offices of chairperson are reserved in the same proportion at each level, allotted by rotation between panchayats. In K. Krishna Murthy the Court upheld this, holding that chairperson posts cannot be equated with solitary posts in the context of public employment, which is the answer to the argument that reserving a single office in a body is reserving a single post.

munotes.in499

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Clause (5): this reservation, unlike the women's reservation, ceases with the period specified in article 334, which is now eighty years from the commencement of the Constitution.

And more than proportion, in the Scheduled Areas

Section 4(g) of PESA, 1996: reservation in the Scheduled Areas shall be in proportion to the population of the communities concerned, provided that the reservation for the Scheduled Tribes shall not be less than one half of the total number of seats, and provided further that all seats of chairpersons of panchayats at all levels shall be reserved for the Scheduled Tribes.

Section 4(h): the State Government may nominate persons of Scheduled Tribes having no representation at the intermediate or district level, not exceeding one tenth of the elected members.

This is the strongest inclusion provision in Indian local government law and it is regularly missed in answers. In the Scheduled Areas the law does not merely mirror the population; it guarantees a majority and every chairperson.

Backward classes: enabling only

Articles 243D(6) and 243T(6): nothing in this Part shall prevent a State Legislature from making provision for reservation of seats or chairperson offices in favour of backward class of citizens.

This is permission, not command, and the difference is the whole of the litigation that followed.

The limits the courts have imposed: the triple test

K. Krishna Murthy v. Union of India, (2010) 7 SCC 202

A Constitution Bench upheld articles 243D(6) and 243T(6) and, in doing so, laid down how they may be used. Its conclusions:

Reservation in local self-government rests on a distinct constitutional basis. The nature and purpose of reservation in local bodies is considerably different from that in higher education and public employment, so articles 243D and 243T form a distinct and independent constitutional basis for affirmative action and the principles evolved under articles 15(4) and 16(4) cannot be readily applied; and reservation here need not last as long as reservation there, but can be much shorter.

The clauses are valid because they are enabling. Objections about disproportionate reservation must be raised by challenging the State legislation, not the constitutional provision.

Political backwardness is a different thing. The Court accepted the distinction between selection and election: social and economic backwardness is a barrier to competing for a college place or a government post, and does not necessarily act as a barrier to political participation, so economic backwardness should not be conflated with political backwardness. The onus is on the executive to conduct a rigorous investigation into the patterns of backwardness that act as barriers to political participation, which are quite different from patterns of disadvantage in education and employment.

munotes.in500

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Identification must be separate and current. The identification of backward classes under articles 243D(6) and 243T(6) should be distinct from the identification of socially and educationally backward classes for article 15(4) and of backward classes for article 16(4); it is an executive function; and, as article 340 contemplates, dedicated commissions need to be appointed to conduct a rigorous empirical inquiry. The Court refused to rule on the quantum before it because there was no contemporaneous empirical data, only a commission report twenty years old.

Fifty per cent. The upper ceiling of fifty per cent vertical reservation in favour of Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes and other backward classes should not be breached in local self-government, exceptions being permissible only to safeguard the interests of Scheduled Tribes in panchayats located in the Scheduled Areas.

Vikas Kishanrao Gawali v. State of Maharashtra, (2021) 6 SCC 73

Section 12(2)(c) of the Maharashtra Zilla Parishads and Panchayat Samitis Act, 1961 was read as requiring a uniform twenty seven per cent of seats for other backward classes in every local body in the State, and the aggregate reservation exceeded fifty per cent in several of them.

Held: a rigid provision fixing a uniform quantum across a State cannot be sustained; the quantum must be fixed for each local body on a contemporaneous empirical inquiry; and the provision was read down, the words "shall be" preceding twenty seven per cent being construed as "may be", so that reservation for backward classes may be notified only to the extent that the aggregate for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and backward classes together does not exceed fifty per cent.

The triple test, as the Court applied it, is worth memorising in this order:

One. A dedicated commission must conduct a contemporaneous rigorous empirical inquiry into the nature and implications of backwardness as it affects local bodies within the State.

Two. The State must specify the proportion of reservation required, local body by local body, in the light of the commission's recommendations, so that it is not overbroad.

Three. In any case the reservation must not exceed fifty per cent of the total seats reserved for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and backward classes taken together.

Consequence in practice. A State that has not appointed such a commission and produced current data cannot lawfully notify backward class seats, and elections have in fact been held in several States without them for that reason. Reservation for backward classes in local bodies is therefore conditional and evidence based, which is exactly what reservation for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes under clause (1) is not.

munotes.in501

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

The limitations

1. A seat is not authority

Everything at chapter 930 applies to caste as well. A reserved sarpanch may be a proxy, dependent on the household that employs him, or unable to sign anything the dominant families oppose. Ambedkar's objection at chapter 880 is the correct frame: the reservation puts the excluded person into the room in a village whose power did not change when he entered it.

2. Rotation

Reserved seats and chairperson offices are allotted by rotation under clauses (1) and (4). It prevents any ward from being permanently reserved and it destroys incumbency on a five year cycle, so an effective member is regularly returned to a contest against those who were previously excluded from the seat.

3. The reservation cannot reach the practices

Reservation distributes seats. It does not by itself reach the separate glass, the separate street, the refusal to allow a sarpanch to sit on the chair or to hoist the flag, or the social boycott of a family that contested. Those are dealt with, if at all, by article 17, by the penal law on atrocities and by the courts, not by Part IX.

4. Backward class reservation is now the hardest to obtain

Since Gawali, it depends on a State doing empirical work it has often not done. A promise that requires the promisor to commission research before it can be performed is a weak promise, and an answer should say so plainly while accepting the Court's reason, which is that reservation without evidence of political backwardness is reservation without a justification.

5. And the office itself is weak

Article 243G is permissive, the money is transferred, and the officials are permanent. This is the limitation common to chapters 900, 930 and this one, and it is the single most important thing to say about inclusion in local government: the Constitution guaranteed the excluded a share of an office whose powers it did not guarantee.

A worked example

A zila parishad has sixty seats. The district population is fifteen per cent Scheduled Caste, ten per cent Scheduled Tribe. The State Act reserves twenty seven per cent for other backward classes in every local body in the State.

Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. Nine and six seats respectively, being as nearly as may be the proportion of population under article 243D(1). Of those fifteen, not less than five are for women of those communities under clause (2). Reserved by force of the Constitution, and no inquiry is needed.

munotes.in502

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Women. Not less than twenty of the sixty under clause (3), the five above counting within that number.

Other backward classes. Twenty seven per cent would be sixteen seats. Fifteen plus sixteen is thirty one, which is more than half of sixty. On Gawali, the statewide figure cannot be applied rigidly, the aggregate cannot exceed fifty per cent, and the backward class share must be fixed for this zila parishad on the report of a dedicated commission that has made a contemporaneous empirical inquiry. Without such a report the seats cannot lawfully be notified as reserved at all.

In a Scheduled Area the arithmetic is different. Section 4(g) of PESA requires not less than one half of the seats for the Scheduled Tribes and reserves every chairperson office at every level for them, and K. Krishna Murthy expressly preserved the Scheduled Areas as the exception to the fifty per cent ceiling.

Four different legal regimes in one worked example, and being able to separate them is what the topic tests.

Distinctions that carry marks

Scheduled Castes and Scheduled TribesWomenBackward classes
Provision243D(1), 243T(1)243D(3), 243T(3)243D(6), 243T(6)
Mandatory?YesYesNo, enabling only
QuantumProportionate to populationNot less than one third, a floorWhatever the State justifies, subject to the ceiling
Evidence requiredNone; the census settles itNoneA dedicated commission's contemporaneous empirical inquiry
Time limitArticle 334, eighty years from commencementNoneSet by State law; may be much shorter, per K. Krishna Murthy
Chairperson officesReserved, 243D(4)Reserved, one thirdMay be reserved
In Scheduled AreasNot less than one half for Scheduled Tribes and all chairperson offices, PESA s.4(g)As in Part IXSubject to the same law
PromiseLimitation
Reservation in every local body, proportionate, automaticThe seat does not carry the authority
Chairperson offices reserved, upheld in K. Krishna MurthyRotation destroys incumbency
One third of the reserved seats for women of those communitiesProxy exercise, and dependence on dominant households
PESA: a Scheduled Tribe majority and every chairperson in Scheduled AreasApplies only in the Scheduled Areas
Backward classes may be included by State lawOnly on the triple test, which many States have not satisfied

What this is NOT

It is not reservation on the article 16(4) model. K. Krishna Murthy held that articles 243D and 243T are a distinct and independent constitutional basis, that the principles evolved for education and employment cannot be readily applied, and that the duration here may be much shorter.

The fifty per cent ceiling is not absolute. The Court preserved an exception for Scheduled Tribes in panchayats in the Scheduled Areas, and PESA requires not less than one half there.

munotes.in503

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

The triple test is not hostility to reservation. The Court upheld the enabling clauses. What it required is evidence of political backwardness, on the ground that social and economic disadvantage does not by itself prove a barrier to political participation.

And inclusion in local government is not a substitute for the rest. Article 17, the atrocities law and the ordinary courts do work that no distribution of seats can do.

Quick revision

  1. Mandatory: 243D(1)/243T(1), Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in proportion to population in every local body; clause (2), one third of those seats for their women; clause (4), chairperson offices, upheld in K. Krishna Murthy as not equatable with solitary posts; clause (5), ceasing with article 334, now eighty years from commencement.
  2. Enabling only: 243D(6)/243T(6) for backward classes.
  3. K. Krishna Murthy (2010): a distinct and independent constitutional basis; political backwardness is not social and educational backwardness, and the selection/election distinction; identification must be separate from 15(4) and 16(4) and made by dedicated commissions under article 340 on a rigorous empirical inquiry; fifty per cent ceiling, except for Scheduled Tribes in Scheduled Areas.
  4. Gawali (2021): a uniform statewide quantum cannot be sustained; section 12(2)(c) read down, "shall be" construed as "may be"; and the triple test: a dedicated commission's contemporaneous rigorous empirical inquiry; the proportion fixed local body by local body; and an aggregate ceiling of fifty per cent.
  5. PESA s.4(g) and (h): in the Scheduled Areas, reservation for the Scheduled Tribes not less than one half, all chairperson offices at all levels reserved for them, and nomination of unrepresented Scheduled Tribes up to one tenth.
  6. Limitations: the seat is not authority; rotation; the reservation cannot reach the practices, which belong to article 17 and the atrocities law; backward class reservation now depends on research the State has often not done; and article 243G is permissive, so the guaranteed share is a share of a weak office.

Test yourself

1. What does Part IX guarantee for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes, and what does it merely permit for backward classes? Articles 243D(1) and 243T(1) require that seats be reserved for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes in every panchayat and every municipality, in as nearly as may be the same proportion to the directly elected seats as their population bears to the total population of the area, with allotment by rotation. Clause (2) requires not less than one third of those reserved seats to go to women of those communities, and clause (4) reserves chairperson offices in the same proportion at each level. Clause (5) applies the article 334 sunset, now eighty years from the commencement of the Constitution. For backward classes, clause (6) provides only that nothing in the Part prevents a State Legislature from making provision for reservation of seats or chairperson offices in their favour. The first is a command that operates on the census figures alone; the second is a permission that operates only if the State legislates and can justify what it has done.

munotes.in504

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

2. State the holdings in K. Krishna Murthy v. Union of India. That the nature and purpose of reservation in local self-government is considerably different from that in higher education and public employment, so that articles 243D and 243T are a distinct and independent constitutional basis for affirmative action and the principles evolved under articles 15(4) and 16(4) cannot be readily applied, and reservation here may be for a much shorter period. That articles 243D(6) and 243T(6) are valid because they merely enable, so complaints of excess must be directed at the State legislation. That claims of overbreadth could not be examined for want of contemporaneous empirical data, the onus being on the executive to investigate the patterns of backwardness that act as barriers to political participation, which are quite different from disadvantage in education and employment, with dedicated commissions to be appointed as article 340 contemplates, and the identification of backward classes for these articles being distinct from that under articles 15(4) and 16(4). That the upper ceiling of fifty per cent vertical reservation should not be breached in local self-government, exceptions being permissible only to safeguard Scheduled Tribes in panchayats in the Scheduled Areas. And that reservation of chairperson posts under articles 243D(4) and 243T(4) is valid, such posts not being equatable with solitary posts in public employment.

3. What is the triple test, and what did Gawali decide? The triple test requires, first, that a dedicated commission conduct a contemporaneous and rigorous empirical inquiry into the nature and implications of backwardness as it affects local bodies in the State; second, that the State specify the proportion of reservation required local body by local body in the light of that commission's recommendations, so that the provision is not overbroad; and third, that in any case the reservation not exceed fifty per cent of the total seats reserved for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and backward classes taken together. In Vikas Kishanrao Gawali v. State of Maharashtra the Supreme Court applied it to section 12(2)(c) of the Maharashtra Zilla Parishads and Panchayat Samitis Act, 1961, which had been read as fixing a uniform twenty seven per cent for other backward classes in every local body. It held that so rigid and uniform a provision cannot be sustained, read the words "shall be" preceding twenty seven per cent as "may be", and confined reservation for backward classes to what leaves the aggregate within fifty per cent, to be fixed for each local body on a contemporaneous empirical inquiry.

munotes.in505

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

4. What does PESA add, and why is it the strongest inclusion provision in this area? Section 4(g) of the Provisions of the Panchayats (Extension to the Scheduled Areas) Act, 1996 provides that reservation in the Scheduled Areas at every panchayat shall be in proportion to the population of the communities for whom it is sought, but with two provisos: that reservation for the Scheduled Tribes shall not be less than one half of the total number of seats, and that all seats of chairpersons of panchayats at all levels shall be reserved for the Scheduled Tribes. Section 4(h) further allows the State Government to nominate persons of Scheduled Tribes having no representation at the intermediate or district level, up to one tenth of the elected members. It is the strongest such provision because it does not merely mirror the population but guarantees a majority and every chairperson office, and because K. Krishna Murthy expressly preserved the Scheduled Areas as the exception to the fifty per cent ceiling that otherwise governs.

5. State the limitations of social inclusion through local government. That a reserved seat delivers presence and not authority, so a sarpanch from an excluded community may be a proxy, dependent on the households that employ his family, or unable to act against the dominant families, which is Ambedkar's objection to the village operating inside the institution built to answer it. That rotation, though fair between constituencies, destroys incumbency every five years. That reservation cannot reach the practices themselves, the separate glass, the separate street, the refusal to let an elected person occupy the chair or hoist the flag, and the social boycott of a family that contested, all of which belong to article 17, the law on atrocities and the courts rather than to Part IX. That backward class reservation, since Gawali, depends on empirical work many States have not done, so that elections have been held without those seats at all. And that article 243G is permissive, so what is guaranteed is a share of an office whose powers the Constitution did not guarantee.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in506

The rest of this subject

These notes are cut from the University's printed syllabus. Open the syllabus itself, or the past papers, for the same subject.

Report or request
Done!